JP7477026B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game when a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions results in a winning game. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by configuring the machine to be able to set multiple states with different degrees of advantage for the player.

JP 2001-038007 A

However, there is a need to further increase interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in playing the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 comprises an acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a judgment means for making a judgment using the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means, and an advantageous game execution means capable of executing an advantageous game advantageous to a player based on the judgment result of the judgment means becoming a specific judgment result, and further comprises a determination means for determining one of a plurality of advantageous games including at least a specific advantageous game as the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game execution means, a specific state setting means for setting a specific state advantageous to the player as a state after a game state related to at least the specific advantageous game has ended, and a predetermined specific number of times of judgments are made after the specific state has been set. a predetermined state setting means for setting a predetermined state having a lower degree of advantage than the specific state, based on a judgment result different from the specific judgment result being consecutively obtained by the judgment means; a first effect execution means for executing an effect including at least a predetermined effect mode as a predetermined effect for indicating a judgment result of the judgment means, based on the number of judgments of the judgment means after the specific state which may continue until the judgment of the specific number of times is set being more than a predetermined number less than the specific number of times and the judgment of the judgment means being executed within a range of the number of times not more than the specific number; and a second effect execution means capable of executing an effect not including the predetermined effect as the predetermined effect based on the fact that the predetermined number of judgments have been executed, and an expected value at which the advantageous game is executed and the specific state is set differs depending on whether the number of judgments of the judgment means after the specific state that can continue until the specific number of judgments have been executed is in a range of less than the predetermined number of times or in a range of more than the predetermined number of times and less than the specific number of times. The gaming machine has an operable operating means, and is configured to execute a specific operation on the operating means when a first event occurs during a predetermined period that can be set before the advantageous game is executed and a second event that is different from the first event occurs after the occurrence of the first event. The configuration is such that if a specific condition that can be established is met, the advantageous game corresponding to the specified period will not be executed, and the specified presentation can be executed, including at least a specific presentation mode that allows the player to grasp the expectation that the advantageous game will be executed and the specific state will be set, based on the judgment of the judgment means being made in the specific state, and the number of judgments of the judgment means after the specific state that can continue until the judgment of the specific number is made is set, in a range of a number equal to or less than the specified number, and a number equal to or more than the specified number and less than the specific number, and a specific display corresponding to the number of judgments of the judgment means after the specific state is set is displayed, and the specified presentation mode is a presentation mode different from the specific display .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, there is provided an acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a judgment means for executing a judgment using the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means, and an advantageous game execution means capable of executing an advantageous game advantageous to a player based on the judgment result of the judgment means becoming a specific judgment result, and further comprising : a determination means for determining one of a plurality of advantageous games including at least a specific advantageous game as the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game execution means; a specific state setting means for setting a specific state advantageous to the player as a state after the game state related to at least the specific advantageous game has ended; and a specific state setting means for setting a specific state advantageous to the player as a state after the specific state has been set, the specific state being set in succession over a predetermined specific number of judgments of the judgment means. a predetermined state setting means for setting a predetermined state having a lower degree of advantage than the specific state based on a judgment result different from the specific judgment result; a first performance execution means for executing a performance including at least a predetermined performance mode as a predetermined performance for indicating a judgment result of the judgment means based on the fact that the number of judgments of the judgment means after the specific state that can continue until the judgment of the specific number of times is set is more than a predetermined number less than the specific number of times and the judgment of the judgment means is executed within a range of the number of times equal to or less than the specific number; and a second effect execution means capable of executing an effect not including the predetermined effect mode as the predetermined effect based on the above, and the expected value at which the advantageous game is executed and the specific state is set is different depending on whether the number of judgments of the judgment means after the specific state that can continue until the judgment of the specific number is executed is in a range of a number equal to or less than the predetermined number and a number in a range of a number greater than the predetermined number and equal to or less than the specific number, and the gaming machine has an operable operating means, and is established by performing a specific operation on the operating means when a first event occurs during a predetermined period that can be set before the advantageous game is executed and a second event that is an event different from the first event occurs after the occurrence of the first event. The configuration is such that if a specific condition that can be obtained is met, the advantageous game corresponding to the specified period will not be executed, and the specified presentation can be executed, including at least a specific presentation mode that allows the player to grasp the expectation that the advantageous game will be executed and the specific state will be set, based on the judgment of the judgment means being made in the specific state, and the number of judgments of the judgment means after the specific state that can continue until the judgment of the specific number is made is set, in a range of a number equal to or less than the specified number, and a number equal to or more than the specified number and less than the specific number, and a specific display corresponding to the number of judgments of the judgment means after the specific state is set is displayed, and the specified presentation mode is a presentation mode different from the specific display .

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the operation of the operation unit as viewed from the rear side. 1A is a schematic diagram of an operating unit in a closed state as viewed from above, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of an operating unit in an open state as viewed from above. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the display area of the third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of a display mode when entering a time-saving state, displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of a display mode during a time-saving state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display mode when small win A is won during the time-saving state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display mode when small win B is won during the time-saving state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. A figure showing the contents of the status display mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that emphasizes a right hit among the small win A game screens displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the ball wins after (a) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that emphasizes a right hit during small win B play displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the ball wins after (a) is displayed. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters in the first embodiment. FIG. 2A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in a main control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 2B is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number table in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 1 random number table in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning type selection table in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving granting table in the first embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of a time-saving variation pattern table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of an open scenario table in the first embodiment. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a state display selection table in the first embodiment, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a final state display selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. 11A to 11F are timing charts showing the flow of a small win game when the small win A is won in the first embodiment. 11A to 11F are timing charts showing the flow of a small win game when the small win B is won in the first embodiment. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device according to a first embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating images displayed when the power is turned on. 1A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface A, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win start setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving update process for small wins executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a time-saving count update process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a V inlet passing process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a V passing process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning-related process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing at the end of a jackpot executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a time-saving update process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win related update processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing a performance setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing a stop type command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing a rear image change command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing an error command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a win-related command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing the big win end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the small win start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing the small win end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V entrance pass command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing V performance command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing instruction command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a performance-related command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when a jackpot ends, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when a time-saving state is entered, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the second embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when left-hand play is started during the time-saving state displayed on the third pattern display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when right-hand play is started during the time-saving state displayed on the third pattern display device in the second embodiment. A figure showing an example of a display mode for right-hit play during a time-saving state displayed on the third pattern display device in the second embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the time-saving game content during the time-saving state in the second embodiment. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in a main control device in the second embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a main control device in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 1st winning random number 2 table in the second embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 1 random number 2 table in the second embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 2 table in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 1st winning type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving grant 2 table in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern 2 table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern 2 table in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection table in the second embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 small win type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 small win type selection 2 table in the second embodiment. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. FIG. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the hold display selection table set in the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the game flow of a pachinko machine in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern change processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a second time-saving count update process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the second embodiment; A flowchart showing the start winning process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a second read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a second embodiment; 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. A flowchart showing winning information related processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing a game status setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing a game content determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. A flowchart showing a hold display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. A flowchart showing variable display setting process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the performance setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing various counter update processing 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in a third embodiment. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of a display mode during a time-saving state displayed on the third pattern display device in the third embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the end of the time-saving state displayed by the third pattern display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during the time-saving state displayed by the third pattern display device in the third embodiment. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of a display mode during a time-saving state displayed on the third pattern display device in the third embodiment. A figure showing an example showing the number of time-saving times during a time-saving state displayed on the third pattern display device in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in a main control device in a third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 1st winning random number 3 table in the third embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 1 random number 3 table in the third embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 3 table in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving grant 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the opening scenario 3 table set in the ROM in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. FIG. A schematic diagram showing the contents of a time-saving remaining period discrimination table set in a ROM in a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the game flow of a pachinko machine in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process 3 executed by an MPU in a main control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern variation processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win control process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 3 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. A flowchart showing the performance setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving remaining period determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a definite change determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device when time-saving A is set as the time-saving state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device when time-saving B is set as the time-saving state in the fourth embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of the display mode of the time-saving number correction effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the fourth embodiment. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in a main control device in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a main control device in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 1st winning random number 4 table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 4 table in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 1st winning type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of table 4 of variation pattern in the fourth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of a normal variation pattern table in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving A fluctuation pattern table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving B fluctuation pattern table in the fourth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. FIG. A schematic diagram showing the game flow of a pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern variation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the first special pattern jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the first special pattern change pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a game status update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing a second special pattern jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 deviation variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing a second special pattern change pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 out-of-range variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing a second special pattern variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 off-axis stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the big win control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the performance setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the display time-saving count correction process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. A front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a modified example of the first embodiment. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of a display mode during a time-saving state displayed on the third pattern display device in the presentation modification example of each embodiment. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a time-saving state displayed on a third symbol display device in a modified example of each embodiment; FIG. 1B is a diagram explaining the flow of the display in the modified example of the display; A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. 13A is an enlarged front view of an upper portion of a game board in a fifth embodiment. FIG. (a) is an enlarged front view showing that the electric device provided on the game board in the fifth embodiment is in an open state, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing that the electric device provided on the game board in the fifth embodiment is in a closed state. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device when a jackpot game is started in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device that can be displayed during a jackpot game in the fifth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the time-saving game content during the time-saving state in the fifth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern 5 table in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the simultaneous fluctuation pattern table for time reduction in the fifth embodiment. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing 5 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a signal input process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. A flowchart showing frame button input monitoring and performance processing 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. A flowchart showing the performance update process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing a schematic diagram of the opening pattern of an electric accessory in the sixth embodiment. A transition diagram showing the transition destination of the game state in the sixth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a main control device in a sixth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a selection table for special drawing 1 set in the ROM in the main control device in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a selection table for special drawing 2 set in the ROM in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing a big win control process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing an ending process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment. Top view of the V winning device. A schematic diagram showing the opening pattern of a small win in the seventh embodiment. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the time-saving state of the seventh embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device when a small win is won during the time-saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device when a small win is won after the time-saving state has ended in the seventh embodiment. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in a main control device in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a main control device in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the special pattern 1 random number table in the seventh embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the special pattern 2 random number table in the seventh embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the second winning random number table in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the seventh embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the direct hit table in the seventh embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the V hit table in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving granting table in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern table in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing a mode transition method in the seventh embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing special pattern variation processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win start setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing normal pattern change processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing the big win control process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning information related processing 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process 7 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the small win start command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in an eighth embodiment. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the time-saving state of the eighth embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device at the end of the time-saving state in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a small jackpot is won with a reserved ball of the second special pattern after the time-saving state in the eighth embodiment ends. (a) is a figure showing the change over time in the presentation mode when a start winning corresponding to a small win is detected within 5 seconds from the start of fluctuation in the final fluctuation display in the time-saving state of the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing the change over time in the presentation mode when a start winning corresponding to a small win is detected 5 seconds or more from the start of fluctuation in the final fluctuation display in the time-saving state of the eighth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the eighth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the special pattern 1 random number table in the eighth embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the special pattern 2 random number table in the eighth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table in the eighth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the table for special 1 direct hit in the eighth embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the table for special 2 direct hit in the eighth embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the table for V hit in the eighth embodiment. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving granting table in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the regular winning type selection table in the eighth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a method of transitioning modes in a pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing the special pattern variation process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving count update process 8 executed by an MPU in a main control device in the eighth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing normal pattern change processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing 8 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. A flowchart showing the performance update process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 8 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning information related processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. A flowchart showing a stop command processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving update process 8 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. A flowchart showing the performance setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a switching pattern of a switching valve provided in a distribution device in the ninth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving granting table in the ninth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a method of transitioning modes in a pachinko machine in the ninth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a start-up process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating that the expectation level of a special probability state is set is high in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating that the expectation level of a special probability state is set is low in the tenth embodiment. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in a main control device in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a main control device in the tenth embodiment. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first winning random number table in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first winning type selection table in the tenth embodiment. 10(a) is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the table for special 1 hit in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the table for special 2 hit in the tenth embodiment. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a fluctuation pattern table in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of a normal table in the tenth embodiment. 10(a) is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time-saving table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the limit-reaching table in the tenth embodiment. 23A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving granting table in the tenth embodiment; FIG. A schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in the tenth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a method of transitioning modes in a pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. 10A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in a voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the rear mode lottery table in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process 10 executed by an MPU in a main control device in a tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the first special pattern jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the first special pattern change pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a game status update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing during the first special pattern variation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the second special pattern jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the second special pattern change pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing during execution of the second special pattern variation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the big win control process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing a variable display setting process 10 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process 10 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in a modified example of the tenth embodiment. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of a normal table in a modified example of the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of a limit-reaching table in a modified example of the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving granting table in a modified example of the tenth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in a modified example of the tenth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the eleventh embodiment. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device during the seventh time reduction in the time-saving state of the 11th embodiment. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device during the eighth time-saving state of the 11th embodiment. A figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device during the 10th time of time-saving in the time-saving state of the 11th embodiment. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device when a specific number or more of special pattern 2 reserved numbers are obtained in the time-saving state of the 11th embodiment. This figure shows an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device when a small jackpot is won without special pattern 2 being reserved in the time-saving state of the 11th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number table in the 11th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving granting table in the 11th embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the normal fluctuation pattern table in the 11th embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern table in the 11th embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. 16A to 16E are diagrams showing a schematic diagram of the flow of change in the expected probability of winning the number of reserved balls in Special Chart 2 in the time-saving state of the 11th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 11 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning information related processing 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 winning processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. A flowchart showing the pre-termination period setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the process 11 at the end of a big win executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. A flowchart showing the small win start command processing 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a stop command process 11 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the performance setting process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. A flowchart showing the first performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. A flowchart showing the second performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 1 to 81, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, Fig. 3 is an enlarged view of the lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front, Figs. 4 to 7 are schematic diagrams showing the structure of a V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 8 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11, whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having numerous ball entry ports 63, 64, 640 through which numerous nails and balls can enter is removably attached from the back side to the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is equipped with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. The details of the numerous ball entry ports provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top and extends out to the front, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 9). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) or when changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks due to the built-in LEDs lighting up or blinking, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that a reach is being reached just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating an illumination unit such as an LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 in the pachinko machine 10.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

Specifically, it is configured so that a ball fired with a firing intensity of 90% to 100% always passes through the right region of the variable display unit 80, a ball fired with a firing intensity of 40% to 50% always passes through the left region of the variable display unit 80, and most of the balls fired with a firing intensity of 50% to 60% pass through the left region of the variable display unit 80, with some passing through the right region of the variable display unit 80. Also, it is configured so that most of the balls fired with a firing intensity of 70% to 90% pass through the right region of the variable display unit 80, with some passing through the left region of the variable display unit 80.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, a general winning port 63, a first ball winning port 64, a second ball winning port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., to a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the periphery of the board is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first ball winning port 64, the second ball winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see Figure 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61, also made of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62, is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 9) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in Figure 2), which prevents a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in Figure 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and is bounced back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of FIG. 2), the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37a and 37b display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the first pattern display device 37a is activated, whereas when the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640, the first pattern display device 37b is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in time-saving or normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which the time-saving mode is set as the game mode after the jackpot game ends) or a normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the game mode after the jackpot game ends is set as the normal mode), or a miss, and indicate the number of reserved balls by their lighting states. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The LEDs are configured to have different light colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can indicate various game modes of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery), and if it judges that a jackpot has been won, it also judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that are judged here include a 15R time-saving jackpot (15R time-saving jackpot) in which the jackpot game has 15 rounds and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended, a 5R time-saving jackpot (5R time-saving jackpot) in which the jackpot game has 5 rounds and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended, and a 5R normal jackpot (5R time-saving jackpot) in which the jackpot game has 5 rounds and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended.

In addition, in some cases where the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a miss rather than a jackpot as described above, a small prize is prepared which gives the player fewer benefits than the jackpot described above (for example, a benefit of opening the V winning device 650 for only one round). The first pattern display device 37a, 37b not only shows whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not (or whether it is a small prize or not) as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but if it is a jackpot, a pattern according to the type of jackpot is displayed.

Here, a "15R time-saving jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "5R time-saving jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5. Also, a "5R normal jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a normal state without transitioning to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5.

In other words, this pachinko machine 10 is configured to provide one of the following jackpot games when a special symbol jackpot is won: a "15R time-saving jackpot" that can provide the player with the most bonuses, a "5R time-saving jackpot" that can provide the next most bonuses, and a "5R normal jackpot" that can provide the player with the fewest bonuses of all jackpot games. This allows the player to play in the hope that, even if a jackpot is won in the lottery for a special symbol, the jackpot game that provides the most bonuses will be provided out of the jackpot games that have different bonuses that can be provided.

In this embodiment, the size of the bonus given to the player is defined according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game) and the content of the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends. However, without being limited to this, the size of the bonus given to the player may be defined using conditions other than those mentioned above, or the content of the jackpot game may simply be changed so that different bonuses are given without defining the size of the bonus.

The "time-saving state" is a game state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is the same as in the normal state, but the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, as an added value (benefit) given to the player after the jackpot ends. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, in this embodiment, the change time of the second symbol is made shorter than in the normal state, and the operation mode of the electric device 640a that is operated when the lottery result of the second symbol is a hit is set so that the period during which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. Note that other configurations may be used to set a game state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and only a part of the above-mentioned settings may be used, or the hit probability of the second symbol may be set higher than in the normal state in addition to the above-mentioned contents.

Furthermore, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the condition for terminating the "time-saving state" is that the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state when either of the following termination conditions is met: the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol change (total number of times the symbol changes) reaches a first predetermined number (100 times) (first termination condition), or the number of times the small jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery reaches a second predetermined number (for example, 1 time) (second termination condition). In this way, by providing multiple termination conditions for transitioning the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state and transitioning from the time-saving state to the normal state when any of the multiple termination conditions is met, it is possible to set multiple timings for the time-saving state to end, and the player can play while feeling excited about how long the time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, will continue.

In addition, in this embodiment, multiple small prize types (e.g., small prize A to small prize C) are prepared as small prizes that can be won in the special pattern lottery, and the number of times the second ending condition is met is set differently for each small prize type. By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult to predict whether the time-saving state will end based only on the number of small prizes won during the time-saving state, so the player can be constantly tense while playing the time-saving game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened during a small win game, and a big win (so-called two-type win) is awarded when the ball passes through the specific area during a small win game (when the V switch 650e3 provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, which is the specific area, detects the ball) (see FIG. 6). In addition, as will be described in detail later, the expectation of the ball passing through the specific area during a small win game (V winning expectation) is configured to differ depending on the type of small win that is won. And, the number of times that the second end condition set for each small win type is met (number of small wins) is configured to be less for the small win type in which a small win game with a high V winning expectation is executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to associate the expectation of winning a V to obtain a two-type win when a small win is won during time-saving play with the anxiety that the time-saving mode may end, making the player more motivated to play.

In this embodiment, the number of times the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) change is set to the first predetermined number (100 times) as described above as the end condition (first end condition), but other end conditions may be set for the number of times the special symbols change. For example, the time-saving state end condition may be established when the number of times only the first special symbol changes reaches a third predetermined number (e.g., 50 times) or when the number of times only the second special symbol changes reaches a fourth predetermined number (e.g., 80 times). Also, only some of the many end conditions described above may be used, or they may be combined as appropriate.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged, through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 63. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 (start winning), and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball into the normal pattern start hole (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 9), so that, for example, three pattern rows, left, center, and right, are displayed (see FIG. 10). Each pattern row is composed of multiple patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are scrolled vertically for each pattern row, so that the third patterns are variably displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 displays decorative images according to the display of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, while the display of the game status in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9) is performed by the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b.

In other words, the third pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) on the third pattern display device 81 in correspondence with the period (dynamic display period) during which the first pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the third pattern is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode according to the lottery result of the special pattern in correspondence with the timing at which the first pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the lottery result of the special pattern on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b.

In other words, when the discrimination condition (a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640) is met, the discrimination means discriminates (a lottery for a special symbol is executed), and the identification information (third symbol) is dynamically displayed (variably displayed) until a predetermined dynamic display period has elapsed, after which the identification information (third symbol) is displayed stationary in a display mode (combination of symbols) that indicates the discrimination result of the discrimination means (the lottery result for the special symbol). This allows the player to understand the lottery result for the special symbol by understanding the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

The third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 may have a display mode corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery, and may be a display mode corresponding to part of the special pattern lottery result (for example, only the result of the win/loss judgment such as a big win or a miss), or may be a display mode corresponding to the details of the special pattern lottery result (for example, the type of big win that was won). In addition, if there are three types of lottery results (for example, a big win, a small win, and a miss) as the lottery result of the special pattern, the display mode of the third pattern may be a display mode indicating that the lottery result of the special pattern is one of two specific types (for example, a big win or a small win) of the three types of lottery results mentioned above.

In addition, instead of the display device used in this embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel, or multiple display devices may be provided on the pachinko machine 10.

The second symbol display device 83 performs a dynamic display (variable display) in which a "○" symbol and an "X" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 displays a static "○" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device 83 displays a static "X" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a "circle" symbol), the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is activated (protrudes) for a predetermined period of time. As will be described in detail later, the electric device 640a is changed to an activated state, allowing the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set to be shorter in the time-saving state than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the time-saving state, the second symbol changes display in a short time, so more winning draws can be held than in the normal state. This increases the chances of winning in the winning draw, giving the player more opportunities to activate the electric device 640a of the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, the time-saving state can be made a state in which it is easier for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the second symbol (normal symbol) is hit during the time-saving state, the period during which the electric device 640a is operated (the period during which the electric device 640a is protruded to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is longer than when the second symbol (normal symbol) is hit during the normal state. This makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state.

The configuration for making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state is not limited to the above, and may be configured to increase the probability of winning the second symbol, or to increase the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win. In addition, if the time-saving state is made easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the operating pattern of the electric device 640a, the time it takes for the second symbol to change may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change is set shorter during the time-saving state than during normal play, the probability of winning may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, in the case where the time required for the second symbol to be displayed is varied according to the set game state, and the opening time and number of times of the electric role 640a are varied, the time for displaying the second symbol to be displayed may be determined according to the game state set at the time when the display of the second symbol to be displayed is started, and the opening time and number of times of the electric role 640a may be determined according to the game state set at the time when the display of the second symbol to be displayed is stopped and the second symbol indicating a win is displayed (the winning game of the second symbol, i.e., the timing when the electric role 640a is operated). By configuring in this way, for example, when the second symbol that started to be displayed during the time-saving state is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a win during the normal state, the electric role 640a can be operated with the operation pattern corresponding to the normal state. Therefore, the set game state and the operation pattern of the electric role to be executed can be more accurately associated.

The relationship between the game state, the time the second symbol changes, and the operation pattern of the electric device 640a may be specified other than as described above. For example, if it is determined that the time-saving state is set as the game state at either the timing when the second symbol starts changing or the timing when the electric device 640a starts operating, the operation pattern of the electric device 640a may be configured to set an operation pattern that is advantageous to the player (an operation pattern executed during the time-saving state).

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is attached to the game board 13 on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80 as shown in FIG. 2, and is configured to allow some (most) of the balls that are launched onto the game board and flow down the right side of the game board to pass through. When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device 83, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, an "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

In this embodiment, there is no function to reserve the fact that a ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. However, if there is a function to reserve the fact that a ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, for example, the ball may be reserved a maximum of four times in total, and a second symbol reserved display means for indicating the number of reserved balls may be provided in a location visible to the player (for example, a part of the third symbol display device 81).

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this embodiment, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reservation lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, in the case where the device has a function of reserving the passage of a ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67, the number of reserved times is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of normal pattern start ports (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be multiple (e.g., two). In addition, the assembly position of the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left of the variable display device unit 80. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, the second pattern reserved lamp may not be lit.

A first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the first ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 2, the first ball entry port 64 has nails planted on the game board 13 so that a ball can enter the game (so-called left-handed game) more easily when the ball flows down the left side of the variable display unit 80 than when the ball flows down the right side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed to enter the ball into the first ball entry port 64.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided to the right of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b.

The first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are also prize entrances through which five balls are paid out when a ball enters the prize entrance. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be different, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

In addition, in this embodiment, the switches (first ball entrance switch, second ball entrance switch) that detect the ball that triggers the lottery for the special pattern (lottery trigger for the big win) are provided in the ball entrance, so that the lottery trigger for the special pattern can be obtained and prize balls can be obtained at the same time. However, other configurations may be used. For example, an area (gate) through which the ball can pass may be provided, and when a switch (detection means) that detects the ball passing through the area (gate) detects the passage of the ball, the lottery trigger for the special pattern may be obtained. In this case, it is preferable to provide a ball entrance that allows at least a portion of the balls that pass through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery for the special pattern to enter, and that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, five) when a ball enters. By configuring in this way, the number of times the lottery trigger for the special pattern is obtained and the number of times the prize balls are obtained can be made different, so that a variety of playability can be provided.

The second ball entrance 640 is provided with an electric device 640a. This electric device 640a is configured to be variable between a protruding state (permitted state) protruding from the game board 13 toward the player (the player in front as viewed from FIG. 2) and a waiting state (restricted state) waiting on the game board 13 side. Normally (when the second symbol is not selected), the electric device 640a is in the waiting state (restricted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the second symbol display device displays a "○" symbol as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starter hole (through gate) 67, that is, when the second symbol is selected as a winning symbol, the electric device 640a is in the protruding state (permitted state), making it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Here, the flow of balls into the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the variable display unit 80 is disposed in the approximate center of the play area of the play board 13, and the play area is divided into the left side (left-hitting area) and the right side (right-hitting area) of the variable display unit 80, and the player can adjust the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 to direct the shot ball to either the right-hitting area or the left-hitting area. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operating handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-hitting area of the play area will be referred to as a left-hitting game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-hitting area will be referred to as a right-hitting game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the second ball entrance 640, the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, and the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 that triggers the lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric device 640a are arranged in the right-hand hitting area, and the game is configured so that right-hand hitting is performed when the time-saving state is set as the game state.

To prevent the ball shot in left-handed play from entering the second ball entrance 640, a nail is planted under the variable display unit 80, and the ball is configured to not enter the second ball entrance 640 during left-handed play. By configuring it in this way, a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 to change the first special pattern can be played in left-handed play, and a game in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 to change the second special pattern can be played in right-handed play, and different playability can be appropriately provided depending on the playing method.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, a V-winning device 650 is disposed in the right-hand hitting area, with its upper surface sloping downward to the left (to the left when viewed from the front in FIG. 2), and the various mechanisms are disposed so that the ball that flows down the upper surface of the V-winning device 650 passes through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric role 640a.

When the electric device 640a is in a standby state, the ball passes through the standby electric device 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when the electric device 640a is in a protruding state, the ball that reaches the electric device 640a flows down toward the lower right (lower right direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 2). When the ball reaches the right end of the electric device 640a, it enters the second ball entry port 640, and when the electric device 640a is changed to the standby state before it reaches the right end of the electric device 640a, it enters the general winning port 63 arranged below the electric device 640a.

Furthermore, this pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 to cover the above-mentioned electric device 640a, second ball entrance 640, and general winning entrance 63. This cover member 655 has a cut processing on the surface to diffusely reflect the incident light. By providing this cover member 655, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the inside of the cover member 655 during play due to various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of playing right-handed by timing the operation of the electric device 640a.

In addition, when no game is being played (when the gaming machine is powered off), the amount of light incident on the cover member is reduced, making it easy to see inside the cover member 655 and facilitating maintenance of the pachinko machine 10. When using a configuration in which the visibility of the interior is variable using the cover member 655 in this way, the light emitting means can be shared by making the light emitting means that emits light for decorative purposes available as described above, and the number of parts that make up the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, but a dedicated light emitting means for making the interior of the cover member 655 difficult to see may also be provided.

Also, it is sufficient to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see for a predetermined period of time including the period during which the electric role 640a is operating. For example, when it is determined that the electric role 640a will be operated (i.e. when a winning normal symbol is selected by lottery), the light emitting means may be controlled so that text (e.g., "Open") informing that the electric role 640a will be operating is displayed on the surface of the cover member 655, and the displayed text may make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. This allows the player to know that the electric role 640a will be operating, while making it difficult for him or her to know the detailed timing of the operation.

Now, referring to FIG. 3, the configuration of the right-hitting area of this pachinko machine 10 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 3, of the balls shot by right-hitting play, those that pass through the through gate 67 flow down toward the area where the electric device 640a is located. To be more specific, the electric device 640a has a length of 50 mm, and is composed of a plate-like member whose upper surface allows the balls to flow down, and is arranged on the game board 13 so that it slopes downward toward the lower right (the lower right direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 3). Then, the balls that pass through the through gate 67 flow down into area a (see FIG. 3) which is within a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric device 640a.

When the ball reaches area a, if the electric device 640a is in the waiting state, it passes through the electric device 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, if the electric device 640a is in the protruding position, the ball flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a toward the right end position. Then, when the ball reaches area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric device 640a) and the electric device 640a is changed to the waiting state, the ball is configured to flow down toward the general winning port 63 provided below the electric device 640a. Finally, when the ball reaches area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric device 640a), the ball is configured to enter the second ball entrance 640.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, but in this embodiment, the period during which the electric device 640a operates continuously in the game state is configured to vary, and when the normal state is set as the game state and the electric device 640a operates, the electric device 640a changes to a waiting state before the ball flowing down on the electric device 640a in the protruding state reaches area b (see FIG. 3), and when the time-saving state is set, the electric device 640a is configured to be in the protruding position for a period sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric device 640a to reach area c (see FIG. 3).

Specifically, the operating period of the electric role 640a (the period during which it is continuously positioned in a protruding state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the time-saving state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. The electric role 640a is configured so that the flow period for the ball to flow down the area shown in FIG. 3 (the range from area a to area c) is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds (0.8 seconds in this embodiment). By configuring it in this way, even if a right-handed play is performed during the normal state, a normal pattern is won, and the ball flows down the top surface of the electric role 640a in operation, the operation of the electric role 640a ends before the ball flowing down the top surface of the electric role 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, so it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery for the second special pattern from being drawn in the normal state.

In addition, during the time-saving state, the electric device 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) it takes for a ball to flow down the top surface of the electric device 640a and reach the second ball entrance 640, making it easier for the ball that flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a, which is in the induction state (protruding state), to reach the second ball entrance 640, and making it easier to draw the second special pattern.

Furthermore, during the time-saving state, for example, a ball that reaches the electric device 640a 1.5 seconds after the electric device 640a is activated flows down the upper surface of the electric device 640a, and the operation of the electric device 640a ends when the ball reaches area b (2 seconds have passed since the electric device 640a was activated). As shown in FIG. 3, such a ball enters the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric device 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when a right-handed play is performed during the time-saving state, the ball can be guided to a different ball entry hole (the second ball entry hole 640 or the general winning hole 63) depending on the timing of the operation of the electric device 640a and the timing of the ball arriving at the electric device 640a, so that the player can continue to play right-handed games during the time-saving state.

Although the details will be described later, this pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the entry of a ball into the second ball entrance 640 is used as a trigger to execute a lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2). However, since it does not have a means for retaining and storing the entry of a ball into the second ball entrance 640 (a means for retaining and storing the right to execute the lottery for special symbol 2), even if a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 while the special symbol is being changed, the player is only given the privilege of receiving prize balls (5 balls) corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640.

As described above, the number of prize balls awarded for a ball entering the general winning port 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls awarded for a ball entering the second winning port 640 is 5. Therefore, if a lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be drawn, a ball entering the second winning port 640 can give a player a more advantageous bonus (i.e., a lottery for special symbol 2 and 5 prize balls) than a ball entering the general winning port 63. If a lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) cannot be drawn (special symbol changing), a ball entering the general winning port 63 can give a player a more advantageous bonus (i.e., 10 prize balls) than a ball entering the second winning port 640.

This allows the ball entry port into which the player wishes to enter (the ball entry port through which many bonuses can be obtained) to be changed depending on the game situation (whether or not the special symbol changes), allowing the player to enjoy right-hand play during the time-saving state. Also, in order to have balls enter both the second ball entry port 640 and the general winning port 63 during one operation of the electric device 640a, right-hand play must be continued, which increases the operation of the game.

In this embodiment, the operation period of the electric device 640a during the time-saving state is set to a period (2 seconds) sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric device 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640, so that the ball can be surely inserted into the second ball entrance 640 when the electric device 640a operates. In addition, for example, the operation period of the electric device 640a during the time-saving state may be set to a period (e.g., 0.9 seconds) slightly longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric device 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the action of stopping the ball from being shot after the ball passes through the through gate 67 during the time-saving state, and starting the ball from being shot again after confirming that the electric device 640a has operated (so-called stop shot), so that the right-handed play can be continued during the time-saving state, improving the operation of the game.

Returning to FIG. 2, we will continue the explanation. As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the ball shot by right-handed play first reaches the V winning device 650. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be explained. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which the ball can win and a closed state in which it is difficult to win, and is configured to be variable to an open state in which the ball can win at a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a by operating the opening/closing door 650f1 when the lottery result of the second special pattern is a "small win."

Moreover, as will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 25, even in some cases where a "jackpot" with a special pattern is won (jackpot type D), the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is configured to operate in the same way as in the case of winning the above-mentioned "small prize". This makes it difficult to know whether a "jackpot" with a special pattern or a "small prize" has been won when the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates.

Now, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 3 to 7. First, as shown in Figure 3, when the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in a closed state closing the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a, the ball is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 in the closed state, and a ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is in a closed state flows down the opening and closing door 650f1 toward the lower left side (the lower left side when viewed from the front in Figure 3) and is discharged toward the through gate 67. On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is in an open state (i.e., during a small win game), the ball enters the V winning device 650.

In this embodiment, the V winning device 650 is configured to open for 0.1 seconds x 12 times during a small winning game (see FIG. 25), and the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens enters the V winning device 650. The ball that enters the V winning device 650 is configured to flow down in an aligned manner toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 6(a)) while flowing down the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652. By configuring in this way, the ball can be smoothly flowed down regardless of the position of the opening and closing door 650f1 from which the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650.

In this embodiment, the period during which the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously open is set to 0.1 seconds, but any other period may be set as long as the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 during the opening period of the opening and closing door 650f1 can win the V winning device 650. Also, in this embodiment, the number of times that the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small win game is set to 12 times, but any other number of times may be set.

Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, the period from when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once to when it is opened again (interval between openings) is set to 5 seconds after the fifth and tenth openings during a small win game, and is set to 0.5 seconds at other times. This is to make it easier for a ball to enter the V winning device 650 during a small win game. Specifically, if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the time the fifth opening operation is completed during a small win game, a game guide display that emphasizes right-hand play and encourages the player to play during the interval between openings after the fifth opening operation is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The interval between openings is set longer than usual so that the ball can enter the V winning device 650 even when right-hand play is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The same control process is also executed when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the end of the 10th opening operation during a small winning game.

This configuration makes it easier for players who are not playing appropriately during small win games (players who are not playing with the right hand) to play appropriately. In this way, during a specific game (small win game) in which multiple opening actions are performed, some inter-opening interval periods are set longer than others, and if it is determined that the player is not playing appropriately, a game guide display can be displayed to encourage proper gameplay, allowing players who are playing incorrectly to play with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, a longer special inter-open interval period is set after the fifth and tenth opening operations during a small win game. In this way, by providing multiple times for the player to display the game guide display during one small win game, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play appropriately. In addition, when providing multiple times for the game guide display, it is preferable to set the notification timing for at least the second transition to a timing that a player playing normally cannot reach. That is, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, by continuously playing right-hand during a small win game, at least one ball can enter in one opening operation of the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Therefore, if a normal game (continuous right-hand play) is played, the number of winning balls (10 balls) that is the end condition of the small win game will be reached during the tenth opening operation, and the small win game will end.

In other words, the inter-open interval period that is executed after the 10th opening action during a small win game is a timing that cannot be reached if the player is playing normally (continuous right-hitting game). Therefore, by using this timing to set the timing for displaying the game guide display, an unnecessarily long special inter-open interval period will not be executed for a player playing normally (continuous right-hitting game), and the small win game can be played smoothly.

In addition, when the first special inter-opening interval period is set to the timing (after the end of the fifth opening operation) that is reached even if normal play (continuous right-hand play) is performed as in this embodiment, it is preferable to determine whether the V switch 650e3 detects a ball at the timing when the first special inter-opening interval period starts (the timing when the fifth opening operation ends) or at the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the first special inter-opening interval period (the timing when the period required for the ball that entered during the fifth opening operation to be discharged from the V winning device 650 has elapsed), and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball, a notification effect to notify that effect is displayed during the first special inter-opening interval period, and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect a ball, a game guide display is displayed as described above. This allows the special inter-opening interval period set during small winning play to be used effectively according to the game content.

Furthermore, during the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to configure the game guide display to be displayed even if the V switch 650e3 has already detected a ball. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the small win game ends without a predetermined number (10 balls) of balls entering the V winning device 650 during the small win game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 4, the V winning device 650 has an opening forming member 650b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, a base member 650c combined with the back side of the opening forming member 650b to screw the V winning device 650 to the game board 13, an LED board 650d arranged on the back side of the base member 650c and having a plurality of LEDs arranged thereon to light up the LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a back cover body 650e that holds the LED board 650d between the base member 650c, and an opening/closing door 650f1 for opening and closing a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. It is composed of an opening and closing unit 650f, a flow path cover body 650g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, a switching member 650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that engages with the switching member 650h, a back cover body 650j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 650g, a flow path solenoid 650k that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 650j and operates the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m that covers the flow path solenoid 650k from the back side and fixes it to the back cover body 650j with a screw.

Figure 5 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. Figure 5(c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and Figure 5(b) is a Lb-Lb cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. As shown in Figure 5(b), the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a, which is an opening through which the game ball can enter. The specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and has a bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball that passes through the opening is guided to the left direction of Figure 5(b). At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the winning of the game ball is arranged. The game ball that passes through this detection port 650a1 is guided to a distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in Figure 5(a).

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the opening of the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a can be changed between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot enter (is difficult to enter) by an opening/closing door 650f1 made of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll over the top of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to be retreated to the inside of the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) and retreated from within the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a.

By configuring it this way, right-hand play can be continued during time-saving play, big win play, and small win play, reducing the effort required to change the play method depending on the game status. This makes it easier to play.

In addition, when the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so the game ball can be efficiently made to win inside the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a. This makes it possible to shorten the time required for a small win game, and improve the efficiency of the game.

Figure 5(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in Figure 5(b). As shown in Figure 5(a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the sorting flow path side of the rear cover body 650e.

Next, referring to FIG. 6, we will explain the configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the rear cover body 650e are distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 and the special discharge flow path 650e2 described below.

Figure 6(a) is a rear view of the rear cover body 650e showing the state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that the game balls are sorted to the special discharge flow path 650e2. As shown in Figure 6(a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guide piece 650h2 that guides the game balls, and is pivotally supported on the flow path cover body 650g from the rear side. Here, the flow path cover body 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and is configured so that the guide piece 650h can be rotatably positioned in the sorting flow path from the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 650e2. The game ball that passes through the special discharge flow path 650e2 is detected by the V switch 650e3, which is composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball and is provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, and is discharged outside the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the above-mentioned V switch 650e3 during the small win game, the big win game is set after the small win game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting the big win game. In addition, the switching member 650h is configured to connect either the flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) through which the ball that entered the V winning device 650 during the small win can pass through the V switch 650e3, or the flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) that cannot (is difficult to pass) through the V switch 650e3, and by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to on, the flow path is switched so that the ball that entered the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 (see FIG. 6(b)).

The pachinko machine 10 used in this embodiment is configured so that the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off during normal play, and balls that have won the V winning device 650 flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. When a small jackpot is won, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to on according to the contents of the opening scenario table 202g described later with reference to FIG. 25, so that the balls that have won the V winning device 650 can flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2. In this way, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off, the state that is maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the state in which the switching member 650h is maintained so that the balls that have won the V winning device 650 flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 (see FIG. 6(a)), is provided, thereby reducing the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, the game state set after the small win game is changed depending on the flow route of the game ball that entered the V winning device 650 during the small win game, so the player's interest can be increased even during the small win game. The time required for the ball to pass from the opening (specific winning port) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is configured to be at least 1 second. By configuring it in this way, even if the ball flow route is switched by the switching member 650h after detecting that the opening and closing door 650f1 is opened even if the small win has not been won, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2.

In addition, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 650e1, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 consisting of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a ball is provided. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, if all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have not been discharged at the end timing of the small win game (the timing when the small win ending period executed after the end condition of the small win game (when a predetermined number (10) of wins have been made in the V winning device 650, or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 has ended) has elapsed), it is preferable to determine that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and to notify the outside of the abnormality or to stop the game so that the big win game or normal game does not start. This makes it possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10, causing a secondary abnormality to occur.

In this way, the game ball that enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on that, prize balls (10 prize balls for one winning ball in this embodiment) can be paid out as a bonus to the player. In addition, by using the game ball after detection, it is possible to determine whether it passes through the V switch 650e3 or not, and it is possible to determine whether a jackpot game is executed after the small jackpot game ends. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated winning port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a small win game is executed in which the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON for a different period or timing depending on the small win type (small win A to small win C) that is set when a small win is won. By configuring in this way, the expectation of the ball passing through the V switch 650e3 during a small win game (V winning expectation) can be made to differ depending on the content of the small win game executed when a small win is won. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting not only winning a small win, but also the execution of a small win game with a high V winning expectation.

Next, referring to FIG. 7, the structure of the ball flow underside of the opening and closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 7(a) is a schematic diagram showing a plan view of the state in which the opening and closing door 650f1 closes the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 7(a), the opening and closing door 650f1 of this embodiment is configured so that balls that reach the upper surface of the V winning device 650 flow from the right upper surface 650y1 of the V winning device 650 through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 along the slope of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 2), down the left upper surface 650y2, and out toward the variable winning device 65.

The upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 is provided with a first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc as delay members for delaying the flow of the balls, and is configured so that the flow period during which the balls flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 is 0.6 seconds. This flow period (0.6 seconds) is configured to be longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by small win play. By configuring it in this way, it is configured so that the balls flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 will definitely win when the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is opened by small win play.

In the state shown in FIG. 7(a), when a small winning game is executed and the opening and closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shown in FIG. 7(b) is transitioned to. FIG. 7(b) is a schematic diagram showing a plan view of the state in which the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 7(b), when the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the open state, it moves to retreat inside the game board 13, and the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is in an open state so that the ball flowing down the upper right surface 650y1 can win in the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 also wins in the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a because the opening and closing door 650f1 is positioned in the retreat position.

In addition, the V winning device 650 is provided with a first restricting member 651 and a second restricting member 652 for smoothing the flow of the balls after winning, regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a (see FIG. 2). The balls that enter the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a on the upper upstream side of the opening and closing door 650f1 are aligned in a row via the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652, and then flow down toward the detection port 650a1, which is the passage width of one ball. By providing the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652 in this way, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided below the first restricting member, it is possible to prevent the ball that enters the opening and closing door 650f1 with force from directly colliding with the detection port 650a1, and therefore it is possible to suppress the failure of the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1. In addition, a flow path (a flow path that flows down over the first and second restricting members 651 and 652) can be secured to align the balls before they pass through the detection port 650a1, which has a passage width for one ball, preventing balls from clogging the V winning device 650 and causing problems during play.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the flow period (0.6 seconds) required for a ball to flow down the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) is longer than the interval between openings (0.5 seconds) of the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) that operates in the bonus game (small prize game) that is awarded when the result of the discrimination means's discrimination (the result of the lottery for the special symbol) is a predetermined discrimination result (small prize). Therefore, the ball flowing down the variable member during the interval between openings (the timing when the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed) during the small prize game can be reliably made to win the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing.

In addition, the number of opening operations (12) in one small win game is set to be greater than the number of winning balls (10 balls) required to end the small win game, so that a predetermined number (10 balls) can be won during a small win game even if only the balls flowing down the variable member enter the V winning device 650 during the small win game. Therefore, even if one opening period (0.1 seconds) is set short, a sufficient number of winning balls can be secured. In addition, by setting one opening period long, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of balls from entering the V winning device 650 during a small win game.

As shown in FIG. 8, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 9). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 9. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing a jackpot, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on when the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, the second pattern display device, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a to the front side around the lower edge of the opening and closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 49) is immediately executed as a process during a power outage.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the first frame button 22, the second frame button 23, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating the driving parts for performance provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors input from the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 (hereinafter, when both the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 are indicated, they are referred to as frame buttons 22). When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the rear image refers to the image displayed on the rear side of the third pattern, which is the main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 according to commands sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a device drive command may be sent to the other device 228 to drive a device for effects (not shown), a voice output command may be set to cause the voice output device 226 to output a sound corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22, or a lamp output command may be set to cause the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the sound lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The sound lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the sound output from the sound output device 226 by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (Figure 49) normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 10 to 17. Figures 10(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol rows, left, center, and right, are displayed. As shown in Figure 10(a), the third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 types of main symbols imitating the numbers "0" to "9". In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are lined up (for example, "777"), and the jackpot occurs after the variable display ends. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery by the main control device 110.

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three pattern columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, center, and right. The above-mentioned third patterns are displayed in a specified order in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3, and the display changes by scrolling from top to bottom periodically for each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed stopped on the pay line L1. If the third symbol is stopped on the pay line in a jackpot symbol combination (in this first embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot animation is displayed as a jackpot.

The manner of displaying the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. The patterns displayed in the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a pattern combining an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third pattern. Furthermore, the area in which the third pattern is displayed in a variable manner may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific performance is executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the variable display area of the third pattern may be made smaller or moved to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), so that it is difficult for the player to know whether the third pattern is changing or not. In addition, the change of the third pattern may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) during the period in which the special pattern is changing, and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special pattern and the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the second special pattern are configured to be the same (including differences to the extent that the player has difficulty distinguishing between them), but the display mode or display area of the third pattern may be different to correspond to the type of special pattern that is varying.

Next, the content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 10(b). As shown in FIG. 10(b), a small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper left corner of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm2 displays a guide display pattern to guide the player in the direction to shoot the ball (play direction) (see FIG. 11(a)). In other words, in this embodiment, the small display area Dm2 is used as a guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily understand which area of the game board 13 the ball should be shot towards just by visually checking the guide display pattern displayed in the guide display area, so that a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, this pachinko machine 10 is configured to provide audio guidance using the audio output device 226 and light-emitting guidance using the lamp display device 227 when the guidance display mode displayed in the small display area Dm2 is variable. Here, the audio guidance using the audio output device 226 is a sound that indicates the display content displayed in the small display area Dm2, such as a sound indicating "right hit."

As for the light-emitting guidance using the lamp display device 227, for example, when instructing "hit right", the light emission is controlled so that multiple LEDs (not shown) used as light-emitting means are lit in sequence from left to right. With this configuration, it is easy to know which area of the game board 13 the ball should be shot towards by visually checking the lighting pattern of the light-emitting means provided on the game board 13. In addition, the player can be notified that the direction in which the ball is to be shot (play direction) has changed not only by the display content of the third pattern display device 81 but also by audio guidance and light-emitting guidance, so that the player can immediately notice that the play direction has changed.

A small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is configured to be able to simply display the variable display of the third symbol. Here, a case where a variable display is executed in the small display area Dm1 is, for example, a case where a display effect such as a performance in which a specific character performs an action or a performance that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 is executed in the main display area Dm. During the execution of the display effect, a more easily understandable effect can be provided by displaying the effect in the larger main display area Dm. Also, by simply displaying the variable display of the third symbol in the small display area Dm1 during the execution of the display effect, the player can easily understand that the variable display of the third symbol is continuing.

Although the details will be described later, the small display area Dm1 is formed of a special pattern 1 variable display area Dm1a in which the third pattern corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern is displayed, and a special pattern 2 variable display area Dm1b in which the third pattern corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern is displayed (see FIG. 11(a)). This allows the player to easily understand which special pattern the third pattern corresponding to is changing, even when a display performance is being performed in the main display area Dm. In addition, the present pachinko machine 10 uses a configuration in which the special pattern 1 variable display area Dm1a and the special pattern 2 variable display area Dm1b are formed, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to provide one variable display area in the small display area Dm1 and display only the special pattern that is being changed between the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

A small display area Dm3 is formed in the lower right of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. Details will be described later, but this small display area Dm3 is an area in which, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a specific gaming state (time-saving state), a status (state) display mode Dm3a (see FIG. 11(a)) is displayed to indicate whether or not the time-saving state will end. This allows the player to play while predicting the timing when the time-saving state will end, based on the status (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3.

Furthermore, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In this sub-display area Ds, a reserved pattern consisting of a black circle is displayed as shown in FIG. 10(b). As described above, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first pattern display device 37 is performing a variable display, the number of balls entering is reserved up to a maximum of four times. The reserved patterns displayed in the sub-display area Ds are the same number as the number of reserved balls. In this first embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is four, and the second special pattern is set so that reserved balls cannot be secured, so a maximum of four reserved patterns corresponding to the first special pattern are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed according to the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as numbers. Also, the appearance of the character may be changed according to an increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls, so that the player is visually informed of the number of reserved balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-display area Ds is configured to display a game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result for each symbol) to the player, a performance explanation mode for explaining the content of the performance display being executed in the main display area Dm, a frame button related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the results of operating it, and a win related information display mode for displaying information regarding a big win game, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds is set to differ depending on the content to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbols displayed in a stopped state corresponds to a miss and there is a reserved ball, after one second of stopped display (after the pattern determination period has elapsed), a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the reserved balls will begin. Note that if there are multiple reserved balls, the lottery will be executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball. In this way, by configuring the lottery result corresponding to one special symbol to be stopped and displayed and then to continue the stopped display state for a predetermined period of time, and then to start the next special symbol variation, it is possible to make it easier for players to understand that a new special symbol variation has begun. Note that in this embodiment, the above-mentioned pattern determination period is always set after the pattern variation time has elapsed, but a detailed explanation of this is omitted.

On the other hand, when there are no reserved balls and the third symbol, which is a combination corresponding to a missed special symbol, is displayed as a stopped symbol for one second, the third symbol continues to be displayed as a stopped symbol. This state continues until a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed or a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. If a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was displayed as a stopped symbol, a demo effect is displayed indicating that no game is being played. It is rare for a player to shoot balls continuously for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) without any balls entering either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and in most cases where the third symbol continues to be displayed as a stopped symbol for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds), this is due to the player quitting the game and no game being played on the pachinko machine 10 at all.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing, and a demo performance is started. This allows a player who is about to select a pachinko machine 10 to start playing to easily determine whether or not a game is being played based on whether or not a demo performance is being displayed. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 before the predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball is executed.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is formed as a reserved display area that displays reserved patterns that are the number of balls (reserved balls) that have entered the first ball entrance 64 and have not yet been changed. In this first display area Ds1, the first reserved pattern Dsb, the second reserved pattern Dsc, the third reserved pattern Dsd, and the fourth reserved pattern Dse are displayed in the order in which the winning information obtained when the ball entered the first ball entrance 64 was stored (in order of the oldest reserved storage timing). The reserved pattern corresponding to the currently executed change is displayed in the center of the sub-display area Ds as the executing pattern Dsa.

When the pending symbol displayed in the first display area Ds1 ends its current variable display and the next variable starts, the pending symbol corresponding to the next variable (the first pending symbol Dsb displayed on the far right when viewed from the front in FIG. 10(b)) is erased, and the remaining pending symbols (Dsc to Dse) are shifted to the right and displayed. The erased first pending symbol Dsb is then displayed as the pending symbol Dsa. This allows the player to be informed of which pending symbol the current variable display corresponds to, so that, for example, when a display mode of the pending symbol is changed to increase the expectation that the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to that pending symbol will be a jackpot (a so-called look-ahead display) is executed, the player can easily recognize that a variable display corresponding to the pending symbol whose display mode has been changed by the look-ahead display is being executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the active pattern Dsa is displayed in the direction in which each reserved pattern (first reserved pattern Dsb to second reserved pattern Dse) displayed in the first display area Ds1 moves (shifts) when a new special pattern change is initiated (to the right from the viewpoint of FIG. 10(b)). This allows the player to grasp the reserved patterns (first reserved pattern Dsb to second reserved pattern Dse) and the active pattern Dsa in a sequential order, allowing the player to easily grasp which reserved pattern the active change display corresponds to.

In this embodiment, only balls entering the first ball entrance 64 can be reserved up to four times, but the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, balls entering the second ball entrance 640 may also be reserved up to a predetermined number, or the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for balls entering the first ball entrance 64 may be different from the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for balls entering the second ball entrance 640, and the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for balls entering the first ball entrance 64 may be greater than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for balls entering the second ball entrance 640, or conversely, may be less than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for balls entering the first ball entrance 64. In addition, instead of displaying the reserved pattern in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as numbers in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the four divided areas may be displayed in a different manner (e.g., color or lighting pattern) according to the number of reserved balls. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the maximum number of reserved balls, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of reserved lamps that are lit.

The second display area Ds2 is formed on the right side of the sub-display area Ds, and displays a performance explanation to supplement the content of the performance (display performance) executed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 11(b)). In this way, by displaying multiple pieces of information displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, namely, third pattern variable display information corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, display performance information for indicating the expectation that the lottery result corresponding to the currently executed variable display of the special pattern will be a specific lottery result (jackpot win), performance explanation information that supplements the content of the display performance information, reserved pattern information indicating the reserved memory number of special patterns, and active pattern information indicating the active pattern, etc., in a predefined section (area), the player can be informed of various information displayed simultaneously in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the content of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 11 to 17. This third pattern display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first pattern display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (initial entry), this triggers the first pattern display device 37 to perform a variable display of the first special pattern or second special pattern (first pattern). Furthermore, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable display of the third pattern corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern in synchronization with the variable display of the first special pattern or second special pattern.

The third symbol is displayed in a common manner in response to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The second special symbol, which is more likely to result in a lottery result that is more favorable to the player than the first special symbol, is configured to be displayed in a variable manner in preference to the first special symbol, and is configured so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in a variable manner at the same time.

However, in this first embodiment, the second special symbol is set so that the reserved balls cannot be secured, so in effect, the special symbol changes so that the reserved balls of the first special symbol are consumed in order. However, for example, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both in a state where they can change at the timing when a new special symbol changes, that is, when the timing when a new change corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol starts coincides with the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning), the change of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority.

This reliably prevents a player from losing an opportunity to receive a favorable lottery (an opportunity to execute a lottery for the second special symbol) by executing a less favorable lottery (a lottery for the first special symbol).

The display effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 include effects that suggest whether or not various contents that can be realized based on the lottery of the special symbol are realized. Specifically, a big win suggestion effect that suggests whether or not a big win has been won by the lottery of the special symbol, a small win suggestion effect that suggests whether or not a small win that gives the player less benefits than a big win (for example, the payout of prize balls) has been won by the lottery of the special symbol, a game state transition suggestion effect that suggests that the game state will transition to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player depending on the result of the lottery of the special symbol, and a time-saving state end suggestion effect that suggests that the time-saving state will end depending on the result of the lottery of the special symbol and the variable display of the special symbol when the time-saving state is set as the game state.

In addition, the effects suggesting the results of the special symbol lottery (such as big win hint effects and small win hint effects) are executed using the period (dynamic display period) from when the third symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 until the lottery result is announced by the combination of the third symbols that are stopped and displayed. For example, during the dynamic display period, among the stopped display modes (for example, the combination "777") that indicate that the third symbols have won the big win, a reach display mode in which only some combinations are stopped and displayed (for example, a display mode in which only two of the three third symbols are stopped and displayed as "77" and the remaining third symbols are allowed to change) is displayed, and then, with the third symbols showing the reach display mode displayed in the small display area Dm1, an effect with a story-like quality is executed in the main display area Dm, and when the story is correctly completed, an effect is executed in which the third symbols are stopped and displayed as "777".

In the above example, the reach display mode refers to a state in which some of the combinations of the third symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner that matches a combination that indicates that the lottery result is a win (jackpot), but other display modes may also be used as reach display modes. For example, some of the third symbols may be displayed in a display mode dedicated to indicating a reach state, or some combinations of the third symbols may be displayed in a display mode dedicated to indicating a reach state, rather than a combination that indicates a jackpot. By configuring the system so that the player can understand that a reach state has been established by checking the stopped display mode of some of the third symbols, the player's sense of anticipation for winning the jackpot can be gradually increased, and the presentation effect can be improved.

Furthermore, this pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set a continuous performance that spans multiple special symbol variations as a performance that suggests the lottery result for the special symbol. This continuous performance is a performance that suggests to the player the lottery result for the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command sent to the voice lamp control device 113 when the winning information command is sent to indicate the various counter values (lottery result) obtained when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, by using the period until the variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed (the period during which the variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation executed before the target special symbol variation is executed).

In this way, by suggesting the lottery result of the target special symbol using the period of change of the special symbol that is executed before the target special symbol, it is possible to provide a longer-term presentation to the player and enhance the presentation effect. Also, since it is possible to execute continuous presentations without highlighting the lottery result of the special symbol (e.g., a miss) with each change, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player's motivation to play decreases.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, in addition to the effects suggesting whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or not, the system is also configured to execute an effect (time-saving state end indication effect) that suggests that the game state will change depending on the number of times the special symbol is drawn (number of times it changes). This time-saving state end indication effect is an effect that is executed continuously when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state, and is an effect that suggests the possibility that the time-saving state will end depending on the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the number of times the special symbol changes) and the number of times the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (for example, a small jackpot win).

Here, the contents of the above-mentioned time-saving state end suggestion effect will be explained. As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that an electric device 640a is attached to the second ball entrance 640, and a state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 (first state) and a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter (second state) are set according to the operating state (variable state) of the electric device 640a. Furthermore, a lottery for a second special pattern is executed based on the entry of a ball into the second ball entrance 640, and if a small prize is won, a small prize game is executed in which the V winning device 650 is opened. The V winning device 650 has a special discharge flow path 650e2 as a specific area through which a ball that has entered the V winning device 650 can pass, and a big prize (two-type win) is set when the V switch 650e3 detects that the ball has passed (flowed down) the special discharge flow path 650e2. The time-saving state that is set as the game state is advantageous to the player because it makes it easier for the electric device 640a to move (change) to the second state (a state in which the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640), so during the time-saving state, right-hand play is performed to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640.

As described above, the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is configured to end when an end condition (time-saving end condition) is met. Details will be described later, but the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to end the time-saving state (the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state) when any of the following conditions is met: a big win is won in the special pattern lottery, a special pattern variation based on the special pattern lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times), or a small win is won a predetermined number of times (e.g., 3 times) in the special pattern lottery.

In this way, by making it possible to set multiple time-saving end conditions, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time-saving state advantageous to the player will continue. On the other hand, if the player is not given any indication (notification) of whether or not the time-saving end condition has been met, or the time-saving information that is updated toward the time-saving end condition being met (for example, information indicating the number of small wins won during the time-saving state), there is a problem that the time-saving state advantageous to the player will suddenly end, causing dissatisfaction to the player.

Therefore, in this embodiment, during the time-saving state, the player is suggested (informed) as a time-saving state end indication effect whether or not the time-saving end condition has been met, and time-saving information that is updated toward the time-saving end condition being met (for example, information indicating the number of small wins won during the time-saving state), allowing the player to play while predicting the period for which the time-saving state will continue. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as the sudden end of a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, causing dissatisfaction in the player.

In addition, the above-mentioned time-saving end conditions include a time-saving end condition that is advantageous to the player (a time-saving end condition that is established by winning a big jackpot) and other unfavorable time-saving end conditions. Therefore, the time-saving end indication effect that is executed during the time-saving state does not simply execute an effect based on whether or not the time-saving end condition is established, or on the time-saving information that is updated toward the establishment of the time-saving end condition (for example, information indicating the number of small jackpots won during the time-saving state), but is configured to determine whether or not the established time-saving end condition or the time-saving end condition that is likely to be established is advantageous to the player, and execute an effect based on the result of that determination.

By configuring it in this way, the player can not only predict whether the time-saving state is about to end, but also whether the conditions for ending the time-saving state that are favorable to the player will be met, which makes the player interested in the effects that are executed (effects suggesting the end of the time-saving state) and enhances the effect of the effects.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that multiple types of small win games are executed when a small win is won in the special pattern lottery, and the expectation of two types of wins being set during the small win game is varied depending on the small win game executed (depending on the type of small win set). And, among the above-mentioned time-saving end conditions, as a time-saving end condition that is established based on winning a small win a predetermined number of times in the special pattern lottery, a number of times (the number of times that the time-saving end condition is established) is set for each type of small win that is set when a small win is won.

By configuring it in this way, when the time-saving end condition is established by winning a small jackpot with a special pattern, the time-saving state end indication effect can suggest (inform) the player whether the time-saving end condition that has been established this time is favorable to the player (a time-saving end condition that has been established because a small jackpot type that is easy to win in two types has been set) or unfavorable to the player (a time-saving end condition that has been established because a small jackpot type that is difficult to win in two types has been set). Therefore, even if the time-saving end condition is established by winning a small jackpot, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect executed in the time-saving state end indication effect.

In addition, the number of times set for each of the above-mentioned small win types (the number of times the time-saving end condition is met, set for each small win type) is configured to be set differently depending on the expectation of winning two types for each small win type. Specifically, it is configured so that the time-saving end condition is met with fewer wins for a small win type with a higher expectation of winning two types (e.g., small win A) than for a small win type with a lower expectation of winning two types (e.g., small win C).

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the time-saving state end indication effect indicates that the time-saving state will end based on the winning of a small jackpot with a special pattern immediately after the time-saving state is set, or an effect is executed indicating that the time-saving state information has been updated until just before the time-saving state ends, it becomes possible to allow the player to predict that the small jackpot won this time is a small jackpot with a high probability of winning two types. In other words, it is possible to allow the player to predict various game results based on the content of the time-saving state end indication effect and the period that the time-saving state continues, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, as the time-saving end conditions advantageous to the player, the time-saving end condition that is established when the player wins a big jackpot as described above and the time-saving end condition that is established when the small jackpot type that is easy to win is set among the small jackpot games are set, but the time-saving end conditions are not limited to this, and it is sufficient if the time-saving end condition is established among the multiple time-saving end conditions, and is more advantageous to the player than other time-saving end conditions. For example, in a gaming machine that has a function to set a special state in which the special pattern lottery executed thereafter is advantageous to the player when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) and the time-saving end condition is established, the time-saving end condition advantageous to the player may be the time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times).

Specifically, for example, by setting either a special pattern high probability state in which it is easier to win a jackpot with a special pattern or a special pattern low probability state in which it is even harder to win a jackpot, and setting either a normal pattern high probability state in which it is easier to win a jackpot with a normal pattern or a normal pattern low probability state in which it is even harder to win a jackpot, four game states are set: a normal state (low probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns), a probability variable state (high probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns), a time-saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns), and a potential probability state (high probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns), and the degree of advantage given to the player in each game state is configured so that at least the potential probability state is more advantageous to the player than the probability variable state.

Then, in the state where the probability variable state is set, the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 100 times) and the time-saving end condition is met, and only then is the potential probability state set by transitioning from the normal symbol high probability state to the normal symbol low probability state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a more advantageous gaming state to the player when the probability variable state is set and the time-saving end condition is met by the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 100 times) without winning a jackpot, and the potential probability state is set, than when a jackpot is won in the state where the probability variable state is set and a gaming state other than the potential probability state is set after the jackpot ends.

In the above example, the condition for the potential state to be set as a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set only when the time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number of times while the potential state is set is met, and the time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number is set as the time-saving end condition that is advantageous to the player. However, in addition to this, a configuration may be added to the configuration of the above example in which the potential state is set in a very small percentage (for example, 1%) of cases in which a jackpot with a special symbol is won while the potential state is set.

As a result, when a special symbol jackpot is won or the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number of times while the special symbol state is set, a potential state that is advantageous to the player can be set. In this case, the time-saving end condition that makes it easier for the potential state to be set will be the time-saving end condition that is more advantageous to the player.

The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the time-saving state end indication effect in this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to Figures 11 to 15. Figure 11(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot. As shown in Figure 11(a), when the time-saving state is set, the words "Doki Doki Rush Entered" are displayed in the main display area Dm, indicating that the time-saving state has been set. This "Doki Doki Rush" is an effect that is executed in response to the period during which the time-saving state is set, and is a notification mode for indicating to the player that the current game state is a time-saving state.

Then, the small display area (guide display area) Dm2 displays the word "Right Hit" to guide the game to be performed during the time-saving state, and notifies the player that a right-hit game should be performed during the time-saving state. During the Doki Doki Rush, the third symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and in the center of the main display area Dm, a performance is performed in which a character 801 (see FIG. 12(a)) modeled after a boy searches for a treasure box 802 (see FIG. 12(a)). Returning to FIG. 11, the explanation will be continued. In the small display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, a status (state) display mode Dm3a is displayed to indicate whether the time-saving state will end. This status (state) display mode Dm3a is configured to be variable to various display modes (see FIG. 15) depending on the determination result of whether the special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently executed special symbol variation has won a jackpot, and whether the time-saving state will end based on the currently executed special symbol variation, or whether information on the condition for ending the time-saving state based on the currently executed special symbol variation has been updated.

In FIG. 11(a), the display mode "Display Mode 1" (see FIG. 15) is displayed, which indicates that the currently executed special pattern change has not resulted in a big win or a small win. Note that the display screen shown in FIG. 11(a) is when the time-saving state is set after the big win ends, and the change of the first special pattern that was already reserved and stored when the big win was won is being executed, so the third pattern corresponding to the change display of the first special pattern is displayed in the special pattern 1 change display area Dm1a of the small display area Dm2, and the display mode "circle" of the reserved pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is displayed as the executing pattern Dsa.

Here, referring to FIG. 11(b), the display screen when there is a reserved pattern that will win the jackpot among the first special patterns (reserved patterns) that were already reserved and stored at the time of winning the jackpot will be explained. FIG. 11(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display content when there is a reserved pattern that wins the jackpot when a time-saving state is set after the jackpot. In FIG. 11(b), the winning information corresponding to the first reserved pattern Dsb includes winning information that will win the jackpot, and the display mode "display mode 3" (see FIG. 15), which indicates that a special pattern (pattern winning) will be won, is displayed as the status display mode Dm3b in the small display area Dm3.

Then, in the second display area Ds2, the words "Look forward to it" are displayed, indicating the contents of the status display mode Dm3b. Furthermore, since the state shown in FIG. 11(b) is a state in which a jackpot is won immediately after the time-saving state is set (after the special chart 1 variation has been executed three times since the time-saving state was set), it is set so that a jackpot is won while maintaining the display screen shown in FIG. 11(b) without executing the Doki Doki Rush that is executed during the time-saving state described above. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the Doki Doki Rush from being executed for only a short period of time.

In this case, the main display area Dm displays a display screen (time-saving state performance start screen) with a different display mode from the normal mode (see FIG. 11(a)) called "Doki Doki Rush Entry?". The display screen shown in FIG. 11(b) may be configured to be displayed even when the normal mode is set as the game state after the end of a jackpot game, for example. In this way, when the display mode of "Doki Doki Rush Entry!!" shown in FIG. 11(a) is displayed after the end of a jackpot game, the player can be reliably notified that the time-saving state has been set, allowing the player to play with peace of mind. Also, when the display mode of "Doki Doki Rush Entry?" shown in FIG. 11(b) is displayed after the end of a jackpot game, the player can be notified that either the normal mode has been set after the end of the jackpot game or that a jackpot will be won in the reserve, giving the player a sense of expectation.

In addition to the above configuration, a discrimination means may be provided to discriminate whether there is winning information for a jackpot among the reserved symbols present after the end of a jackpot game, and if the discrimination means determines that there is winning information for a jackpot game, the same display mode (for example, the characters "Big Chance") may be displayed regardless of the game state (normal state or time-saving state) that is set after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, the jackpot information determined by the discrimination means described above may be analyzed, the game state that is set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the analyzed jackpot information (pre-read jackpot information) may be determined, and the display mode after the end of the jackpot game may be set based on the result of the discrimination.

In this case, for example, if it is determined that a time-saving state will be set after the end of a jackpot game corresponding to the pre-read jackpot information, the display mode after the end of the jackpot game may be configured to display the text "Doki Doki Rush Entered!!" (i.e., a display mode that notifies that a time-saving state has been entered), and if it is determined that a normal state will be set after the end of a jackpot game corresponding to the pre-read jackpot information, the display mode after the end of the jackpot game may be configured to display the text "Doki Doki Rush Entered?" (i.e., a display mode that does not notify that a time-saving state has been entered).

By configuring it in this way, if the reserved symbols that exist after the end of the current jackpot game contain winning information for a jackpot, the display mode to be displayed after the end of the current jackpot game can be set based on the game state that will be set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot (next jackpot) included in the reserved symbols, rather than the game state that will be set after the end of the current jackpot game. Therefore, for example, if a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the end of the current jackpot game, the jackpot included in the reserved symbols is won during that time-saving state, and a normal state that is less advantageous to the player than the time-saving state is set after the end of that jackpot game, a display mode that does not notify the player that the time-saving state has been set is displayed, so it is possible to prevent the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player from ending in a short period of time, which would reduce the player's motivation to play.

Here, the display mode of the status display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3 will be described with reference to FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram for explaining the types of status (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the small display area Dm3 is configured to be able to display nine types of status display modes, and the status display mode is set and displayed in the small display area Dm3 according to the lottery result of the special symbol being changed (winning a big win, winning a small win) and the contents updated by the change of the special symbol in response to the time-saving end condition that ends the time-saving state when it is established (number of times a small win is won, number of times a special symbol changes).

This allows the player to predict how the time-saving state will progress due to the ongoing special pattern changes by understanding the status display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3, providing an easy-to-understand game experience.

To give a specific explanation of the status display modes displayed in the small display area Dm3, "Display Mode 1 (first display mode)" is a display mode displayed as a "white circle" (see FIG. 11(a)). This "Display Mode 1" is the display mode that is set when a big win has not been won and the conditions for the time-saving state to end and the contents related to the conditions for the time-saving state to end (for example, the number of special pattern variations and the number of small wins) have not been updated to a predetermined stage. When this "Display Mode 1" is displayed, the player can be sure that the time-saving game (time-saving state) will not end with the current special pattern variation, and can look forward to the next and subsequent special pattern variations with peace of mind.

Next, "Display Mode 2 (second display mode)" is a display mode displayed with a "black circle". This "Display Mode 2" indicates that a small win has been won, and is a display mode that is set when the conditions for ending the time-saving state and the conditions for ending the time-saving state have not been updated to a predetermined stage. Here, as described above, this embodiment is configured so that a big win (two types of wins) is set in response to a small win game, and the expectation of setting a two types of win (the probability that the V switch 650e3 will detect a ball during a small win game) is configured to differ depending on the content of the small win game being played (the type of small win of the small win that was won).

This "display mode 2" notifies the player that he or she has won a small prize, but does not notify the type of the small prize that has been won, so the player will play the game hoping that the type of the small prize that has been won this time will be a type of small prize that is easy to set as a two-type prize (for example, small prize A). Also, since the player will play the game while feeling that there is a possibility that the end condition of the time-saving state will be updated (updated within the range of the stage before the specified stage is reached) due to the small prize being won, the player can play the game with a sense of tension.

As described above, in this embodiment, the multiple small prize types are set as a small prize type for which two types of wins are more likely to be set (small prize A) and small prize types for which two types of wins are more difficult to set than small prize A (small prize B, small prize C), and the number of times that the small prize type is likely to be won is set as a termination condition for the time-saving state that can be established based on a small prize win (time-saving termination condition). In other words, the time-saving termination conditions are set differently for each of the multiple small prize types depending on the degree of advantage to the player, and the more advantageous the lottery result is for the player, the more likely the time-saving termination condition is to be established.

Therefore, for example, if "Display Mode 2" is displayed immediately after the time-saving state is set, it is predicted that one of all the small prize types has been won, and if "Display Mode 2" is displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the time-saving state was set (after multiple small prizes have already been won during the time-saving state), it is predicted that a small prize with a large number of wins set as the time-saving end condition has been won, in other words, a small prize with a small prize type for which it is difficult to set two types of wins, has been won. In this way, the result of the current special pattern lottery can be predicted in detail based on the type of display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the elapsed time of the time-saving state, providing the player with the fun of making predictions.

"Display mode 3 (third display mode)" is a display mode displayed as a "sun symbol using a white circle" (see FIG. 11(b)). This "display mode 3" is a display mode that indicates that a special symbol jackpot (pattern win) has been won. This makes it possible to notify the player of the trigger that set the jackpot (jackpot game) in an easy-to-understand manner when a jackpot (jackpot game) is set by multiple triggers, as in this embodiment.

"Display mode 4 (fourth display mode)" is a display mode displayed with "chance in a white circle" (see FIG. 14(a)). This "display mode 4" is the display mode that is set when a small win type B or small win C (i.e. a small win with a low expectation of winning two types) is won, and the conditions for the time-saving state to end and the conditions for the time-saving state to end are updated to a specified stage.

"Display mode 5 (fifth display mode)" is a display mode that is displayed with the words "Last Chance in a white circle" (see FIG. 13(a)). This "Display mode 5" is the display mode that is set when a small win is won and the conditions for ending the time-saving state are met. When this "Display mode 5" is displayed, the player is notified that the time-saving conditions have ended.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to inform the player before the small win game is executed (before the special symbol indicating that a small win has been won is stopped and displayed) that the time-saving state will end unless a two-type win is obtained in the small win game corresponding to the small win that has been won this time, so that the player can be more motivated than usual to play the small win game.

"Display mode 6 (the sixth display mode)" is a display mode displayed with "big pinch text in a white circle" (see FIG. 14(b)). This "display mode 6" is a display mode that is set when the small prize C, which has the lowest expectation of winning two types of small prizes, is won and the conditions for the time-saving state to end are met. "Display mode 6" is intended to suggest to the player that the time-saving state will end due to the small prize (small prize C) being won. In this way, by suggesting to the player that the current special pattern variation is another time-saving variation during the time-saving state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, suddenly ends, confusing the player.

"Display mode 7 (7th display mode)" is a display mode that is displayed with "Super hot" in a white circle. This "Display mode 7" is the display mode that is set when small prize A, which has the highest chance of winning two types, is won among the small prize types, and the conditions for the time-saving state to end are met.

In the first embodiment, the time-saving end condition (number of wins end condition) that can be met when a small win is won may be set to "1 time" for the small win A with the highest expectation of winning two types, so "display mode 7" is described as being set when the condition for ending the time-saving state is met, but it is not limited to this and may be used as a display mode to only show that the small win A with the highest expectation of winning two types has been won out of multiple small win types.

"Display mode 8 (eighth display mode)" is a display mode that is displayed with the word "end" in a white circle. This "display mode 8" is the display mode that is set when the time-saving end condition (variation count end condition) is met, which is met when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number of times without winning a big or small prize. By displaying this "display mode 8", it is possible to reliably notify the player of the timing when the time-saving state will end.

In addition, in this first embodiment, if the winning count end condition and the variable count end condition are satisfied by the same special pattern change (lottery) as the conditions for terminating the time-saving state, it is configured to determine that the variable count end condition has been satisfied. In other words, if the small win A is won in the special pattern change in which the variable count end condition is satisfied, "display mode 8" is displayed in the small display area Dm3.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be informed that he or she has won a small prize after making him or her believe that the time-saving mode has ended, providing the player with an element of surprise.

"Display mode 9 (9th display mode)" is a display mode displayed as "the character ?" in a white circle. This "display mode 9" is a display mode that is set regardless of the results of the special symbol lottery or update information on the time-saving state. This "display mode 9" is a display mode that is set by a predetermined lottery, regardless of the results of the special symbol lottery or the progress of the time-saving state. In this way, by making it possible to set a display mode that does not notify the player of the game state or game situation, it becomes unnecessary to provide the player with information (update information) regarding the current special symbol variation each time a special symbol variation is executed.

In the first embodiment, by displaying "display mode 9," it is made difficult for the player to understand (make it difficult for the player to grasp) the game content during the time-saving state. However, it is also possible to provide a determination means for determining whether or not to display modes 1 to 9 in the small display area Dm3, and to determine the display content based on the result of that determination.

Next, the content of DokiDoki Rush executed by the third symbol display device during the time-saving state will be explained with reference to FIG. 12. FIG. 12(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the content of DokiDoki Rush executed during the period when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and is a schematic diagram showing an example of the content of the content displayed while the second special symbol that has won the small win with small win A set as the small win type is fluctuating.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), in the small display area Dm1, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the special symbol 2 variable display area Dm1b, and a "triangle mark" indicating the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is displayed as the active symbol Dsa. This state is a state in which the second special symbol starts to vary due to the ball shot by right-handed play entering the second ball entrance 640 after all the reserved first special symbols (special symbol 1) in the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11(a) have been consumed (when there is no reserved memory of a new special symbol to be executed).

The details will be described later, but in this embodiment, when the small prize A is won once, the time-saving end condition (the condition for ending the number of wins) is met, so that the special pattern change this time causes "display mode 5" to be displayed as the status (state) display mode Dm3a indicating that the small prize has been won and the time-saving end condition has been met, and the words "treasure chest found" are displayed in the second display area Ds2, suggesting that the small prize has been won.

When the second special symbol has stopped displaying as a symbol indicating a small win after the time for changing the second special symbol (dynamic display period) has elapsed, the display contents shown in FIG. 12(b) are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 12(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents when the second special symbol, which is being changed in FIG. 12(a), stops displaying. As shown in FIG. 12(b), the third symbol is stopped displaying in the combination "341" to indicate the lottery result of the second special symbol (small win) in the special symbol 2 changing display area Dm1b of the small display area Dm1, the treasure chest 802 is enlarged and displayed in the main display area Dm, and the words "The contents (of the treasure chest) are..." are displayed in the second display area Ds2 to guide the future development of the performance.

This treasure chest 802 is used to indicate the result of the small win game that is executed immediately afterwards, and depending on the result of the small win game, an effect is executed in which the treasure chest 802 is opened or not. The content of the effect executed depending on the result of the small win game will be described later with reference to Figures 13(a) and 13(b).

Now, referring to FIG. 13(a), the contents of the presentation when a two-type win is obtained during a small win game in which a small win A is set will be described. FIG. 13(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents when a two-type win is obtained (V winning) during a small win game in which a small win A is set and executed during a time-saving state. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when a V win is obtained during a small win game (when a ball that has won the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 and the V switch 650e3 detects the ball), a presentation in which the treasure box 802 is successfully opened is executed, and a V display 803 is displayed indicating that a big win game is set. Then, the word "Big Win" is displayed in the second display area Ds2, indicating that a big win (two-type win) has been obtained.

On the other hand, if a double win is not won during a small win game in which small win A is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 13(b) is displayed. FIG. 13(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display content when a double win is not won (no V win) in a small win game in which small win A is set that is executed during the time-saving state. As described above, in this embodiment, the time-saving state is configured to end when a small win in which small win A is set is won once, so if a V win is not won in a small win game with small win A, the time-saving state ends and the normal state is set.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), if the player fails to win a V in the small win game of small win A, a failure display mode 803 in which the treasure box 802 explodes is displayed, and the words "Sorry, rush is over" are displayed in the second display area Ds2, indicating that the time-saving mode is ending. After this screen is displayed, the words "Hit left" are displayed in the small display area Dm2 as a game guide for the normal state, and a screen corresponding to the normal state is displayed.

Next, the presentation when a small win with small win B set during the time-saving state will be explained with reference to FIG. 14(a). FIG. 14(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display content when a small win with small win B set is won for the first time during the time-saving state. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 21(d), but in this embodiment, one of the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state is set to "winning a small win with small win B set three times." Here, when a small win with small win B set is won for the first time during the time-saving state, display mode 4 is displayed in the small display area Dm3 and a treasure chest 804 is displayed in the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 14(a).

This treasure chest 804 has a different display mode from the treasure chest 802 shown in FIG. 12(b), and is configured to suggest to the player the likelihood of winning two types of prizes in the small prize that has been won this time. Specifically, it is configured so that a treasure chest with a luxurious display mode (treasure chest 802) is more likely to be displayed if a small prize (small prize A) with a high likelihood of winning two types of prizes is won. This allows the player to predict the likelihood of winning two types of prizes based on the display mode of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the display mode of the treasure chest displayed in the main display area Dm.

In the small prize game (small prize game corresponding to small prize B) executed after the display screen of FIG. 14(a) is displayed, if a V is won, the same effect display screen as FIG. 13(a) is displayed (the only difference is that the display mode of the opened treasure chest is changed to treasure chest 804), whereas if a V is not won, an effect display screen is displayed indicating that the opened treasure chest 804 is empty, after which the display screen shown in FIG. 12(a) is displayed and an effect is executed in which the boy 801 searches for the treasure chest again.

Next, the presentation when a small win with a small win C set during the time-saving state will be explained with reference to FIG. 14(b). FIG. 14(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display content when a small win with a small win C set is won five times during the time-saving state. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 21(d), but in this embodiment, "winning a small win with a small win C set five times" can be set as one of the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state. Here, when a small win with a small win C set is won five times during the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 14(b), display mode 6 is displayed in the small display area Dm3, and a treasure chest 805 is displayed in the main display area Dm.

This treasure chest 805 has a different display mode from the treasure chests 802 and 804b described above, and is configured to be able to suggest to the player the likelihood of winning two types of prizes in the small prize that has been won this time. Specifically, it is configured so that a treasure chest with a poor display mode (treasure chest 805) is more likely to be displayed if the small prize (small prize C) with the lowest likelihood of winning two types of prizes is won. This allows the player to predict the likelihood of winning two types of prizes based on the display mode of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the display mode of the treasure chest displayed in the main display area Dm.

In other words, when the display screen shown in FIG. 14(b) is displayed, the player will likely have won the small prize (small prize C), which has the lowest chance of winning two types, and thus the time-saving end condition will be met. In the small prize game that will be executed after this, the player will play while praying for a V win.

As explained above, this embodiment is configured to allow the setting of multiple time-saving end conditions that can be established based on the selection (variation) of special symbols executed during the time-saving state, and can execute an effect (display of the status (state) display mode Dm3a) that allows the player to understand the status of the time-saving state based on whether or not the multiple time-saving end conditions that have been set are established and the update status until the time-saving end condition is established. Therefore, even if multiple time-saving end conditions are set, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the time-saving state suddenly ends and the player becomes confused.

Next, referring to FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the small win game in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 16(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the right to two types has not been acquired at the time when a predetermined period has elapsed since the small win game in which the small win type is set to small win A was executed, and FIG. 16(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the right to two types has been acquired at the time when a predetermined period has elapsed since the small win game in which the small win type is set to small win A was executed. Also, FIG. 17(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the right to two types has not been acquired at the time when a predetermined period has elapsed since the small win game in which the small win type is set to small win B or C was executed, and FIG. 17(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the right to two types has been acquired at the time when a predetermined period has elapsed since the small win game in which the small win type is set to small win B or C was executed.

In this first embodiment, the small win game is executed by opening the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 12 times during the small win game, and is configured to output an instruction command if the V switch 650e3 does not detect a ball at the timing of the 5th or 10th opening (see S1609 in FIG. 54). When it is determined that this instruction command has been received, a display instruction command is set to cause the third pattern display device 81 to display an emphasis guidance display mode (see FIG. 16(a)) that emphasizes and guides the ball to win the V winning device 650.

When the V switch 650e3 detects a ball while the highlighted guide display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 16(b), a display achievement command is set to display an achievement display mode to congratulate the player. In other words, in this embodiment, if a small win game is played and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is performed, the ball is reliably entered into the V winning device 650 by playing right-hand, and the ball that entered the V winning device 650 during the small win game is configured to flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 in which the V switch 650e3 is provided. Despite this configuration, if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the fifth opening timing of the opening and closing door 650f1, the player is playing left-hand without noticing the display instructing right-hand play in the guide display area Dm2 (see FIG. 10(b)) of the third symbol display device 81 when the small win game is started. Or, it is considered that the game has stopped.

In such a case, by changing the display in the guide display area Dm2 to a more emphasized display that guides the player to hit right, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play with a right hand. Furthermore, the timing for displaying the emphasized guide display mode (see FIG. 16(a)) is set to the timing when, when a right hand play is performed after the emphasized guide display mode is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the ball shot in the right hand play reaches the V winning device 650 during the small win play. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a player who has performed a right hand play in accordance with the display of the emphasized guide display mode Dy1 is unable to make the ball flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2 during the small win play.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, the expectation of a double win differs depending on the type of small win that is won, and the content of the presentation display executed at the 5th or 10th opening timing is different when a small win game with a high expectation of a double win (small win A) is being played and when a small win game with a low expectation of a double win (small win B, C) is being played.

<Electrical Configuration of the Pachinko Machine 10 in the First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 9. Fig. 9 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. Note that in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing special symbols, drawing normal symbols, setting the display on the first symbol display device 37, setting the display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display on the third symbol display device 81. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, referring to FIG. 18, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to draw special symbols, draw normal symbols, set the display on the first symbol display device 37, set the display on the second symbol display device 83, and set the display on the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

The first winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbols and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the special symbols, the first winning type counter C2 used to select the big winning type of the special symbols, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the miss in the special symbols, the small winning type counter C5 used to select the small winning type of the special symbols, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 51), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to balls entering the first ball entrance 64, which consists of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4). In this area, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, small winning type counter C5, and variable type counter CS1 are stored according to the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64.

When the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is met, the various values stored in the reserved area 1 of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the various stored values is started. Note that this embodiment does not have a configuration for reserving and storing the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, or a configuration for reserving and storing the ball passing through the through gate 67, but even for these configurations, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area and a normal pattern reserved ball storage area may be provided as a predetermined number (for example, four) of reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4).

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 18. The first hit random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 999) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 999 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 999). In particular, when the first hit random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 51).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special pattern is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that a jackpot for the special pattern has occurred.

The first winning random number table 202a has two types: a special pattern 1 random number table 202a1 for the first special pattern, and a special pattern 2 random number table 202a2 for the second special pattern. The number of random numbers that will result in a big win is the same, but the number of random numbers that will result in a small win is set to be different (see FIG. 20). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that will result in a small win different, the player's expectation of receiving a special prize (a big win or a small win) can be made different between the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern. The special pattern 1 random number table 202a1 and the special pattern 2 random number table 202a2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Now, referring to FIG. 20, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. FIG. 20(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a, FIG. 20(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special pattern 1 random number table 202a1, and FIG. 20(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special pattern 2 random number table 202a2. This first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) that is determined to be a big win and a random number value (determination value) that is determined to be a small win in the drawing of the first special pattern or the second special pattern are set.

Specifically, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is referenced. As shown in FIG. 20(b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the values of the random number counter C1 from "0 to 4" are defined as the jackpot determination values, and any other value is defined as a non-jackpot determination value (i.e., a miss). Then, in the lottery for the first special symbol, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any of "0 to 4," it is determined to be a jackpot.

When the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is referenced. As shown in FIG. 20(c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 specifies that the value of the random number counter C1 is "0 to 4" as the jackpot determination value, "5 to 989" as the small jackpot determination value, and "990 to 999" as the other value (i.e., miss). Then, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a jackpot, and if the value is any of "5 to 989", it is determined to be a small jackpot.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is hit, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. In addition, in a state where the lottery (change) of the special symbol can be executed (i.e., a state other than during the change of the special symbol and during the big win game or small win game), the ball is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 when it enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area is not a random number that is determined to be a big win or small win for the special pattern, in other words, if it is a random number that is determined to be a miss for the special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that when the special pattern is missed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area is a random number that results in a special pattern jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a special pattern jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special pattern reserved ball execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter with a range of 0 to 999. In this first winning random number counter C1, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn, there are five random number values that result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and the random number values "0 to 4" are stored in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 of the first winning random number table 202a as described above. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the total number of random number values that result in a jackpot is 5 out of a total of 1000, so the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is "1/200".

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of 0 to 99. In this embodiment, the acquired value of the first win type counter C2 is used to refer to the first win type selection table 202b to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first win type selection table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 21.

21(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 21(a), in this embodiment, the special pattern 1 big win type selection table 202b1 is used to determine the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired when the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is drawn, and the special pattern 2 big win type selection table 202b2 is used to determine the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired when the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is drawn. As a result, the big win type when the big win is won by the drawing of the special pattern 1 can be made different from the big win type when the big win is won by the drawing of the special pattern 2, or the ratio at which each of the multiple big win types is selected can be made different, so that the game using the first special pattern (special pattern 1) and the game using the second special pattern (special pattern 2) can be provided to the player with different playability, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 21(b), the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 used when drawing the first special symbol (special symbol 1) will be explained. FIG. 21(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 21(b), in the first jackpot type counter C2, if the random number value is any of "0-9", the jackpot type is "jackpot A", if it is any of "10-49", the jackpot type is "jackpot B", and if it is any of "50-99", the jackpot type is "jackpot C".

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 15, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state (one time of time saving). In addition to the large number of rounds, the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, so "Jackpot A" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, there are 10 random number values that select "Jackpot A", so the probability that "Jackpot A" will be selected when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 10%.

"Jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 5 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state (time-saving count is 1). Although the number of rounds is fewer than the above-mentioned "Jackpot A," "Jackpot B" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, since the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, 40 random number values are used to select "Jackpot B," so the probability that "Jackpot B" will be selected when a jackpot is selected in the lottery for the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 40%.

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 5, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state (non-time-saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the jackpot, "Jackpot C" is a disadvantageous jackpot type for players. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, 50 random number values will select "Jackpot C", so the probability that "Jackpot C" will be selected when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 50%.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1), there is a 10% chance that a 15-round jackpot game will be selected, and a 90% chance that a 5-round jackpot game will be selected. In addition, there is a 50% chance that a jackpot will be selected in which the game state after the jackpot game ends will transition to a time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 21(c), the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 used when drawing the second special symbol (special symbol 2) will be explained. FIG. 21(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 21(c), when the random number value in the first jackpot type counter C2 is any value between "0 and 99," the jackpot type becomes "jackpot D." In other words, when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the jackpot type "jackpot D," which is the most advantageous for the player, is always selected.

Next, we will explain the time-saving bonuses for each type of jackpot with reference to Figure 21(d).

In this embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is four, but it is not limited to this, and it may be one type, or five or more types. Also, it may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol even if the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is the same. By configuring in this way, for example, when a jackpot is won with the second special symbol, by setting a jackpot type that is executed more rounds, it is possible to make the player more excited about a win with the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make a win in a high probability game state more advantageous for the player, and to improve the entertainment value of the game during the high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to strongly motivate the player to transition to the high probability state, and to make the player play for a longer period of time.

Also, the types of jackpot types selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (allocation rate) of each jackpot type may be the same, and only the range of the first jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type may be different. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts of obtaining the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 by targeting a specific counter value from being carried out with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the ball is not in reach, and selects two stop (performance) patterns: a "reach miss" (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) in which a symbol different from the symbol in reach stops as the final stop symbol after the reach occurs, and a "complete miss" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. Also, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into one for the normal state and one for the time-saving state, and the range of random numbers set for each losing stop type is changed depending on the table. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal state or the time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, etc.

For example, in the time-saving state, since a jackpot is likely to occur, a table for high probability is selected in which the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "complete miss" is wide, from 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. This makes it easier to select "complete miss" and narrows the range of "reach miss" to 90 to 99, making it difficult to select "reach miss". In addition, in the low probability state of a special pattern, a table for low probability is selected in which the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "complete miss" is narrow, from 0 to 79, so that the ball's entry time into the first ball entrance 64 is secured, making it difficult to select "complete miss" and widening the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach miss" to 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low probability state, many reach displays with long performance times can be performed, so the ball's entry time into the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, making it easier for the third pattern display device 81 to continue to display the variable numbers.

In this embodiment, in order to change the selection ratio of stop types according to the game state, a stop type selection table (not shown) for the normal state and for the time-saving state is provided, but a dedicated table may be provided for other game states. For example, in a gaming machine that has a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, probability state) in which it is easier to win a special symbol (jackpot) (easier to win than in the normal state) as the game state, a stop type selection table for the probability state may be provided.

The small win type counter C5 determines the type of small win when a small win of a special pattern occurs, and determines the display mode of the first pattern display device 37. It is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the small win type counter C5 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and is stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in a state in which the lottery (change) of the special pattern can be executed (i.e., a state other than during the change of the special pattern and during the big win game or small win game).

The value of the small win type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. If the result of the big win lottery for the second special symbol is a small win, a small win type selection table 202f (see FIG. 22) for determining the type of small win to be executed is set in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the contents of the small win type selection table 202f will be explained with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the small win type selection table 202f. As shown in FIG. 22, the small win type selection table 202f stipulates that three types of small win A to small win C are selected as the small win type of the second special pattern according to the value of the small win type counter C5. Specifically, when the acquired value of the small win type counter C5 is "0", the small win type is "small win A (V passing big win A)", when it is any of "1 to 10", the small win type is "small win B (V passing big win B)", and when it is any of "11 to 99", the small win type is "small win C (V passing big win A)".

Here, for each small win type (small win A to small win C), a type of big win game is set that is executed after the small win game ends when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 during the small win game. In the case of small win A, big win A (15R time-saving big win) is set, and after the small win A is executed, a big win in which the variable winning device 65 is set to a 15R open state is executed, and then one time of time-saving game (the period until the special pattern changes 100 times or the second special pattern changes once and is displayed stopped) is set as the time-saving state. In addition, in the case of small win B, big win B (5R time-saving big win) 5R time-saving one time big win is set, and after the small win B is executed, a big win in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then one time of time-saving play (the period until the special pattern changes 100 times or the second special pattern changes once and is stopped and displayed) is set as the time-saving state. In the case of small win C, big win A (15R time-saving big win) is set as in the case of small win A, and after the small win C is executed, a big win in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, but after the big win play, the time-saving state is not set, and the normal state is set.

In this way, the content of the big win game that is executed after the small win game ends and the game state that is set after the big win game can be changed depending on the type of small win selected. Specifically, small win A is set as the most advantageous small win for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is large (15R) and a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the big win game ends, while small win B is set as the least advantageous small win compared to the above-mentioned small win A because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is small (5R) and a time-saving state is not set after the big win game. Small win C is set as the least advantageous small win for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is small (5R) and a time-saving state is not set after the big win game.

In this embodiment, the time-saving state is terminated when the second special symbol changes once (first termination condition) or when the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) change a total of 100 times (second termination condition). By configuring in this way, if a jackpot is won when there is one or more reserved balls for the first special symbol and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, the time-saving state will not end even if the first special symbol (special symbol 1) changes after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) changes, the above-mentioned second termination condition is met and the time-saving state can be terminated, so that any special symbol (second special symbol) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times during the time-saving state.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the general display mode, such as short-time miss, long-time miss, normal reach, super reach, etc. The display mode is determined, specifically, by the change time of the pattern change. Based on the change time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern change mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated each time the main processing (see FIG. 51), described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing. In addition, a variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 23(a)) that stores random number values that determine one variation time of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d will now be described with reference to FIG. 23(a). FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 23(a), the fluctuation pattern table 202d defines a normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, and a time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 used when the time-saving state is set. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, different data tables are used to select a fluctuation pattern depending on the game state, so that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected can be different depending on the game state.

Figure 23(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 provided in the fluctuation pattern table 202d. As shown in Figure 23(b), the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 defines the symbol type, lottery result, and the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in association with the fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23(b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result is "miss", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is specified to correspond to a short miss with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds in the range of "0 to 139", to correspond to a false miss with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds in the range of "140 to 149", to correspond to various normal reaches with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds in the range of "150 to 179", and to correspond to a super reach a with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds in the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result is "jackpot", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", various normal reaches with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are associated with it, the range of "30 to 189" is associated with it, super reaches with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds are associated with it, and the range of "190 to 198" is associated with it, special reaches with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds are associated with it.

Next, if the pattern type is the second special pattern (special pattern 2) and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., the entire range is set to a long miss with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds, and if the lottery result is a "big win or small win," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., the entire range is set to a long miss with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds.

In this way, depending on the result of the special pattern lottery, one of the change patterns with a change time of 7 seconds to 180 seconds is set, and by sending a command indicating this change pattern to the voice lamp control device 113, a change performance corresponding to the change time is executed by the third pattern display device 81.

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a right-hand hit game is performed in a state in which the normal state is set as the game state, the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, during the normal state, a game in which a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, that is, a game in which a lottery for a first special symbol is performed, is performed. In the normal state configured in this way, a lottery for a second special symbol is performed when a player illegally enters a ball into the second ball entrance 640, so a variation pattern having a long variation time is selected for the variation of the second special symbol in the normal state. This makes it possible to suppress a situation in which a lottery for a second special symbol is illegally performed in a short period of time. In addition, when it is determined that a lottery (variation) for a second special symbol has been performed during the normal state, the period (180 seconds) until the lottery result is displayed may be used to notify the outside that a lottery (variation) for a second special symbol has been illegally performed. In addition, if the second special symbol is drawn (varied) illegally, the system may be configured to forcibly create and display a losing drawing (variation) result as the result of the illegally drawn (varied) second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 23(b), the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is specified so that when the pattern type is special pattern 1 and the lottery result is a miss, the order of most likely to be selected is 7 seconds (selection rate of about 70%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), 80 seconds (selection rate of about 10%), and 20 seconds (selection rate of about 5%). Also, when the lottery result is a jackpot, the order of most likely to be selected is 80 seconds (selection rate of about 80%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), and 140 seconds (selection rate of about 5%).

In this way, there is a correlation between the lottery result of the special symbol and the selected fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), and the ratio of fluctuation times (fluctuation patterns) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and the ratio of fluctuation times (fluctuation patterns) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot when a specific fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is selected. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to predict whether or not they will win a jackpot based on the selected fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern).

In this embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the type of jackpot that is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. Different variation pattern tables may be used when the jackpot type indicates a jackpot that is advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot A) and when the jackpot type indicates other jackpots (jackpot B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is won so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating other jackpots is won. This makes it possible to get the player interested in the variation time of the special symbols, since the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern that is executed, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to be for the player.

Also, the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating a normal jackpot is won may be configured to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time more easily than the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating a guaranteed jackpot is won. This makes it possible to provide the player with an unexpected game result when a jackpot is won with a short variation time, and keeps the player excited until the end even when a short variation time is selected.

Next, the contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 provided in the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2. As shown in FIG. 24, the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 defines the pattern type, the number of fluctuations, the lottery result, and the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in association with the fluctuation pattern.

24, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations is 1-4, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a short miss with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified for the entire range, and when the lottery result is a "jackpot," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a short win with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified for the entire range. When the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations is 5 or more, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a miss with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the entire range, and when the lottery result is a "jackpot," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a win with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the entire range. In addition, if the pattern type is the second special pattern (special pattern 2), the number of fluctuations is 1 or more, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., a medium miss with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds over the entire range; if the lottery result is a "small win," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 160," a short and small win with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and a range of "161 to 198," a medium and small win with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds; and if the lottery result is a "jackpot," a medium and large win with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set.

Returning to FIG. 18 for further explanation, the second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 239). When the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, and is stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area of RAM 203.

The random number value that results in a winning normal symbol is set by a second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the winning random number value set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. Note that in this embodiment, the probability of winning a normal symbol is configured to always be constant regardless of the game state of the pachinko machine 10, but other configurations may be used.

For example, the second winning random number table 202c may have two types: one for a low probability of a normal pattern (period when the normal pattern is in its normal state) and one for a high probability of a normal pattern winning that is higher than the low probability (period when the normal pattern is in its time-saving state). In this case, the number of winning random numbers contained in each is set to be different. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of a win can be changed between the low probability of a normal pattern and the high probability of a normal pattern.

When the ball passes through the normal start hole 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained and it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state. If the game state is in the time-saving state, the second pattern display device 83 displays a variable normal pattern for three seconds. On the other hand, if the game state is not in the time-saving state, the second pattern display device 83 displays a variable normal pattern for 30 seconds.

If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, a "○" pattern is displayed as the stopped pattern (second pattern). Then, it is determined whether the game state at the time when the second pattern is displayed (determined display) as a stopped pattern is in a time-saving state, and if the time when the second pattern is displayed (determined display) as a stopped pattern is in a time-saving state and the time when the variable start of the second pattern is also in a time-saving state, the operation of the electric role 640a is controlled (long opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, in other cases, the operation of the electric role 640a is controlled (short opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". The opening time and number of times of the second ball entrance 640 may be set arbitrarily.

In this way, the normal symbol variation time and the operation of the electric device 640a when a winning combination is selected (opening period and number of times the second ball entrance 640 is opened) are configured to be variable depending on the set game state. When the game state when the normal symbol starts to vary is in the time-saving state, the time of the variation display becomes very short (30 seconds → 3 seconds) compared to the normal state. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second symbol that starts to vary during the time-saving state is a win and the time-saving state is also set at the time when the electric device 640a starts to operate, the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long (0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times) compared to other cases, making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. A table (not shown) that stores random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is a win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202.

In this embodiment, the time for the second symbol to change and the operation of the electric device 640a are set differently depending on the game state when the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to change and the game state when the electric device 640a starts to operate based on the winning of the normal symbol. However, other configurations may be used. For example, a discrimination means may be provided that determines that the time-saving state is continuously set from the time when the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to change to the time when the electric device 640a starts to operate, and the result of the discrimination means may be used to set the time for the second symbol to change and the operation of the electric device 640a.

As described above, in this embodiment, in order to execute an operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player as the operation of the electric role 640a, it is necessary to set the time-saving state at both the start of the normal pattern change and the start of the operation of the electric role 640a. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that started changing at the timing when the normal state was set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating a win at the timing when the time-saving state was set, or when the second pattern that started changing at the timing when the time-saving state was set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating a win at the timing when the time-saving state was set, the change of the second pattern executed based on the lottery of one second pattern and the operation of the electric role 640a span multiple game states, it is possible to suppress the execution of the operation control (long opening) of the electric role 640a that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 37), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 52).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 19(a). As shown in FIG. 19(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores at least a first win random number table 202a, a first win type selection table 202b, a second win random number table 202c, a fluctuation pattern table 202d, a time-saving grant table 202e, a small win type selection table 202f, and an opening scenario table 202g as part of the fixed value data.

Incidentally, among the fixed value data stored in ROM 202, the first win random number table 202, the first win type selection table 202b, the second win random number table 202c, the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the small win type selection table 202f have already been explained in detail, so explanations will be omitted.

The time-saving granting table 202e is a data table that is referenced when multiple time-saving end conditions that end the time-saving state are set differently for each type of jackpot won. It is referenced when the jackpot game ends (the ending period of the jackpot game ends) (S1612: Yes in FIG. 52), and different times of time-saving (time-saving end conditions) are set depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, the contents defined in the time-saving granting table 202e will be explained with reference to FIG. 21(d). FIG. 21(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving granting table 202e. In this embodiment, there are jackpot types (jackpot A, B, D) in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and a jackpot type (jackpot C) in which a time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends (a normal state is set), and as shown in FIG. 21(d), multiple time-saving end conditions are defined corresponding to each jackpot type.

In this embodiment, there is a first time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the special pattern changes, a second time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the small prize A is won in the special pattern drawing, a third time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the small prize B is won in the special pattern drawing, and a fourth time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the small prize C is won in the special pattern drawing.

As shown in FIG. 21(d), the time-saving grant table 202e specifies values to be set in various counters corresponding to each of a number of time-saving end conditions, and the value set as the first time-saving end condition described above is set in the time-saving counter 203k, the value set as the second time-saving end condition is set in the small win A counter 203m, the value set as the third time-saving end condition is set in the small win B counter 203n, and the value set as the fourth time-saving end condition is set in the small win C counter 203p.

Specifically, in the case of jackpot types A and B, the time-saving end condition is set to "100" in the time-saving counter 203k (first time-saving end condition), "1" in the small win A counter 203m, "3" in the small win B counter 203n, and "5" in the small win C counter 203p. In the case of jackpot types D, the time-saving end condition is set to "100" in the time-saving counter 203k (first time-saving end condition), "2" in the small win A counter 203m, "10" in the small win B counter 203n, and "50" in the small win C counter 203p.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot type is jackpot C, the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, so the values to be set for the various counters described above are not specified for jackpot C in the time-saving granting table 202e. In this way, by making the end conditions of the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends different for each jackpot type won, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the specific time-saving content even if the player is notified in advance that the time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends, so that the player can play with heightened motivation to play until the end (until the time-saving state ends).

In this embodiment, the time-saving state is configured to end when a jackpot with a special symbol is won in addition to the time-saving end state set using the time-saving granting table 202e. The time-saving end condition established based on the winning of this jackpot does not differ depending on the type of jackpot set, so it is omitted from the time-saving granting table 202e. However, the time-saving end condition described above (the time-saving end condition established based on the winning of a jackpot with a special symbol) may also be configured to specify a value in the time-saving granting table 202e.

In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration having the above-mentioned first to fourth time-saving end conditions is used as the multiple time-saving end conditions, but other conditions may be set as the time-saving end conditions. For example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the first special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times), a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the second special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 80 times), or a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the small prize is won and the V prize winning device is activated (the total number of times the values of the small prize A counter 203m, the small prize B counter 203n, and the small prize C counter 203p are added together) may be set.

Furthermore, it is also possible to set a time-saving end condition that is established based on other factors, rather than on the number of times the special symbol changes or the lottery results. For example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the normal symbol changes or the number of times the normal symbol is won (the number of times the electric device 640a is activated) reaches a predetermined number, or a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of balls that enter a specific ball entry port (for example, the general winning port 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 balls), etc., may be set in advance.

As described above, by setting multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, and configuring the time-saving state to end when any of the time-saving end conditions is set, it becomes difficult for the player to know in advance how long the time-saving state will continue, and this makes it possible to prevent monotonous gameplay.

In addition, in this embodiment, a control is used that ends the time-saving state when any one of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, but other than this, for example, a configuration in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied when a predetermined number (e.g., two) of multiple time-saving end conditions are satisfied may also be used. In this case, it is preferable to provide a satisfaction number determination means that determines the number of satisfied time-saving end conditions, and a condition achievement determination means that determines whether the number of satisfied conditions determined by the satisfaction number determination means has reached a predetermined number (e.g., two), and to end the time-saving state (set the normal state) when it is determined by the condition achievement determination means that the number of satisfied conditions has reached the predetermined number (e.g., two).

In addition, a content discrimination means may be provided that discriminates the content of the time-saving end condition that is first established, and a discrimination criterion number variable means may be provided that varies a predetermined number (e.g., two) that serves as the discrimination criterion for the condition achievement discrimination means based on the discrimination result of the content discrimination means. This makes it possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is first established, so that the player can be motivated to play even after the time-saving state has been set.

In addition to the above, a predetermined period measurement means for measuring a predetermined period after the time-saving state is set (for example, until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 10) and a result determination means for determining the measurement result of the predetermined period measurement means may be provided, and if the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, a time-saving end delay means for delaying the end of the time-saving state until the predetermined period has elapsed even if the above-mentioned time-saving end condition is established may be provided, or an end condition invalidation means for invalidating the established time-saving end condition when the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period may be provided. Also, while the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is established or updating (subtracting) the values of various counters set corresponding to each time-saving end condition may not be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the time-saving state from ending immediately after it is set, and the timing for ending the time-saving state can be set in a complex manner. In addition, when using a process for ending the time-saving state based on the establishment of multiple time-saving end conditions as described above, it is preferable to set multiple time-saving end conditions as a priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 100 times) and a non-priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of small wins reaches 3 times), and to configure the time-saving state to end immediately when the priority time-saving end condition is established, and to end the time-saving state when only multiple non-priority time-saving end conditions are established. By setting the priority time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessive time-saving state.

The opening scenario table 202g is a data table that stores opening scenarios that are scenarios for the opening patterns (patterns that operate the various solenoids provided in each winning device) of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 in a winning game (jackpot game, small winning game) that is executed when a jackpot or small winning is won by a lottery of special patterns, and the contents of the opening scenario are specified according to the jackpot type set for the jackpot won or the small winning type set for the small winning.

Now, the contents of the open scenario table 202g will be explained with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the open scenario table 202g. Note that the open scenario table 202g shown in FIG. 25 shows all the periods during which the same scenario is set, but in reality, a measurement counter is provided to measure the period that has elapsed since each open scenario was set, and the operation of the currently set open scenario that corresponds to the measurement value of the measurement counter is executed; however, a detailed explanation of this will be omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 25, the contents of the opening scenario table 202g will be explained. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the opening scenario table 202g. This opening scenario table 202g defines operation data (opening scenario) for varying the opening operation of the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) that allows the ball to enter in the bonus game (jackpot game, small prize game) that is executed when the lottery result of the special pattern is a jackpot or small prize, depending on the type of prize that has been won (jackpot type, small prize type).

In this way, by varying the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) that opens depending on the winning result (big win or small win) and the type of win (big win type, small win type) and the content of the opening operation (opening scenario), it is possible to set the degree of advantage of the bonus game in multiple stages, so that even after winning a big win or small win, the player can enjoy wondering which type of win he or she won.

In the opening scenario table 202g, the start interval period during the winning game (the period from the start of the winning game to the first opening operation of the winning device) corresponding to the winning type (big win type, small win type), the opening operation mode of the winning device (the type of winning device that is opened, the number of seconds for one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), the round interval period (the period during which the winning device is closed between round games), the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (the period until the start of a new special pattern variation is allowed)), and the on/off switching operation mode of the flow path solenoid 650k for switching the flow path so that the ball that has won the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 or the special discharge flow path 650e2 are respectively specified.

Specifically, the winning type corresponds to jackpot A, and the start interval period is set to "2 seconds", the opening operation mode of the winning device is set to "15 rounds", the opening operation mode of the "variable winning device 65" is set to "continuously open for 29 seconds" as one round play, the round interval period is set to "1 second", and the end interval period is set to "4 seconds". Therefore, when a jackpot type of jackpot A is won, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, a time-saving state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends, is set, so that jackpot A is a jackpot that grants the most advantageous privilege to the player.

Next, for the winning types corresponding to jackpots B and C, the start interval period is set to "2 seconds", the opening operation mode of the winning device is set to "5 rounds", the opening operation mode of the "variable winning device 65" is set to "continuously open for 29 seconds" as one round play, the round interval period is set to "1 second", and the end interval period is set to "4 seconds". Therefore, if a jackpot type corresponding to jackpots B and C is won, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds is executed, and the player is paid out about 1/3 of the prize balls in the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot A. In addition, in the case of jackpot type B, a time-saving state is set, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends, and in the case of jackpot C, a time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, so that jackpot B is a jackpot that is less advantageous than jackpot A and gives a more advantageous bonus than jackpot C.

The winning type corresponds to the big win D, and the start interval period is "1 second", the opening operation mode of the winning device is "V winning device 650" opening in the "1st round" and "variable winning device 65" opening in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and as one round of play, the first round is "opened 12 times at 0.1 seconds with an interval of 0.5 seconds between each opening", and the 2nd to 15th rounds are "opened continuously for 29 seconds", the round interval period is "10 seconds" after the end of the 1st round and "1 second" otherwise, and the end interval period is "4 seconds".

In other words, although details will be described later, the contents stipulated for the start interval period of the big win D and the period until the second round is executed (the round game content of the first round (opening/closing operation mode), and the round interval period after the end of the first round) are configured to be the same as the contents stipulated for the small win game described later. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the winning game being executed this time is a big win game or a small win game until the timing when the first round ends (or, in the case of a small win game, until the timing when the small win game ends). This makes it possible to provide an unexpected winning game to a player who has won a small win and thought that a small win game is being executed.

In this embodiment, the jackpot D is the jackpot type that is always selected when the jackpot is won by the second special symbol, and the lottery for the second special symbol is set so that most of the time a small jackpot is won (see FIG. 20(c)). Therefore, a time-saving state is set as the game state, and during the period when the second special symbol mainly changes, some kind of winning game starts after the special symbol changes are stopped. In this case, whether a jackpot or a small jackpot is won, the winning game starts with the same opening action, making it difficult for the player to know which win (jackpot or small jackpot) he or she has won.

In addition, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to be lower than that of winning a small jackpot, and a time-saving state is set to be granted after the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot D ends. Therefore, since a player who wins a jackpot will not be provided with a less favorable benefit than if they had won a small jackpot, a surprising game (a jackpot game corresponding to jackpot D) can be made to be advantageous to the player, making it more exciting for the player.

When the big win D is won and when various small wins are won, the same presentation mode is executed as the variable display (variable presentation) displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and in order to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the lottery result from the display mode of the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b that show the lottery result of the special pattern, the timing of the stop display of the special pattern and the timing of the stop display of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 may be made different, or the timing of the stop display of the special pattern and the timing of the stop display of the third pattern may be synchronized, but the display mode or display area may be changed to make it more difficult for the player to distinguish the display of the third pattern at or around that stop display timing than during other periods, or the pattern for presentation displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 may be switched from the third pattern to a normal pattern for presentation corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern at the timing of the stop display of the special pattern.

In addition, the winning device (V winning device 650), which opens when a winning game is executed, and the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b can be arranged separately, and an effect display can be executed on the third pattern display device 81 to draw the player's attention to the V winning device 650 at the timing when the special patterns are stopped and displayed (the timing when the player is notified that he or she has won one of the winning patterns), or, as in this embodiment, the display area of the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b can be made smaller than that of the third pattern display device 81, making it harder to see the first pattern than the third pattern. This makes it difficult to distinguish whether the lottery result for this special pattern is a big win or a small win based on the stopped display mode of the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b, and allows the player to continue to expect that they have won the big win even during a winning game.

Returning to Figure 25, we will continue the explanation. In addition to the small win game (1 round game) that is specified for the win types corresponding to small wins A to C, the opening scenario of the big win game (2 to 15 round game) that continues after the small win game ends when the V switch 650e3 detects a ball during the small win game is also specified. This makes it possible to reliably match the small win game content of the selected small win type with the big win game content that can be executed after the small win game ends, so that appropriate play can be provided.

Specifically, for the small win type A, the start interval period is set to "1 second" for the small win game, the opening operation mode of the winning device "V winning device 650" is opened "1 round", one round game is "12 times of 0.1 second opening", and the interval period between openings is "0.5 seconds except after the 5th and 10th openings (inter-opening interval 1), and 5 seconds after the 5th and 10th openings (inter-opening interval 2)".

The "variable winning device 65" opens in the "2nd to 15th rounds" as a big win game that can be executed after the small win game has ended, and one round of play is "continuously open for 29 seconds." The interval between rounds is "10 seconds" after the first round has ended, and "1 second" otherwise, with a start interval of "2 seconds" and an end interval of "8 seconds."

In addition, for the win types B and C, the start interval period for the small win game is set to "1 second", the opening operation mode of the winning device "V winning device 650" is opened "1 round", one round game is "12 times of 0.1 second opening", and the interval period between openings is "0.5 seconds except after the 5th and 10th openings (inter-opening interval 1), and 5 seconds after the 5th and 10th openings (inter-opening interval 2)".

The "variable winning device 65" opens in the "second to fifth rounds" as a big win game that can be executed after the small win game has ended, and one round of play is "continuously open for 29 seconds." The interval between rounds is "10 seconds" after the first round has ended, and "1 second" otherwise, with a start interval of "2 seconds" and an end interval of "8 seconds."

In other words, the big win game that can be executed after the small win game corresponding to small win B or C is completed is set to have fewer rounds than the big win game corresponding to the above-mentioned small win A. Also, when the small win type is small win B, a time-saving state that is an advantageous game state for the player is set after the corresponding big win game is completed, and when it is small win C, the time-saving state is not set after the corresponding big win game is completed, so small win B is a small win that is less advantageous than small win A and provides a more advantageous bonus than small win C.

Returning to FIG. 18, the explanation will continue. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 51) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 50) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) as the power outage processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), the RAM 203 also has a special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, a big win start flag 203c, a big win in progress flag 203d, a small win type storage area 203e, a small win start flag 203f, a small win in progress flag 203g, a V-pass big win type storage area 203h, a V flag 203i, a V-pass flag 203j, a time-saving counter 203k, a small win A counter 203m, a small win B counter 203n, a small win C counter 203p, a regular short time fluctuation flag 203q, and a miscellaneous memory area 203z.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) as shown in FIG. 18, and each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64.

More specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (initial winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) in order of the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to older winnings are stored, and the first holding area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 draws for the first special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a decision such as the drawing of the special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from reserved area 1 to the execution area, reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) to the reserved area with the area number one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3). In this embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas in which winning data is stored in special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4).

In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not have the function of reserving the second special symbol, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning) in a state in which a new special symbol variation can be executed, the values of each of the counters C1 to C3, C5, and CS1 are acquired at that time, and the acquired data is stored as is in the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not have the function of reserving the normal symbol (second symbol), so when the ball passes through the normal start hole 67 in a state in which a new normal symbol variation can be executed, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained at that time, and the obtained data is stored as is in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81) of the first special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37 based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see S704 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the special pattern is executed (see S207 in FIG. 38).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203b (the number of reserved ball counts N for the special symbol variable display) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball count command (see S208 in FIG. 38 and S705 in FIG. 43). The special symbol 1 reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203b is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the actual value of the number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 by the special pattern 1 reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b is changed. As a result, even if the number of reserved balls of the variable display managed by the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the next received reserved ball count command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and sends a reserved ball number display command to the display control device 114 to notify the number of reserved balls each time the number of reserved balls changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern (reserved pattern) on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by this reserved ball number display command.

The jackpot start flag 203c is a flag that indicates the start timing of a jackpot game. When the variation of the special symbol that is determined to be a jackpot as a lottery result stops, the jackpot start flag 203c is set to ON (S216 in FIG. 38). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203c is ON and it is identified that it is the start timing of a jackpot, it is set to OFF (S1603 in FIG. 52). Note that the jackpot start flag 203c is initially set to OFF, and is configured to be backed up and maintain the state immediately before the power outage in the event of a power outage or the like.

The jackpot in progress flag 203d is a flag that indicates that a jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON when the variation of the special symbols is stopped, which indicates that the game has been determined to be a jackpot (S216 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot has ended (if it is determined that the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type have ended), it is set to OFF (S1620 in FIG. 52). This jackpot in progress flag 203d is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state, such as when the RAM is cleared, and is configured to be retained in the event of a power outage or the like by backing up the state immediately before the power outage or the like.

The small win type storage area 203e is a storage area for temporarily storing the small win type set for the small win that has been won. When it is determined that a small win has been won (S307 in FIG. 39: Yes), the acquired small win type is temporarily stored (S311 in FIG. 39). Then, when the number of V winning devices 650 opened during the small win game reaches a predetermined number (S1707 in FIG. 53: Yes) and it is determined that the V flag 203i is not set to ON (S1708 in FIG. 53; No), the stored small win type is referenced (S1709 in FIG. 53), and an instruction command corresponding to the referenced small win type is set. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the information (information for indicating the small win type) stored in the small win type storage area 203e is configured to be cleared when the small win game ends.

The small win start flag 203f is a flag that indicates the start timing of a small win game. It is set to ON when the variation of the special symbol that is determined to be a small win is stopped (S404 in FIG. 40). When it is determined that the small win start flag 203f is ON and it is identified as the start timing of a small win game, it is set to OFF (S1703 in FIG. 53). This small win start flag 203f is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared, and is configured to be maintained in the event of a power outage or the like by backing up the state immediately before the power outage or the like.

The small win in progress flag 203g is a flag that indicates that a small win is in progress. It is set to ON when the variation of the special symbol that is determined to be a small win is stopped (S404 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when it is determined that the small win is ending (when it is determined that the play for the set number of rounds of the small win has ended), it is set to OFF (S1720 in FIG. 53). This small win in progress flag 203g is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared, and is configured to be maintained in the event of a power outage or the like by backing up the state immediately before the power outage or the like.

The V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h is a storage area in which data is stored for determining the jackpot type that is set when a ball that has entered the V winning device 650 is detected by the V switch 650e3 during a small win game. When the variation of the special pattern that is determined to be a small win stops, the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h stores a data value corresponding to the jackpot type that corresponds to the determined small win type (S402 in FIG. 40). When a ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and is detected by the V switch 650e3, the V flag 203i corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h is set to ON. At the end of the small win game, the data value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h is cleared. This V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h is a flag that is set to off in the initial state, such as when the RAM is cleared, and is configured to be retained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage, etc., if a power outage occurs.

When a ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during a small win game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, the V flag 203i is set to ON, which corresponds to the type of big win corresponding to the type of small win game being played. At the end of the small win game, it is determined whether this V flag 203i is ON (S1715 in FIG. 53), and if it is determined that the V flag 203i is ON (S1715 in FIG. 53: Yes), the type of big win to be played is determined from the flag that is set to ON, and the start of the corresponding big win game is set (S1716 in FIG. 53). This V flag 203i is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is configured to be maintained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage, etc., in the event of a power outage, etc.

The V passing flag 203j is a flag used to determine whether the V flag 203i is set to ON during a small win game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203i is set to ON. In this embodiment, most of the balls that enter the V winning device 650 during a small win game are configured to flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2, and the V passing flag 203j is set to ON in the V passing process (see FIG. 48) corresponding to the ball that first enters the special discharge flow path 650e2 (S1207 in FIG. 48).

Then, in the V passing process (see FIG. 48), it is determined whether the V passing flag 203j is set to ON (S1201 in FIG. 48), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S1201 in FIG. 48: Yes), the process of S1202 to S1208 in the V passing process (see FIG. 48) is skipped. As a result, even if the V switch 650e3 detects multiple balls during one small win game, only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected ball is executed. This simplifies the process executed during the small win game, and prevents the V passing command from being sent to the voice lamp control device 113 multiple times, which causes V passing management on the voice lamp control device 113 side to become complicated.

The time-saving counter 203k is a counter for measuring the number of times the special pattern changes until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is met, and when it is determined in the jackpot control process (S1504 in FIG. 52) that it is the end timing of the ending presentation (end timing of the jackpot) (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), the value (100) specified in the time-saving granting table 202e is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

Then, the counter value is referred to in the time-saving count update process (S219 in FIG. 42) executed in the special symbol change process (S104 in FIG. 38) (S601 in FIG. 42), and if it is determined that the counter value is greater than 0 (S601 in FIG. 42: Yes), the counter value is decremented by 1. If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203k after the decrement is 0 (S604 in FIG. 42: Yes), the time-saving end condition is met, and the normal state is set as the game state (S605 in FIG. 42). Note that in this embodiment, multiple time-saving end conditions are set to end the time-saving state, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is met (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of small wins is met), the counter value is set (reset) to 0 (S505 in FIG. 41). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (first time-saving end condition) that references the value of the time-saving counter 203k is satisfied among the multiple time-saving end conditions, the value of the time-saving counter 203k is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of decrementing the value of the time-saving counter 203k continues even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used when determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

The small win A counter 203m is a counter for measuring the number of times a small win with small win A set as the type of small win until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is met. When it is determined in the big win control process (S1504 in FIG. 52) that it is the end timing of the ending presentation (end timing of the big win) (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), the value (1) specified in the time-saving granting table 202e is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

Then, when it is determined that the type of the small win that was won this time is small win A in the small win time-saving update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed in the small win start setting process (S221 in FIG. 40) of the special pattern change process (S104 in FIG. 38), the counter value is decremented by 1 (S502 in FIG. 41: Yes). When it is determined that the value of the small win A counter 203m after the decrement is 0 (S504 in FIG. 41: Yes), the time-saving end condition is established, and the normal state is set as the game state (S507 in FIG. 41). In this embodiment, multiple time-saving end conditions are set to end the time-saving state, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is established (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of special pattern changes is established), the counter value is set to 0 (reset) (S606 in FIG. 42). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (second time-saving end condition) that references the value of the small win A counter 203m is satisfied among the multiple time-saving end conditions, the value of the small win A counter 203m is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of decrementing the value of the small win A counter 203m continues even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used when determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

The small win B counter 203n is a counter for measuring the number of times a small win with small win B set as the small win type is won until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is met. When it is determined in the big win control process (S1504 in FIG. 52) that it is the end timing of the ending presentation (end timing of the big win) (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), the value (3) specified in the time-saving granting table 202e is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

Then, when it is determined that the type of the small win that has been won this time is a small win B in the small win time-saving update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed in the small win start setting process (S221 in FIG. 40) of the special pattern change process (S104 in FIG. 38) (S510 in FIG. 41: Yes), the counter value is decremented by 1. When it is determined that the value of the small win B counter 203n after decrement is 0 (S512 in FIG. 41: Yes), the time-saving end condition is established, and the normal state is set as the game state (S507 in FIG. 41). In this embodiment, multiple time-saving end conditions are set to end the time-saving state, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is established (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of special pattern changes is established), the counter value is set to 0 (reset) (S606 in FIG. 42). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (third time-saving end condition) that references the value of the small win B counter 203n is satisfied among the multiple time-saving end conditions, the value of the small win B counter 203n is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of decrementing the value of the small win B counter 203n continues even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used when determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

The small win C counter 203p is a counter for measuring the number of times a small win with small win C set as the small win type is won until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is met. When it is determined in the big win control process (S1504 in FIG. 52) that it is the end timing of the ending presentation (end timing of the big win) (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), the value (5) specified in the time-saving granting table 202e is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

Then, when it is determined that the type of the small win that has been won this time is a small win C in the small win time-saving update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed in the small win start setting process (S221 in FIG. 40) of the special pattern change process (S104 in FIG. 38) (S510 in FIG. 41: No), the counter value is decremented by 1. When it is determined that the value of the small win C counter 203p after decrement is 0 (S514 in FIG. 41: Yes), the time-saving end condition is established, and the normal state is set as the game state (S515 in FIG. 41). In this embodiment, multiple time-saving end conditions are set to end the time-saving state, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is established (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of special pattern changes is established), the counter value is set to 0 (reset) (S606 in FIG. 42). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (fourth time-saving end condition) that references the value of the small win C counter 203p is satisfied among the multiple time-saving end conditions, the value of the small win C counter 203p is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of decrementing the value of the small win C counter 203p continues even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used when determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

The normal short fluctuation flag 203q is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation of the normal pattern (second pattern) was a short fluctuation (fluctuation for 3 seconds), and by being set to ON, it indicates that a short fluctuation of the normal pattern (second pattern) was executed. This normal short fluctuation flag 203q is set ON when it is determined that the timing for setting the fluctuation time of the normal pattern in the normal pattern fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 45) is during the time-saving state (during time-saving) (S909 in FIG. 45: Yes), and a fluctuation time of 3 seconds (short fluctuation) is set (S911 in FIG. 45), and it is referenced (S916 in FIG. 45) when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal pattern (second pattern) has elapsed (S913 in FIG. 45), and when it is determined that the lottery result of this normal pattern (second pattern) is a win (S915 in FIG. 45: Yes).

Here, if it is determined that the normal short symbol fluctuation flag 203q is set to ON (S916 in FIG. 45: Yes), it is determined whether the current state is in the time-saving state (time-saving in progress) (S918 in FIG. 45), and if it is determined that the current state is in the time-saving state (time-saving in progress) (S918 in FIG. 45: Yes), an opening operation advantageous to the player (long opening) is set as the opening operation of the electric role device 640a (S919 in FIG. 45). Note that the normal short symbol fluctuation flag 203q is set to OFF (S917 in FIG. 45) after it is determined that the flag is set to ON in the normal symbol fluctuation process (S106 in FIG. 45).

In this way, the system is configured so that an opening operation advantageous to the player (long opening) is set as the opening operation of the electric device 640a only when both the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the normal pattern (second pattern) (when the fluctuation time is set) and the game state at the time of setting the opening operation of the electric device 640a after the fluctuation time of the normal pattern (second pattern) has elapsed are in the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the long opening of the electric device 640a due to the fluctuation (lottery) of the normal pattern that is executed across multiple game states (normal state and time-saving state), and it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively provided with a privilege advantageous to the player (long opening of the electric device 640a).

Other memory area 203z stores other data necessary for playing the game, counters, flags, etc.

Returning to FIG. 9, the explanation will be continued. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, the large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening and closing plate, the V opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, the flow path solenoid 650k for driving the switching member 650h provided in the V winning device 650, and the solenoid for driving the electric role (other solenoid 209z), and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches and sensors (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 49) is immediately executed as a process during a power outage.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, etc.

The audio lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22 and frame button 23, and when the player operates the frame button 22, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach, and also instructs the display control device 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that a rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, the rear image refers to the image displayed on the rear side of the third pattern, which is the main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a state display selection table 222b, a final state display selection table 222c, and various other data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation patterns of each type of variation pattern (such as a complete miss, a reach miss, and various reaches) are set in the counter value for variation pattern selection (not shown). The counter for variation pattern selection is a counter consisting of a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated (each time the various counter update processes (see S2111 in FIG. 55) executed at 1 millisecond intervals in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 are executed) and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (for example, 299). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit/miss judgment result, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. This prevents the same variation display mode from being displayed frequently, and suppresses the problem of players getting bored early.

The counter value for the variation pattern selection may be updated by a process other than the various counter update processes (see S2111 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 described above. For example, a process for updating the counter value may be added to the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 during a period in which a repeat process is executed when 1 millisecond has not elapsed since the previous process was executed (for example, the period between the execution of the process of S2114 in FIG. 55 and the execution of the process of S2115). By configuring in this way, the number of times the process for updating the counter value for the variation pattern selection is executed during 1 millisecond can be made indefinite (random) depending on the period spent to execute some processes (processes S2102 to S2112 in FIG. 55) in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 55). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding the regularity of the control of the voice lamp control device 113 based on the contents of the display performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern selected using the variation pattern selection 222a) set by the voice lamp control device 113 and displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

The status display selection table 222b is a data table used when selecting the display mode of the status display (see the situation (status) display mode Dm3a in FIG. 11) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 when the time-saving state is set as the game state. This status display selection table 222b is used when selecting the status display mode corresponding to the change display other than the change at which the time-saving state ends (the final change of the time-saving state) among the states in which the time-saving state is set.

This status display selection table 222b is configured to select different status display modes based on the probability of winning a jackpot in the corresponding change (the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and the probability of winning a small jackpot in the special symbol lottery and having two types of wins set during the small jackpot (during small jackpot play)) and the update status of the time-saving status (whether or not the time-saving end condition is met, or the update status of various elements (number of times the special symbol changes, number of times a small jackpot is won, etc.) set as the time-saving end condition). Therefore, by understanding the contents of the status (status) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the player can understand the status of the currently set time-saving status.

Now, with reference to FIG. 27(a), the contents defined in the status display selection table 222b will be specifically explained. FIG. 27(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the status display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 27(a), the status display selection table 222b defines various status display modes corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern (win/lose determination result), the setting status of the time-saving lower limit flag 223k (determination result of whether it is set to on or not), the setting status of the quasi-end condition flag 223m (determination result of whether it is set to on or not), and the value of the status presentation counter 223o.

Here, to briefly explain the various flags and counters referenced in the status display selection table 222b, the time-saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are flags for indicating that the time-saving state has elapsed for a predetermined period of time, and are set to on when the time-saving state has elapsed for the predetermined period of time. Depending on the setting status of each of these flags, that is, depending on the progress of the time-saving state, the status display mode can be changed.

The time-saving lower limit flag 223k is set to ON based on the number of times the special symbol changes, which is one of the termination conditions for ending the time-saving state. That is, when a certain number of special symbol changes (e.g., 70 times) have been performed since the time-saving state was set, the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a can be set differently. This makes it possible to suggest to the player that the termination condition that can be met by the execution of the special symbol change is approaching, and to make the player play in the time-saving state with a sense of tension. In addition, since various effects can be performed in the time-saving state that is continuously set, the effect of the presentation can be enhanced. In this embodiment, when the number of special pattern variations executed during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 70 times), the time-saving lower limit flag 223k is set to ON and the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a is changed. However, in order to display various display modes to the player as the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a, for example, a state (situation) display mode Dm3a in which the number of special pattern variations executed during the time-saving state is different from that of the odd-numbered and even-numbered times may be displayed, or a state (situation) display mode Dm3a that is different from the other periods may be set only for a predetermined period after the time-saving state is set (e.g., the period until the special pattern varies 10 times).

The quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON based on the number of times a small win has been won (the number of times a small win has been won and operational control has been executed on the V winning device 650) among the end conditions for terminating the time-saving state. In other words, if a small win has been won a predetermined number of times (e.g., three times) since the time-saving state was set, the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a can be set differently. This makes it possible to suggest to the player that the end condition that can be met by winning a small win is approaching, and allows the player to play in the time-saving state with a sense of tension. In addition, various effects can be executed in the time-saving state that is continuously set, thereby enhancing the effect of the effects.

The status effect counter 223o is a loop counter whose value "0 to 99" is periodically updated, and is configured so that its value is updated by 1 each time various counter update processes (S2111 in FIG. 55), which are executed at 1 millisecond intervals in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 55), are executed.

Next, the contents defined in the status display selection table 222b will be specifically explained with reference to FIG. 27(a). FIG. 27(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the status display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 27(a), the status display selection table 222b defines the status display mode (see FIG. 15 for the specific display mode contents) of the presentation executed in response to the win/lose determination result, the time-saving lower limit flag 223k, the quasi-end condition flag 223m, and the value of the status presentation counter 223o.

Specifically, if the result of the hit/miss determination is a big hit and the time-saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are on, the status display mode "3" is set to the value of the acquired status presentation counter 223o in the range of "0 to 69", the status display mode "1" is set to the range of "70 to 79", and the status display mode "9" is set to the range of "80 to 99". Also, if the time-saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off, the status display mode "3" is set to the value of the acquired status presentation counter 223o in the range of "0 to 49", the status display mode "1" is set to the range of "50 to 69", the status display mode "4" is set to the range of "70 to 79", and the status display mode "9" is set to the range of "80 to 99".

Furthermore, if the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot, the time-saving lower limit flag 223k is off, and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on, the status display mode "1" is set to the range of the acquired status presentation counter 223o's value "0 to 69", the status display mode "3" is set to the range of "70 to 79", and the status display mode "9" is set to the range of "80 to 99", and if the time-saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are off, the status display mode "3" is set to the range of the acquired status presentation counter 223o's value "0 to 69", the status display mode "1" is set to the range of "70 to 79", and the status display mode "9" is set to the range of "80 to 99".

In other words, when the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination is a jackpot, the state display mode selected can be changed according to the progress of the set time-saving state (the setting status of the time-saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m). Therefore, various state display modes can be displayed during the time-saving state, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, the display mode likely to be selected as the status display mode can be made different between the period when both the time-saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are set to OFF (first half of the time-saving state) and the period when either the time-saving lower limit flag 223k or the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON (middle period of the time-saving state). Therefore, the player can predict the progress of the time-saving state by understanding the status (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed in the third display area Ds3 of the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, when the time-saving lower limit flag 223k is set to ON, the quasi-termination condition flag 223m is set to OFF, and the acquired value of the status presentation counter 223o is "70 to 79", the status display mode "4" is set. As described above with reference to FIG. 15, this status display mode "4" is a status display mode for informing the player that he or she has won a small prize. In this embodiment, however, it is also configured to be selected when the result of the win/loss determination is a big win, that is, when the win/loss determination is not a small win (when the win/loss determination result is more favorable to the player than winning a small prize). This makes it possible to execute a presentation that is unexpected for the player, and to provide a presentation that the player will not tire of quickly.

Next, if the win/loss judgment result is small win A (a small win in which the small win game that is most likely to win two types is executed among multiple small win types) and the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are on, the status display mode "5" is set to the value of the acquired status presentation counter 223o in the range of "0 to 79", and the status display mode "9" is set to the range of "80 to 99". Also, if the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is on and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off, the status display mode "7" is set to the value of the acquired status presentation counter 223o in the range of "0 to 49", the status display mode "5" is set to the range of "50 to 69", the status display mode "7" is set to the range of "70 to 79", and the status display mode "9" is set to the range of "80 to 99".

Next, if the hit/miss determination result is a small hit A, the time-saving lower limit flag 223k is off, and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on, the status display mode "5" is set to the range of the acquired status presentation counter 223o's value "0 to 69", the status display mode "6" is set to the range of "70 to 79", and the status display mode "9" is set to the range of "80 to 99". If both the time-saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are off, the status display mode "7" is set to the range of the acquired status presentation counter 223o's value "0 to 79", and the status display mode "9" is set to the range of "80 to 99".

Then, if the win/loss judgment result is small win B or C (small win in which two of the multiple small win types are difficult to win) and the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are on, the status display mode "5" is set to the value of the acquired status presentation counter 223o in the range of "0 to 69", the status display mode "6" is set to the range of "70 to 79", and the status display mode "9" is set to the range of "80 to 99". If the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is on and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off, the status display mode "4" is set to the value of the acquired status presentation counter 223o in the range of "0 to 69", the status display mode "2" is set to the range of "70 to 79", and the status display mode "9" is set to the range of "80 to 99".

Furthermore, if the hit/miss judgment result is a small hit B or C, the time-saving lower limit flag 223k is off, and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on, the status display mode "6" is set to the value of the acquired status effect counter 223o in the range of "0 to 49", the status display mode "5" is set to the range of "50 to 69", the status display mode "6" is set to the range of "70 to 79", and the status display mode "9" is set to the range of "80 to 99". Furthermore, if the time-saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are both off, the status display mode "2" is set to the value of the acquired status effect counter 223o in the range of "0 to 49", the status display mode "4" is set to the range of "50 to 69", the status display mode "4" is set to the range of "70 to 79", and the status display mode "9" is set to the range of "80 to 99".

As described above, in this embodiment, different status display modes are displayed depending on the type of small win set for the small win that has been won (depending on the expectation of a two-type win during the small win game being played), so that by allowing the player to grasp the status display mode displayed during the time-saving state, it becomes possible to predict not only the timing when the time-saving state will end, but also the result of the variable display (dynamic display) of the currently active special pattern (the result of the lottery for the special pattern). This makes it possible to arouse the player's interest in the status display mode displayed during the time-saving state, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the small prize A is won, the time-saving lower limit flag 223k is off, and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to on, if the acquired value of the state effect counter 223o is "70 to 79", the contents of the state display selection table 222b are stipulated so that the state display mode "6" is selected. As shown in FIG. 15, this state display mode "6" is a state display mode in which the characters "big pinch" are displayed to suggest that the time-saving state will end based on the small prize win. By exceptionally displaying this state display mode "6" even when the small prize A is won, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, and to increase the possibility of winning two types of prizes in the small prize game that is executed after the state display mode "6" is displayed. Therefore, even if the state display mode "6" is displayed based on the winning of the small prize B or small prize C, which has a low possibility of winning two types of prizes, the player can continue to have hope for a two-type prize until the small prize game ends.

If the result of the win/loss judgment is a win/loss and the time-saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are on, the status display mode "1" is set to the value of the acquired status presentation counter 223o in the range of "0 to 49", the status display mode "4" is set to the range of "50 to 69", the status display mode "3" is set to the range of "70 to 79", and the status display mode "9" is set to the range of "80 to 99". Also, if the time-saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off, the status display mode "1" is set to the value of the acquired status presentation counter 223o in the range of "0 to 69", the status display mode "3" is set to the range of "70 to 79", and the status display mode "9" is set to the range of "80 to 99".

Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss, the time-saving lower limit flag 223k is off, and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on, the status display mode "6" is set to the range of the acquired status presentation counter 223o's value "0 to 69", the status display mode "3" is set to the range of "70 to 79", and the status display mode "9" is set to the range of "80 to 99". Furthermore, if the time-saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are both off, the status display mode "1" is set to the range of the acquired status presentation counter 223o's value "0 to 79", and the status display mode "9" is set to the range of "80 to 99".

In this way, when the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss, that is, when a special pattern change is executed in which the time-saving end condition is not met based on winning a small win or a big win, if the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set on, a state display mode is selected that makes the player think as if he or she had won a small win and the time-saving end condition was met. This allows the player to play while feeling a sense of urgency in a state in which the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set on, that is, in a state in which a predetermined number of small win games have been played since the time-saving state was set.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to on, the status display mode (status display mode "2, 4 to 7") that makes the player think that they have won a small win is more likely to be selected than when the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to off. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the execution of a performance that falsely suggests that a small win has been won when the win/loss determination result is a miss. Specifically, when the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to on, the performance mode (status display mode) that makes the player think that the time-saving end condition has been met when a small win is won is more likely to be selected, and when the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to off, the performance mode (status display mode) that makes the player think that the time-saving end condition has been met when a small win is won is less likely to be selected.

Because of this configuration, the display modes of the state display modes for the multiple special pattern variations that are executed during the period in which the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON can be set in a series of flows, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable about the game being executed during the time-saving state, which in turn reduces the presentation effect.

The status display mode "9" is selected according to the value of the status presentation counter 223o, regardless of the result of the win/lose judgment or the settings of various flags. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the progress of the current time-saving state. Furthermore, in some cases where the win/lose judgment result is a miss, the status display mode "3" is selected. As a result, when the display mode of the status display mode "3" is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, a presentation is executed that suggests that the lottery result of the dynamically displayed special pattern is either a jackpot or a miss.

In this embodiment, the probability that the lottery result for the second special symbol will be a miss (other than a big win or a small win) is 1/100 (see FIG. 20(c)), and furthermore, the status display mode "3" is displayed when the value of the status effect counter 223o is "70-79", that is, in the range of 1/10 of the counter values updated within the range of "0-99" (when the second special symbol is drawn, the lottery result is "miss" and the status display mode "3" is selected with a probability of 1/1000).

Therefore, while status display mode "3" is mostly displayed when a jackpot is won, it can also be displayed when a losing jackpot is won, allowing the player to play with a sense of excitement until the very end (until the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed). Note that in this embodiment, multiple status display modes are selected so that the player can predict the progress of the current time-saving state (the number of remaining times until each time-saving end condition is met) and the lottery result of the special symbol, but it may also be configured so that a status display mode that can reliably notify the player of the progress of the current time-saving state (the number of remaining times until each time-saving end condition is met) and the lottery result of the special symbol can be selected.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state display mode is selected differently for each hit/miss judgment result based on the progress of the time-saving state (the setting status of the time-saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m) and the value of the state performance counter 223o, but the state display mode may be selected using other conditions. For example, an operation discrimination means may be provided that determines whether or not the player has performed a predetermined operation on an operation means that the player can operate (for example, the frame button 22), and the state display mode may be selected differently based on the judgment result of the operation discrimination means. Furthermore, in this case, when it is determined that a predetermined operation has been performed by the operation discrimination means, it is preferable to configure the state display mode to be easily selected that clearly shows the progress of the current time-saving state (the number of remaining times until each time-saving end condition is established) and the lottery result of the special pattern. This will encourage the player to actively operate the operation means, and willingly allow the player to participate in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the time-saving state is set, the state display mode is selected using the state display selection table 222b each time the effect setting process is executed (each time the variable display of the third pattern is set), but for example, a storage means may be provided that stores the state display mode set while the time-saving state is continuously set, and the state display mode to be newly set (selected) may be determined based on the contents stored in the storage means. By configuring in this way, the state display modes can be displayed evenly during the time-saving state, or when the state display modes set randomly (selected based on the value of the state effect counter 223o) are biased to one side, the state display mode set during the remaining time-saving state can be intentionally biased to one side.

The state display mode may be selected differently depending on the number of times the time-saving state is repeatedly set (the number of times a jackpot is won (two types of jackpots are set) during the time-saving state and the time-saving state is set again after the jackpot is played) and the number of winning balls won during that period.

Next, the contents of the final state display selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 27(b). FIG. 27(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the final state display selection table 222c. This final state display selection table 222c, like the above-mentioned state display selection table 222b, is a data table referenced to select the state display mode to be displayed in the third display area Ds3 during the time-saving state. Unlike the above-mentioned state display selection table 222b, this final state display selection table 222c is referenced when setting a change display (performance display) for the change of the special pattern that ends the time-saving state (the change of the special pattern when the number of changes of the special pattern becomes the number of changes that meets the time-saving end condition, or the change of the special pattern when the number of small wins of the special pattern becomes the number of wins that meets the time-saving end condition).

This final state display selection table 222c is referenced (S2907 in FIG. 63) when it is determined that the time-saving end fluctuation flag 223n is on (S2905: Yes in FIG. 63) in the effect setting process described later (see FIG. 63). The contents of this final state display selection table 222c are specifically described with reference to FIG. 27(b). When the result of the hit/miss determination is a big hit, the state display mode "7" is specified for the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o in the range of "0 to 69", the state display mode "3" is specified for the range of "70 to 89", and the state display mode "8" is specified for the range of "90 to 99". When the result of the hit/miss determination is a small hit A, the state display mode "7" is specified for the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o in the range of "0 to 69", the state display mode "5" is specified for the range of "70 to 89", and the state display mode "8" is specified for the range of "90 to 99".

In addition, if the result of the win/loss determination is a small win B or C, the status display mode "6" is set when the value of the acquired status presentation counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69", the status display mode "5" is set when the value is in the range of "70 to 89", and the status display mode "8" is set when the value is in the range of "90 to 99".If the result of the win/loss determination is a miss, the status display mode "8" is set when the value of the acquired status presentation counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 99".

As described above, in this embodiment, the status display mode displayed during the period in which the time-saving state is set to continue and the status display mode displayed when the time-saving state ends (when the final change display of the special pattern that will end the time-saving state is performed) are selected by referring to different data tables, so that when the time-saving state ends, it is possible to reliably prevent a status display mode that suggests that the time-saving state will continue from being displayed.

As mentioned above, in some cases where a jackpot is won, the status display mode "8" is displayed. This makes it possible to make the player believe that the time-saving mode has ended, and then to inform the player that a jackpot has been won by displaying the stopped third symbol, providing an unexpected effect to the player.

As mentioned above, if a losing jackpot is won, the status display mode "8" is always displayed. This prevents the player from getting too excited about the game and feeling dissatisfied with the game results.

Next, referring to FIG. 26(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 26(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a performance counter 223e, a game status storage area 223f, a time-saving information update area 223g, a provisional win determination flag 223h, a provisional time-saving information update area 223i, a provisional time-saving end flag 223j, a time-saving lower limit flag 223k, a quasi-end condition flag 223m, a fluctuation flag before the end of the time-saving 223n, a status performance counter 223o, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results of the reserved balls before the fluctuation begins. When the winning information related process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2301 in FIG. 57) is executed, this winning information storage area 223a stores winning information based on the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 in order from the first area. Note that the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 is set when the main control device 110's pre-reading process (S707 in FIG. 44) is executed, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1501 in FIG. 51) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 51).

Each piece of winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted one by one (the winning information stored in the second area is moved to the first area) (see S2806 in FIG. 62) each time the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 62) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to reliably know when the special pattern variation corresponding to the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 will be executed.

In addition, since the winning information (special symbol pre-reading information) sent by the winning information command can be shifted to the execution area (the area corresponding to the special symbol change currently being executed), for example, when executing an effect (so-called pre-reading continuous effect) that uses the period from the start of the next special symbol change to the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information command based on receiving the winning information command, the winning information corresponding to the winning information command can be held until the above-mentioned pre-reading continuous effect ends.

In this embodiment, the winning information storage area 223a is configured to have a first area to a fourth area in addition to the execution area, since the winning information (information that can be obtained when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64) can be reserved and stored up to four pieces of winning information (winning information related to the second special symbol) that can be obtained when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 can also be reserved and stored up to four pieces of winning information, for example, if the winning information storage area 223a is configured to have four areas for the first special symbol (reserved information areas) and four areas for the second special symbol (reserved information areas) in addition to the execution area.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, like the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control unit 110, is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable performance (variable display) performed by the first pattern display device 37 (and the third pattern display device 81) that is reserved in the main control unit 110. In other words, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special pattern is set based on the reserved ball count command output from the main control unit 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern using the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is increased by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the variable display of a special pattern is executed in the main control unit 110 and the number of reserved balls is decreased, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203b after the increase or decrease is sent to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command and stores it in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b (see S2208 in Figure 56). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that it can update its value in synchronization with the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control device 110.

The value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball count pattern on the third pattern display device 81. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, and transmits a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of an image so that the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, i.e., the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable display is pending.

The information contained in the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device may be information indicating the actual number of reserved balls, i.e., the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203a, or information indicating that the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203a has been incremented or decremented by 1. When sending information indicating that the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203a has been incremented or decremented by 1 as the reserved ball count command, a calculation means may be provided that calculates and manages the current number of reserved balls based on the information contained in the reserved ball count command received by the voice lamp control device 113.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 56), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set (see S2802 in FIG. 62). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) of the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern variation display device 81 displays the third pattern variation in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command sent from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 56), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see S2808 in FIG. 62). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type for display is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) (S2810 in FIG. 62).

The performance counter 223e is a counter used in a lottery to determine the performance contents of various performances executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and although not shown in the figure, it is updated each time the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. In this embodiment, the performance counter 223e has multiple loop counters (for example, counters that are repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99), and is configured to update the values of each counter without synchronization.

Specifically, for example, multiple counters are provided with different values that are updated each time the main process (see FIG. 56) is executed, and the updated values of each counter are not synchronized. Furthermore, a different value may be calculated by calculating the value of each counter, and the calculated value may be used as a value to be used in a lottery to determine the content of each type of effect.

The game status storage area 223f is an area for storing the game status corresponding to a status command when the status command regarding the game status is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game status) stored in this game status storage area 223f, the current game status can be identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In this embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 erases data when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and therefore, when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the information indicating the current game state stored in the game state storage area 223f is also erased. However, in this embodiment, the state command is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 50) of the main control device 110 executed after the power supply is turned on (S1412 in FIG. 50), so that information indicating the game state set before the power supply is cut off is stored in the game state storage area 223f immediately after the power supply is restored. Therefore, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the game state can always be identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Also, when the game state is variably set in the main control device 110, a state command indicating the game state after the variably set is set (S509 in FIG. 41, S607 in FIG. 42, S1616 in FIG. 52, etc.).

The time-saving information update area 223g is a data area for storing the end conditions of the time-saving state and the progress status for each end condition (the number of times the events subject to the end conditions (for example, the change of the special pattern, the winning of a small win, or the winning of a big win) have been executed). The state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is selected based on the information stored in this time-saving information update area 223a (the end conditions of the time-saving state and the progress status). This time-saving information update area 223g sets the end conditions for terminating the current time-saving state when it receives a time-saving related command including time-saving setting information from the main control device 110, that is, a time-saving setting information command that is determined to be the end timing of the ending performance (S1612 in FIG. 52) in the big win control process of the main control device 110 (S1504 in FIG. 52) and is set when the end conditions of the time-saving state are set (S1613 in FIG. 52).

Then, in the time-saving update process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2216 in FIG. 60), if it is determined that update information for updating the time-saving information (variation information indicating that a special pattern variation has been performed, or small win information indicating that a small win has been won) has been received (S2604 in FIG. 60: Yes, S2615 in FIG. 60: Yes), the current time-saving status is updated to correspond to the received update information.

To explain the data area in the time-saving information update area 223g in detail, the time-saving information update area 223g is configured to temporarily store information corresponding to each item that can be a condition for ending the time-saving state (for example, the number of times the first special pattern changes, the number of times the second special pattern changes, the combined number of changes obtained by adding up the number of times the first special pattern changes and the number of times the second special pattern changes, the number of wins for each small win type (small wins A to C) (the number of times the V winning device 600 starts operating), the number of small wins (the combined number of wins for each small win type)), etc.), and is configured to store, for each item, time-saving setting information (the number of times the condition for ending the time-saving state is met) and update information for each item during the period in which the time-saving state is continuously set (information indicating the number of times it was actually executed).

In this embodiment, the information stored in this time-saving information update area 223g is used to determine which of the multiple end conditions is more likely to be met than the other end conditions, and to determine the number of remaining executions until each end condition is met. Furthermore, the time-saving setting information and update information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g may be used to calculate, for example, the ratio of the value indicated by the update information to the value indicating the end condition of each item included in the time-saving setting information, and the degree of time-saving progress may be displayed as a numerical value (for example, a percentage).

In addition, in this embodiment, the information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g is configured to store update information (information indicating the number of times already performed (number of changes, number of wins)), but without being limited to this, it is also possible to calculate the number of times remaining until the end condition of the time-saving state is met, and store information indicating the calculated remaining number of times in the time-saving information update area 223g.

As described above, in this embodiment, the time-saving setting information and the update information are stored separately, but this is not limited thereto. For example, the information stored as the time-saving setting information may be directly updated. By configuring in this way, the capacity of the time-saving information update area 223g can be reduced.

The provisional win determination flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the winning information (the winning information stored in reserve) before the lottery (variation) of the special pattern is executed contains winning information for a big win, and by being set to ON, it indicates that the winning information stored in reserve contains winning information for a big win. This provisional win determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2306 in FIG. 57) when it is determined that the winning information in the winning information command received from the main control unit 110 contains winning information (S2305 in FIG. 57: Yes) in the winning information-related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57) executed when the winning information command acquired in the main control unit 110's pre-reading process (S707 in FIG. 44) is received by the voice lamp control unit 113.

Then, it is referenced (S2303 in FIG. 57) in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 57), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S2303 in FIG. 57: Yes), various determination processes for the winning information command received thereafter are skipped. It is also referenced (S2903 in FIG. 63) in the performance setting processing (see S2804 in FIG. 63) executed in the variable display setting processing (see S2114 in FIG. 62), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S2903 in FIG. 63: Yes), the process for setting the display status display command indicating the status display mode is skipped.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if it is determined during the processing at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 59) that the winning information in the winning information command received from the main control device 110 contains winning information (S2504 in FIG. 59: Yes), the provisional winning determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2506 in FIG. 59).

As explained above, if the winning information contained in the received winning information command or the winning information reserved and stored at the end of the jackpot includes winning information for a jackpot, the system is configured not to determine whether the winning information included in the winning information command newly received thereafter includes winning information for a jackpot, or to determine whether the currently set game state end condition is met. In other words, if it is determined that the time-saving state will end due to a jackpot being won, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time-saving state will end based on winning information acquired thereafter, so the system is configured to skip this unnecessary process. This reduces the processing load of the process executed by the voice lamp control device 113.

In this embodiment, the system is configured to execute a process to determine the contents of the winning information when a new winning information command is received and when a jackpot game has ended. However, at other times, for example, after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power outage or the like, during the start-up process of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 50), a return winning information command is set to indicate each piece of winning information stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and all of the winning information may be sent to the voice lamp control unit 113, and when the voice lamp control unit 113 receives the return winning information command, the system may execute a process to determine the contents of the winning information.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a new winning information command is received or when the jackpot game ends, the process of determining the contents of the winning information is always executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the contents of the winning information may be configured not to be determined when a predetermined prohibition condition is met. In this case, the predetermined prohibition condition may be, for example, a performance mode prohibition condition that is met when the pachinko machine 10 has multiple performance modes and one of the performance modes is set, a stuck-in-play prohibition condition that is met when a non-jackpot (miss) is consecutively obtained a predetermined number of times (e.g., 500 times) as a result of the special pattern lottery, a continuous performance prohibition condition that is met while a continuous performance that is executed across multiple special pattern variations is being executed based on the jackpot lottery result (win/lose judgment result) included in the winning information, or a multiple-occurrence prohibition condition that is met during a predetermined period after the continuous performance ends (e.g., the period until the special pattern variation is executed twice).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set periods during which an effect (so-called look-ahead effect) according to the contents determined in advance based on the winning information can be executed and periods during which it cannot be executed, so that the player can maintain their sense of anticipation of a big win even if the look-ahead effect is not executed. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that the frequency with which the contents of the winning information are determined is reduced when the above-mentioned prohibition conditions are met, and to configure the system so that the frequency with which the contents of the winning information are determined is increased rather than necessarily determining the contents of the winning information when the prohibition conditions are not met. Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the system so that the player cannot know whether the above-mentioned prohibition conditions are met or not.

The provisional time-saving information update area 223i is a data area for temporarily storing time-saving information (provisional time-saving information) that has been updated in advance in accordance with the winning information included in the winning information command. In this embodiment, the provisional time-saving information stored in this provisional time-saving information update area 223i is referenced to determine in advance the timing at which the time-saving state will end.

In this temporary time-saving information update area 223i, like the time-saving information update area 223g described above, when a time-saving related command including time-saving setting information is received from the main control device 110 (S2602: Yes in FIG. 60), the end condition (time-saving information) for ending the current time-saving state is set (S2603 in FIG. 60), in the time-saving related process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S2210 in FIG. 57), update information corresponding to the received winning information is stored (S2307 in FIG. 57). The provisional time-saving end flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the time-saving end condition has been met based on the provisional time-saving information stored in the provisional time-saving information update area 223i, and when set to on, indicates that the time-saving end condition has been met based on the provisional time-saving information. This provisional time-saving end flag 223j is set to on when it is determined in the winning information-related process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2210 in FIG. 57) that the updated information (provisional time-saving information) in the provisional time-saving information update area 223i meets the time-saving end condition (S2309 in FIG. 57).

Then, it is referenced (S2304 in FIG. 57) in the winning information related processing (S2210 in FIG. 57), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S2304 in FIG. 57: Yes), various determination processes for the winning information command received thereafter are skipped.

As explained above, when the time-saving end condition is met based on the winning information contained in the received winning information command, the system is configured not to determine whether the winning information contained in the winning information command newly received thereafter contains winning information for winning a jackpot, or to determine whether the currently set game state end condition is met. In other words, when it is determined that the time-saving state will end due to winning a jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time-saving state will end based on the winning information acquired thereafter, so the system is configured to skip this unnecessary process. This reduces the processing load of the process executed by the voice lamp control device 113.

The time-saving lower limit flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the number of times the special pattern changes has reached a predetermined number for the termination condition that is established based on the number of times the special pattern changes, and is set to ON to indicate that the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state has reached a predetermined number. This time-saving lower limit flag 223k is set to ON when it is determined that the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state has exceeded a predetermined number (70 times) (the number of time-saving times remaining until the time-saving state ends is less than 30 times) for the termination condition (the number of times the special pattern changes is 100 times) set corresponding to the number of times the special pattern changes (the total number of times the first special pattern changes and the number of times the second special pattern changes) among the termination conditions (time-saving end conditions) for ending the time-saving state (S2216 in FIG. 60). It is then referenced when selecting the status display mode using the status display selection table 222b in the performance setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63) of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2906 in FIG. 63). If it is determined that the remaining number of time-saving times is 0 (S2612 in FIG. 60: Yes), or if it is determined that the end condition is met (S2706 in FIG. 61: Yes) in the small win-related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the time-saving update process (see FIG. 60), it is set to off (S2613 in FIG. 60, S2708 in FIG. 61).

In this way, by providing a flag that is set to ON depending on the progress until the time-saving end condition is met, and configuring the presentation style to vary depending on the setting status of the flag, it becomes possible for the player to predict the timing when the time-saving end condition will be met. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect of the presentation that suggests the timing when the time-saving state will end.

In the first embodiment, the progress until the time-saving end condition is met is determined in two stages, but more stages may be provided. In this case, for example, a flag (counter) that can identify the state every time the special pattern is changed 10 times while the time-saving state is set is provided, and the presentation mode can be changed according to the flag (counter).

The quasi-end condition flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the number of times the special symbol changes has reached a predetermined number of times for the end condition that is established based on winning a small prize by drawing a special symbol, and by being set to ON, indicates that the number of times the special symbol changes during the time-saving state has reached a predetermined number of times. The quasi-end condition flag 223m is referenced in the small prize-related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the time-saving update process (see FIG. 60) (S2703 in FIG. 61), and if the quasi-end condition flag 223m is OFF (S2703 in FIG. 61: No) and it is determined that the quasi-end condition has been established (S2704 in FIG. 61: Yes), it is set to ON (S2705 in FIG. 61). And if it is determined that the end condition has been established (S2706 in FIG. 61: Yes), it is set to OFF (S2707 in FIG. 61).

The fluctuation flag 223n before the time-saving end is a flag for indicating that a fluctuation will be executed before the time-saving state ends (the time-saving end condition is satisfied), and by being set to on, it indicates that the fluctuation just before the time-saving state ends will be executed. Specifically, it is set to on when there is only one period (number of fluctuations) remaining until the time-saving end condition, which is set based on the number of times the special pattern fluctuates, is satisfied among the multiple time-saving state end conditions that are set. By executing the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 62) while this fluctuation flag 223n before the time-saving end is set to on, it becomes possible to determine that the fluctuation is the final fluctuation of the time-saving state, and a performance corresponding to the final fluctuation of the time-saving state can be executed.

This pre-time-saving end fluctuation flag 223n is set to ON (S2611 in FIG. 60) when it is determined in the time-saving update process (see FIG. 60) that the remaining number of time-saving times is 1 (S2610 in FIG. 60: Yes). It is set to OFF (S2614 in FIG. 60, S2709 in FIG. 61) when it is determined that the remaining number of time-saving times is 0 (S2612 in FIG. 60: Yes) or when it is determined that the end condition is met (S2706 in FIG. 61: Yes) in the small win-related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the time-saving update process (see FIG. 60). It is also configured to be referenced (S2905 in FIG. 63) in the performance setting process (see FIG. 63) executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 62), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S2905 in FIG. 63: Yes), a process using the final state display selection table 222c (processing for the final variation in the time-saving state) is executed to set a display state display command indicating the state display mode, and if it is determined that it is not set to on (set to off) (S2905 in FIG. 63: No), a process using the state display selection table 222b (processing for variations other than the final variation in the time-saving state) is executed.

In this embodiment, the time-saving end before change flag 223n is set to determine whether the change before the time-saving end is completed (executed). In addition, for example, a configuration is provided that can reserve and store the winning information of the second special pattern, and a pre-reading process (see FIG. 44) is executed for the reserved and stored winning information, a winning command indicating the result of the pre-reading process is received, and the winning information of the second special pattern that wins the small prize is determined in advance based on the winning command received. Then, a configuration may be added in which the time-saving end before change flag 223n is turned on when a change before the special pattern change that wins the small prize that establishes the end condition of the time-saving state is executed based on the result of the pre-determination. This makes it possible to reliably determine the special pattern change that is one before the time-saving end condition is established in a gaming machine that has multiple time-saving end conditions.

The status effect counter 223o is a counter used for various lotteries used when setting the performance mode of various effects executed by the voice lamp control device 113, and although not shown in the figure, it is updated by one each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 55) is executed. The status effect counter 223o is composed of the same loop counter as the performance counter 223e described above. Note that the detailed configuration is omitted as it is the same as the performance counter 223e described above. The value of this status effect counter 223o is referenced when selecting the status display mode using the status display selection table 222b and the final status display selection table 222c (see FIG. 63).

In this way, when a specific display mode is selected according to a specific regularity (win/lose determination result, setting status of various flags), the display mode selected based on a randomly updated value (value of state presentation counter 223o) can be further divided into more detailed categories, thereby diversifying the display modes and preventing the player from easily understanding the current game state (update status of the time-saving state) based on the selected display mode (display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command memory area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command memory area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 56) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area is read out from the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing corresponding to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the variable display (variable performance) of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 and the preview performance based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC stabilized falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 49).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, referring to FIG. 28, the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 28, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, during the normal game mode (normal mode) as described above, a left-handed hit game is performed and a special 1 game is executed in which the first ball entrance 64 is aimed at. Here, when a jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the game transitions to a different game state after the jackpot ends depending on the type of jackpot that was won.

Specifically, if the type of jackpot won is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and if the type of jackpot won is jackpot A or jackpot B, the game is configured to transition to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), which is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in the normal state, a ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 640 to draw the second special symbol, and if a jackpot is won, the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that a ball does not (is difficult to) enter the second ball entrance 640 even if a right-hand hit is performed during the normal state (normal play), so the act of drawing the second special symbol in the normal state is considered to be a fraudulent act, and this is a measure to prevent a player who has committed a fraudulent act from playing an advantageous game. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the player is configured to be able to play a more advantageous game (game) with the second special symbol than with the first special symbol during the time-saving state, so there was a risk of a fraudulent act causing the second special symbol to be drawn. Therefore, by taking the above-mentioned measures, it is possible to prevent the drawing of the second special symbol from being performed through fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, since this embodiment does not have a configuration for retaining and storing winning information for the second special symbol (winning information acquired when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640), for example, during the time-saving state (when the electric device 640a is likely to be operated to the protruding position), the winning information for the second special symbol is not retained and stored, and the selection (variation) of the second special symbol during the normal state is not executed based on the reserved winning information. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the selection (variation) of the second special symbol from being executed when the normal state is set as the game state during normal play.

When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the game state, the opening action (projection action) of the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 makes it easy to insert a ball into the second ball entrance 640, so a right-hand hit game is performed and a special 2 game is executed, aiming at the second ball entrance 640.

Here, if a small win is won by the drawing of the second special symbol, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small win game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball (the ball passes through a specific area), and the big win game begins. In this embodiment, if a big win game is set (executed) via a small win game, the game state is set to a time-saving state after the big win game ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent discomfort from being caused to a player who has won a big win via a small win game.

In this embodiment, the small prize game is configured to be executed in which the probability that the ball will pass through a specific area (the probability that the V switch 650e3 will detect the ball) during the small prize game differs depending on the small prize type (small prize A to C) that is set when the small prize is won by the lottery of the second special pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the termination conditions (time-saving termination conditions) for terminating the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player (a game state more advantageous than the normal state), a fluctuation count termination condition (first time-saving termination condition) that is established when the number of fluctuations (number of lotteries) of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) reaches a specified number of fluctuations (100 times), and an operation count termination condition (second time-saving termination condition) that is established when the number of wins of the small prize (the number of operations of the V winning device 650 operated based on the small prize win) as a result of the lottery of the special pattern (second special pattern) reaches a specified number of operations are set.

Moreover, as will be described in detail later, the second time-saving end condition is further configured to be set according to the type of small win (the small win game to be executed) that is set when a small win is won.

In addition, in a state (situation) in which the time-saving state is set, if a player wins a jackpot lottery for a special symbol (wins a single type) or wins a small jackpot in a special symbol lottery and, during a small jackpot game (small jackpot game according to the type of small jackpot) corresponding to the small jackpot won, the ball passes through a specific area and a jackpot is won (wins a double type) before the first time-saving end condition or the second time-saving end condition described above is met, the time-saving state will be set repeatedly.

On the other hand, in a state (situation) in which the time-saving state is set, if either the first time-saving end condition (end condition according to the number of times the special pattern changes) or the second time-saving end condition (end condition according to winning a small prize (operation of the V winning device 650)) described above is met before winning one type or two types of prizes, the game state will transition (set) from the time-saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment configured in this way can provide the player with both the possibility of ending the time-saving state (possibility of the second time-saving end condition being met) and the possibility of winning a double prize, if the player wins a small prize in the lottery for the second special symbol that is executed when the time-saving state is set. This can increase the player's interest in the game that is executed during the time-saving state (the lottery for the second special symbol), and improve the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol when the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving a result that is disadvantageous to the player in the "first special symbol fluctuation (lottery) during the time-saving state" that can be executed when the normal state is set as the game state, that is, when left-handed play is being performed and the number of reserved balls (reserved memory number) for the first special symbol is the upper limit (4), a jackpot is won, and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, even if the jackpot is won.

Next, referring to FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, the flow during the small win game of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 29(a)-(f) is a diagram showing the flow of various components during the small win game. As shown in FIG. 29(a)-(f), when the small win game is executed by the control processing of the main control device 110, the display control device 114 executes the small win game presentation on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, when t1 (1 second) has elapsed since the start of the small win game, the V winning port solenoid is driven according to a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 27). In addition, the flow path solenoid 650k is always set to OFF, and the ball that has won the V winning device 650 flows down to the special discharge flow path 650e2. The ball that flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 is detected by the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3, and when the V switch 650e3 detects the ball within 17 seconds (V valid period t5) starting 1 second after the small win game starts, the big win game is executed after the small win game ends, and when the opening period t6 (2 seconds) has passed since the start of the big win game, the first round of round play begins and the special winning port 65 is opened.

In this way, in this embodiment, the ball can be entered into the V winning device 650 during a small win game simply by performing a right-hand play normally, and the V switch 650e3 is configured to detect the ball. By configuring in this way, even if the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is configured to end when the second special pattern is drawn once, the player can play without any inconvenience. In addition, since the time-saving state is configured to end when the second special pattern is drawn once, for example, the type of small win won in the drawing of the second special pattern can be identified, and when a small win disadvantageous to the player (for example, a small win with a small win type of small win C) is won, the ball can not be entered into the V winning device 650 and the game aiming for the next drawing of the second special pattern can be prevented.

<Electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 31 to Fig. 36. Fig. 31 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to the output port 239 via bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is also connected to the third pattern display device 81.

Incidentally, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with different lottery probabilities for a special jackpot or different numbers of prize balls paid out for one special jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

Below, we will first explain the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236, and then explain the work RAM 233.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply device 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power recovery from a power outage. The same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Also, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the value of the pointer indicated by the command is set in the command pointer 231a.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the various fixed value data used in the control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area. This allows sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, if the control programs, etc. are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs, etc. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the occurrence of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from when the address is specified until the data is output. Also, when reading non-contiguous data, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As such, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take a long time to read the commands that make up the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, this may deteriorate the processing performance of the display control device 114.

In this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As described below, the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands that make up the control program without delay. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated presentations.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, which are connected to the image controller 237.

This character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program memory area 234a1 that stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character memory area 234a2 that stores data for images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The NAND flash memory has the characteristic of being able to obtain a large storage capacity in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using a NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character memory area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, in order to further increase the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and can also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control programs and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. This reduces the number of parts in the display control device 114, reducing manufacturing costs and preventing an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads out the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc., and outputs the data to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and also performs known data address conversion so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data blocks.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, including error bits. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing based on erroneous data and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Furthermore, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the bad data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the bad data blocks, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can easily access the character ROM 234 without having to consider the address positions of the bad data blocks, which differ in each NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b determines whether one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If the data is not set, the buffer RAM 234c reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily sets it in the buffer RAM 234c. The ROM controller 234b then performs a known error correction process and outputs the data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is made up of two banks, and one page's worth of data from the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. This allows the ROM controller 234b to, for example, output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page's worth of data, including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237, from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or image controller 237. This improves the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 when reading it out.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (e.g., 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. This NOR ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program memory area 234d1 that stores, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 executes this boot program first after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program memory area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, then 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e., one page of the NAND type flash memory 234a) of this boot program. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads out from the buffer RAM 234c the instruction code at the corresponding address from the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, the reason why not all control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but rather a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the command that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to NAND flash memories in that when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND type flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the command code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND type flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. And, because of the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, by storing a predetermined number of commands from the command to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the NOR type ROM 234d, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (command code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the command code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start up the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if a control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

Now, the boot program is programmed to transfer the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, i.e., the control programs excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and the fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 in a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). Then, the MPU 231 first transfers and stores the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c in which the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released.

Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the address of the internal bus being specified as "0000H", the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, since there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, after the system reset is released, when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control programs from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads out the control programs transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed to set the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

This remaining boot program executes a process of transferring all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) from the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a that corresponds to the initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 64) that is executed after the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 64) by the boot program is completed is set.

The MPU 231 executes the remaining boot program, and all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instructions to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234, MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of character ROM 234 associated with the shortened time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws one frame of an image based on a drawing list (see FIG. 36) sent from the MPU 231, and displays the drawn image in one of the first and second frame buffers 236b and 236c, which will be described later, while outputting the image information for one frame previously displayed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs the drawing process for this one frame of an image and the display process for this one frame of an image in parallel within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the next frame of image, and also executes the process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues drawing instructions to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive image drawing instructions from MPU 231 at image drawing and display processing intervals (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing and display processing are completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also performs processing to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 or transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Images are drawn using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described below, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the display control device 114 uses image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As described below, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw the image. However, when drawing an image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading can be saved, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in costs that would otherwise be caused by providing the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a consisting of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (starting address of the source storage) and the end address (last address of the source storage) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the last address of the source storage.

In accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a specified address in the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. This process is then repeated until all of the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address indicated by the transfer instruction has been transferred.

This allows image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a long period of time to be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of image data while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of image data, which makes it impossible to use the video RAMs 235 and 236 for the image drawing process, and as a result, prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time for the required time.

In addition, since the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used to hold image data transferred from the character ROM 234 without being overwritten while the power is on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a back image area 235c, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, as well as a power-on variable image area 235b and a third design area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that displays the lottery results performed by the main control device 110 through a variable presentation when a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 begins, the MPU 231 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see S4003 and S4004 in FIG. 64).

Here, the power-on variable image will be described with reference to Figure 32. Figure 32 is an explanatory diagram explaining the power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after power is turned on.

Immediately after power-on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b, and then transfers the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 32(a) on the third pattern display device 81 (displaying "○" and "×" on the third pattern display device 81).

At this time, when the display control device 114 receives a display pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a command to start the change, the display control device 114 alternately displays a power-on change image with a "○" pattern in the lower right position on the display screen of the power-on main image as shown in FIG. 32(b) and a power-on change image with a "×" pattern in the same position as the "○" pattern as shown in FIG. 32(c) during the change period. Then, the display control device 114 judges the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 from the display pattern command and stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the change pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, and if it is a "jackpot for special patterns", the image shown in FIG. 32(b) is displayed for a certain period after the change performance stops, and if it is a "miss for special patterns", the image shown in FIG. 32(c) is displayed for a certain period after the change performance stops.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, since players can recognize that some processing is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, they can wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped while the remaining image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operational checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on. Furthermore, by using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of operational checks from deteriorating.

Furthermore, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first entrance ball 64, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw a power-on variable image using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that is always resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, and to alternately display the images shown in Figures 32(b) and (c) on the third pattern display device 81. This allows a simple variable presentation to be performed using the power-on variable image. Therefore, the player can be sure that a lottery has been drawn by the simple variable presentation, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable performance image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, so if a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variable performance can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 31, the explanation will continue. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, referring to FIG. 33, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be explained. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, with FIG. 33(a) showing rear A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and FIG. 33(b) showing rear B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As shown in FIG. 33, the back images corresponding to each of the back faces A and B are prepared in the character ROM 234, and are both longer horizontally than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images (hereafter referred to as "scrolling images") prepared for each back surface A, B are constructed so that the back surface images continue at positions a and c. The images between positions c and d and between positions a and a' are constructed from images that cover the horizontal width of the display area, and after the images between positions c and d are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, when the images between positions a and a' are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, the back surface images are scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

When a change in the type of back surface is decided and the stage is changed to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the corresponding back surface image between positions a and a' as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Then, over time, the display area is moved from left to right relative to the scrolling image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, when the display area reaches the image between positions c and d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the image from position a to position a'. Thus, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection as if they flow to the left.

Next, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c for each rear image will be described. As shown in FIG. 33(a), the rear image A corresponding to the initial stage, the beach stage, has the entire range of the rear image A, that is, all image data corresponding to positions a to d, stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Usually, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the "beach stage," is displayed, so by keeping all image data of the rear image A corresponding to the frequently displayed "beach stage" resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. This reduces the processing load on the display control device 114.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33(b), for rear side B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", only a portion of that rear side, i.e., image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, is stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.

To instantly change the rear image, it would be ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235, but doing so would require a very large capacity RAM to be used for the resident video RAM 235, which could lead to increased costs.

In contrast, in the present pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed to the range from position a to position a' (or the range of Fig. 33 (a) to (b)), and image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between Fig. 33 (a) to (b)) including the initial position is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, when a change of stage is decided by lottery at the start of the change, the initial position of the back B can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the display can be scrolled or the color tone can be changed over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a part of the image is stored for the back B, the increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, the range from position a to position b of rear side B is set so that, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that after scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be scrolled without delay using the image data corresponding to the rear side image stored in the normal video RAM 236 and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, for rear side B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear side images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 31) of the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the rear side image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to rear side images from being overwritten by other image data, so that the rear side image can be displayed reliably.

In addition, on the rear side B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap with each other, with the image data corresponding to the image between position b' and position b being stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the image from position b' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, so that the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

Furthermore, the MPU 231 uses image data from the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between positions c and d is displayed as a display area on the third pattern display device 81. Next, the MPU 231 uses image data from the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between positions a and a' is displayed as a display area on the third pattern display device 81. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling in a smooth connection, as if flowing to the left.

Returning to FIG. 31, the explanation will be continued. The third pattern area 235d is an area for storing the third pattern used in the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81. That is, the third pattern area 235d stores image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns numbered "0" to "9" which are the third patterns. As a result, when performing a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable performance can be started quickly on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the variable performance is not immediately started on the third pattern display device 81 after the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, even though the variable performance has been started on the first pattern display device 37.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters including a "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e. When the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads the image data that is resident in advance in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character design can be changed instantly even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of that error together with the type of error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 can instantly draw each error message image in the image controller 237 by reading out the image data pre-resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so that even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into multiple sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a specific sub-area in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the type of image data should be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads out the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the specified specific sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an instruction to draw an image and an instruction to transfer image data simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for displaying an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame of an image drawn in accordance with instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby displaying one frame of an image in that frame buffer, and while displaying an image in one of the frame buffers, reads out one frame of image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of an image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can display one frame of image drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out one frame of image previously displayed from the other frame buffer, and display the one frame of image that has been read out on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs, and is composed of DRAM. This work RAM 233 has at least a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

The data table storage area 233b is an area that stores a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance that is displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a transfer data table that specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a performance that is displayed based on the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

Here, we will explain the details of the various data tables. First, a display data table is prepared for each presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110. For example, display data tables corresponding to variable presentations, round presentations, ending presentations, and demo presentations are prepared.

The variable performance is a performance that is started in the third pattern display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating the miss is finally stopped and displayed, whereas if the stop type of the variable performance is any of jackpots A to D, the stop pattern indicating the respective jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually checking the stop pattern in this variable performance, and can easily determine the game value awarded according to the jackpot type.

By announcing the time period of the normal symbol in the ending performance, the player can easily recognize the time period of the normal symbol. The longer the time period of the normal symbol, the more opportunities there are for the ball to pass through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, so there are more opportunities for the lottery of the normal symbol and the more opportunities there are for the normal symbol to be drawn. Therefore, there are more opportunities for the electric role to be opened when the normal symbol is hit, so the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 and the lottery of the special symbol is more likely to be drawn. Therefore, the longer the time period of the normal symbol displayed, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be hit, and the more motivated the player is to participate in the game. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize entrance from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters it, so when a normal jackpot occurs and the electric device is opened, making it easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the balls held are unlikely to be reduced or are not reduced even when playing, so the player can have a sense of anticipation that a jackpot with a special pattern will be obtained when the balls held are unlikely to be reduced or are not reduced. This increases the player's motivation to participate in the game, and allows the player to continue to be motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, by announcing in the ending performance that one of the reserved special symbol lotteries will result in a special symbol jackpot, the player can recognize that the reserved special symbol lottery will result in a special symbol jackpot, and the player can be made to feel a sense of expectation that the special symbol will definitely result in a jackpot. This increases the player's motivation to participate in the game, and therefore the player can continue to be motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, but the next variable effect associated with a start winning does not start. The third symbol, consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", is displayed frozen, and only the back image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall staff can recognize that no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round performance, the ending performance, and the demo performance. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable performance, will have one table per variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Now, with reference to Figure 34, the display data table will be described in detail. Figure 34 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed during that time, corresponding to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes one frame's worth of image, and also specify drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, according to the sprite type.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to that magnification ratio is specified. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when a sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through it. The alpha blending information is information used to specify a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information used to specify the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information used to specify the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing information for each sprite is specified for each address as the drawing content for one frame, which includes one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and text. Information about effects and characters is specified as one or more pieces according to the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of rear image. This rear type specifies whether to display either rear A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either the "sand beach stage" or the "deep sea stage"), or whether to display a rear image different from rears A and B. In addition, when specifying that a rear image different from rears A and B is to be displayed, the rear type also specifies which rear image is to be displayed.

When the MPU 231 determines that either back face A or B is to be displayed based on the back face type, it determines the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player from back face A or B as the drawing target, and also determines the range of the back face image to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it determines that a back face image different from back face A or B is to be displayed, it determines the back face image to be displayed from the back face type.

In this embodiment, the case where only the rear view type is specified as the drawing content of the rear view image in the display data table will be described. Alternatively, the rear view type and position information indicating which range of the rear view image corresponding to that rear view type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear view image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the rear view image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear view image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table was started. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the stage when drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the back surface type and position information, type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored, rather than information indicating the elapsed time.

For the third patterns (Pattern 1, Pattern 2, ...), pattern type offset information is recorded as pattern type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern. The reason offset information is determined rather than the type of third pattern directly is that the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern of the current variable performance, and the pattern offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a specified time has elapsed records the offset information from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This makes it possible to stop the fluctuation performance at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third symbol, and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers assigned to each third symbol, so that the third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance is set to be the time during which the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed. While the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed, the third pattern is not visible to the player. Therefore, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player cannot be aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the beginning of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be specified by that display data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, reads out the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) is created, which will be described later. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to instruct the drawing of the image. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 can change the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

If, as in conventional pachinko machines, a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the performance image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed, a large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing programs that become more complex and expansive as the variety of performance images increases, which may limit the processing power of the display control device 114 and result in a limit to the diversification of controllable performance images. In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed simply by replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, so that a variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

The reason why the display data table is prepared in accordance with each performance mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the performance mode to be displayed, and the drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is because the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning in the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each performance mode as described above. In this way, the configuration of preparing a display data table in accordance with each performance mode, setting a display data table buffer according to the performance mode to be displayed, and creating a drawing list frame by frame according to the set data table can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance, and as described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data of the sprites used in the performance specified in the display data table that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

If all image data for sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, then no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and describes the transfer data information of the image data of the sprite (hereinafter referred to as the "image data to be transferred") that should start being transferred at the time indicated by that address (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in Figure 35 correspond to this). Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified in the transfer data table in correspondence with the address corresponding to that transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, null data is specified, which means that there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table (this corresponds to address "0002H" in Figure 35).

The transfer data information includes the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

The first address of the transfer data table, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, just like the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 35) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is contained.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc., and if a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table exists, it reads the transfer data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created, and transfer data information of the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 35, when pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and transmits the drawing list after the addition to image controller 237. On the other hand, when pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data that should start being transferred, and the transfer data information is not added to the generated drawing list, and the drawing list is transmitted to image controller 237.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in image storage area 236a without fail. Then, the image data stored in that image storage area 236a can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in that display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This makes it possible to manage and control the transfer of image data for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which should start being transferred at the time indicated by the address, is specified in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Therefore, the timing of the start of transfer can be specified so that the image data of a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Figures 32(a) to (c). This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see Figure 64) executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see S4005 in Figure 64). Then, when all resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, it is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S4305 in Figure 66(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S4301 in FIG. 66(b)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 66(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S4309 in FIG. 66(b)) are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, a command determination process (see FIGS. 67 to 75) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 76 to 78) are executed so that various images are displayed in response to commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

The simple image display flag 233c is also referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during V interrupt processing (see S6301 in FIG. 79(a)). If the simple image display flag 233c is on, resident target image data exists that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 79(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113, selects a display data table corresponding to the performance mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 36) that describes the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and generates a drawing list (see FIG. 36) for each frame that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Note that if all the image data of the sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared, and the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, if the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is specified (i.e., if no null data is specified), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described below that specifies the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. As described above, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a specified address in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when a specified sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is used to specify an address from which the corresponding drawing contents or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, during the display setting process (see S4303 in FIG. 66B) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, a pointer update process (see S6005 in FIG. 78) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, creates a drawing list (see Figure 36) described below, and also obtains transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effects corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d are displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used to draw a sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. This makes it possible to read images required for display from the character ROM 234 without delay in advance and transfer them to the normal video RAM 236, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. In addition, by writing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Now, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in FIG. 36, it describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, such as the back image used in one frame's image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), the character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, composition processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter specification information in a manner specified by the information, and then performs various processing on the standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read from the various video RAMs, and draws the image obtained by performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, as specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address for the sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type identified from the contents of other images. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data for that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed in the foreground, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by detailed information corresponding to each sprite in the following order: third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the back side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the front side.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in transfer data table buffer 233e, MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the source start address and source end address in character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the destination start address of the sub-area in image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred should be stored) to the end of the drawing list. When the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, image controller 237 reads image data from a specified area in character ROM 234 (area indicated by the source start address and source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a specified sub-area (destination address) in image storage area 236a in normal video RAM 236.

The timing counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When the MPU 231 stores a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, it sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on that display data table. This time data is the presentation time divided by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing and display processing of one frame of image is completed, each time the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 66(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed, the timing counter 233h is decremented by one (see S6007 in FIG. 76). As a result, when the value of the timing counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the presentation.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is a flag indicating the storage status, for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, of whether the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S4002 in FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" for all sprites, indicating that they are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction is set for image data to be transferred that corresponds to a sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, image data for other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the one sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

In addition, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j and determines whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6513 in FIG. 80). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, it sets a transfer instruction for that image data (see S6514 in FIG. 80) and causes the image controller 237 to transfer that image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. This prevents unnecessary data transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a flag for specifying one of the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) into which the image drawn by the image controller 237 is expanded (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer"); if the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Information on this specified drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6602 in FIG. 81).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which the image drawn based on the drawing list is displayed on the designated drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 executes a display process in which the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading out previously displayed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and transferring the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent. In addition, the drawing list is sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed (see S6602 in FIG. 81).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

<Regarding control processing executed by main control device 110 in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 37 to 53. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly divided into start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, main process which is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt process which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second win random number counter C4, and the small win type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second win random number counter C4, and the small win type counter C5 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (999, 99, 99, 239, and 99, respectively, in this embodiment), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, a special pattern change process is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and also sets the change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81. After that, a start winning process is executed in response to a win (start winning) in the first ball entry port 64 (S105). Details of the special pattern change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figures 38 to 43.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to Figures 45 and 46. After the through gate passing process is executed, the V entrance passing process associated with the ball entering the V winning device 650 is executed (S108). Then, the V passing process associated with the entry into the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is executed (S109). Details of the V entrance passing process and the V passing process will be described later with reference to Figures 47 and 48.

Then, the launch control process is executed (S110), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the ball launch is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 38, the special pattern change process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this special pattern change process (S104). This special pattern change process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is a process for controlling the change display of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the change display of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S201). The special symbol jackpot period includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and includes the period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), the period during which the jackpot game is in progress (round game period), and the grace period (ending period) until the round game period ends and the next lottery (variation) of a new special symbol begins.

Here, to determine whether or not a jackpot is currently being won, specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203d is set to ON. If it is determined that a jackpot with a special symbol is currently being won (the jackpot flag 203d is set to ON) (S201: Yes), this process ends.

If the special symbol is not in the jackpot, i.e., if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203d is not set to on (is set to off) (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is not changing (S202: No), it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S203).

When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S203: Yes), that is, when there is neither a big win of a special pattern nor a change in the special pattern, and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, that is, when the condition to start the change (lottery) of the second special pattern is met, the values of the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small win type counter C5 are stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area (S204).

Next, a special pattern change start process is executed to start the change display on the first pattern display device 37a, 37b (S210), and this process is terminated. The special pattern change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S203 that the game ball has not entered the second ball entrance 640 (S203: No), the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b is obtained (S205). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b is greater than 0 (S206). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b is 0 (S206: No), the reserved balls of the first special pattern that will start the fluctuation (lottery) have not been secured at this time, so this process for executing the special pattern fluctuation is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203b is not 0 (S206: Yes), that is, if the reserved balls of the first special pattern that starts the fluctuation (lottery) are secured, the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203b is subtracted (S207), and a reserved ball number command (special pattern 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203b changed by the calculation is set (S208). After the special pattern 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S208, the data stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S209). After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process ends.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b has elapsed (S211). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S211: No), that is, if the current time is during the change period of the special pattern, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S211, if the change time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S211: Yes), a display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b is set (S212). The setting of the stop display is performed in advance by the special pattern change start process (S210) described later with reference to FIG. 39. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in this embodiment, the stop display set in the process of S212 is configured to be displayed on the first pattern display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). By continuously displaying the display mode (stop display) of the stopped pattern for a predetermined period in this way, unlike when the changing pattern is displayed for an instant, the player can be sure to recognize the content of the first pattern that is stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, the predetermined period (fixed period) during which the stopped state of the first pattern is displayed is set to 0.5 seconds, but other configurations may be used. For example, if a flashing display is performed in which the lit state and the off state are repeated to indicate that the first pattern is changing, then the fixed period can be set to a period longer than the period of one lit display when the flashing display is performed (for example, 0.2 seconds). By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether the first pattern is changing or stopped (fixed).

After the process of S212 is completed, when the variable display of the special symbol being executed in the first symbol display device 37a, 37b starts, it is determined whether the lottery result (the current determination result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variable start process (see S210 in FIG. 39) is a special symbol jackpot (S213). If it is determined that the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S213: Yes), the opening scenario of the specific winning port (variable winning device) 65 is set based on the jackpot type (the jackpot type set when a jackpot is won) (S214), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S215). Next, the jackpot start flag 203c and the jackpot in progress flag 203d are set to ON (S216), the time-saving counter 203k is set to 0 (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and the process ends.

In other words, in this embodiment, as explained in the process of S217, when a special symbol is won as a jackpot, the time-saving state is configured to end at a timing between the end of the variation of the special symbol (the end of the final display of the first symbol) and the start of the jackpot game. The timing for ending the time-saving state based on the winning of a special symbol jackpot may be a predetermined timing, and as in the above-mentioned embodiment, other than after the final display of the special symbol (first symbol), for example, the time-saving state may end at the start of the variation of the special symbol that won the jackpot, or the time-saving state may end at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing when the final display starts). In addition, the time-saving state may end at the timing when the jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot is started, or a predetermined period after the jackpot game is started (for example, the timing when the round game starts when the variable winning device 65 is opened), or the time-saving state may end at the timing when the jackpot game is finished.

Furthermore, the timing for ending the time-saving state based on winning a jackpot with a special symbol (the timing for establishing the time-saving end condition that is established when a jackpot with a special symbol is won) may be configured to be preset to only one of the multiple timings mentioned above, or the time-saving state may be configured to end at a different timing depending on the type of jackpot won.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the time-saving state is ended when the special symbol starts to change, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the time-saving state has ended (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes has reached a specified number (100 times)) and the normal state has been set, or whether the time-saving state has ended because a jackpot was won during the time-saving state. This allows the player to focus on the content of the presentation display (changing display) of the third symbol that corresponds to the special symbol change that is executed when the time-saving state ends, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, by setting different times for the time-saving end conditions to be met for each of the multiple jackpot types (time to end the time-saving state when a jackpot is won), it is possible to prevent the player from understanding the lottery result (discrimination result) of the special symbol based on the time-saving state end timing. Note that, as part of the times for the time-saving end conditions to be met that are set for each of the multiple jackpot types, a time-saving end timing dedicated to the jackpot may be set that notifies the player that the lottery result (discrimination result) of the special symbol this time is a jackpot when the player identifies the time when the time-saving state has ended, in other words, the time-saving state ends only when the time-saving end condition that is met due to winning a jackpot is met.

By configuring it in this way, you can know when the time-saving state ends and quickly find out that you've won the jackpot, lengthening the period during which you can feel superior. To further enhance this effect, it's a good idea to configure the end of the time-saving state for the jackpot described above to be set in the first half of the fluctuation period from when the special pattern fluctuation is executed to when the special pattern fluctuation ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S213 that the current lottery result is not a big win (S213: No), a time-saving count update process is executed to update the time-saving count (S219), and then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win or not (S220). Note that a detailed explanation of the time-saving count update process (S219) described above will be given later with reference to FIG. 42, but in this process, a process is executed to update information for the variation count end condition that can be established based on the number of times the special pattern varies (the number of times the special pattern is drawn), out of the multiple time-saving end conditions that are set.

If it is determined in the process of S220 that the current lottery result is a small win (S220: Yes), the small win start setting process is executed (S221), the process of S218 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S220 that the current lottery result is not a small win (S220: No), the small win start setting process (S221) is skipped, the process of S218 is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38) of this embodiment is configured to determine whether the selection (variation) conditions for the second special symbol are met (processing of S203 in FIG. 38) in priority over whether the selection (variation) conditions for the first special symbol are met. This is because the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player, does not have a reserve memory means for reserve-storing winning information, and is configured to be a special symbol that is more difficult to vary (draw) than the first special symbol, since the second special symbol is variable (easy to vary) when the time-saving state is set as the game state and cannot be changed (hard to vary) when the normal state is set.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, if the conditions for selecting (changing) the first special pattern and the conditions for selecting (changing) the second special pattern are met simultaneously (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 37) of the main control unit 110), the first special pattern will start to change in preference to the second special pattern, which is more difficult to change (draw), causing discomfort to the player. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the drawing (variation) of the second special symbol is configured to make it easier for the player to win a lottery result that is favorable to the player (to make it easier to win a small prize) than the drawing (variation) of the first special symbol. Therefore, if the drawing (variation) conditions of the first special symbol and the drawing (variation) conditions of the second special symbol are met simultaneously (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 37) of the main control device 110), the first special symbol will start to change in preference to the second special symbol, which is less likely to change (draw), which can cause a problem of discomfort.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when executing the process to start the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the selection (variation) conditions of the special symbol (the second special symbol in this embodiment) that has high added value for the player (the probability of winning a small jackpot is higher than that of the first special symbol, and it is difficult to actually execute the selection (variation)) are determined with priority (first), so the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, the process for updating the time-saving count is configured to execute a process related to the condition for ending the number of times that the special pattern changes (time-saving count update process (S219)) that is established according to the number of times the special pattern changes, and then execute a process related to the condition for ending the number of times that the winning number of times that is established according to the winning of a small win (small win start setting process (S221)). By configuring it in this way, if a lottery result is obtained in which the condition for ending the number of times that the special pattern changes and the condition for ending the number of times that the winning number of times are established are both established in one special pattern change (lottery), the condition for ending the number of times that the time-saving state is terminated based on the fact that the condition for ending the number of times that the change is established is established.

In this way, by configuring the system to determine whether or not each of the multiple time-saving end conditions is met in a predetermined order for multiple time-saving end conditions, it is possible to end the time-saving state regularly even when multiple time-saving end conditions can be reached in the same special pattern change (lottery).

The above-mentioned configuration can be used in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to end the time-saving state after the special symbol (first symbol) is confirmed and displayed when the variable count end condition is met, and to end the time-saving state after the small win game ends when the winning count end condition is met, so that the timing of the end of the time-saving state can be made to differ depending on the time-saving end condition that is met.

Specifically, for example, if small prize B is won and the winning count end condition is met alone, the time-saving state ends after the small prize game corresponding to that small prize B ends. On the other hand, if small prize B is won in a lottery (variation) for a special symbol that meets the variable count end condition, the variable count end condition is met first, and the time-saving state ends before the small prize game corresponding to small prize B starts, in other words, after the confirmation display of the special symbol (first symbol) that indicates the special symbol lottery result (small prize B).

In the above example, even if the time-saving state is set as the game state and the time-saving state ends based on the lottery (variation) of the special symbol that wins the small win B, the timing for ending the time-saving state (whether or not there is time-saving during the small win game) can be variably set according to the time-saving end condition that is met, so the length of the period that is advantageous to the player can be made different according to the time-saving end condition that is met. This makes it possible to set time-saving end conditions that are advantageous to the player and time-saving end conditions that are disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in addition to playing in the hope that the time-saving end condition will not be met, it is possible to provide the player with a new gameplay experience in which the player hopes that the most advantageous time-saving establishment condition will be met.

For a gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, for example, the second ball entry port 640 may be provided above the specific winning port (V winning device 650) that opens during a small win game so that a ball can be entered into the ball entry port (second ball entry port 640) that is possible (easy) to enter when the electric device 640a opens (long opening) even during a small win game, and the game can be played by entering the ball into the second ball entry port 640 during a small win game.

Furthermore, by configuring it possible to set the type of small win in which a small win game is played over a long period (e.g., 60 seconds) (the period during which the V winning device 650 is open (1.8S) and closed), and configuring it so that the number of prize balls (e.g., 3 balls) offered to the player when the ball enters the V winning device 650 is less than the number of prize balls (e.g., 5 balls) offered to the player when the ball enters the second ball entrance, the game result (the number of balls won by the game) can be made to differ greatly depending on whether or not the time-saving state is in place during the small win game. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, by providing technology for changing the timing of the end of the time-saving state as described above, a more exciting game can be offered to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 39, the special symbol change start process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S210). This special symbol change start process (S210) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is a process for determining whether or not a lottery (win/lose) is drawn for a "special symbol big win", a "special symbol small win" or a "special symbol miss" based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and for determining the presentation pattern (change time) of the change presentation performed by the first symbol display device 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small winning type counter C5 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are obtained (S301). Next, the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number table 202a (special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, special symbol 2 random number table 202a2) corresponding to the obtained type of special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) (S302). Specifically, if the first special symbol is selected based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 22(b)) to determine whether or not it is a big win, and if the second special symbol is selected based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 22(c)) to determine whether or not it is a big win or a small win.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S303). If it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S303: Yes), the jackpot type is obtained based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b corresponding to the type of special symbol obtained (S304). More specifically, the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 or the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2, and it is determined which jackpot type is among the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots A to D) (see FIG. 23(b) or (c)).

In this embodiment, the discrimination value for determining a jackpot is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this is not limited to this and different random number values may be used. By configuring it in this way, a random number value that is determined to be a miss for the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a win for the second special symbol, so that even if fraudulent play is performed by aiming for the same random number value, it is possible to prevent a biased execution of a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of random numbers that are determined to be a jackpot is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this is not limited to the above, and the number of random numbers that are determined to be a jackpot may be set to be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By configuring it in this way, the probability of a jackpot can be made different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a lottery is held for the special symbol with the higher probability of a jackpot, the player can have more hope for a jackpot.

Then, the display mode at the time of the jackpot corresponding to the type of special pattern (special pattern type) and the jackpot type is set (S305). In this process of S305, the display mode (illumination state of LED 37a) of the first pattern display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to D). Also, the jackpot type (jackpot A to D) is set as the stop type so that the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Then, the big win variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S306), and the process proceeds to S314. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S306, the variation time (display time) of the variation performance in the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third pattern until it stops at the big win pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is determined. Specifically, the type of the special pattern obtained, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of RAM 203 are compared with the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 to determine the variation time of the pattern variation (FIG. 23(b) or FIG. 24).

In the process of S314, a variation pattern command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S306 (S314). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S305 (S315). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) described below. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as is to the display control device 114. When the process of S315 is completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big win in the process of S303 (S303: No), it is next determined whether the lottery result is a small win or not (S307). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S307: Yes), the small win type is obtained based on the small win type selection table 202f (S308). More specifically, the value of the small win type counter C5 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the small win type selection table 202f to determine which small win type is among the three types of small wins for special patterns (small wins A to C) (see FIG. 22).

Next, the display mode at the time of the small win corresponding to the small win type is set (S309). After that, the small win variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at the small win symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similar to the process of S306, the type of the special symbol acquired, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of RAM 203 are compared with the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 to determine the variation time of the pattern variation (FIG. 23(b) or FIG. 24).

Then, the small win type acquired in the process of S308 is stored in the small win type storage area 203e (S311), and then the processes of S314 and S315 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38). Note that in this embodiment, since only the second special symbol out of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to win the small win, there is no need to refer to the special symbol type in S308 and S309. However, if the small win is also won in the lottery for the first special symbol, for example, the special symbol type may also be referenced in the processes of S308 and S309 to acquire the small win type, and the display mode at the time of the small win may be set.

In this case, in the processing of S314 and S315, when the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be a small win, a command corresponding to the set variation pattern (see S310) and stop type (see S309) is set.

If it is determined that the lottery result is not a small win (S307: No), the display mode corresponding to the type of special symbol when it is a miss is set (S312). After that, the variation pattern when it is a miss is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S313). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at the miss symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, as in the process of S306, the type of the acquired special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are compared with the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 to determine the variation time of the pattern variation (FIG. 23(b) or FIG. 24). Next, the above-mentioned processes of S314 and S315 are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38).

Next, referring to FIG. 40, the small win start setting process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the small win start setting process (S221). This small win start setting process (S221) is a process executed within the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and sets the start of the small win game based on the small win type (small win A to C), and executes a process for updating the time-saving information according to the small win that has been won (update process for the win count end condition).

When the small win game starts, this pachinko machine 10 changes the V winning device 650 to an open state where a ball can (easily) win a prize, and when the ball that wins the V winning device 650 passes through a specific area (V winning switch (V switch) 650e3), the big win game is executed (set) after the small win game ends.

In other words, the game state in which the small win game is executed is configured to be an advantageous state in which the ball can enter the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and an advantageous state in which the possibility of executing a big win game is higher than in the normal game state. Note that, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, different small win games are executed according to the small win type (small wins A to C) that is set when a small win is won, and the possibility of the ball passing through a specific area during a small win game differs depending on each small win type.

By configuring it in this way, the possibility (expectation) of a big win game (two types of win) being played (set) can be changed depending on the small win game that is played, so players can be interested not only in whether or not they will win a small win, but also in the type of small win they win, which can increase the excitement of the game.

When the small win start setting process (S221) is executed, first, an opening scenario corresponding to the small win type is set (S401). After that, a jackpot type corresponding to the small win type is set in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h (S402). More specifically, based on the small win type and the small win type selection table 202f, the V-passing jackpot type (a jackpot game that is set (executed) when the ball passes through a specific area during a small win game) is determined. As described above, if the small win type is A, it is determined to be a jackpot A (15-round time-saving jackpot), if the small win type is B, it is determined to be a jackpot B (5-round time-saving jackpot), and if the small win type is C, it is determined to be a jackpot A (5-round time-saving jackpot) (see FIG. 22). In other words, in this embodiment, the content of the jackpot (two types) that is set (executed) when the ball passes through a specific area during a small jackpot game, and the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot (one type) is won by drawing a special pattern, are the same jackpot game, so that when a two types jackpot is won (when the ball passes through a specific area), the jackpot type (jackpot A or B) that is set for the one type jackpot is set according to the type of small jackpot that was executed.

In this way, when a 2-kind win is obtained, a jackpot type is set and a process is executed to start the jackpot game based on the set jackpot type. This makes it possible to standardize the process related to the jackpot game when a 1-kind win is obtained and when a 2-kind win is obtained, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control unit 110.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this embodiment, it may be possible to set a jackpot game that can be executed only when a single type is won, or only when a double type is won, or it may be configured to execute different jackpot game processes for a single type and a double type.

Returning to FIG. 40, the explanation will continue. After the process of S402 is completed, the start of the small win is set based on the small win type (S403), and the small win start flag 203f and the small win in progress flag 203g are set to ON (S404). After that, the small win time-saving update process is executed (S405), and this process ends. This small win time-saving update process (S405) is for executing a process for updating the time-saving information corresponding to the winning count end condition, which is the end condition of the time-saving state that can be established when a small win is won, and a process for transitioning the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state when the winning count end condition is established by updating the time-saving information, and the details of this will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

Now, referring to FIG. 41, the small win time-saving update process (S405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small win time-saving update process (S405). This small win time-saving update process (S405) is a process executed in the small win start setting process (see FIG. 40) of the special pattern change process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is a process for updating the time-saving information based on the small win that has been won, and updating the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state when the time-saving end condition is met.

In the small win time-saving update process (S405), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203k is greater than 0 (S501). In other words, it is determined whether the current state is the time-saving state. In the process of S501, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203k is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S501: No), since the small win has been won in a game state other than the time-saving state, this process is skipped in its entirety to update the time-saving information, and this process is terminated. Note that in this embodiment, since it is configured so that the small win cannot be won (the lottery (variation) of the second special pattern is not executed) except in a state in which the time-saving state is set, if it is determined in the process of S501 that the time-saving state is not set, an error command for executing an error notification (abnormal notification) may be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203k is greater than 0, that is, the time-saving state is set (S501: Yes), it is next determined whether the small win type of the small win that has been won this time is "small win A" (S502). Here, in the process of S502, the small win type stored in the small win type storage area 203e in the process of S311 of the special pattern variation start process (see FIG. 39) is read out and determined.

In the process of S502, if it is determined that the type of the current small win is "small win A" (S502: Yes), the value of the small win A counter 203m is decremented by 1 (S503), and it is determined whether the value of the small win A counter 203m after the decrement is 0 (S504). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S504: Yes), this means that the time-saving end condition (the win count end condition corresponding to the small win A) has been met with the current small win, so the value of the time-saving counter 203k, which has been measuring the period until the variable count end condition is met, is set to 0 (S505), and the values of the small win A counter 203m, the small win B counter 203n, and the small win C counter 203p, which have been measuring the various win count end conditions, are each set to 0 (S506), and the game state is set to the normal state (S507).

By executing the above-mentioned processes of S505 to S507, when one of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of the counters for measuring the period until the other time-saving end conditions are satisfied can be set to values indicating that the time-saving end conditions have been satisfied. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the execution of processes for updating the time-saving information (processes for updating the values of the small win A counter 203m, small win B counter 203n, small win C counter 203p, and time-saving counter 203k) after the time-saving end condition is satisfied (after the normal state is set as the game state). This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary processes from being executed, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control device 110.

In this embodiment, when any of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters for updating the time-saving information corresponding to each of the multiple time-saving end conditions are simply set to 0 (a value indicating that the time-saving end condition is satisfied). Therefore, after the time-saving state ends, it is not possible to determine which time-saving end condition was satisfied to end the previous time-saving state. However, for example, a storage means capable of storing the satisfied time-saving end conditions may be provided, and the type of time-saving end condition satisfied in the past and the number of times it was satisfied may be determined.

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to determine the time-saving end condition that is likely to be met based on the calculation result calculated from the design value and the actual number of times it is met, and to suggest (notify) the player of the time-saving end condition that is likely to be met based on the determined content. Furthermore, it is possible to configure it so that the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to other time-saving end conditions when one time-saving end condition is met (for example, the values of the small win A counter 203m, small win B counter 203n, and small win C counter 203p at the time when the value of the time-saving counter 203k becomes 0) can be stored, and the time-saving end condition that is most difficult to meet, that is, the time-saving end condition that has the largest value of time-saving information at the time when one time-saving end condition is met among the multiple time-saving end conditions, can be determined.

After the process of S507 is completed, a remaining time-saving count command corresponding to the subtracted value of each small win counter is set (S508), a status command indicating the current game status is set (S509), and this process ends. The commands set in S508 and S509 are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) described below. The voice lamp control device 113 manages time-saving information based on the received remaining time-saving count command, and sets a status display mode to indicate (indicate) the time-saving status (the period until the time-saving status ends). It also grasps the current game status based on the received status command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S504 that the value of the small win A counter 203m is not 0 (S504: No), the time-saving state will not end due to the current small win, so the process skips the processes of S505 to S507 for ending the time-saving state and moves to the process of S508.

Returning to the above-mentioned process of S502, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S502, if it is determined that the type of the small prize won this time is not "small prize A" (it is "small prize B" or "small prize C") (S502: No), it is next determined whether the type of the small prize won this time is "small prize B" (S510). If it is determined that it is "small prize B" (S510: Yes), the value of the small prize B counter 203n is decremented by 1 (S511), and then it is determined whether the decremented value of the small prize B counter 203n is 0 (S512).

If it is determined in the process of S512 that the value of the small win B counter 203n is 0 (S512: Yes), this means that the time-saving end condition (the win count end condition corresponding to the small win B) has been met with the current small win, so the process proceeds to the process of S505 described above, and the process for ending the time-saving state is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S512 that the value of the small win B counter 203n is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S512: No), the time-saving state will not end due to the current small win, so the process skips the processes of S505 to S507 for ending the time-saving state and moves to the process of S508.

If it is determined in the processing of S510 that the type of the small prize won this time is not "small prize B," i.e., it is "small prize C" (S510: No), the value of the small prize C counter 223p is decremented by 1 (S513), and it is determined whether the value of the small prize C counter 223p after the decrement is 0 (S514).

If it is determined in the process of S514 that the value of the small win C counter 223p is 0 (S514: Yes), this means that the time-saving end condition (the win count end condition corresponding to the small win C) has been met by the current small win, so S515 to S517 are executed to execute the same processes as S505 to S507 described above, and then the process proceeds to S508. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S514 that the value of the small win C counter 203p is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S514: No), the time-saving state does not end due to the current small win, so the process skips the processes of S515 to S517 for ending the time-saving state and proceeds to the process of S508.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when the variation time of the special symbol that won the small win has elapsed, the counter value corresponding to the small win is subtracted, and it is determined whether or not the time-saving end condition (win count end condition) that is established based on the small win is established. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to end the time-saving state based on the win count end condition before the small win game is played. Therefore, regardless of whether the time-saving end condition, the variation count end condition or the win count end condition, is established, it is possible to prevent a large difference in the timing to end the time-saving state.

Specifically, in this first embodiment, if the fluctuating count end condition, i.e., the time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of times the special pattern fluctuates, is established, the time-saving state is configured to end at the timing when the final display of the special pattern (first pattern) ends, and if the winning count end condition, i.e., the time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of times a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery, is established, the time-saving state is configured to end at the set start timing of the small prize game after the final display of the special pattern (first pattern).

In other words, regardless of which time-saving end condition is met, the time-saving state ends immediately after the corresponding special symbol stops changing. This makes it difficult for the player to tell which time-saving end condition was met to end the currently set time-saving state. In order for the player to determine whether the time-saving state has ended, for example, it is necessary to identify the length of the normal symbol (second symbol) change time and the opening pattern of the electric role 640a. However, by setting the time-saving state to end when the small win start is set (just before the small win game starts) as in this embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to tell whether the time-saving state has ended immediately after the small win game starts.

In this embodiment, the time-saving state is configured to end at approximately the same timing (a concept that includes a time difference that is difficult for a player to distinguish) when either the variable count end condition or the winning count end condition is met among the multiple time-saving end conditions. However, other configurations may be used. For example, when the variable count end condition is met, the time-saving state may be ended immediately after the confirmation display of the special pattern (first pattern), and when the winning count end condition is met, the time-saving state may be ended after the small win game that is executed after the confirmation display of the special pattern (first pattern) ends. By configuring in this way, the time-saving state can be maintained for the period during which the small win game is being played.

Therefore, during the small win game, the player cannot determine whether the time-saving state has ended due to the current small win win, and it is difficult to know whether the time-saving state has ended until the small win game ends (until the game result of whether or not a double win has been won is announced). Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 having a gameplay that allows a double win to be won during a small win game, as in this embodiment, the player is configured to be notified of whether the time-saving state has ended after the small win game ends, so that the player plays while predicting whether the current small win game is based on a small win that ends the time-saving state, and this makes it possible for the player to always be eager to aim for a double win in the small win game that is executed during the time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 42, the time-saving count update process (S219) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the time-saving count update process (S219). This time-saving count update process (S219) is a process executed during the special pattern change process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is a process for updating the time-saving count and setting the game state to the normal state.

In the time-saving count update process (S219), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203k is greater than 0, i.e., whether the time-saving mode is currently in progress (S601). In the process of S601, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203k is not greater than 0 (is 0), i.e., the time-saving mode is not in progress (S601: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203k is greater than 0, i.e., the time-saving mode is in progress (S601: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203k is decremented by 1 (S602), and the process proceeds to S603.

In the process of S603, a remaining time-saving count command is set (S603) indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203k changed by the calculation (subtracted by 1). The remaining time-saving count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) described later.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 0 (S604). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 0 (S604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S605), and the small win A counter 203m, the small win B counter 203n, and the small win C counter 203p are set to 0 (S606). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S604 that the value of the time-saving counter 203k is not 0 (S604: No), this process ends and returns to the special pattern change process (see FIG. 38).

As explained above, in this embodiment, the time-saving end condition (change count end condition) based on the number of times the special pattern changes is determined by the time-saving count update process (see FIG. 42), and the time-saving end condition (win count end condition) based on the number of times the special pattern has been won is determined by the small win time-saving update process (see FIG. 41). In either process, if any of the multiple time-saving end conditions set is satisfied, the values of various counters indicating the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to the other time-saving end conditions are all set to a value (0) indicating that the time-saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, regardless of which time-saving end condition is satisfied, the process contents for terminating the time-saving state can be unified.

In this embodiment, in order to indicate the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to each time-saving end condition, various counters are set to values indicating each time-saving end condition when the time-saving state is set, and when the time-saving information corresponding to each time-saving end condition is determined, the values of the various counters are subtracted, and when the subtracted value becomes 0, it is determined that the corresponding time-saving end condition is established. However, it is also possible to set the values of various counters to 0 when the time-saving state is set, and when the corresponding time-saving information is determined, the counter value is incremented by 1, and when it is determined that the counter value after the increment is a value indicating the time-saving end condition, the time-saving state is terminated. In other words, it is sufficient to provide a configuration that includes a means for determining whether the time-saving end condition is established and an update means for updating the time-saving information corresponding to each time-saving end condition (such as the number of times the special pattern changes or the number of times a small jackpot is won) when the time-saving state is set.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, among the time-saving end conditions, the winning count end condition is an end condition that is established when the number of times each small win type has reached a predetermined number. However, other than this, for example, a winning count end condition corresponding to the total number of times each small win type has been set, that is, the total number of small wins won during the period in which the time-saving state is set, may be set, or a winning count end condition that is established when the combined number of times small win B has been set and the number of times small win C has been set reaches a predetermined number may be set.

In this case, for the number of wins where the win count end condition corresponding to only small win B is met (number of times that small win B ends (e.g., 3 times)) and the number of wins where the win count end condition corresponding to only small win C is met (number of times that small win C ends (e.g., 5 times)), the combined number described above should not only be less than the sum of the number of times that small win B ends and the number of times that small win C ends, but should also be set to be less than the larger of the number of times that small win B ends and the number of times that small win C ends (5 times in this example). This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the time-saving state, since it becomes impossible to predict the end timing of the time-saving state without grasping the time-saving state in a complex manner, for the small win type that is set when a small win is won during the time-saving state.

Next, the start winning process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and determines whether or not there has been a win (start winning, ball winning) in the first winning port (first ball entry port) 64. If it is determined that there has been a win, that is, if a ball is detected by the ball entry detection switch (not shown) installed in the first ball entry port 64 (S701: Yes), various random number counters are obtained and their values are held.

When the start winning process (FIG. 43, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning, ball entry) in the first winning port (first ball entry port) 64 (S701). Here, the ball entry detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64 is configured to determine whether the state in which the ball is detected continues over three timer interrupt processes that are repeatedly executed, thereby determining the entry (entry) of the ball in the first winning port (first ball entry port) 64. In this way, by configuring it to determine that the ball has won (entered) only when it is determined that the ball has been detected continuously for a predetermined period (the period during which the timer interrupt process is executed three times (4 milliseconds)), for example, even if a small amount of electricity generated by the flow of the ball becomes noise and the sensor (entry detection switch) turns on momentarily (the state in which the passage of the ball is detected), it is possible to distinguish between the event generated by the noise (instantaneous on) and the event generated by the ball passing (on that continues for a predetermined period) and execute the process.

When using control that determines that a ball has entered the game when a ball has been detected continuously for a predetermined period of time, it is advisable to configure the system to determine that an abnormality has occurred not only when the period during which it is determined that the ball has been detected is less than the predetermined period (instantaneous detection due to noise) as described above, but also when the period exceeds an upper limit period that is longer than the predetermined period, and not to determine that the ball has entered the game (scored). This makes it possible to prevent the system from erroneously determining that a ball has entered the game (scored), even if noise is generated for a long period of time due to fraudulent operation.

When it is determined that the ball has entered (entered) the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b (the number of reserved balls N1 for the variable display of the special symbol) is obtained (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

In the process of S703, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (3 or less) (S703: Yes), the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b is incremented by 1 (S704), and a reserved ball count command (special pattern 1 reserved ball count command) indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b changed by this calculation is set (S705).

The reserved ball count command (special pattern 1 reserved ball count command) set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S705, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small winning type counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above (see FIG. 37) are stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of RAM 203 (S706). Note that in the process of S706, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b is referenced, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2 is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3 is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 is set as the first area.

Then, in the process of S707, a look-ahead process is executed (S707). After that, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there has been no winning (ball entry) in the first winning port (ball entry port) 64 (S701: No), or if it is determined that there has been a winning (ball entry) in the first winning port (ball entry port) 64 (S701: Yes) but the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b is not less than 4 (is 4) (S703: No), the process proceeds to the look-ahead process of S707.

As described above, in this embodiment, the winning information for the first special pattern (the right to hold a lottery) is configured to be reserved and stored up to a predetermined number (4), and the winning information for the second special pattern is configured not to be reserved and stored. However, a configuration may be used in which the winning information for the first special pattern and the winning information for the second special pattern are both reserved and stored up to a predetermined number. In this case, the process described above with reference to FIG. 43 may be configured to be performed on the winning information for the second special pattern (second winning port (ball entry port) 640).

In addition, when using a configuration in which winning information can be reserved and stored for both the first special pattern and the second special pattern, the upper limit number of winning information that can be reserved and stored for each special pattern may be unified (e.g., 4), or different values may be set as the upper limit numbers (e.g., 4 for the first special pattern and 2 for the second special pattern). Furthermore, the upper limit number that can be reserved and stored may be set to the sum of the number of reserved balls (reserved memory number) for the first special pattern and the number of reserved balls (reserved memory number) for the second special pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, we will explain the look-ahead process (S707), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S707).

In this pre-reading process (S707 in FIG. 44), first, it is determined whether there is a new winning (ball winning) in the first winning slot (ball entry slot) 64 (S801). If it is determined that there is no new winning in the first winning slot (ball entry slot) 64 (S801: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning in the first winning slot (ball entry slot) 64 (S801: Yes), the lottery result, jackpot type, and fluctuation pattern are obtained in advance based on the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, and the fluctuation pattern table 202d (normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 or time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2) (S802).

Then, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result, jackpot type, and variation pattern obtained in the process of S802 is set (S803), and this process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it executes a winning information-related process (see FIG. 57), which will be described later, and sets the display mode of various effects executed by the third pattern display device 81, and performs a process to (provisionally) update the progress of the time-saving state in advance. Then, the winning information included in the winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, referring to FIG. 45, the normal symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change process (S106). This normal symbol change process (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is a process for controlling the change display and change time of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening operation and opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, etc.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 45), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S901). The normal symbol (second symbol) is winning when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a win and when the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is being controlled to open and close. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S901: Yes), a new normal symbol variation (lottery) cannot be started (executed), so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (S901: No), then it is determined whether the display state of the second pattern display device 83 is changing (normal pattern changing) (S902). If it is determined that the display state of the second pattern display device 83 is not changing (normal pattern changing) (S902: No), that is, if it is determined that the normal pattern is not currently winning or changing, that is, if it is determined that a new normal pattern change (lottery) can be started (executed), then it is determined whether a second winning random number counter is stored in the second pattern reserved ball execution area (S903).

In the process of S903, if it is determined that the second winning random number counter is not stored in the second pattern reserved ball execution area, that is, if it is determined that there is no winning information for a new normal pattern to be executed (S903: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the second pattern reserved ball execution area (S903: Yes), the value of the stored second winning random number counter C4 is obtained (S904).

Then, based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S904 and the normal pattern (second) winning random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal pattern is a winning one is obtained (S905). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second winning type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal pattern is a winning one, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", it is determined that the normal pattern is a losing one.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the normal symbol obtained by the process of S905 is a winning normal symbol (S906), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol (S906: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is set (S907), and the process proceeds to S909. In the process of S907, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has ended, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as the stopping symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S906 that the normal pattern is a miss (S906: No), the display mode in the event of a miss is set (S908), and the process proceeds to S909. In this process of S908, after the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 has ended, the "X" pattern is set to be lit and displayed as the stopping pattern (second pattern). Once the setting of the display mode in the event of a miss has been completed, the process proceeds to S909.

When the processing of S907 or S908 is completed, in the processing of S909, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state for normal symbols (S909), and if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state for normal symbols (S909: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S910), and then the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203q is set to ON (S911), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state for normal symbols (it is in the normal state) (S909: No), the normal symbol fluctuation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S912), and this processing ends.

The normal symbol short time variation flag 202q, which is set to ON in the processing of S911, is a configuration for temporarily storing whether or not the game state at the timing when the lottery for the normal symbol is executed is in the time-shortened state, and is referenced when the variation of the normal symbol is stopped and the opening operation of the electric role device 640a is set. This makes it possible to change the opening operation content of the electric role device 640a depending on the game state at the start timing of the variation (lottery) of the normal symbol and the opening operation timing of the electric role device 640a.

In this embodiment, the game state at the start (execution) timing of the variation (lottery) of the normal symbol is temporarily stored using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. For example, a game state storage means capable of always storing the currently set game state may be configured to have a storage area for temporarily storing the game state when the lottery for the normal symbol is executed when the lottery result for the normal symbol is determined to be a win. Furthermore, a means may be provided for always storing the period during which the normal state is set, and the game state at the time when the lottery for the normal symbol is executed may be determined by comparing the period stored in the means (the period during which the normal state is set) with the timing when the lottery for the normal symbol is executed. In other words, it is sufficient to have a configuration that includes a storage means capable of storing the currently set game state and a storage means capable of storing at least the game state that was set at a predetermined timing in the past.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S902 that the display mode of the second pattern display device 83 is changing (S902: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the changing display being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (S913). Note that the change time here is the time that was previously set by the process of S910 or S911 before the changing display was started in the second pattern display device 83.

In the process of S913, if it is determined that the change time has not elapsed (S913: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S913, if it is determined that the change time of the executed change display has elapsed (S913: Yes), then the stop display of the second pattern display device 83 is set (S914). In the process of S914, if the lottery of the normal pattern is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S907, the "○" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second pattern display device 83. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal pattern is a loss and the display mode is set by the process of S908, the "×" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second pattern display device 83. Note that the period during which the second pattern is stopped and displayed is configured to be longer (determined display) than the period during which one part of the blinking display (alternating display of "○" and "×") indicating that the second pattern is changing is lit. This allows the player to easily understand that the second symbol has stopped and been displayed.

When the stop display is set by the processing of S914, the next time the second pattern display update processing (S1508 in FIG. 51) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) is executed, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stop (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S907 or S908.

After completing the process of S914, when the ongoing variable display is started on the second pattern display device 83, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the normal pattern (the current lottery result) performed by the normal pattern variable process (FIG. 45, S106) is a winning normal pattern (S915). If it is determined that the current lottery result is a losing normal pattern (S915: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a winning normal pattern (S915: Yes), it is next determined whether the normal pattern short variable flag 203q is set to ON (S916).

If it is determined in the processing of S916 that the normal short pattern fluctuation flag 203q is not set to on (is set to off), that is, if it is determined that the game state at the timing when the current normal pattern lottery (fluctuation) is started is a normal state (S916: No), the opening time of the electric role 640a is set to 0.2 seconds and the number of times it is opened is set to 1 (S921), and the processing proceeds to S920.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S916 that the normal symbol short change flag 203q is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the game state at the timing when the current normal symbol lottery (change) is started is a time-shortened state (S916: Yes), the normal symbol short change flag 203q is set to OFF (S917), and then it is determined whether the current game state is a time-shortened state (during time-shortened state) (S918).

If it is determined in the process of S918 that the current game state is not the time-saving state (S918: No), the game state at the timing when the current lottery (variation) of the normal pattern was started is the normal state, and the current game state (the timing when the opening operation of the electric device 640a is set) is the normal state, the opening period of the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times it is opened is set to 1 (S921), and the process proceeds to S920.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current game state is in the time-saving state (S918: Yes), since both the timing when the current normal symbol lottery (variation) started and the current game state (the timing when the opening operation of the electric device 640a is set) are in the time-saving state, the opening period of the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times it is opened is set to 2 (the long opening operation of the electric device 640a is set) (S919), and the process proceeds to S920.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the opening operation of the electric device 640a is configured to be set to an opening operation advantageous to the player (long opening) only when both the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is executed and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric device 640a, which is executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, are in the time-saving state.

By configuring in this way, the conditions for setting the opening operation that is advantageous to the player can be set strictly. For example, even if a lottery (variation) of normal symbols is executed while the normal state is set as the game state, a winning result is won, and a time-saving state is set until the normal symbol variation time (30 seconds) ends, the long opening will not be set as the operation of the electric role 640a. Similarly, even if a winning result is won in the variation (lottery) of normal symbols executed while the time-saving state is set, and the normal state is set as the game state until the variation of the normal symbol stops, the long opening of the electric role 640a will not be set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (long opening of the electric role 640a).

Furthermore, since the long opening of the electric role device 640a can be suppressed when the normal state is set as the game state, the period during which the lottery for the special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player is likely to be executed can be limited during the time-saving state. Note that in this embodiment, the game state at the timing when the lottery (variation) for the normal symbol starts and the timing when the opening operation of the electric role device 640a is set is determined, and the opening operation content of the electric role device 640a is set based on the game state set at each timing. Although the above-mentioned configuration is used as a configuration, other configurations may also be used.

For example, an opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player (opening operation set in S921 of FIG. 45) may be set (a short opening is set) only when both the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbols begins and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric role device 640a is set are in the normal state, and a long opening (opening operation set in S919 of FIG. 45) may be set in other states. By configuring in this way, a special benefit (long opening) that is advantageous to the player can be provided even for normal symbol variations that are executed in the period before and after the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set, making the time-saving state more advantageous to the player.

In this way, while the time-saving state is set as the game state, the normal pattern change time is very short (from 30 seconds to 3 seconds) compared to when the normal state is set, and the opening period of the second winning port 640 is very long (from 0.2 seconds x 1 time to 2 seconds x 2 times), making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning port 640. In this embodiment, the time-saving state is configured to end when a big win game is played, so the normal state is set during the big win game. On the other hand, when a small win game is played, the time-saving state is configured to continue as long as the time-saving end condition is not met, so during the small win game played while the time-saving state is set, the V winning device 650 is opened in the small win game and the electric role 640a is long-opened, making it a specific period in which it is easy for the ball to enter the multiple winning ports (V winning port 650a, second ball entry port 640).

For example, by using this type of configuration, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, an electric device 640a and a second ball entry port 640 can be provided to the V winning device 650, and the balls can enter the two winning ports (V winning device 650a, second ball entry port 640) during the small win game. This can increase the number of winning balls that can be won during the small win game, making it possible to provide the player with more advantageous benefits.

Returning to FIG. 45 for further explanation, the process of S920 sets the start of opening and closing control of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (S920), and ends this process. When the start of opening and closing control of the electric role 640a is set by the process of S920, the next time the electric role opening and closing process (see S1506) of the main process (see FIG. 51) is executed, the opening and closing control of the electric role will be started, and the opening and closing control of the electric role will continue until the opening time and number of openings set by the process of S921 or the process of S919 is completed.

Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) and is a process for determining whether or not a ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67, and, if a ball has passed through, obtaining the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (FIG. 46, S107), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 (S1001). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (S101). The contents of this detection are the same as the process of S701 in the start winning process (see FIG. 43) described above, so a detailed description is omitted. Then, it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 (S1001: Yes), and it is determined whether the display mode of the second pattern display device 83 is changing to a normal pattern (S1002). If it is determined that the display mode of the second pattern display device 83 is changing to a normal pattern (S1002: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1002, if it is determined that the display mode of the second pattern display device 83 is not during a normal pattern change (S1002: No), it is determined whether or not the normal pattern is currently winning (S1003). If it is determined that the normal pattern is winning as a result of the determination (S1003: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the normal pattern is not winning (S1003: No), it is now the timing to draw a new normal pattern change (execution), so the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process (S101) described above is stored in the second pattern reserved ball execution area (S1004). Then, this process is terminated.

Next, the V entrance passing process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passing process (S108) executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V entrance passage process (S108), first it is determined whether the ball passage sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S1101). If it is determined in the process of S1101 that the ball passage sensor 650c1 is not on (S1101: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the ball passage sensor 650c1 is on (S1101: Yes), it is determined whether the V winning entrance 650a is in an open period (S1102).

If it is determined in the process of S1102 that the V winning port 650a is open (S1102: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S1103) and this process is terminated. The V entrance passage command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the balls that have passed through the V entrance and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute a performance based on the V entrance passage. This makes it possible to execute a performance during a small win game based on a ball entering the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning port 650a is not open (S1102: No), this means that the ball has entered the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small win game, so an error command is set (S1104). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1105), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 48, the V passing process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the V passing process (S109). This V passing process (S109) is a process executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the V passing flag 203j is on (S1201). If it is determined in the process of S1201 that the V passing flag 203j is on (S1201: Yes), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the V passing flag 203j is not on (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not there has been a V passing (S1202). In other words, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650. If it is determined in the process of S1202 that there has been no V passing (S1202: No), this process ends as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of S1202 that a V pass has occurred (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V pass valid period is in progress (S1203). If it is determined that the V pass valid period is in progress (S1203: Yes), the V pass time jackpot type value stored in the V pass jackpot type storage area 203h is obtained (S1204), and the V flag 203i indicating the obtained V pass jackpot type is set to ON (S1205). Then, a V pass command is set (S1206).

Next, the V-passing flag 203j is set to ON (S1207). After that, the time-saving counter 203k is set to 0 (S1208), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1203 that the V-pass valid period is not in progress (S1203: No), an error command is set (S1209) and this processing is terminated. If the game ball passes through the V-entry switch (V switch) 650e3 when the V-pass valid period is not in progress, this is considered to be an instance where the ball has illegally entered the V-entry switch 650e3. In this case, an error command is set in the processing of S1209, and an error output is executed, making it possible to discover any illegal activity.

Figure 49 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The NMI interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information about the power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The MPU 201 then interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power outage information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power outage information (S1301), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout/firing control device 111, and this NMI interrupt process stores information about the occurrence of a power outage in the RAM 213. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process.

Next, referring to FIG. 50, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the main control unit 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial settings associated with power-on are executed (S1401). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control units (peripheral control units such as the voice lamp control unit 113 and the dispensing control unit 111) to become operable (S1402). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1403).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 8) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1404), and if it is turned on (S1404: Yes), the process proceeds to S1415. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1404: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S1405), and if it is not stored (S1405: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S1415.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1405: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S1406). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1407: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S1415. Note that, as will be described later in the process of S1515 in FIG. 51, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of S1415, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1415). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1416, S1417).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1416, S1417) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S1416, S1417) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (S1416, S1417), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1416), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1417). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to S1410.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1404: No), power outage information is stored (S1405: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1407: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (S1408) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power was cut off (S1409), and the process proceeds to S1410. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1410, a performance permission command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the execution of various performances is permitted for the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Next, the value of the time-saving counter 203k is read (S1411), and a state command based on the read value is set (S1412). Then, the flow path solenoid 209a is set to off (S1413). After that, an interrupt is permitted (S1414), and the process proceeds to the main process described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 51, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up processing will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, each process from S1501 to S1508 is executed as a periodic process at a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update processes of S1511 and S1512 are executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 51), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1501). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the special pattern 1 reserved ball number command set in the special pattern variation process (see FIG. 39) or the start winning process (see FIG. 43) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output process (S1501), a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the third pattern display device 81 to display the variation of the third pattern are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command (S1602), the number of rounds command (S1607), and the ending command set in the big win control process (FIG. 52, S1504) are sent to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1611). In addition, when a ball is to be fired, a ball firing signal is sent to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1502). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

After updating the variable type counter CS1 (S1502), the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1503), and then, if a jackpot state of a special pattern is reached, a jackpot control process is executed to execute a jackpot presentation and to open or close the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) (S1504). In the jackpot control process (S1504), the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650). Then, when any of these conditions is met, the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The opening and closing of the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. Note that in this embodiment, the big win control process (S1504) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Next, when the special symbol is in the small win state, various effects according to the small win are executed, and a small win control process is executed to open or close the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) (S1505). In the small win control process (S1505), the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed or whether the specified number of balls have entered the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650). When any of these conditions are met, the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. Note that in this embodiment, the small win control process (S1505) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Next, an electric role opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (S1506). In the electric role opening/closing process, when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric role is set by the process of S920 in the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 45), the opening/closing control of the electric role is started. Note that this opening/closing control of the electric role continues until the opening time and the number of openings set by the process of S919 or the process of S921 in the normal pattern change process are completed.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 2) (S1507). In the first pattern display update process (S1507), when a change pattern is set by the process of S306, S310, or S312 of the special pattern change start process (see FIG. 39), the change display according to the change pattern is started in the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b. In this embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process (see Figure 51) is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process (S1507), when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the processing of S306, S310 or S312 of the special pattern change start process (see FIG. 39) ends, the change display being performed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b (see FIG. 2) is terminated, and the stopped pattern (first pattern) is displayed as stopped (lit up) on the first pattern display device 37a, 37b in the display mode set by the processing of S305, S309 or S311 of the special pattern change start process (see FIG. 39).

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device 83 (S1508). In the second pattern display update process (S1508), when the second pattern change time is set by the process of S910 or S911 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 45), the second pattern display device 83 starts a change display. As a result, the second pattern display device 83 performs a change display in which the "○" pattern and the "×" pattern as the second pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second pattern display update process (S1508), when the stop display of the second pattern display device 83 is set by the process of S914 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 45), the change display being executed in the second pattern display device 83 is terminated, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed (lit) on the second pattern display device 83 in a display mode set by the process of S907 or S908 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 45).

Then, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1509). If information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S1509: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not cut off. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1510). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1510: Yes), the process proceeds to S1501, and each process from S1501 onwards described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1510: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated until the specified time is reached, i.e., within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process (S1511, S1512).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1511). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when each counter value reaches its maximum value (999 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated using the same method as the processing of S1502 (S1512).

Here, the execution time of each process from S1501 to S1508 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next main process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time (S1511), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 in the process of S1509 (S1509: Yes), the power is interrupted due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interruption process in FIG. 49 is executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S1513 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S1513), and a power off command indicating that the power has been interrupted is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S1514). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S1515), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1516), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of S1509 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the game state performed in S1501 to S1508, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1511 and S1512 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from the power interruption state, the processing can be started from the processing of S1501 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1501, just as in the case of initialization in the start-up processing. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power interruption, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting processing (S1401), and the processing can be started from the processing of S1501. Therefore, the control burden on the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and the main control unit 110 can perform accurate control without malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1504). This jackpot control process (S1504) is executed during the main process (see FIG. 51), and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 52, S1504), first, it is determined whether it is the timing to start a jackpot with a special symbol (S1601). Specifically, this is determined by analyzing the setting status of the jackpot start flag 203c. This jackpot start flag 203c is set to ON (S216) when the start of a jackpot is set by the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38). In the process of S1601, if it is determined that it is the timing to start a jackpot (if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203c is ON) (S1601: Yes), an opening command is set (S1602), and then the jackpot start flag 203c is set to OFF (S1603), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (the jackpot start flag 203c is set to OFF) (S1601: No), then it is determined whether or not the current time is a jackpot (S1604). The special symbol jackpot includes the time when the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the time during a predetermined period after the special symbol jackpot game ends, and corresponds to the period when the above-mentioned jackpot flag 203d is set to ON. If it is determined in the process of S1604 that it is not during the special symbol jackpot (the jackpot flag 203d is OFF) (S1604: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1604 that a special symbol jackpot is occurring (the jackpot in progress flag 203d is set to ON) (S1604: Yes), a determination process (S1605 to S1612) is executed to determine whether it is time to execute various processes that are executed at multiple times during the jackpot.

If it is determined in the process of S1604 that a jackpot is currently being played (S1604: Yes), it is then determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1605). In this process of S1605, it is determined whether the current timing is the start timing of a new round based on the opening scenario set corresponding to the current jackpot game. If it is determined in the process of S1605 that it is time to start a new round (S1605: Yes), the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202g (S1606), and a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set (S1607). After the round number command is set, this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sends a display round number command corresponding to the number of rounds to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the round number command for display, a new round presentation is started in the third pattern display device 81.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the jackpot continues (for example, when the number of special pattern variations (number of lotteries) between the execution of multiple jackpot games is less than 50 times, or during a period in which a time-saving state is set repeatedly between jackpot games), the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to accumulate and display the number of rounds of the jackpot games that are continuously executed. In other words, the voice lamp control device 113 has a period setting means for setting a period (consecutive win period) during which it is determined that the jackpot is continuously executed based on the state command or variation pattern command sent from the main control device 110, a round number accumulation means for adding the number of rounds (number of rounds) of the new jackpot game to the number of rounds (number of rounds) of the previously executed jackpot game when a new jackpot game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, and a round number accumulation display control means for transmitting a display round number command corresponding to the accumulated round number accumulated by the round number accumulation means to the display control device 114 and displaying it on the third pattern display device 81 during the jackpot game. This allows the player to recognize that the jackpot has continued for a long time, which increases the player's interest.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1605 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1605: No), then it is determined whether the closing condition of the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of V winning device 650) is satisfied (S1608). Specifically, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed after the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of V winning device 650) was opened, or when a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 10 balls in total) have entered the variable winning device 65 or V winning device 650.

In the process of S1608, if it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning port (specific winning port 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning port 650a of V winning device 650) is met (S1608: Yes), the corresponding winning port (specific winning port 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning port 650a of V winning device 650) is closed and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning port (specific winning port 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning port 650a of V winning device 650) is not met (S1608: No), it is next determined whether the current timing is the start timing of the ending performance (S1610). The start timing of the ending performance is determined when 15 rounds (the final round of play that is preset for this jackpot game) have ended, the opening and closing door 650f1 has been closed, and the waiting time (3 seconds in this embodiment) that is the ball discharge time has elapsed. Note that the start timing of this ending performance and the end timing described below are also determined based on the opening scenario (see S214 in FIG. 38) that is set when a jackpot is won.

If it is determined in the processing of S1610 that it is the timing to start the ending performance (S1610: Yes), an ending command is set (S1611) and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the ending performance is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1610 that it is not the timing to start the ending performance (S1610: No), then in the process of S1612, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the ending performance (S1612). If it is determined in the process of S1612 that it is not the timing to end the ending performance (S1612: No), then this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S1612 that it is time for the ending presentation to end (S1612: Yes), it is then determined which of jackpot types A to D the jackpot type currently being executed is (S1613). In the process of S1613, the jackpot type stored in a storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores the jackpot type to be set is read out.

Next, based on the read jackpot type, the time-saving end condition is set using the time-saving granting table 202e (S1614). Specifically, if the jackpot type is jackpot A (15R time-saving jackpot) or jackpot B (5R time-saving jackpot), the time-saving counter 203k is set to 100, the small win A counter 203m is set to 1, the small win B counter 203n is set to 3, and the small win C counter p is set to 5. Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot D (15R time-saving jackpot), the time-saving counter 203k is set to 100, the small win A counter 203m is set to 2, the small win B counter 203n is set to 10, and the small win C counter p is set to 50.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (5R non-time-saving jackpot), the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends, so the time-saving counter 203k, small win A counter 203m, small win B counter 203n, and small win C counter p are not set to values (time-saving end conditions). After the above-mentioned S1614 process is completed, a time-saving setting information command is set to indicate information corresponding to the values of the various counters indicating the time-saving end conditions set in the S1614 process (S1615).

The time-saving setting information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the time-saving setting information command, it sets time-saving information indicating the time-saving end conditions of the current time-saving state in the time-saving information update area 223g and the temporary time-saving information update area 223i (see S2603 in FIG. 60). Based on the time-saving information set here and the update information of the time-saving state that is updated based on the fluctuation (lottery) of the special pattern, the remaining number of times (remaining conditions) of the time-saving state is determined, and various performance modes are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the remaining number of times.

After completing the processing of S1615, the system next sets a state command corresponding to the game state that will be set after the jackpot (S1616), sets the end of the jackpot (S1617), sets the jackpot in progress flag 203d to off (S1618), and ends this processing.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the end conditions for the time-saving state can be set differently depending on the type of jackpot that is set when a jackpot is won. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the end conditions for the time-saving state (time-saving end conditions) are set to be less likely to be satisfied when a jackpot is won by drawing a lottery for the second special symbol compared to when a jackpot is won by drawing a lottery for the first special symbol.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide added value to the player when they win one type instead of two types during right-handed play while the time-saving state is set.

In this embodiment, the same time-saving end conditions are set for the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) that is set when a jackpot is won by drawing the first special pattern, but this is not limited thereto. For example, the time-saving end conditions may be set so that they are more difficult to achieve when the jackpot type is jackpot A. Also, some of the multiple time-saving end conditions may be set so that they are more easily achieved when the jackpot is A, and the others are more easily achieved when the jackpot is B.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 21(d), in this embodiment, the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state are configured to set a fluctuation count end condition related to the number of times the special pattern fluctuates (an end condition based on the value of the time-saving counter 203k) and a winning count end condition related to the number of times a small prize has been won as a result of the special pattern lottery (an end condition based on the value of each small prize counter).

In addition, the system is configured so that the winning count end conditions are set to end conditions corresponding to multiple small win types that are set when a small win is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which small win type corresponding to the small win game will be executed and how much time is left until the time-saving state ends before the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (100 times).

In this embodiment, the change count end condition is set to "100 times" for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), but a different change count end condition may be set depending on the type of big win. In addition, the change count end condition may be set as follows: a first special symbol change measurement means that measures only the number of times the first special symbol changes, and a first special symbol change end condition that is established when the measurement result of the first special symbol change measurement means becomes a predetermined result; or a second special symbol change measurement means that measures only the number of times the second special symbol changes, and a second special symbol change end condition that is established when the measurement result of the second special symbol change measurement means becomes a predetermined result.

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning count termination condition is set based on the measurement results of the counters corresponding to each small win type (small win A counter 203m, small win B counter 203n, small win C counter 203p), but it is not limited to this and a time-saving termination condition that is established based on the value simply obtained by adding up the number of times a small win has been won may be set, or a means may be provided that adds up and measures the number of times a small win game with a predetermined number (two) of small win types set out of multiple (three or more) small win types has been played, and the termination condition may be set based on the measurement results of that means.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving end condition is set for all small win types that can be set when a small win is won, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to set small win type Z as a small win type for which the time-saving end condition cannot be met no matter how many times it is set when a small win is won. This makes it difficult for a player to determine whether the time-saving state is approaching its end due to the current small win, even if the player knows that he or she has won a small win during the time-saving state.

In addition, when the above-mentioned small win type Z is provided, it is preferable to configure it so that a small win game with the same content as the small win game for which the winning count end condition is set is executed. By configuring it in this way, even if the game content of the small win game executed during the time-saving state is identified, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time-saving state is approaching the end due to the current small win game.

In this way, by determining that a small prize has been won, or by determining the game content of the small prize game that is executed based on the small prize being won, in other words, by determining the game content of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to make the player very interested in the presentation that suggests (informs) the progress of the time-saving state (whether it is approaching the end or not), by making it difficult to grasp the progress. Note that the control content of the presentation executed by the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment will be explained in detail in the explanation of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 described later.

Next, the small win control process (S1505) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this small win control process (S1505). This small win control process (S1505) is executed during the main process (see FIG. 51), and is a process for executing various effects according to the small win and opening or closing the corresponding winning port (V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) when the pachinko machine 10 is in a small win state with a special pattern.

In the small win control process (FIG. 53, S1505), first, it is determined whether a small win with a special pattern will start (S1701). Specifically, if the small win start flag 203f is set to ON by the process of S404 of the small win start setting process (see FIG. 40), it is determined that a small win with a special pattern will start. In the process of S1701, if a small win with a special pattern will start (S1701: Yes), an opening command is set (S1702). Then, the small win start flag 203f is set to OFF (S1703), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1701, if a small win of a special pattern has not started (S1701: No), it is determined whether or not a small win of a special pattern is in progress (S1704). The period during which a small win of a special pattern is in progress includes the period during which the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 display a small win of a special pattern (including during play of a small win of a special pattern) and during a predetermined time after play of a small win of a special pattern ends. The determination in S1704 is made by analyzing whether the small win flag 303g is set to ON. In the process of S1704, if it is determined that a small win of a special pattern is not in progress (S1704: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1704 that a small win of a special pattern is occurring (S1704: Yes), the process of S1705 is executed. In the process of S1705, it is determined whether it is the timing to open the V winning hole (S1705). If it is determined in the process of S1705 that it is the timing to open the V winning hole (S1705: Yes), the corresponding winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202g (S1706), and it is determined whether this is the 5th or 10th opening timing (S1707).

If it is determined in the process of S1707 that this is not the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1707: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1707 that this is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1707: Yes), then in the process of S1708, it is determined whether the V flag 203i is set to ON (S1708), and if it is determined that it is not ON (OFF) (S1708: No), the small win type stored in the small win type storage area 203e is read (S1709), and then an instruction command corresponding to the read small win type is set (S1710).

The instruction command set in the processing of S1710 is, for example, an instruction command for changing the display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 depending on the type of small win, that is, a small win in which the ball is likely to pass through a specific area during small win play (e.g., small win A) and a small win in which the ball is unlikely to pass through a specific area during small win play (e.g., small win B, C).

Specifically, when small win A, which is easy to get a double win during a small win game, is set as the small win type, a display mode (see FIG. 16(a)) is set to force the player to play right-hand, and then, when the ball passes through a specific area, a display mode (see FIG. 16(b)) is displayed indicating that a double win has been successfully obtained. In this way, by varying the content of the instruction command when it is set depending on the expectation of the ball passing through a specific area in the small win game being played, it is possible to provide a presentation that does not feel strange to the player.

Returning to FIG. 53, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1711, if it is determined that the current timing is not the closing timing of the V winning port 650a (S1711: No), it is next determined whether it is the timing to start the ending performance (S1713). In the process of S1713, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending performance (S1713: Yes), an ending command is set (S1714) and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending performance is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1713 that it is not the timing to start the ending performance (S1713: No), then in the process of S1715, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the ending performance (S1715). If it is determined in the process of S1715 that it is not the timing to end the ending performance (S1715: No), then this process ends.

In the processing of S1715, if it is determined that it is the timing to end the ending presentation (S1715: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203i is set on (S1716), and if it is determined that it is set on (S1716: Yes), an opening scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203i is set (S1717), the jackpot start flag 203c and the jackpot in progress flag 203d are set on (S1718), the V flag 203i is set off (S1719), the V pass flag 203j is set off (S1720), and the small jackpot in progress flag 203g is set off (S171721), and this processing ends.

<Control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 54 to Fig. 63, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2061). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current start-up process was started during the execution of the power-off process (S2118 in FIG. 55) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S2061). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 55, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (S2115 in FIG. 55: Yes), it executes the power-off process of S2118. Before the execution of such power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S2062 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S2062: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S2118 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted (S2063).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S2066. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S2063: Yes), the process proceeds to S2064, where initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2063: No), the process proceeds to S2068.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2063: Yes) and the process proceeds to S2064. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power cut process of S2118 is completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2063: No) and the process proceeds to S2068.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S2062: Yes), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S2118 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct, since the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process proceeds to S2064, and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S2064, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S2064). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of the RAM 223 (S2065: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2066). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of the RAM 223 (S2065: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2067) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the lamp display device 227. Note that the abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S2068, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S2068). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2118 is executed (see S2117 in FIG. 55). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2118 is executed, so the process of S2068 will be reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S2118 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2068: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared (S2069) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2070), interrupt permission is set (S2071), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off, the process reaches S2068 because, for example, the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, and so the process went from S2064 to S2066 and then to S2068, or because noise or the like caused only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to be reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2068: No), S2069, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2070, where the initial values of RAM 223 are set (S2070), interrupt permission is set (S2071), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S2069 is that when the process proceeds from S2064 to S2068 and then to S2068, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2064, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up process is started, control of voice lamp control device 113 can be continued by storing the data in the working area of RAM 223 without clearing it.

Next, referring to FIG. 55, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the current processing of S2101 was executed (S2101). If 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S2101: No), the processing of S2102 to S2112 is not executed and the processing proceeds to S2113. The reason for determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed in the processing of S2101 is that S2102 to S2112 are mainly processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 ms), whereas it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S2113 and the variable display setting processing of S2114 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2113 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S2114 at short intervals, it is possible to set up the variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2112 are sent to the display control device 114 (S2102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the lamp display device 227 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S2108 described later is set (S2103), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S2104). The power-on notification processing is a processing for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the notification by the power-on notification processing is not performed and the processing proceeds to S2105.

In the process of S2105, a customer waiting performance process is executed, and then a reserved ball number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting performance process, when a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device 114. In the reserved ball number display update process, a process is performed to light up the reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring and presentation process is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring and presentation process monitors input to see whether the frame buttons 22, 23 (hereafter referred to as frame buttons 22) operated by the player have been pressed in order to enhance presentation effects, and sets up a corresponding presentation when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing of S2109, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (S2110). In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing/output process of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81.

After the LCD performance execution management process (S2110), a various counter update process (S2111) is executed. This various counter update process is a process for updating the values of multiple counters held by the performance counter 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. In other words, in this embodiment, the value of each counter is updated every millisecond in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113. Here, a method for updating multiple counters held by the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be explained.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that the values of multiple counters are referenced when setting the performance mode of each performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this configuration, for example, if the values of all counters are updated by 1 each time various counter update processes (S2111) are executed, that is, if the update method for each counter is unified, the update of each counter will be synchronized, resulting in a problem in which it will be impossible to impart randomness to the performance mode that is set, so the updated values of each counter are configured not to be synchronized.

After the various counter update processes (S2111) are completed, the effect update process (S2112) is executed. This effect update process (S2112) is intended to perform processing to change the content of the currently executed effect (the variable display that has already been set) while the effect is being executed.

After the performance update process (S2112), a command determination process is performed (S2113) to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the process proceeds to S2114. In S2114, a variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variable display setting process, a display variable pattern command is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81. As a result, the command is sent to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

Then, when the variable display setting process (S2114) is completed, it is determined whether or not power failure information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2115). Power failure information is stored when a power failure command is received from the main control device 110. If power failure information is stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: Yes), both the power failure flag and the power failure processing in progress flag are turned on (S2117), and power failure processing is executed (S2118). After the power failure processing is executed, the power failure processing in progress flag is turned off (S2119), and the processing is then looped infinitely. In the power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. The stored power failure information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2116). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S2116: No), the process returns to the process of S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2116: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a store clerk or the like to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process (S2113 in FIG. 56), the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area in the RAM 223, analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2201). If a variation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223c in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2203), and processing according to other commands is executed (S2217), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 62) described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control unit 114 of the start of the variation performance and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if a variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2204). If a stop type command has been received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d in the RAM 223 is set to on (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and the process returns to the main process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 62) described below is executed. It is then used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation performance.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2207). If the reserved ball number command has been received (S2207: Yes), the value contained in the received reserved ball number command, i.e., the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control unit 110 (the reserved number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control unit 113 (S2208). In addition, in the process of S2208, a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control unit 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. After the process of S2208 is completed, the process of S2217 described above is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special symbol 1 reserved ball count command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning) or when a lottery for a special symbol is performed. Therefore, each time a starting winning is detected or a lottery for a special symbol is performed, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control device 110 by the processing of S2208. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control device 110 when the starting winning is detected or when a lottery for a special symbol is performed. When the process of S2208 is executed, a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. As a result, the display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S2207, if the reserved ball count command has not been received (S2207: No), it is then determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2209). If it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), winning information-related processing is executed (S2210). Next, the process of S2117 described above is executed, and the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the contents of the winning information related process (S2210) will be explained with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information related process (S2210). This winning information related process (S2210) executes a process to determine whether or not to execute a provisional win presentation based on the winning information (variation type) contained in the currently received winning information command and the current game situation.

When the winning information related process (S2210) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 is read (S2301). Then, it is determined whether the game state read in the process of S2301 is in time reduction (S2302), and if it is determined that it is in time reduction (S2302: Yes), it is next determined whether the provisional win determination flag 223h is on (S2303). In the process of S2303, if it is determined that the provisional win determination flag 223h is not on (i.e., it is off) (S2303: No), the process proceeds to S2304, and it is determined whether the provisional time reduction end flag 223j is on (S2304). In the process of S2304, if it is determined that the provisional time-saving end flag 223j is not on (is off) (S2304: No), the process proceeds to S2305, and it is determined whether the winning information received this time from the main control device 110 includes winning information (S2305).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the above-mentioned S2303 process that the provisional hit determination flag 223h is on (S2303: Yes), or if it is determined in the S2304 process that the provisional time-saving end flag 223j is on (S2304: Yes), the process of determining whether or not to execute the provisional hit effect is skipped and the process proceeds to S2311 described below.

In this way, in this embodiment, the winning information related process (S2211) is configured so that the provisional win effect can be executed only when the game state read out is in the time-saving mode. Therefore, the provisional win effect can be enhanced because it can be executed only when the time-saving mode is in effect.

In addition, if the provisional hit determination flag 223h is on, i.e., if a provisional hit effect is already being executed, a new provisional hit effect is not set, so that the provisional hit effect currently being executed can be provided to the player until the end.

Next, the process for setting the provisional win effect (S2305 to S2311) will be explained. In the process of S2305, it is determined whether the winning information received from the main control device 110 this time contains winning information (S2305). If it is determined that the received winning information is a winning information (S2305: Yes), the provisional win determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2306), and the information in the provisional time-saving information update area 223i is updated (S2307). On the other hand, if it is determined that the received winning information is not winning information (S2305: No), the process of S2306 is skipped and the process moves to S2307.

Next, it is determined whether the information updated in the process of S2307 is a time-saving end condition (S2308). If it is determined that it is a time-saving end condition (S2308: Yes), the provisional time-saving end flag 223j is set to ON (S2309). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a time-saving end condition (S2308: No), the process of S2309 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2310 described later. Next, a display winning information command corresponding to the information in the provisional time-saving information update area 223i is set (S2311), the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S2311), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the game state read out is not in the time-saving state (S2302: No), a display winning information command corresponding to the winning information received this time is set (S2312), the process of S2311 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 56 for further explanation, in the process of S2209, if a winning information command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a win-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2211). If a win-related command has been received (S22111: Yes), a win-related process (S2212) is executed, the process of S2217 described above is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

The contents of the winning-related process (S2212) will now be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning-related process (S2212). The winning-related process (S2212) is a process for causing the third pattern display device 81 to execute a presentation display corresponding to a big win game or a small win game that is executed when a big win or a small win is won as a result of the special pattern lottery, and processes corresponding to various commands sent from the main control device 110 are executed when a big win or a small win is won.

In the winning-related process (S2212 in FIG. 58), first, the winning-related command received by the command determination process (S2113) is determined to be a jackpot start command (S2401). If a jackpot start command is received (S2401: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S2402), the provisional win determination flag 223h is set to OFF (S2403), and this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, it displays an effect suggesting the start of a jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2401: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2404). If a round number command has been received (S2404: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the round number (S2405), and this process ends. In this embodiment, since information indicating the round number is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round number command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. However, for example, in order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the main control device 110, if the main control device 110 is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has started as a round update command, a round number accumulation counter that accumulates the number of received round update commands when a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 may be provided, and the voice lamp control device 113 may calculate the current round number based on the value of the round number accumulation counter and set the display round number command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2404 that the round count command has not been received (S2404: No), it is determined whether a jackpot end command has been received (S2406). If a jackpot end command has been received (S2406: Yes), a jackpot end command for display is set (S2407), and jackpot end process (S2408) is executed. Details of the jackpot end process (S2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2406 that the big win end command has not been received (S2406: No), it is determined whether a small win start command has been received (S2409). If a small win start command has been received (S2409: Yes), a small win start command for display is set (S2410) and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a small win start command has not been received (S2409: No), it is determined whether a small win end command has been received (S2411). If a small win end command has been received (S2411: Yes), a small win end command for display is set (S2412) and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2411, if it is determined that the small win end command has not been received (S2411: No), it is determined whether the V entrance passing command has been received (S2413). If the V entrance passing command has been received (S2413: Yes), a display V entrance passing command is set (S2414), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2413, if it is determined that the V entrance passing command has not been received (S2413: No), it is determined whether the V passing command has been received (S2415). If the V passing command has been received (S2415: Yes), a display V performance command for showing a performance based on a ball entering the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is set (S2416), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2415, if it is determined that the V passing command has not been received (S2415: No), it is determined whether an instruction command has been received (S2417). If an instruction command has been received (S2417: Yes), the display instruction command is set (S2418) and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2417 that an instruction command has not been received (S2417: No), the process ends.

In this embodiment, the small win game is executed by opening the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 12 times during the small win game, and is configured to output an instruction command if the V switch 650e3 does not detect a ball at the timing of the 5th or 10th opening (see S1609 in FIG. 54). When it is determined that this instruction command has been received, a display instruction command is set to cause the third pattern display device 81 to display an emphasis guidance display mode (see FIG. 16(a)) that emphasizes and guides the ball to win the V winning device 650.

When the V switch 650e3 detects a ball while the highlighted guide display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 16(b), a display achievement command is set to display an achievement display mode to congratulate the player. In other words, in this embodiment, if a small win game is played and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is performed, the ball is reliably entered into the V winning device 650 by playing right-hand, and the ball that entered the V winning device 650 during the small win game is configured to flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 in which the V switch 650e3 is provided. Despite this configuration, if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the fifth opening timing of the opening and closing door 650f1, the player is playing left-hand without noticing the display instructing right-hand play in the guide display area Dm2 (see FIG. 10(a)) of the third symbol display device 81 when the small win game is started. Or, it is considered that the game has stopped.

In such a case, the display guiding the player to hit right displayed in the guide display area Dm2 can be changed to a more emphasized display, making it easier for the player to play with a right hit. Furthermore, the timing for displaying the emphasized guide display mode (see FIG. 16(a)) is set to the timing when, if a right hit is played after the emphasized guide display mode is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the ball shot in the right hit reaches the V winning device 650 during the small win game. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a player who plays a right hit game in accordance with the display of the emphasized guide display mode is unable to make the ball flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2 during the small win game.

Here, the jackpot end processing (S2408), which is one process within the jackpot-related processing (S2212), will be explained with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S2408).

In the process at the end of the jackpot (S2408 in FIG. 59), first, the information stored in the game status storage area 223f is read (S2501). Next, it is determined whether the information read in the process of S2501 is in the time-saving state (S2502). If it is determined that the information read is in the time-saving state (S2502: Yes), all information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S2503). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2502 that the information read is not in the time-saving state (S2502: No), this process is terminated.

After executing the process of S2503, it is next determined whether the information read in the process of S2503 contains winning information (S2504). If it is determined that there is winning information (S2504: Yes), a consecutive win command for display is set (S2505). Next, the provisional winning judgment flag 223h is set to ON (S2506), a state display command for display is set (S2507), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2504 that there is no winning information in the read state (S2504: No), a winning information command for display corresponding to the read state is set (S2508), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 56, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2211, if it is determined that a win-related command has not been received (S2211: No), it is next determined whether a stop command has been received (S2213). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), the stop display of the third pattern is set (S2214), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a stop command has not been received (S2213: No), it is determined whether a time-saving related command has been received (S2215). If it is determined that a time-saving related command has been received (S2215: Yes), a time-saving update process (S2216) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the time-saving update process (S2216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 60. On the other hand, if it is determined that a time-saving related command has not been received (S2215: No) in the process of S2215, a process according to the other command is executed (S2217), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the time-saving update process (S2216), which is one process within the command determination process (S2113), will be explained with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving update process (S2216).

In the time-saving update process (S2216), first, the currently received time-saving related information is analyzed (S2601). Next, in the process of S2601, it is determined whether the analyzed time-saving related information is time-saving setting information (S2602). If it is determined that the time-saving related information is time-saving setting information (S2602: Yes), the time-saving information is set in the time-saving information update area 223g and the temporary time-saving information update area 223i (S2603), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2602, if it is determined that the time-saving related information is not time-saving setting information (S2602: No), it is determined whether the time-saving related information is variable information (S2604). If it is determined that the time-saving related information is variable information (S2604: Yes), the information in the time-saving information update area 223g is updated (S2605). Next, the updated information is analyzed (S2606), and it is determined whether the time-saving lower limit flag 223k provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2607). If it is determined that the time-saving lower limit flag 223k is off (S2607: No), it is determined whether the remaining number of time-saving times is less than 30 times (S2608). If it is determined that the remaining number of time-saving times is less than 30 times (S2608: Yes), the time-saving lower limit flag 223k is set to on (S2609). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2608 that the remaining number of time-saving times is greater than 30 (S2608: No), this process ends. Note that if it is determined in the process of S2607 that the time-saving lower limit flag 223k is on (S2607: Yes), the processes of S2608 to S2609 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2610, which will be described later.

Next, it is determined whether the remaining number of time-saving times is 1 (S2610). If it is determined that the remaining number of time-saving times is 1 (S2610: Yes), the time-saving end fluctuation flag 223n is set to ON (S2611), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2610, if it is determined that the remaining number of time-saving times is not 1 (S2610: No), it is determined whether the remaining number of time-saving times is 0 (S2612). If it is determined that the remaining number of time-saving times is 0 (S2612: Yes), the time-saving lower limit flag 223k is set to OFF (S2613), and the time-saving end fluctuation flag 223n is set to OFF (S2614). Next, the provisional time-saving end flag 223j is set to OFF (S2615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2612, if it is determined that the remaining number of time-saving times is not 0 (S2612: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2604 that the time-saving related information is not variable information (S2604: No), it is determined whether the time-saving related information is small win information (S2616). If it is determined that the time-saving related information is small win information (S2616: Yes), a small win related update process (S2617) is executed and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2616 that the time-saving related information is not small win information (S2616: No), this process ends as it is.

Here, the small win related update process (S2617) will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small win related update process (S2617).

In the small win related update process (S2617 in FIG. 61), first, the information in the time-saving information update area 223g is updated (S2701). Next, the updated information is analyzed (S2702), and it is determined whether the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on (S2703). If it is determined that the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off (S2703: No), it is determined whether the quasi-end condition is met (S2704). If it is determined that the end condition is met (S2704: Yes), the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to on (S2705), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2703 that the quasi-termination condition flag 223m is on (S2703: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of S2704 that the quasi-termination condition is not satisfied (S2704: No), it is determined whether the termination condition is satisfied (S2706). If it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied (S2706: Yes), the quasi-termination condition flag 223m is set to off (S2707), and then the time-saving lower limit flag 223k is set to off (S2708). Next, the time-saving pre-end fluctuation flag 223n is set to off (S2709), the provisional time-saving end flag 223j is set to off (S2710), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2706 that the termination condition is not satisfied (S2706: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 62, the variable display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S2114). This variable display setting process (S2114) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variation display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 62), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2801). Then, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (i.e., it is off) (S2801: No), since no variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S2807. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S2801: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is set to off (S2802), and then, in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 56), the variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the variation pattern command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S2803).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a performance setting process is executed to set the performance to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (S2804), and then a display variation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type and the state display mode set in the performance setting process, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (S2805). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. After completing the process of S2805, the data in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2807.

The contents of the effect setting process (S2804) executed in the processing of S2804 will now be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S2804). This effect setting process (S2804) is a process for setting the provisional win effect of the fluctuation pattern set in the current fluctuation display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 62) when a provisional win effect has been set in the winning information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57).

When the effect setting process (S2804) is executed, first, the information stored in the game status storage area 223f is read (S2901). Next, in the process of S2901, it is determined whether the read information is in the time-saving state (S2902). If it is determined that the read information is not in the time-saving state (S2902: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read information is in the time-saving state (S2902: Yes), it is determined whether the provisional hit determination flag 223h is on (S2903). If it is determined that the provisional hit determination flag 223h is on (S2903: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2903, if it is determined that the provisional hit determination flag 223h is not on (i.e., it is off) (S2903: No), the information of the time-saving information update area 223g is read (S2904). Next, it is determined whether the fluctuation flag before the time-saving end 223n is on (S2905). If it is determined that the fluctuation flag before the time-saving end 223n is off (S2905: No), a status display mode is selected using the status display selection table 222b provided in the ROM 222 based on the setting of the time-saving lower limit flag 223k, the semi-end condition flag 223m, the hit/miss determination result, and the value of the status presentation counter 223o (S2906). Next, a display command indicating the selected status display mode is set (S2908), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2905 that the fluctuation flag 223n before the time-saving ends is on (S2905: Yes), the state display mode is selected using the final state display selection table provided in the ROM 222 based on the result of the hit/miss determination and the value of the state presentation counter 223o (S2907). Next, the process of S2908 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 62, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2801, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is off (S2801: No), or after the process of S2806 described above is executed, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2807). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2807: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S2808), and the extracted stop type command is obtained (S2809). Next, based on the extracted stop type, a stop type command for display is set (S2810), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2807, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is off (S2807: No), this process is terminated as it is.

<Regarding the control process executed by the display control device in the first control process example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Fig. 64 to Fig. 81. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to FIG. 64, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute the initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is started according to the following flow. When the power is applied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231, using its hardware configuration, sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. The MPU 231 then fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

If all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 will consume a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This increases the time it takes to start up the MPU 231, resulting in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S4001), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Now, the boot process (S4001) will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S4001) executed during the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

However, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will deteriorate even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, in this boot process, a process is executed in which the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the operation of the hardware of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program memory area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (S4101). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program memory area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S4102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND type flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S4102, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in accordance with the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a (S4103). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S4104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 64) to be executed after the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 64) is completed (S4105), thereby completing the execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S4001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, and the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and makes it easy to execute diversified and complex effects using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 associated with this shortening of the time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 65, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 are configured to include all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 may be part of the boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S4102. The boot program transferred here may transfer a predetermined amount of control programs including all remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute a process of setting the top address of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of S4101 may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the process of transferring a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a may be repeated multiple times, including the processes of S4101 and S4102, and then execute the processes of S4103 to S4105.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all of the boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S4103 to S4105 without executing the processes of S4101 and S4102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and therefore reduces the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. This allows the MPU 231 to start controlling the auxiliary performance unit, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 64. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S4002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and for the I/O devices, etc. Also, processes such as clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 are performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, during an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can start up normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S4003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235.

When the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction is complete, image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231 indicating the end of transfer. By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended. Note that when image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction, it may write transfer end information indicating the end of transfer to a register or a partial area of built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. MPU 231 may then read information from this register or partial area of built-in memory at any time and detect the writing of transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4003, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S4004). This transfer instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored, the data size of the image data, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b is then retained so that it is not overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4004, the simple image display flag 233c is then turned on (S4005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a resident image transfer setting process is executed in which the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process described below (see FIG. 79(a)) (see S6302 in FIG. 79(a)).

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during that time, the simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 66(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S4309 in FIG. 66(b)) are executed so that the power-on images, that is, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image (not shown), are drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the display control device 114 is displaying the power-on main image on the third pattern display device 81, it can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, and so can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operation checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, making it possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the use of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234 prevents the efficiency of operation checks from deteriorating.

In addition, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 transfers the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power is turned on. Therefore, if the player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), and an instruction to start the variable performance is given by the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, i.e., if a display variable pattern command is received, the power-on variable image (not shown) can be displayed immediately during the variable performance period, and a simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable performance, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, the power-on main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the transfer takes time, and the power-on main image continues to be displayed for a long time after power is turned on. However, in this pachinko machine 10, a simple variable performance can be performed using the power-on variable image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, so that the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After the processing of S4005, interrupt permission is set (S4006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by the processing of S4006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to FIG. 66(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 66(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described below, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 66(b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 66(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is identified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, we will first explain the outline of the V interrupt processing flow, and then explain the details of each process with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 66(b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S4301). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (S4301: No), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so a command determination process (S4302) is executed to display a normal performance image on the third pattern display device 81, rather than a power-on image (not shown), and then a display setting process (S4303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S4302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. If a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable performance, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that the third pattern display device 81 displays a performance image corresponding to that state. Details of this command interrupt process will be described later with reference to Figures 67 to 75.

In the display setting process (S4303), the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specifically identified based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4302) or the like. In addition, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 76 to 78.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S4304). In this task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which was specified by the display setting process (S4303) or the simplified display setting process (S4309), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and even when a continuous preview command or a back image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in various performances and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the forwarding setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 79 and 80.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S4306). In this drawing process, a drawing list as shown in FIG. 38 is generated from the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (S4304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S4305), and this drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

Next, the display control device 114 executes an update process for various counters (S4307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of S4307 is a stop pattern counter (not shown) for determining the stop pattern. The value of this stop pattern counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A to D, front and rear miss reach, reach other than front and rear miss, complete miss, chance eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so a simple command determination process (S4308) is executed to cause the power-on image (see FIG. 32) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and then a simple display setting process (S4309) is executed, and the processing proceeds to S4304.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S4302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figures 67 to 75. First, Figure 67 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

As shown in FIG. 67, in this command determination process, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S4401: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes), a new command flag is set to ON (S4402) to notify the display setting process (S4303) that a new command has been processed in the ON state, and then the type of each command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S4403).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S4404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S4404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S4405), and processing returns to S4401.

Here, the variation pattern command processing (S4405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 68(a). FIG. 68(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation performance pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4501).

Here, the main control unit 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, so two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are never received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display fluctuation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S4501, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a change presentation having a shorter change time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110, the next display change pattern command will be received from the main control device 110 while a change presentation according to the set change display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a different change display will suddenly begin, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast to this, as in this embodiment, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, even if the main control unit 110 has actually instructed a change presentation with a longer change time than the set display data table, as described below, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that a demo presentation is displayed after the change presentation according to the display data table buffer 233d has ended and until the next display pattern command is received from the main control unit 110, so that the player can continue to watch the change of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Then, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S4503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4504). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S4505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When this variable pattern command processing is executed, the display setting processing updates the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S4504, extracts the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, and specifies the contents of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the processing of S4502 extracts the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process, the timing counter 233h, in which the time data is set by the process of S4503, is used to time the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table has ended, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control unit 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 81. If it is determined in the processing of S4404 that there is no variation pattern command for display (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a stop type command for display among the unprocessed commands (S4406), and if there is a variation type command for display (S4406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S4407), and processing returns to S4401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S4407) will be described with reference to FIG. 68(b). FIG. 68(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front or rear miss reach, reach other than front or rear miss, complete miss, or chance eye) is determined (S4601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 66(b)) is executed, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set (S4602).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of S4602 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set to off (S4603), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop pattern set by the processing of S4602 is described as type information for identifying the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In the above-mentioned task processing (S4304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop pattern set by the processing of S4602 is identified from the stop pattern discrimination flag set by S4603, and the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to this identified third pattern is stored is identified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third pattern is stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, but image data required for drawing can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before drawing is performed in the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third pattern display device 81 can be maintained high.

In addition, since the main control device 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, it will never receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display stop type commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display stop type command. In the process of S4601, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be a complete miss, and the stop type table is determined. As a result, the stop pattern corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S4602.

If a stopping pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot" were set, the third pattern display device 81 would display a stopping pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot" even if the actual result was a "miss for the special pattern," which could lead the player to mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine 10 had a "special pattern jackpot," thereby reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, by setting a stopping pattern corresponding to a complete miss, as in this embodiment, if the actual result was a "special pattern jackpot," the pachinko machine 10 would be a "special pattern jackpot" even if the third pattern display device 81 displayed a stopping pattern that was a complete miss, which would delight the player.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 67. If it is determined in the processing of S4406 that there is no display stop type command (S4406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4408), and if there is a rear image change command (S4408: Yes), rear image change command processing is executed (S4409), and processing returns to S4401.

Here, the rear image change command processing (S4409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 69(a). FIG. 69(a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing executes processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command processing, first, a rear image change flag that notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (S6303) of the rear image change resulting from receiving a rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S4701). Then, of the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (rear image A, B), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and the rear image discrimination flags corresponding to the other rear image types are set to OFF (S4702), after which the rear image change command processing ends and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S4701 is on, the rear image type after the change is identified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S4702. Then, if the identified rear image type is rear B, as described above, since some of the image data corresponding to those rear images is not resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified in the display data table that either back surface A or B is to be displayed based on the back surface type of the back surface image specified in the display data table, the type of back surface image to be displayed at that time is identified from the back surface image discrimination flag set by S4702, and further, the range of the back surface image to be displayed is identified over time, and the type of RAM in which image data corresponding to that range of the back surface image is stored (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are identified.

In addition, since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously within 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands will not be received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S4702, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. In addition, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. Since this change of the rear image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 67. If it is determined in the processing of S4408 that there is no rear image change command (S4408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4410), and if there is an error command (S4410: Yes), error command processing is executed (S4411), and the processing returns to S4401.

Here, the error command processing (S4411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 69(b). FIG. 69(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred is set to ON (S4801). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S4802), the error command processing is terminated, and the process returns to command judgment processing.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the processing of S4801, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by the processing of S4802, and a processing is performed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S4802 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, allowing the player and hall staff to correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 67. If it is determined in the processing of S4410 that there is no error command (S4410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command among the unprocessed commands (S4412), and if there is a hit-related command (S4412: Yes), hit-related command processing is executed (S4413), and processing returns to S4401.

Now, with reference to FIG. 70, the details of the win-related command processing (S4413) will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the win-related command processing. This win-related command processing executes processing corresponding to the opening command for display, the number of rounds command for display, and the ending command for display received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the hit-related command processing (FIG. 70, S4413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a hit start command for display (S4901). If it is determined in the processing of S4901 that there is a hit start command for display (S4901: Yes), the hit start command processing is executed (S4902) and the processing proceeds to S4903.

Now, referring to FIG. 71(a), the details of the jackpot start command processing (S4902) will be described. FIG. 71(a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command processing (S4902). This jackpot start command processing (S4902) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the win-related command processing (FIG. 70) that there is a jackpot start command for display, and is a process for displaying an effect suggesting the start of a jackpot on the third pattern display device 81.

In the jackpot start command process (S4902), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (e.g., corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5001). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5002). After that, time data is set in the timing counter 233h based on the jackpot start display data table (S5003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5004), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to off (S5005), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S4901 that there is no jackpot start command for display (S4901: No), the process proceeds to S4903. After the processing of S4901 or S4902 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a number of rounds command for display (S4903). If it is determined in the processing of S4903 that there is a number of rounds command for display, then rounds command processing is executed (S4904) and the process proceeds to S4905.

Now, referring to FIG. 71(b), the details of the number of rounds command processing (S4904) will be described. FIG. 71(b) is a flowchart showing the number of rounds command processing (S4904). This number of rounds command processing (S4904) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the win-related command processing (FIG. 70) that a display rounds command has been received, and is a process for displaying on the third pattern display device 81 the presentation when the number of rounds during a jackpot game is updated.

In the round number command process (S4904), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5102), and time data based on the round number display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S5103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5104), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to off (S5105), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S4903 that there is no round number command for display (S4903: No), the processing proceeds to S4905. After the processing of S4903 or S4904 is completed, it is determined whether or not a jackpot end command for display has been received (S4905). If it is determined in the processing of S4905 that there is a jackpot end command for display (S4905: Yes), jackpot end command processing is executed (S4906) and the processing proceeds to S4907.

Now, referring to FIG. 72(a), the details of the jackpot end command processing (S4906) will be described. FIG. 72(a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command processing (S4906). This jackpot end command processing (S4906) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the win-related command determination process (FIG. 70) that a jackpot end command has been received, and is a process for displaying an effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game on the third pattern display device 81.

In the jackpot end command process (S4906), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5201). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5202), and time data based on the jackpot end display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S5203). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5204), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to off (S5205), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S4905 that there is no big win end command for display (S4905: No), the processing proceeds to S4907. After the processing of S4905 or S4906 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a small win start command for display (S4907). If it is determined in the processing of S4907 that there is a small win start command for display (S4907: Yes), small win start command processing is executed (S4908) and the processing proceeds to S4909.

Now, referring to FIG. 72(b), the details of the small win start command process (S4908) will be described. This small win start command process (S4908) is executed when it is determined in the win-related command determination process (see FIG. 70) that a small win start command has been received, and is a process for displaying an effect suggesting the start of a small win game on the third pattern display device 81.

In the small win start command process (S4908), first, the small win start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small win start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). After that, time data is set in the timing counter 233h based on the small win start display data table (S5303), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to off (S5305), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S4907 that there is no small win start command for display (S4907: No), the process proceeds to S4909. After the processing of S4907 or S4908 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a small win end command for display (S4909). If it is determined in the processing of S4909 that there is a small win end command (S4909: Yes), small win end command processing is executed (S4910) and the process proceeds to S4911.

Now, referring to FIG. 73(a), the details of the small win end command process (S4910) will be described. This small win end command process (S4910) is executed when it is determined in the win-related command determination process (see FIG. 70) that a small win end command has been received, and is a process for displaying an effect suggesting the end of the small win game on the third pattern display device 81.

In the small win end command process (S4910), first, the small win end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5402), and time data based on the small win end display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S5403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to off (S5405), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S4909 that there is no small win end command for display (S4909: No), the processing proceeds to S4911. After the processing of S4909 or S4910 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a V entrance pass command for display (S4911). If it is determined in the processing of S4911 that there is a V entrance pass command (S4911: Yes), V entrance pass command processing is executed (S4912), and the processing proceeds to S4913.

Now, referring to FIG. 73(b), the V entrance passage command process (S4912) will be described in detail. This V entrance passage command process (S4912) is executed when it is determined in the win-related command determination process (see FIG. 70) that a V entrance passage command has been received, and is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that the game ball has passed through the V entry switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V entry device 650.

In the V entrance passage command process (S4912), first, the V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and time data based on the V entrance passage display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S5503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to off (S5505), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S4911 that there is no V entrance pass command for display (S4911: No), the processing proceeds to S4913. After the processing of S4911 or S4912 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a V performance command for display (S4913). If it is determined in the processing of S4913 that there is a V performance command (S4913: Yes), V performance command processing is executed (S4914), and the processing proceeds to S4915.

Now, referring to FIG. 74(a), the V effect command process (S4914) will be described in detail. This V effect command process (S4914) is executed when it is determined that a V effect command has been received in the win-related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and is a process for displaying an effect on the third symbol display device 81 that suggests a high probability of a big win being awarded.

In the V-effect command process (S4914), first, the V-effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5602), and time data based on the V-effect display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S5603). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to off (S5605), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S4913 that there is no display V performance command (S4913: No), the process proceeds to S4915. After completing the processing of S4913 or S4914, it is determined whether or not there is a display instruction command (S4915). If it is determined in the processing of S4915 that there is an instruction command (S4915: Yes), instruction command processing is executed (S4916) and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4915 that there is no display instruction command (S4915: No), this processing ends.

Now, referring to FIG. 74(b), the instruction command process (S4916) will be described in detail. This instruction command process (S4916) is executed when it is determined in the win-related command determination process (see FIG. 70) that an instruction command has been received, and is a process for displaying an effect on the third pattern display device 81 that suggests a high probability of winning a jackpot.

In the instruction command process (S4916), first, the instruction performance display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5651). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5652), and time data based on the instruction performance display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S5653). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5654), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to off (S5655), and this process ends.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 67. If it is determined in the processing of S4412 that there is no win-related command (S4412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is any of the various performance-related commands corresponding to pressing the frame button 22 among the unprocessed commands (S4414), and if there is any of the various performance-related commands (S4414: Yes), the performance-related command processing is executed (S4415), and the processing returns to S4401.

Here, the details of the performance-related command processing (S4415) will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the performance-related command processing. This performance-related command processing executes processing corresponding to various performance-related commands received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the performance-related command processing (S4415), first, the performance display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and time data based on the performance display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S5703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to off (S5705), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 67, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S4414 that there are no various performance-related commands (S4414: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S4416), and the process returns to S4401.

In the process of S4401, which is executed again after the processing of each command has been executed, it is again determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes), the processes of S4402 to S4416 are executed again. Then, the processes of S4401 to S4416 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S4401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (S4309), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)), is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image (see FIG. 32), i.e., the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 68(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 68(b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, while the other commands are discarded without executing the processes corresponding to those commands.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 68(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S4501, and since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of S4502, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b and its contents are cleared.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S4303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figures 76 to 78. Figure 76 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

As shown in FIG. 76, in this display setting process, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6001), and if the new command flag is not on, i.e., it is off (S6001: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the processes of S6002 to S6004 are skipped and the process moves to S6005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6001: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag off (S6002), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by the processes of S6003 to S6004.

In the process of S6003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S6003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S6003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S6004).

Now, with reference to Figure 77, the warning image setting process will be described in detail. Figure 77 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is for expanding image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying warning images of errors corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to on on the third pattern display device 81 is expanded (S6101).

The task process uses this expanded warning image data to identify the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image, and determines various parameters required for drawing for each sprite, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after processing of S6101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S6102) and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 76. After the warning image setting process (S6004), or in the process of S6003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., is off (S6003: No), then the process proceeds to S6005.

In S6005, a pointer update process is executed (S6005). Details of the pointer update process will now be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process updates the pointer 233f, which specifies the address from which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6201). That is, in principle, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Also, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is written at address "0000H" and the actual data of each table is specified from address "0001H" onwards. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the actual data can be read from each data table in order starting from address "0001H".

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S6201, it is then determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S6202). As a result, if it is End information (S6202: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S6203), and if it is a demo display data table (S6203: Yes), time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timing counter 233h (S6204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S6205), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third pattern display device 81 can be made to repeatedly display demo performances.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6203 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S6203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S6206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the End information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6202: No), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will continue. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6006). In the task process, based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S6006 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Then, the value of the timing counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S6007), and it is determined whether the value of the timing counter 233h after decrement is 0 or less (S6008). If the value of the timing counter 233h is 1 or more (S6008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the timing counter 233h is 0 or less (S6008: Yes), this means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on (S6009).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S6009: No), the confirmation display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the confirmation display, so first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6010), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6011). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the confirmation display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S6012), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6013). Then, after the confirmation display flag, which indicates that the confirmation display is being performed in the on state, is set on (S6014), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied directly to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S6015), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In this way, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the final display performance of the stopped pattern in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Also, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting a separate program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so that various types of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the processing of S6015 is used to identify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and in the variable display data table, pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is recorded until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change based on the data table. In the task processing (S4304), the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is identified from the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by S6015 until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S6009, if the confirmation display flag is on (S6009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S6016). If the demo display flag is off (S6016: No), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmation display effect, so the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6017), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6018). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S6019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6020), the demo display flag, which indicates that a demo effect is being performed in the on state, is set to on (S6021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if a display variable pattern command indicating the start of the next variable performance is not received after the final display performance has ended, the drawing content can be set so that a demo performance is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the processing of S6016, if the demo display flag is on (S6016: Yes), this means that the demo performance is performed after the final display performance has ended, and that the demo performance has ended, so the display setting processing is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demo performance will start again, as described above, by the pointer update processing executed in the next V interrupt processing, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S4309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 66(b)). However, in the simple display setting processing, a processing is performed to set in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that the power-on variable image (not shown) corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is to be displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined time after the performance time of the variable performance using the power-on variable image has ended.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S4305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figures 79 and 80. First, Figure 79 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S6301). Then, if the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S6302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79(b).

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S6301 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, i.e., it is off (S6301: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfers of image data from the character ROM 234 are to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, referring to FIG. 79(b), we will explain the resident image transfer setting process (S6302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 79(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S6401), and if a transfer instruction has been sent (S6401: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S6402). In this process of S6402, after an instruction to transfer image data has been sent to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has been completed. Then, if it is determined by the process of S6402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6402: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, and therefore the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6402: Yes), the process proceeds to S6403. Also, if the result of processing in S6401 indicates that a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S6401: No), the process proceeds to S6403.

In the processing of S6403, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6403), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S6403: No), a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6404), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the transfer destination (an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

If all resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S6403 (S6403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6405) and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)), instead of the simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 66(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S4309 in FIG. 66(b)), the command determination process (see FIG. 67-FIG. 75) and the display setting process (see FIG. 76-FIG. 78) are executed, so that the drawing of the normal image is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 thereafter is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) (see S6301: No in FIG. 79(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and power-on variable image that have already been transferred during the main processing. The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process remains resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, after all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as the back image, the third pattern, the character pattern, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113, the display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time to displaying some image on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the normal image transfer setting process (S6303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6005) of the previously executed display setting process (S4303) is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6501). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (S6502), and if it is transfer data information (S6502: Yes), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S6503), and further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233, which indicates that image data to be transferred is present in the ON state, is set to ON (S6504), and the process proceeds to S6505.

In addition, in the process of S6502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but is Null data (S6502: No), the processes of S6503 and S6504 are skipped and the process proceeds to S6505. In the process of S6505, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (S6505), and if a transfer instruction has been set (S6505: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S6506).

In the process of S6506, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the process of S6506 that the transfer process has not ended (S6506: No), image transfer processing is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6506: Yes), the process proceeds to S6507. Also, if the result of the process of S6505 shows that an image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S6505: No), the process proceeds to S6507.

In the processing of S6507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6507). If the transfer start flag is on (S6507: Yes), image data that should be transferred is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S6508), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S6503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the processing proceeds to S6513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6507: No), it is then determined whether or not the background image change flag is on (S6509). Then, if the background image change flag is not on but off (S6509: No), image data that should be transferred is not present, so the normal image transfer setting processing ends.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S6509: Yes), this means that the rear image has been changed, so the rear image change flag is set to off (S6510), and then, of the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag that is on is identified, and that image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S6511). Furthermore, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the rear image data corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag that is on is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained (S6512), and the process proceeds to S6513.

If the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is for rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so there is no image data to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, in the processing of S6511, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is for rear A, the normal image transfer processing is terminated as is.

In the process of S6513, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513). This determination in the process of S6513 is made by referencing the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage status corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the result of the processing of S6513 is that the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being transferred unnecessarily from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing burden on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S6513 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S6514). As a result, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of the image to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is complete, it transmits a transfer end signal to the MPU 231.

After processing of S6514, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S6515), and this normal image transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer setting process, when a change to the rear image is made based on receipt of a rear image change command during the previously executed command determination process, image data used for that rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 for the image data to be transferred according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

In this case, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be ensured to be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the above-mentioned drawing process (S4306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described in detail. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 36 is generated (S6601) from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4304), the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S4305). That is, in the process of S6601, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4304), the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are identified for each sprite, and the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task process are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite that should be placed in the back of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed in the front, and the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite are described as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite in the rearranged sprite order, thereby generating a drawing list. Furthermore, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As mentioned above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, so the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are sent to the image controller (S6602). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn, and if the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the second frame buffer 236c to expand the image drawn.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands them by overwriting them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and the image data stored from the source start address to the source end address are read out of character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a, and then, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in buffer RAM 237a is transferred sequentially to the area of normal video RAM 236 indicated by the destination start address. The image data stored in this normal video RAM 236 is then used based on the drawing list sent by MPU 231, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image expanded in the frame buffer. Also, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being expanded, an image expanded from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, allowing the drawing process and the display process to be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After the processing of S6602, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k (S6603). Then, the drawing process ends and returns to the V interrupt processing. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of the image are completed. As a result, when the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of the image at a certain timing, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of one frame is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of the image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of the image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of one frame is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, each time every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

As explained above, in this first embodiment, the time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, can be set as follows: a time-saving end condition (special prize end condition) that is set when a big win is won (when a winning pattern or two-type win is obtained), a time-saving end condition (number of fluctuations end condition) that is set when a special pattern fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times, and a time-saving end condition (number of wins end condition) that is set when the number of times small wins have been won in the special pattern lottery reaches a predetermined number. This makes it difficult for the player to easily predict the period during which the time-saving state will continue (the timing at which the time-saving state will end).

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned winning count end condition is configured to be met when a small win is won multiple times, making the player think that the time-saving state will end every time a small win is won during the time-saving state. In addition, in this embodiment, multiple small win types can be set when a small win is won, and as multiple small win types, there are a small win type that sets a winning count end condition and a small win type that does not set a winning count end condition. This makes it difficult to predict the timing when the time-saving state will end based on the small win game played during the time-saving state.

As mentioned above, when setting a small win type that sets a winning count end condition and a small win type that does not set a winning count end condition, it is recommended to set a small win type that sets a winning count end condition and a small win type that does not set a winning count end condition for the same small win game (opening operation of V winning device 650) to be executed (same concept with an error that cannot be distinguished by the player). This makes it possible to prevent the player from knowing the timing when the time-saving state ends.

In addition, in this first embodiment, multiple small win types for which the winning count end condition is set can be set, and the number of times set as the winning count end condition for each small win type is different. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to predict the timing when the time-saving state will end by determining the content of the small win game executed during the time-saving state.

In the first embodiment described above, a small prize is won by drawing a second special symbol (special symbol 2), which is more likely to be executed when the time-saving state is set, and if the ball passes through a specific area during the small prize game corresponding to the small prize that has been won (if the V switch 650e3 detects that the ball has flowed down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 that is opened by the small prize game), a big prize (two types of prize) is set after the small prize game ends.

In the above-mentioned two-type winning setting, in the first embodiment, a jackpot game based on the jackpot type (jackpot game content) that is set when a small jackpot is won by drawing a special pattern is executed on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area during the small jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to read (draw) a jackpot type corresponding to the type of small jackpot game being executed (small jackpot type) on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area during the small jackpot game, and execute a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type read (selected as a result of the drawing), or it may be configured to set a jackpot on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area during the small jackpot game, and execute a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type selected based on the result of a predetermined drawing.

In this manner, in the first embodiment, which is configured to allow two types of wins to be set, small win games with different expectations for setting two types of wins are set according to the type of small win that has been won, and a time-saving end condition (number of wins end condition) is set for each type of small win. Furthermore, the smaller the small win game (small win type) in which a two-type win is more likely to be set, the fewer the number of times the number of wins end condition is met (number of wins).

By configuring it in this way, if a small prize is won during the time-saving state, the small prize game is executed while considering both the possibility of winning a double prize and the possibility of the time-saving state ending, thereby improving playability during the time-saving state. Furthermore, the more likely a small prize game in which a double prize is won is won, the more likely the time-saving state will end, making it possible to motivate players to play during the small prize game.

In addition, in this first embodiment, among the types of small wins, the win count end condition for small win A, which allows players to win two types of wins if they continue to play with the right hand, is set to 1 (with some exceptions). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to give a large penalty only to players who do not play with the right hand continuously (players who do not play appropriately), and to have players continue to play with the right hand during the time-saving period.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, the timing at which the time-saving state ends is configured to differ depending on the type of time-saving end condition that has been met, and it is possible to set the case where the time-saving state continues during the period in which the small win game is being played, and the case where the time-saving state has ended. This allows the game result to differ depending on which time-saving end condition has been met, so that the player can pay attention not only to whether or not the time-saving end condition has been met, but also to the type of time-saving end condition that has been met.

Specifically, if a small win occurs during a special pattern change where the condition for ending the number of times of change is met, the time-saving state ends when the special pattern stops changing (when the pattern showing the result of the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed), and the normal state is maintained during the small win game that is played afterwards, whereas if the condition for ending the number of times of wins is met, the time-saving state ends when the small win game is played.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the V winning device 650, which is opened during a small win game, is disposed upstream of the through gate 67 and the electric device 640a (upstream of the flow path along which the ball released by right-hand play flows), so that the ball is less likely to flow down to the through gate 67 or the electric device 640a during a small win game. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the timing at which the time-saving state ends differs depending on the time-saving end condition that has been established, and therefore reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, if a normal symbol is won and the time-saving state is set at the time when the opening operation of the electric role device 640a is set, even if the time-saving state ends during the opening operation of the electric role device 640a, the opening operation during the time-saving state is configured to continue. Therefore, even if the timing at which the time-saving state ends differs depending on the time-saving end condition that has been established, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice, and therefore it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player.

In addition, as in the first embodiment described above, rather than making it difficult to understand that the timing at which the time-saving state ends differs depending on the time-saving end condition that has been met, in order to provide unique gameplay by making the timing at which the time-saving state ends significantly different depending on the time-saving end condition that has been met, it is preferable to configure the game so that, for example, when the variable count end condition is met, the time-saving state ends when the special pattern starts to fluctuate, and when the winning count end condition is met, the time-saving state ends when the small win game ends. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to significantly differ the period during which the time-saving state is set depending on the type of time-saving end condition that has been met.

In this case, unlike the first embodiment described above, the through gate 67 and the electric device 640a are arranged upstream of the V winning device 650, and when the time-saving state is set during a small win game, many balls are guided by the electric device 640a to enter the ball entrance (for example, the general ball entrance 63, the second ball entrance 640), and further, it is preferable to configure it so that more balls are paid out from the ball entrance guided by the operation of the electric device 640a than from the balls that enter the V winning device 650, which is opened by the small win game.

In addition, the time-saving end conditions can be set to two for the number of variations and one for the number of wins, and only if a small win is won in the first special pattern variation after the time-saving state is set can many balls be guided into the ball entry port by the electric device 640a during the small win game. By configuring it in this way, when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to play while hoping that a specific time-saving end condition will be met, providing new gameplay.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown with reference to FIG. 2, the V winning device 650, which opens when a small win is won, is disposed in the right-hand area, and a ball is entered into the V winning device 650 by playing right-hand during a small win game, and when the ball that entered the V winning device 650 passes through a specific area (the V switch 650e3 detects the ball), a double win is set. Furthermore, the content of the jackpot set as a double win (the content of the jackpot game, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, etc.) is set according to the type of small win, which is the result of the lottery for the special symbol.

In this type of gameplay, for example, when a small prize is won, the lottery result is identified by the stopped display mode of the first pattern stopped and displayed on the first display device 37, and the content of the big prize set corresponding to this small prize is determined. For example, if a small prize is won that has the least favorable jackpot content for the player (for example, a jackpot in which the number of prize balls (number of rounds played) that can be obtained by the jackpot game is less than in other jackpot games, or a game state (for example, normal state) that is unfavorable to the player after the jackpot game ends), there is a risk that the player will not intentionally try to win a double prize, but will instead play in an attempt to win the next small prize.

Therefore, in the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 of the first embodiment shown in Figure 2, a delay flow path that delays the flow of the ball downstream is provided upstream of the V winning device 650 in the right side area so that the period until the ball shot during right side play reaches the V winning device 650 is longer than the period from when the stopped pattern indicating the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed on the first display device 37 until the small win game is executed (the time when two types of wins can be obtained during the small win game).

This configuration makes it difficult to win two types of prizes when playing right-hand after determining the lottery result of the special symbol stopped and displayed on the first display device 37. Therefore, in order to win two types of prizes, right-hand play can be continuously performed before the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner), which makes it possible to prevent malicious play such as that described above from being performed.

In this case, for all small wins, the period until the ball shot in the right-side play reaches the V winning device 650 does not need to be longer than the period from when the stopped pattern showing the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed on the first display device 37 until the small win play is executed (until the time when two types of wins can be obtained during the small win play), and it is sufficient that some of the small win games (especially the small win types for which the big win contents that are advantageous to the player are set) are executed to satisfy the conditions.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, the expectation of a double win during a small win game (the possibility that the ball will pass through a specific area during a small win game when right-hand play is continuously performed) is configured to differ depending on the type of small win. Specifically, as described above, the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid 650k is configured to differ depending on the type of small win that has been won. However, without being limited to this, for example, the opening timing of the V winning port 650a, which rotates during a small win game, may be configured to differ depending on the type of small win that has been won, thereby making the expectation of a double win during a small win game (the possibility that the ball will pass through a specific area during a small win game when right-hand play is continuously performed) different.

In this case, for example, the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid 650k during a small win game can be set to a constant operation regardless of the type of small win, and an operation pattern can be set in which the flow path through which a ball that has won in the V winning device 650 during a small win game flows alternately between a first period in which the flow path is connected to a flow path that passes through a specific area (special discharge flow path 650e2) and a second period in which the flow path is connected to another flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1), and the timing of opening the V winning port 650a can be set to differ depending on the timing at which the first period and the second period are established.

Furthermore, even if the special symbol lottery result is a miss, the right-hand play can be continued by executing the same effect as the small win game. In this case, if the special symbol lottery result is a miss, the confirmed display time of the special symbol, i.e., the period during which the special symbol lottery result is statically displayed, can be varied depending on the type of miss, so that in some cases where the special symbol lottery result is a miss, the confirmed display time of the special symbol can be extended (the period until the next special symbol variation is executed can be extended).

Therefore, even if the player does not win the small win game, the player can still play a game aiming for a double win. In addition, by applying this effect when the player misses (pseudo small win game effect) to a pachinko machine 10 having a game board 13 using the delay member described above, the player can play the right-hand game more continuously.

Furthermore, it may be possible to set a small win type in which an opening operation (small win game) in which the ball cannot enter the V winning device 650a is executed, and if a small win of that small win type (unfortunate small win) is won, that is, if a small win game with no expectation of a double win is executed, the above-mentioned (pseudo small win game presentation) may be executed.

In addition, the number of times the special symbol that can execute the pseudo small win game performance described above has been drawn (a specific miss, a disappointing small win) may be counted, and the time-saving end condition may be established based on the counted result. This allows the time-saving state to end based on the number of times the pseudo small win game performance has been executed, making it easier to continue right-hitting play to determine whether the current small win game performance is pseudo or not, that is, to determine whether the ball will enter the V winning device 650 during the small win game performance.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 82 to 105. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it is configured so that the first special symbol can also be selected as a small win, the content set as the end condition of the time-saving state is different, and the content of the performance display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is different.

In the first embodiment described above, the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state are configured to be configurable as a change count end condition that is established based on the number of times the special pattern changes, and a win count end condition that is established based on the number of times a small win is won, and the time-saving state is ended when any one of the multiple time-saving end conditions is established. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the time-saving state is set, and allows the player to play with a sense of tension during the time-saving state, providing a game that does not become boring.

Furthermore, because different winning count ending conditions can be set depending on the type of small win that is set, it makes it even more difficult to understand when the time-saving state will end. In addition, because different time-saving ending conditions can be set depending on the type of big win for which the time-saving state is set, it makes it even more difficult to understand when the time-saving state will end.

However, in the first embodiment described above, it only makes it difficult for the player to understand the multiple time-saving end conditions that are set according to the game results and the time-saving information that is updated during the time-saving state, and the fulfillment of the predetermined time-saving end conditions is left to the results of the lottery for the special symbols, making it difficult for the player to believe that he or she has won the jackpot on his or her own.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment allows the player to freely select whether to play right-hand or left-hand play when the time-saving mode is set, and is configured so that the time-saving end conditions that are likely to be met vary depending on the game content selected (right-hand play, left-hand play).

In the second embodiment configured in this way, the player can select the game content during the time-saving state. Therefore, in a game during the time-saving state that is executed according to the game content selected by the player, even if the time-saving end condition is met early or the time-saving state can be continued for a long period of time, the player can be made to believe that the game was played by himself.

Furthermore, this second embodiment is configured to allow two types of winning to be obtained, just like the first embodiment described above, and is configured so that the expected value for the period during which the time-saving state continues and the expected value for obtaining two types of winning (expected value of obtaining two types of winnings per one change of the special pattern) are different when the first game (left-hand play) is performed during the time-saving state and when the second game (right-hand play) is performed.

Specifically, when the first game is played, the period during which the time-saving state can continue is likely to be short, and a time-saving game in which it is easy to obtain a double win during the time-saving state is executed, whereas when the second game is played, the period during which the time-saving state can continue is likely to be long (longer than the first game), and a time-saving game in which it is difficult to obtain a double win during the time-saving state (harder to obtain than the first game) is executed.

This configuration allows the player to select the game content during the time-saving state according to their own convenience, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that allows both players who wish to play for a long period of time and players who can only play for a short period of time to play without complaint. A detailed explanation of the content for allowing games with different playability to be played during the time-saving state will be provided later.

<About the content of the performance in the second embodiment>
Here, the contents of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 82 to Fig. 84. First, the contents of the effects during the ending period of the jackpot game in which the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends will be described with reference to Fig. 82(a). Fig. 82(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game. Among the elements displayed on the display screen, the same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), during the ending period of the jackpot game, the comment "After the jackpot, enjoy playing as you like" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm to guide the player on how to play during the time-saving state that is set after the jackpot game ends, and the comment "Jackpot Ended" is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot game has ended.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a first information display area Dm4 showing the content of the first game that can be executed during the time-saving state, a second information display area Dm5 showing the content of the second game that can be executed during the time-saving state, and an acquired content display area Dm9 for showing the bonus acquired during the big win game are formed. In this second embodiment, the first information display area Dm4 displays the comment "Left Hit", which indicates left-handed play as the first game that can be executed during the time-saving state, and "Short-time match", which indicates the characteristic gameplay when left-handed play is performed during the time-saving state.

In addition, the second information display area Dm5 displays the comment "Right Hit", which indicates right-hit play as the second game that can be executed during the time-saving state, and the comment "Relaxed Game", which indicates the characteristic gameplay when right-hit play is performed during the time-saving state. In other words, in this second embodiment, it is possible to display immediately before the time-saving state is set (during the ending period of the jackpot game) that the player can select between left-hit play, which concludes the time-saving state in a short period of time, and right-hit play, which allows the player to enjoy the time-saving state for a long period of time, as the game method during the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play using any game method at the timing when the time-saving state is set.

In this embodiment, only the major differences between the first game and the second game are displayed in text in the first information display area Dm4 and the second information display area Dm5 to make it easier for the player to select a game method during the time-saving state, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to display all the differences between the first game and the second game, or to display the differences with pictures instead of text. Also, as shown in FIG. 82(a), it may be configured to display only the major differences in the first information display area Dm4 and the second information display area Dm5, and to display detailed content by selecting the first information display area Dm4 or the second information display area Dm5 during the period when the display is on.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide an appropriate display format for players who only need a rough understanding of the game content that differs depending on the game method, as well as for players who want to understand the details of the game content that differs depending on the game method.

Next, referring to FIG. 82(b), the display contents immediately after the time-saving state is set will be described. FIG. 82(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the time-saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 82(b), the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that it has a function of reserving and storing the lottery of the second special pattern up to a predetermined number (four), and in the second display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, four reserved patterns, the first reserved pattern Dsf to the fourth reserved pattern Dsi, are displayed as "triangle" marks to indicate the number of reserved patterns (reserved balls) of the second special pattern.

The reserved symbols are displayed in the order in which they were reserved (the order in which the balls entered the second ball entrance 640, which triggers the lottery for the second special symbol), from the first reserved symbol Dsf to the fourth reserved symbol Dsi, that is, from the left to the right of the second display area Ds2, in the same way as the reserved symbols of the first special symbol (first reserved symbol Dsb to fourth reserved symbol Dse) described above. In other words, the reserved symbols of the first special symbol (Dsb to Dse) and the reserved symbols of the second special symbol (Dsf to Dsi) are both displayed to gradually shift toward the active symbol Dsa, so that the player can easily grasp the reserved symbol that corresponds to the next special symbol to be executed from the display contents of each special symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), immediately after the time-saving state is set, the character "?" is displayed in the game guide display area Dm2. This is a display indicating that the player has not yet determined whether to execute the current time-saving state with the first game (left-handed play) or the second game (right-handed play). Note that a display mode other than that shown in FIG. 82(b) may be displayed in the game guide display area Dm2 to indicate that the play method during the time-saving state has not been determined. For example, the character "left or right" may be displayed to indicate that the period is one in which either left-handed play or right-handed play may be performed.

The details will be described later, but in this second embodiment, after the time-saving state is set, it is determined whether the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, and the game method selected by the player is determined based on the result of this determination. Therefore, the character "?" is displayed in the game guide display area Dm2 during the period from when the time-saving state is set until the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640.

Furthermore, in this second embodiment, the display content of FIG. 82(b) is configured to continue for a predetermined period (4 seconds) after the time-saving state is set, and the variation pattern is configured to end the special pattern variation corresponding to the winning information that was reserved and stored at the time the time-saving state was set during that period. By configuring it in this way, if winning information for a jackpot is included in the reserved ball of the special pattern, the special pattern variation corresponding to the jackpot can be ended before the first game or the second game is determined and displayed (before the display mode that provides information on how to play is displayed in the game guide display area Dm2).

As a result, even if a player wins a jackpot due to a special pattern change that is different from the playing method selected by the player, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82(b), the game method during the time-saving state is set is displayed in the guide display area Dm2, but the currently set game method may be displayed in another display area. In other words, during a big win game, it is necessary to display a display to guide (instruct) the player to a game method that is advantageous to the player, so the display method needs to be displayed in the guide display area Dm2. However, since the game is configured so that the player can obtain the same game results regardless of which game method (right-hand play or left-hand play) he or she selects while the time-saving state is set, the game method may be displayed in a separate area that displays the current game method, rather than in the guide display area Dm2 for guiding (instructing) the player to a game method that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when displaying in the guide display area Dm2, the display mode (for example, the color or shape of the text) may be different to distinguish between a situation in which the game method is being guided (instructed) to the player and a situation in which the current game method (the game method selected by the player) is displayed.

Next, referring to FIG. 83(a), the presentation content when the first game (left-handed game) is being played with the time-saving state set will be described. FIG. 83(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the first game (left-handed game) is being played. As shown in FIG. 83(a), when the first game is played, a game result display 810 that resembles a "lottery box" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and a game content display 811 is displayed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm to inform the player of the game content of the first game. Furthermore, a remaining time-saving count display area Dm10 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm to indicate the number of times the time-saving count in the first game will end.

In other words, in the first game (left-hand play during time-saving mode) in the pachinko machine 10 of this second embodiment, a lottery is drawn in response to the fluctuation (selection) of the special symbol, and the result (1st prize to loss) is displayed as the game result display 810 to display an effect that notifies the result of the selection of the special symbol. Also, when the first game (left-hand play) is executed (set) as the play method during time-saving, the word "left-hand play" is displayed in the game guide display area Dm2 to indicate the play method of the first game.

When a specific play method (play direction) such as "left hit" or "right hit" is displayed in the play guide display area Dm2, if a play method (play direction) different from the displayed play method (play direction) is played, an error notification is executed to correct the play method (play direction). In other words, after it is determined that the first game (left hit game) is played during the time-saving state, an error notification is executed if a right hit game is played, and after it is determined that the second game (right hit game) is played during the time-saving state, an error notification is executed if a left hit game is played. In addition, during the period when no play method is determined during the time-saving state, an error notification is not executed regardless of whether a left hit game or a right hit game is played.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83(a), a special symbol 1 reserved number display area Dm6 that displays the reserved number (reserved symbol number) of the first special symbol, and a special symbol 2 reserved number display area Dm7 that displays the reserved number (reserved symbol number) of the second special symbol are formed on the right side of the main display area Dm, and only the reserved symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol) that corresponds to the currently selected play method (left-handed play) is displayed in the sub-display area Ds (the reserved ball number of the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Ds1). By configuring in this way, it is possible to highlight and display (presentation display) only the reserved symbol number (reserved ball number) of the special symbol that corresponds to the play method selected by the player.

The actual number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) corresponding to each special symbol is configured to be displayed in the dedicated special symbol 1 reserved number display area Dm6 and special symbol 2 reserved number display area Dm7, so that the player can be notified of the exact number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) for each special symbol. In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 83(a), the special symbol 1 reserved number display area Dm6 and the special symbol 2 reserved number display area Dm7 are configured to display the current reserved number "0" in a size that is easily identifiable by the player, but it is better to display the reserved number of each special symbol in a size that is difficult for the player to distinguish without thinking, or to display the reserved number with an identifier other than a number.

When the effect display corresponding to the left-hand play shown in FIG. 83(a) is executed, the result of the lottery is displayed in the main display area Dm as the effect result according to the lottery result of the first special symbol, and the remaining number of time-saving times to indicate the number of times the time-saving time will end is updated and displayed in the time-saving time display area Dm10 based on the progress of each value (number of times the special symbol changes and number of small wins) for the time-saving time end condition. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing during the time-saving time by understanding the result of the lottery and the display content of the time-saving time display area Dm10.

On the other hand, when right-hand play is selected as the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 83(b), an effect is executed in which a boy-like character 812 searches for a treasure chest 813 to announce the result of the special symbol lottery, and the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) of the special symbol (second special symbol) corresponding to the selected play method (right-hand play) is displayed in the second display area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds. Also, the word "right-hand play" is displayed in the guide display area Dm2. Note that the content of the effect executed when right-hand play is selected is the same as the content of the effect in the first embodiment described above, except for the effect using the reserved symbol of the second special symbol, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 84, we will explain the effects that are executed when right-hand play is selected during the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of this second embodiment, which differ from the effects of the first embodiment described above. FIG. 84 is a schematic diagram that shows an example of a game screen when right-hand play is selected during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 84, in this second embodiment, the reserved pattern displayed in the sub-display area Ds is configured to display whether or not the time-saving end condition has been met, or the expected probability of winning a jackpot. In FIG. 84, a preview display mode 820 is displayed showing the word "Chance" for the first reserved pattern Dsf corresponding to the next special pattern change, and a preview display mode 821 is displayed showing the word "End" for the third reserved pattern Dsh corresponding to the special pattern change three changes later.

The preview display mode set for each reserved symbol is selected and displayed using the reserved display selection table 222aa, which will be described later.

In this way, by displaying the advance notice display mode for the reserved symbols, the player can predict the special symbol change that will end the time-saving state, and will eagerly play in an attempt to win a jackpot before the special symbol change is executed. Also, based on the contents of the advance notice display mode, it is possible to grasp the period during which the time-saving state will not end, and execute the special symbol change with peace of mind.

Next, referring to FIG. 85, the game content during the time-saving state in this second embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram that shows a schematic diagram of the game content during the time-saving state set after the end of a jackpot game in which jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, among the game content during the time-saving state in this second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 85, this second embodiment is configured so that a small jackpot can be won in the lottery for the first special symbol, as opposed to the first embodiment described above, and is configured so that the first special symbol is more likely to win a small jackpot game (small jackpot game executed in response to small jackpot A) in which a two-type jackpot can be obtained than with the second special symbol.

In addition, in this second embodiment, the same configuration of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment described above is used, and when the time-saving state is set, the opening operation control of the electric device 640a is varied so that it is easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640 compared to the normal state. In other words, when the second game (right-hand hit game) is performed during the time-saving state, more balls can be made to enter the second ball entrance 640 than in the normal state, and more lottery draws (variations) of the second special pattern can be performed. On the other hand, even if the time-saving state is set, the ease with which balls can enter the first ball entrance 64 remains the same as in the normal state.

Here, referring to FIG. 85, the first game (left-handed play) and the second game (right-handed play), which are the game contents during the time-saving state, will be compared and explained. First, the number of prize balls that the player can acquire during the time-saving state (the number of prize balls that can be acquired by inserting a ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640) will be explained. The number of prize balls during this time-saving state is configured to be greater in the second game than in the first game. When the first game is performed during the time-saving state, only the same number of prize balls as when the normal state is set can be acquired, and a game in which the balls (held balls) decrease during the time-saving state is executed. On the other hand, when the second game is performed, it is possible to insert many balls into the second ball entrance 640, so many prize balls can be acquired, and as a result, a game in which the balls (held balls) are kept (maintained) during the time-saving state is executed.

The period during which the time-saving state can be continuously set is configured to be shorter when the first game is played than when the second game is played. Specifically, among the multiple time-saving end conditions, as the change count end condition that is established based on the number of times the special symbol changes, there is at least a change count end condition that is established when the number of times the first special symbol changes reaches 30, and a change count end condition that is established when the number of times the second special symbol changes reaches 80, and when the first game is played, the time-saving state is configured to be continuously set only up to a maximum of 30 special symbol changes.

Furthermore, the expectation of winning a jackpot (including one type and two types) per special pattern variation (lottery) executed during the time-saving state is configured to be higher (larger) when the first game is played than when the second game is played. To explain the expectation of winning this jackpot, in this embodiment, the lottery for the first special pattern (lottery for special patterns executed when the first game is played) and the lottery for the second special pattern (lottery for special patterns executed when the second game is played) are configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (probability of winning one type) is the same (1/200). In other words, the expectation of winning two types is configured to be different between the first game and the second game.

To explain this in more detail, the probability of winning a small prize in the drawing of the first special symbol executed during the first game is set to 1/10, and the probability of winning a small prize in the drawing of the second special symbol executed during the second game is set to 1/2. The allocation of small prize types set when a small prize is won is set so that the ratio of small prize A to small prize B is 9:1 when a small prize is won in the drawing of the first special symbol. In other words, when the drawing of the first special symbol is executed in the first game, small prize A is executed with a probability of 1/11.

On the other hand, if a small prize is won in the drawing of the second special symbol, the small prize A is executed with a probability of 1/200. In this way, by making the probability of winning a small prize and the allocation of the small prize type set when a small prize is won different, the first game is configured to have a higher expectation of winning a big prize (including one type and two types) based on one change (drawing) of the special symbol than the second game.

Furthermore, in this second embodiment, the time-saving end condition that is likely to be met when the first game is played is set to be different from the time-saving end condition that is likely to be met when the second game is played. Specifically, when the first game is played, the time-saving end condition that is likely to be met when the small win A is won once is the most likely to be met, followed by the time-saving end condition that is likely to be met when the first special pattern changes 30 times, and the time-saving end condition that is likely to be met when the small win B is won three times.

When the second game is played, the time-saving end condition is most likely to be met if the small prize D is won 20 times, followed by the time-saving end condition if the number of times the second special symbol changes reaches 80, and then the time-saving end condition if the small prize A is won once.

As explained above, in this second embodiment, during the time-saving state that is set after the end of a jackpot game, the player can select a game method (left-hand play, right-hand play) to play games with different playability.

As different gameplay characteristics, a gameplay in which the player aims to win a jackpot in a short period of time (first game) and a gameplay in which the player aims to win a jackpot in a long period of time (second game) can be selected. In addition, as a method for differentiating the gameplay methods, multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state are set, and the game is configured so that different time-saving end conditions are more likely to be met when the first game is played and when the second game is played. This makes it possible to make the period during which the time-saving state is set different between the first game and the second game.

<Electrical Configuration in the Second Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 86 to 92. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 have been changed, and that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been changed. Other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Figure 86 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this second embodiment. As shown in Figure 86 (a), the ROM 202 in this second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the ROM 202 has a 1st win random number 2 table 202aa in place of the 1st win random number table 202a, a 1st win type selection table 202b in place of the 1st win type selection 2 table 202ab, a fluctuation pattern table 202d in place of the fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad, a time-saving grant table 202e in place of the time-saving grant 2 table 202ae, a small win type selection table 202f in place of the small win type selection 2 table 202af, and an open scenario table 202ag in place of the open scenario table 202g.

The first win random number 2 table 202aa differs from the first win random number table 202a of the first embodiment described above in that the value (first win random number counter value C1) used to determine whether a small win has occurred has been changed. Here, the first win random number 2 table 202aa in this second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

Figure 87(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number 2 table 202aa in this second embodiment. As shown in Figure 87(a), the first winning random number 2 table 202aa has a special pattern 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 corresponding to the first special pattern, and a special pattern 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 corresponding to the second special pattern.

Next, the contents of special pattern 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 87(b). FIG. 87(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of special pattern 1 random number 2 table 202aa1. This special pattern 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 differs from special pattern 1 random number table 202a1 of the first embodiment described above in that a value that determines a small win has been added, but the other elements are the same. Explanations of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 87(b), the special pattern 1 random number 2 table 202aa specifies the small win determination value as "10 to 109" among the values of the first win random number counter C1. In other words, when the special pattern 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 is used to determine (execute) the lottery for the special pattern (when the lottery for the first special pattern is executed), the probability of determining a big win is 1/200, and the probability of determining a small win is 1/10.

Next, the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 will be described with reference to FIG. 87(c). FIG. 87(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 2 table 202aa2. As shown in FIG. 87(c), the special pattern 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 specifies the value of the first win random number counter C1 as "0 to 4" as the big win determination value, and "5 to 499" as the small win determination value. In other words, when the special pattern 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 is used to determine (execute) the lottery result of the special pattern (when the lottery of the second special pattern is executed), it is configured so that a 1/200 chance of a big win is determined, and a 1/2 chance of a small win is determined.

As explained above, in this embodiment, it is configured so that a small prize can be won in either case where a lottery for the first special symbol is executed or where a lottery for the second special symbol is executed. This makes it possible to establish the winning count end condition, which is established based on the number of times small prizes have been won, whether a first game (left-hand play) in which a lottery for the first special symbol is executed during the time-saving state, or a second game (right-hand play) in which a lottery for the second special symbol is executed.

In addition, the probability of winning a small prize in the drawing of the first special symbol and the probability of winning a small prize in the drawing of the second special symbol can be set differently, so the ease of achieving the condition for ending the number of wins can be made different between the first game and the second game. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of games in which the ease of ending the time-saving state differs between when the first game is played and when the second game is played.

Returning to FIG. 86(a), we will continue the explanation. The first win type selection 2 table 202ab differs from the first win type selection table 202b of the first embodiment described above in that the presence or absence of a time-saving state granted to some big win types has been changed, but the other elements are the same. Explanations of the same elements will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the first winning type selection 2 table 202ab will be explained with reference to Figs. 88(a)-(c). Fig. 88(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning type selection 2 table 202ab, Fig. 88(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special chart 1 big winning type selection 2 table 202ab1, and Fig. 88(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special chart 2 big winning type selection 2 table 202ab2.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), the first winning type selection 2 table 202ab has a special chart 1 big win type selection 2 table 202ab1 corresponding to the first special symbol, and a special chart 2 big win type selection 2 table 202ab2 corresponding to the second special symbol, and various tables are used according to the corresponding special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1 specifies that when the acquired first jackpot type counter value C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", the jackpot type is "jackpot A", when the acquired first jackpot type counter value C2 is in the range of "10 to 49", the jackpot type is "jackpot B", and when the acquired first jackpot type counter value C2 is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot C".

The "jackpot A" defined here is a jackpot type in which 15 rounds of jackpot play are executed, and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends, regardless of the game state at the time of winning. "Jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which 5 rounds of jackpot play are executed, and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends, regardless of the game state at the time of winning. "Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which 5 rounds of jackpot play are executed, and if the game state at the time of winning (setting) is the normal state, the normal state is set after the jackpot play ends, and if the game state at the time of winning (setting) is the time-saving state, the time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends.

As explained above, this second embodiment has a jackpot type (jackpot C) that specifies that the game state set after the jackpot game ends will differ depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. This makes it possible for the player to be aware of the game state at the time of winning, in addition to whether or not a jackpot has been won and the jackpot type that will be set, making the game more complicated and preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on.

Next, in the special chart 2 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab2, as shown in FIG. 88(c), the acquired first jackpot type counter value C2 is in the range of "0 to 99" and "jackpot D" is specified as the jackpot type.

Returning to FIG. 86, we will continue the explanation. The fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad differs from the fluctuation pattern table 202d of the first embodiment described above in that the content of the provisions for the fluctuation pattern selected during the period when the time-saving state is set is different. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof are omitted.

Here, the contents of the fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad will be explained with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad, and FIG. 89(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad2 of the fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 89(a), the fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad has a normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 that is referred to when the normal state is set as the game state, and a time-saving fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad2 that is referred to when the time-saving state is set, and is configured to set the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) by referring to the fluctuation pattern table according to the game state when setting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (when executing the special symbol fluctuation start process (see FIG. 39)).

Next, the contents defined in the time-saving fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 89(b). This time-saving fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad2 differs from the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d of the first embodiment described above in that it is configured to set a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in which a specific time is defined for a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations (special symbol fluctuations) from the end of a jackpot (end of a jackpot game).

Specifically, when the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot, the total time for the first to fourth special pattern changes after the end of the jackpot is set to a constant (3 seconds) regardless of which special pattern change is performed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a selection display (see FIG. 82(b)) is displayed to allow the player to select the game method to be set during the time-saving state until a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the jackpot game.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily execute a special pattern change corresponding to the reserved balls (reserved patterns) already acquired when entering the time-saving state while the selection display is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that even if a special pattern change (e.g., second special pattern) different from the special pattern change (e.g., first special pattern) that is mainly executed by the play method selected during the time-saving state (e.g., left-handed play) is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in this second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that is set when a hit (big win, small win) is won within 1 to 4 spins after the end of the jackpot is different depending on the number of times the special symbol changes after the end of the jackpot, and the timing of the static display of the lottery result of the special symbol on the 4th spin after the end of the jackpot, the timing of the static display of the lottery result of the special symbol on the 3rd spin that it is a win, the timing of the static display of the lottery result of the special symbol on the 2nd spin that it is a win, and the timing of the static display of the lottery result of the special symbol on the 1st spin that it is a win are all configured to be constant.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to display the selection display screen (see FIG. 82(b)) that is displayed when the time-saving state is set for a predetermined period of time (at least 3 seconds) regardless of the results of the special symbol lottery, and it is possible to use the period during which the selection display screen is displayed to complete the special symbol lottery (variation) that corresponds to many reserved balls.

Furthermore, if a win (small win, big win) occurs immediately after the time-saving state is set, a specific variation pattern is executed according to the number of times the special symbol changes since the time-saving state was set. This ensures that if a win occurs within a specified period of time (within a specified number of times the special symbol changes (within 1 to 4 rotations)) after the end of the big win, the timing of notifying the player of the winning result (the timing of the stopped display of the special symbol (third symbol) indicating that a win has been won) is consistent.

In the second embodiment, a variation pattern table is used to select a special variation pattern for the variation pattern set during the period from when the time-saving state is set to when the special pattern is varied four times. However, other periods may be used for the period during which the special variation pattern is selected after the time-saving state is set. For example, a special variation pattern may be selected for the number of times (8) that the special pattern varies, which corresponds to the total number (8) of the maximum number of reserved balls for the first special pattern (4 balls) and the maximum number of reserved balls for the second special pattern (4 balls), or the period during which the special pattern varies two times after the time-saving state is set may be used. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, a variation pattern dedicated to the win is set when a win is won, but a variation pattern may be set based on the content of the win, and the variation pattern may be set based on the result of the determination.

Specifically, it may be configured so that a special variation pattern for winning is set only when a big win is won or when a small win for which small win A is set (i.e., a small win for which a small win type that is easier to obtain as a double win than other small win types is set) is won. This makes it possible to create a sense of expectation in players who notice that a special symbol variation based on a variation pattern (variation time) different from the usual is being executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 89(b), the variation pattern (variation time) set for the special symbol variation from the fifth spin onwards (including the fifth spin) after the time-saving state is set is configured so that the first special symbol has a shorter variation time than the second special symbol. As a result, if the special symbol variation can be executed continuously during the time-saving state, the game that varies the first special symbol (first game, left-handed game) can execute the lottery (variation) of the special symbol more frequently in a short period of time.

In FIG. 89(b), the contents stipulated in the time-saving fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad2, which is referenced when the time-saving state is set, show only one type of fluctuation pattern for the special pattern lottery result when the number of special pattern fluctuations (number of special pattern fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot is 5 spins or later (including the 5th spin), but in reality, it is configured to select one from multiple fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times according to a value obtained from a counter (loop counter whose value is updated according to the control processing of the main control unit 110) not shown, but a detailed explanation of this is omitted.

In this way, even in the variation pattern table configured to select one variation pattern from a plurality of variation patterns, the variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be set for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. Therefore, if the variation of the special symbol can be continuously executed during the time-saving state, the game in which the first special symbol varies (first game, left-handed game) can execute the lottery (variation) of the special symbol more in a short period of time. In addition, the above-mentioned variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be set includes a case in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set shorter than that of the second special symbol in all of the selectable variation patterns, a configuration in which the variation time of the most likely to be selected is set so that the first special symbol is set shorter than that of the second special symbol, the average variation time per variation when all variation patterns are set according to the design value is set so that the first special symbol is set shorter than that of the second special symbol, and the shortest variation time that can be set according to the variation of the first special symbol is set shorter than the shortest variation time that can be set according to the variation of the second special symbol. In other words, when a player actually plays the pachinko machine 10 in the time-saving mode, the number of fluctuations per unit time should be set to be greater for the first game (left-handed play) that executes the fluctuation of the first special symbol than for the second special symbol.

The time-saving grant 2 table 202ae differs from the time-saving grant table 202e of the first embodiment described above in that the time-saving end conditions (values set in various counters) set for each jackpot type are different, and the type of counter that sets the value that becomes the time-saving end condition has been changed (increased). All other elements are the same, so detailed explanations are omitted.

Here, the contents stipulated in the time-saving grant 2 table 202ae will be explained with reference to FIG. 88(d). FIG. 88(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving grant 2 table 202ae. This time-saving grant 2 table 202ae differs from the time-saving grant table 202e described above in that it has a special chart 1 counter 203ad instead of the time-saving counter 203k, a special chart 2 counter 203ae, and a small win D counter 203ac instead of the small win C counter 203p, and in that the values set (granted) to the various counters are different.

As described above, this second embodiment is configured to allow the player to select between a first game (left-hand play) and a second game (right-hand play) as multiple games with different playability during the time-saving state, and is configured so that the end conditions that are more likely to be met among multiple end conditions (time-saving end conditions) that end the time-saving state when the first game is executed and when the second game is executed are different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88(d), when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the value of the special chart 1 counter 203ad is set to "100", the value of the special chart 2 counter 203ae is set to "100", the value of the small jackpot A counter 203m is set to "2", the value of the small jackpot B counter 203n is set to "100", and the value of the small jackpot D counter 203ac is set to "100". When the jackpot type is "jackpot B", the value of the special chart 1 counter 203ad is set to "30", the value of the special chart 2 counter 203ae is set to "80", the value of the small jackpot A counter 203m is set to "1", the value of the small jackpot B counter 203n is set to "3", and the value of the small jackpot D counter 203ac is set to "20".

In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C", the value of the special chart 1 counter 203ad is set to "40", the value of the special chart 2 counter 203ae is set to "70", the value of the small prize A counter 203m is set to "2", the value of the small prize B counter 203n is set to "5", and the value of the small prize D counter 203ac is set to "40". When the jackpot type is "jackpot D", the value of the special chart 1 counter 203ad is set to "30", the value of the special chart 2 counter 203ae is set to "80", the value of the small prize A counter 203m is set to "1", the value of the small prize B counter 203n is set to "3", and the value of the small prize D counter 203ac is set to "20".

In other words, if the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) corresponding to the "big win A" is set, when the first game is executed, the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be met is that the small win A is won twice (the value of the small win A counter 203m becomes 0), and when the second game is executed, the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be met is that the number of times the second special symbol changes reaches 100 times (the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203ae becomes 0).

In addition, when the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) corresponding to "big win B" is set, when the first game is executed, the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be met is that the small win A is won once (the value of the small win A counter 203m becomes 0), and when the second game is executed, the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be met is that the small win D is won 20 times (the value of the small win counter 203ac becomes 0).

When the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) corresponding to "jackpot C" is set, when the first game is played, the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be met is that the small prize A is won twice (the value of the small prize A counter 203m becomes 0), and when the second game is played, the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be met is that the number of times the second special symbol changes reaches 70 times (the value of the special symbol 2 counter 203ae becomes 0). When the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) corresponding to "jackpot D" is set, the same time-saving state (time-saving end condition) as the above-mentioned "jackpot B" is set.

In other words, by varying the game method to be executed (selected) when the time-saving state is set (between the first game (left-handed play) and the second game (right-handed play)), the time-saving end conditions that are likely to be met can be varied. This allows the player to play different games during the time-saving state.

In addition, the time-saving end conditions (values set in various counters) are configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot that has been won, and the time-saving end conditions that are likely to be met when the same game (for example, right-hand play) is played during the time-saving state are configured to differ. This makes it difficult for players to predict when the time-saving state will end. It also makes it possible to get players interested in the type of jackpot that has been won this time.

In this embodiment, four types of jackpot types are set when a jackpot is won, but the number of jackpot types is not limited to this, and five or more types of jackpot types may be set. In this case, it is preferable to set multiple jackpot types with the same game content (opening period, number of rounds, interval period between rounds, ending period) of the jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won, and to set different time-saving end conditions for each jackpot type. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the content of the time-saving state (contents of the time-saving end conditions) that will be set after the jackpot game ends, based on the content of the jackpot game executed.

Furthermore, in this second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88(d), the first game is configured so that the time-saving end condition is more likely to be met in a shorter period of time than the second game. This makes it possible to shorten the period (time-saving period) during which the time-saving state is continuously set in the first game.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the first game is configured to make it easier to win a small prize (a small prize for which "small prize A" is set as the small prize type) that is easier to obtain as a two-type prize, than the second game. By configuring it in this way, the first game can be a game that provides the player with a gameplay that allows them to aim for a two-type prize in a short period of time, and the second game can be a game that provides the player with a gameplay that allows them to aim for a one-type prize in a long period of time.

Therefore, by allowing the player to select the game method (first game, second game) to be executed during the time-saving state, games with different playability can be executed, and games that the player will not tire of can be provided. In addition, in the second embodiment, the play period during the time-saving state is different between the first game and the second game, so that the player can select the game method according to the playable period, and suitable games can be provided for a variety of players.

Furthermore, in this second embodiment, regardless of which game method is selected during the time-saving state, the probability of winning a jackpot during the time-saving state (the sum of the probability of winning a jackpot by drawing a special pattern and the probability of winning a jackpot by the ball passing through a specific area during a small jackpot game) is made approximately the same (including an error that the player does not notice (e.g. an error of 10% or less)), so any player can play with confidence.

In this second embodiment, the time-saving end conditions are set so that no advantage or disadvantage is created for the player in the first game and the second game regardless of which jackpot type is set, but other configurations may be used, for example, to set the time-saving end conditions so that when a specific jackpot type is set, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and when a specific jackpot type other than the above-mentioned specific jackpot type is set, the time-saving end conditions may be set so that the second game is more advantageous to the player than the first game.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a game method that is advantageous to the player depending on the set jackpot type (the jackpot game executed), thereby improving the interest of the game. Note that when configuring in this way to vary the game method (first game, second game) advantageous to the player depending on the jackpot type, it is preferable to configure in such a way that when all jackpot types are set taking into consideration a predetermined allocation rate, there is no advantage or disadvantage to the player when the first game is executed and when the second game is executed. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the player always selects only one game method when the time-saving state is set.

In addition, a storage means may be provided that stores the jackpot type (time-saving state) that was set during a predetermined period (e.g., the period after the power of the pachinko machine 10 was turned on), and a notification means may be provided that notifies (displays) the content stored in the storage means (time-saving history) to the player. This makes it possible to predict the time-saving state that will be set in the future based on the time-saving state that was set in the past, and to allow the player to select a playing method. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a suggestion mode that suggests a playing method that will be advantageous to the player is notified to the player using a performance display (jackpot performance display) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during jackpot play.

Returning to FIG. 86, the explanation will continue. The small prize type selection 2 table 202af differs from the small prize type selection table 202f of the first embodiment described above in that it is possible to win a small prize in the drawing of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), and that the probability of winning a small prize in the drawing of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is different. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed explanation will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the small win type selection 2 table 202af will be explained with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 2 table 202af, FIG. 90(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the special chart 1 small win type selection 2 table 202af1, and FIG. 90(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the special chart 2 small win type selection 2 table af2.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), the small prize type selection 2 table 202af has a special prize 1 small prize type selection 2 table 202af1 that is referenced when a lottery for the first special symbol (special prize 1) is performed, and a special prize 2 small prize type selection 2 table 202af2 that is referenced when a lottery for the second special symbol (special prize 2) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 90(b), the special chart 1 small prize type selection 2 table 202af1 specifies that the range of the acquired small prize type counter value C5 is "0 to 89" and the small prize type is "small prize A," and that the range is "90 to 99" and the small prize type is "small prize B."

The small win type "small win A" is the same as the "small win A" in the first embodiment described above, and "jackpot A" is set as the type of the big win that is set (executed) when the V passes (when the ball passes a specific area during a small win game, or when a double win is obtained). "Small win B" is the same as the "small win B" in the first embodiment described above, and "jackpot B" is set as the type of the big win that is set (executed) when the V passes (when the ball passes a specific area during a small win game, or when a double win is obtained).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 90(c), the special pattern 2 small win type selection 2 table 202af2 specifies that the acquired small win type counter value C5 is set to "0", the small win type is "small win A", the numbers are "1 to 99", and the small win type is "small win D".

Here, the small win type "small win D" is a small win type in which a small win game with the lowest expectation of a double win (about 5%) is executed among the multiple small win types, and "jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type for the jackpot that is set (executed) when the V passes (when the ball passes through a specific area during a small win game, and a double win is obtained). In other words, it is the small win that is the most disadvantageous to the player.

The opening scenario 2 table 202ag differs from the opening scenario table 202g of the first embodiment described above in that an opening scenario corresponding to small win D is specified instead of the opening scenario corresponding to small win C, but otherwise is the same. The opening scenario corresponding to small win D differs from the opening scenario corresponding to small win C only in that the on period of the flow path solenoid 650k is shortened to make V passing (ball passing into a specific area) more difficult, and the opening scenario set at the time of V passing (when two types are obtained) is 5 rounds instead of 15 rounds, so detailed illustration is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 86(b), the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this second embodiment will be described. FIG. 86(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 86(b), the RAM 203 in this second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a small win D counter 203ac is provided instead of the small win C counter 203p, and that a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, a special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ab, a special symbol 1 counter 203ad, and a special symbol 2 counter 203ae are added.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ab are configured for the second special pattern in the same manner as the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203b of the first implementation default described above, so detailed explanations are omitted, but when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, which triggers the drawing (changing) of the second special pattern, the drawing (changing) of the second special pattern is executed, and the setting is variably set.

The small win D counter 203ac is a counter for measuring the number of times a small win with small win D set as the small win type is won until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is met. When it is determined in the big win control process 2 (S1554 in FIG. 98) that it is the end timing of the ending presentation (end timing of the big win) (S1612 in FIG. 98: Yes), a value specified in the time-saving grant 2 table 202ae is set (S1653 in FIG. 98).

Then, in the small win time-saving update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed in the small win start setting process (S221 in FIG. 94) of the special pattern change process 2 (S154 in FIG. 94), if it is determined that the small win type of the small win won this time is small win D, the counter value is decremented by 1 (not shown). If it is determined that the value of the small win D counter 203ac after the decrement is 0, the time-saving end condition is established, so the normal state is set as the game state. In addition, in this second embodiment, multiple time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are set, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is established (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of special pattern changes is established), the counter value is set to 0 (reset). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (fifth time-saving end condition) that references the value of the small win D counter 203ac is satisfied among the multiple time-saving end conditions, the value of the small win D counter 203ac is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of decrementing the value of the small win D counter 203ac continues even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used when determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

The special pattern 1 counter 203ad is a counter for measuring the number of times the first special pattern changes during the period in which the time-saving state is set. When the time-saving state is set, a value corresponding to the number of times the first special pattern changes, which is set as the termination condition for ending the time-saving state, is set, and the set value is decremented by 1 each time the first special pattern changes during the time-saving state. The counter is then referenced when determining whether or not to end the time-saving state, and if the counter value is 0, processing is executed to end the time-saving state.

The special pattern 2 counter 203ae is a counter for measuring the number of times the second special pattern changes during the period in which the time-saving state is set. When the time-saving state is set, a value corresponding to the number of times the second special pattern changes, which is set as the termination condition for ending the time-saving state, is set, and the set value is decremented by 1 each time the second special pattern changes during the time-saving state. This counter is then referenced when determining whether or not to end the time-saving state, and if the counter value is 0, processing is executed to end the time-saving state.

As explained above, in the second embodiment, the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) is set to be established based on the number of times the first special pattern changes and the number of times the second special pattern changes. This makes it possible to establish dedicated time-saving end conditions when the first game (a game in which only the first special pattern changes) and the second game (a game in which only the second special pattern changes) are executed.

In the second embodiment, the number of times the first special pattern changes and the number of times the second special pattern changes are measured by providing the special pattern 1 counter 203ad and the special pattern 2 counter 202ae, but other configurations may be used. For example, a means for measuring the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state (the total number of times the first special pattern changes and the total number of times the second special pattern changes) (corresponding to the time-saving counter 203k in the first embodiment) and a means for measuring either the number of times the first special pattern changes or the number of times the second special pattern changes (for example, the special pattern 1 counter 203ae) may be provided, and the number of times the special pattern 2 (second special pattern) changes may be calculated by executing a process of subtracting the number of times the special pattern 1 changes from the total number of times the special pattern changes.

By configuring in this way, among the time-saving end conditions, the end condition that is established based on the number of times the special pattern changes can be managed using two counters as the change number end condition that is established based on the number of times the first special pattern changes, the end condition that is established based on the number of times the second special pattern changes, and the end condition that is established based on the total number of times the special patterns change. In order to achieve the same effect, the total change number can be calculated by adding up the value (subtracted value) measured by the special pattern 1 counter 203ae and the value (subtracted value) measured by the special pattern 2 counter 203af in this second embodiment.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 91 and 92. As shown in Figure 91(a), the ROM 222 in this second embodiment differs from the ROM 222 in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 26(a)) in that a hold display selection table 222aa is provided instead of the state display selection table 222b and the final state display selection table 222c.

As shown in FIG. 91(b), the RAM 223 of this second embodiment differs from the RAM 223 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 26(b)) in that the provisional win determination flag 223h, provisional time-saving end flag 223j, time-saving lower limit flag 223k, quasi-end condition flag 223m, and time-saving end fluctuation flag 223n have been deleted, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223aa, right-hitting flag 223ab, left-hitting flag 223ac, time-saving start flag 223ad, and time-saving timing counter 223ae have been provided. The rest of the configuration is the same as in the first embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91(a). FIG. 91(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second embodiment.

The reserved display selection table 222aa is referenced when selecting a display mode (see FIG. 84(a)) that notifies the player of the advance judgment result of the winning information for the reserved pattern (see FIG. 84(a)) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the reserved ball of the special pattern acquired during the time-saving state, and suggests (notifies) the player in advance whether the time-saving state will end (update status of the time-saving end conditions) and the judgment result of whether the special pattern will be won or lost.

Now, referring to FIG. 92, the contents stipulated in the reserve display selection table 222aa will be explained. FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserve display selection table 222aa. In this second embodiment, a reserve mode presentation is executed in which a display mode similar to the status display mode set for the special pattern variation being executed in the above-mentioned first embodiment is set for the reserve pattern (see FIG. 84).

The hold display selection table 222aa is a table that is referenced when selecting the display mode of the hold status presentation, and various hold display modes are defined based on the provisional time-saving information (provisionally updated time-saving information based on the results of the look-ahead process) stored in the provisional time-saving information update area 223i and the value of the acquired status presentation counter 223o. Note that the values indicating the hold display modes written in this hold display selection table 222aa are the same as the status display modes of the first embodiment described above, and the display modes shown with reference to FIG. 15 are defined corresponding to each value, so detailed explanations are omitted.

To explain in detail the contents stipulated in the reserve display selection table 222aa, if the current win/loss judgment result stored in the provisional time-saving information update area 223i, i.e., the lottery result of the special symbol included in the winning information corresponding to the current process, is a "jackpot", and information indicating a jackpot (already won information) has not already been stored in the provisional time-saving information update area 223i at a stage prior to the current process being executed (already won information "no"), and pre-end information indicating that the pre-time-saving end condition is met is stored (pre-end information "yes"), then reserve display mode "3" is stipulated for the value of the acquired status presentation counter 223o in the range "0 to 69", and reserve display mode "9" is stipulated for the range "70 to 99".

In addition, if the current win/loss determination result is a "jackpot," the existing win information is "none," and the remaining information is "none," the pending display mode "3" is set when the value of the status presentation counter 223o is in the range of "0-49," the pending display mode "1" is set when the value is in the range of "50-69," and the value is set when the value is in the range of "70-99."

Furthermore, if there is already a winning information, regardless of the presence or absence of pre-end change information, when the value of the status effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69", the hold display mode is not set to "-", but when it is in the range of "70 to 99", the hold display mode is set to "9".

In this way, by variably setting the reserved display mode depending on the winning information corresponding to the reserved pattern for which the reserved display mode is currently being set and the winning information already stored in the provisional time-saving information update area 223i (winning information obtained prior to the currently targeted winning information), the result of the special pattern win/loss determination, and the progress of the time-saving state, it is possible to give the player a hint in advance as to whether the time-saving state will end, in addition to the result of the special pattern lottery.

Therefore, when a reserved display mode that may cause the time-saving state to end is displayed, the player can be motivated to play in an attempt to win a jackpot before the reserved display mode is displayed. In addition, by allowing multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state to be set, it is possible to prevent the time-saving state from suddenly ending in a gaming machine in which the period during which the time-saving state is set to continue is difficult to understand, and it is possible to prevent the execution of a game that causes dissatisfaction to the player.

Next, if the current win/loss judgment result is "small win A", the existing win information is "no", and the remaining information is "yes", the pending display mode "5" is specified for the value of the status presentation counter 223o in the range of "0-49", the pending display mode "5" is specified for the range of "50-69", and the pending display mode "9" is specified for the range of "70-99", and if the remaining information is "none", the pending display mode "7" is specified for the value of the status presentation counter 223o in the range of "0-49", the pending display mode "7" is specified for the range of "50-69", and the pending display mode "9" is specified for the range of "70-99".

Furthermore, if there is already a winning information, regardless of the presence or absence of pre-end change information, when the value of the status effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69", the hold display mode is not set to "-", but when it is in the range of "70 to 99", the hold display mode is set to "9".

On the other hand, if the current win/loss judgment result is "small win B, D", the existing win information is "no", and the remaining information is "yes", the pending display mode "5" is set for the value of the status presentation counter 223o in the range of "0-49", the pending display mode "6" is set for the range of "50-69", and "9" is set for the range of "70-99", and if the remaining information is "none", the pending display mode "2" is set for the value of the status presentation counter 223o in the range of "0-49", the pending display mode "4" is set for the range of "50-69", and "9" is set for the range of "70-99".

Furthermore, if there is already a winning information, regardless of the presence or absence of pre-end change information, when the value of the status effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69", the hold display mode is not set to "-", but when it is in the range of "70 to 99", the hold display mode is set to "9".

If the current win/loss judgment result is "miss", the existing win information is "no", and the information before the end is "yes", the pending display mode "1" is specified for the value of the status effect counter 223o in the range of "0-49", the pending display mode "4" is specified for the range of "50-69", and "9" is specified for the range of "70-99", and if the information before the end is "none", the pending display mode "1" is specified for the value of the status effect counter 223o in the range of "0-69", and "9" is specified for the range of "70-99".

Furthermore, if there is already a winning information, regardless of the presence or absence of pre-end change information, when the value of the status effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69", the hold display mode is not set to "-", but when it is in the range of "70 to 99", the hold display mode is set to "9".

As explained above, in this second embodiment, the reserved display selection table 222aa is written so that the same display mode is selected for the same conditions as the status display mode in the first embodiment described above. Also, if the previously acquired winning information includes information on winning the jackpot (win/lose determination result), the display modes that can be set (selected) for subsequent reserved symbols are restricted (only reserved display mode "9" (see FIG. 15) is selected). Therefore, when the reserved display mode is selected and displayed for each of multiple reserved symbols, a natural presentation can be provided.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the second embodiment, the display mode is changed with a high probability for the acquired winning information (reserved symbols), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a determination means may be provided that determines whether or not the reserved display mode selected in the reserved display selection table 222aa is actually displayed, and the display mode of the reserved symbols may be changed depending on the determination result of the determination means. Alternatively, if the acquired value of the state presentation counter 223o is within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 39"), the reserved display mode may not be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent future game content (whether or not the time-saving state has ended, or whether or not a jackpot has been won) from being easily understood just from the display mode of the reserved symbols.

In addition, regardless of the information contained in the winning information (reserved symbols) obtained, the reserved display mode "9" is selected with a certain probability, which further prevents the player from easily understanding the upcoming game content (whether the time-saving mode has ended or whether a jackpot has been won) just from the display mode of the reserved symbols.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91(b). FIG. 91(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second embodiment.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223aa is a counter that updates the reserved ball count of the second special pattern according to the content of the command when a command related to the second special pattern is received from the reserved ball count commands sent from the main control unit 110. Note that the detailed configuration is the same as the configuration of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a described above, except that the target command has been changed, so a detailed explanation of the configuration is omitted.

The right-hitting flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that the player is in a period to play right-hit games (second games), and by being set to on, indicates that the player is in a period to play right-hit games (second games). This right-hitting flag 223ab is set to on when it is determined in the game status setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101(a)) executed in the winning information related process 2 (see S2251 in FIG. 100) that the received winning information is not winning information related to special symbol 1 (first special symbol) (i.e., winning information related to special symbol 2 (second special symbol)) (S3002 in FIG. 101(a): No).

It is then referenced in the game content determination process (S2352 in FIG. 101(b)) and the hold display setting process (S2353 in FIG. 102), and is set to OFF when the time-saving state ends.

The left-hitting flag 223ac is a flag for indicating that the period is for the player to play right-hitting games (second games), and by being set to on, indicates that the period is for the player to play left-hitting games (first games). This left-hitting flag 223ac is set to on when it is determined that the winning information received is winning information related to special symbol 1 (first special symbol) (S3002: Yes in FIG. 101(a)) in the game status setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101(a)) executed in the winning information related process 2 (see S2251 in FIG. 100).

It is then referenced in the game content determination process (S2352 in FIG. 101(b)) and the hold display setting process (S2353 in FIG. 102), and is set to OFF when the time-saving state ends.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the game method (first game or second game) when the time-saving state is set is configured to be selectable by the player by adjusting the direction in which the ball is actually shot. The game method selected by the player is then determined to be an appropriate game method during the time-saving state, and a game method not selected by the player is determined to be an inappropriate game method during the time-saving state.

In the second embodiment, the winning command sent from the main control device 110 is analyzed to determine whether the first ball entry port into which the ball entered after the time-saving state was set was the first ball entry port 64 (see FIG. 2) located in the left-hand hitting area (the area through which the ball can flow (pass) when playing with a left-hand hit) or the second ball entry port 640 located in the right-hand hitting area (the area through which the ball can flow (pass) when playing with a right-hand hit). Based on the result of this determination, the appropriate play method during the time-saving state is determined. However, as long as the system is configured to determine whether or not appropriate play is being performed when the time-saving state is set and to issue an error notification if appropriate play is not being performed, a configuration other than that of the second embodiment may be used.

For example, an operating means that can be operated by the player may be provided, and the operating means may be operated to select a play method during the time-saving state, or during a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) after the jackpot game has ended and the time-saving state has been set, and an appropriate play method may be set when the ball passes through a play area corresponding to the play method selected by the operating means. This makes it possible to more reliably set the play method desired by the player as the appropriate play method.

It may also be configured so that the player can variably set an appropriate play method while the time-saving state is set. With this configuration, the play method can be varied while predicting the update status of the time-saving end condition, allowing the player to proactively select a play (a game for setting a play method) that will result in a more advantageous time-saving state. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that the intention to vary the play method is set by operating the operating means, and that no matter which game (first game, second game) is executed during the game method variable period, it is not judged to be an inappropriate game. This allows the operation of changing the play method performed during the time-saving state to be performed smoothly.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a ball enters a specific ball entry port, an appropriate game method is set according to the type of ball entry port through which the ball entered. However, for example, it may be configured to set an appropriate game method according to the type of ball entry port through which a predetermined number of balls (e.g., two) have entered since the time-saving state was set. This makes it possible to prevent a ball from being launched into a game area corresponding to an undesired game method due to an erroneous operation, resulting in the setting of an incorrect game method.

The time-saving start flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that a time-saving state has been set as the game state, and by being set to on, indicates that a time-saving state has been set. This time-saving start flag 223ad is set to on (S2253 in FIG. 99) when it is determined in command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) described below that a time-saving command has been received (S2215 in FIG. 99: Yes) and further determined that the received time-saving command is time-saving setting information (information indicating that a time-saving state has been set) (S2252 in FIG. 99: Yes).

Then, it is referenced (S3301 in FIG. 104) in the performance setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104), and if it is determined to be on, the value of the time-saving timing counter 223ae described below is set to 4000 (S3302 in FIG. 104), and the flag is set to off (S3303 in FIG. 104). In other words, this time-saving start flag 223ad is used to determine that the time-saving state has been set on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and only when it is set to on does it execute a dedicated process (a process that is executed only when the time-saving state has been set).

The time-saving timer 223ae is a counter for keeping track of the period (elapsed time) since the time-saving state was set. When the time-saving state is set, a predetermined value is set, and by subtracting this value, the period that has elapsed since the time-saving state was set is determined. When it is determined that the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to on in the performance setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104) (S3301: Yes in FIG. 104), a value of 4000 is set in this time-saving timer 223ae (S3302).

Next, referring to FIG. 93, the flow of gameplay in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram that shows the flow of gameplay in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 28, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, during the normal game mode (normal mode) as described above, a left-handed hit game is performed and a special 1 game is executed in which the first ball entrance 64 is aimed at. Here, when a jackpot with the first special symbol is won, a transition to a different game state occurs after the jackpot ends depending on the type of jackpot that was won.

Specifically, if the type of jackpot won is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and if the type of jackpot won is jackpot A or jackpot B, the game is configured to transition to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), which is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in the normal state, a ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 640 to draw the second special symbol, and if a jackpot is won, the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that a ball does not (is difficult to) enter the second ball entrance 640 even if a right-hand hit is performed during the normal state (normal play), so the act of drawing the second special symbol in the normal state is considered to be a fraudulent act, and this is a measure to prevent a player who has committed a fraudulent act from playing an advantageous game. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the player is configured to be able to play a more advantageous game (game) with the second special symbol than with the first special symbol during the time-saving state, so there was a risk that a fraudulent act would be performed to draw the second special symbol. Therefore, by taking the above-mentioned measures, it is possible to prevent a player from playing a lottery for the second special symbol through a fraudulent act.

Furthermore, since this embodiment does not have a configuration for retaining and storing winning information for the second special symbol (winning information acquired when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640), for example, during the time-saving state (when the electric device 640a is likely to be operated to the protruding position), the winning information for the second special symbol is not retained and stored, and the selection (variation) of the second special symbol during the normal state is not executed based on the reserved winning information. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the selection (variation) of the second special symbol from being executed when the normal state is set as the game state during normal play.

When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the game state, the opening action (projection action) of the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 makes it easy to insert a ball into the second ball entrance 640, so a right-hand hit game is performed and a special 2 game is executed, aiming at the second ball entrance 640.

Here, if a small win is won by the drawing of the second special symbol, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small win game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball (the ball passes through a specific area), and the big win game begins. In this embodiment, if a big win game is set (executed) via a small win game, the game state is set to a time-saving state after the big win game ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent discomfort from being caused to a player who has won a big win via a small win game.

In this embodiment, the small prize game is executed in which the probability that the ball will pass through a specific area (the probability that the V switch 650e3 will detect the ball) during the small prize game differs depending on the type of small prize (small prize A to C) that is set when the small prize is won by drawing the second special pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the termination conditions (time-saving termination conditions) for terminating the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player (a game state more advantageous than the normal state), the following conditions are set: a fluctuation count termination condition (first time-saving termination condition) that is met when the number of fluctuations (number of lotteries) of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) reaches a specified number of fluctuations (100 times); and an operation count termination condition (second time-saving termination condition) that is met when the number of wins of the small prize (the number of operations of the V winning device 650 operated based on the small prize win) as a result of the lottery of the special pattern (second special pattern) reaches a specified number of operations.

Moreover, as will be described in detail later, the second time-saving end condition is further configured to be set according to the type of small win (the small win game to be executed) that is set when a small win is won.

In addition, in a state (situation) in which the time-saving state is set, if a player wins a jackpot lottery for a special symbol (wins a single type) or wins a small jackpot in a special symbol lottery and, during a small jackpot game (small jackpot game according to the type of small jackpot) corresponding to the small jackpot won, the ball passes through a specific area and a jackpot is won (wins a double type) before the first time-saving end condition or the second time-saving end condition described above is met, the time-saving state will be set repeatedly.

On the other hand, in a state (situation) in which the time-saving state is set, if either the first time-saving end condition (end condition according to the number of times the special pattern changes) or the second time-saving end condition (end condition according to winning a small prize (operation of the V winning device 650)) described above is met before winning one type or two types of prizes, the game state will transition (set) from the time-saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment configured in this way can provide the player with both the possibility of ending the time-saving state (possibility of the second time-saving end condition being met) and the possibility of winning a double prize, if a small prize is won in the lottery for the second special symbol that is executed when the time-saving state is set. This can increase the player's interest in the game that is executed during the time-saving state (the lottery for the second special symbol), and improve the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol while the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving a result that is disadvantageous to the player in the "first special symbol variation (lottery) during the time-saving state" that can be executed when the normal state is set as the game state, that is, when left-handed play is being performed and the number of reserved balls (reserved memory number) for the first special symbol is the upper limit (4), a jackpot is won, and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, even if the jackpot is won.

<Control process executed by main control device 110 in the second embodiment>
The control process in the second embodiment is different from that in the first embodiment in that the contents of the control process in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Here, referring to Figs. 94 to 98, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In this second embodiment, the special symbol change process (see Fig. 38) is changed to the special symbol change process 2 (see Fig. 94), the time-saving count update process (see Fig. 42) executed in the special symbol change process is replaced by the time-saving count update process 2 (see Fig. 95), the start winning process (see Fig. 43) is changed to the start winning process 2 (see Fig. 96), and the look-ahead process (see Fig. 44) executed in the start winning process is replaced by the look-ahead process 2 (see Fig. 97). Furthermore, the jackpot control process (see Fig. 52) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (see Fig. 98), and the rest is the same. The same elements are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the contents of special pattern change process 2 (S154) will be explained with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the contents of special pattern change process 2 (S154). This special pattern change process 2 differs from the special pattern change process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 38) in that the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203ab is obtained, and that time-saving count update process 2 (see FIG. 95) is executed instead of time-saving count update process.

When this special symbol change process 2 (S154) is executed, the processes of S201 and S202 are executed in the same manner as the special symbol change process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 38). In the process of S202, it is determined whether the display state of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S202), and if the display state of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is not changing (S202: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab are obtained (S251), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is greater than 0 (S252).

If the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is not 0 (S252: Yes), the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is decremented by 1 (S253), and a special pattern 2 reserved ball count command is set indicating the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ab changed by the calculation (S254). After the special pattern 2 reserved ball count command is set by the process of S254, the data stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa is shifted (S255). Then, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S252 that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203ab is 0 (S252: No), the process of S206 to S210 is executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S202, if the display state of the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S202: Yes), the processes of S211 to S213 are executed in the same manner as the special pattern change process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). In the process of S213, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot (S213: Yes), the processes of S214 to S218 are executed in the same manner as the special pattern change process described above (see FIG. 38), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S213 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S213: No), time-saving count update process 2 is executed (S271) instead of the time-saving count update process (see FIG. 42) of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. This time-saving count update process 2 (S271) is a process for updating the number of time-saving counts and setting the game state to the normal state, similar to the time-saving count update process (see FIG. 42). Details of this time-saving count update process 2 (S271) will be described later with reference to FIG. 95.

When the time-saving count update process 2 (S271) is completed, the processes of S220, S221 and S218 are executed in the same manner as the special pattern change process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38), and then this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 95, the time-saving count update process 2 (S271) executed in the special pattern change process 2 (S154 in FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving count update process 2 (S271). This time-saving count update process 2 (S271) differs from the time-saving count update process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 42) in that it subtracts the number of time-saving times for changes in the first special pattern as well, and determines whether the time-saving end condition has been met; otherwise, the process is the same. Note that the same processes are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the time-saving count update process 2 (S271) is executed, the processes of S601 and S602 are executed in the same manner as the time-saving count update process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 42). After the process of S602 is completed, it is next determined whether the current change is a change in special chart 2 (S651). If it is determined that the current change is a change in special chart 2 (S651: Yes), the value of the special chart 2 counter 203ae is decremented by 1 (S652) and the process proceeds to S653. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S651 that the current change is not a change in special chart 2 (i.e., a change in special chart 1) (S651: No), the value of the special chart 1 counter 203ad is decremented by 1 (S654) and the process proceeds to S653.

In the process of S653, a remaining time-saving count command indicating the values of various counters is set (S653), and then it is determined whether the value of any of the time-saving counter 203k, the special chart 1 counter 203ad, and the special chart 2 counter 203ae is 0 (S655). If it is determined that the value of any of the time-saving counter 203k, the special chart 1 counter 203ad, and the special chart 2 counter 203ae is not 0 (S655: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S655 that the value of any of the time-saving counter 203k, the special chart 1 counter 203ad, and the special chart 2 counter 203ae is 0 (S651: Yes), the processes of S605 to S607 are executed in the same manner as the time-saving count update process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 42), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the start winning process 2 (S155) will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the contents of the start winning process 2 (S155). In this start winning process 2 (S155), in addition to the start winning process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 43), the presence or absence of a win (start winning) at the second ball entrance 640 is judged, and if a start winning occurs at the second ball entrance 640, a process of retaining the values indicated by the various random number counters and a process of pre-reading the lottery results for the special pattern from the values indicated by the various random number counters that have been retained are added, and the pre-reading process 2 is executed instead of the pre-reading process (see FIG. 44).

When the start winning process 2 (S155) is started, first, the process of S701 is executed in the same manner as the start winning process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 43). In the process of S701, if it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the processes of S702 and S703 described above are executed.

Then, if there is no winning ball in the first ball entrance 64 (S701: No), or if there is a winning ball in the first ball entrance 64 but the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203b is not less than 4 (S703: No), the process proceeds to S753. On the other hand, if there is a winning ball in the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203b is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the processes from S704 to S706 described above are executed.

After completing the process of S706, it is next determined whether the game is currently in the time-saving mode or a jackpot with a special symbol (S751). If it is determined that the game is currently in the time-saving mode or a jackpot with a special symbol (S751: Yes), this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S751 that the game is not currently in the time-saving mode or a jackpot with a special symbol (S751: No), pre-read process 2 (S752) is executed and the process proceeds to S753.

In the process of S701, if a ball is not detected entering the first ball entrance 64 (S701: No), if a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203b is the maximum value of 4 (S703: No), and when the process of S752 is completed, the process of S753 is executed to determine whether or not a ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S753). In this process of S753, as in the process of S701, the ball is detected entering the second ball entrance 640 over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that a ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S753: Yes), the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is obtained (S754), and it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S755).

Then, if there is no entry into the second ball entrance 640 (S753: No), or if there is a winning entry into the second ball entrance 640 but the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is not less than 4 (S755: No), the process proceeds to pre-reading process 2 (S752). On the other hand, if there is a winning entry into the second ball entrance 640 (S753: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is less than 4 (S755: Yes), the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is incremented by 1 (S756). Then, a special pattern 2 reserved ball count command is set to indicate the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ab changed by the calculation (S757).

The special pattern 2 reserved ball count command set here, like the special pattern 1 reserved ball count command set in the processing of S705, is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S1501) of the above-mentioned main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special pattern 2 reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203ab from the special pattern 2 reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223aa in the RAM 223.

After the special symbol 2 reserved ball count command is set by the process of S757, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (special symbol 2 reserved area 1 to special symbol 2 reserved area 4) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa in RAM 203 (S758). Note that in the process of S758, as in the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203ab is referenced, and if the value is 0, the special symbol 2 reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the special symbol 2 reserved area 2, if the value is 2, the special symbol 2 reserved area 3, and if the value is 3, the special symbol 2 reserved area 4 are set as the first area.

Next, when processing of S758 is completed, the process proceeds to pre-read processing 2 (S752) and ends this process.

Next, the contents of read-ahead process 2 (S752) will be explained with reference to Figure 97. Figure 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of read-ahead process 2 (S752). The pre-reading process 2 (S752) in this second embodiment differs from the pre-reading process in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 44) in that, instead of the first winning random number table 202a, the special chart 1 big win type selection table 202b1, and the fluctuation pattern table 202d (normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 or time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2) that are referenced when a new winning occurs in the first ball entrance 64, the first winning random number 2 table 202aa, the special chart 1 big win type selection 2 table 202ab1, the special chart 1 small win type selection 2 table 202af1, and the fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal fluctuation pattern table 202ad1 or time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202ad2) are referenced, and pre-reading of the lottery result in the second special pattern is added, and the rest is the same. The same parts are given the same symbols, and detailed explanations thereof are omitted.

When the pre-reading process 2 (S752) is executed, first, the process of S801 is executed, which is the same as the pre-reading process in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 44). In the process of S801, if there is no new winning at the first ball entrance 64 (S851: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new winning at the first ball entrance 64 (S851: Yes), the lottery result, the big win type, the small win type, and the fluctuation pattern are obtained in advance based on the special pattern 1 random number 2 table aa1, the special pattern 1 big win type selection 2 table 202ab1, the special pattern 1 small win type selection 2 table 202af1, and the fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad (the normal fluctuation pattern table 202ad1 or the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202ad2) (S852).

Then, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result, jackpot type, small jackpot type, and variation pattern obtained in the process of S852 is set (S853), and the process proceeds to S854. On the other hand, if there is no new winning at the first ball entrance 64 in the process of S851 (S851: No), the process also proceeds to S854.

In the process of S854, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning at the second ball entrance 640 (S854). If the result of the determination is that there is no new winning at the second ball entrance 640 (S854: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new winning at the second ball entrance 640 (S854: Yes), the lottery result, the big win type, the small win type, and the fluctuation pattern are obtained in advance based on the special pattern 2 random number 2 table aa2, the special pattern 2 big win type selection 2 table 202ab2, the special pattern 2 small win type selection 2 table 202af2, and the fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad (the normal fluctuation pattern table 202ad1 or the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202ad2) (S855).

Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result, jackpot type, small jackpot type, and variation pattern obtained in the processing of S855 is set (S856), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1554) will be explained with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1554). This jackpot control process 2 (S1554) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 52) within the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and differs from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) described above in that the time-saving content (time-saving end conditions) set at the end of the jackpot control (end timing of the ending presentation) is different.

When the jackpot control process 2 (S1554) starts, first, the same processes as S1601 to S1612 of the jackpot control process described above (see FIG. 52) are executed. If it is determined in the process of S1612 that it is the end timing of the ending presentation (S1612: Yes), it is then determined whether the jackpot was won during the time-saving period (S1651). If it is determined that the jackpot was won during the time-saving period (S1651: Yes), it moves on to the process of S1653. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot was won during the time-saving period (i.e., the normal game state) (S1651: No), it is determined whether the special game that was being played was a jackpot C (a 5R jackpot without time-saving period) (S1652).

If it is determined that the jackpot is won in normal game mode (S1651: No) and the process in S1652 determines that the jackpot is not jackpot C (5R non-time-saving jackpot) (S1613: No), or if the process in S1651 determines that the jackpot is won during time-saving (S1651: Yes), the time-saving end conditions corresponding to each jackpot type are set based on the time-saving granting 2 table 202ae (see FIG. 88(d)) (S1653).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is hit in the normal game state (S1651: No) and the jackpot is determined to be jackpot C (5R non-time-reduction jackpot) in the process of S1652 (S1652: Yes), or when the process of S1653 ends, the same processes as S1617 to S1620 of the jackpot control process described above (see FIG. 52) are executed, and this process ends.

<Control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment>
Next, the control process contents of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 99 to Fig. 105. In the second embodiment, the command determination process (see Fig. 56) is replaced with the command determination process 2 (see Fig. 99), the winning information related process (see Fig. 57) is replaced with the winning information related process 2 (see Fig. 100), the variable display setting process (see Fig. 62) is replaced with the variable display setting process 2 (see Fig. 103), the performance setting process (see Fig. 63) is replaced with the performance setting process 2 (see Fig. 104), detailed explanations are added for various counter update processes (see Fig. 105(a)), and detailed explanations are added for the performance update process (see Fig. 105(b)). The same elements are assigned the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 99, the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S2163). This command determination process 2 (S2163) differs from the command determination process (S2113 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above in that the process executed when a winning information command is received from the main control device 110 has been changed from winning information related process (see FIG. 57) to winning information related process 2 (see FIG. 100), and the contents of the process executed when a time-saving related command is received have been changed, but otherwise it is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

When command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) is executed, the same processes of S2201 to S2209 as those of the command determination process (S2113 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above are executed. If it is determined in the process of S2209 that the currently received command is a winning information command (S2209: Yes), winning information related process 2 is executed (S2251), and then the process proceeds to S2217. The content of winning information related process 2 executed in the process of S2251 will be described later with reference to FIG. 100.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2209 that the currently received command is not a winning information command (S2209: No), then the process of S2211 to S2215 is executed, which is the same as the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (S2113 in FIG. 56). If it is determined in the process of S2215 that the currently received command is a time-saving related command (S2215: Yes), then it is determined whether the content of the received time-saving related command is time-saving setting information, i.e., information sent from the main control unit 110 when a new time-saving state is set (S2252).

In the process of S2252, if it is determined that the information received this time is time-saving setting information (S2252: Yes), the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S2253), the time-saving information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g is updated (S2254), and the process proceeds to S2217. In the process of S2254, values that become the time-saving end conditions are set in various counters based on the information included in the time-saving related command received this time. Specifically, for example, when a command including time-saving setting information is received at the end of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot B (a command indicating time-saving information corresponding to the content set in S1614 of jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 98)), the time-saving granting 2 table 202ae is referenced, and the value of the special chart 1 counter 203ad is set to "30", the value of the special chart 2 counter 203ae is set to "80", the value of the small win A counter 203m is set to "1", the value of the small win B counter 203n is set to "3", and the value of the small win D counter 203ac is set to "20" (see FIG. 88(d)).

Returning to FIG. 99, the explanation will continue. After completing the process of S2254, the process of S2217 is then executed to end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2252 that the information included in the time-saving related command received this time is not time-saving setting information (S2252: No), that is, if the information included in the time-saving related command received this time is information (time-saving update information) that updates (brings closer to the time-saving end condition) the time-saving information (number of fluctuations or number of small wins) that corresponds to the time-saving end condition, then information regarding the time-saving end condition has already been set and time-saving play has started, so the process of S2253, which sets the time-saving start flag to ON, is skipped and the process moves to S2254.

In this case, the process of S2254 reads out the time-saving update information from among the multiple pieces of information contained in the time-saving related command received this time, and executes a process to update the target time-saving information. Also, if the content indicated by the updated time-saving information indicates that the remaining period until the time-saving end condition is met is shorter than the predetermined period, this is stored in the time-saving information update area.

Next, the contents of the winning information related process 2 (S2251) will be explained with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information related process 2 (S2251). This winning information related process 2 (S2251) differs from the winning information related process of the first embodiment described above (see S2210 in FIG. 57) in that the contents of the process for setting the display mode showing the updated contents of the time-saving information based on the winning information are different, and a process for setting the play method during the time-saving state (left-hand play (first game) or right-hand play (second game)) has been added. Since the other elements are the same, the same symbols are used for the same elements and detailed explanations are omitted.

When the winning information related process 2 (S2251) is executed, first, the information (information indicating the currently set game state) stored in the game state storage area 223f is read (S2301), and it is determined whether the game state indicated by the read information is a game state indicating a time-saving state (whether the time-saving state is in progress) (S2302). If it is determined by the process of S2302 that the game is not currently in a time-saving state (S2302: No), the same process as S2312 of the winning information related process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 57) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S2311.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the currently set game state is the time-saving state (time-saving in progress) (S2302: Yes), then the game state setting process is executed (S2351). This game state setting process (S2351) determines whether the game method selected by the player in the current time-saving state is the first game (left-handed play) or the second game (right-handed play), and executes a process to set the appropriate game in the time-saving state, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG. 101(a).

After S2351 is completed, a game content determination process is executed (S2352). This game content determination process (S2352) executes a process to determine whether an appropriate game is being performed during the time-saving state, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 101(b). After S2352 is completed, a hold display setting process is executed (S2353), and then the process moves to S2311, terminating this process.

The pending display setting process (S2353) executes a process for setting the display mode of the pending pattern displayed in response to the currently received winning information command based on the winning information contained in the currently received winning information command, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

Next, referring to FIG. 101(a), the contents of the game status setting process (S2351) executed in the winning information related process 2 (S2251 in FIG. 100) will be explained. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game status setting process (S2351). In this game status setting process (S2351), processing is executed to set the game method (game direction) to be executed during the current time-saving state, based on the winning information contained in the winning information command received first after the time-saving state was set.

When the game status setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101(a)) is executed, it is first determined whether the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3001). This time-saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S2253 in FIG. 99) when it is determined in command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) that time-saving setting information has been received (S2252 in FIG. 99: Yes), i.e., when a new time-saving state is set. In other words, the S3001 process determines whether the state is the one immediately after the time-saving state was set.

In the process of S3001, if it is determined that the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to on (S3001: No), it is then determined whether the winning information received this time is related to special pattern 1 (winning information showing the result of the lottery (variation) of the first special pattern) (S3002). If it is determined that it is related to special pattern 1 (S3002: Yes), since this indicates that a ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 located in the left hitting area while the time-saving state is set, the left hitting flag 223ac is set to on (S3003), the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to off (S3004), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3002 that the winning information received this time is not related to Special Pattern 1 (it is related to Special Pattern 2 (second special pattern)) (S3002: No), this indicates that a ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 located in the right-hand hitting area while the time-saving state is set, so the right-hand hitting flag 223ab is set to ON (S3005), the process proceeds to S3004, and then this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S3001 that the time-saving start flag 223ad is not set to ON (it is set to OFF) (S3001: No), this process ends as it is.

In other words, in this second embodiment, the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to ON from when the time-saving state is set until the first winning information command is received, and when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to ON, the game of shooting the ball into the area (right-hand hitting area, left-hand hitting area) where the ball entry port is located is set to be an appropriate game during the time-saving state, and the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to OFF.

This allows the timing for setting the game mode during the time-saving state to be limited to the period when the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to on.

Next, referring to FIG. 101(b), the contents of the game content determination process (S2352) executed in the winning information related process 2 (S2251 in FIG. 100) of the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) will be explained. FIG. 101(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the game content determination process (S2352). This game content determination process (S2352) determines whether the winning information included in the winning information command received this time is winning information based on a proper playing method for a playing method that was set as a proper playing method during the time-saving state, and executes a process to set an error command based on the determination result.

When the game content determination process (S2352) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning information received this time is related to special pattern 1 (winning information for indicating the result of the lottery (variation) of the first special pattern) (S3101), and if it is determined that it is related to special pattern 1 (S3101: Yes), it is determined whether the left hit flag 223ac is set to on (S3102). In the process of S3102, if it is determined that the left hit flag 223ac is set to on (S3102: Yes), it is a case where a winning command indicating the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 into which the ball shot by the left hit game can enter is received in a state where the left hit game (first game) during the time-saving state is set as an appropriate game (a state where the left hit flag 223ac is on), and this process is terminated without determining that there is an abnormality.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3102, if it is determined that the left-hitting flag 223ac is not set on (is set off) (S3102: No), this is a case where right-hitting play (second game) during the time-saving state is set as an appropriate game (right-hitting flag 223ab is on) and a winning command has been received indicating that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 into which a ball shot by left-hitting play can enter. Therefore, it is determined that appropriate play is not being performed, an error command is set for display (S3104), and this processing is terminated.

In addition, in the process of S3101, if it is determined that the winning information received this time is not related to special chart 1 (winning information showing the result of the lottery (variation) of the first special pattern), that is, the winning information received this time is related to special chart 2 (winning information showing the result of the lottery (variation) of the second special pattern) (S3101: No), then it is determined whether the right-hit flag 223ab is set to on (S3103), and if it is determined that the right-hit flag 223ab is set to on, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3103 that the right-hitting flag 223ab is not set on (is set off) (S3103: No), this means that the left-hitting game (first game) during the time-saving state is set as an appropriate game (the left-hitting flag 223ac is on) and a winning command has been received indicating that the ball has entered the second ball entry port 640 into which the ball shot by the right-hitting game can enter. Therefore, it is determined that appropriate game is not being played, an error command is set for display (S3104), and this processing is terminated.

As explained above, after the game state setting process (S2351) shown in FIG. 101(a) sets an appropriate game method for the current time-saving state, if a winning command is received, the game content determination process (S2352) shown in FIG. 101(b) can determine whether the game method in the time-saving state is appropriate or not. By configuring in this way, even if the game method (the direction in which the ball is fired) is selectable by the player, the game method selected by the player can be set as the appropriate game method, and an error command can be set to indicate an abnormality if any other game method is executed, providing the player with an easy-to-understand game experience.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the winning information related process 2 (see FIG. 100) is configured to execute the game content determination process (see FIG. 101(b)) after executing the game status setting process (see FIG. 101(a)). Therefore, the game content determination process is not executed when neither the right-hitting flag 223ab nor the left-hitting flag 223ac is set to on. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 101(b), if one flag (one of the right-hitting flag 223ab and the left-hitting flag 223ac) is not set to on, it can be determined that the other flag (the other of the right-hitting flag 223ab and the left-hitting flag 223ac) is set to on, which simplifies the control process of the voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, in this second embodiment, the game state setting process (see FIG. 101(a)) is configured to set an appropriate game method in the time-saving state based on the winning information contained in one winning information command, so when the game content determination process (see FIG. 101(b)) is executed, an appropriate game method has already been set (either the right-hitting flag 223ab or the left-hitting flag 223ac is set to ON).

In contrast, for example, when a game state setting process (see FIG. 101(a)) is executed in which multiple winning information commands are received and an appropriate game method in the time-saving state is set based on the winning information contained in the received winning information commands, it is not possible to set an appropriate game method in the time-saving state until a predetermined period of time has passed since the time-saving state was set (until the winning information command has been received a predetermined number of times). In such a case, a flag (not set flag) is provided to indicate that the game method has not been set, and when the not set flag is on, i.e., when the game method has not been set, the game content determination process (see FIG. 101(b)) is skipped. This makes it possible to prevent an error command from being set based on a game (launching of a ball) performed while the game method was being determined.

In the second embodiment, the game method during the time-saving state (left-hand game (first game) or right-hand game (second game)) is determined based on the winning information included in the winning information command received from the main control device 110, so there is no need to collect special information to determine the game method, and the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 can be simplified. However, without being limited to this, for example, a means for detecting the passage of a ball through an area where a ball flowing down the left-hand area is sure to pass and a means for detecting the passage of a ball through an area where a ball flowing down the right-hand area is sure to pass may be provided, and the detection results of the ball passage by each means may be collected to set an appropriate game method during the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, a special component must be added, complicating the control process, but the game method selected by the player can be detected with certainty, improving the accuracy of the game method setting.

Furthermore, in order to determine the game method selected by the player, the detection results of a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance may be used.

Next, referring to FIG. 102, the contents of the pending display setting process (S2353) executed in the winning information related process 2 (S2251 in FIG. 100) of the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) will be explained. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pending display setting process (S2353). In this pending display setting process (S2353), when a proper winning information command is received during the time-saving state, a process is executed to set the presentation mode of a pending suggestion presentation that suggests the update status of the time-saving state and the possibility of a jackpot game being executed for the pending symbol displayed in response to the winning information command.

When the reserve display setting process (S2353) is executed, first, it is determined whether the currently received winning information command is a command containing winning information related to special pattern 1 (winning information for showing the lottery (variation) result of the first special pattern) (S3201), and if it is determined to be related to special pattern 1 (S3201: Yes), it is determined whether the left hit flag 223ac is set to on (S3202). In the process of S3202, if it is determined that the left hit flag 223ac is set to on (S3202: Yes), since the currently received winning information command is a winning information command corresponding to an appropriate game, the process proceeds to the processes of S3203 to S3206 described below, and a process is executed to execute a reserve suggestion performance using the reserved pattern for the received winning information command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3202 that the left-hit flag 223ac is not set to on (is set to off) (S3202: No), the winning information command received this time is a winning information command that does not correspond to an appropriate game (because a winning information command for the first special symbol was received when right-hit game (second game) was determined to be the appropriate game), the processing of S3203 to S3206 is skipped and this processing ends.

Similarly, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not winning information related to special pattern 1 (S3201: No), that is, if it is determined that it is winning information related to special pattern 2 (second special pattern), it is then determined whether the right-hit flag 223ab is set to on (S3207), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S3207: Yes), since the winning information command received this time is a winning information command corresponding to an appropriate game, the process proceeds to the processes of S3203 to S3206 described below, and a process is executed to execute a reserved suggestion performance using the reserved pattern corresponding to the received winning information command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3207 that the right-hit flag 223ab is not set to on (is set to off) (S3207: No), the winning information command received this time is a winning information command that does not correspond to an appropriate game (because the winning information command for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) was received when the left-hit game (first game) was determined to be the appropriate game), the processing of S3203 to S3206 is skipped and this processing ends.

As explained above, in the second embodiment, when a winning information command is received, it is determined whether or not the winning information included in the received winning information command corresponds to the game method selected by the player, and only if the winning information corresponds to the game method selected by the player, an effect (hold display effect) is executed using the winning information included in the winning information command. This makes it possible to prohibit the hold display effect from being executed for a game not intended by the player (for example, a game in which the player erroneously operates the operating handle 51, causing the ball to be launched in a direction different from the intended direction).

Therefore, by continuing the game method selected by the player, the player can obtain advantageous information (information provided to the player by the pending display effect), which makes the player more motivated to play. Note that in the second embodiment, the pending display effect is not executed if the player plays an unintended game (a game method different from the game method selected by the player), but it is only necessary to configure the information that the player can obtain to be less favorable than if the player played the game method selected by the player. For example, the frequency of occurrence of the pending display effect may be reduced, the content of the information shown in the display mode displayed in the pending display effect may be reduced, or a display mode showing information different from the facts may be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 102 for further explanation, in the process of S3203, the information in the provisional time-saving information update area 223i is updated based on the winning information received this time (S3203), the pending display mode is selected using the pending display selection table 222aa based on the contents of the provisional time-saving information update area 223i (S3204), the selected pending display mode is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S3205), a pending display command for display corresponding to the selected pending display mode is set (S3206), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of variable display setting process 2 (S2134) in this second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of variable display setting process 2 (S2134). This variable display setting process 2 (S2134) differs from the variable display setting process of the first embodiment described above (see S2114 in FIG. 62) in that the performance setting process (S2804 in FIG. 63) is replaced with performance setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 103), but is otherwise the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Now, with reference to FIG. 104, the effect setting process 2 (S2851) in this second embodiment will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 2 (S2851). This effect setting process 2 (S2851) differs from the effect setting process (S2804) in the first embodiment described above in that the process executed when the time-saving state is set as the game state is different. All other elements are the same. The same reference numerals are used for the same elements, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, when the effect setting process 2 (S2851) is executed, the same processes of S2901 and S2902 as those of the effect setting process described above (see FIG. 63) are executed, and if it is determined that the information read in the process of S2902 is not information indicating the time-saving state (S2902: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information read in the process of S2902 is information indicating time-saving information (S2902: Yes), it is next determined whether the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3301). Here, if it is determined that the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that it is the timing to set the variable display corresponding to the first special pattern variation since the time-saving state was set (S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to S3302.

In the process of S3302, the time-saving timer counter 223ae is set to 4000, then the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to OFF, a game selection command for display is set (S3304), and this process ends. The game selection command for display set in the process of S3304 is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) of the main process (see FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the game selection command for display, it executes control to display a game selection screen (see FIG. 82(b)) on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 to allow the player to select a game method during the time-saving state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3301 that the time-saving start flag 223ad is not set to on (is set to off) (S3301: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving timer counter 223ae is greater than 0 (S3305).

The time-saving timer 233ae counts a predetermined period (four seconds in this embodiment) from the timing at which the display change corresponding to the first special pattern change is set after the time-saving state is set, and in the process of S3305, it is determined whether the current timing has passed the above-mentioned predetermined period (four seconds in this embodiment).

If it is determined in the process of S3305 that the value of the time-saving timer 223ae is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that 4 seconds have not elapsed since the timing of setting the variation display corresponding to the first special pattern variation after the time-saving state was set (S3305: Yes), since the selection screen (see FIG. 82(b)) for selecting a game method is being continuously displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the processes of S3306 to S3308 are skipped and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3305 that the value of the time-saving timing counter 223ae is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S3305; No), the reserved mode information contained in the winning information storage area corresponding to the current change is read (S3306), a performance mode corresponding to the read reserved mode information is set (S3307), a display performance command indicating the selected performance mode is set (S3308), and this processing ends.

As explained above, when setting a variable display corresponding to the lottery (variation) of a special pattern, the performance mode corresponding to the variable display can be set based on the reserved mode information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, so that a variable display of a performance mode associated with the reserved performance display already displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed based on the reserved mode information. Therefore, a related performance can be executed for a long period of time (a period during which multiple special pattern variations are executed), enhancing the performance effect.

As described above, the reserved display setting process (see FIG. 102) is configured to set reserved mode information only for winning information corresponding to the game method selected by the player (first game (left-hand play) or second game (right-hand play)). Therefore, if the special pattern change that is the target when the performance setting process (S2851 in FIG. 104) is executed is a special pattern change that does not correspond to the game method selected by the player, the reserved mode information is not set in the winning information storage area 223a, and the performance mode is not set for the change display. Therefore, it is possible to execute a performance display using a predetermined performance mode (see FIG. 83 (a) and (b)) only for the special pattern change that corresponds to the game method selected by the player, and to provide the player with a performance that is easy to understand.

Next, referring to FIG. 105(a), various counter update process 2 (S2161) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 105(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of various counter update process 2 (S2161). This various counter update process 2 (S2161) differs from the various counter update process (S2111) of the first embodiment described above in that a process for updating (subtracting) the value of the time-saving timing counter 223ae has been added, but the other elements are the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements will be omitted.

When the various counters update process 2 (S2161) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving timer counter 223ae is greater than 0 (S3401). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S3401: Yes), the value of the time-saving timer counter 223ae is decremented by 1 (S3402), and then the values of the other various counters are decremented (updated) by 1 (S3403), and this process ends. Note that the details of the various counters updated in the process of S3403 are the same as those in the various counters update process of the first embodiment described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3401 that the value of the time-saving timer counter 223ae is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S3401: No), the process skips the process of S3402 and proceeds to the process of S3403, after which the process ends. In other words, since the value of the time-saving timer counter 223ae is decremented (updated) by 1 each time the various counter update process 2 (S2161), which is executed at 1 millisecond intervals, is executed, the value of 4000 set in the performance setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104) is the value for measuring a period of 4 seconds.

Next, referring to FIG. 105(b), the contents of the performance update process 2 (S2162) executed in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 105(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the performance update process 2 (S2162). This performance update process 2 (S2162) differs from the performance update process (S2112) of the first embodiment described above in that a process for setting the display mode of the guidance display area Dm2 during the time-saving state has been added, but otherwise is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements will be omitted.

When the performance update process 2 (S2162) is executed, it is first determined whether the time-saving state is set (S3501), and if it is determined that the time-saving state is set (S3501: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the time-saving timing counter 223ae is greater than 0 (S3502). In other words, it is determined whether a predetermined period (4 seconds) has passed since the special pattern change was executed during the time-saving state.

In the process of S3502, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving timer 223ae is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S3502: No), it is next determined whether the right-hit flag 223ab is set to on (S3503), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S3503: Yes), a display right-hit command is set (S3504), and processing proceeds to S3508. When this display right-hit command is set, it is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display right-hit command, it displays the word "right hit" in the guidance display area Dm2 formed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and displays a guidance to the player that a right-hit game will be performed.

If it is determined in the processing of S3503 that the right-hitting flag 223ab is not set on (is set off) (S3503: No), it is then determined whether the left-hitting flag 223ac is set on (S3504), and if it is determined that it is set on (S3505: Yes), a left-hitting command for display is set (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3508.

When the display left hit command is set in the processing of S3506, it is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display left hit command, it displays the word "left hit" in the guidance display area Dm2 formed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and displays a guidance display to the player that a left hit game will be performed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3505, if it is determined that the left-hitting flag 223ac is not set to on (is set to off) (S3505; No), that is, if the variation of the special pattern that was reserved and stored after the time-saving state was set is executed, but 4 seconds have passed without a new ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a display standby command is set (S3507) and the process proceeds to S3508. The display standby command set in the process of S3507 is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display standby command, it continues to display the character "?" in the guide display area Dm2 formed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and continues to display the screen (see FIG. 82(b)) that allows the player to select a game method.

By configuring it in this way, it is easy to resume play even if the game is temporarily interrupted after the big win game ends for a toilet break, etc.

As explained above, in this second embodiment, different time-saving end conditions are set for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the player can select between playing a game in which the lottery for special symbol 1 is executed (left-handed play) and playing a game in which the lottery for special symbol 2 is executed (right-handed play).

This allows multiple types of play to be performed while the time-saving mode is set, preventing players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

Furthermore, in this second embodiment, when a game (left-hand play) in which a lottery for special chart 1 is executed during the time-saving state is executed, the time-saving end condition is more likely to be met and it is more likely to win a small prize that is likely to result in a two-type win than when a game (right-hand play) in which a lottery for special chart 2 is executed is executed.

By configuring it in this way, the player can choose between a game that is likely to result in a jackpot but also likely to end the time-saving state, and a game that is unlikely to result in a jackpot but also unlikely to end the time-saving state, allowing the player to freely select a game that suits his or her own convenience.

In this second embodiment, the state in which the time-saving state is set is considered to be an advantageous state, and in this advantageous state, the player is allowed to select from multiple types of play, but other than that, for example, a game state in which a high probability state is set may also be considered to be an advantageous state, or a state in which both a high probability state and a time-saving state are set may also be considered to be an advantageous state.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when an advantageous state (e.g., a time-saving state) is set, if an ending condition (e.g., a time-saving ending condition) that ends the advantageous state is met, a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (e.g., a normal state) is set. However, without being limited to this, for example, when an advantageous state ending condition that ends an advantageous state is met, the game state may be configured to transition to an even more advantageous state than the advantageous state. When configured in this way, the player can be motivated to play in order to transition from the advantageous state to the ultra-advantageous state as quickly as possible.

Furthermore, as advantageous state ending conditions that end an advantageous state, disadvantageous ending conditions that, when met, set an disadvantageous state (e.g., a normal state) that is less favorable than the advantageous state, and advantageous ending conditions that set an extremely advantageous state (e.g., a potential state) that is more favorable than the advantageous state, may be set. It is also possible to configure the ease of meeting advantageous state ending conditions, as well as the ease of meeting disadvantageous ending conditions and advantageous ending conditions, to differ depending on the selected playing method.

By configuring it in this way, the game results can be significantly different depending on the playing method selected while the player is in an advantageous state, giving the player the feeling that he or she is playing on his or her own.

In the second embodiment, an example is shown in which the player can select from two play methods (left-hand play and right-hand play), but the present invention is not limited to this and the player may select any play method from three or more play methods.

Third Embodiment
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 106 to 124. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a second variable winning device 1650 is provided instead of the V winning device 650, and in that the game content based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is different.

Specifically, in the first embodiment described above, if a small prize is won as a result of the lottery for the second special symbol, a small prize game is executed to open the V winning device 650, and if the ball that won the V winning device 650 during the small prize game passes through a specific area, a big prize game is executed (set) after the small prize game ends, which is a two-type win. However, in the third embodiment, if a small prize is won, only a small prize game is executed to open the second variable winning device 1650, and no specific area is provided within the second variable winning device 1650. In other words, the third embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that it uses a pachinko machine 10 that does not have a two-type win game feature.

First, referring to FIG. 106, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 106 is a front view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above in that a second variable winning device 1650 is provided instead of the V winning device 650, and the configuration of the electric role 640a has been changed, but the rest of the configuration is the same, and the same components are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 106, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the ball that flows down the right area (right-hand hitting area) of the variable display unit 80 passes through the through gate 67, and a second ball entrance 640 with an electric device 640a is provided downstream of the through gate 67. A plurality of general winning holes 63 are provided downstream of the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, as in the first embodiment described above, while the normal state is set as the game state, a game is played in which the first ball entrance 64 is aimed by a left-hand hitting game that causes the ball to flow down to the left area (left-hand hitting area) of the variable display unit 80, that is, a game in which the lottery for the first special symbol is mainly played, and while the time-saving state is set as the game state, a game is played in which the second ball entrance 640 is aimed by a right-hand hitting game that causes the ball to flow down to the right area (right-hand hitting area) of the variable display unit 80, that is, a game in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly played.

Details have been explained in the first embodiment, so they will be omitted here, but in this second embodiment as well, the lottery for the second special symbol is designed to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol, so right-hand play is more advantageous to the player than left-hand play.

As shown in FIG. 106, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment has a second variable winning device 1650 in the left area (to the left of the bottom end position of the variable display unit 80) where the ball shot in left-handed play can flow down. This second variable winning device 1650 is opened in a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won by drawing a second special pattern.

Although details will be described later, in the small prize game of this third embodiment, an opening operation (opening period of 0.09 seconds to 0.11 seconds) is executed that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second variable winning device 1650, and as shown in FIG. 106, the second variable winning device 1650 is configured to be positioned so that the ball cannot easily reach it.

In other words, out of the multiple special symbols, only the second special symbol is configured to win the small prize, and when a right-handed play is performed to execute the lottery for the second special symbol, the second variable winning device 1650 is provided in the left-handed play area where the ball cannot flow down. By configuring it in this way, it is configured so that when a small prize game is played, it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable winning device 1650.

In the third embodiment configured as described above, the small win of the second special symbol can be used only to satisfy the conditions for ending the time-saving state. Therefore, since the small win game executed by winning the small win does not award the player a bonus (prize ball), it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessive bonus is awarded to the player even if the winning probability is set so that there is a high probability of winning the small win.

Furthermore, the period during which the second variable winning device 1650 is open is set to a short period (0.09 seconds to 0.11 seconds) during which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second variable winning device 1650, so even if the winning probability is set to a high probability of winning a small prize, it is possible to prevent a situation in which excessive bonuses are given to a player.

In addition, in this third embodiment, the second variable winning device 1650 is provided in the left side area, which is different from the game area (right side area) into which the ball shot in right-hand play flows in which the second special symbol is selected, so that it is difficult for a player playing right-hand play to notice that the second variable winning device 1650 is being opened (a small win game is being played), and therefore the small win game can be played without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the second variable winning device 1650 is configured to be visible to the player, but it may also be configured to make it more difficult for the player to see the second variable winning device 1650, for example, by providing a decorative member between the glass unit 16 and the second variable winning device 1650. This makes it more difficult for a player playing right-handed to notice that the second variable winning device 1650 is being opened (a small win game is being played), so the small win game can be played without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, a decorative member provided near the second variable winning device 1650 may be provided with a light-emitting member (e.g., an LED) to allow the player to visually recognize the light-emitting state, and the light-emitting member may be configured to operate (light up) during a portion of the time when a small win game is played. Specifically, the system may be provided with a small win determination means for determining that the conditions for playing a small win game have been met, a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the small win determination means determines that a small win game will be played, and a light-emitting control means for controlling the operation of the light-emitting member when the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined lottery result.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a difference between the number of small win games that are actually executed and the number of small win games that are made visible to the player (the light-emitting member is activated), making it difficult for the player to grasp the number of small win games that have actually been executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the time-saving end condition, which is established based on the number of small win games executed (the number of times a small win is won), will be established (when the time-saving state will end).

Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the light emission control means to execute control to cause the above-mentioned light-emitting member to emit light even when a small prize has not been won. This makes it possible to make the number of times the light-emitting member emits light greater than the number of times a small prize has actually been won, making it difficult for the player to predict when the time-saving end condition, which is established based on the number of times a small prize game has been played (the number of times a small prize has been won), will be established (when the time-saving state will end).

In this case, it is preferable to configure the light emitting member so that it is more likely to be activated when there is a lottery result for a special pattern that corresponds to the ongoing special pattern change, or when there is a lottery result that results in a jackpot as a result of a special pattern lottery that corresponds to the winning information that has been reserved and stored. In other words, it is preferable to configure the light emitting operation that is executed to notify the player that a small jackpot game has been won, to be executed based on the lottery result for the special pattern.

This makes it difficult for the player to tell whether, when the light-emitting member lights up, a small win game has been played, a big win with a special symbol has been won, or it is simply a decorative effect. Furthermore, because the light-emitting member lights up when a state that is unfavorable to the player (playing a small win game), i.e., a state in which a factor that ends a favorable state (time-saving state) that is favorable to the player has been established, and when a state that is favorable to the player (winning a big win) is established, the player can be interested in the game results after the light-emitting member lights up.

When the above-mentioned configuration is used, the timing at which the light emission control means causes the light emitting member to emit light may be set to various timings, such as when a small win is won (when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state), when the small win game starts, during the small win game, after the small win game ends, or when the special symbol is changing, or may be set to a predetermined timing.

Furthermore, the light emission control means may be configured to vary the conditions for illuminating the light emitting member based on the results of operation of the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player. In this case, for example, when a predetermined operation condition (for example, an operation of pressing the frame button 22 10 or more times in two seconds (rapid tap operation)) is met, it is preferable to configure the light emission control so that the number of operations of the light emitting member and the number of small wins are close to each other (closer than when the predetermined operation condition is not met). This allows the player to actively operate the operation means, and motivates the player to participate.

The light-emitting action of the light-emitting member described above may also be configured to notify (indicate) the player of the situation (remaining number of small wins) until the time-saving end condition is met, or the type of small win that has been won this time. This can make the player interested in the light-emitting action of the light-emitting member.

In the third embodiment, the player is made to have difficulty in knowing whether or not a small win has been won, making it difficult for the player to know when the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, will end, and the player is made to play with a sense of tension. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The player is notified that a small win has been won, but the type of small win set for the small win may not be notified to the player, or the type of small win may be notified to the player. In this case, in order to notify the player that a small win has been won, it is preferable to display a specific display mode on the third pattern display device 81 (for example, to display the third pattern in a display mode that the player can identify as a small win), or to provide the second variable winning device 1650 in the right-hand hitting area. This allows the player to easily know the number of times the small win has been won during the time-saving state, and allows the player to play while predicting the end timing of the time-saving state.

<About the content of the performance in the third embodiment>
Next, referring to Figures 107 to 110, the effects during the time-saving state executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. The figures shown in Figures 107 to 110 are schematic diagrams showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment described above. The same elements are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the winning information of the second special pattern can also be retained and stored, and therefore an effect using the reserved memory information of the second special pattern is executed as the remaining time reduction suggestion effect (an effect to suggest to the player the remaining period of the time reduction state) executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. Below, the content of the remaining time reduction suggestion effect in the third embodiment will be explained, focusing on the points that differ from the content of the effect used in the first embodiment.

Figure 107 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen displayed when the time-saving state is set. As shown in Figure 107 (a), when the time-saving state is set, a performance start screen is displayed to explain the content of the performance executed during the time-saving state. In this third embodiment, when the time-saving state is set, a first status display mode Dm11a, a second status display mode Dm11b, a third status display mode Dm11c, and a fourth status display mode Dm11d are displayed as multiple status display modes in the small display area Dm11.

Each of these multiple status display modes corresponds to the state of fulfillment of multiple time-saving end conditions (the state of progress until the time-saving end conditions are fulfilled), and the display mode is configured to change according to the state of progress until the time-saving end conditions are fulfilled. Specifically, a bomb with a predetermined length of fuse is displayed as each status display mode, and when the first change is executed after the time-saving state is set, the fuse is lit.

The status display mode corresponding to the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be satisfied among the various time-saving end conditions is changed so that the length of the fuse is shorter than in the other status display modes. By changing the display mode of the status display mode in this way, the player can predict the timing when the time-saving state will end based on the presentation (remaining time-saving indication presentation) executed by the third pattern display device 81, so that the player can focus on the presentation and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Also, as shown in FIG. 107(a), on the effect start screen (time-saving start screen), the words "Time-saving ends if even one explodes" and "Big win when all is extinguished" are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm to inform the player of the contents of the remaining time-saving indication effect. This makes it easy to understand that if even one of the multiple bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 explodes, the time-saving state will end, and that if the fires of the multiple bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 are extinguished, a big win will occur.

The state shown in FIG. 107(a) is a state in which the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the special symbol 2 variable display area Dm1b, that is, the special symbol is being changed during the time-saving state, and therefore the multiple bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 are lit. Note that if it is determined that the special symbol does not start changing after the big win game ends and the time-saving state is set (the special symbol does not start changing after the big win game ends), a screen indicating that a remaining time-saving suggestion effect that starts the special symbol change may be displayed as a time-saving state standby screen.

When playing with the time-saving state set, and the condition for ending the time-saving state is about to be met (when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number, or the number of times the small wins are won during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number), as shown in FIG. 107(b), a combination status display mode Dm11z is displayed in the small display area Dm11 to suggest (notify) that fact. FIG. 107(b) is a schematic diagram that shows the display screen during the remaining time-saving suggestion performance during the time-saving state.

This combined status display mode Dm11z is displayed when the progress of multiple time-saving end conditions meets the pre-end condition (for example, if the number of times the special symbol changes is set to 50 as the change count end condition, the condition is met when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 30, or if the number of times the small win A has been won is set to 5 as the win count end condition, the condition is met when the number of times the small win A has been won reaches 3). Therefore, by displaying the combined status display mode Dm11z in the small display area Dm11, the player can be made aware that the time-saving state will soon end.

In addition, by displaying the combined status display mode Dm11z when the progress of multiple time-saving end conditions meets the pre-end condition, when the time-saving state ends (when any of the multiple time-saving end conditions set is met), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which time-saving end condition has been met when the time-saving state ends. In other words, as shown in FIG. 107(a), if multiple status display modes (Dm11a to Dm11d) whose display modes change according to the progress of each time-saving end condition are displayed in the small display area Dm11, when the time-saving state ends, it is necessary to execute an effect in which one of the status display modes explodes, so there is a problem that the player can easily understand which of the multiple time-saving end conditions has been met when the time-saving state ends.

In this way, if the player easily knows which of the multiple time-saving end conditions the currently established time-saving end condition is, the multiple time-saving end conditions that are set when transitioning to the time-saving state may be easily predicted, and even the timing when the time-saving state will end may be easily predicted. In contrast, in the third embodiment, when a pre-end condition is established for multiple time-saving end conditions, the combined status display mode Dm11z is displayed to prevent the player from understanding the progress of each time-saving end condition during the transition. This makes it difficult for the player to understand which time-saving end condition was established to end the time-saving state.

In the third embodiment, the combination status display mode Dm11z is configured to be displayed only when the pre-termination condition is satisfied for multiple time-saving termination conditions, but the combination status display mode Dm11z may be displayed when at least one of the time-saving termination conditions satisfies the pre-termination condition, or the combination status display mode Dm11z may be displayed when a value corresponding to a specific time-saving termination condition among multiple time-saving termination conditions satisfies the pre-termination condition.

When the time-saving state ends, the screen shown in FIG. 108(a) is displayed. FIG. 108(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time-saving state ends. FIG. 108(a) shows the display screen when the time-saving end condition is met for one of the winning count end conditions, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the special symbol 2 variable display area Dm1b in the combination "341" indicating that a small win has been won, and the small display area Dm11 displays a display mode indicating that a bomb has exploded, and the word "End" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm to inform the player that the time-saving state has ended.

Next, the contents of the remaining time-saving suggestion effect for special situations when the time-saving state is set will be explained with reference to FIG. 108(b). FIG. 108(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when special pattern 1 variation is executed immediately after the time-saving state is set. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment has a means for retaining and storing winning information of the first special pattern, so that when a jackpot is won in a lottery for the first special pattern in the normal state (during left-handed play) and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot play corresponding to the jackpot ends, a special pattern variation corresponding to the reserved and stored first special pattern may be executed.

Among these, there were also cases where the winning information for the reserved first special symbol included winning information for a jackpot (so-called consecutive wins in the reserved state). In this way, even if the time-saving state was set, if the next jackpot game was executed based on winning information already acquired before the time-saving state was set, rather than on winning information for the special symbol acquired during the time-saving state, there was a problem that if the effect executed during the time-saving state (the effect suggesting remaining time-saving) was executed, a contradiction would arise between the content of the effect and the game result, reducing the effect of the effect.

In this third embodiment, when the time-saving state is set, it is determined whether or not there is winning information that will result in a jackpot among the winning information corresponding to the first special pattern stored in the reserved memory, and if it is determined that there is winning information that will result in a jackpot, a special effect (a reserved effect during time-saving) is executed instead of starting (executing) the normal remaining time-saving indication effect (see FIG. 107(a)). This prevents a contradiction between the effect content and the game result that would otherwise occur if an effect executed during the time-saving state (remaining time-saving indication effect) were executed, which would reduce the effect of the effect, and gives the player a sense of superiority by executing a special effect in the rare situation of winning another jackpot in the reserved memory after the jackpot has ended.

When a time-saving on-hold effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 108(b), the combination status display mode Dm11z is displayed in the small display area Dm11, the character "!?" is displayed in the combination status display mode Dm11z, and the character "Something's wrong" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm to suggest to the player that an effect different from the normal time-saving indication effect is being executed. By displaying in this manner, it is possible for the player to easily understand that an effect different from usual is being executed.

In addition, in FIG. 108(b), since the first special pattern is being changed as described above, the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is displayed in a changing manner in the special pattern 1 changing display area Dm1a, and the third pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is displayed stationary in the special pattern 2 changing display area Dm1b.

The display screen shown in FIG. 108(b) may be configured to be executed, for example, when it is determined that one of the time-saving end conditions is met based on already acquired winning information before the time-saving state is set. By configuring it in this way, the screen shown in FIG. 108(b) is displayed after the big win ends, and the player can be informed that either a big win will be won immediately (before all special pattern variations corresponding to the winning information stored in reserve are completed) or the time-saving state will end, making the player interested in the performance content that will be executed next.

When the time-saving state ends from the state shown in FIG. 108(b), a display screen similar to that shown in FIG. 108(a) is displayed to notify the player that the time-saving state is ending. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won from the state shown in FIG. 108(b), the display screen shown in FIG. 109(a) is displayed. FIG. 109(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when time has passed from the state shown in FIG. 108(b) and a jackpot with the first special symbol is won.

As shown in FIG. 109(a), when a jackpot is won by a special pattern change corresponding to the winning information of the first special pattern that has already been reserved and stored while the time-saving state is set, the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is displayed in the special pattern 1 change display area Dm1a in a display mode of "777" indicating a jackpot, and the small display area Dm11 displays the extinguished combination status display mode Dm11z. Then, the words "Extinguished" and "Jackpot" are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm to indicate that a jackpot has been won.

As explained above, in this third embodiment, when the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot (the timing when the special pattern change is executed for the first spin after the end of a jackpot), the contents of the reserved winning information are determined, and if it is determined as a result of this determination that there is winning information that will result in a jackpot, a special effect (a reserved effect during time-saving) that is different from the effect during the normal time-saving state (a remaining time-saving indication effect) is executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a jackpot is won immediately after the time-reduced indication effect is executed, resulting in a mismatch between the content of the time-reduced indication effect and the game result, or to prevent the content of the time-reduced indication effect from being forcibly changed to correspond to the game result, thereby preventing a decrease in the effect of the time-reduced indication effect.

Next, the contents of the remaining time-saving indication effect when the number of times of special pattern fluctuations until the time-saving state ends is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 109(b). FIG. 109(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the number of times of remaining time-saving is determined during the time-saving state. In this third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state are set, including a fluctuation number end condition that is established when a special pattern fluctuation is executed and a winning number end condition that is established when a small win is won in the lottery of a special pattern, and the time-saving state ends when any of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is established, thereby making it difficult for the player to predict the period during which the time-saving state will continue (the timing when the time-saving state ends), and improving the interest of the game during the time-saving state.

Even if multiple time-saving end conditions are set in this way, the period until the time-saving state ends may be determined. For example, if play progresses during the time-saving state and the number of times the special pattern changes before the change count end condition is met is three, and the number of times the small prize is won before the win count end condition is met is five, then since a small prize can only be won a maximum of one time for one special pattern change, the time-saving state will end when the special pattern has been drawn three times, regardless of the result of the special pattern drawing.

In the third embodiment, when the period (number of times the special symbol will change) until the time-saving state ends is determined, the remaining number of times the special symbol will change (in the example of FIG. 109(b) it is "3 times") is displayed in the small display area Dm11, as shown in FIG. 109(b). By configuring in this way, in a gaming machine in which the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be complexly set by setting multiple time-saving end conditions, when the timing at which the time-saving state ends is determined in advance, the player can be clearly notified of that timing, allowing the player to play while being conscious of the remaining period of the time-saving state.

In addition, in this third embodiment, when the period until the end of the time-saving state (the number of times the special pattern will change) is determined, the remaining number of times the special pattern will change ("3 times" in the example of FIG. 109(b)) is displayed in the small display area Dm11, and the period during which this display is shown is a period during which the time-saving state will not end based on the number of times the small win has been won, no matter how many times the small win has been won. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play in an attempt to win as many small wins as possible while the remaining number of times the special pattern will change is displayed in the small display area Dm11.

When such a display effect is used in the first or second embodiment described above, the player can be more motivated to play the game because there is a possibility of winning two types of prizes by winning a small prize. In other words, in the first or second embodiment described above, if a small prize is won during the time-saving state, a chance to win two types of prizes and a pinch that the time-saving state will end will come when a small prize is won. However, as shown in FIG. 109(b), by executing an effect (remaining period confirmation notification effect) that notifies the player that the time-saving state is in a period that will not end based on a small prize win (a period that is confirmed to end based on the number of times the special pattern changes), the player can be notified that if a small prize is won, only a chance to win two types of prizes will arrive while the remaining period confirmation notification effect is being executed, and the player can be motivated to play the game in order to win many small prizes.

In addition, in this third embodiment, different time-saving end conditions are set based on the type of jackpot that is set for the jackpot that is won, and in some cases, each time-saving end condition is set so that the time-saving end condition is not met for a predetermined period of time after the time-saving state is set.

In the third embodiment, the device is configured to be able to execute a presentation to inform the player that the time-saving state described above has been set and that the time-saving end condition cannot be met. Figure 110(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen when the time-saving state starts after the end of a jackpot game in which jackpot D is set as the jackpot type.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 113(a), but in this third embodiment, when the time-saving state is set based on the big win D, the time-saving end condition is set so that the time-saving state does not end until the special pattern variation is executed at least 20 times. In other words, the time-saving state continues for the period from when the time-saving state is set until the special pattern variation is executed 20 times, regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery.

In this third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(a), an effect (invincible effect) is executed to inform the player that the current period is a specific period after the time-saving state has been set (a period during which the time-saving state will continue regardless of the results of the special symbol lottery). During this invincible effect, an unlit bomb is displayed in the small display area Dm11, informing the player that the period will not cause the bomb to explode (a period during which the time-saving state will not end).

Then, in the center of the main display area Dm, a remaining period mode 820 is displayed to notify the player of the remaining time of the invincible effect. In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 110(a), the words "Only a few more minutes until the fuse is lit..." and "20" are displayed as the remaining period mode 820. In this way, by executing a performance (invincible effect) to inform the player of the period during which the time-saving state will not end, a period during which the player can play with peace of mind during the time-saving state can be provided.

<Electrical Configuration in the Third Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 111. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. The other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Figure 111 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this third embodiment. This third embodiment differs from the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see Figure 19 (a)) in that a first win random number 3 table 202ba is provided instead of the first win random number table 202a, a small win type selection 3 table 202bb is provided instead of the small win type selection table 202f, a time-saving grant 3 table 202bc is provided instead of the time-saving grant table 202e, and an open scenario 3 table 202bd is provided instead of the open scenario table 202g. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description is omitted.

Now, with reference to FIG. 112(a), the contents of the first winning random number 3 table 202ba will be explained. FIG. 112(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 112(a), the first winning random number 3 table 202ba defines the special pattern 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 and the special pattern 2 random number 3 table 202ba2.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 112(b). FIG. 112(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1. This special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 defines the same contents as the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 20(b)), and a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Figure 112 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2. This special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2 differs from the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 of the first embodiment described above (see Figure 20 (c)) in that the range of values that are determined to be a small win is different, but otherwise it is the same. Specifically, the special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2 defines the small win determination value to be in the range of "5 to 499" for the acquired first win random number counter value C1.

In other words, in this third embodiment using special pattern 2 random number 3 table 202ba2, when a lottery for the second special pattern is executed, a big win is determined to occur with a probability (ratio) of 5/1000 (1/200), and a small win is determined to occur with a probability (ratio) of 495/1000. In other words, when a lottery for the second special pattern is executed, there is a 1/2 probability of winning a big win or a small win.

The range for determining whether a big win or small win is a jackpot is not limited to the above, and may be specified so that the probability of determining a small win is lower than the probability of determining a big win, and the range for determining whether a big win or small win is a jackpot may be specified not only as consecutive values, but also with gaps between them. In addition, in this third embodiment, the same table is used to determine whether a big win or small win is a jackpot regardless of the game state that is set, but it may also be configured to determine whether a big win or small win is a jackpot using different tables depending on the game state that is set.

Specifically, it is preferable to configure the table used when the time-saving state is set as the game state so that the range in which a small win is determined is wider than the table used when the normal state is set as the game state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent situations that frequently occur in the normal state, even if the small win used to end the time-saving state is configured to occur frequently during the time-saving state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 112(a) and 112(b), in this third embodiment, the small prize cannot be won by drawing the first special pattern, and the small prize can only be won by drawing the second special pattern, but it may be configured so that the small prize can also be won by drawing the first special pattern.

By configuring in this way, for example, if the time-saving state is set and the winning information for the first special pattern stored on hold contains winning information for a small prize, the time-saving state can be ended immediately. When using such a configuration, it is recommended to use it in a gaming machine in which the immediate end of the time-saving state can provide the player with a more advantageous gaming state.

Specifically, in addition to the normal state and the time-saving state, the game state can be configured to be able to set a high probability state for special symbols (probability change state: high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols; potential probability state: high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the low probability game states (normal state: low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols; time-saving state: low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and the potential probability state can be set if the time-saving end condition is met during the period in which the potential probability state is set, so that the potential probability state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

With this type of gaming machine, it is possible to give the player an advantage when the time-saving end condition is met while the high probability state is set. This makes it possible to provide an interesting gaming machine. Furthermore, with this type of gaming machine, if the winning information for the first special symbol that is reserved and stored when the high probability state is set contains winning information for a small win, the high probability state is immediately ended and a transition to a latent probability state is made, so that the player is motivated to play in order to store up to the maximum number (four) of winning information for the first special symbol before the high probability state is set.

Next, the contents of the small win type selection 3 table 202bb will be explained with reference to FIG. 113(a). FIG. 113(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the small win type selection 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 113(a), the small win type selection 3 table 202bb differs from the small win type selection table 202f (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above in that the contents of each small win type are different. Other than that, for example, the small win types defined for the range of the small win type counter value C5 are the same, so a detailed explanation of them will be omitted.

This third embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that it does not have a V winning device 650 and does not have the gameplay of winning a jackpot (two types of wins) by passing a ball through a specific area during a small win game, and therefore each small win type defined in the small win type 3 table 202bb does not correspond to the content of the jackpot game that is set when a two types of win is won.

Figure 113 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving grant 3 table 202bc in this third embodiment. As shown in Figure 113 (b), the time-saving grant 3 table 202bc differs from the time-saving grant table 202e (see Figure 21 (d)) in the first embodiment described above in that the stipulated contents of the time-saving end conditions set in accordance with each jackpot type are different.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the time-saving end condition is set to "100" as the fluctuation count end condition based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and the time-saving end condition is set to "1" as the small win A counter 203m, "10" as the small win B counter 203n, and "50" as the winning count end condition based on the number of small win wins. In other words, after the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot A ends, a time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as time-saving state a) in which the end condition is established is set when any of the following conditions is met: "the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times", "small win A (the small win in which the small win is set) is won once", "small win B (the small win in which the small win is set) is won 10 times", or "small win C (the small win in which the small win is set) is won 50 times".

In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, the time-saving end condition is set to "50" as the fluctuation count end condition based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and the time-saving end condition is set to "5" as the small win A counter 203m, "5" as the small win B counter 203n, and "25" as the winning count end condition based on the number of small win wins. In other words, after the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot B ends, a time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as time-saving state b) is set in which the end condition is established when any of the following conditions is met: "the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 50 times", "small win A (the small win set for small win) is won five times", "small win B (the small win set for small win) is won five times", or "small win C (the small win set for small win) is won 25 times".

When the jackpot type is jackpot D, the time-saving end condition is set to "100" as the fluctuation count end condition based on the number of times the special symbol fluctuates, and the time-saving end condition is set to "20" as the small win A counter 203m and "80" as the winning count end condition based on the number of times the small win is won. In other words, after the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot A ends, a time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as time-saving state c) is set in which the end condition is met when any of the following conditions is met: "the number of times the special symbol fluctuates reaches 100 times," "the small win A (the small win in which the small win is set) is won 20 times," or "the small win C (the small win in which the small win is set) is won 80 times."

As explained above, in this third embodiment, like the above-mentioned embodiments, multiple different time-saving end conditions are set according to the type of jackpot that is set when the jackpot is won, and the time-saving state ends when any of the multiple time-saving end conditions that have been set is met, so that the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be diversified.

In addition, the conditions for ending the time-saving state that are likely to be met are different depending on the time-saving state (a to c) that is set according to the type of big win, so it is possible to have a mixture of cases where the time-saving state ends based on the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state, and cases where the time-saving state ends based on the number of times small wins are won during the time-saving state, and this makes it possible to diversify the patterns in which the time-saving state ends.

In this third embodiment, the number of items set as the time-saving end conditions varies depending on the time-saving state that is set. Specifically, in the time-saving states a and b, the time-saving end conditions that can be met when the small prize B is won are set, but in the time-saving state c, the time-saving end conditions that can be met when the small prize B is won are not set.

By configuring it in this way, even if the player is able to determine the type of small win game being executed during the time-saving state (even if the player is able to determine the type of small win game by determining the first pattern that is stopped and displayed in a gaming machine that stops and displays a first pattern that corresponds to the type of small win that is set for the winning small win), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the type of small win game is set as a time-saving end condition, thereby making it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time-saving state will end.

In addition, in this third embodiment, if a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving end condition is set for all possible small prize types (small prizes A to C). However, other configurations may be possible, such as adding a small prize type that is set when a small prize is won (for example, small prizes X to Z), and not setting a time-saving end condition for the added small prize type.

By configuring it in this way, when a small jackpot is won during the time-saving state, it is difficult for the player to know whether the time-saving state is approaching its end (whether the time-saving end condition is met), so it is difficult for the player to know when the time-saving state will end.

In this case, it is advisable to configure the operation content of the small win game to be the same (including an error that the player cannot distinguish) between a small win type for which a time-saving end condition is set (e.g., small win A) and a small win type for which a time-saving end condition is not set (e.g., small win X). This makes it possible to prevent the player from determining the type of the small win based on the operation content during the small win game.

Next, the contents of the release scenario 3 table 202bd in this third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the release scenario 3 table 202bd. As shown in FIG. 114, the release scenario 3 table 202bd differs from the contents of the above-mentioned release scenario table 202g in that the contents of the release scenarios defined corresponding to small wins A to C are different, and the contents of the release scenario defined corresponding to big win D are different, but all other elements are the same.

Here, the above-mentioned differences in the contents of the opening scenario 3 table 202bd will be explained. Note that detailed explanations of the same elements will be omitted. As described above, this third embodiment is configured to execute a small win game that opens the second variable winning device 1650 (a small win game that opens the second variable winning port) as a small win game that is executed when a small win is won. Furthermore, this third embodiment is configured so that a double win cannot be obtained even if a ball wins the second variable winning device 1650 during a small win game.

Therefore, the opening scenarios defined in correspondence with small wins A to C in the opening scenario 3 table 202bd only define the operation content for one round (1R) corresponding to the small win game. Also, as shown in FIG. 114, in this third embodiment, opening scenarios are defined in correspondence with small wins A to C, with an error that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish them.

Specifically, in the opening scenario corresponding to small prize A, an opening operation is executed in which the opening time of the second variable prize opening of the second variable prize device 1650 is 0.1 seconds, in the opening scenario corresponding to small prize B, an opening operation is executed in which the opening time of the second variable prize opening of the second variable prize device 1650 is 0.11 seconds, and in the opening scenario corresponding to small prize C, an opening operation is executed in which the opening time of the second variable prize opening of the second variable prize device 1650 is 0.09 seconds.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to specify different opening scenarios for each type of small win, while still making it difficult to determine the type of small win that corresponds to the current small win game from the content of the small win game that is actually executed.

In the third embodiment, in order to make it difficult to determine the type of small win corresponding to the current small win game from the content of the small win game being executed, an opening scenario is defined that corresponds to each small win type and that differs in the opening time of the second variable winning port of the second variable winning device 1650 to an extent that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish. In addition to this, the start interval period (0.5 seconds) and end interval period (0.5 seconds) of the small win game may also be different to an extent that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish. Also, each time may be different so that the durations of the opening scenarios defined for each small win type are the same.

In addition, among multiple small win types, a specific small win type may be configured to have an opening scenario that is different from other small win types (different enough for the player to easily identify), thereby allowing the player to identify that a specific small win type has been set. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system to set a time-saving end condition for a small win type for which an opening scenario that is different from other small win types (different enough for the player to easily identify) is specified. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the timing when the time-saving state will end by understanding the content of the small win game being executed.

Furthermore, the same opening scenario may be defined for multiple small win types, in which case it is preferable to configure the game so that different presentations are executed depending on the small win type based on the fact that a predetermined condition is met while the small win game is being played. Here, the predetermined condition that is set while the small win game is being played may be, for example, a condition that is met when a ball enters the second variable winning port of the second variable winning device 1650 during a small win game, or when the player operates the frame button 22 during a small win game. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play so that the predetermined condition is met during the period (predetermined period) during which the small win game is being played.

In addition, the effects that are executed when a certain condition is met during a small win game may be, for example, effects that change the type of sound that is generated when the ball passes through (enters) a certain area, effects that change the sound or light based on the operation of the frame button 22, or different effects that use the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 115(a). FIG. 115(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this third embodiment. This third embodiment differs from the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 26(a)) in that the state display selection table 222b and the final state display selection table 222c are deleted and a time-saving remaining period discrimination table 222ba is added. The other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 116, the contents of the time-saving remaining period discrimination table 222ba will be explained. FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving remaining period discrimination table 222ba. This time-saving remaining period discrimination table 222ba is for discriminating that a certain period of time has elapsed based on the information included in the time-saving information update area 223g, which is updated based on the time-saving related command indicating the game information (number of times the special pattern changes, number of times a small win is won) corresponding to the various time-saving end conditions set in the set time-saving state, that is, the value of the time-saving counter 203k, the value of the small win A counter 203m, the value of the small win B counter 203n, and the value of the small win C counter.

By referring to this remaining time-saving period discrimination table 222ba, the current time-saving state can be broadly categorized. Then, by varying the presentation mode according to this classification, it is possible to inform the player of the progress of the time-saving state roughly. Note that in this third embodiment, the progress of the time-saving state is configured to be distinguished into two stages, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be distinguished into three or more stages, for example. In this case, for example, it is good to define multiple thresholds in the remaining time-saving period discrimination table 222ba and distinguish the current progress based on the corresponding thresholds.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 115(b). In this third embodiment, a remaining time reduction count determination flag 223ba and a determination change flag 223bb are added to the second embodiment described above. The other configurations are the same as those in the second embodiment, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The remaining time-saving count determination flag 223ba is a flag for indicating that the number of times the special pattern changes until the time-saving state ends has been determined, and is set to ON when the number of times the special pattern changes until the time-saving state ends has been determined. In other words, in this third embodiment, as the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, a change count end condition that is established when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number, and a win count end condition that is established when the number of times small wins are won during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number are set, so that the remaining period until the time-saving state ends cannot be determined during the entire period in which the time-saving state is set.

That is, for example, if the value of "100" is set as the fluctuation count end condition and the value of "2" is set as the winning count end condition, the time-saving state will end when the special symbol changes 100 times or when two small wins are won, so the remaining time of the time-saving state cannot be determined unless the period until two small wins are won is determined. On the other hand, even if the above-mentioned time-saving end condition is set, if play progresses during the time-saving state and the special symbol changes 98 times and no small wins have been won, it is determined that the number of times the special symbol will change until the time-saving state ends will be two.

In this way, when the remaining time until the time-saving state ends (remaining number of special pattern changes) is determined, an effect is executed to notify the player of this fact, thereby preventing the time-saving state from suddenly ending. Furthermore, as in the third embodiment, when the time-saving end conditions include a change count end condition and a win count end condition, an effect is executed to notify the player of this fact when the remaining time until the end (remaining number of special pattern changes) is determined, allowing the player to look forward to winning a small prize without feeling a sense of crisis about the time-saving state ending.

This remaining time-saving count determination flag 223ba is set to ON when it is determined in the time-saving remaining period determination process (see S3358 in FIG. 123) that the remaining time-saving count has been determined, and is referenced in the performance setting process 3 (see S2871 in FIG. 122) (S3356 in FIG. 122). Then, when it is determined that this remaining time-saving count determination flag 223ba is set to ON (S3356 in FIG. 122: Yes), a time-saving command for display indicating the remaining time-saving count (number of special pattern changes) is set (S3357 in FIG. 122). As a result, the number of special pattern changes until the time-saving state ends is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 109(b)).

In addition, in this third embodiment, when the remaining number of times the special pattern will change until the time-saving state ends is determined, a remaining time-saving number determination flag 223ba is provided as a flag to indicate that fact. However, any configuration may be used as long as it is capable of informing the player of the remaining period of the time-saving state. For example, a special pattern 1 remaining time-saving number determination flag may be provided to indicate that the remaining number of times the first special pattern will change until the time-saving state ends has been determined, and a special pattern 2 remaining time-saving number determination flag may be provided to indicate that the remaining number of times the second special pattern will change until the time-saving state ends has been determined. When the special pattern 1 remaining time-saving number determination flag is set to on, the remaining number of times the first special pattern will be displayed, and when the special pattern 2 remaining time-saving number determination flag is set to on, the remaining number of times the second special pattern will be displayed.

By configuring it in this way, for example, in a gaming machine that is set up to have a game in which only the first special symbol changes (draws) during the time-saving state and a game in which only the second special symbol changes (draws) during the time-saving state, it is possible to display the remaining number of times the special symbol can change depending on the game content that is actually being played (the type of special symbol that is actually drawn).

The confirmed change flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that the period from when the time-saving state is set until the time-saving end condition is satisfied at the shortest is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, and is set to ON when the number of times the special pattern changes until the time-saving end condition is satisfied is 15 or more. When the confirmed change determination process (see S3063 in FIG. 124) executed in the time-saving remaining period determination process (see S3358 in FIG. 123) determines that the minimum value of the values corresponding to the various counter values indicating the time-saving end condition is 15 or more (S3653 in FIG. 124: Yes), the confirmed change flag 223bb sets a time-saving command for display corresponding to the minimum value (S3654 in FIG. 124) and is set to ON (S3655 in FIG. 124).

If it is determined that the minimum value indicating the values of the various counters indicating the time-saving end conditions is not 15 or more (S3653 in FIG. 124: No), a time-saving display command that does not indicate the minimum value is set (S3656 in FIG. 124), and if multiple pre-end conditions are met (S3602 in FIG. 124) in the remaining time-saving period determination process (see S3358 in FIG. 123), it is set to off (see S3608 in FIG. 123).

This makes it possible to notify the player of the period during which the time-saving state will not be satisfied after the time-saving state is set. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious that the time-saving state will end immediately after it is set. This allows the player to play in the time-saving state with peace of mind (without worrying about the time-saving state ending).

In the third embodiment, the system is configured to determine whether or not to set the definite fluctuation flag 223bb on by referring to the values of all counters that are set corresponding to all time-saving end conditions that are set during the time-saving state. However, any configuration is sufficient as long as it is possible to determine the period during which the player can safely play during the time-saving state. For example, a time-saving state determination means may be provided that determines the time-saving end conditions that can be met in the current time-saving state, and the system may be configured to determine whether or not to set the definite fluctuation flag 223bb on by referring only to the counter values that correspond to the time-saving end conditions determined by the time-saving state determination means. Alternatively, a determination means may be provided that determines the time-saving end conditions that cannot be met in the current time-saving state, and the system may be configured to determine whether or not to set the definite fluctuation flag 223bb on by excluding only the counter values that correspond to the time-saving end conditions determined by the determination means.

<Regarding control processing in main control device 110 of the third embodiment>
The control process in the third embodiment is different from that in the first embodiment in that the contents of the control process in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Here, referring to Figs. 118 to 120, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In this third embodiment, the timer interrupt process (see Fig. 37) is changed to timer interrupt process 3 (see Fig. 118), and instead of the special symbol variation process (see Fig. 38) and the start winning process (see Fig. 43) executed in the timer interrupt process (see Fig. 37), the special symbol variation process 3 (see Fig. 119) and the start winning process 2 (see Fig. 96) executed in the second embodiment described above are executed, and further, the small win control process is changed to the small win control process 3 (see Fig. 120). The rest of the third embodiment is the same. The same elements are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted. In addition, detailed descriptions of the contents of the start winning process 2 (see Fig. 96) executed in the second embodiment described above will be omitted.

First, the contents of timer interrupt processing 3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing the contents of timer interrupt processing 3. This timer interrupt processing 3 differs from the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 37) in that, instead of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 43), special symbol variation processing 3 (see FIG. 119) and the start winning processing 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the second embodiment described above are executed, and in that the V entrance passing processing (see FIG. 47) and the V passing processing (see FIG. 48) are not executed.

When this timer interrupt process 3 is executed, the processes of S101 to S103 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 37). Then, when the process of S103 is completed, the special symbol change process 3 is executed (S174) instead of the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38). Details of the special symbol change process 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 119. After that, instead of the start winning process (see FIG. 43), the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the second embodiment described above is executed (S155). Details of this start winning process 2 are the same as those of the second embodiment described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the processes of S106 and S107 are executed in the same manner as in the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 37), and then the process of S110, which is the same as the process of S110 in the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 37), is executed, and this process ends.

Next, the contents of special symbol variation process 3 (S174) will be explained with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation process 3 (S174). This special symbol variation process 3 differs from the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 38) in that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203ab is obtained, and that the start of a small win is set instead of the small win start setting process.

When this special symbol change process 3 (S174) is executed, the processes of S201 and S202 are executed in the same manner as the special symbol change process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 38). In the process of S202, if the display state of the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b is not changing (S202: No), the processes of S251 to S255 are executed, which are the same as the special symbol change process 2 of the second embodiment described above (see FIG. 94). The details of the processes of S251 to S255 are the same as those of the second embodiment described above, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted. Thereafter, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S252 that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203ab is 0 (S252: No), the process of S206 to S210 is executed, which is the same as the process of S206 to S210 in the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 38), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is changing (S202: Yes), the process of S211 to S220 is executed in the same manner as the special pattern change process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). In the process of S220, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S220: Yes), the opening scenario for the small win according to the small win type set corresponding to the small win that was won is set by referring to the opening scenario 3 table 202bd (S271). Next, the start of the small win is set (S272), and the small win start flag 203f and the small win in progress flag 203g are set to ON (S273). After that, the time-saving update process for the small win is executed (S274), and this process is terminated. This small win time-saving update process (S274) is the same process as the small win time-saving update process (FIG. 41, S405) executed in the small win start setting process (FIG. 40, S221) executed in the special pattern change process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above, and a detailed explanation of this process will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the small win control process 3 (S1555) will be explained with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small win control process 3 (S1555). This small win control process 3 (S1555) is a process executed in place of the small win control process (see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment within the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and differs from the small win control process (see FIG. 53) described above in that the processes related to the V flag 203i and the V passing flag 203j are deleted, and the target to be operated during the small win game is the second variable winning device 1650 instead of the V winning device 650.

When the small win control process 3 (S1555) is started, first, the same process as S1701 to S1705 of the small win control process (see FIG. 53) described above is executed, and if it is determined in the process of S1705 that it is the timing to open the second variable winning port (the timing to open the winning port of the second variable winning device 1650) (S1705: Yes), the same process as S1706 of the small win control process (see FIG. 53) described above is executed, and then this process ends. Note that the process of S1701 to S1706 executed in the small win control process 3 executes the operation of opening the second variable winning port of the second variable winning device 1650, and although the operation target is different from the small win control process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 53), the same reference numerals are used and the description is omitted because the control contents are the same.

In addition, in the process of S1705, if it is not the timing to open the second variable winning port (S1705: No), the same process as S1711 to S1715 of the small win control process described above (see FIG. 53) is executed. In the process of S1715, if it is determined that it is the timing to end the ending performance (S1715: Yes), the same process as S1720 of the small win control process described above (see FIG. 53) is executed, and then this process ends.

The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment configured as described above is configured to be able to set the game state to a normal state or a time-saving state, and while the normal state is set, a left-hand play is performed in which a ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64 provided in the left side area to draw a first special symbol, and if a jackpot is won in the drawing for the first special symbol and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game is played, a right-hand play is performed to draw a second special symbol, which is more advantageous to the player than the drawing for the first special symbol.

The time-saving state, which is a game state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is likely to be executed, will continue to be set until the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, that is, the change count end condition that is established based on the number of times the special symbol changes (number of draws), or the win count end condition that is established based on the number of times a small prize is won by drawing the second special symbol, is established.

The conditions for ending the time-saving mode are varied depending on the type of jackpot won, making it difficult for players to grasp when the time-saving mode will end (the period during which the time-saving mode will continue). This allows players to play while hoping that the advantageous gaming state will continue for a long time.

In addition, even if the time-saving end conditions are set such that it is difficult to end the time-saving state, the time-saving state can be ended early depending on the result of the lottery for the special symbol, and even if the time-saving end conditions are set such that it is easy to end the time-saving state, the time-saving state can be continued for a long period depending on the result of the lottery for the special symbol. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the advantageous game state will continue for a longer period than with a gaming machine in which the time-saving state is set for a specific period that is determined in advance.

<Regarding control process in the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment>
Next, the control process contents of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 121 to Fig. 124. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the command determination process (see Fig. 56) is replaced with the command determination process 3 (see Fig. 121) and the performance setting process (see Fig. 63) is replaced with the performance setting process 3 (see Fig. 122), but is otherwise the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 121, command determination process 3 (S2183 in FIG. 121) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 3 (S2183). This command determination process 3 (S2183) differs from the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (S2113 in FIG. 56) in that it executes the same winning information related process (see S2251 in FIG. 100) as command determination process 2 of the second embodiment described above (see S2163 in FIG. 99), and in that the contents of the process executed when a time-saving related command is received have been changed, but otherwise it is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

When command determination process 3 (S2183 in FIG. 121) is executed, the same process as either the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (S2113 in FIG. 56) or the command determination process 2 of the second embodiment (S2163 in FIG. 99) is executed, and then, if it is determined in the process of S2215 that the currently received command is a time-saving related command (S2215: Yes), the contents of the time-saving information update area 223g are updated and the process proceeds to S2217. That is, in this third embodiment, when a time-saving related command is received, a process of storing the received command as is is executed, rather than a process of changing the corresponding flag or counter as in the first embodiment described above.

The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to grasp the time-saving status using the information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g. Note that, in this third embodiment, when a time-saving related command is received as in the first embodiment described above, a process of varying the corresponding flag or counter may be performed as in the first embodiment described above.

Next, the processing of effect setting process 3 (S2871) will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect setting process 3 (S2871). In this effect setting process 3 (S2871), the effect mode for the effect to indicate the remaining period of the time-saving state is set based on the progress of the time-saving state (the situation (remaining number of changes) until the time-saving end condition is met, and the number of changes since the time-saving state was set).

When the performance setting process 3 (S2871) is executed, first, the information stored in the game status storage area 223f is read (S2901), and then it is determined whether the read information is in the time-saving state (S2902). If it is determined that the time-saving state is not in effect (S2902: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving state is in effect (S2902: Yes), the time-saving information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g is read (S3351), the special symbol type (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) for this change (main change) and the lottery result are extracted from the change pattern (S3352), and it is determined whether the time-saving end condition is met with this change (S3353).

If it is determined in S3353 that the time-saving end condition is met (S3353: Yes), a time-saving command for display indicating the end of the time-saving is set (S3355), and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S3354 that the time-saving end condition is not met (S3354: No), it is next determined whether the remaining time-saving count determination flag 223ba is set to on (S3356), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S3356: Yes), a time-saving command for display indicating the remaining time-saving count is set (S3357), and this process ends.

Then, in the process of S3356, if it is determined that the remaining time-saving count determination flag 223ba is not set to on (S3356: No), the remaining time-saving period determination process described below with reference to FIG. 123 is executed (S3358), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the time-saving remaining period determination process (S3358) will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving remaining period determination process (S3358). In this time-saving remaining period determination process (S3358), a process is executed to determine the current time-saving status according to the time-saving information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g, i.e., the time-saving information updated based on commands sent from the main control device 110, and to set the presentation mode based on the determination result.

When the time-saving remaining period determination process (S3358) is executed, first, the time-saving remaining period is determined based on the time-saving remaining period determination table 222ba using the time-saving information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g (S3601). Then, based on the determination result, it is determined whether the remaining period has reached the pre-termination condition multiple times (S3602). If not (S3602: No), the confirmed change determination process is executed (S3063) and this process is terminated. The contents of the confirmed change determination process (S3063) will be described later with reference to FIG. 124, but when the time-saving state is set, the time-saving end condition set this time (values of various counters) is determined, and a process is executed to determine the period (number of special pattern changes) during which the time-saving state will not necessarily end when a special pattern change (lottery) is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining period has reached the pre-termination condition multiple times (S3602: Yes), it is determined whether the confirmed change flag 223bb is set to on (S3604). If it is determined that the confirmed change flag 223bb is not set to on (it is set to off) (S3604: No), it is then determined whether the remaining number of time-saving times is confirmed. If the remaining number of time-saving times is not confirmed, a time-saving display command indicating the combined state is set (S3605), and this process is terminated. When a time-saving display command indicating the combined state is set in the process of S3605, the combined status display state Dm11z as shown in FIG. 107(b) is displayed.

This makes it difficult for the player to understand which time-saving end condition is most likely to be met, and also notifies the player that multiple time-saving end conditions are close to being met (i.e., that the time-saving state has been continuing for a long time).

If it is determined in the processing of S3604 that the confirmed change flag 223bb is set to ON (S3604: Yes), the confirmed change flag 223bb is set to OFF (S3608), and the process proceeds to a process of determining whether the remaining number of time-saving times described above is confirmed. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S3604 that the remaining number of time-saving times is confirmed, information indicating the remaining number of time-saving times is then stored in the time-saving information update area 223g (S3606), a time-saving command for display indicating the remaining number of time-saving times is set (S3607), the remaining number of time-saving confirmed change flag 223bb is set to ON (S3608), and this process ends.

The contents of the confirmed change determination process (S3063) will now be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of the confirmed change determination process (S3063). As described above, in this confirmed change determination process (S3063), a process is executed to determine the period during which the set time-saving state cannot end, and to set a command to display this fact on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, in a gaming machine with gameplay that makes it difficult to know when the time-saving state will end (gameplay with multiple time-saving end conditions), the player can know the period during which he or she can play with confidence by checking the display mode (see FIG. 110) displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the confirmed change determination process (S3063) is executed, it is first determined whether the confirmed change flag 223bb is set to on (S3651). If it is determined that it is not set to on (S3651: No), the values corresponding to the time-saving counter 203k, the small win A counter 203m, the small win B counter 203n, and the small win C counter 203p are read from the time-saving information update area 223g, and the minimum value is extracted (S3652).

In this embodiment, the process of S3652 is configured to determine the values of the various counters described above that are held in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 based on the information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g, but without being limited to this, a counter that changes in synchronization with the various counters held in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 described above may be provided in the voice lamp control device 113, and the determination may be made based on the value of that counter.

It is determined whether the minimum value extracted in the process of S3652 is a condition value (15 or more in this embodiment) that can be reported as a confirmed change (S3653), and if it is determined that it is equal to or greater than the condition value (15) (S3653: Yes), then a time-saving display command indicating the minimum value is set (S3654), the confirmed change flag 223bb is set to on (S3655), and this process is terminated.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify the player only when the period during which the time-saving state cannot end (number of times the special pattern changes) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, so that the presentation mode displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 only when the fixed change flag 223bb is set on can be a presentation mode that allows the player to play with peace of mind. In other words, for example, if the period during which the time-saving state cannot end (number of times the special pattern changes) is once, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of this fact and feeling uneasy.

In this embodiment, if the period during which the time-saving state cannot end (the number of times the special pattern changes) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a presentation mode is set to notify the player of this fact. However, without being limited to this, the content of the notification to the player may be varied based on the operation content of the operation means that the player can operate. For example, if the player performs a specific operation, the notification may be configured to notify the player even if the period during which the time-saving state cannot end (the number of times the special pattern changes) is less than a predetermined number, or if the player performs a special operation, the notification may be configured to notify the player only if the period during which the time-saving state cannot end (the number of times the special pattern changes) is a special number greater than the predetermined number.

If it is determined in the process of S3653 that the minimum value is less than the condition value (15) (S3653: No), a time-saving command for display corresponding to the updated time-saving information is set (S3656), and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S3651 that the confirmed change flag 223bb is set to on (S3651: Yes), the processes of S3652 and S3653 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3654.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 125 to 153. The fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) can be simultaneously (concurrently) selected (varied).

The time-saving state can be set to a state in which the first special symbol's change time is more likely to be selected as a change time that is longer than the second special symbol's change time (i.e., a state in which the second special symbol is drawn (changed) more often), and a state in which the first special symbol's change time is more likely to be selected as a change time that is longer than the second special symbol's change time (i.e., a state in which the first special symbol is drawn (changed) more often), and the difference is that game states with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided within the time-saving state.

Another difference is that different effects (display of the number of time-saving times) are executed in response to the multiple time-saving states described above.

Now, referring to FIG. 125, the configuration of the game board 13 used in this fourth embodiment will be described with respect to the differences from the first embodiment described above. FIG. 125 is a front view of the game board 13 used in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 125, the game board 13 of this embodiment differs from the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right-hand hitting area is different. In this figure, a ball launched in a left-hand hitting game flows down the left-hand hitting (left side) area along the arrow PA1 shown on the game board 13, and a ball launched in a right-hand hitting game flows down the right-hand hitting (right side) area along the arrow PA2 shown on the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 125, in this embodiment, a first starting hole 64 (hereinafter referred to as the left first starting hole 64) is provided below the variable display unit 80. This left first starting hole 64 has an opening formed on the top surface large enough to allow one game ball to enter, and two nails are arranged opposite the opening at a distance slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball. By adjusting the inclination of these nails, it is possible to change the winning rate of games into the left first starting hole 64 (for example, the proportion of the number of game balls that enter the left first starting hole 64 when 250 game balls are launched).

In addition, in the right region of the variable display unit 80, the second starting hole 640 and the first starting hole 64 (hereinafter referred to as the right first starting hole 64) are arranged in parallel above and below. The second starting hole 640 has an opening that allows one game ball to enter on the side of the decorative member attached to the game board 60. On the front side (opposite side) of the opening, a normal electric role 640a associated with the second starting hole 640 is arranged. This normal electric role 640a has a length of about three game balls, and one end side is pivotally supported. Then, based on the second pattern being a winning combination, it is configured to rotate at a predetermined angle (45 degrees in this embodiment) in a direction (direction away from the opening) that can guide the game ball to the second starting hole 640 for a predetermined number of times (one or two times in this embodiment) and a predetermined number of seconds (0.5 seconds or 1 second in this embodiment). The normal electric role 640a is rotated by a solenoid. During normal play (except when the second symbol is hit), the opening of the second starting hole 640a is kept blocked (standing up vertically).

The right-side first starting hole 64 is located below the second starting hole 640. When the normal electric device 640a is in the open state (tilted horizontally), the normal electric device 640a is located in a position opposite the opening of the right-side first starting hole 64. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to configure it so that it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right-side first starting hole 64 when the normal electric device 640a is in the open state.

In this embodiment, when the game state is a high probability state (high probability state) or a time-limited game state, the probability that the second symbol will be determined as a winning symbol is high. When the game state is a low probability state, the player launches the game ball so that it passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80, and plays the game so that the game ball enters the left first start hole 64. When the third symbol is a winning symbol and the game shifts to a high probability game or time-limited game, the probability that the second symbol will be determined as a winning symbol increases, so that the second symbol is likely to be a winning symbol when the game ball passes through the through gate 67. Therefore, the player launches the game ball so that it passes through the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right-hit game) and plays the game. In this case, the probability that the normal electric role 640a is in an open state is high, so that the game is likely to enter the second start hole 640, while the game is likely to enter the right first start hole 644.

In this embodiment, in the high probability game state, it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to win with the second special symbol than with the first special symbol. Specifically, with the first special symbol, 50% of the jackpots are jackpots that are likely to result in a high probability game after the jackpot game, and the remaining 50% are jackpots that are likely to result in a time-saving game (low probability game state) after the jackpot game (high probability game is unlikely to be awarded).

On the other hand, the second special symbol is configured so that, in the event of a jackpot, there is a 100% chance that a jackpot will be awarded that will likely result in a special chance game state after the jackpot game. In other words, if you win with the second special symbol, it is more likely that a special chance game state will be awarded.

In addition, when the normal electric device 640a is in the open state, the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 is such that the distance between the tip of the normal electric device 640a and the variable display unit 80 is one or more balls but less than two balls. The through gate 67 is arranged so that the game balls that flow down the distance can easily pass through the through gate 67 with a gate-shaped opening. The through gate 67 is arranged so that the game balls that pass through the through gate 67 are unlikely to enter the right-side first start port 64 due to the nails arranged on the downstream side of the through gate 67. Specifically, the exit side (downstream side) of the through gate 67 is arranged so that the game balls do not flow down to the opening side of the right-side first start port 64 due to the nails arranged above the opening of the right-side first start port 64 (less than one game ball), and are arranged to flow downward through the windmill as they are. In other words, the game balls can enter the right-side first start port 64 only when the normal electric device 640a is kept in the closed state (standing up vertically).

In this embodiment, when the normal electric device 640a is open, the balls do not enter the first right-side starting hole 64. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The balls may be arranged so that they can enter the first right-side starting hole 64 at a lower rate by setting the interval so that the balls flowing down from the exit of the through gate 67 can enter the first right-side starting hole 64.

Next, the content of the presentation mode during the time-saving state in this fourth embodiment (the presentation display mode displayed on the third pattern display device) will be explained with reference to Figs. 126 and 127. First, with reference to Fig. 126, the display screen when entering the time-saving state, which is displayed in accordance with the type of time-saving state that has been set, will be explained.

In this fourth embodiment, the details will be described later, but it is possible to change (draw) the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), and further, by differentiating the change pattern (change time) of each special symbol set during the time-saving state, it is possible to set a first time-saving state in which the first special symbol is more likely to change than the second special symbol during the time-saving state, and a second time-saving state in which the second special symbol is more likely to change than the first special symbol.

The system is set so that only the drawing of the second special symbol will result in a small win, and if the small win is won, two types of wins can be obtained, as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, to prevent multiple special symbols from fluctuating (drawing) at the same time (in parallel) and resulting in lottery results that are advantageous to the player, if a specific lottery result (for example, a win) is won in the drawing of one special symbol, the other fluctuating special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a stop symbol indicating a loss.

Furthermore, when the time-saving state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player, is set a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the number of times the time-saving state is set (time-saving count) is subtracted in accordance with the timing at which the special symbols that are executed simultaneously (side by side) start to change.

In other words, when the first time-saving state in which the first special symbol mainly changes is set, time-saving play is likely to be played in accordance with the number of times the special symbol changes set as the time-saving end condition. However, when the second time-saving state in which the second special symbol mainly changes is set, as described above, the first special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped based on the small jackpot win, resulting in a large difference between the number of times the special symbol changes set as the time-saving end condition and the number of times play is actually performed.

Specifically, if the condition for ending the time-saving mode is set to the total number of times the first and second special symbols change to reach 100, and the first time-saving mode is set, then by configuring the game so that only the change (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed (a long period of time is set as the change time of the second special symbol (a period longer than the time it takes for the first special symbol to change 100 times)), it will be possible to execute approximately 100 special symbol changes during the first time-saving mode (the second special symbol will not be forcibly stopped due to a miss due to the result of the lottery for the first special symbol).

In contrast, if the condition for ending the time-saving mode is set to the total number of times the first and second special symbols change to reach 100, and the second time-saving mode is set, then only the change (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed (the change time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (longer than the time it takes for the second special symbol to change 100 times)), and if the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to have a probability of winning a small prize of approximately 1/1 (probability excluding only the probability of winning a big prize), then every time a small prize is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the change of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped as a miss, and the number of changes actually executed is approximately 50.

In this way, even if the same condition is set as the time-saving end condition, the number of times the special symbol changes while the time-saving state is set (the number of times it changes without being forcibly stopped) will differ depending on the type of time-saving game being executed. In such a case, if the number of times the time-saving state that was actually set (for example, 100 times) was displayed to the player regardless of the type of time-saving state that was set, there was a problem that the time-saving state presented would give the player a feeling of discomfort.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of time-saving times (remaining number of time-saving times) notified to the player on the display screen when the time-saving ...

By configuring it in this way, for example, when the first time-saving state is set, the second special symbol can be executed multiple times by pausing play midway through the game, or when the second time-saving state is set and the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss other than a big win or small win, and the first special symbol being changed cannot be forcibly stopped, the notified number of remaining time-saving times can be synchronized with the actual number of remaining time-saving times without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Specifically, when the second time-saving state (time-saving A) described above is set, as shown in FIG. 126(a), even if the condition for ending the time-saving state is actually set to be that the total number of times the first special pattern and the second special pattern change has occurred 100 times, "50" is displayed in the remaining time-saving count display area Dm10, taking into account the number of times the special pattern change is forcibly stopped due to a small jackpot win, and when the first time-saving state (time-saving B) is set, "100" is displayed in the remaining time-saving count display area Dm10, as shown in FIG. 126(b).

As a result, when the second time-saving state is set, the player can be made to believe that the time-saving end condition of 50 times the number of times the special pattern changes has been set. And even if the number of times the special pattern changes is updated (deducted) due to the forced stop of the special pattern, the remaining number of time-saving times displayed in the remaining time-saving times display area Dm10 is not updated (deducted) in response to the update (deduction), but is updated (deducted) in response to the number of times the second special pattern changes, so the period during which the time-saving state is set continuously (number of times the special pattern changes) can be updated (deducted) without giving the player any sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, in this fourth embodiment, as shown in Figs. 126(a) and (b), when the time-saving state is set, the reserved symbols corresponding to each special symbol are not displayed in the sub-display area Ds. This makes it possible to prevent the player from noticing the number of times the special symbols are actually changed while the time-saving state is set, based on the consumption state of the reserved symbols. In this fourth embodiment, instead of displaying the reserved symbols corresponding to each special symbol in the sub-display area Ds, the main display area Dm forms a special symbol 1 reserved ball number display area Dm6 and a special symbol 2 reserved ball number display area Dm7, which display the reserved ball number of each special symbol. However, this is not limited to this, and a notification means may be provided that notifies the reserved ball number of each special symbol in a light-emitting manner using a part of a decorative member provided on the game board 13, instead of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, this notification means may be used in the configuration of each of the above-mentioned embodiments.

Next, referring to FIG. 127, the content of the correction effect for correcting the remaining number of time-saving times displayed in the remaining time-saving times display area Dm10 described above will be explained. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the remaining number of time-saving times displayed on the display screen (time-saving state setting screen) when the time-saving state is set is configured to differ depending on the type of game state that is set (see FIG. 126). In this case, when the special pattern is changed under conditions that are different from normal, such as when the game is temporarily interrupted with the first time-saving state set and the second special pattern is executed multiple times, or when the lottery result for the second special pattern is a miss with the second time-saving state set and the first special pattern is not forcibly stopped, there is a risk that the reported remaining number of time-saving times will differ from the actual remaining number of time-saving times.

In such a case, for example, during a time-saving game in which time-saving A is set and the second special symbol mainly fluctuates, if the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss and the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped, that is, if the actual remaining number of time-saving times is greater than the number corresponding to the notified remaining number of time-saving times, first, as shown in FIG. 127(a), the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the fluctuating display, and the same presentation mode (a concept including an error that is difficult for the player to notice) as when the lottery result of the special symbol is notified to the player is displayed in the main display area Dm. In other words, during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, a pseudo-stop presentation is executed to make the player think that the fluctuating of the special symbol has stopped, and the display mode (the remaining number of time-saving times for notification) of the remaining time-saving times display area Dm10 is updated (subtracted) in accordance with the pseudo-stop presentation, and a correction presentation is executed to the state shown in FIG. 127(b).

By configuring it in this way, the number of remaining time reductions that is notified can be synchronized with the actual number of remaining time reductions without causing any discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, in this fourth embodiment, although a detailed explanation will be given later, this correction effect is configured to be executed only when the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special pattern (second special pattern) is a predetermined time or more (30 seconds or more). Therefore, even if a pseudo stop effect is executed during one special pattern fluctuation period, the player will not feel uncomfortable. Also, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if the actual remaining number of time reductions is less than the number corresponding to the remaining number of time reductions that is notified, an effect (multiple fluctuation fusion effect) can be executed to update (subtract) the display mode (remaining time reduction number for notification) of the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 across multiple special pattern fluctuations.

<Electrical Configuration in the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 128 to 135. The fourth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed.

Figure 128 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of ROM 202 in MPU 201 of main control device 110 in this fourth embodiment. ROM 202 is provided with at least 4 first win random numbers table 202ca, 4 first win type selection table 202cb, 2nd win random numbers table 202c, 4 variation pattern table 202cd, and 4 small win type selection table 202ce.

First, the first winning random number 4 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. 129(a). FIG. 129(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number 4 table 202ca. As in the first embodiment described above, the first winning random number 4 table 202ca has a random number table corresponding to the first special symbol and a random number table corresponding to the second special symbol, and is the same as the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 20(a)) described above in that the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol is replaced with the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2. The same elements are denoted by the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 4 table 202ca2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 129(b). FIG. 129(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special pattern 2 random number 4 table 202ca2. As shown in FIG. 129(b), this special pattern 2 random number 4 table 202ca2 differs from the above-mentioned special pattern 2 random number table 202a2 in that the range determined to be a small win has been changed from "5-989" to "5-998", but is otherwise the same. In other words, in the lottery for the second special pattern in this fourth embodiment, there is a 994/1000 chance of winning a small win.

Next, referring to FIG. 130(a), the first winning type selection 4 table 202cb will be described. FIG. 130(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning type selection 4 table 202cb. This first winning type selection 4 table 202cb differs from the above-mentioned first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 21(a)) in that the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb1 is provided instead of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, and the special chart 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb2 is provided instead of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2, but is otherwise the same. The same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 130(b). FIG. 130(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb1. This special chart 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb1 differs from the special chart 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 21(b)) in that the contents of the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are different.

Specifically, when jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, 15 rounds of jackpot play are executed as the jackpot game, and then the time-saving state (time-saving A) is set, and when jackpot B is selected, 5 rounds of jackpot play are executed as the jackpot game, and then the time-saving state (time-saving A) is set. And when jackpot C is selected, 5 rounds of jackpot play are executed as the jackpot game, and then the normal state is set. In other words, jackpot A and jackpot B are jackpots in which the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and jackpot C is a jackpot in which the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, in this fourth embodiment, multiple time-saving states (time-saving A, time-saving B) are configured to be set as the time-saving state that can be set after the jackpot game ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, when time-saving A is set as the time-saving state, the main game during the time-saving state is the drawing of the second special symbol, and when time-saving B is set, the main game during the time-saving state is the drawing of the first special symbol. In this way, by varying the variation (drawing) of the special symbol that is mainly executed during the time-saving state according to the time-saving state that is set, it is possible to set different game specifications during the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with game specifications that exceed the types of game states that can be set, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Next, the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 130(c). FIG. 130(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special chart 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb2. This special chart 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb2 differs from the above-mentioned special chart 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 21(c)) in that the number of types of jackpot types defined corresponding to the possible values of the first jackpot type counter value C2 has been increased, and the contents of the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type and the game state set after the jackpot game has ended are different.

Specifically, as the jackpot type, the first jackpot type counter value C2 specifies a jackpot D in the range of "0 to 69", and specifies a jackpot E in the range of "70 to 99". When jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type, 15 rounds of jackpot play are executed as the jackpot game, and then a time-saving state (time-saving A) is set, and when jackpot E is selected, 15 rounds of jackpot play are executed as the jackpot game, and then a time-saving state (time-saving B) is set.

In other words, if a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol, the system is configured so that the time-saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends, with time-saving A being set 70% of the time and time-saving B being set 30% of the time. Here, if time-saving A is set as the time-saving state, time-saving gameplay will again be played with a focus on the drawing (variation) of the second special symbol. On the other hand, if time-saving B is set, time-saving gameplay will be played with a focus on the drawing (variation) of the first special symbol.

In this way, in this embodiment, if a left hit is made in the normal state or the probability of winning state, and a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special symbol, there is a 58% chance of transitioning to a favorable potential state (jackpot B, D). Then, if a right hit is made in the potential state, and a jackpot is obtained by drawing the second special symbol, there is a 100% chance of looping through the potential state (jackpot E to G). Therefore, once a potential state (probability of winning a special symbol and normal state of normal symbols) is set, a right hit is made to enter the second ball entrance 1640, which makes it easier to draw the second special symbol, and makes it easier to repeat a state with a high probability of winning and a jackpot with the second special symbol. Therefore, the player can play with the goal of transitioning to the potential state, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern 4 table 202cd will be described with reference to Figures 131 to 133. As described above, this fluctuation pattern 4 table 202cd specifies a random number value that determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 131, the fluctuation pattern 4 table 202cd defines at least a normal fluctuation pattern table 202cd1 for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in a normal state, and a time-saving A fluctuation pattern table 202cd2 and a time-saving B fluctuation pattern table 202cd3 for determining a fluctuation pattern in a time-saving state. Next, the specific contents of each of these tables will be explained with reference to FIG. 132 and FIG. 133. Note that in each table shown in FIG. 132 and FIG. 133, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following explanation, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds for ease of understanding.

First, the normal fluctuation pattern table 202cd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 132. This normal fluctuation pattern table 202cd1 is a table that is referenced when the gaming state is normal. FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this normal fluctuation pattern table 202cd1. As shown in FIG. 132, the normal fluctuation pattern table 202cd1 specifies a random number value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for each type of special symbol and each stop type of special symbol (win/lose determination result).

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern that is determined when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is selected as a winning symbol (jackpot) is as follows: the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50" and corresponds to a normal reach (20 seconds), and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "51 to 198" and corresponds to a super reach (30 seconds).

On the other hand, in the case of a miss in the lottery for the first special symbol (Special Symbol 1), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 70" to correspond to a fluctuation pattern of a short miss (8 seconds), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "71 to 120" to correspond to a fluctuation pattern of a long miss (12 seconds), and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "121 to 170" to correspond to a miss and normal reach (20 seconds). Also, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "171 to 198" to correspond to a miss and super reach (30 seconds).

Furthermore, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time is set to 600 seconds (10 minutes) regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big win, the winning long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small win, the small winning long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss, the miss long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. As a result, when the right hit is performed in the normal state and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set every time, so the game efficiency is significantly worse than when the left hit is performed. This configuration can prevent irregular play methods that involve hitting the right side during normal play.

Next, the details of the time-saving A fluctuation pattern table 202cd2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 133(a). FIG. 133(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving A fluctuation pattern table 202cd2. This time-saving A fluctuation pattern table 202cd2 is a table that is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern that corresponds to the lottery result when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a time-saving state in which time-saving A is set.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), for a jackpot of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), a super short jackpot fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the entire range (0-198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Also, for a miss of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), a super long miss fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0-198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

On the other hand, for a big win of the second special pattern (special pattern 2), a big win short fluctuation (5 seconds) is associated with the entire range of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (0-198), a small win short fluctuation (5 seconds) is associated with the entire range of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (0-198), and a miss of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is associated with a miss short fluctuation (5 seconds) with the entire range of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (0-198).

Next, the details of the time-saving B fluctuation pattern table 202cd3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 133(b). FIG. 133(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving B fluctuation pattern table 202cd3. This time-saving B fluctuation pattern table 202cd3 is a table that is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern that corresponds to the lottery result when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a time-saving state in which time-saving B is set.

As shown in FIG. 133(b), for a jackpot of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), a short jackpot fluctuation (5 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0-198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Also, for a miss of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), a super long miss fluctuation (5 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0-198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

On the other hand, for a big win with the second special pattern (special pattern 2), a super short big win fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the entire range of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (0-198), a small win with the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is associated with a long small win fluctuation (60 seconds) with the entire range of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (0-198), and a miss with the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is associated with a long miss fluctuation (60 seconds) with the entire range of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (0-198).

Next, the details of the small win type selection 4 table 202ce will be described with reference to FIG. 134. This small win type selection 4 table 202ce is a data table that is referenced to determine the type of small win when a small win occurs in the lottery for the second special pattern. This small win type selection 4 table 202ce specifies the corresponding small win type for each range of values of the small win type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 134, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 69" and is associated with "small win A". This "small win A" is a small win type in which a small win game with the same opening pattern as the small win A of the first embodiment described above is executed. Of the 100 possible random number values of the small win type counter C5, there are 70 random number values that become "small win A", so when a small win is obtained by drawing the second special pattern, the probability that "small win A" will be determined is 70% (70/100).

In addition, a "small win B" is associated with the value range of the small win type counter C5 from "70 to 99". This "small win B" is a small win type in which the opening and closing plate 65f1 is set to an open state for 0.06 seconds x 6 times during a small win game. Of the 100 possible random number values of the small win type counter C5, there are 30 random number values that are "small win B", so when a small win is obtained by drawing the second special pattern, the probability that "small win B" will be determined is 30% (30/100).

<Regarding control processing of main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 137 to 151. The fourth embodiment is significantly different from each of the above-mentioned embodiments in that the selection (variation) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be executed in an overlapping manner.

And when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to set a time-saving state (first time-saving state) in which the drawing of the first special symbol is performed more frequently than the drawing of the second special symbol, and a time-saving state (second time-saving state) in which the drawing of the second special symbol is performed more frequently than the drawing of the first special symbol, which is what makes the difference.

In the fourth embodiment, a first time-saving state and a second time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player can be set as time-saving states that are advantageous to the player, so that multiple game states with different levels of advantage can be provided to the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

First, referring to FIG. 137, the special symbol variation process 4 (S194), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process 4 (S194). The special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194) performs various judgments and decisions based on the counter values acquired based on the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, and controls the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 to simultaneously display a variable display in the variable display mode determined by a predetermined control, or controls the display to stop in a display mode that indicates the judgment result. Below, the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194) will be described.

In the special symbol variation process 4 (Fig. 137, S194), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is being played (whether or not the jackpot in progress flag 203d is on) (S7001). If it is determined that a jackpot is being played (whether or not the jackpot in progress flag 203d is on) (S7001: Yes), there is no need to set the lottery for the special symbol or the stop of the variation display, and this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that a jackpot is not being played (whether or not the jackpot in progress flag 203d is off) (S7001: No), it is determined whether or not a small jackpot is being played (whether or not the small jackpot in progress flag 203g is on) (S7002). If it is determined that a small jackpot is being played (whether or not the small jackpot in progress flag 203g is on) in the process of S7002 (S7002: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small win is not occurring (the small win flag 203g is off) (S7002: No), it is determined whether the first special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner (S7003).

If it is determined in the process of S7003 that the first special symbol is being changed (S7003: Yes), a first special symbol change stop process is executed (S7005) and the process proceeds to S7006. Here, in the first special symbol change stop process (S7005), when the change time of the first special symbol being changed has elapsed, a process for stopping and displaying a stopped symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed, and when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot and the stopped symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed, a process for forcibly stopping and displaying the second special symbol being changed and corresponding to a miss is executed. Details of this first special symbol change stop process (S7005) will be described later with reference to FIG. 142.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7003 that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a changing state (S7003: No), then, on condition that at least one reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a first special symbol change start process is executed (S7004) to execute a jackpot determination and a change pattern selection process based on the reserved data, and the process proceeds to S7006. Details of this first special symbol change start process (S7004) will be described later with reference to Figures 136 to 139.

In the process of S7006, which is executed after the first special symbol change start process (S7004) or the first special symbol change stop process (S7005) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being changed (S7006), and if the second special symbol is being changed (S7006: Yes), the second special symbol change stop process (S7008) is executed and this process is terminated. This second special symbol change stop process (S7008), like the first special symbol change stop process (S7005), is a process for setting the stop display of the stop pattern indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol when the specified change time of the second special symbol being changed has elapsed. Details of this second special symbol change stop process (S7008) will be described later with reference to Figures 148 and 149.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7006 that the second special symbol is not being changed (S7006: No), then, on condition that a new initial winning entry into the second ball entrance 640 has been detected, a second special symbol change start process is executed to draw the second special symbol and set the start of a new change display (S7007), and this process is terminated. Details of this second special symbol change start process (S7007) will be described later with reference to Figures 143 to 147.

As explained above, in the fourth embodiment, the control of the variation (lottery) of the first special pattern and the control of the variation (lottery) of the second special pattern are configured to be executed independently. By configuring in this manner, the variation (lottery) of the second special pattern can be executed regardless of whether the variation (lottery) of the first special pattern is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the lottery of the special pattern multiple times in a short period of time, improving gaming efficiency.

In addition, in this fourth embodiment, when a big win or small win is won by drawing a special pattern, a new variation (drawing) of the special pattern is not started while a winning game based on that win (big win game, small win game) is being played. By configuring in this way, it is no longer necessary to perform the cumbersome task of predicting the result of the drawing of the special pattern while playing a winning game, and it is possible to direct the player's attention to the winning game during the winning game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, in this fourth embodiment, when one of the multiple special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot win, the other special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss. This makes it possible to prevent situations in which special symbols are changing during a jackpot game, or in which one special symbol wins a jackpot when the other special symbol wins a jackpot (during a jackpot game), thereby providing a game that is easier for players to understand.

In the fourth embodiment, the special symbol change start process and the special symbol change stop process are not executed during either the big win game or the small win game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special symbol change start process and the special symbol change stop process may be executed only during the big win game, or the special symbol change start process and the special symbol change stop process may be executed during both the big win game and the small win game. By configuring in this way, the special symbol change (lottery) can be executed more frequently, allowing the player to enjoy the game in a short period of time.

Next, referring to FIG. 138, the first special symbol change start process (S7004), which is one process of the special symbol change process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol change start process (S7004).

In the first special symbol change start process (Fig. 138, S7004), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is obtained (S7101), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is greater than 0 (S7102). In the process of S7102, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is greater than 0 (S7102: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is decremented by 1 (S7103), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b after the decrement is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 (S7104).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223c in the RAM 223. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223c according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control device 110.

When the processing of S7104 is completed, the data in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S7105). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on.

When the processing of S7105 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S7106). This first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 138, S7106) will be described in detail later, but it is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 that has been shifted to the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and based on the set game state.

When the processing of S7106 is completed, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process is then executed (Fig. 138, S7107). Details will be described later, but this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S7107) is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107) is completed, the game status update process is then executed (S7108). This game status update process (Fig. 138, S7108), the details of which will be described later, is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the values of various counters (time-saving counter 203k) that indicate the state of the pachinko machine 10. When the process of S7108 is completed, this process is terminated. Note that a detailed explanation of this game status update process will be described later with reference to Fig. 141.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7102 that the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b is 0 (S7102: No), this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 139, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S7106), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 138, S7004), will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol jackpot determination process (S7106).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (Fig. 139, S7106), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained (S7201). Next, it is determined whether the range of random numbers that result in a jackpot or small jackpot specified in the first jackpot random number table 202a matches the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the determination result (lottery result) is obtained (S7202).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S7202 is a jackpot (S7203), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S7203: Yes), the jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON for the first special symbol (S7204), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot (S7205). Then, based on the obtained value of the winning type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7206), and a value according to the current game state (for example, 0 in normal state, 1 in time-saving state) is stored (set) in the winning state storage area 203cf (S7207), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the lottery result is a miss (S7203: No), the losing pattern of the first special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (S7208), and then this process is terminated. In this embodiment, since the lottery result of the first special pattern is configured not to win a small prize, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a big prize in the process of S7203 (S7203: No), the lottery result is determined to be a miss and the process of S7208 is executed. However, for example, if it is configured to win a small prize as the lottery result of the first special pattern, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a big prize in the process of S7203 (S7203: No), it is sufficient to determine whether or not the small prize has been won, and execute a process according to the determination result. In this case, it is sufficient to execute a process that is different from the special pattern 2 miss variation process (see S7708 in FIG. 145) described later with reference to FIG. 145 only in that the first special pattern is targeted instead of the second special pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 140, the first special symbol change pattern selection process (S7107), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 138, S7004), will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol change pattern selection process (S7107).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 140, S7107), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 139, S7106), it is determined whether the lottery result for the first special symbol was determined to be a jackpot, i.e., whether a jackpot for the first special symbol has been set (S7301). Here, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been set is made by determining whether or not the jackpot flag 203ca for the first special symbol is on. This jackpot flag 203ca is set to on in the process of S7204 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139) described above.

If it is determined in the process of S7301 that a jackpot of the first special symbol has been set (S7301: Yes), the jackpot type is determined (selected) from the first jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb (see FIG. 130) based on the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of S7201 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see FIG. 139) (S7302), and the process proceeds to S7303.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7301 that the lottery result for the first special symbol is a miss (i.e., the jackpot flag 203ca for the first special symbol is off) (S7301: No), the process of S7302 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7303.

In the process of S7303, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained (S7303). Next, the variation pattern 4 table 202cd (see Figs. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current game state is read (S7304), and the process proceeds to S7305. Here, in this fourth embodiment, the time-saving state that can be set as the game state is configured to be able to set the time-saving A (first time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and the time-saving B (second time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving A. Therefore, the game state that can be set is configured to be three types, the normal state, the time-saving A, and the time-saving B, and the current game state is determined based on the value of the time-saving counter 203k and the information stored in the time-saving state storage area 203cd.

Specifically, if the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 0, the current game state is determined to be the normal state, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 1 or more (not 0), the current game state is determined to be the time-saving state. If information indicating time-saving A (e.g., information indicating a jackpot type for which a time-saving state is set) is stored in the time-saving state storage area 203cd, the current game state is determined to be time-saving A (first time-saving state), and if information indicating time-saving B (e.g., information indicating a jackpot type for which a time-saving state is set) is stored in the time-saving state storage area 203cd, the current game state is determined to be time-saving B (second time-saving state).

The configuration for determining the current game status is not limited to the configuration used in the fourth embodiment, and other configurations may be used. For example, a game status storage area may be provided in which the currently set game status is constantly updated and temporarily stored, and the current game status may be determined using the information stored in the game status storage area. This configuration increases the capacity of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but allows the current game status to be determined reliably. Furthermore, even if the number of types of game status that can be set is increased (for example, to four types), it becomes possible to easily determine the current game status.

In the processing of S7305, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern table (the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the current game state) (7305), and then a special chart 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern (S7306).

When the processing of S7306 is completed, a special symbol 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S7307). Next, the start of the variation of the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S7308), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 141, the game status update process (S7108), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 138), will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing this game status update process (S7108). In this game status update process (see S7108 in FIG. 141), a process is executed to subtract the number of special symbol changes for which the time-saving state is set to continue.

In other words, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the update of the time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of times the special pattern changes is configured to be executed at the timing when the special pattern stops changing, whereas in this fourth embodiment, the update of the time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of times the special pattern changes is configured to be executed at the timing when the special pattern starts changing. By configuring in this way, even if a process that can independently execute the change (lottery) of multiple special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is used (even if the order in which the special pattern changes start and the order in which the special pattern changes stop are swapped), it is possible to set the time-saving state appropriately in accordance with the predetermined number of times the special pattern changes.

When the game status update process (see FIG. 141) starts, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203k is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current game status is in the time-saving state (S7401). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 0 (S7401: No), that is, if it is determined that the current game status is not in the time-saving state, the processes of S7402 and S7403 are skipped and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203k is greater than 0 (S7401: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the current game status is in the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203k is decremented by 1 (S7402), a remaining time-saving count command indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203k is set (S7403), and then this process is terminated.

The remaining time-saving count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the remaining time-saving count command, it extracts the value of the time-saving counter 203k from the remaining time-saving count command and stores the extracted value in the time-saving information update area 223g of the RAM 223. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the time-saving information update area 223g according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the value of the time-saving counter 203k of the main control device 110.

Next, referring to FIG. 142, the first special pattern change stop process (S7005), which is one process of the special pattern change process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this first special pattern change stop process (S7005). This first special pattern change stop process (S7005) executes a process to stop the first special pattern when the change time has elapsed, and a process to forcibly stop and display the changing second special pattern with a pattern combination indicating a miss if the first special pattern stops with a pattern combination indicating a jackpot.

In the first special symbol variation stop process (Fig. 142, S7005), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variation display of the first special symbol (S7501). If it is determined that it is time to end (S7501: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203ca is set on for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S7502). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203ca is set on for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S7502: Yes), the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203cc is set on (S7503), and a special symbol 2 variation stop command indicating that the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203cc has been turned on is set (S7504). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed as a stop symbol (S7505).

When the processing of S7505 is completed, the jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S7506), and the jackpot flag 203ca and the time-saving counter 203k are reset (S7507). Next, the jackpot start flag 203c is set to ON (S7508), the jackpot in progress flag 203d is set to ON (S7509), and the process proceeds to S7510.

On the other hand, if in the processing of S7502, the jackpot flag 203ca is set to off for the first special symbol (S7502: No), the processing of S7503 to S7509 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S7510.

In the process of S7510, a special pattern 1 confirmation command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special pattern is to be confirmed and stopped (stopped display) (S7510). After that, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the first special pattern being displayed by the first special pattern display device 37 (S7511), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7501 that it is not time to end the ongoing variable display of the first special symbol (S7501: No), the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S7512), and this process is terminated. During the period in which the process of S7512 is being executed, the special symbol is displayed variable on the first symbol display device 37.

In this way, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S7005), when the specified variation time of the first special symbol being varied has elapsed (S7501: Yes), a process (S7503 to S7511) is executed to stop the variation display at the symbol that indicates the result of the first lottery game. Also, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (S7502: Yes), a process (S7503, S7504) is executed to forcibly stop the second special symbol being varied.

In the fourth embodiment, when the first special symbol is stopped as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol being displayed as a missing symbol is forcibly stopped as a missing symbol, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the first special symbol is stopped as a jackpot symbol. Then, the display of the second special symbol may be resumed after the jackpot of the first special symbol ends (after the jackpot game ends). This allows for a more natural presentation compared to when the display is forcibly stopped as a missing symbol.

In addition, in this fourth embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S7506 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 142) based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203cf in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 139). However, for example, the jackpot scenario may be set in the processing of S7506 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203cf in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 139) using the opening period of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in this fourth embodiment, when the first special symbol (one side) is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol (the other side) is forcibly stopped and displayed as a miss symbol, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the one symbol (e.g., the first special symbol) is stopped and displayed as a small jackpot symbol, that is, a combination of symbols indicating a small jackpot, the other symbol (e.g., the second special symbol) may be forcibly stopped as a miss symbol, or when the small jackpot symbol of the one symbol (e.g., the first special symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display of the other symbol (e.g., the second special symbol) may be suspended (temporarily stopped). Then, after the jackpot of the one symbol (e.g., the first special symbol) ends (after the jackpot game ends), the display of the other symbol (e.g., the second special symbol) may be resumed.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment and the above examples, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific stop symbol (jackpot symbol, small win symbol) indicating a win, the variation of the other special symbol is stopped or temporarily stopped. However, other configurations may be used as long as the winning games of both symbols are not executed simultaneously. For example, even if one special symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol indicating a win (e.g., a jackpot symbol), the variation of the other special symbol may be continued without being stopped or temporarily stopped, and when a winning game based on one special symbol (e.g., a jackpot game) is being executed, if the other special symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol indicating a win (e.g., a jackpot pattern), the execution of the winning game based on the other special symbol (e.g., a jackpot game) may be put on hold (postponed) until the end of one winning game.

This configuration allows the player to be reliably notified of the lottery results for multiple special symbols, and prevents multiple winning games from occurring simultaneously, resulting in a confusing game. Furthermore, after one winning game has ended, another winning game can be started immediately after, so advantageous benefits (winning games) can be provided to the player in succession, increasing the player's interest in the game.

When using such a configuration, it is preferable to use the effect (win effect) executed during one winning game to notify the player that the other special symbol has won a jackpot (the jackpot symbol has stopped and been displayed). This allows the player to understand the lottery result for the other special symbol while concentrating on the winning game, providing an easy-to-understand game. Furthermore, if the lottery result for the other special symbol executed during one winning game is not a win (a miss), it is preferable not to use the winning effect being executed to notify that it is a miss. This allows the player to be provided with an easy-to-understand game if the lottery result for the special symbol is one that does not grant a new bonus to the player, by giving priority to the effect for the currently granted bonus.

In addition, in this fourth embodiment, multiple special symbols are drawn independently (in parallel), and when one of the special symbols is displayed as a stopped symbol indicating a win (small win, big win) as a result of the drawing, control is executed to forcibly make the variation (drawing) of the other special symbol a miss. However, as another configuration, for example, when the result of the drawing of one special symbol is a win (small win, big win) (when the variation of the special symbol whose drawing result is a win has started), a forced drawing (determination using a special table in which a miss is specified for the entire range of the acquired first winning random number counter value C1) that excludes the drawing result that is a win may be executed in the drawing of the other special symbol that is executed thereafter.

By configuring it in this way, even if the selection of multiple special symbols is performed independently, it is possible to prevent multiple winning games from being performed simultaneously. Also, since it is possible to perform forced loss control for the other special symbol based on the timing of the selection of the special symbol (the start timing of the fluctuation that results in the stopped symbol indicating a win being displayed in a stopped state), rather than the timing of the stopped symbol indicating a win being displayed in a stopped state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a contradiction occurs between the performance content performed during the display of the other special symbol and the selection result of the other special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 143, we will explain the second special symbol change start process (S7007), which is one process of the special symbol change process 4 (FIG. 137, S194). FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol change start process (S7007).

In the second special symbol variation start process (Fig. 143, S7007), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203cc is set to ON (S7601). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203cc is set to ON (S7601: Yes), the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203cc is set to OFF (S7607), and this process is terminated. As described above, the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203cc is a flag that is set to ON when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends (when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is stopped with a stop pattern (jackpot pattern) indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot) and causes the second special symbol to be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to a miss when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends (when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is stopped with a stop pattern (jackpot pattern) indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot). In other words, if the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203cc is ON, it means that a jackpot will start, so the start of the variation of the second special symbol should not be set.

Therefore, if the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is on in the process of S7601, the process is terminated without executing each process of S7602 to S7606 for setting the fluctuation start. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol that was forcibly stopped when the first special symbol was stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol from starting to fluctuate again within the same process. In addition, as described with reference to the special symbol fluctuation process 4 (S194) in FIG. 137, the fourth embodiment is configured to execute the fluctuation process related to the second special symbol after executing the fluctuation process related to the first special symbol, so the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is used. However, for example, if the special symbol fluctuation process 4 (S194) in FIG. 137 is configured to execute the fluctuation process related to the first special symbol after executing the fluctuation process related to the second special symbol, it is sufficient to configure it to use the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag (a flag that changes the target from the second special symbol to the first special symbol) instead of the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc.

Also, as in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be configured to be able to change (draw) independently (in parallel), and when the drawing result for one of the special symbols indicates a win, it is advisable to specify the change process for each special symbol (special symbol change process 4 (see FIG. 137)) so that the change process for the special symbol that is advantageous to the player is executed first. This makes it possible to give priority to the drawing result for the special symbol that is advantageous to the player when, for example, a reservation memory function (reservation memory means) is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the special symbols start changing simultaneously (within the same process) after the end of a jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent the player from being offered a disadvantageous game.

Specifically, for example, in a gaming machine that can independently execute a first special symbol lottery that is more likely to award a player with a special benefit (e.g., a win of 16 rounds) and a second special symbol lottery that is less likely to award a player with a special benefit than the first special symbol lottery, a storage means is provided that can store up to a maximum of multiple rights (e.g., four) to execute the lottery for each special symbol, and when the lottery results for each special symbol are all drawn simultaneously (in the same process) after a big win game has ended, and the lottery results for each special symbol all show a win with the same fluctuation time (e.g., 30 seconds), the process related to the first special symbol is executed with priority, thereby making it possible to award a winning game for the first special symbol (a benefit advantageous to the player) regardless of the lottery result for the second special symbol.

On the other hand, in the process of S7601, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203cc is set to off (i.e., not set to on) (S7601: No), it is determined whether or not a winning (ball entry) into the second ball entrance 640 has been detected (S7602). If a winning (ball entry) into the second ball entrance 640 has been detected (S7602: Yes), next, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the small winning type counter C5 are obtained and stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (S7603), and a second special symbol jackpot determination process is executed to perform a jackpot determination for the second special symbol based on each counter value stored (S7604). Details of this second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 144.

When the processing of S7604 is completed, a second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process is then executed (S7605) to select a fluctuation pattern based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained in the processing of S7603. Details of this second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S7605) will be described later with reference to FIG. 146. After the processing of S7605 is completed, the above-mentioned game state update process (see FIG. 141) is executed (S7606), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7602 that a winning ball has not been detected at the second ball entrance 1640 (S7602: No), the processing ends.

As explained above, in this fourth embodiment, the first special pattern and the second special pattern are configured to be able to be changed (drawn) independently (in parallel), and are configured to execute a process to update the game state (a process to subtract the number of time-saving times) at the time the special pattern is changed (drawn). In other words, when the time-saving state is set and a process is executed to change (draw) the first special pattern and the second special pattern simultaneously (within the same process), the number of time-saving times will be subtracted by two.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, a configuration is used in which multiple special symbols are changed (drawn) independently (in parallel), but the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute an effect in which one of the special symbols is set as the main special symbol depending on the game state, and it appears as if a game is being played using only the main special symbol (see FIG. 126), providing an effect that is easy for the player to understand. However, even when the third symbol display device 81 executes a change display that emphasizes only the main special symbol in this way, the number of time-saving times is internally subtracted in accordance with the change (drawn) of multiple special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), so that a contradiction occurs between the display mode of the number of time-saving times and the update status of the game state (internal number of time-saving times). Alternatively, there is a problem in that the update content of the display mode of the number of time-saving times is inconsistent with the performance content of the change display that emphasizes only the main special symbol.

To address this issue, the details will be described later, but in this fourth embodiment, display control is performed so that the number of time-saving times displayed (remaining number of time-saving times) is updated according to the number of times the main special pattern changes (draws), and if a difference occurs between the number of time-saving times displayed and the actual number of time-saving times, a determination is made as to whether the change pattern of the main special pattern meets a predetermined condition (for example, the change time is 30 seconds or more), and if it is determined that the predetermined condition is met, a process is executed to correct the number of time-saving times displayed so as to make up for the difference between the number of time-saving times displayed and the actual number of time-saving times.

By configuring it in this way, the player can understand the appropriate time-saving situation (remaining number of time-saving times) simply by playing while paying attention to the effects that are executed in response to the main special pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81, making the game easy to understand.

Next, referring to FIG. 144, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 143, S7007), will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (Fig. 144, S7604), the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see Fig. 139) described above is executed, so the following explanation will focus on the differences from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see Fig. 139).

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604) is executed, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (second special symbol reserved ball execution area) is obtained (S7701). Then, the process of S7702 is executed to obtain the lottery result of whether or not there is a jackpot based on each obtained counter value and the first win random number 4 table 202ca. In each of these processes, the only difference is that the counter value used for the lottery (determination) is obtained from the special symbol reserved ball execution area (second special symbol reserved ball execution area), and otherwise the same control is executed as in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 137).

When the processing of S7702 is completed, it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a jackpot (S7703), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (S7703: Yes), the processing of S7704 to S7707 is executed to set the lottery result of the second special symbol to a jackpot, and this processing ends. In each of these processing of S7704 to S7707, the same processing as each of S7204 to S7207 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 137) is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7703 that the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a big win (S7703: No), a special symbol 2 miss change process is executed (S7708) to set a stop symbol corresponding to a small win or miss of the second special symbol, and this process is terminated. Next, the details of this special symbol 2 miss change process will be explained with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 2 miss change process (S7708).

In the special symbol 2 miss variation process (S7708), first, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S7702 in FIG. 144 is a small win for the second special symbol (S7801). If the lottery result is a small win (S7801: Yes), the small win flag 203cb is set to ON (S7802), and the lottery result for the second special symbol is set to a small win (S7803). Then, the small win symbol indicating the small win type corresponding to the obtained value of the small win type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S7804), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is determined to be a loss in the process of S7801 (S7801: No), the losing pattern of the second special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (S7805), and then this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 146, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 145, S7007), will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 146, S7605), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the special symbol reserved ball execution area (second special symbol execution area) (S7901). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 144, S7604), it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, whether a jackpot for the second special symbol is set (S7902). Here, the determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203ca for the second special symbol is on. This jackpot flag 203ca is set to on in the process of S7704 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 144) described above.

If it is determined in the process of S7902 that a jackpot for the second special symbol has been set (S7902: Yes), the variable pattern 4 table 202cd (see Figures 131 to 133) corresponding to the current game state is read (S7903). Then, based on the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of S7701 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see Figure 144), the jackpot type is determined from the first jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb (see Figure 131(a)) (S7904).

When the processing of S7904 is completed, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S7905), and then a special chart 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern (S7906). Then, the process proceeds to S7908.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7902 that the jackpot for the second special symbol is not set (S7902: No), the process executes the special symbol 2 miss variation pattern selection process (S7907) and proceeds to the process of S7908.

In the process of S7908, a special symbol 2 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S7908). Next, the first symbol display device 37 is set to start changing the second special symbol (S7909), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the special chart 2 outlier variation pattern selection process (S7907) will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special chart 2 outlier variation pattern selection process (S7907).

In the special pattern 2 miss variation pattern selection process (Fig. 147, S7907), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special pattern is a small win (S8001). Here, it is determined whether the small win flag 203cb is set to on (S8001). If it is determined that the small win flag 203cb is on (S8001: Yes), the value of the small win type counter C5 is obtained from the second special pattern execution area (S8002). Then, based on the obtained value of the small win type counter C5 and the small win type selection 4 table 202ce (see Fig. 134), a small win type is selected (S8003).

Next, the variation pattern 4 table 202cd (see Figures 131 to 133) corresponding to the current game state is read (S8004), and the small win variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the variation pattern selection table that has been read (S8005). After that, the special chart 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small win variation pattern is set (S8006), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S8001, if it is determined that the lottery result for the second special symbol is not a small win (i.e., a miss) (S8001: No), the variation pattern 4 table 202cd (see Figures 131 to 133) corresponding to the current game state is read (S8007), and a miss variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S8008). After that, the special symbol 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected miss variation pattern (S8009), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 148, the second special symbol change stop process (S7008), which is one process of the special symbol change process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol change stop process (S7008).

In the second special symbol change stop process (S7008), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the change based on the second special symbol that is being executed (S8101). In the process of S8101, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the change based on the second special symbol that is being executed (S8101: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203ca is set on for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S8103). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203ca is set on for the second special symbol (special symbol 1), a special symbol 1 change stop command is set (S8105), indicating that the change of special symbol 1 is to be stopped, and the process proceeds to S8106.

Next, the processing from S8106 onwards differs from the processing from S7505 onwards of the first special symbol change stop processing (Fig. 140, S7005) described above in the following respects. The differences are that in the processing of S8106 and S8102, which correspond to the processing of S7505 and S7512, the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, and in the processing of S8112, which corresponds to the processing of S7511, the special symbol 1 confirmation command is changed to the special symbol 2 confirmation command. Since the other points are the same, detailed explanations will be omitted.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8101 that the timing for the end of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed has not arrived (S8101: No), the display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S8102), and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of S8103, if the jackpot flag 203ca is set to off for the second special symbol (S8103: No), a special symbol 2 miss stop process is executed (S8104), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 149, the special symbol 2 miss stop processing (S8104), which is one process of the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 148, S7008), will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 2 miss stop processing (S8104).

In the special pattern 2 miss stop processing (Fig. 149, S8104), first, it is determined whether the small win flag 203cb is set to on (S8201). If it is determined that the small win flag 203cb is set to on (S8201: Yes), a special pattern 1 change stop command indicating the stop of the change of special pattern 1 is set (S8202). Next, the first special pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is displayed as a stop pattern that is a miss (S8203).

When the processing of S8203 is completed, a small win scenario is set based on the selected small win type (S8204). After that, the small win flag 203cb is set to OFF (S8205), and the small win middle flag 203g is set to ON (S8207).

When the processing of S8207 is completed, a special symbol 2 confirmation command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to stop confirming the second special symbol (S8208). After that, the second special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is stopped changing to a small win symbol (S8209), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S8201, if it is determined that the small win flag 203cb is off (i.e., the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss) (S8201: No), a special symbol 2 confirmation command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to stop the confirmation of the second special symbol (S8210). After that, the second special symbol displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 37 is stopped changing at the miss symbol (S8211), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 150, the contents of the jackpot control process 4 (S1594) in this fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 4 (S1594). This jackpot control process 4 (S1594) differs from the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above (see S1504 in FIG. 52) in that the contents of the process executed at the end timing of the ending performance, that is, the end timing of the jackpot game (the process for setting the game state after the jackpot game ends) are different. The same process contents are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. Note that, since there are differences in the configuration of the game board 13 and the main control contents between the first embodiment and this fourth embodiment described above, the detailed operation contents may differ during the jackpot, but even in such cases, the process contents are the same and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, when jackpot control process 4 (S1594) is executed, the same processes of S1601 to S1612 as those of the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above (see S1504 in FIG. 52) are executed. That is, during the period from when the jackpot starts to when it ends, the same processes as those of the jackpot control process (see S1504 in FIG. 52) are executed. Then, in the process of S1612, if it is determined that the current timing is the end of the ending presentation (S1612: Yes), it is next determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot C (S1691).

In this S1691 process, the current jackpot type is determined based on the information stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h and the information stored in the memory area that temporarily stores the currently active jackpot type.

In the process of S1691, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not jackpot C (it is any of jackpots A, B, or D) (S1691: No), that is, if it is determined that the time-saving state will be set after the current jackpot ends (after the jackpot game ends), it is then determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot D (S1692). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the time-saving state that is different in degree of advantage to the player is set when the jackpot type is jackpot A or B and when it is jackpot D, so the process of S1692 is a process for determining whether to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player (first time-saving state) or a time-saving state that is less advantageous than the first time-saving state (second time-saving state).

If it is determined in the process of S1692 that the current jackpot type is not jackpot D (S1692: No), information indicating time-saving A state is stored in the time-saving state storage area 223cb (S1693), and the process proceeds to S1694. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1692 that the current jackpot type is jackpot D (S1692: Yes), information indicating time-saving B state is stored in the time-saving state storage area 223cb (S1695), and the process proceeds to S1694.

When the time-saving A state is set, that is, when the current jackpot type is jackpot A or B, the time-saving A fluctuation pattern table 202cd2 (see FIG. 133(a)) is referenced when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) during the time-saving state, and a time-saving game is executed in which the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol. When the time-saving B state is set, that is, when the current jackpot type is jackpot D, the time-saving B fluctuation pattern table 202cd3 (see FIG. 134(b)) is referenced when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) during the time-saving state, and a time-saving game is executed in which the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol is more likely to be executed than the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol.

In other words, in this fourth embodiment, a fluctuation pattern table to be referenced when selecting a fluctuation pattern during the time-saving state is provided according to the type of jackpot for which the time-saving state is set, and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the first special symbol executed during the time-saving state and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the second special symbol are made different according to the type of jackpot for which the time-saving state is set, making it possible to set a time-saving state (time-saving A) in which the second special symbol is the main special symbol, and a time-saving state (time-saving B) in which the first special symbol is the main special symbol. And, it is configured so that a lottery for the second special symbol makes it easier to award a more advantageous bonus to the player than a lottery for the first special symbol.

By configuring in this way, in the fourth embodiment, the time-saving state set as the game state can be set to a time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player (time-saving B) and a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player (time-saving A). Therefore, multiple game states with different degrees of advantage can be set for the player, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, as described above, game states with different degrees of advantage can be set simply by varying the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of each special symbol, so there is no need to use a special configuration to vary the degrees of advantage, and the processing load on the main control unit 110 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 150, the explanation will continue. After completing the processing of S1693 or S1695, the value of the time-saving counter 203k is set to 100 (S1694), and a status command is set to notify the sound and lamp control device 113 of the set game status (S1696). After that, the processing of S1617 and S1618, which are the same as the jackpot control processing described above (see S1504 in FIG. 52), is executed, and this processing ends.

In addition, in this fourth embodiment, multiple time-saving states (time-saving A, time-saving B) can be set, and the value of the time-saving counter 203k is set to 100 regardless of which time-saving state is set. In other words, as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state in this fourth embodiment, only the fluctuation count end condition that is established when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 100 is set, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to set a time-saving state in which multiple time-saving end conditions are set, as in each of the above-mentioned embodiments.

Furthermore, in this fourth embodiment, the same time-saving end condition (value of time-saving counter 203k is set to 100) is set regardless of the type of time-saving state that has been set (time-saving A, time-saving B), but different time-saving end conditions may be set depending on the type of time-saving state that has been set, and a time-saving end condition that is less likely to be established may be set when a time-saving state in which time-saving play is advantageous to the player is set, compared to when a time-saving state in which time-saving play is disadvantageous to the advantageous player is set.

Next, the contents of small win control process 4 in this fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of small win control process 4 (S1595). This small win control process 4 (see S1595 in FIG. 151) differs from the small win control process of the first embodiment described above (see S1505 in FIG. 53) in that a portion of the process executed when the V winning port is opened has been deleted, but otherwise the same process is executed. The same process contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When small win control process 4 (S1595 in FIG. 151) is executed, first, the same processes of S1701 to S1706 as those of the small win control process described above (see S1505 in FIG. 53) are executed, and when S1706 is completed, the processes of S1707 and S1708 are skipped and the processes of S1709 and S1710 are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1705, if it is determined that the current timing is not the timing for opening the V winning hole (S1705: No), the same processes of S1711 to S1721 as those of the small win control process described above (S1505 in FIG. 53) are executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, this fourth embodiment differs from each of the above-mentioned embodiments in that it has a configuration (so-called simultaneous change configuration) in which the drawing (variation) of the first special pattern and the drawing (variation) of the second special pattern can be executed independently (in parallel), and a configuration (so-called one-type two-type mixed configuration) in which a one-type win in which a big win is won by drawing a special pattern, and a two-type win in which a small win is won by drawing a special pattern, and a big win is acquired if the ball passes through a specific area during the small win game.

In a game state in which a time-saving state is set, a time-saving state (time-saving B) in which the first special symbol mainly changes, and a time-saving state (time-saving A) in which the second special symbol mainly changes, can be set by varying the change pattern (change time) of each special symbol set in simultaneous change.

Furthermore, the second special symbol is configured to be easier to win a small prize with than the first special symbol, and the time-saving state in which time-saving A is set as described above is configured to be a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the time-saving state in which time-saving B is set. Also, the time-saving state in which time-saving B is set is configured to have a greater number of fluctuations (lottery draws) of the first special symbol than the normal state.

In other words, by applying the above-mentioned simultaneous variation configuration to a pachinko machine 10 having the above-mentioned type 1/type 2 mixed configuration, and configuring the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol during the time-saving state to differ depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible to play a time-saving game in which the second special symbol is varied (drawn) many times, and a time-saving game in which the first special symbol is varied (drawn) many times.

In addition, by configuring the second special symbol to be easier to win the small prize than the first special symbol (including a configuration in which a small prize lottery is not held for the first special symbol), it is possible to set the time-saving play during the time-saving state to either an advantageous time-saving state (time-saving play in which many variations (lotteries) of the second special symbol are executed) that is advantageous to the player by aiming for both one type and two types of hits, or an unfavorable time-saving state (time-saving play in which many variations (lotteries) of the first special symbol are executed) that aims only for one type of hit. Even when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, it is possible to make it easier to execute the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol than in the normal state.

Therefore, in contrast to conventional gaming machines with a type 1/type 2 mixed configuration in which the only gaming state that can be set as an advantageous gaming state for the player is a gaming state (time-saving state) in which it is easier to win two types of prizes than in the normal state, it is now possible to set multiple gaming states with different advantageous levels, providing the player with a variety of games and offering more interesting games.

As described above, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be able to be executed independently and in parallel, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time. This allows a lottery game with more special symbols to be executed within a specified time, and increases the probability that the player will be awarded a jackpot within the specified time. This allows the player to play efficiently.

In this embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed as a stopped big win or small win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped. However, the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or displayed while the measurement of the change time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display or notification manner that lets the player know that it is temporarily stopped, so the player can know that the lottery game that was in the middle of changing display has not disappeared, and can play the big win game with peace of mind.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 152 and Fig. 153. The fourth embodiment is significantly different from each of the above-mentioned embodiments in that the lottery (variation) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be executed in an overlapping manner (so-called simultaneous variation configuration).

Furthermore, in this fourth embodiment, the time-saving state can be set to a time-saving state (time-saving B) in which the first special pattern is mainly changed (drawn), and a time-saving state (time-saving A) in which the second special pattern is mainly changed (drawn), and the number of time-saving times (displayed number of time-saving times) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to differ depending on the time-saving state to be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the number of time-saving times according to the number of change effects (number of times the main special pattern is changed) executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Specifically, this fourth embodiment is configured so that the second special pattern is drawn to win a small win (see FIG. 129(b)), and when the second special pattern is drawn to win a small win (when the small win pattern indicating a small win is displayed), the first special pattern is forced to stop at a loss pattern indicating a loss.

And because the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to produce a small win with a rate of 994/1000 (see Figure 129 (b)), in a gaming state where time-saving A is set, even if the number of time-saving times is set to 100, the main special symbol (second special symbol) can only be changed (lottery) about 50 times.

Therefore, when time-saving A is set, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display 50 times as the number of time-saving times to be displayed, and the number of time-saving times to be displayed is updated (deducted) each time a variation (lottery) of the main special pattern (second special pattern) is executed. In this way, the number of time-saving times is actually set to 100 times, and the player is made to believe that the number of time-saving times is set to 50 times without realizing that the number of time-saving times is also being deducted in response to the variation of the first special pattern that is forcibly stopped, providing an easy-to-understand gameplay.

When the above-mentioned time-saving count display is performed, for example, if the second special symbol is drawn and a miss is won, or if the reserved memory of the first special symbol is lost and a new change of the first special symbol has not started, and the first special symbol has not changed at the time when the small win of the second special symbol is won (when the small win symbol is stopped and displayed), that is, if a situation occurs in which the change of the first special symbol cannot be stopped at the timing when the change of the second special symbol should be stopped, the number of changes of the second special symbol (main special symbol) that can be executed during the time-saving state will be greater than the number of time-saving times for display, and if the change of the first special symbol stops during the change of the second special symbol or when the change of the second special symbol is not being performed and a new change of the first special symbol starts, the change of the first special symbol is executed regardless of the change of the second special symbol, so that the number of changes of the second special symbol (main special symbol) that can be executed during the time-saving state will be less than the number of time-saving times for display.

In contrast to this, in the fourth embodiment, if a predetermined error occurs between the displayed number of time-saving times and the actual number of time-saving times, a time-saving number correction effect is executed to correct the error (see FIG. 127). This prevents the time-saving state from ending with an error between the number of times the main special pattern changes during the currently set time-saving state (the remaining number of times executed during the time-saving state) and the displayed number of time-saving times, causing a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, since the number of time-saving times displayed is updated according to the fluctuation of the main special pattern executed during the time-saving state, the player can play in the time-saving state with peace of mind by simply paying attention to the fluctuation display and the number of time-saving times displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As a correction effect for the number of time-saving times mentioned above, the subtraction correction effect that is executed when the number of time-saving times for display is greater than the actual number of time-saving times determines whether the change pattern of the selected main special symbol is longer than a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds), and if the change pattern is longer than the predetermined time, a pseudo-change effect (a change effect that repeats pseudo-change stops and pseudo-changes) is executed to make one special symbol change appear as multiple special symbol changes, and an effect is executed to update (subtract) the number of time-saving times for display at the point when the change is pseudo-stopped (temporarily stopped) or when the change is resumed from the temporarily stopped state. This allows the number of time-saving times for display to be subtracted without any sense of incongruity during one special symbol change.

On the other hand, the additive correction effect that is executed when the number of time-saving times for display becomes less than the actual number of time-saving times can be configured to determine whether the fluctuation pattern of the selected main special symbol is longer than a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds), and if the fluctuation pattern is longer than the predetermined time, execute an additive display on the display screen to indicate that the number of time-saving times for display will be added, and add the number of time-saving times for display. This makes it possible for the player to believe that the number of time-saving times has been added along the way.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the same number of time-saving times is set, the number of time-saving times displayed is set differently depending on the time-saving state to be set, allowing the player to play in the time-saving state without feeling uncomfortable. Also, because the number of time-saving times displayed in advance is set differently depending on the time-saving state to be set, it is possible to reduce the frequency of executing effects that correct the displayed number of time-saving times during the time-saving state, providing the player with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

The manner of the correction effect that corrects the number of times the time is reduced during the time-saving state is not limited to the above, and for example, as an effect corresponding to the display of the main special pattern change, an item indicating that the number of times the time is reduced for display is displayed on the display screen may be displayed to reduce the number of times the time is reduced for display by multiple times in one change of the main special pattern, or a number less than 50 may be displayed in advance as the number of times the time is reduced for display, drastically reducing the frequency of the subtraction correction effect being executed.

In addition, the presentation mode of the additive correction presentation is not limited to the above, and for example, it may be configured to display "? times" after the displayed number of time-saving times becomes "1 time", so that the player does not know how long the time-saving state will continue, or, if it is known in advance that consecutive losing wins have been won in the main special pattern change lottery, a pseudo-change may be performed to make multiple main special pattern changes appear as one main special pattern change, so that the displayed number of time-saving times is only deducted once even though the main special pattern change has actually been performed twice.

In addition, even if there is no error between the displayed number of time-saving times and the actual number of time-saving times, it is possible to intentionally configure the game to execute subtractive correction effects and additive correction effects. This allows various effects to be executed during the time-saving state, providing the player with a game that they will never tire of.

The contents of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 of this fourth embodiment that differ from the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above will be explained with reference to Figs. 152 and 153. First, the contents of the performance setting process 4 (S2891) will be explained with reference to Fig. 152. Fig. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the performance setting process 4 (S2891).

This effect setting process 4 (S2891) differs from the effect setting process of the first embodiment described above (see S2804 in FIG. 63) in that some processing is replaced with effect setting process 2 of the second embodiment described above (see S2851 in FIG. 104), that different display commands are set depending on the type of time-saving state to be set (time-saving A, time-saving B), and that a process is added to correct the number of time-saving times to be displayed depending on the actual number of time-saving times (remaining number of time-saving times).

When effect setting process 4 (see S2891 in FIG. 152) is executed, first, the same processes of S2901 and S2902 as those of the effect setting process described above (see S2804 in FIG. 63) are executed, and then the same process of S3301 as those of effect setting process 2 described above (see S2851 in FIG. 104) is executed. In the process of S3301, if it is determined that the time-saving start flag 223ad is not set to on (is set to off) (S3301: No), that is, if the first special pattern variation has ended in a state where the time-saving state is set, the same processes of S3306 to S3308 as those of effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104) are executed, and then the time-saving count correction process for display is executed (S3376), and this process ends.

In this display time-saving count correction process (S3376), the display time-saving count displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the time-saving state is distinguished from the actual time-saving count, and if a predetermined error occurs in the discrimination result, a process is executed to correct the value of the display time-saving count. The details of this display time-saving count correction process (S3376) will be described later with reference to FIG. 153.

On the other hand, in the process of S3301, if it is determined that the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to on (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the type of the currently set time-saving state is time-saving A (S3371), and if it is determined that it is not time-saving A (S3371: No), a display time-saving B start command is set (S3372), and the process proceeds to S3374. The display time-saving B start command set here is output to the display control device 114 by the command output process in the same way as the other display commands described above, and is referenced when displaying the display screen shown in FIG. 126(b).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3371 that it is time-saving A (S3371: Yes), a display time-saving A start command is set (S3373), and the process proceeds to S3374. When the display time-saving A start command is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 126(a) is displayed.

In the process of S3374, the corresponding time-saving state (time-saving type) is stored in the time-saving state storage area 223cb (S3374), the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to off (S3375), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the display time-saving count correction process (S3376) will be explained with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing the contents of the display time-saving count correction process (S3376). In this display time-saving count correction process (S3376), a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the above-mentioned lower correction performance process with reference to FIG. 127.

When the display time-saving count correction process (S3376) is executed, first, the value of the display time-saving count counter Ca, i.e., the remaining time-saving count displayed in the remaining time-saving count display area Dm10 on the display screen, is read (S3701). This display time-saving count counter Ca is updated every time the second special pattern is changed when time-saving A is set, i.e., when a time-saving state in which the second special pattern is mainly changed (drawn), is set, and is updated every time the first special pattern is changed when time-saving B is set, i.e., when a time-saving state in which the first special pattern is mainly changed (drawn), is set.

Next, the actual remaining number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving information update area 223g is read (S3702), the difference between the value read in the processing of S3701 and the value read in the processing of S3702 is calculated (S3703), and it is determined whether there is a difference between the values compared in the processing of S3703 (S3704). If it is determined that there is a difference (S3704: Yes), the fluctuation time set in the current fluctuation pattern is read (S3705), and it is determined whether the read fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (30 seconds) (S3706).

If it is determined in the process of S3706 that the time is 30 seconds or more (S3706: Yes), then the number of pseudo stops (the number of times the special symbol (third symbol) is temporarily stopped in the pseudo stop performance) corresponding to the difference value calculated in the process of S3703 is set (S3707), and a correction variation pattern corresponding to the set number of pseudo variations (number of pseudo stops) is determined (S3708). Then, the value of the display time-saving number counter Ca is corrected to the value of the time-saving information update area, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3704 that there is no difference (S3704: No), or if it is determined in the process of S3706 that the variation time is not 30 seconds or more (S3706: No), this process ends as it is.

<First Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, a configuration was used in which the first ball entrance 64 was arranged in the left side area and the second ball entrance 640 was arranged in the right side area so that the lottery for the first special symbol was executed by executing a left-handed hit game and the lottery for the second special symbol was executed by executing a right-handed hit game. Then, when a small win was won by the lottery for the second special symbol, multiple small win types (small wins A to C) were settable, and a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state was established based on the number of times the small win was won in the state in which the time-saving state was set, in detail, when the set number of times of the small win type set to the difference in the number of times the small win was won reached a predetermined number.

In contrast to this, this modified example is significantly different in that it is configured so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be drawn by playing from the right. In this way, by configuring right-hand play executed during the time-saving state to be capable of drawing the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to set a special symbol 1 end condition based on the drawing of the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 end condition based on the drawing of the second special symbol as the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state.

This makes it difficult for players to grasp when the time-saving mode will end, which makes it easier for them to predict what will happen, making the game monotonous and preventing players from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Now, with reference to FIG. 154, we will explain the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. Note that the same elements as those in the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 154, the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in the configuration of the right-side area. First, a distribution member 700 is provided upstream of the right-side area, and balls shot by right-handed play are alternately distributed to a left-side flow path 701 formed on the left side of the distribution member and a right-side flow path 702.

A movable lid 1500 is provided upstream of the left flow path, forming its downstream surface, and is configured to perform a certain opening and closing operation by a movable control means (not shown) when power is applied to the pachinko machine 10, and the opening and closing operation is performed so that the first right ball entrance 64b, located below the movable lid 1500, is positioned between an open state where a ball can enter, and a closed state where it is difficult (impossible) for the ball to enter.

Specifically, a movable lid opening/closing process is provided as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 51), and the movable lid opening/closing process executes an opening/closing operation that repeats an opening period of 0.1 seconds and a closing period of 2 to 3 seconds according to a predetermined scenario. The right side first ball entry opening 64b, which is controlled to open and close in this way, is configured to make it more difficult for balls to enter than the first ball entry opening 64.

The ball then flows down the left flow path 701 and over the movable lid 1500, flows down the bent part of the left flow path 701, passes through the through gate 67 provided at the downstream end of the left flow path 701, and flows out into the lower area of the right area. Furthermore, the left flow path 701 is configured so that the electric device 640a can enter above the through gate 67, and when the electric device 640a opens, the ball flowing down the left flow path 701 is guided to the second ball inlet 640.

Meanwhile, the balls sorted by the sorting device 700 to the right flow path 702 flow into the inlet 704a of the warp path 704b provided at the rear of the left flow path 701 (the rear side as viewed from the perspective of FIG. 154), and are discharged into the lower region of the right region. Here, the ball outlet positions of the left flow path 701 and the right flow path 702 will be explained with reference to FIG. 154.

Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. This constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the power being applied to the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, the operation is controlled based on a moving scenario stored in ROM 203 in a moving member drive process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 53). This moving scenario repeatedly executes an operation of opening the constantly movable member 1500 for 0.1 seconds and then closing it for 0.8 seconds.

In other words, in the game board 13 of this modified example 1, a ball shot in a right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at 1.2 second intervals and flows downstream while rolling on the rolling surface on which the constantly movable member 1500 is arranged. If the timing at which the ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls onto the constantly movable member) coincides with the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 becomes open, the ball passes through the open constantly movable member 1500 and enters the left first ball entrance 64b.

The timing of the ball rolling on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falling onto the constantly movable member) is at 1.2 second intervals, and the timing of the constantly movable valve 1500 opening is 0.1 seconds out of 0.9 seconds, so the timing when the two coincide is approximately once every 15.6 seconds. In other words, when right-hand play is performed continuously, approximately four balls will enter the left first ball entrance 64b per minute.

In other words, in a game state where right-hand play is continuously performed, such as during a jackpot game or during a time-saving game, balls will periodically enter the left first ball entrance 64b, so when the jackpot game ends and the game transitions to a time-saving state, it is possible to prevent a state where there is no reserved special chart 1. Also, since the period during which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened once is set to a period (0.1 seconds) during which it is difficult for the player to aim, in a normal game state, right-hand play can be more disadvantageous to the player than left-hand play that aims at the left first ball entrance 64a.

To explain more specifically, when the game is in the normal state and left-handed play is performed, of the 250 balls shot, approximately 15 are designed to enter the left first ball entrance 64a, and five prize balls are paid out when a ball enters. Also, approximately five balls are designed to enter the general ball entrance 63, and five prize balls are paid out when a ball enters. Therefore, when 250 balls are shot in left-handed play, taking into account the possibility of re-shooting the paid-out prize balls, it is possible to have approximately 20 balls enter the left first ball entrance 64a.

On the other hand, when the game is in a normal state and right-handed play is performed, it is designed so that of the 250 balls shot, approximately 9 will enter the right first ball entrance 64b, and two prize balls will be paid out if a ball enters. Also, the right-side area does not have a general ball entrance 63. Therefore, when 250 balls are shot in a right-handed game, even if the paid-out prize balls are taken into account and shot again, only approximately 10 balls can enter the right first ball entrance 64b. Therefore, when the game is in a normal state, it is possible to inhibit players from playing right-handed games.

In this embodiment, the general winning port 63 is not provided in the game area (right side area) through which the balls shot by right-handed play pass, but the general winning port 63 may be provided based on a design concept that does not give the player an advantage in right-handed play over left-handed play when the game is in the normal state. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls paid out as prize balls in right-handed play during time-saving or jackpot states.

Next, we will explain the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640, which are located in the right area of the game board 13 in this modified example 1, focusing on the differences between them and the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above.

In this modified example 1, the through gate 67 is disposed downstream of the first flow path 701 having the bent portion 701a, and the second ball entrance 640 is disposed downstream of the second flow path 702 (the lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). By configuring in this manner, the balls flowing into the second flow path 702 at 1.2 second intervals can be made to flow toward the second ball entrance 640 without decreasing the flow rate. Therefore, since the flow interval of the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, it is possible to prevent the balls from being lined up in the second flow path 702 and multiple balls from entering the second ball entrance 640 at the same time. In addition, if the player does not notice that the electric role 640a has been opened and the third pattern display device 81 notifies the player that the electric role 640a has been opened (see FIG. 23(b)), the ball can be made to enter the second ball entrance 640 as soon as possible.

In addition, the through gate 67, which triggers the drawing of the normal pattern, and the electric device 640a, which is controlled by the winning of the normal pattern, are arranged in different flow paths (first flow path 701, second flow path 702) that are distributed by the distribution member 700. Therefore, if the distribution member 700 is destroyed so that the balls flow only in one of the flow paths (if the distribution function is disabled), it is difficult to make the ball enter the second ball entrance 640. In other words, if the through gate 67 and the electric device 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths that are distributed by the distribution member 700, it is possible to create a state in which the balls can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 by destroying the distribution member 700 and creating a state in which the balls flow only in one of the flow paths, but by using the configuration of this modified example, it is possible to suppress the creation of a state in which it is easy to make the balls enter the second ball entrance 640 illegally.

By configuring it in this way, when playing right-handed games with the time-saving state set, it is possible to execute a drawing for the first special symbol and a drawing for the second special symbol. Even if a ball is shot aiming at the second ball entrance 640 to execute a drawing for the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player, the first right ball entrance 64b for executing a drawing for the first special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player is provided in the left flow path 701, which is the flow path of the ball that can enter the second ball entrance 640, so it is possible to prevent only the drawing for the second special symbol from being executed.

In this modified example, an entrance port (left first entrance port 64b) that triggers the drawing of the first special symbol and an entrance port (second entrance port 640) that triggers the drawing of the second special symbol are provided in the right area of the game board 13, and the ball shot by right-handed play can enter either entrance port. However, as another configuration, for example, a distribution device that alternately distributes balls to the first guideway that leads to the left first entrance port 64b and the second guideway that leads to the second entrance port 640 may be provided in the right area of the game board 13.

By configuring it in this way, the selection conditions for the first special symbol and the selection conditions for the second special symbol can be alternately met by executing right-hand play, which makes it possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous gaming state (i.e., only the selections for the second special symbol are executed disproportionately during the time-saving state) and the player from being provided with an excessively disadvantageous gaming state (i.e., only the selections for the first special symbol are executed disproportionately during the time-saving state).

<Regarding the first modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, the first modified example in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 155 and 156. In the above-mentioned second embodiment, the time-saving end condition (special pattern 1 end condition) that can be established based on the drawing of the first special pattern and the time-saving end condition (special pattern 2 end condition) that can be established based on the drawing of the second special pattern are made different, and the expectation of acquiring a two-kind win based on the drawing of the first special pattern and the expectation of acquiring a two-kind win based on the drawing of the second special pattern are configured to be different.

Specifically, the system was designed so that the time-saving state is more likely to end (the condition for ending the time-saving state is more likely to be met) when the first special symbol is drawn than when the second special symbol is drawn, and so that a double win is more likely to be obtained. As shown in FIG. 82, when the time-saving state is set, a presentation screen is displayed that allows the player to select either left-hand play (a game in which the first special symbol is drawn) or right-hand play (a game in which the second special symbol is drawn), allowing the player to play the game of their choice.

In contrast to this, in this first modified example, a presentation is executed to allow one game (right-hand play) to be played when the time-saving state is set, and if it is determined that the state is immediately before the time-saving end condition is met in that one game (a state in which the pre-time-saving end condition is met), a presentation is executed to allow the other game (left-hand play) to be played. By configuring it in this way, the game can be played in accordance with the presentation that is executed (changing the playing method), allowing the player to enjoy playing in the time-saving state to the fullest.

Next, the display screen when the time-saving state of this modified example is set will be described with reference to Figs. 155 and 156. Fig. 155(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an ending screen of a jackpot (jackpot A, B, D in the second embodiment described above) in which the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, Fig. 155(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the pre-time-saving end condition for right-hand play is satisfied during the period in which the time-saving state is set, and Fig. 156(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen after the pre-time-saving end condition for right-hand play is satisfied during the period in which the time-saving state is set. In addition, the same symbols are used for elements that display the same presentation mode as in the second embodiment described above, and detailed explanations thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), in the ending screen of a big win game, in addition to displaying "Hit Right" in the guidance display area Dm2, a display mode indicating "Hit Right" is also displayed in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. Here, in this modified example, unlike the second embodiment described above, a presentation display for encouraging the player to play is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2, and a display mode corresponding to an instruction command for notifying the player of the game direction according to the game status is displayed in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20.

In other words, during the jackpot game and during the time-saving state, the game direction indication display mode Dm20 is configured to always display a display mode indicating "right hit." Furthermore, on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment is displayed saying "After the jackpot game ends, hit right to enter the Doki Doki Rush." to encourage right-hitting play after the jackpot game ends.

Then, when right-hand play is performed during the time-saving state, and the time-saving end condition that can be established based on the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is about to be established (when the special symbol 2 pre-time-saving end condition is established), as shown in FIG. 155(b), the comment "Doki Doki Rush ended, entering the pull-back zone" is displayed, indicating that the right-hand play during the time-saving state has ended, and the words "Left-hand play" are displayed in the guidance display area Dm2.

As a result, the player ends right-hand play and begins left-hand play. This makes the player believe that the time-saving state has ended and the normal state has been set. In reality, the time-saving state has not ended, so "right-hand play" continues to be displayed in the play direction instruction display mode Dm20. The first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds displays reserved symbol displays Dsb to Dse for the first special symbol that can be acquired by left-hand play.

When the player starts playing with a left hand, the effects in the pullback zone are executed as shown in FIG. 156(a). Note that the effects in this pullback zone are the same as those in the second embodiment described above when playing with a left hand during the time-saving state, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

As explained above, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 156(b), when the time-saving state is set, the state of fulfillment (progress) of multiple time-saving end conditions is determined, and an effect is executed in which right-hand play or left-hand play is performed. This has the effect of allowing the player to play a variety of games during the time-saving state.

Furthermore, in this modified example, the game direction is displayed in the guide display area Dm2 so that right-hand play is performed in the first half of the time-saving state, and left-hand play is performed in the second half. This allows right-hand play to be continued from a jackpot game, and when the time-saving state ends and the normal state is set, left-hand play can be continued. This prevents the operation of changing the game direction from becoming complicated.

Furthermore, when the time-saving state is about to end with right-hand play, that is, when it is determined that the time-saving end condition, which is established based on the information updated by the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special pattern, is about to be established, a presentation is executed to guide the player to left-hand play, so that the player can be guided to a play in which the time-saving end condition for terminating the time-saving state is unlikely to be established depending on the current situation. Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to a play method that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the second embodiment to which this modified example is applied, as shown in FIG. 2, the ratio of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 by left-handed play is configured to be the same whether the game state is set to the normal state or the time-saving state. Therefore, during the "pull-back zone" in which left-handed play is performed in the latter half of the time-saving state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the time-saving state or the normal state is set.

In the second embodiment to which this modified example is applied, as described above, the time-saving state is configured to make it easier to win two types of wins based on the drawing of the first special symbol than in the normal state. Therefore, during the "pull-back zone" in which the time-saving state is set, the ease of drawing (changing) the first special symbol is the same as when the normal state is set, but since it is easier to win two types of wins based on that drawing, it is a more advantageous game state than the normal state.

As a result, a game state in which a jackpot is actually more likely to be set (it is easier to get a double win) than in the normal state can be presented as a "pullback zone," enhancing the presentation effect. Furthermore, because the timing at which the pre-time-saving end condition is met based on right-hitting play differs depending on the lottery result of right-hitting play (the lottery result of the second special symbol), the period during which this "pullback zone" is executed becomes indefinite. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play while expecting the "pullback zone" to continue for a long period of time.

In addition, in this modified example, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is set according to the game state, and the display mode of the guidance display area Dm2 is set according to the game state and the progress of the time-saving end condition (whether it is satisfied before the time-saving end). The display mode of the guidance display area Dm2 is displayed larger than the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 to actively guide the player on how to play. However, without being limited to this, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 may be changed according to the game state and the progress of the time-saving end condition (whether it is satisfied before the time-saving end). In this case, when the time-saving end condition is satisfied by a right-hand hit game (a game to execute the lottery (variation) of the second special pattern) during the time-saving state, it is preferable to change the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 so that it is less noticeable than when the time-saving end condition is not satisfied.

In this way, when the time-saving state is set, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode depending on the progress of the time-saving end condition (whether or not it is met before the time-saving end) so that the player can visually determine the degree of advantage when playing according to the game direction (e.g., right hit) notified by the game direction instruction display mode Dm20.

<Regarding the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 157 to 168. This fifth embodiment is the same as the second embodiment described above in that the player is allowed to select a game method when a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set. In the second embodiment described above, when a time-saving state is set, the player is allowed to select a game (first game) in which a first special symbol (special symbol 1) is drawn and a game (second game) in which a second special symbol (special symbol 2) is drawn (see Fig. 82). When the first game is selected, the player is allowed to draw the special symbol 1 by aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by hitting the left side, and when the second game is selected, the player is allowed to draw the special symbol 2 by aiming at the second ball entrance 640 by hitting the right side (see Fig. 2).

The conditions that can be met by drawing special chart 1 as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state are different from the conditions that can be met by drawing special chart 2, so that the player can choose between a game in which the time-saving end condition is more likely to be met (the time-saving state is more likely to end) and a game in which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be met (than that game).

Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, the game in which the time-saving end condition is more easily met (first game) has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in one special pattern drawing, i.e., the combined probability of winning a jackpot in a special pattern drawing and winning a small jackpot in a special pattern drawing and winning a jackpot (two-type jackpot) during that small jackpot (during a small jackpot game), than the game in which the time-saving end condition is less easily met (second game).

In the second embodiment configured in this manner, various games can be played by allowing the player to select the play method when the time-saving state is set, and this makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early on. In addition, the ease of ending the time-saving state (the ease of achieving the time-saving end conditions) and the probability of winning a jackpot for one special chart drawing can be varied depending on the play method selected by the player, so that the player himself can select the game that suits him/herself, and it is possible to provide games suitable for various players.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, one of the play methods selected by the player during the time-saving state (second game) is a game that aims at the second ball entrance 640, which is easier to enter than in the normal state, but the other game (first game) is a game that aims at the first ball entrance 64, which is as easy to enter as in the normal state, so there is a problem that it is difficult to give the player a sense of advantage by setting the time-saving state.

Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 157 to 168. This fifth embodiment is the same as the second embodiment described above in that the player is allowed to select a game method when a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set. In the second embodiment described above, when a time-saving state is set, the player is allowed to select a game (first game) in which a first special symbol (special symbol 1) is drawn, and a game (second game) in which a second special symbol (special symbol 2) is drawn (see Fig. 82). When the first game is selected, the player is allowed to draw the special symbol 1 by aiming at the first ball entrance 64 with a left-handed play, and when the second game is selected, the player is allowed to draw the special symbol 2 by aiming at the second ball entrance 640 with a right-handed play (see Fig. 2).

The conditions that can be met by drawing special chart 1 as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state are different from the conditions that can be met by drawing special chart 2, so that the player can choose between a game in which the time-saving end condition is more likely to be met (the time-saving state is more likely to end) and a game in which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be met (than that game).

Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, the game in which the time-saving end condition is more easily met (first game) has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in one special pattern drawing, i.e., the combined probability of winning a jackpot in a special pattern drawing and winning a small jackpot in a special pattern drawing and winning a jackpot (two-type jackpot) during that small jackpot (during a small jackpot game), than the game in which the time-saving end condition is less easily met (second game).

In the second embodiment configured in this manner, various games can be played by allowing the player to select the play method when the time-saving state is set, and this makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early on. In addition, the ease of ending the time-saving state (the ease of achieving the time-saving end conditions) and the probability of winning a jackpot for one special chart drawing can be varied depending on the play method selected by the player, so that the player himself can select the game that suits him/herself, and it is possible to provide games suitable for various players.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, one of the play methods selected by the player during the time-saving state (second game) is a game in which the player aims for the second ball entrance 640, which is easier to enter than in the normal state due to the time-saving state being set, but the other game (first game) is a game in which the player aims for the first ball entrance 64, which is as easy to enter as in the normal state, so there was a problem that it was difficult to give the player a sense of advantage due to the time-saving state being set. In other words, the time-saving state was set to make the special symbol fluctuation (lottery) more efficient than in the normal state, and it was not possible to provide different playability in that state (ease of ending the time-saving state or the expectation of a jackpot in one special symbol lottery).

In contrast to this, the fifth embodiment, like the fourth embodiment described above, has a configuration (so-called simultaneous change configuration) that allows the selection (change) of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) to be performed simultaneously, and is configured to allow the player to select different play characteristics in the time-saving state by varying the change pattern (change time) of each special symbol that can be set according to the game state.

By setting the time-saving state, the special symbols can be changed (drawn) more efficiently than in the normal state, and the game can be provided in a way that allows the player to choose between different gameplay characteristics.

Next, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 157. FIG. 157 is a front view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 157, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment differs in that the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 (the game area to the right of the variable display unit 80) and the game area below the variable display unit 80 are different from the configuration (see FIG. 2) of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above (the same as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment). The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 157, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is configured so that the right-hand area is largely divided into two sections, and the ball flows down different flow paths depending on the momentum of the ball shot by right-handed play, i.e., the magnitude of the resistance value (shooting strength) detected by a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance.

Specifically, when the rotation amount (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 exceeds the reference amount, the launched ball flows down the right area, and when the rotation amount (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 is greater than the reference amount and less than the limit amount (weak right hit game), the ball is launched toward the first right area 901a on the left side of the area divided into left and right by the restricting wall (restricting member) 900 provided in the center of the right area, and when the rotation amount (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 is equal to or greater than the limit amount and less than the limit amount (strong right hit game), the ball is launched toward the second right area 901b on the right side of the area divided into left and right by the restricting wall (restricting member) 900. Note that in this fifth embodiment, the launch strength is configured to increase according to the rotation amount of the operating handle 51, but the operating handle 51 can be rotated even after the rotation amount of the operating handle 51 reaches a predetermined rotation amount and the launch strength becomes maximum. By configuring it in this way, when playing with a strong right hit, it is no longer necessary to operate the operating handle 51 to the limit (upper limit) of its rotational operating range, making the operating handle 51 less likely to break.

Hereinafter, in right-hand play, a play that aims at the first right-hand region 901a is referred to as a weak right-hand play, and a play that aims at the second right-hand region 901b is referred to as a strong right-hand play. In the fifth embodiment, the right-hand play is divided into a plurality of games according to the magnitude of the firing strength of the right-hand play, but the right-hand play may be divided into a plurality of games by other configurations. For example, a plurality of games that are different from each other may be repeatedly set for a large and small firing strength, or even if the ball is fired with the same firing strength, different games may be set according to the timing of firing the ball or the number of balls, and the right-hand region may be formed so that the ball flows down a different region for each different game.

Furthermore, in this fifth embodiment, the right-hand hit game is divided into multiple games according to the ball's launch strength, but this is not limited to this, and multiple games may be set in the area where the ball launched by the left-hand hit game flows down.

Returning to Figure 157 for further explanation, a ball shot by a weak right hit enters an opening formed between the variable display unit 80 and multiple nails planted above the game board 13 (above the variable display unit 80), and flows down the first right area 901a. On the other hand, a ball shot by a strong right hit enters an opening formed above the multiple nails planted above the game board 13 (above the variable display unit 80), and flows down the second right area 901b.

As shown in FIG. 157, in the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment, a fish-shaped mark (first right-side area indication) 910 and a turtle-shaped mark (second right-side area indication) 911 are affixed (on the surface of the game board 13) near the entrance of each area in a manner visible to the player as identifiers to indicate that the right-side area is divided into multiple right-side areas (first right-side area 901a, second right-side area 901b). By configuring it in this way, it is easy to determine whether the game desired by the player (strong right hit game, weak right hit game) is actually being played by identifying the mark affixed to the trajectory of the shot ball.

In the fifth embodiment, the first right area display 910 and the second right area display 911 are attached near the entrance to each area, but this is not limiting and multiple marks may be attached. Also, instead of attaching the marks to the surface of the game board 13, the surface of the game board 13 may be made of a transparent material (e.g., acrylic resin, etc.) and the marks may be attached so as to be embedded in the transparent material. With this configuration, the launched ball will not come into contact with the marks (first right area display 910, second right area display 911), which can prevent the marks from coming off due to contact with the ball.

Among the areas partitioned by the restricting wall 900, the first right area 901a is provided with a second ball entrance 640, and most (approximately 95%) of the balls that enter the first right area 901a enter the second ball entrance 640. Although details will be described later, in this fifth embodiment, a 10-minute variable time is set for the drawing of special chart 2 that is performed when the normal state is set as the game state. The number of balls (number of prize balls) paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is set to one.

By configuring it in this way, even if a weak right-hand hit game is played in the normal state, the number of balls will not increase (the number of balls paid out will be less than the number of balls fired), and even if the rate of balls entering the second ball entrance 640 is increased, the special chart 2 lottery can be efficiently prevented from being executed.

Next, in the area partitioned by the restricting wall 900, the second right area 901b is provided with a through gate 67 and a right first ball entrance 964. This right first ball entrance 964 is provided with an electric device 964a. This electric device 964a operates on the same operating principle as the electric device 640a of the second embodiment described above, and changes between an open state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the right first ball entrance 964, and a closed state in which it is difficult (it is impossible) to enter the right first ball entrance 964, depending on the result of the general drawing that is executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67. Note that the details are omitted as they are the same as those of the second embodiment described above.

In this way, by providing different ball entrances for each partitioned area, different special drawing lots are executed depending on the game content during the time-saving state. Details will be described later, but in this fifth embodiment, a short variable time (5 to 60 seconds) is set for the drawing of special drawing 2 executed when the time-saving state is set as the game state.

Thus, during the time-saving state, it is possible to execute both the drawing of special chart 1 and the drawing of special chart 2, so the player can choose which game to play. Note that in the fifth embodiment, the player is configured to be awarded different drawing results when the drawing of special chart 1 is performed during the time-saving state and when the drawing of special chart 2 is performed.

Specifically, the system is configured so that the time-saving state is more likely to end when the Special Chart 1 lottery is performed than when the Special Chart 2 lottery is performed, and a greater bonus (number of prize balls) is awarded in the event of a jackpot win. In other words, during the time-saving state, when the Special Chart 1 lottery is performed, a higher-risk, higher-return game can be played (a game with a different gameplay style can be played) than when the Special Chart 2 lottery is performed. In this way, when the player is allowed to select a game method, by allowing different gameplay styles to be played depending on the game state selected, the player can be motivated to select a game method.

In addition, the duration (average duration) of the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set to differ depending on the game method selected, so the player can choose whether or not to end the time-saving state in a short period of time. This makes it possible for the player to play according to their own convenience.

Furthermore, in this fifth embodiment, when a game method is selected that ends the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, in a short period of time (shorter than other game methods), if the player wins a jackpot in the time-saving state, the player is awarded a larger bonus than if another game method was selected. This makes it possible to award bonuses to players fairly even if they select a game method that ends the time-saving state in a short period of time, making it easier for players to select their desired game method.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the executed right-hand hit game is a weak right-hand hit game or a strong right-hand hit game. Specifically, a first passage sensor 905a is provided in the first right-hand area 901a partitioned by the restricting wall 900, and a second passage sensor 905b is provided in the second right-hand area 901b.

The first passing sensor 905a and the second passing sensor 905b are detection means for detecting balls flowing down the surface (ball flow down surface) of the game board 13, and are composed of proximity sensors that can detect the flow (passage) of balls in a non-contact manner. In order to reliably detect balls passing through each area, the first passing sensor 905a and the second passing sensor 905b are provided in locations in each area where the passage width is at least the width of one ball but less than two balls (e.g., 15 mm). By limiting the width of the balls flowing down each area in this way, the accuracy of ball detection can be improved. In addition, the number of detection means required to detect balls can be reduced.

In the fifth embodiment, the first passing sensor 905a and the second passing sensor 905b described above are provided as proximity sensors that are embedded in the game board 13 so that their detection area is the surface of the game board 13 (the surface below the ball flow), and detect the change in capacitance caused by the ball flowing down the surface of the game board 13 (the surface below the ball flow). However, other types of proximity sensors may be provided, or a contact detection method such as a limit switch may be provided.

In the fifth embodiment, in order to prevent a proximity sensor corresponding to one area from detecting a ball flowing down the other area, the detection ranges of the proximity sensors are configured to have a predetermined thickness (e.g., 5 mm) so that they do not overlap. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the regulating wall 900 may be configured to be made of a material that prevents the various displacements (capacitance displacement, magnetic field displacement) detected by the proximity sensors from affecting the regulating wall 900.

In addition, in this fifth embodiment, a dedicated detection means is provided to determine which area (first right area 901a, second right area 901b) the ball shot by right-hand hit play has passed through, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the determination may be made based on information (signals) indicating that the ball has entered the ball entry holes provided in each of the first right area 901a and the second right area 901b. Also, the adjustment amount of the operating handle 51 may be detected, and a weak right-hand hit play or a strong right-hand hit play may be determined based on the adjustment amount.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, a configuration and processing are provided to determine whether the currently being executed right-hit game is a weak right-hit game or a strong right-hit game, so that the current playing method can be notified to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158 and FIG. 159, the detailed configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 158, the configuration of the upper part of the game board 13, that is, the part where the ball shot by right-handed play is distributed to the first right area 901a and the second right area 901b, will be described. FIG. 158 is a partially enlarged view showing the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 158, the ball shot by right-handed play is configured to be distributed to either the opening 902b formed between the tip nail K1a and the rail 62 at the position where it passes through the apex part of the game board 13 (the uppermost part of the game area of the game board 13 configured in a circular shape in the front view of FIG. 157) or the opening 902a below the opening 902b and formed between the tip nail K1a and the variable display unit 80. Furthermore, the opening 902b formed above the game board 13 has an entrance width (the distance from the tip nail K1a to the rail 62 when a straight line passing through the center point of the circular game area and the tip nail K1a is extended to the rail 62) of 2 cm, and the opening 902a has an entrance width (the distance between the outer wall of the variable display unit 80 and the tip nail K1a on the straight line passing through the center point of the circular game area and the tip nail K1a) of 4 cm.

This is because, when a strong right hit is performed among right hit games, the shot ball moves steadily along the rail 62, whereas it is difficult to stabilize the trajectory of the ball when a weak right hit is performed. Therefore, the opening width of the opening 902a through which the ball shot by a weak right hit enters is made wider than the opening 902b through which the ball shot by a strong right hit enters, making it easier to play a weak right hit game.

In other words, by making the opening 902a wider, the range of rotational operation amount of the operating handle 51 corresponding to weak right hit play can be widened, making it easier for the player to play weak right hit play.

Furthermore, in the first right area 901a, a fish mark (first right area display) 910 is affixed near the opening 902a, and in the second right area 901b, a turtle mark (second right area display) 911 is affixed near the opening 902b. In this way, by affixing each mark to the area through which the ball passes immediately after passing through each opening (the ball immediately after being sorted into the partitioned area), the player can easily understand which area the launched ball has reached.

In this embodiment, the marks (first right area display, second right area display) for indicating each area are affixed in the first right area 901a and the second right area 901b, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the first right area display 910 and the second right area display 911 may be affixed to an area through which the ball passes before passing through each opening (902a, 902b) and through which it is determined which opening the ball will pass after passing through that area. In this way, by affixing the marks (first right area display, second right area display) for indicating each area not only within the partitioned areas but also in the areas through which the ball passes that are determined to enter a specific partitioned area, it is possible to easily affix the marks in positions that are easily visible to the player within the limited space of the game board 13.

Next, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. 159(a) is an enlarged view of the right side area when the variable winning device 9650a is open, and FIG. 159(b) is an enlarged view of the right side area when the variable winning device 9650a is closed.

As described above, the fifth embodiment is configured so that the player can select between a weak right hit game aiming at the first right area 901a and a strong right hit game aiming at the second right area 901b as a play method during right hit play, and provides the player with a game with different playability depending on the play method selected.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, the player had to select the desired play method from weak right hit play or strong right hit play, and adjust the operating handle 51 to match that play method. As described above with reference to FIG. 158, in the fifth embodiment, the opening 902a for weak, right hit play is wider than the opening 902b for strong right hit play so that the adjustment range of the operating handle 51 for weak right hit play, which is difficult for players to adjust, is wider, allowing the player to easily select the play method.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 159(a), in this fifth embodiment, when the time-saving state is set, regardless of which game (weak right-hit game, strong right-hit game) is being played, a variable winning device 9650a is provided that opens during a jackpot game so that the jackpot game can be played while continuing the game being played.

As a result, even if a jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the gameplay method selected during the time-saving state can be continued, allowing the player to play without feeling annoyed in a state in which the time-saving state and the jackpot game state are repeatedly set.

Furthermore, since the variable winning device 9650a is disposed upstream of the second ball entrance 640 disposed in the first right area 901a and the first ball entrance 964 disposed in the second right area 901b, the ball shot in a right-hand hit game during a jackpot game will not enter each ball entrance before entering the variable winning device 9650, and the jackpot game can be played smoothly.

In addition, the variable winning device 9650a is in a closed state other than during a jackpot game (when the opening operation has not been performed), as shown in FIG. 159(b), dividing the first right area 901a and the second right area 901b as part of the restricting wall 900, thereby preventing balls flowing down each area from entering a different area during the time-saving state.

In the fifth embodiment, the variable winning device 9650 is arranged so that any ball flowing through any area (first right area 901a, second right area 901b) can win a prize, so that the jackpot game can be played while maintaining the game method selected by the player during the time-saving state. However, without being limited to this, the variable winning device 9650 may be arranged in the area through which the ball shot by right-handed play passes before being distributed to each area (first right area 901a, second right area 901b).

It may also be configured to provide a variable winning device corresponding to each area. Specifically, a variable winning device for special chart 2 that opens when a jackpot is won in the drawing of special chart 2 is provided in the first right area 901a where the balls of weak right-hand play flow down when the drawing of special chart 2 is executed, and a variable winning device for special chart 1 that opens when a jackpot is won in the drawing of special chart 1 is provided in the second right area 901b where the balls of strong right-hand play flow down when the drawing of special chart 1 is executed.

By configuring it in this way, if a player wins a jackpot by playing either of the games (weak right hit game, strong right hit game) while the time-saving state is set, the player can continue playing the jackpot game while continuing with the current game method. Also, since a different variable winning device is opened when a jackpot is won depending on the game method being played, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand that different games are being played by changing the game method while the time-saving state is set.

Furthermore, in this fifth embodiment, when the time-saving state is set and the number of times the special symbol changes (draws) reaches a predetermined number (when the change count end condition is met), or when the number of times small prizes are won by the special symbol draws reaches a predetermined number (when the win count end condition is met), the time-saving state is configured to transition to the normal state (from a game state that is advantageous to the player to a game state that is disadvantageous to the player). Note that this configuration is different from the second embodiment described above only in the values set as each end condition, and the process of determining whether each end condition is met and the process of transitioning the game state that is executed when each end condition is met are the same, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

In addition, by making it possible to win a small prize in the drawing of the first special symbol, but not possible to win a small prize in the drawing of the second special symbol, the ease with which the time-saving state ends is different between a game in which the drawing of the first special symbol is executed (strong right hit game) and a game in which the drawing of the second special symbol is executed (weak right hit game). Furthermore, when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol, the amount of bonus (amount of prize balls) given to the player in one jackpot is greater than when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol, which makes it possible for the player to enthusiastically select a playing method during the time-saving state.

Next, the contents of the big win presentation executed in this fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time when the big win (big win game) starts, and FIG. 160(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen during the big win (big win game).

As described above, in this embodiment, when the time-saving state is set, the player can select between weak right-hit play and strong right-hit play (by operating the operating handle 51) and execute it. Furthermore, during a jackpot game in which right-hit play is performed just like during the time-saving state, the player is guided by a presentation whether the game method corresponding to the time-saving play desired is being performed.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 157, in this fifth embodiment, weak right hit play and strong right hit play can be executed as play methods during the time-saving state (time-saving play methods), and further, regardless of which play method is being executed, a jackpot game can be executed. By configuring in this way, a play method corresponding to the play method during the time-saving state desired by the player can be executed in advance by using the period during which a jackpot game is being executed, which is the stage before the time-saving state is set.

Therefore, as in the fifth embodiment, when different time-saving play methods are executed based on the operation of the operating handle 51, the time-saving play method desired by the player can be executed reliably. Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, it is configured to determine whether the game content actually executed during a jackpot game (which is the same as the executed game storage area) matches the game state desired by the player during the time-saving state, and to execute a presentation based on the determination result. This allows the player to easily understand the current play method (play method during a jackpot game).

When the jackpot game starts (when the jackpot opening period begins), the message "Hit right" is displayed in the guide display area Dm2. Then, in the main display area Dm, a selection screen is displayed for the player to select the desired game method in the time-saving state that will be set after the current jackpot game ends. Specifically, the main display area Dm displays a safe mode display mode 851 and a challenge mode display mode 852, and the desired game method can be selected by operating the frame button 22 while an arrow that periodically cycles through each display mode is pointing to one of the display modes.

This safe mode display mode 851 is selected when a weak right-hand hit game during the time-saving state, i.e., a game in which a lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is desired, and the challenge mode display mode 852 is selected when a strong right-hand hit game during the time-saving state, i.e., a game in which a lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is desired, is desired. The diagram shown in FIG. 160(a) shows a state in which an arrow 853 pointing to the safe mode display mode 851 is displayed, and in this state, by operating (pressing) the operation button 22, the player can select the desired playing method as the safe mode. On the other hand, in FIG. 160(a), the arrow 854 shown by the dotted line is displayed by a solid line, and by operating (pressing) the frame button 22, the challenge mode can be selected.

The secondary display area Ds also displays the text "Choose your desired mode" as a comment to encourage the player to select the desired mode, along with a diagram simulating a frame button 22 to guide the player through the selection operation. Based on the display content shown in this secondary display area Ds, the player knows what to select when the jackpot starts, and selects the desired play method during the time-saving state. The play method selected here is then used to determine the play method being executed during the jackpot.

During a jackpot game, the diagram shown in FIG. 160(b) is displayed. On the screen during a jackpot game, "Hit Right" is continuously displayed in the guide display area Dm2, and the current number of rounds played is displayed in the round number display area 858. In the example of FIG. 160(b), "ROUND 5" is displayed, indicating that the round game is the fifth round.

Furthermore, to the right of the main display area Dm, the current play method is displayed in the current play display area 860, and the desired play method selected at the start of the jackpot play is displayed in the desired play display area 861. In the diagram shown in FIG. 160(b), a display mode indicating "safe mode" is displayed in the current play display area 860, and a display mode indicating "challenge mode" is displayed in the desired play display area 861. In other words, the display content is displayed when the play method actually being executed differs from the play method desired by the player, and the comment "Hit harder to the right" is displayed in the play guidance area 859 of the sub-display area Ds to change the play method.

By configuring the display mode in this manner, adjustments can be made during the period when the jackpot game is being played before the time-saving state is set to match the actual game method with the player's desired game method (the game method that the player wishes to execute during the time-saving state). Furthermore, if the game method being executed during the jackpot game differs from the desired game method, a guide display for changing the game method can be displayed during the jackpot game, making it easier to execute the desired game method during the period when the jackpot game is being played.

Returning to FIG. 160(b), the explanation will continue. The display screen during jackpot play further displays an ongoing jackpot history 855 indicating the game method when the ongoing jackpot was won, a safe mode jackpot history 856 indicating the number of times a jackpot was won during safe mode, and a challenge mode jackpot history 857 indicating the number of times a jackpot was won during challenge mode. In the diagram shown in FIG. 160(b), when the normal state is set as the game state, the letter "V" is displayed as ongoing jackpot history 855, indicating that a jackpot was won by the lottery for the first special pattern that was executed when the ball entered the first ball entrance 64.

If the currently active jackpot is a jackpot won by a lottery for the second special symbol triggered by a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 while the time-saving mode is set, the letters "V with a fish mark" are displayed in the active win history 855, and if the jackpot is won by a lottery for the first special symbol triggered by a ball entering the first right ball entrance 964, the letters "V with a turtle mark" are displayed in the active win history 855. This makes it easy to understand the trigger for the jackpot won regardless of the game state in which the jackpot is won.

In addition, by providing the safe mode jackpot history 856 and the challenge mode jackpot history 857, when playing the pachinko machine 10, particularly when playing during the time-saving mode, the player can refer to the past game history to determine what type of game to play. This allows the player to predict an advantageous game method, which makes it possible for the player to play with enthusiasm.

In the fifth embodiment, a configuration is used in which the past play history is a cumulative display of the play method that was set when a jackpot was won, but it may also be configured to display a cumulative value of the play method selected in the past, regardless of whether or not a jackpot was won.

Next, referring to FIG. 161, the game content during the time-saving state in this fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 161 is a schematic diagram showing the time-saving game content in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 161, in this fifth embodiment, different games are executed depending on the game method executed during the time-saving state. Specifically, when a weak right-hand hit game, that is, a game aiming at the first right-side area 901a, is executed with the time-saving state set, most of the balls shot are configured to enter the second ball entrance 640 and one prize ball is paid out.

Furthermore, the lottery for the second special symbol, which is executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, is set so that a small win cannot be won, and if a big win is won, 10 rounds of big win play are executed. Also, in a game state in which the time-saving state is set, the fluctuation pattern set according to the lottery for the first special symbol and the fluctuation pattern set according to the lottery for the second special symbol are set to have approximately the same fluctuation time.

On the other hand, when the time-saving state is set and a strong right-hand hit game, that is, a game aimed at the second right-side area 901b, is executed, the electric device 964a opens based on the ball passing through the through gate 67. When a ball enters the right first ball entrance 964 while the electric device 964a is in the opening operation, three prize balls are paid out. Here, it is configured that about 1/3 of the balls shot to the second right-side area 901b enter the right first ball entrance 964 when the time-saving state is set. Therefore, in this fifth embodiment, when a right-hand hit game is performed during the time-saving state, whether a weak right-hand hit game is performed or a strong right-hand hit game is performed, a prize ball that is enough to maintain the number of balls held can be obtained (prize balls = medium).

Furthermore, unlike the above-mentioned drawing for the second special symbol, the drawing for the first special symbol executed by the strong right hit game is configured to have the possibility of winning a small prize (the winning probability is 1/60). Here, in this fifth embodiment, as a time-saving end condition, which is a condition for ending the time-saving state, in addition to the change count end condition that is established when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), the time-saving end condition is also configured to be established when a small prize is won. In other words, when the time-saving state is set, the strong right hit game in which the first special symbol is drawn is configured to be played in a way that makes it easier to end the time-saving state than the weak right hit game in which the second special symbol is drawn.

If a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, a 12-round jackpot game is played, in which the player is given a larger amount of bonuses (number of prize balls) than if the player wins a jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol.

By configuring it in this way, different gameplay can be provided to the player depending on whether they play weak right-hand play (safe mode), in which the time-saving state is set until the special pattern changes 100 times during the time-saving state, but a lottery is held for the second special pattern, which offers fewer bonuses if a jackpot is won, or strong right-hand play (challenge mode), in which the special pattern changes 100 times or the time-saving state is set until a small jackpot is won, i.e., more conditions are set to end the time-saving state than in weak right-hand play, making it easier to end the time-saving state, but depending on whether they play strong right-hand play (challenge mode), which offers a lottery for the first special pattern, which offers more bonuses if a jackpot is won (12-round jackpot), it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

In the fifth embodiment, the small prize is not won in the drawing of the second special symbol, and the time-saving end condition is established when the small prize is won in the drawing of the first special symbol. However, the time-saving end condition described in each of the above-mentioned embodiments may be set. For example, the small prize is won in the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol, and the time-saving end condition is established only when the small prize type set for the winning small prize is a specific small prize type (for example, small prize A), and the above-mentioned specific small prize type (small prize A) is set only when the small prize is won in the drawing of the first special symbol. This makes it impossible to determine whether the time-saving state will end just by winning a small prize, so it is possible to provide a sense of excitement to the player.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the time-saving end condition is met when a small win is won, i.e., when a small win is won once, but the number of small wins at which the time-saving end condition is met may be set to a value of one or more. Also, when a small win is won, multiple small win types may be set, and different time-saving end conditions may be set for each small win type.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 162 and 163. In the fifth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to vary (draw) at the same time, as in the fourth embodiment described above, and the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 is the same as that of the fourth embodiment described above, except that the values set in each table are different. Detailed descriptions of the same parts and parts where the values are simply changed will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 162(a), the contents of the variation pattern 5 table 202dd, which is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment of the present invention, will be described. FIG. 162(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern 5 table 202dd. This variation pattern 5 table 202dd differs from the variation pattern 4 table 202cd described above in that the prescribed contents of the variation pattern table referenced during the time-saving state are different.

As shown in FIG. 162(a), in the fourth embodiment described above, different fluctuation pattern tables are referenced depending on the time-saving state that is set (depending on the type of jackpot that is won), and a time-saving state in which the first special symbol is likely to fluctuate and a time-saving state in which the second special symbol is likely to fluctuate can be set. In contrast, the fifth embodiment differs in that the simultaneous fluctuation pattern table for time-saving 202dd2 is specified as the fluctuation pattern table that is referenced during the time-saving state.

Here, the contents defined in the time-saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 162(b). FIG. 162(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2. As shown in FIG. 162(b), this time-saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2 differs from the fluctuation pattern table referenced during the time-saving state of the fourth embodiment described above in that there is no significant difference in the fluctuation time set for either the fluctuation pattern defined in response to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the fluctuation pattern defined in response to the second special symbol (special symbol 2).

In other words, in the fourth embodiment described above, the game board 13 is configured so that in right-hand play that is executed when the time-saving state is set, a lottery is held for both the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the type of special symbol for which the lottery is mainly held is changed by varying the length of the variable time set for each special symbol depending on the type of time-saving state that is set as the game state.

In contrast, the fifth embodiment differs in that the variation time set for each special symbol is the same length in the variation pattern table that is referenced when the time-saving state is set, and the type of special symbol for which the lottery is mainly executed is changed by varying the play area into which the player shoots the ball.

Therefore, in the time-saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2 used in this fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 162(b), for either special pattern 1 or special pattern 2, a fluctuation pattern (big win fluctuation 1-3) with a fluctuation time of 10 to 60 seconds is prescribed for the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) of a big win, and a fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation 1-3) with a fluctuation time of 10 to 30 seconds is prescribed for the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) of a miss. Note that only the lottery for the first special pattern is configured to be judged as a small win as a win/lose judgment result, but for this small win, a fluctuation pattern (small win fluctuation 1-3) with a fluctuation time of 10 to 30 seconds is prescribed, just like when the win/lose judgment result is a miss. This makes it possible to set the same fluctuation time for the fluctuation for winning a small win and the fluctuation for winning a miss.

Therefore, the effect suggesting that the time-saving will end due to winning a small prize can be applied as it is even when the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) is a miss. In the fifth embodiment, the effect suggesting that the time-saving will end (the effect to suggest that a small prize has been won) is executed when the win/lose judgment result is a miss and when the small prize is won. In addition, for example, the variable time specified when the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) is a small prize and the variable time specified when the lottery result is a big prize may be the same, and an effect indicating that the player has won either a big prize or a small prize may be executed. This makes it difficult for the player to know until the end whether he or she will be granted a situation in which he or she can win a big prize and get a bonus, or a situation in which he or she will win a small prize and the time-saving state advantageous to the player will end.

Next, referring to FIG. 163, the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth embodiment. This fifth embodiment differs from the second embodiment described above in that a first passing counter 223da, a second passing counter 223db, a selected game storage area 223dc, an executed game storage area 223dd, and a jackpot information storage area 223de are added.

The first passing counter 223da is a counter for counting the number of balls detected by the first passing sensor 905a (see FIG. 157) during a jackpot game, that is, the number of balls that passed through the first right area 901a during a jackpot game. This first passing counter 223da is incremented by 1 (see S3803) when it is determined that the first passing sensor 905a is on during a jackpot game in the signal input process (see S2151 in FIG. 166) executed in the main process 5 (see FIG. 164) of the sound lamp control device 113. The incremented value is also referenced when determining the game method being played (see S3806 to S3809). When it is determined that the jackpot game has ended (when the time-saving state is set), the value is cleared (reset) to 0 (see S3811).

The second passing counter 223db is a counter similar to the first passing counter 223da described above, and is a counter for counting the number of balls detected by the second passing sensor 905b (see FIG. 157) during a jackpot game, i.e., the number of balls that pass through the second right area 901b during a jackpot game. The only difference between the processing using this second passing counter 223db and the first passing counter 223da described above is that the target has been changed from the first passing sensor 905a to the second passing sensor 905b, so a detailed explanation of the processing will be omitted.

The selected game storage area 223dc is an area for temporarily storing the game method desired by the player during the time-saving state. This selected game storage area 223dc stores the game method selected during the game selection period that is set for a predetermined period (10 seconds) from the start of the jackpot game (from the setting of the opening period of the jackpot game), and when it is determined in the frame button input monitoring/presentation process 5 (see S2157 in FIG. 167) that the pressing of the frame button 22 is during the game selection period (S3852: Yes), the game method corresponding to the button press is stored (S3853).

Based on the information stored in this selected game storage area 223dc, the game method desired by the player during the time-saving state is determined, and the display mode of the current game method on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 160(b)) is set. The information stored in this selected game storage area 223dc is configured to be retained until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the selection display mode may be configured so that an arrow points to the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc on the selection screen displayed at the start of a jackpot game (see FIG. 160(a)).

Furthermore, if the player does not select any game method (does not press the frame button 22 during the game selection period) while the selection screen (see FIG. 160(a)) that appears at the start of a jackpot game is displayed, the game method based on the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc (information stored during the past game selection period) can be automatically selected.

In this case, it is advisable to set the presentation mode during the game selection period so that an arrow points to the display mode indicating the game method corresponding to the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc at the start and end of the game selection period during which the selection screen is displayed. By configuring it in this way, even if the player does not select a game method, it is possible to execute a presentation that makes it seem as if a certain game method has been automatically selected, without changing the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc.

The execution game storage area 223dd is an area for temporarily storing the game method actually being executed. This execution game storage area 223dd stores information indicating the current game method determined based on the area where the ball shot during the jackpot (during the jackpot game) flows, and in the signal input process (see S2151 in FIG. 166) executed periodically (every millisecond) in the main process 5 (see FIG. 164) of the sound lamp control device 113, information indicating the game method based on the number of balls that flowed down the first right area 901a and the second right area 901b during the jackpot (during the jackpot game) is stored (S3809, S3810 in FIG. 166). By configuring in this way, the area where the shot ball actually flows down can be determined, and the current game method can be determined based on the determination result, so that the accuracy of the determination can be improved.

The information stored in this active game storage area 223dd is used to determine the game method currently being played, and is referenced when setting the display mode to be displayed in the desired game display area 861 on the display screen during a jackpot game (Figure 160 (b)) (S3554 in Figure 168).

The jackpot information storage area 223de is an area for storing information related to the jackpot. This jackpot information storage area 223de stores information related to the jackpot that has been won, such as the type of jackpot that has been won, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and information indicating the game method when the jackpot is won (for example, the type of special symbol that is the subject of the lottery for winning the jackpot). In the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 165), when it is determined that the command sent from the main control device 110 is a win-related command (S2211 in FIG. 165: Yes), the information included in the received command is stored (S2291 in FIG. 165).

<Regarding control processing in main control device 110 of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process of the main control device 110 of the fifth embodiment will be described. The fifth embodiment executes the same control process as the control process of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment described above, and is configured so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed independently (in parallel). Then, when a win is won in the lottery of either special symbol (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a win), the other special symbol change being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a loss.

The fourth embodiment described above has a control process that allows a big win (two types of wins) to be won when the ball passes through a specific area during a small win game that is executed when a small win is won in a special pattern lottery (when the V switch 650e3 provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, which is the specific area, detects the ball), whereas the fifth embodiment differs in that it does not have a control process for winning the two types of wins described above.

In addition, while the fourth embodiment described above allows two game states to be set: a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), the fifth embodiment differs in that, in addition to the two game states described above, a probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) and a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) can be set.

<Regarding control process in the voice lamp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 1113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 164 to Fig. 168. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the player can select the game method when the time-saving state is set, and the player operates the operation handle 51 to execute either the weak right hit game or the strong right hit game.

Whether weak right hit play or strong right hit play is performed during the time-saving state, it is a detailed division of the right hit play method in which the ball is launched to the right side of the variable display unit 80 (the right side when viewed from the front in Figure 157) by operating the operating handle 51 greatly, and a certain degree of adjustment precision is required to execute each game method. Therefore, in order for the player to execute the desired game method, a slight adjustment period and an adjusted launch (launching the ball while adjusting the amount of operation) are required.

In particular, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 157 is configured so that at least the maximum operation amount of the operating handle 51 (when the operating handle 51 is rotated all the way to the right) corresponds to a strong right hit game, so the player can easily execute a strong right hit game. However, for a weak right hit game, the operating handle 51 must be adjusted to an extent that it corresponds to a right hit game (to an extent that the fired ball reaches the right area of the variable display unit 80), but not to an extent that it corresponds to a strong right hit game (to an extent that the fired ball does not flow down the second right area 901b), which requires an adjustment period and an adjustment shot.

As a result, as in the display effect executed in the second embodiment described above (see FIG. 82(a)), if a display effect is executed to allow the player to select a game method at the timing when the ending screen of the jackpot game is displayed, i.e., the timing immediately before the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state will be set at the stage when the player is adjusting the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 toward the game method desired, and there is a problem that the game during the time-saving state will be easily executed in a game method not intended by the player.

In response to this, in the fifth embodiment, at the timing when the opening screen for the jackpot game is displayed, i.e., at the timing when the jackpot game starts, a display effect is executed to allow the player to select a play method during the time-saving state that will be set after the jackpot game ends. This makes it possible to adjust the play method using the period during which the jackpot game is executed, thereby preventing the player from playing during the time-saving state using a play method that is not intended by the player.

In addition, in this fifth embodiment, the player is configured to be able to obtain the same benefits during a jackpot game regardless of which of the multiple play methods that the player can select as a play method during the time-saving state is executed, so that the period during which the jackpot game is executed can be used as a period for adjusting the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 toward the play method during the time-saving state without putting the player in a disadvantageous situation.

Furthermore, in this fifth embodiment, the player is allowed to select the desired play method during the time-saving state, and the play method selected by the player is compared with the play method actually being executed during the jackpot game, and a display is provided to guide the player on the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 based on the comparison result. This allows the player to easily adjust the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 to the play method desired.

In addition, in this fifth embodiment, the amount of bonuses (amount of prize balls) awarded in the event of a jackpot being won is configured to differ depending on the game (weak right hit game, strong right hit game) played during the time-saving state. The number of times a jackpot has been won (number of consecutive wins) during a period in which the time-saving state (including the probability of winning) and jackpot games continue to alternate, that is, a continuous period (consecutive win period, valid period) in which the game state is not set to the normal state (excluding during a jackpot), is displayed separately for each game that was being played when the jackpot was won.

This allows the player to visually confirm the relationship between the game method selected by the player and the jackpot winning status (number of wins), so the game method to be selected the next time the time-saving state is set can be selected based on past results. This gives the game an element of strategy, which can increase interest.

As shown in Figures 164 to 168, the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth embodiment differs from the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment described above in that main processing 5 (see Figure 164) is used instead of main processing (see Figure 55), command determination processing 5 (see Figure 165) is used instead of command determination processing 2 (see Figure 99), and performance update processing 5 (see Figure 168) is used instead of performance update processing 2 (see Figure 105 (b)).

The fifth embodiment differs from the second embodiment described above in that the control processing contents of the main control device 110 are replaced with the control processing of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment described above. Therefore, the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 based on the change in the control processing of the main control device 110 is the same as in the fourth embodiment, and the other control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 is the same as in the second embodiment, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the contents of main processing 5 executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 5. As shown in FIG. 164, main processing 5 differs from main processing 2 (see FIG. 55) described above in that frame button input monitoring and performance processing 5 (S2197) is executed instead of frame button input monitoring and performance processing (S2107), command determination processing 5 (S2193) is executed instead of command determination processing 2 (S2163), and signal input processing (S2151) is also added.

Now, the contents of command determination process 5 (S2193) will be explained with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 5 (S2193). This command determination process 5 (S2193) differs from the above-mentioned command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) in that when a win-related command is received, the information indicated by the received command is stored in the big win information storage area 223de.

When command determination process 5 (S2193 in FIG. 165) is executed, first, the same processes of S2201 to S2209 as those of command determination process 2 described above (see S2163 in FIG. 99) are executed. Then, if it is determined in the process of S2209 that a winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), the same winning information related process 2 (S2251) as in the second embodiment described above is executed, and then the process of S2217 is executed, terminating this process.

In the second embodiment described above, the winning information related process 2 (S2251) determines whether the play method during the time-saving state is right-hand play or left-hand play, and sets the presentation content (presentation for notification of guidance, presentation for notification of error) based on the result of the determination. However, the fifth embodiment differs in that such processing is not executed, but a detailed description of this will be omitted.

Next, if it is determined in the processing of S2209 that a winning information command has not been received (S2209 in FIG. 165: No), it is then determined whether a win-related command has been received (S2211 in FIG. 165). If it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S2211 in FIG. 165: Yes), the information stored in the big win information storage area 223de is updated according to the received content (content indicated by the win-related command) (S2291), and then the same processing of S2212 and S2217 as in the command determination processing 2 described above (see S2163 in FIG. 99) is executed, and this processing ends.

The information stored in the jackpot information storage area 223de that is updated in the process of S2291 described above includes, for example, information indicating the number of times a jackpot has been won and the trigger for the lottery that led to the jackpot (the gameplay method that triggered the lottery that led to the jackpot). By configuring the contents of the jackpot information storage area 223de to be updated immediately after a jackpot is won in this way, it has the effect of allowing players to study past jackpots while playing a jackpot game.

Returning to FIG. 165 for further explanation, if it is determined in the process of S2211 that a win-related command has not been received (S2211: No), the process executes the same processes of S2213 to S2217 as in the command determination process 2 described above (see S2163 in FIG. 99), and ends this process.

Next, the contents of the signal input process (S2151) will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the signal input process (S2151). In this signal input process (S2151), when the first passage sensor 905a and the second passage sensor 905b provided on the game board 13 detect the passage of a ball, processing is executed based on the detection result. Specifically, the number of balls passing (flowing down) each area (first right area 901a, second right area 901b) provided on the game board 13 is counted, and when the difference value is a predetermined number (for example, 5 balls), a process is executed to determine the playing method corresponding to the area where a large number of balls were detected, i.e., the area where a large number of balls flowed down, as the actual playing method.

As shown in FIG. 166, when the signal input process (S2151) is executed, first it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently being hit (S3801). If it is determined that a jackpot is currently being hit (S3801: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the first passing sensor 905a is detecting a ball (S3802). If it is determined in the process of S3802 that the first passing sensor 905a is detecting a ball (S3802: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first passing counter 223da (S3803), and then the process proceeds to S3804. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3802 that the first passing sensor 905a is not detecting a ball (S3802: No), the process skips S3803 and proceeds to S3804.

In the process of S3804, it is determined whether the second passing sensor 905b has detected a ball (S3804). If it is determined that the second passing sensor 905b has detected a ball (S3804: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the second passing counter 223db (S3805), and then the process of S3806 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S3804, if it is determined that the second passing sensor 905b has not detected a ball (S3804: No), the process of S3805 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3806.

Then, in the process of S3806, the difference between the value of the first passing counter 223da and the value of the second passing counter 223db is calculated. That is, the difference between the number of balls that passed through the first right area 901a during the jackpot game (the value of the first passing counter 223da) and the number of balls that passed through the second right area 901b (the value of the second passing counter 223db) is calculated.

After completing the processing of S3806, it is next determined whether the difference between the value of the first passing counter 223da and the value of the second passing counter 223db is 5 or more (S3807). If it is determined that the difference is 5 or more (S3807: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the first passing counter 223da is greater than the value of the second passing counter 223db (S3808).

If it is determined in the process of S3808 that the value of the first passing counter 223da is greater (S3808: Yes), a weak right hit game is set in the running game storage area 223dd (S3809), and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S3808 that the value of the first passing counter 223da is not greater than the value of the second passing counter 223db (the value of the second passing counter 223db is greater) (S3808: No), a strong right hit game is set in the running game storage area 223dd (S3810), and this process ends.

In other words, in the fifth embodiment, the number of balls that flow down the first right area 901a and the number of balls that flow down the second right area 901b among the right areas shot during a jackpot game are measured, and based on the measurement results, it is possible to determine whether the current game method is a weak right hit game that causes the balls to flow down the first right area 901a, or a strong right hit game that causes the balls to flow down the second right area 901b.

The information (play method) set in the execution game storage area 223dd by the processing of S3809 and S3810 is displayed in the current game display area 860 of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 160(b), so that the player can easily understand it.

In the fifth embodiment, the current game method is set when the difference between the value of the first passing counter 223da and the value of the second passing counter 223db is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount (five balls). In other words, immediately after a jackpot game is executed (a period during which five or more balls have not been shot by right-hand play during a jackpot game), no matter which area a ball is shot into, the current game method is not set in the executed game storage area 223dd, and the game method is not displayed in the current game display area 860.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the current game method from being displayed on the display screen immediately after the start of a jackpot game, when the game method of the player's right-hand play is not fixed (not stable).

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the current game method is not identified until the difference between the value of the first passing counter 223da and the value of the second passing counter 223db reaches a predetermined amount (5 balls). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the display mode for indicating the current game method displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (the display mode displayed in the current game display area 860) from being frequently switched.

Returning to FIG. 166 for further explanation, the process of S3811 determines whether the current timing is the end of the jackpot (S3811). In this fifth embodiment, it is determined that the jackpot has ended when it is determined that a command indicating that a time-saving state has been set (a command including content indicating that the current game state is in a time-saving state) has been output, or when it is determined that a command indicating that a jackpot is being played is no longer being output.

If it is determined in the process of S3811 that it is the timing for the jackpot to end (S3811: Yes), the value of the first passing counter 223da and the value of the second passing counter 223db, which were incremented during the jackpot game, are cleared to 0 (S3812), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current timing is not the timing for the jackpot to end (S3811: No), that is, if the game state is neither a jackpot nor the timing for the jackpot to end, other signal input process is executed (S3813), and this process ends.

The above-mentioned processing of S3813 is configured to, for example, execute a process to display a guide to guide the player on the game method when the first passing sensor 905a or the second passing sensor 905b detects a ball in a normal game state (when the game state is set in which a left-handed play aiming at the left area is an appropriate game), i.e., when it is determined that a right-handed play is being performed, execute a process to execute a process to display a guide to the player on the game method, and execute a process to determine the game method being performed based on the first passing sensor 905a or the second passing sensor 905b detecting a ball in a game state in which different games are performed depending on the game method performed by the player (for example, a time-saving state), and display the game method being performed in the current game display area 860.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the player selects the desired game method during the time-saving state at the timing when the jackpot game starts (during the opening period of the jackpot game), and the period during which the jackpot game is executed is used to allow the player to change the game method, but it is sufficient if the period during which the jackpot game is executed can be used as a period for changing the game method, and for example, it may be configured to execute a presentation in which the game method is selected halfway through the execution of the jackpot game (see FIG. 160(a)).

Next, the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (S2157) executed in this fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (S2157). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (S2157) differs from the processing performed in the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above-mentioned embodiments in that it adds processing for operating the frame buttons 22 during the game selection period (see FIG. 160(a)) during which the player selects the desired game method.

When the processing of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (S2157 in FIG. 167) is executed, first, it is determined whether pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S3851), and if it is determined that pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S3851: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3851 that pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S3851: Yes), it is next determined whether the current period is a game selection period (S3852).

Although detailed explanation is omitted here, in this fifth embodiment, in command determination process 5 (see S2193 in FIG. 165), if a win-related command is received (S2211: Yes), the win-related process (S2212) is executed to set the game selection period to 10 seconds from the start of the jackpot (from the start timing of the jackpot being determined). This game selection period is configured to measure 10 seconds by setting a value corresponding to 10 seconds to a period counter (not shown), and updating the counter value in various counter update processes (see S2111 in FIG. 164) executed every millisecond.

If it is determined in the process of S3852 that the current time is the game selection period (the value of the period counter is not 0) (S3852: Yes), the game method corresponding to the button press on the frame button 22 is set in the selected game storage area 223dc (S3853), the game method set in S3853, i.e., a display press command indicating the game method corresponding to the button press, is set (S3855), and this process is terminated.

The display press command set here is output to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2102 in FIG. 164), and the display control device 114 is controlled so that the game method selected by the player (the game method that the player wishes to execute during the time-saving state) is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. By configuring it in this way, the player can easily grasp the game method that he or she desires during a jackpot game (see FIG. 160(b)).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 160(b), in this fifth embodiment, during a jackpot game, both the game method desired by the player himself and the game method being executed during the jackpot game are displayed, so that the player can easily determine whether or not it is necessary to adjust the game method based on the display contents shown on the display screen.

Furthermore, in this fifth embodiment, if the game method desired by the player during a jackpot game does not match the game method being executed during the jackpot game, the game guide area 859 of the sub-display area Ds is configured to display (instruct) the operation method of the operating handle 51 so that the game method actually executed is the game method desired by the player. This makes it possible to guide the player to specific adjustment methods, allowing the player to easily execute the game method desired.

Returning to FIG. 167 for further explanation, in the process of S3852, if it is determined that the current period is not a game selection period (S3852: No), then it is determined whether the current period is another operation period (S3854). If it is determined that the current period is another operation period (S3854: Yes), then a display press command corresponding to the button press corresponding to that operation period is set (S3855), and this process is terminated.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, other operation periods include, for example, part of the special pattern changing period for showing the lottery result of the special pattern, and a period in which no game is being played (a so-called demo period in which the special pattern is not changing). During the special pattern changing period, when the frame button 22 is operated (when pressing of the frame button 22 is detected), a presentation is executed to suggest that the lottery result of the special pattern being changed is a jackpot.

In addition, when a game is not being played and the so-called demo period is in progress, if the frame button 22 is operated (when pressing of the frame button 22 is detected), a screen explaining the game content of the pachinko machine 10 or today's game history is selectively displayed. In this way, by varying the bonus (executed performance) for the operation depending on the game state and game situation when the frame button 22 is operated, a variety of performances can be provided to the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, the contents of the presentation update process 5 executed in this fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the presentation update process 5. This presentation update process 5 differs from the presentation update processes of the above-mentioned embodiments in that it executes a process to update the display contents of the display screen that is displayed during a jackpot game.

When the performance update process 5 is executed, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot is currently being played (S3551). If it is determined that a jackpot is currently being played (S3551: Yes), the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc is read (S3552), and then the information stored in the executed game storage area 223dd is read.

Then, a display game method command corresponding to the selected game method and the game method being executed is set (S3554). The display command set here is output to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2102 in FIG. 164), and a display mode showing the game method corresponding to each content is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 168 for further explanation, in the process of S3555, it is determined whether the information read in the process of S3552 (selected play method) and the information read in the process of S3553 (executed play method) match (S3555). If it is determined that they match (S3555: Yes), this means that the desired play method and the current play method match, so a display instruction command for maintaining the current play method is set and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S3556, if a display instruction command for maintaining the current playing method is set, for example, a comment "Keep it as is" is displayed in the playing guide area 859 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to enter an advantageous state that is favorable to the player by maintaining the current playing method.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3555 that the selected game does not match the active game (S3555: No), a display instruction command is set to show a comment to change the current game method (see S3557). Here, for example, if the selected game is challenge mode (strong right hit game) and the active game is safe mode (weak right hit game), the words "hit right harder" are displayed in the game guide area 859 to change the game method. This makes it easy to understand the specific adjustments that must be made when changing the game method from the currently being executed to the desired game method.

If it is determined in the process of S3551 that the jackpot is not currently being reached (S3551: No), then after the process of S3556 or S3557 is completed, other performance update processing is executed (S3558), and this process ends. In addition, in the process of S3558, the corresponding process is executed from among the various performance update processes that can be executed in each of the above-mentioned embodiments.

As explained above, in the fifth embodiment, in an advantageous state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which the player is in an advantageous gaming state, the player can select either a first advantageous game (strong right hit game) in which a lottery for a first special symbol is executed, or a second advantageous game (weak right hit game) in which a lottery for a second special symbol is executed. Furthermore, both the above-mentioned first advantageous game and the second advantageous game are configured to make it easier to execute a lottery for a special symbol than when the normal state is set as the gaming state.

By configuring it in this way, when the player is in an advantageous state that is favorable to the player, the player can select one advantageous game from among multiple advantageous games as a game in which it is easier to execute a lottery for a special symbol than in the normal state, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, regardless of which game the player selects, it is possible to make it easier to execute a lottery for a special symbol than in the normal state, providing the player with the fun of selecting a game method.

In the fifth embodiment, the player is allowed to select a play method that is advantageous to the player during the advantageous state, and the conditions for terminating the advantageous state are set to be different for the multiple play methods that the player can select. Specifically, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set as the advantageous state, and as the time-saving termination condition for terminating the time-saving state, in addition to the fluctuation count termination condition that is established when the special symbol fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times), a winning count termination condition that is established when the number of times a small prize is won in the special symbol lottery (small prize game is executed) reaches a predetermined number of times (1 time) is set, and the lottery for the first special symbol is configured to have a higher probability of winning a small prize than the lottery for the second special symbol.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the probability that the advantageous state ends in the first advantageous game in which a lottery for a first special symbol is executed, and the second advantageous game in which a lottery for a second special symbol is executed, i.e., the probability (continuation rate) of winning a jackpot during the advantageous state.

Furthermore, when a jackpot is won in a first advantageous game in which the advantageous state is less likely to be sustained among multiple advantageous games that the player can select, the content of the jackpot game is set so that the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game is greater than when a jackpot is won in a second advantageous game in which the advantageous state is more likely to be sustained than in the first advantageous game. Specifically, when a jackpot is won during the first advantageous game (when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol), 12 rounds of jackpot game are played, and when a jackpot is won during the second advantageous game (when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol), 10 rounds of jackpot game are played.

This allows the player to choose between a first advantageous game in which the advantageous state ends easily but the bonus when the jackpot is won is large, and a second advantageous game in which the advantageous state ends more slowly than the first advantageous game but the bonus when the jackpot is won is small. This allows the player to select the desired playing method according to the player's own convenience, such as the amount of time they can spend playing and their current form, and prevents the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

In this fifth embodiment, the time-saving state is used as the advantageous state, but this is not limiting, and the high probability state may also be the advantageous state. In other words, the high probability state ending conditions that end the high probability state may be configured to be configurable as a variable count ending condition and a winning count ending condition, and the ease of achieving the high probability state ending condition may be different between the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol. Even when configured in this way, it is possible to achieve the same effect as when the time-saving state described above is the advantageous state.

When the high probability state is used as the advantageous state, it is advisable to set in advance a first high probability state end condition under which the normal state is set when the high probability state end condition is met, and a second high probability state end condition under which the time-saving state is set, and to configure the transition destination of the game state to differ depending on which end condition is met first. In this case, for example, it is advisable to configure the game performance in each game state so that when the first high probability state end condition is met, a game state that is less favorable than the high probability state is set, and when the second high probability state end condition is met, a game state that is more favorable than the high probability state is set.

Specifically, it is preferable to configure the system so that the first probability variation end condition is met when the variation count end condition is met, and the second probability variation end condition is met when the winning count end condition is met, and the variation count end conditions are set to include a special pattern 1 variation count end condition that is met when the first special pattern has varied 50 times, a special pattern 2 variation count end condition that is met when the second special pattern has varied 80 times, and a combined variation count end condition that is met when the first special pattern or the second special pattern has varied a total of 100 times.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to further differentiate the game specifications between the first advantageous game in which a lottery for a first special symbol is executed and the second advantageous game in which a lottery for a second special symbol is executed, thereby making it more meaningful for the player to choose the game method. In addition, because a combined fluctuation count end condition is set, it is possible to prevent excessive play during an advantageous state from being executed by the player alternating between multiple advantageous games.

Furthermore, the game specifications can be further differentiated by setting the winning count end condition for special chart 1, which is satisfied when the first advantageous game is played, to be different from the winning count end condition for special chart 2, which is satisfied when the second advantageous game is played.

In the fifth embodiment, the conditions for ending the advantageous state (time-saving state) are varied depending on the type of special symbol, and the player is allowed to select a game method during the advantageous state (type of special symbol for which a lottery is executed during the advantageous state), thereby providing the player with a variety of games to play; however, without being limited to this, it is also good to configure the conditions for ending the time-saving state to vary depending on, for example, the type of jackpot that is won when a jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, a wider variety of games can be offered to the player during the advantageous state, which makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

In the fifth embodiment described above, the expected value of the amount of bonuses given to the player during the period when the advantageous state is set (i.e., the amount of bonuses (number of winning balls) when one jackpot is won divided by the average number of special pattern changes during which the advantageous state is set continuously when the advantageous state is set once) was designed to be the same regardless of which game method was selected during the advantageous state. However, when using a configuration in which the conditions for ending the advantageous state are different based on the type of jackpot in addition to the type of special pattern as described above, it is preferable to configure the system so that the expected value of the amount of bonuses given to the player is greater when the first advantageous game is selected than when the second advantageous game is selected depending on the type of jackpot won. This makes it possible to greatly differ in the subsequent game results depending on the game method selected by the player.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 169 to 177. In the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment, four game states can be set: a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), a probability-changing state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and a potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). In addition, a plurality of probability-changing states with different degrees of advantage for the player and a plurality of time-saving states with different degrees of advantage can be set.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the system is configured so that a player is more likely to receive a bonus if the jackpot is won by drawing the second special symbol, compared to when the jackpot is won by drawing the first special symbol. Specifically, when the jackpot is won by drawing the second special symbol, more prize balls can be won, and the probability of transitioning to a special symbol probability change state is higher (a jackpot type that can pass through probability change switch 65e3, described later, is more likely to be selected).

The probability of a special symbol being drawn is determined by a probability of a special symbol being drawn in a state 1 in which the first special symbol is likely to be drawn (i.e., relatively unfavorable), and the probability of a special symbol being drawn in a state 2 in which the second special symbol is likely to be drawn (i.e., relatively favorable) compared to the probability of a special symbol being drawn in a state 1 in which the time-saving state is also determined by a time-saving state being drawn in a state 1 in which the first special symbol is likely to be drawn (i.e., relatively unfavorable), and the time-saving state being drawn in a state 2 in which the second special symbol is likely to be drawn (i.e., relatively favorable) compared to the time-saving state being drawn in a state 1 in which the time-saving state is also determined by a time-saving state being drawn in which the second special symbol is likely to be drawn (i.e., relatively favorable).

In this way, even when the same game state is set, the type of special symbol that is likely to be drawn can be switched, and the amount of prize balls that can be won and the rate of transition to the special state can be varied according to the details of the set game state, allowing the player to play in a more advantageous state. This can increase the player's interest in the game. Note that special state 1 is a combination of a high probability state for special symbols and a high probability state for normal symbols 1 (time-saving state 1), and special state 2 is a combination of a high probability state for special symbols and a high probability state for normal symbols 2 (time-saving state 2).

Furthermore, although details will be described later, in this sixth embodiment, multiple operation (opening) patterns of the electric role device 701 (see FIG. 170) during the time-saving state are prepared, and the special symbol that is likely to be drawn during the time-saving state can be changed based on the operation (opening) pattern of the electric role device 701 that is set. And, the operation (opening) pattern of the electric role device 701 (see FIG. 170) is configured to be variably set based on the type of jackpot that has been won.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the special symbols that are likely to be drawn (varied) during the time-saving state based on the type of jackpot that has been won, providing the player with a variety of gameplay features. Furthermore, in this sixth embodiment, as in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, it is configured so that multiple time-saving states for ending the time-saving state are established based on the drawing of special symbols.

Specifically, the change count end condition that is established based on the number of times the special pattern changes is set as follows: a special pattern 1 change count end condition that is established based on the number of times the first special pattern changes, a special pattern 2 change count end condition that is established based on the number of times the second special pattern changes, and a combined change count end condition that is established based on the combined number of times the first special pattern changes and the second special pattern changes. The special pattern 1 change count end condition is set to 30 times the number of times the first special pattern changes, the special pattern 2 change count end condition is set to 100 times the number of times the second special pattern changes, and 100 times is set as the number of times of change that satisfies the combined change count end condition.

Furthermore, as the winning count end condition that is established when a small prize is won in the special pattern drawing, the special pattern 1 winning count end condition that is established based on the special pattern 1 small prize (small prize A) won by the drawing of the first special pattern, and the special pattern 2 winning count end condition that is established based on the special pattern 2 small prize (small prize B) won by the drawing of the second special pattern are set, and the special pattern 1 winning count end condition is set to 2 winning counts, and the special pattern 2 winning count end condition is set to 20 winning counts.

By configuring it in this way, depending on the type of special symbol that is selected (changed) during the time-saving state, it is possible to set a game in which the time-saving state is likely to end (a time-saving game in which the first special symbol is likely to be selected (changed)) and a game in which the time-saving state is unlikely to end (a time-saving game in which the second special symbol is likely to be selected (changed)).

In the sixth embodiment, the time-saving end conditions set for each special symbol may be such that the ease of ending the time-saving state differs depending on the type of special symbol, and any of the specific examples used (shown) in the above-mentioned embodiments may be adopted. The probability of a small win during the time-saving state may differ depending on the type of special symbol, or multiple types of small wins that can be won in a special symbol lottery may be provided, and in a configuration in which a win count end condition is set for each small win type, the probability of any of the win count end conditions being met may be different for each type of special symbol.

In other words, in this sixth embodiment, a plurality of advantageous state ending conditions (time-saving ending conditions) for ending an advantageous state (time-saving state), which is a game state advantageous to the player, can be set, and the ease with which the advantageous state ending conditions are established is varied depending on the type of advantageous state that is set. Furthermore, a plurality of advantageous states, which differ in the ease with which the advantageous state ending conditions are established, are transitioned to based on the type of jackpot that has been won.

This allows the player to win multiple jackpots and play in a variety of advantageous states. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, a special advantageous state is available to be entered only when multiple jackpots are won from the normal state, so the player can be motivated to play in a way that allows him or her to enter the special advantageous state through multiple jackpot wins.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, game states (e.g., normal state and advantageous state) are set with different expectations of transitioning to the special advantageous state that is most advantageous to the player, so that when a game state (advantageous state) with a high expectation of transitioning to the special advantageous state is set, it is easier for the player to continue playing, and game operation can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 in this sixth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed, that the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and that some of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and some of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been changed from those in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are the same as those in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 169, the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 169 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 169, the sixth embodiment differs from the game board 13 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 2) in the configuration of the lower side of the variable display unit 80 and the right side area. Specifically, the sixth embodiment differs in that there are two first ball entry ports (first ball entry port 64a1, right first ball entry port 64a0) that trigger the drawing of the first special pattern, and a second ball entry port 64b that triggers the drawing of the second special pattern, that is, there are three ball entry ports that trigger the drawing of the special pattern.

As shown in FIG. 169, in this embodiment, the first ball inlet 64a1 is provided on the lower side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, the right second ball inlet 64b is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, and the right first ball inlet 64a2 is provided on the right side of the right second ball inlet 64b when viewed from the front.

When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a1 and the right first ball entrance 64a2, a lottery for the first special symbol is held. In other words, the first ball entrance 64a1 and the right first ball entrance 64a2 are ball entrances with the same function. On the other hand, the right second ball entrance 64b is an entrance with a different function from the two types of ball entrances mentioned above, because a lottery for the second special symbol is held when a ball enters the right second ball entrance 64b.

As shown in FIG. 169, the right first ball entry port 64a2 is provided with a first operating device 645a. This first operating device 645a is formed of a pair of wing-shaped members so that it can be changed between an open state in which it is possible (easy) for a ball to enter the right first ball entry port 64a2 and a closed state in which it is impossible (difficult) for a ball to enter the right first ball entry port 64a2. This first operating device 645a switches to the open state when a ball enters the first operating port 704 provided inside the distribution winning device 700 described later. On the other hand, the first operating device 645a that has switched to the open state switches to the closed state when one ball enters.

Similarly, the right second ball entry port 64b is provided with a second actuating device 645b. This second actuating device 645b is also formed of a pair of wing-shaped members so that it can be changed between an open state in which it is possible (easy) for a ball to enter the right second ball entry port 64b, and a closed state in which it is impossible (difficult) for a ball to enter the right second ball entry port 64b. This second actuating device 645b switches to the open state when a ball enters the second actuating port 707 provided inside the distribution winning device 700. On the other hand, the second actuating device 645b that has switched to the open state switches to the closed state when one ball enters the right second ball entry port.

In the sixth embodiment, the first actuating device 645a and the second actuating device 645b are provided as restricting members for restricting the entry of balls into the right first ball entry port 64a2 and the right second ball entry port 64b, which are formed of a pair of wing-shaped members. However, any mechanism may be used to change the ease of entry of balls into each entry port. For example, the mechanism may be configured to restrict the entry of balls into the entry port by being positioned in a protruding state protruding from the game board 13, and to allow the entry of balls into the entry port by being positioned in a buried state buried in the game board 13. In the sixth embodiment, the mechanism is configured so that when the actuating device is in a closed state, the ball cannot enter the corresponding entry port (to which the actuating device is attached). However, the mechanism is not closed to the point where the ball cannot enter at all, but may be changed so that the ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the actuating device 645 is configured to be able to be positioned in two states, an open state and a closed state, but it may be configured to be variable to three or more states. In the sixth embodiment, an actuating device is attached to each of the right first ball entrance 64a2 and the right second ball entrance 64b, but other configurations may be used. For example, one actuating device may be changed to a first state to make it easier for a ball to enter one ball entrance (easier to enter than the other ball entrance) and harder for a ball to enter the other ball entrance (harder to enter than the one ball entrance), and by changing it to a second state different from the first state, it may be configured to make it harder for a ball to enter one ball entrance (harder to enter than the other ball entrance) and easier for a ball to enter the other ball entrance (easier to enter than the one ball entrance), in contrast to the first state described above. This allows the ball's entry into multiple entry holes to be varied depending on the operation of a single operating device.

On the right side of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front, a distribution winning device 700 is provided. This distribution winning device 700 is a device for distributing (allowing) balls that enter the inside to either the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. As described above, if a ball is distributed (enters) the first operating port 704, the first operating device 645a associated with the right first ball entry port 64a2 switches to an open state, and the ball can enter the right first ball entry port 64a2. On the other hand, if a ball is distributed (enters) the second operating port 707, the second operating device 645b associated with the right second ball entry port switches to an open state, and the ball can enter the right second ball entry port 64b.

Here, the details of the distribution winning device 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is an enlarged front view of the distribution winning device 700 provided in the right area of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. The upper surface side of the distribution winning device 700 is configured to allow balls to flow down. As shown in FIG. 81, the upper surface side of the distribution winning device 700 is inclined to the lower left when viewed from the front, so that balls that reach the upper surface of the distribution winning device 700 basically flow down to the lower left. In addition, an electric device 701 is provided on the upper right side of the distribution winning device 700. This electric device 701 is configured to be switchable between an open state (immersed state) in which balls can enter the distribution winning device 700 (easy) and a closed state (protruding state) in which balls cannot enter the distribution winning device 700 (difficult). This electric device 701 is set to the open state when a winning normal pattern is selected by lottery.

The downstream side of the electric device 701 branches into two paths, the first path 703 and the second path 706. The first operating port 704 is provided downstream of the first path 703, so that the balls that flow down the first path 703 enter the first operating port 704. On the other hand, the second operating port 707 is provided downstream of the second path 706, so that the balls that flow down the second path 706 enter the second operating port 707. In addition, at the position where the first path 703 and the second path 706 branch off, a switching valve (variable path) 702 is provided to switch the path through which the balls that enter the inside of the distribution winning device 700 through the electric device 701 flow down. This switching valve (variable path) 702 can be switched (slid) between a first switching state in which the balls flow down the first path 703 and a second switching state in which the balls flow down the second path 706. In the first switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 slides to the left when viewed from the front, blocking the upstream side of the second flow path and leaving only the first flow path open, so the ball advances to the first flow path. On the other hand, in the second switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 slides to the right when viewed from the front, blocking the upstream side of the first flow path and leaving only the first flow path open, so the ball advances to the second flow path.

The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is basically set to the first switching state, and is switched from the first switching state to the second switching state based on the passage of a predetermined period of time after a normal symbol is hit (e.g., 1.5 seconds after a normal symbol is hit). In addition, when a specific period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) has passed since the switching to the second switching state, the switching state is switched back to the first switching state.

If the ball can be made to enter the distribution winning device 700 during the second switching state, the ball can be made to flow down toward the second operating port 707. When the ball enters the second operating port 707, the second operating device 645b is set to the open state as described above, and the ball can be made to enter the right second ball entrance port 64b. In other words, it is advantageous for the player because it is possible to execute a lottery for the second special pattern, which has a high probability of being given a special pattern probability state in the event of a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the flow direction of the ball that entered the distribution winning device 700 (whether it flows down the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 707). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 170, a first operating mechanism 705 is provided inside the first operating port 704. This first operating port 704 is composed of a known non-electric device, that is, the first operating device 645a can be switched to an open state based on the weight of a ball that enters the first operating port 704. In addition, when the first operating device 645a is in the open state, the first operating device 645a can be switched to a closed state based on the weight of a ball that enters the right first ball entry port 64a2.

Meanwhile, a second operating mechanism 708 is provided inside the second operating port 707. This second operating mechanism 708 has the same configuration as the first operating mechanism 705. That is, the second operating part 645b can be switched to an open state based on the weight of the ball that enters the second operating port 707. Also, when the second operating part 645b is in the open state, the second operating part 645b can be switched to a closed state based on the weight of the ball that enters the right second ball entry port 64b.

In this way, by having a ball enter the allocation winning device 700, the ball can enter the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707, and the first operating device 645a or the second operating device 645b can be switched to an open state. As described above, if a jackpot is won by drawing special pattern 2, it is more advantageous than drawing special pattern 1, so the player can pay attention to whether the ball will enter the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Here, referring to FIG. 171, the correspondence between the operation (opening pattern) of the electric role 701 in the distribution winning device 700 and the switching operation of the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 will be described. As shown in FIG. 171, there are two types of operation (opening pattern) of the electric role 701 (opening pattern A and opening pattern B). When opening pattern A is set, the electric role 701 is set to an open state for a relatively long time (i.e., 1 second) immediately after the start of a normal pattern win, and then set to a closed state for 1.4 seconds. Then, after the open state is set for 0.1 seconds, the winning state ends. During the 1 second opening period, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so that the balls that enter the distribution winning device 700 during this period are distributed to the first operating port 704. On the other hand, during the 0.1 second opening period, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state, so any balls that enter the sorting and winning device 700 during this time are sorted to the second operating port 707. However, since it is difficult to get a ball to enter during the 0.1 second opening period, in many cases, balls that enter the sorting device 700 while opening pattern A is set are sorted to the first operating port 704, and the right first ball entry port 64a1 is opened. Therefore, when opening pattern A is set, it is relatively disadvantageous for the player.

On the other hand, when the opening pattern B is set, the electric device 701 is set to the open state for a very short time (i.e., 0.1 seconds) immediately after the start of the winning of the normal pattern, and then set to the closed state for 1.4 seconds. Then, after the opening state is set for a relatively long time (i.e., 1 second), the winning state ends. During the 0.1 second opening period, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so that the balls that enter the distribution winning device 700 during this period are distributed to the first operating port 704. However, as mentioned above, it is difficult to make the ball enter during the extremely short opening period of 0.1 seconds. On the other hand, during the 1 second opening period, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state, so that the balls that enter the distribution winning device 700 during this period are distributed to the second operating port 707. Therefore, in many cases, when the opening pattern B is set, balls that enter the distribution device 700 are distributed to the second operating port 707, and the right second ball entrance port 64b is opened. Therefore, when the opening pattern B is set, it is relatively advantageous for the player.

In this way, the degree of advantage for the player can be varied depending on the opening pattern that is set, so that the player can be interested in the opening pattern every time a normal pattern is hit. This can improve the player's interest in the game. In this embodiment, the opening pattern that is set is determined according to the game state. That is, in the normal state (non-probability-changing, non-time-saving state), time-saving state 1, and probability-changing state 1, when a normal pattern is hit, opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric role 701. On the other hand, in the time-saving state 2 and probability-changing state 2, opening pattern B is set when a normal pattern is hit. Therefore, in the time-saving state 2 and probability-changing state 2, the lottery for the second special pattern is easily executed, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the time-saving state 2 and probability-changing state 2, the lottery for the second special pattern is difficult to execute, which is disadvantageous for the player. In this way, the type of special pattern that is easily executed can be varied depending on the game state, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 169, the explanation will be continued. A variable winning device 65 is disposed at the lower right of the game board 13, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the approximate center of the variable winning device. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won by a jackpot lottery that is performed due to a ball entering (winning) the first ball entrance 64a1, the right first ball entrance 64a2, or the right second ball entrance 64b, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on to show a stopping pattern for the jackpot, and a stopping pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

The structure of the variable winning device 65 is the same as that of the V winning device 650 in the first embodiment (see Figures 4 to 6), and is as described above in the first embodiment. However, for the sake of convenience, the numerals with the numerals "650" in Figures 4 to 6 are replaced with the numerals "65" in the sixth embodiment. Although details will be omitted, the game ball that enters the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot passes through the special probability switch 65e3 (a switch used in place of the V switch 650e3 in the first embodiment) inside the device, so that a special probability state is granted after the jackpot ends. In this respect, the function is different from that of the V winning device 650 in the first embodiment. Other than that, the configuration and functions are the same, so the description will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in the Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 173 and FIG. 174. First, FIG. 173 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, FIG. 174(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 selection table 202b1 included in the first winning type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 174(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 selection table 202b2 included in the first winning type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. Note that the special symbol 1 selection table 202b1 is referred to in order to determine the jackpot type when the first special symbol is selected, and the special symbol 2 selection table 202b2 is referred to in order to determine the jackpot type when the second special symbol is selected.

First, referring to FIG. 174(a), the special chart 1 selection table 202b1 included in the first winning type selection table 202b will be described. FIG. 174(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 174(a), the special chart 1 selection table 202b1 specifies the jackpot type to be selected for each value of the first winning type counter C2. Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9" is associated with jackpot A. This jackpot A is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4, the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows the variable probability switch 65e3 to pass during the jackpot, and the time-saving state 1 is granted after the jackpot. A pattern that allows passage of the variable probability switch 65e3 is, for example, an operating pattern in which the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to on for five seconds based on the start of the fourth round (the flow path in which the variable probability switch 65e3 is installed in the variable prize-winning device 65 is opened). In a jackpot, the player shoots balls continuously toward the variable prize-winning device 65, so that one or more balls can flow down to the variable probability switch 65e3 within five seconds. When a ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 in a jackpot, a variable probability state is granted after the jackpot.

In other words, after a jackpot, special state 1 (a game state that combines a special symbol high probability state and a normal symbol high probability state 1 (time-saving state 1)) is granted. On the other hand, if the jackpot ends without the ball passing through special state switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the player did not shoot the ball during the jackpot, time-saving state 1 (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state 1) is granted after the jackpot ends. Although jackpot A is likely to enter a special state, the special state granted is special state 1, and it is difficult to draw the second special symbol during that special state, so it is at a disadvantage compared to jackpot types that are likely to grant special state 2 (jackpot B, jackpot F).

The range of values of the first winning type counter C2 from "10 to 49" corresponds to jackpot B. This jackpot B is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows the probability variable switch 65e3 to pass during the jackpot, and time-saving state 2 (normal pattern high probability state 2) is granted after the jackpot. When the ball passes through the probability variable switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability variable state 2 for the special pattern (special pattern high probability state, normal pattern high probability state 2) is granted after the jackpot.

In other words, after a jackpot, the player is granted special probability state 2, which combines the special symbol probability state and time-saving state 2. On the other hand, if the jackpot ends without the ball passing through special probability state switch 65e3 during the jackpot, for example because the player did not shoot the ball during the jackpot, only time-saving state 2 is granted after jackpot B ends. Jackpot B is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the game state after the jackpot, as it is easiest for the player to transition to special probability state 2, which is the most advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in terms of prize balls, the number of prize balls is less than when a jackpot is achieved by drawing the second special symbol, so it is at a disadvantage in terms of prize balls.

The range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "50 to 94" is associated with the jackpot C. This jackpot C is a type of jackpot in which the number of rounds is 4, the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that does not allow the probability change switch 65e to pass during the jackpot, and the time-saving state 1 is granted after the jackpot. The pattern that does not allow the probability change switch 65e3 to pass is, for example, an operation pattern in which the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 4th round (the flow path in which the probability change switch 65e3 is provided in the variable winning device 65 is opened). Even if the ball is entered at the same time as the 4th round starts and the specific winning port 65a is opened, the ball cannot reach the flow path in which the probability change solenoid 65k is provided within 0.5 seconds, so the flow path is closed before the ball reaches the probability change solenoid 65k. Therefore, in the jackpot C, the probability change state of the special pattern is not granted after the jackpot. In other words, jackpot C is a jackpot type that does not grant a special symbol probability state, and also grants a time-saving state 1 in which it is difficult to draw the second special symbol. Furthermore, the number of winning balls is also less than when a jackpot is won by drawing the second special symbol, making it the most disadvantageous jackpot type for players.

The range of values "95 to 94" on the first winning type counter C2 corresponds to jackpot D. This jackpot D is a type of jackpot in which the number of rounds is 4, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that does not allow the probability variable switch 65e3 to pass during the jackpot, and time-saving state 2 is granted after the jackpot. The probability variable state is not granted, and the number of prize balls is smaller than when a jackpot is won by drawing the second special symbol, but the time-saving state 2 is granted, which makes it easier to draw the second special symbol, so jackpot D is more advantageous than jackpot C.

Next, the special chart 2 selection table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIG. 174(b). FIG. 174(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 174(b), the special chart 2 selection table 202b2 also specifies the jackpot type to be selected for each value of the first winning type counter C2, as in the special chart 1 selection table 202b1. Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 19" is associated with jackpot E. This jackpot E is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows the variable probability switch 65e3 to pass during the jackpot, and the time-saving state 1 is granted after the jackpot. Although jackpot E is likely to enter a special state, the special state that is granted is special state 1, and since it is difficult to draw the second special symbol during that special state, the state after the jackpot ends is less favorable than jackpot types (jackpot B, jackpot F) that are likely to grant special state 2.

The range of values of the first winning type counter C2 from "20 to 79" is associated with the jackpot F. This jackpot F is a type of jackpot with 15 rounds, in which the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows the probability variable switch 65e3 to pass during the jackpot, and time-saving state 2 is granted after the jackpot. The jackpot F is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the game state after the jackpot, as it is easiest for the player to transition to probability variable state 2, which is the most advantageous for the player. In terms of prize balls, too, a larger number of prize balls can be obtained than in the case of a jackpot obtained by drawing the first special pattern. Therefore, the jackpot F is the most advantageous jackpot for the player.

The range of values "80 to 84" on the first winning type counter C2 corresponds to the jackpot G. This jackpot G is a type of jackpot with 15 rounds, in which the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that makes it impossible to pass the probability variable switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and time-saving state 1 is granted after the jackpot. Therefore, since the jackpot G is a jackpot type that does not grant a probability variable state for a special symbol, and also grants time-saving state 1 in which it is difficult to draw a lottery for a second special symbol, the game state after the jackpot ends is the most unfavorable. On the other hand, in terms of prize balls, it is more favorable than a jackpot resulting from a lottery for a first special symbol.

The range of values of the first winning type counter C2 from 85 to 94 is associated with the jackpot H. This jackpot H is a type of jackpot with 15 rounds, in which the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that does not allow the probability variable switch 65e3 to pass during the jackpot, and time-saving state 2 is granted after the jackpot. Although the probability variable state is not granted, time-saving state 2 is granted in which the drawing of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed, so the jackpot H is more advantageous than the jackpot C and jackpot G. In terms of the prize ball surface, it is also more advantageous than a jackpot obtained by drawing the first special symbol.

In this way, in this embodiment, various types of jackpots are provided. Since each type of jackpot has a different number of rounds and a different game state after the jackpot, the player can pay attention to which type of jackpot will be obtained when the jackpot is obtained by drawing a special symbol. This can improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, the number of prize balls that can be obtained and the ratio of jackpot types that are operation patterns that can pass the probability change switch 65e3 differ depending on whether the jackpot is obtained by drawing a first special symbol or a second special symbol. In other words, the player can win more prize balls if the jackpot is obtained by drawing a second special symbol, which is advantageous for the player. In addition, when the jackpot is obtained by drawing a second special symbol, the ratio of jackpot types (jackpot E, F) that are operation patterns that can pass the probability change switch 65e3 is 80%, whereas the ratio of jackpot types (jackpot A, B) that are operation patterns that can pass the probability change switch 65e3 is 50% in the drawing of a first special symbol. Therefore, if the player wins the jackpot in the drawing of the second special symbol, the player is more likely to enter the probability variable state. Therefore, since the player can be made to expect that the player will win the jackpot in the drawing of the second special symbol, the player can play the game while paying attention to whether the drawing to be executed is for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the type of high probability state for normal symbols is changed depending on the type of jackpot that is won. Specifically, normal symbol high probability state 1 and normal symbol high probability state 2 can be set. In addition to the normal state, five types of game states can be set: high probability state 1 in which high probability state 1 for normal symbols is set for the high probability state for special symbols, high probability state 2 in which high probability state 2 for normal symbols is set, time-saving state 1 in which high probability state 1 for normal symbols is set for the low probability state for special symbols, and time-saving state 2 in which high probability state 2 for normal symbols is set.

Now, with reference to FIG. 172, the method of transitioning game states in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 172, in this sixth embodiment, five game states are provided, and as described above, each time a jackpot is hit, a new game state is set after the jackpot ends. As shown in FIG. 172, when jackpot A occurs in the normal state (non-high probability, non-time-saving state), the game basically transitions to high probability state 1 (unless the ball is stopped from being shot during the jackpot), and when jackpot B occurs, the game transitions to high probability state 2. Also, when jackpot C occurs, the game transitions to time-saving state 1, and when jackpot D occurs, the game transitions to time-saving state 2.

Also, as shown in FIG. 172, when the game state is in time-saving state 1 (a time-saving state in which the drawing of the second special symbol is unlikely to be executed) or in special probability state 1 (a special probability state in which the drawing of the second special symbol is unlikely to be executed), the same state transition as in the normal state (non-special probability state, non-time-saving state) occurs. Although not shown in the illustration, in time-saving state 1 or special probability state 1, if a drawing of a special symbol is executed for the number of times the time-saving number has elapsed without a jackpot being won, the state transition occurs to the normal state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 172, when the game state is in time-saving state 2 (a time-saving state in which the second special symbol is likely to be drawn), if a jackpot E occurs, the game transitions to special probability state 1, if a jackpot F occurs, the game transitions to the most favorable special probability state 2, if a jackpot G occurs, the game transitions to time-saving state 1, and if a jackpot H occurs, the game transitions to time-saving state 2 (looping through time-saving state 2). Also, as shown in FIG. 172, even in special probability state 2 (a special probability state in which the second special symbol is likely to be drawn), the game transitions to the same state as in time-saving state 2. Although not shown in the illustration, if a special symbol is drawn for the number of times the time-saving number of times is reached without a jackpot being drawn in time-saving state 2 or special probability state 2, the game transitions to the normal state.

Next, referring to Figure 173, the configuration of RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 203 has at least a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb, a special chance counter 203zg, a special chance setting flag 203zs, a special chance passing counter 203zt1, a winning number counter 203zt2, an operation counter 203zt3, a counter buffer 203zh, a remaining ball timer flag 203zt4, a remaining ball timer 203zt5, a special chance valid flag 203zt6, a special chance valid timer 203zt7, a discharge number counter 203zt8, a time-saving counter 203zu, a time-saving identification flag 203zx, a big win flag 203zi, and other memory areas 203z.

Of these, the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, when a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 (through gate), the value of counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4) in order of the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, just like the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the order in which the winning balls were won is maintained and data corresponding to the winning balls is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a winning normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as the lottery for a winning normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas to the reserved area with the area number one smaller, just like in the case of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, data shifting is only performed for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203zb is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the normal pattern (second pattern) variable display performed by the second pattern display device 83 based on the passage of a ball through the normal ball entrance 67, up to a maximum of four. The normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203zb is initially set to zero, and is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four each time a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases. On the other hand, the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203zb is decremented by one each time a new normal pattern (second pattern) variable display is executed.

When a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb (the number of reserved normal symbol variable display times M) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za. On the other hand, when a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za.

The probability change counter 203zg is a flag indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change state of a special symbol (high probability state of a special symbol). If the value of the probability change counter 203zg is greater than 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change state of a special symbol, and if the value of the probability change counter 203zg is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a special symbol (low probability state of a special symbol). The probability change counter 203zg is initially set to zero, and is set to 100 when the probability change flag 203r described later is on in the main control device 110 at the timing when the specific ball entrance (large opening) 65a or the second specific ball entrance 650a closes in the final round of the jackpot (i.e., the timing when the jackpot ends), that is, when a game ball enters the probability change port 900a and is detected by the probability change switch (not shown).

In the sixth embodiment, the ball flows down a specific area (the area where the special probability switch 65e3 detects the ball) during a jackpot game, and the special probability state is set after the jackpot game ends (a predetermined value is set in the special probability counter 203zg). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special probability state may be set automatically after the jackpot game ends depending on the type of jackpot that was won.

When the MPU 201 executes the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol 2 variation start process, a lottery is held for the special symbol. In the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol 2 variation start process, the value of the probability change counter 203zg is referenced, and if the value is greater than 0, a lottery is held for the special symbol based on the first winning random number table for high probability, whereas if the value of the probability change counter 203zg is 0, a lottery is held for the special symbol based on the first winning random number table for low probability.

As described above, counter buffer 203zh is a buffer area used to count each counter value.

The jackpot flag 203zi is a flag that indicates whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203zi is on, a jackpot game is executed in which the allocation winning device 650 or the variable winning device 165 is set to an open state by the jackpot control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The special probability setting flag 203zs is a flag that indicates whether or not the game state is to be changed to the special probability state after a jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is to be set to the special probability state is determined by whether or not the game ball passes through the special probability switch 65e3 during a jackpot game (whether or not the special probability switch 65e3 detects a game ball during a jackpot game). Here, when a game ball passes through this special probability switch 65e3, the special probability setting flag 203zs is set to ON. On the other hand, based on the special probability flag 203r being set to ON, the special probability setting flag 203zs is set to OFF. Note that this special probability setting flag 203zs is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state it was in immediately before the power was turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to OFF in the initialized state.

The special chance passing counter 203zt1 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the special chance passing switch 65e3 in one round during a jackpot game (13 rounds for the jackpot B in this embodiment). The sum of the special chance passing counter 203zt1 and the discharged ball number counter 203zt8 described later can be used to determine whether all game balls that entered the first variable winning port 65 have been discharged. The special chance passing counter 203zt1 is updated by incrementing by one when a ball passes through the special chance passing switch 65e3. After a process is performed to determine whether the number of game balls that entered the first variable winning device 65 matches the number of balls discharged, the counter is reset to the initial value "0". The special chance passing counter 203zt1 is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, the counter is set to 0 when initialized.

The winning number counter 203zt2 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round of a big win game. Specifically, it is updated by incrementing by one based on the detection of a game ball passing through the detection port 65a1 provided in the first variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when one round is completed, it is reset to the initial value "0" after determining whether the number of balls that have won in the first variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203zt2) and the number of balls that have been discharged (the total value of the discharge number counter 203zt8 and the special chance passing counter 203zt1) match. The value of this winning number counter 203zt2 is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203zt3 is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excited). In this pachinko machine 10, in the case of a big win B, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round, and in the case of a big win C, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round. In the operation counter 203zt3, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of the 13th round in the case of a big win B, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the case of a big win C. Meanwhile, the counter is updated by subtracting 1 at a time in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In addition, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF based on the value of the operation counter 203zt3 being determined to be 0. In addition, the operation counter 203zt3 is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203zt3 and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, the winning of the probability change switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the type of jackpot.

The remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 is a flag indicating that the opening and closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 was closed in the first round. When this remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 is set to on, it indicates that the opening and closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 was set from an open state to a closed state in the first round. When this remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 is set to on, the remaining ball timer 203zt5, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203zt5 is a counter for determining the time since the opening and closing door 65f1 was closed, and is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203zt5 is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed when the opening and closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed after a preset round has ended. In this embodiment, the time required for the game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in this embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203zt5. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203zt5 (3 seconds in this embodiment), a determination is made as to whether the number of winning balls in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of balls discharged match. If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification is issued to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game balls are stuck in the first variable winning device 65. This prevents the fraudulent practice of leaving a game ball inside the first variable winning device 65 and then applying an impact or the like at the start of the 13th round to make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually does, thereby causing the game ball to pass through the guaranteed win switch 65e3 even in the event of a jackpot C.

If the number of winning balls and the number of balls dispensed do not match, a dedicated flag may be set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the special probability setting flag 203zs may not be set to ON even if the game ball passes through the special probability switch 65e3. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the special probability game state from being improperly granted.

The special chance valid flag 203zt6 is a flag for determining whether or not the passage of a game ball that passes through the special chance switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off is to be considered valid. When this special chance valid flag 203zt6 is set to on, it indicates that the time required for the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass through the special chance switch 65e3 based on the flow path solenoid 65k being on is less than or equal to that required. In other words, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the special chance switch 65e3.

The special chance valid timer 203zt7 is a counter for counting the time since the special chance valid flag 203zt6 described above is set to ON. This special chance valid timer 203zt7 makes it possible to determine the period required for a ball to pass normally through the special chance switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is turned OFF. In this embodiment, it takes one second for a game ball that has entered the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass through the special chance switch 65e3. The upper limit of the special chance valid timer 203zt7 is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the ball passes through the special chance switch 65e3 after that, it is determined to be an illegal ball and is not determined to have passed.

This makes it possible to prevent damage caused by fraud, such as by illegally directing a game ball into the special discharge flow path 65e2 without the switching member 65h guiding it to the special discharge flow path 65e2, causing the game ball to pass through the special variable switch 65e3, or by using a piano wire or the like to push the game ball up from below the special variable switch 65e3, causing the ball to pass through, or by using radio waves or the like to cause the magnetic sensor to erroneously detect that the ball has passed through.

The discharged ball number counter 203zt8 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 in one round. This discharged ball number counter 203zt8 is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of balls discharged have been determined.

The time-saving counter 203zu is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol changes remaining in the time-saving game state. This time-saving counter 203zu is set to 100 if the high probability setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. In other words, in this embodiment, if the high probability state is not set after the jackpot game, the game will transition to a 100-time time-saving state.

The time-saving identification flag 203zx is a flag for identifying the type of time-saving state. If this time-saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0, it means that it is in time-saving state 1 (probability change state 1). In addition, even in a normal state in which it is difficult to execute the lottery for the second special pattern as in time-saving state 1, this time-saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0. On the other hand, if the time-saving identification flag 203zx is set to 1, it means that it is in time-saving state 2 (probability change state 2). When a normal pattern is hit, the opening pattern of the electric role 701 is set by referring to this time-saving identification flag 203zx. Specifically, when the time-saving identification flag 203zx is 0 and a normal pattern is hit, the opening pattern A is set, so that the ball can enter the distribution winning device 700 during the opening period of the electric role 701, and the ball can enter the first operating port 704, and the left first ball entry port 64a2 can be entered.

On the other hand, when the time-saving identification flag 203zx is 1 and a normal pattern is hit, the opening pattern B is set, and the ball can enter the second operating port 707 by entering the prize-winning device 700 during the opening period of the electric role device 701, and the ball can enter the left second ball entrance 64b. At the end of a jackpot, this time-saving identification flag 203zx is set to a value corresponding to the time-saving state granted after the jackpot. Also, when the time-saving period for the normal pattern ends (i.e., when the time-saving counter 203zu becomes 0), it is set to 0.

The reason why the time-saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 in the normal state (non-probability-change, non-time-saving state) is to suppress the irregular playing method of shooting the ball to the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right hit) in the non-time-saving state. In other words, if the time-saving identification flag 203zx is configured to be 1 in the normal state, there is a risk that the player will always hit to the right in an attempt to execute a lottery for the advantageous second special pattern. In the normal state, the probability of a normal pattern winning is low, so it is difficult to get the ball to enter the right second ball entrance 64b, but in the event of a jackpot, there is an 80% chance that the special pattern will enter the probability-change state, so the benefit of a jackpot is large. Therefore, there is a possibility that irregular playing methods will be induced.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the time-saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 in the normal state, so that not only is the probability of a winning normal symbol low, but even if a winning symbol occurs, the opening pattern A is set, so that there is no advantage for the player to perform a right hit. Therefore, in the normal state, the player can be made to perform a left hit, so that irregular playing methods can be prevented (suppressed).

<Regarding control process of main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Fig. 175 to Fig. 177. The sixth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both configured to store reserved balls, and that a high probability state of the special symbol can be set after the end of the jackpot.

First, referring to FIG. 175, the special symbol variation process 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175) executed in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175).

In the special symbol variation process 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (Z201). The special symbol jackpot period includes the period when the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during special symbol jackpot play) and the period during a specified time after the special symbol jackpot play ends. If the determination results in a special symbol jackpot (Z201: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the special pattern is not a jackpot (Z201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (Z202), and if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is not changing (Z202: No), the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b (the number of reserved times N1 of the changing display in special pattern 1) and the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203ab (the number of reserved times N2 of the changing display in special pattern 2) are obtained (Z203).

Next, it is determined whether there are any reserved balls for the special pattern that are changing. Specifically, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is greater than 0 (Z204), and if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is 0 (Z204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203b is greater than 0 (Z209), and if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203b is 0 (Z209: No), it is determined that there are no reserved balls for the special pattern that are changing, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is greater than 0 (Z204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is decremented by 1 (Z205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ab changed by the calculation is set (Z206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ab from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by processing Z206, the data stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa is shifted (Z207). In processing Z207, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa is shifted in sequence to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, a special pattern 2 change start process is executed to start the change display in the first pattern display device 37. Note that a detailed explanation of the special pattern 2 change start process is omitted.

In addition, if the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is determined to be 0 (Z204: No) and the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203b is determined to be greater than 0 (Z209: Yes), the reserved balls of special pattern 1 are processed in the same manner as the reserved balls of special pattern 2 described above. Note that a detailed explanation of the special pattern 1 change start process will be omitted.

In the process of Z202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 has elapsed (Z214). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (Z214: No), the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (Z215), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z214, if the change time of the executing change display has elapsed (Z214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopping pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is set (Z216). The setting of the stopping pattern is performed in advance by the special pattern 2 change start process (Z208) or the special pattern 1 change start process (Z213). When this special pattern 2 change start process or special pattern 1 change start process is executed, the stopping pattern of special pattern 2 or special pattern 1 is set based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa or the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

After the processing of Z216 is completed, when the ongoing variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37, it is determined whether the display of the special symbol (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variable start processing is a special symbol jackpot (Z217). Then, if the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (Z217: Yes), the jackpot flag 203zi is set to on (Z218), a jackpot start command is set (Z220), the values of the time-saving counter 203zu and the probability jackpot counter 203zg are reset (Z271), and processing proceeds to Z222.

By setting the jackpot flag 203zi to ON in the processing of Z218, the processing for the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 52) of the main processing (see FIG. 51). The specific explanation is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so the explanation is omitted.

The jackpot start command set in the Z220 process is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, it transmits a jackpot start command for display to the display control device 114. This causes a display suggesting the start of a jackpot to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, allowing the player to recognize that a transition to a special game state has occurred.

On the other hand, in the process of Z217, if the current lottery result is a miss for the special symbol (Z217: No), the same time-saving count update process (see S219 in FIG. 38) as in the first embodiment described above is executed, and information is updated for the variable count end condition that is established based on the number of times the special symbol changes. After the process of S219 is completed, it is next determined whether the value of the special variable counter 203zg is greater than 0 (Z223), and if it is determined that the value of the special variable counter 203zg is greater than 0 (Z223: Yes), the value of the special variable counter 203zg is decremented by 1 (Z224), and the same processes of S220 and S221 as in the first embodiment described above are executed, and the process proceeds to Z222. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special variable counter 203zg is 0 (Z223: No), the process of Z224 is skipped and the process proceeds to S220.

In the process of Z222, a stop command is set to synchronize the lighting of the LED, which is the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 corresponding to the stop pattern set in the process of Z216, with the stop of the fluctuation of the third pattern display device 81 (Z222). When the process of Z222 is completed, this process ends.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, in the special pattern variation process 6 of this sixth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, it is determined whether a small win has been won, and if a small win has been won, the small win time-saving update process (see FIG. 41) corresponding to the small win that has been won is executed. By configuring in this way, as in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, it is possible to set a time-saving end condition (variation count end condition) that is established when the number of times the special pattern has changed reaches a predetermined number as a condition for ending the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns), in addition to the time-saving end condition (change count end condition) that is established when the number of times small wins have been won in the special pattern lottery reaches a predetermined number.

This makes it possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the timing when the time-saving state will end. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, a high probability state of a special symbol can be set as a game state that is set after the end of a jackpot, in addition to a high probability state of a normal symbol. The high probability state of a special symbol is configured to have an upper limit set to a predetermined number of times the special symbol changes (the value set in the high probability counter zg). In this way, when a game state (high probability state) other than the time-saving state (high probability state of a normal symbol) is set as a game state that is advantageous to the player, an end condition may be set for that game state (high probability state).

In this case, the condition for ending the special probability state may be configured to be a special probability end condition that is different from the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state described above. For example, the special probability end condition may be set to a number of small wins that is less than the time-saving end condition.

It is advisable to configure the requirements that cause the probability variable end condition to be established and the requirements that cause the time-saving end condition to be established so that they are different. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which of the probability variable end condition and the time-saving end condition will be established first. Therefore, for example, when the time-saving end condition is established (when transitioning from a state in which it is easy to execute the lottery for the special pattern to a state in which it is difficult), it is possible to estimate whether the probability variable end condition has already been established (whether transition has occurred from a state in which it is easy to win the jackpot with the special pattern to a state in which it is difficult).

As explained above, in the sixth embodiment, the game state that is advantageous to the player can be set to a time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) and a probability-changing state (high probability state of special symbols), and in addition to the change count end condition (time-saving state change count end condition, probability-changing state change count end condition) that is established when the number of times the special symbols change reaches a predetermined number of times as the end condition for each game state, a win count end condition (time-saving state win count end condition, probability-changing state win count end condition) that is established when the number of times a predetermined small win is won reaches a predetermined number of times is set. Therefore, unlike a gameplay that only involves whether or not the player moves from a game state that is advantageous to the player to an unfavorable game state, the end of the time-saving state (establishment of the time-saving end condition) and the end of the probability-changing state (establishment of the probability-changing end condition) allow the player to transition to various game states.

Therefore, one end condition (e.g., a time-saving end condition) may be established before the other end condition (e.g., a probability-change end condition) for the player, and the period from when one end condition is established until the other end condition is established (e.g., a latent period) may be configured to be the most advantageous play period for the player. This provides a new gameplay experience in which the player plays while hoping that an end condition will be established to end a play state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, which is one of the play states.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, depending on the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) to be set, a time-saving state (high probability state) in which the lottery for the first special symbol is mainly executed and a time-saving state (high probability state) in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed can be set. The system is configured so that the lottery result that is more advantageous to the player is more likely to be obtained by the lottery for the second special symbol than by the lottery for the first special symbol. The system is configured so that it is easy to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (high probability state) in which the lottery for the first special symbol is mainly executed, and easy to transition from the time-saving state (high probability state) in which the lottery for the first special symbol is mainly executed to the time-saving state (high probability state) in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set a more advantageous gaming state for the player by transitioning between multiple gaming states via a jackpot or the like, so that the player can have the expectation of playing in the most advantageous gaming state. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to configure it so that the game state transitions to the most advantageous gaming state for the player only when the time-saving end condition is met before the probability change end condition is met in a state where the probability change state (probability change state 2) in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed is set.

As a result, a game state that is advantageous to the player is set based on winning the jackpot in the lottery for the special symbol, and further, when a game state that is advantageous to the player is set and a specific ending condition for ending that game state is met, the game state transitions to an even more advantageous game state, and when a condition other than the specific ending condition is met, the game state transitions to an unfavorable game state. This allows the player to play with a constant sense of tension.

In addition, as the specific end conditions for ending a game state advantageous to the player used in this sixth embodiment, and end conditions other than the specific end conditions, the various end conditions described in each of the above embodiments may be applied, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 176, the jackpot control process 6 (Z1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process 6 (Z1105). This jackpot control process 6 (Z1105) is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot, and for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a.

In the jackpot control process 6 (Z1105), first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203zi is on or not (Z1301). In the process of Z1301, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203zi is off (Z1301: No), there is no need to control the jackpot, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z1301 that the jackpot flag 203zi is on (Z1301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is time to start a jackpot (Z1371). If it is determined in the process of Z1371 that it is time to start a jackpot (Z1371: Yes), an opening command is set (Z1372) and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of Z1371 that it is not the start timing of a jackpot (Z1371: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round or not (Z1374). If it is determined in the process of Z1374 that it is the start timing of a new round (Z1374: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process 6 is executed (Z1375) to set the opening and closing operation of the first specific winning port 64a and the switching operation of the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k, and this process is terminated.

When the jackpot operation setting process 6 (Z1375) is executed, first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario, and the switching operation of the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set based on the read opening scenario (data). Then, the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set.

In this way, each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power outage occurs during a jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a malfunction such as the jackpot game ending midway.

On the other hand, if the processing of Z1374 determines that it is not time to start a new round (Z1374: No), then it is determined whether it is time to switch the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376).

If it is determined in the processing of Z1376 that it is time to switch the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376: Yes), the state of the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is switched (Z1377), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the processing of Z1376 determines that it is not the timing for the switching operation of the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing for the ending performance to start (Z1378).

If it is determined in the processing of Z1378 that it is the timing to start the ending performance (Z1378: Yes), Ending Process 6 is executed (Z1379) and this processing ends. Details of Ending Process 6 (Z1379) will be described later with reference to FIG. 177.

If it is determined in the processing of Z1378 that it is not the timing to start the ending performance (Z1378: No), prize processing 6 is executed (Z1380), abnormality processing 6 is executed (Z1381), and this processing ends.

When winning process 6 (Z1380) is executed, it is first determined whether it is within the valid round period. The valid round period is the period during which a round of play is set, that is, the period from when the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened until the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the valid round period, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the valid round period, it is determined whether it has passed through the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning port 65a. If it is determined that it has passed through the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning port 65a, the winning number counter 203zt2 is updated by incrementing it by 1, and it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203zt2 is 10 or more.

If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203zt2 is 10 or more, the end condition for the current round of play has been met, so the door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to close and the remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 is set to ON. By setting this remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 to ON, it can be determined that the ball discharge time has begun since the door 65f1 was closed.

In this way, in the winning process 6, a process is executed to determine whether the round play end condition is met during one round play in the jackpot game. Furthermore, a process is executed to determine whether the ball has properly passed through the special probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is greater than 0, and if it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is greater than 0, the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is updated by -1, and then it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the special probability switch 65e3.

If it is determined that a game ball has passed the special chance switch 65e3, the special chance passing counter 203zt1 is updated by adding 1 to the value. The special chance setting flag 203zs is set to ON. Then, it is determined whether the operation counter 203zt3 is 0. If it is determined that the operation counter 203zt3 is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF, the special chance valid flag 203zt6 is set to ON, and this process ends. By setting the special chance valid flag 203zt6 to ON, even after the switching member 65h has been switched, if a game ball remaining in the special discharge flow path 65e2 passes through the special chance switch 65e3, the special chance game can be set.

As a result, if the probability variable effective timer 203zt7 is not at its upper limit, it is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability variable switch 65e3, so the probability variable game state can be set taking into account the time it takes for the ball to be cleared. Also, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variable game state from being improperly granted by passing the game ball through the probability variable switch 65e3.

Next, as abnormality processing 6 (S1381), a process is executed to monitor whether the game ball has been improperly passed through the special chance switch 65e3.

Next, referring to FIG. 177, details of ending process 6 (Z1379 in FIG. 177) will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process 6 (Z1379). In ending process 6 (Z1379), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (Z4101). Next, the big win flag 203zi is set to OFF (Z4102), and it is determined whether the special chance setting flag 203zs is ON (Z4103). When it is determined that the special chance setting flag 203zs is ON in the processing of Z4103 (Z4103: Yes), the special chance counter 203zg is set to 100 (Z4104). Although not shown in the figure, the special chance setting flag 203zs is configured to be set to OFF based on the special chance counter 203zg being set to 100. After that, the process proceeds to this Z4105 processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z4103 that the special chance setting flag 203zs is not on (Z4103: No), the processing of Z4104 is skipped and the process moves to the processing of Z4105.

In the process of Z4105, it is determined whether the jackpot game being played was based on any of the jackpots A, C, E, and G (Z4105). If it is determined in the process of Z4105 that the jackpot was any of the jackpots A, C, E, and G (Z4105: Yes), the time-saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 (Z4106), and the process proceeds to Z4108.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z4105 that the jackpot was not A, C, E, or G (Z4105: No), the time-saving identification flag 203zx is set to 1 (Z4107), and the process proceeds to Z4108.

By processing Z4106 or Z4107, the time-saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 or 1, which switches the opening pattern of the electric role set in the normal pattern change processing. When processing Z4106 or Z4107 is completed, the value of the time-saving counter 203zu is set to 100 (Z4108), and this processing ends.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a time-saving state (high probability state) is granted, the type of time-saving state that is set is set to differ depending on the type of jackpot. As a result, in the time-saving state that is executed after the jackpot game, when a game ball enters the distribution winning device 700, it is possible to switch between whether the game ball enters the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707, and it is possible to switch between whether the game ball enters the right first ball entry port 64a2 or the right second ball entry port 64b depending on the type of jackpot.

Therefore, in the time-saving state, it is possible to switch between whether the lottery is performed with the first special symbol or the second special symbol. And, by setting the advantage given to the player in the lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol differently, the size of the benefit given to the player can be changed depending on the type of jackpot. In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is changed between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the special rate, the probability of jackpot determination, the number of time-saving times, the variable time, etc. may be set differently between the first special symbol and the second special symbol to set the benefits differently. Also, by configuring as in this embodiment, even in a special jackpot game state with the same jackpot probability, the type of special symbol that changes during the time-saving (during special jackpot) can be switched depending on the type of time-saving state that is granted, and the benefit that the player can receive in the special jackpot game state can be changed. Therefore, a special jackpot game state in which multiple benefits are granted differently can be set. In addition, in this embodiment, the types of jackpots announced by the jackpot switch 65e3 are set to be more frequent for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol, so multiple jackpot rates can be set. Therefore, the jackpot rate can be changed depending on the time-saving state, providing players with a fresh experience.

Furthermore, in this sixth embodiment, the conditions (ease of ending) for the time-saving state (probability change state) to end are different when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed and when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the degree of advantage between the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed.

In addition, in the second and fifth embodiments described above, the player is allowed to select between a game in which a lottery for the first special symbol is executed and a game in which a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, and the player is allowed to play the game corresponding to the game method selected. In other words, when a predetermined game state (time-saving state) is set, either game (a game in which a lottery for the first special symbol is executed, or a game in which a lottery for the second special symbol is executed) is allowed to be executed. In contrast, in the sixth embodiment, in a predetermined game state (for example, a time-saving state), a game state (time-saving state 1) in which one game (for example, a game in which a lottery for the first special symbol is executed) can be executed is set, and in a state in which the time-saving state 1 is set, a game state (time-saving state 2) in which the other game (for example, a game in which a lottery for the second special symbol is executed) can be executed when a predetermined condition is established is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set and provide different game states to the player in stages, making it possible to provide a gaming machine with more strategy elements than the second and fifth embodiments described above.

By configuring it in this way, for example, the time-saving end condition that ends the time-saving state in the drawing of the first special symbol that is executed when time-saving state 1 is set is configured to be more likely to be met than the drawing of the second special symbol. Specifically, the change count end condition is met when the number of changes (draws) of the first special symbol reaches 30, and the win count end condition is met when the small win is won twice by the drawing of the first special symbol.

Then, during the period in which time-saving state 1 is continuously set, in some cases where a jackpot with a special symbol is won, time-saving state 2 (a time-saving state in which a lottery for a second special symbol is executed) is set after the jackpot ends (after the jackpot game ends). As described above, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the time-saving end condition is configured to be more difficult to achieve than the lottery for the first special symbol; specifically, the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is met when the number of fluctuations (lotteries) of the second special symbol reaches 100, and the condition for ending the number of wins is met when 20 small jackpots are won by the lottery for the second special symbol.

By configuring it in this way, once time-saving state 2 is reached, the time-saving state is more likely to continue than in time-saving state 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with time-saving states with different degrees of play. In the above example, the time-saving state is shown as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, but this is not limited to this, and it may also be used for a probability variable state, or the end conditions of the probability variable state and the time-saving state may be managed independently, and a play state (latent probability state) may be set in which, for example, there is a high probability of a special pattern and a low probability of a normal pattern.

In addition, the game state termination conditions that can be set in this sixth embodiment may be any of the termination conditions set in each of the above-mentioned embodiments or any of the assumed termination conditions, or a combination of multiple termination conditions.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is configured such that the degree of advantage differs between the case where a jackpot is obtained by drawing a first special symbol and the case where a jackpot is obtained by drawing a second special symbol, so that the player is more advantageous if the jackpot is obtained by drawing a second special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, two types of time-saving states, time-saving state 1 and time-saving state 2, are provided as time-saving states that are granted after the end of a jackpot. Time-saving state 1 is a time-saving state in which the drawing of the first special symbol is made easier (the ball is made easier to enter the right first ball entrance 64a2), and time-saving state 2 is a time-saving state in which the drawing of the second special symbol is made easier (the ball is made easier to enter the right second ball entrance 64b). More specifically, in the time-saving state 1, the electric role 701 is opened at a timing when the ball is likely to enter the first operating port 704 inside the allocation winning device 700 (the first operating role 645a is likely to open) in the case of a win. Therefore, by hitting from the right in the time-saving state 1, the ball is likely to enter the right first ball entrance 64a1, so the lottery for the first special symbol is likely to be executed. On the other hand, in the time-saving state 2, the electric role 701 is opened at a timing when the ball is likely to enter the second operating port 707 inside the allocation winning device 700 (the second operating role 645b is likely to open) in the case of a win. Therefore, by hitting from the right in the time-saving state 2, the ball is likely to enter the right second ball entrance 64b, so the lottery for the second special symbol is likely to be executed.

In this embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is provided with a special probability switch 65e3 inside, and the flow path inside is changed to provide a special probability switch 65e3 that allows the ball to pass through (easy) during a jackpot, and a special probability switch 65e3 that does not allow the ball to pass through (difficult). The ratio of special probability switch 65e3 that allows the ball to pass through is changed depending on whether the jackpot is selected for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, thereby changing the ratio of special probability switch 65e3 that allows the ball to pass through. In other words, the special probability switch 65e3 is changed to make it easier to transition to the special probability switch 65e3 when the jackpot is selected for the second special symbol, compared to when the jackpot is selected for the first special symbol. This configuration makes the player want to play the lottery for the second special symbol, so that the player can pay more attention to which operating port (either the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707) the ball that enters the allocation winning device 700 will enter. This can increase the player's motivation to participate in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, like the time-saving state, the probability change state has two types of states with different degrees of advantage. That is, there is a probability change state 1 in which the first special symbol is likely to be drawn, and a probability change state 2 in which the second special symbol is likely to be drawn. The rate of transition to the probability change state differs depending on whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is drawn, and multiple probability change states with different degrees of advantage are provided for the probability change state that is granted, so that the player can play while aiming for the better state. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to vary (draw) only one of them according to a predetermined rule, but as in the fourth embodiment described above, this may also be used in a gaming machine configured to draw the first special symbol and the second special symbol independently.

In the sixth embodiment, the type of special symbols that are drawn (changed) during the time-saving state is completely separated according to the type of time-saving state (time-saving state 1, time-saving state 2) that is set, but the invention is not limited to this, and the frequency of drawing (changing) each special symbol may be different according to the type of time-saving state that is set. For example, when time-saving state A is set, the ratio is such that the second special symbol is drawn (changed) twice for one drawing (changing) of the first special symbol, when time-saving state B is set, the ratio is such that the second special symbol is drawn (changed) three times for one drawing (changing) of the first special symbol, when time-saving state C is set, only the first special symbol is drawn (changed), and when time-saving state D is set, only the second special symbol is drawn (changed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with various playability according to the time-saving state that is set.

Instead of the pachinko machine 10 used in the sixth embodiment described above, the following pachinko machine 10 may be used, and in the normal game state, a game (hereinafter referred to as normal game) is played in which the first ball entrance 64a1 is targeted. If a jackpot is won as a result of a lottery (special drawing 1 lottery) that is performed based on the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64a1, a jackpot game is played in which the second variable winning device 65 is opened, and depending on the type of jackpot won, the probability of winning a jackpot is increased by the special drawing lottery after the jackpot game ends, and a probability-varying game state (hereinafter referred to as a probability-changing state) in which the special drawing lottery is more likely to be won, or a time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a time-saving state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot does not change but the special drawing lottery is more likely to be won is given.

The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a probability variable state 1 in which the drawing of special chart 1 is essentially performed during the probability variable state, and a probability variable state 2 in which the drawing of special chart 2 is essentially performed. The machine is also set up so that a jackpot based on the drawing of special chart 2 is more advantageous to the player than a jackpot based on the drawing of special chart 1 (either a larger number of balls can be obtained in one jackpot play, or it is easier to transition to a play state after the end of a jackpot play where it is easier to win a jackpot with a larger number of balls can be obtained in one jackpot play).

In other words, this pachinko machine 10 provides the player with two probability variable states, probability variable state 1, which is more advantageous to the player than normal play, and probability variable state 2, which is even more advantageous than probability variable state 1. This, for example, increases the rate of transition from normal play to probability variable state (makes it easier to enter probability variable state 1), making it easier for the player to experience a game state (probability variable state) in which it is easier to hit a jackpot than in normal play, making it easier for the player to experience the effects during a jackpot game or the effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the probability variable state, making the game more enjoyable, or reduces the rate of transition to probability variable state 2, making it possible to provide a player who has transitioned to probability variable state 2 with a sense of superiority, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the time-saving state of this pachinko machine 10, similar to the above-mentioned probability variation state, time-saving state 1 and time-saving state 2 can be set, and both time-saving state 1 and time-saving state 2 are set as game states in which it is easier to receive a special chart lottery than in normal play (game states in which it is easier for a ball to enter the ball entry hole where the special chart lottery is executed, and further, it is easier to set a shorter variation time for the special chart in the special chart lottery than in the normal play state). Furthermore, time-saving state 1 is configured so that the lottery for special chart 1 is actually executed, and time-saving state 2 is configured so that the lottery for special chart 2 is actually executed, and time-saving state 2 is set as a game state that is more advantageous to the player than time-saving state 1.

When using such a pachinko machine 10, the game board 13 may be configured as follows. That is, referring to FIG. 169, when the game state transitions to a probability variable state or a time-saving state after the end of a big win game, a game (hereinafter referred to as a right-hand hit game) is executed, which aims at the right area of the game board 13 (the area to the right of the variable display unit 80). When a right-hand hit game is executed, a ball shot to the right area of the game board 13 collides with the return rubber 69, passes through the through gate (normal ball entry port) 67 or between the nails planted near the through gate (normal ball entry port) 67, and flows down toward the allocation winning device 700. The allocation winning device 700 is provided with an electric device 710, and is configured so that when the electric device 710 is in an open state, the ball can enter the allocation winning device 700. This electric device 710 opens when the result of the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery), which is executed based on the ball passing through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, is a winning symbol. Note that the electric device 710 is provided with multiple opening patterns, and it is preferable to configure it so that the timing at which the ball enters the distribution winning device 700 is different.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, the configuration within the distribution winning device 700 will be described. When the electric device 710 installed in the distribution winning device 700 is opened, the balls can enter the distribution winning device 700, and the balls that enter the distribution winning device 700 fall onto the switching valve 702 (it takes about 0.4 seconds for the balls that enter the distribution winning device 700 to reach the switching valve 702). This switching valve 702 is configured to perform a predetermined operation based on the result of the general lottery that a winning (general winning) is won, and either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is configured to communicate as a flow path through which the balls can flow down depending on the operating position of the switching valve 702. As mentioned above with reference to FIG. 82, the switching valve 702 operates to open the second flow path 706 from 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after the normal winning is won, and the first flow path 703 is operated to open during the rest of the time.

This mechanism, which changes the state of the props to open or close using the movement of the ball without using any electrical components, is a well-known technology called a non-electric prop. In this embodiment, a detailed explanation of the configuration of this non-electric prop is omitted, but any technology that has already been disclosed may be used as appropriate.

On the other hand, when a ball flows down the second flow path 706 in the distribution winning device 700 and enters the second operating port 707, the second operating mechanism 708 opens the second operating device 645b in the same manner as the configuration of the non-electric device described above. When the second operating device 645b opens, the ball enters the right second ball entry port 64b, which is available for entry, and a lottery for special figure 2, which is set more favorably than special figure 1, is executed. Note that the configuration of the non-electric device consisting of the second operating port 707, the second operating mechanism 708, and the second operating device 645b is the same as the configuration of the non-electric device consisting of the first operating port 704, the first operating mechanism 705, and the first operating device 645a described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

The switching valve 702 described above is designed to open the second flow path 706 only for a predetermined period, that is, from 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds after a normal winning combination (2 seconds), and the first flow path 703 is open during other periods (including periods when a normal winning combination is not won). This is to prevent the special drawing 2 drawing from being executed through fraudulent play, since a special drawing that is advantageous to the player is executed when the ball enters the second operating device 645b, which opens by flowing down the second flow path 706.

The right area of the game board 13 can be configured so that when a ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 makes the right first ball entry port 64a2 or the right second ball entry port 64b available for entry, a ball that has flown down the right area of the game board 13 without entering the distribution winning device 700 is guided by multiple nails to enter one of the available ball entry ports.

Furthermore, a switching valve 702 is provided within the prize distribution device 700 to distribute the entering balls to the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706, and this switching valve 702 is configured to operate to a position where the second flow path is connected for 3 seconds 1.5 seconds after a normal winning is won. The operation control of this switching valve 702 is configured to perform a certain operation regardless of which opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the electric role 710.

Furthermore, in this fourth embodiment, the operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled so that the operation is executed at a timing delayed by a predetermined period or more (0.5 seconds or more) from the operation of the electric device 701 so that the balls that enter in the opening pattern A are reliably guided to the first flow path 703, and the balls that enter in the opening pattern B are reliably guided to the second flow path 706. This makes it possible to guide the balls that enter the sorting and winning device 700 to the desired flow path, and prevents the balls from flowing down from the sorting and winning device 700 during the operation of the switching valve 702 to change the state.

According to the alternative example described above, the opening pattern of the electric role (electric role) can be set based on the type of jackpot, and a game state in which the special role 1 actually changes and a game state in which the special role 2 actually changes can be set based on the set opening pattern of the electric role (electric role). Furthermore, it is set up so that a player is granted a more advantageous privilege (more balls can be obtained by playing the jackpot, and a higher probability of transitioning to a game state in which the special role 2 is actually drawn) if he wins a jackpot in the special role 2 lottery than if he wins a jackpot in the special role 1 lottery.

This makes it possible to further set the time-saving state and the probability of winning state into game states that are advantageous to the player (time-saving state 2, probability of winning state 2) and game states that are less advantageous to the player than the advantageous game states but more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (time-saving state 1, probability of winning state 1). This makes it possible to set a variety of game states for the game played on the pachinko machine 10, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

Specifically, by setting the transition rate from the normal game state to the time-saving state 1 or the probability variable state 1 high, the player can easily see the effects that are executed in the time-saving state or the probability variable state, and by setting the transition rate to the probability variable state 2, which is the game state that is most advantageous to the player, low, a sense of superiority is given to the player who has transitioned to the probability variable state 2, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, two types of opening patterns, opening pattern A and opening pattern B, can be set as the opening patterns of the electric role (electric role), but the present invention is not limited to this and three or more types of opening patterns can be set. This makes it possible to set a wider variety of game states.

In addition, the opening patterns of the electric role (electric device) are set to an opening pattern (opening pattern A) that guides the ball to the first flow path 703 and an opening pattern (opening pattern B) that guides the ball to the second flow path 706, but for example, an opening pattern may be set in which the electric device 701 opens when the ball is guided to either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706. This allows the player to enjoy wondering which flow path (first flow path 703 or second flow path 706) the ball that enters the electric device 701 will be guided to, making it possible to further increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, although the distribution winning device 700 is configured so that balls that enter it enter one of the operating ports (first operating port 704 or second operating port 707), for example, a flow path may be provided that discharges the balls from the distribution winning device 700 back to the game board 13, or a flow path may be provided that allows the balls to enter an outlet that communicates with an outlet port (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 without entering each operating port. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the flow of the balls inside the distribution winning device 700, making the game even more exciting.

The switching valve 702 is configured to perform a predetermined fixed operation after a winning game is executed, but it may be configured to always perform a fixed operation after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, for example, or it may be configured to switch the connecting flow path when the number of balls entering the prize-winning device 700 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls).

The operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled by an electrical drive source (a motor, not shown), but it may also be configured to be actuated by a ball coming into contact with the switching member, the switching valve 702, and to switch the connected flow path when a predetermined condition (e.g., 10 balls passing) is met.

Furthermore, the ball guided to one of the flow paths by the switching valve 702 is configured to flow down the flow path and enter one of the operating ports, but for example, a distribution member may be provided that distributes the ball guided to one of the flow paths by the switching valve 702 to multiple flow paths, and the ball distributed to a specific flow path by the distribution member may enter the corresponding operating port.

In addition, the balls that enter the distribution winning device 700 are configured to reach the switching valve 702 in a fixed time (0.4 seconds in this embodiment), but as a means for varying (extending) the time it takes for a ball that enters the distribution winning device 700 to reach the switching valve 702, for example, a distribution means may be provided that distributes the balls that enter the distribution winning device 700 to one of the paths with different time periods until they reach the switching valve 702. This has the effect of preventing players from getting bored of the game early, as it becomes possible to play while predicting when a ball that enters the distribution winning device 700 will reach the switching valve 702.

Next, the transition of game states in the above-mentioned alternative example of pachinko machine 10 will be explained. This pachinko machine 10 is configured to transition between the normal game state, special probability state 1 (unfavorable special probability state), special probability state 2 (favorable special probability state), time-saving state 1 (unfavorable time-saving state), and time-saving state 2 (favorable time-saving state) based on the type of jackpot that has been won.

First, in the normal game mode, a game is played in which the variation of special chart 1 is executed, and if a jackpot is won, 50% of the time the game will move to special state 1, 30% of the time the game will move to special state 2, 15% of the time the game will move to time-saving state 1, and 5% of the time the game will move to time-saving state 2.

Next, in the special probability state 1, the release pattern A is set as the electric role release pattern, and a game is played in which the special symbol 1 changes (actual change of the special symbol 1). In the special probability state 1, when a jackpot is won, there is a 50% chance of looping the special probability state 1, 30% chance of transitioning to the special probability state 2, 15% chance of transitioning to the time-saving state 1, and 5% chance of transitioning to the time-saving state 2. In this way, the special probability state 1 is a game state in which the special symbol 1 changes substantially, just like the normal game state, and so although it differs in that the probability of a jackpot is set higher than in the normal game state, the game state transition destination and distribution after winning a jackpot are the same.

In the probability variable state 2, the release pattern B is set as the electric role release pattern, and a game is played in which the special chart 2 changes (actual change of the special chart 2). In the probability variable state 2, if a jackpot is won, there is an 80% chance that the game will loop through the probability variable state 2, a 15% chance that the game will move to the time-saving state 2, and a 5% chance that the game will move to the time-saving state 1. In this way, the probability variable state 2 is a game state in which the special chart 2 actually changes, and is also a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is set higher than in the normal game state, making it the most advantageous game state for the player.

Next, in time-saving state 1, opening pattern A is set as the electric role opening pattern, so a game is played in which the special symbol 1 changes (actual change of special symbol 1). In time-saving state 1, when a jackpot is won, there is a 50% chance of transitioning to probability variable state 1, a 30% chance of transitioning to probability variable state 2, a 15% chance of looping through time-saving state 1, and a 5% chance of transitioning to time-saving state 2. In this way, time-saving state 1 is a game state in which special symbol 1 changes substantially, just like the normal game state, so the time it takes for the special symbol and normal symbol to change is shortened, and the opening pattern of the electric role 701 when a normal symbol is hit is different from that in the normal game state, but the destination of the game state after winning a jackpot and its allocation are the same.

In time-saving state 2, opening pattern B is set as the electric role opening pattern, so a game in which the special chart 2 changes is played (actual change of special chart 2). In time-saving state 2, if a jackpot is won, there is an 80% chance of transitioning to probability change state 2, a 15% chance of looping through time-saving state 2, and a 5% chance of transitioning to time-saving state 1. In this way, time-saving state 2 is a game state in which the special chart 2 actually changes, and is a game state in which the probability of transitioning to probability change state 2, which is most advantageous to the player when a jackpot is won, is set to 2.5 times or more than in the normal game state (the so-called pull-back zone). By providing such a game state, it is possible to increase the possibility of transitioning to the most advantageous game state (probability change state 2) for the player compared to the normal game state, and to have the player play with enthusiasm.

The game state transition destination and transition allocation rate after a jackpot in each game state are not limited to this and may be set as appropriate. For example, the time-saving state to transition from the normal game state may be time-saving state 2 only. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in motivation to play for players who win a jackpot in the normal game state but are unable to transition to the special probability state.

In addition, the game state transition destination and allocation rate are unified according to the type of special chart regardless of the game state, but without being limited to this, the game state transition destination and transition allocation rate may be changed according to the game state. This has the effect of making it possible to provide more complex gameplay and preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special state continues until the next big win, and 10 times of time saving are granted as a time-saving state regardless of the game state, but for example, the special state may continue until the special symbol changes a specified number of times (e.g., 100 times), or a lottery is held to transition to the normal game state each time the special symbol changes, and a transition from the special state to the normal game state occurs if the lottery is won. In this case, for example, a difference may be set in the number of times the special symbol changes before the special state ends, or the lottery probability for transitioning from the special state to the normal game state may be different to set a special state that is favorable to the player and a special state that is unfavorable to the player.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 178 to FIG. 195. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, at least a first end condition (variation number end condition) that is established when the variable display of the special pattern is executed a first number of times (for example, 100 times) without winning the big win, and a second end condition (winning number end condition) that is established based on winning the small win a second number of times (for example, 5 times) without winning the big win are set so that the time-saving state is ended when any one of the multiple time-saving end conditions is established. Furthermore, by configuring the winning number end condition to be a different number for each type of small win, the configuration is configured to realize a gameplay in which it is difficult to predict the timing when the time-saving state ends. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, regardless of the game state at the time when the small prize is won, the degree of advantage for the jackpot that is initiated when a V prize is generated during the execution of a small prize game (when the game ball passes through the V prize switch 650e3) is configured to be the same.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, instead of having one type of end condition for the time-saving state, the player is allowed to select whether or not to establish the end condition for the time-saving state. More specifically, when a small win is won, the player is allowed to select whether to enter the game ball into the V winning device 6500 provided in place of the V winning device 650 to execute a jackpot game, or to reduce the remaining number of time-saving games without entering the game ball. The degree of advantage for the player is different between when a jackpot is won during the time-saving state and when a jackpot is won after the time-saving state ends. In other words, the player is more likely to win a type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player (a type of jackpot that is granted a time-saving state after the jackpot ends) if the jackpot is won in the normal state after the time-saving state ends. This allows the player to choose whether or not to place the game ball into the V winning device 6500 each time a small jackpot is won during the time-saving mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the game board 13 has a partially changed board configuration, that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound and lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound and lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 178, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 178 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 178, the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment has a V winning device 6500 on the left side of the board, which is set to a state in which a game ball can enter for a predetermined period of time when a small win is won, similar to the V winning device 650 in the first embodiment, compared to the game board 13 in the first embodiment. The V winning device 6500 is placed on the left side because the seventh embodiment has a gameplay in which the player can choose whether or not to generate a V winning during the execution of a small win game in the time-saving state. That is, if the V winning device 6500 is configured to be installed in the direction in which the game ball is launched in the time-saving state (i.e., the right side of the game board 13), even if the player wants to choose not to generate a V winning during a small win, the game ball that has already been launched by hitting from the right may enter the V winning device 6500, causing a V winning to occur against the player's will. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the V winning device 6500 is configured to be installed on the left side of the board, and unless the game method is changed in the time-saving state (i.e., unless the game is switched from right-hitting to left-hitting), a V winning cannot occur (is difficult to occur). This allows players who do not want to generate a V winning in a small win game to end the small win game without generating a V winning.

The V winning device 6500 in the seventh embodiment is provided with a V switch 6500e3 inside. The V switch 6500e3 is configured to start a jackpot when a game ball passes through it, similar to the V switch 650e3 in the first embodiment. That is, in a small win game in which the V winning device 6500 is set to a ball-enterable state, a jackpot game is started based on the game ball entering the V winning device 6500 and passing through the V switch 6500e3. In addition, in this seventh embodiment, the internal mechanism of the V winning device 6500 is configured so that all game balls that enter the V winning device 6500 pass through the V switch 6500e3. That is, the inside of the V winning device 6500 in the seventh embodiment is not provided with any configuration equivalent to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 or the switching member 650h in the V winning device 650 in the first embodiment, and all the entered game balls are discharged to the outside after flowing down the special discharge flow path 6500e2 and passing through the V winning switch 6500e3. Therefore, in the small winning game, the big win is confirmed when at least one game ball enters the V winning device 6500, so that the playability of the small winning game can be made simple and easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to realize a playability that is easy for the player to understand. Note that, although details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, when a small winning is won, the player is configured to shoot game balls toward the V winning device 6500 by continuously hitting the left side, and 10 or more game balls enter the V winning port 6500a. Therefore, when a small win is won, a player who wishes to start a big win can easily pass the V winning switch 6500e3 to start the big win. Even if multiple game balls pass the V winning switch 6500e3 in one small win game, only the game ball that first passes the V winning switch 6500e3 is used to determine the start of the big win, and the subsequent game balls have no effect on whether or not the big win can be executed. In other words, even if multiple game balls enter the V winning device 6500 in one small win game and multiple game balls pass the V winning switch 6500e3, only one big win is executed (multiple rights to become a big win are not acquired in one small win). Therefore, the ratio of the number of game balls that trigger the execution of a big win to the number of game balls that enter the V winning device 6500 in a small win game is substantially 1/10 or less.

Also, as shown in FIG. 178, in the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment, instead of the second ball entrance 640 in the first embodiment, the second ball entrance 6400 is provided on the right side of the board. As shown in FIG. 178, this second ball entrance 6400 is provided with an electric role 6400a, and since the electric role 6400a normally closes the second ball entrance 6400, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400, while when a normal pattern is selected, the electric role 6400a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds x 1 time, or 2 seconds x 2 times), creating a state in which the ball can enter the second ball entrance 6400. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 178, in the seventh embodiment, the through gate 67 is provided (moved) on the upstream side on the right side of the board. This shortens the distance the launched ball travels to reach the through gate 67 when the ball is hit from the right, making it easier to draw the normal symbol more quickly.

Here, referring to FIG. 179, the details of the V winning device 6500 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 179 is a top view of the V winning device 6500 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 179, the opening and closing door 6500f1 of the V winning device 6500 in the seventh embodiment is configured to form a flow path through which multiple game balls can pass on its upper surface when closed. More specifically, the upper surface of the opening and closing door 6500f1 is formed with a flow path through which the game balls can flow down from the left side to the right side when viewed from the front, and protrusions 6500fa to 6500fe are provided to prevent the game balls from flowing down the flow path. The game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 6500f1 are prevented from flowing down by the respective convex parts 6500fa to 6500fe, so they flow down the opening and closing door 6500f1 along the outer periphery of each of the convex parts 6500fa to 6500fe. In other words, a zigzag flow path is formed on the opening and closing door 6500f1 by each of the convex parts 6500fa to 6500fe. Therefore, compared to a case where each of the convex parts 6500fa to 6500fe is not provided (i.e., a case where the game balls can flow down the opening and closing door 6500f1 in a straight line from the right direction to the left direction when viewed from the front), the period required for the game balls to flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 6500f1 can be made longer. In other words, when game balls are continuously shot toward the V winning device 6500 by left-handed play, it is configured so that multiple game balls are likely to flow down the opening and closing door 6500f1 at the same time. Therefore, when a small win occurs and the opening and closing door 6500f1 is opened, multiple game balls that were flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 6500f1 at the time of opening can be dropped into the inside of the V winning device 6500 immediately after the opening of the opening and closing door 6500f1. This makes it possible to enter more game balls in one small win game, so that at least one game ball can be easily entered into the V winning device 6500 for a player who wants to start a big win (enter a game ball into the V winning device 6500 and pass the V winning switch 6500e3) when a small win is won. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 180, the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 6500f1 set when a small win is won in this seventh embodiment will be described. In this seventh embodiment, only one opening pattern is specified as the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 6500f1. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 180, the opening/closing door 6500f1 is kept in a closed state for three seconds after the small win game starts, and the opening/closing door 6500f1 is opened when three seconds have passed. By hitting the left side continuously during the three-second closed period, about five game balls can be made to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1, so that the game balls that have reached the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1 can be made to enter the V winning device 6500 immediately after the opening/closing door 6500f1 is switched (changed) to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 180, the open state continues for 0.6 seconds, and the opening and closing door 6500f1 is closed at the point where 0.6 seconds have elapsed (3.6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small win). After that, as shown in FIG. 180, the closed state for 3 seconds (the period during which multiple game balls can reach (accumulate) the top surface of the opening and closing door 6500f1 by hitting from the left) and the open state for 0.6 seconds (the period during which the game balls that have reached the top surface of the opening and closing door 6500f1 are guided into the inside of the V winning device 6500) are repeated a maximum of two times, and the small win game ends when the total of the third open state ends. Note that if the entry of 10 or more game balls, which is the upper limit of the number of winning balls in a small win, is detected, the small win game ends at the point of detection. If a game ball enters the V winning device 6500 before the small win game ends, it passes through the V winning switch 6500e3, and the big win starts after the small win game ends. In this way, in the seventh embodiment, the combination of the upper surface structure of the opening door 6500f1 in the V winning device 6500 and the opening pattern of the small win allows more game balls to enter in one small win game. More specifically, if the opening period is not set in three parts for 0.6 seconds each as in the seventh embodiment, but is simply set to an open state of 1.8 seconds (0.6 seconds x 3) immediately after the start of the small win game, only about three game balls can be launched during the opening period, so there is a possibility that no game ball will enter the V winning device 6500. In other words, even if a player wishes to start a big win and hits left during a small win game, the player will not be able to start the big win, which may reduce the player's motivation to play. In contrast, in the seventh embodiment, multiple game balls can be easily inserted into the V winning device 6500 during one small win game, so that a player who wishes to start a big win and hits the right hand during a small win game can easily insert a game ball into the V winning device 6500 to start a big win. This prevents the player's motivation for playing from decreasing, and further increases the player's interest in playing.

Next, referring to FIG. 181 and FIG. 182, a characteristic effect during the time-saving state in the seventh embodiment will be described. Here, in the time-saving state in the seventh embodiment, as in the time-saving state in the first embodiment described above, every time a special symbol is drawn, an effect in which the boy character 801 searches for a treasure chest is executed as part of a variable display effect (variable pattern effect) for showing the result of the lottery for the special symbol. If the lottery result is a small win (or a big win), an effect in which the treasure chest is found is executed, and if a game ball enters the V winning device 6500 during the execution of a small win game and the start of a big win (two-type win) is confirmed after the end of the small win, an effect in which the treasure chest 802 is successfully opened is executed, and an effect in which a V display 803 appears from the treasure chest 802 indicating that a big win game is set (see FIG. 13(a)) is executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not enter the V winning device 6500 during the small win game (the conditions for starting the big win are not met) because the player does not hit the ball with the left hand during the small win game, an effect is executed in which the boy character 801 passes through the treasure chest 802 without opening it.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, in the time-saving state in which the electric device 6400a is more likely to open (the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 6400), each time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 by hitting from the right and the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern increases, an effect of acquiring a key is executed. Details of this effect of acquiring (accumulating) a key will be explained with reference to Figures 181(a) and (b). Note that the display contents of the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, and therefore a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 181(a), in the time-saving state in the seventh embodiment, a display area HR6 is formed above the boy's character 801 to indicate the remaining number of time-saving times. FIG. 181(a) illustrates a case where the remaining number of time-saving times is 10, and the words "10 times remaining" are displayed inside the display area HR6. In the seventh embodiment, when the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot, the number of time-saving times is always set to 10. In other words, FIG. 181(a) is a diagram showing the display content immediately after the end of a time-saving jackpot. In the seventh embodiment, when the time-saving state is transitioned to after the end of a jackpot, four display areas HR1 to HR4 are formed to the right of the boy's character 801. In these four display areas, each time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 and the number of reserved balls increases, an image of a key in a form corresponding to the reserved ball is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 181(a), a display area HR5 is formed in the secondary display area Ds, displaying the words "Hit right to collect keys!!" These display modes allow the player to easily understand that keys will be collected in the display areas HR1 to HR4 by hitting right.

Figure 181 (b) is a diagram showing the display mode when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 in the time-saving state. As shown in Figure 181 (b), when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400, an image resembling a key is displayed in the display area HR4. This allows the player to easily understand that the ball entering the second ball entrance 6400 and the display of the key are linked. Note that this key image has multiple modes. Although details will be described later, in this seventh embodiment, the mode of the key is configured to suggest to the player the degree of advantage in the case where a V entry is generated (when a game ball is allowed to enter the V entry device 6500). In other words, when a V entry is generated, the expected degree of the time-saving state being granted after the end of the jackpot based on the V entry is suggested to the player by the display mode of the key image. More specifically, in addition to the key in the form shown in FIG. 181(b) (the normal form), there are also provided a key form that is larger than the normal form as a form with high expectation, and a sun form that is more worn out than the normal form as a form with low expectation. Depending on the display form of these keys, it is possible to realize a gameplay that allows the player to select whether or not to generate a V win.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the probability of the time-saving state being granted is higher for the jackpot that is executed when a V-winning occurs in a small win that is won during the time-saving state than for the jackpot that is executed when a V-winning occurs in a small win that is won during the time-saving state. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the small win can only be won by drawing a lottery for the second special pattern. In other words, the case where a small win is won in the normal state is when a small win is won with a reserved ball of the second special pattern that is reserved during the time-saving state and used for drawing after the time-saving state ends. Therefore, in the time-saving state in the seventh embodiment, even if a small win is won during the time-saving state, by continuing to hit the right, the reserved balls continue to be accumulated while avoiding the ball entering the V-winning device 6500 provided on the left side of the board, and the time-saving count ends with more reserved balls accumulated (i.e., transitions to the normal state) and the reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed, which increases the expectation of the time-saving state. Therefore, during the time-saving state, the type of jackpot that will start if a V win occurs (whether or not the time-saving state will be granted) is guessed from the state of the key, and unless it is guessed that a jackpot that will grant the time-saving state will start, a V win is avoided, which realizes an extremely unique and innovative gameplay, and can further increase the player's interest in the game. Also, during the time-saving state, the player can be made to want to keep the number of reserved balls as large as possible (i.e., the upper limit of four), which can make the player more proactively hit the right during the time-saving state. This can increase the player's motivation to participate in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 182(a), the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when a small win is won during the time-saving state will be described. As shown in FIG. 182(a), when a small win is won during the time-saving state, an effect is executed in which a boy character 801 discovers a tattered-looking treasure chest 802 with the word "DANGER" written on it. During the time-saving state, the appearance of the treasure chest is set to be tattered, which makes the player think that it would be better not to open the treasure chest 802. In other words, it is possible to suggest to the player that if a V win occurs during the time-saving state and a jackpot is won, the probability of the time-saving state being granted is low.

In addition, a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular display area HR7 displaying the word "Select" is formed at the bottom of the main display area Dm, a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular display area HR8 displaying the words "Use key!!" and "Hit left" is formed in the left half of the sub-display area Ds, and a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular display area HR9 displaying the words "Save key!!" and "Hit right" is formed in the right half. Furthermore, an arrow image YG that resembles a right-facing arrow (i.e., an arrow pointing in the direction of display area HR4) is displayed on the left side of display area HR4. This arrow image YG allows the player to easily understand that the key that can be used for the currently displayed treasure chest 802 is the key displayed in display area HR4. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the treasure chest 802 can be opened using the key displayed in the display area HR4 by hitting from the left (i.e., a V win can be generated and a big win can be started), whereas the treasure chest 802 can be left unopened by continuing to hit from the right (i.e., the small win game can be ended without a V win). Therefore, a novel gameplay can be realized in which, depending on the state of the key, etc., the player can choose to hit from the left to start a big win and aim for a time-saving state, or continue to hit from the right to end the small win game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Note that any keys that are not used because the player continues to hit from the right will disappear when the small win ends.

182(b) is a diagram showing the display mode in the case where a small win is obtained by a lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special pattern when the time-saving state ends and the state transitions to the normal state while there is a reserved ball of the second special pattern. As shown in FIG. 182(b), if a small win is won in the normal state after the time-saving state ends, an effect is executed in which the boy character 801 discovers a treasure chest 802 in a shining appearance. By setting the appearance to a more luxurious appearance than when a small win occurs during the time-saving state (when the treasure chest 802 in a tattered appearance is displayed), the player can easily understand that he or she should open the treasure chest 802. In other words, if a V win occurs in the normal state after the time-saving state (the time-saving state ends) and a big win occurs, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the time-saving state will be granted after the big win ends. Also, as shown in FIG. 182(b), a display area HR5 of a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular shape in which the text "Use the key stocked by hitting left!!" is displayed is formed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that if a small win occurs after the time-saving state has ended (the time-saving count has elapsed and the state has transitioned to normal), the player should hit left to generate a V win.

In this way, in the seventh embodiment, the probability of the time-saving state being granted after the end of a jackpot is higher when a 2-type win is initiated by generating a V win during the execution of a small jackpot game won in the normal state than when a jackpot (2-type win) is initiated by generating a V win during the execution of a small jackpot game won in the time-saving state. During the time-saving state, the presentation mode (the display mode of the key image) is configured to suggest the expectation that the time-saving state will be granted if a V win is generated. This allows for the realization of an extremely unique and innovative gameplay in which, when a small jackpot is won in the time-saving state, the player is given the choice of ending the small jackpot without generating a V win, or generating a V win and starting a jackpot.

In the seventh embodiment, the performance mode is different between the time-saving state and the normal state after the time-saving state ends (the state in which the reserved ball of the second special pattern exists), and the performance mode is set to encourage (suggest) a left hit (i.e., a V win) if a small win is won in the normal state after the time-saving state ends, but this is not limited to this. For example, even if the time-saving state has not ended, as soon as the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern becomes maximum, a performance that encourages a left hit (a V win) may be executed. If the number of reserved balls is maximum, even if the time-saving state is not granted after the big win ends (i.e., even if the game state after the big win ends is set to the normal state), the expectation of a small win by the reserved ball of the second special pattern in the normal state after the big win ends is high (i.e., the expectation of starting a two-type big win in the normal state where the time-saving state is granted at a high rate) is high, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

In the seventh embodiment, when a small win is won during the time-saving state, the sub-display area Ds is configured to suggest to the player both the game method (hit left) for generating a V win (using a key) and the game method (hit right) for avoiding a V win (not using a key) mainly by text (see FIG. 182(a)), but this is not limited to this. The image displayed in the main display area Dm may also be configured to suggest to the player each game method (game method for generating and avoiding a V win). More specifically, for example, the display areas HR1 to HR4 and the arrow image YG may be moved to the left in the main display area Dm, and four display areas (display areas HRR1 to HRR4) of a horizontally elongated rectangular shape similar to the display areas HR1 to HR4 and an image (arrow image YG2) imitating an arrow similar to the arrow image YG may be provided. In addition, in the left display areas HR1 to HR4, an image of a key for opening the treasure box 802 may be displayed, as in the seventh embodiment, and in the right display areas HRR1 to HRR4, an image of a bomb for blowing up the treasure box 802 may be displayed. The arrow image YG may be configured as a left-facing arrow pointing toward the display area HR4, and the arrow image YG12 may be configured as a right-facing arrow pointing toward the image of a bomb displayed in the lowermost display area HRR4 of the right display areas HRR1 to HRR4. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand that if he hits right in accordance with the instruction of the arrow image YG2 that imitates a right-facing arrow, he can end the small win by blowing up the treasure box 802 with a bomb (avoid winning a V prize). On the other hand, if he hits left in accordance with the instruction of the arrow image YG that imitates a left-facing arrow, he can easily understand that he can open the treasure box 802 (generate a V prize) using the key displayed in the display area HR4. That is, the arrow image YG and the arrow image YG2 can have multiple different roles, such as indicating the items (keys and bombs) to be used in the small win effect currently being performed, and indicating the player's playing method for using the items (the direction in which the game ball is fired). This allows for a display mode that is easy for the player to understand, while also making efficient use of the display elements, resulting in a more suitable presentation mode.

<Electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 183(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 183(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 183(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19(a)) in that the small win type selection table 202f and the open scenario table 202g are deleted. In addition, it is different in that the contents of the first win random number table 202a, the first win type selection table 202b, the second win random number table 202c, the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the time-saving grant table 202e are partially changed.

First, the details of the first winning type selection table 202a in this seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 184(a) and (b). Although not shown in the figures, the first winning random number table 202a in this seventh embodiment, like the first winning random number table 202a in the first embodiment (see Fig. 21(a)), has two types of tables defined: a special pattern 1 random number table 202a1 for use in drawing the first special pattern, and a special pattern 2 random number table 202a2 for use in drawing the second special pattern. First, the contents defined in the special pattern 1 random number table 202a1 in this seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 184(a).

Figure 184 (a) is a diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in this seventh embodiment. In this special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, similar to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the first embodiment, a random number value (judgment value) that is judged as a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol is prescribed. More specifically, as shown in Figure 184 (a), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in this seventh embodiment is prescribed in association with "0 to 9" as the range of the counter value (random number value) of the first winning random number counter C1 that is judged as a jackpot. Therefore, in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is any value of "0 to 9", it is judged as a jackpot, while if it is not any value of "0 to 9" (any value of "10 to 999"), it is judged as a miss. Of the 1000 possible counter values (random numbers) of "0-999" for the first winning random number counter C1, the 10 counter values (random numbers) that are determined to be a big win are "0-9", so the probability of a big win being determined in the drawing of the first special symbol is 1/100 (10/1000). Note that, like the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the first embodiment, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment does not specify a random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a small win. Therefore, the probability of a small win being determined in the drawing of the first special symbol (winning a small win) is 0.

Next, referring to FIG. 184(b), the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, similar to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the first embodiment, random numbers (judgment values) that are judged as a big win and a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol are specified. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 184(b), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the seventh embodiment is specified in correspondence with "0 to 9" as the range of counter values (random number values) that are judged as a big win, and is specified in correspondence with "10 to 989" as the range of counter values (random number values) that are judged as a small win. Of the 1000 possible counter values (random numbers) of "0 to 999" of the first winning random number counter C1, the counter values (random numbers) determined as a big win are 10 from "0 to 9", and the counter values (random numbers) determined as a small win are 980 from "10 to 989". Therefore, the probability of determining a big win in the lottery of the second special symbol is 1/100 (10/1000), and the probability of determining a small win is 98/100 (980/1000). That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to win a small win almost (with a probability of 98/100). Therefore, in the time-saving state, since a small win is won in the lottery of the special symbol almost every time, it is possible to enjoy the gameplay of having the player choose whether or not to generate a V prize. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 184(c), the contents of the second winning random number table 202c in the seventh embodiment will be described. This second winning random number table 202c is a data table in which the range of values of the second winning random number counter C4 that are judged to be a winning normal pattern is specified, similar to the second winning random number table 202c in the first embodiment. When a lottery for a normal pattern is executed, the random number value (counter value) specified in this second winning random number table 202c is compared with the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the normal pattern is a winning pattern.

Figure 184 (c) is a diagram showing the contents of the second winning random number counter C4 in this seventh embodiment. As shown in Figure 184 (c), the second winning random number table 202c in this seventh embodiment specifies a random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a winning normal pattern in a high probability state (time-saving state) of a normal pattern, and a random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a winning normal pattern in a low probability state (normal state) of a normal pattern. More specifically, as shown in Figure 184 (c), 200 random number values (counter values) from "5 to 204" are specified as the random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a winning normal pattern in a high probability state of a normal pattern. Of the 240 random numbers between 0 and 239 that the second winning random number counter C4 can take, 200 are determined to be winning normal symbols, so the probability of winning normal symbols in the high probability state (time-saving state) is 1/1.2 (200/240).

As shown in FIG. 184(c), only "0" is specified as the random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a winning normal symbol in a high probability state for normal symbols. Of the 240 random number values "0 to 239" that the second winning random number counter C4 can take, there is only one random number that is determined to be a winning normal symbol, so the probability of a winning normal symbol in a high probability state for normal symbols (time-saving state) is 1/240.

In this way, in the seventh embodiment, the probability of winning the normal pattern in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal pattern is set to an extremely low probability. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular playing method of hitting the right in the normal state in the hope that the normal pattern will win and the game ball will enter the second ball entrance 6400. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even if the normal pattern is selected in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal pattern, the electric role 6400a is configured to be opened only for an extremely short time (0.2 seconds x 1 time). As a result, even if a right hit is performed during the normal state, the probability of winning the lottery of the normal pattern is low, and even if it is a hit, the game ball can hardly be entered into the second ball entrance 6400, so it is possible to make the player think that it is better to play by hitting the left to enter the first ball entrance 64 and aim for a jackpot in the lottery of the first special pattern (it is not worth hitting the right). This makes it possible to curb irregular gameplay methods that involve hitting the right side during normal play.

Next, the details of the first win type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 185(a). This first win type selection table 202b is a data table that is referenced to specify (determine) the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won, similar to the first win type selection table 202b in the first embodiment. FIG. 185(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this first win type selection table 202b.

As shown in FIG. 185(a), the first winning type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment specifies a direct winning table 202be1 for identifying (determining) the type of winning when a winning is achieved by a special symbol lottery (a so-called "direct winning" occurs), and a V winning table 202be2 for identifying (determining) the type of winning when a winning is achieved based on the occurrence of a V winning. First, the details of the direct winning table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIG. 185(b).

Figure 185 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the direct hit table 202be1. As shown in Figure 185 (b), in this seventh embodiment, two types of jackpot types, "jackpot A7" and "jackpot B7", are provided as jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is won (a direct hit occurs) in the lottery of special symbols. "Jackpot A7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and when the jackpot is won in a normal state, a time-saving state with 10 time-saving times is given after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, "jackpot B7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and when the jackpot is won in a normal state, a normal state is set after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal state, "jackpot A7" is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B7" because the game state after the jackpot ends is more advantageous. In the time-saving state, it is configured so that a favorable time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends regardless of which jackpot is won. This is because if a direct hit occurs relatively early after the transition to the time-saving state, the player will not be able to fully enjoy the gameplay of choosing whether or not to generate a V win, which is a characteristic gameplay feature of the seventh embodiment, in that time-saving state, so by configuring the game to always transition to the time-saving state even after the direct hit, the player can be sure to enjoy playing in the time-saving state. In other words, to prevent the player from being disappointed by transitioning to the normal state without being able to fully enjoy playing in the time-saving state, the game is configured to always enter the time-saving state after a direct hit during the time-saving state.

When a direct hit occurs, either "jackpot A7" or "jackpot B7" is specified according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 only, regardless of the type of special symbol that triggered the direct hit (whether it was a jackpot by drawing the first special symbol or a jackpot by drawing the second special symbol). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 185(b), "jackpot A7" is specified in correspondence with the range of the first hit type counter C2 values "0 to 49", and "jackpot B7" is specified in correspondence with the range of the first hit type counter C2 values "50 to 99". In other words, 50 values of the first hit type counter C2 are specified for each of "jackpot A7" and "jackpot B7". Therefore, when a direct hit occurs, the rate at which "jackpot A7" is specified and the rate at which "jackpot B7" is specified are half and half (both 50%).

Next, referring to FIG. 185(b), the V hit table 202be2 will be described in detail. As described above, the V hit table 202be2 is a data table that specifies data for specifying (selecting) the type of jackpot to be executed when a V win occurs in a small win game (the game ball passes through the V win switch 6500e3). FIG. 185(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the V hit table 202be2. As shown in FIG. 185(b), the V hit table 202be2 specifies four types of jackpots: "jackpot C7", "jackpot D7", "jackpot E7", and "jackpot F7".

As shown in FIG. 185(c), the value "0" of the first winning type counter C2 is associated with "jackpot C7". This "jackpot C7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This "jackpot C7" is the jackpot type that has the most rounds among all the jackpot types, and the game state after the jackpot is also advantageous to the player, so it is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot C7" is 1, so the probability (proportion) that "jackpot C7" will be determined (selected) as the type of jackpot that will start when a V win occurs during the execution of a small winning game is 1/100 (1%).

As shown in FIG. 185(c), a "jackpot D7" is defined to correspond to the range of hits "1 to 4" on the first hit type counter C2. This "jackpot D7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8, and when the jackpot is won in a normal state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, whereas when the jackpot is won in a time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player. This "jackpot D7" has the second most number of rounds after "jackpot C7," and when the jackpot is won in a normal state, the game state after the jackpot ends is advantageous, making it the second most advantageous jackpot type after "jackpot C7." Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) between 0 and 99 that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot D7" is 4, so the probability (proportion) that the "jackpot D7" will be determined (selected) as the type of jackpot that will be started if a V win occurs during a small winning game is 4/100 (4%).

As shown in FIG. 185(c), a "jackpot E7" is defined to correspond to the range of hits "5 to 29" on the first hit type counter C2. This "jackpot E7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4, and if the jackpot is won in a normal state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, whereas if the jackpot is won in a time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player. In other words, this jackpot type is less advantageous than "jackpot C7" and "jackpot D7" in terms of the number of rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is the same as "jackpot D7". Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0-99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, 25 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot E7", so the probability (proportion) that "jackpot E7" will be determined (selected) as the type of jackpot that will start if a V win occurs during a small winning game is 25/100 (25%).

As shown in FIG. 185(c), the first winning type counter C2 is set to correspond to the winning range of "30 to 99" with "Big Win F7". This "Big Win F7" is a big win type in which the number of rounds is 4, and the game state after the big win is set to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, regardless of the game state at the time of winning. In other words, it is the most disadvantageous big win type for the player because it has the fewest number of rounds and is disadvantageous in terms of the game state. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "Big Win F7" is 70, so the probability (proportion) that "Big Win F7" will be determined (selected) as the type of big win that will start when a V win occurs during the execution of a small win game is 70/100 (70%).

In this way, in the seventh embodiment, if a V win occurs during the time-saving period and a jackpot is won, unless the "jackpot C7" with a distribution of 1% is won, a favorable time-saving state will not be set after the jackpot ends. In contrast, if a small win is won with a reserved ball with the second special pattern in the normal state after the time-saving period ends and a V win occurs, a favorable time-saving state will be set after the jackpot ends by winning either the "jackpot C7" (distribution 1%), the "jackpot D7" (distribution 4%), or the "jackpot E7" (distribution 25%). In other words, the time-saving state is configured to be set at a rate of 30%. Therefore, since the probability of a favorable time-saving state being created by generating a V win in the normal state is higher than in the time-saving state, it can be configured to be more favorable when a special playing method is performed in which right-handed shots are continued so as not to generate a V win even if a small win is won until the time-saving state ends (the number of time-saving times has elapsed). Even if the game transitions to the normal state, the time-saving state is set only in 30% of the jackpots based on V winning (the majority are set to the normal state), which at first glance seems to make it difficult to transition to the time-saving state. However, if you continue hitting the right button until the time-saving state ends, in most cases, you can transition to the normal state with four reserved balls of the second special pattern, and you will almost always win a small prize in the lottery for the second special pattern (98% probability). In other words, you will be given four chances to win a jackpot based on V winning. The probability of winning any of the "jackpot C7" to "jackpot E7" at a 30% rate within four tries is about 76% (the probability of all four tries being "jackpot F7" is 70% x 70% x 70% x 70% = 24%), so there is a relatively high chance of transitioning to the time-saving state again. This makes it possible to make the player want to end the time-saving state with the reserved balls accumulated to the maximum.

Even if a V win occurs as soon as the reserve is fully accumulated, the normal state will be set almost (99% of the time) after the jackpot ends. In other words, just like when a V win is avoided until the time-saving count reaches 0, four chances are given to transition to the time-saving state, and since one jackpot is gained compared to avoiding a V win until the time-saving count reaches 0, the player's options for playing the game can be expanded. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 186(a), the time-saving granting table 202e in the seventh embodiment will be described in detail. This time-saving granting table 202e is a data table that is referenced to set the number of time-saving times after the end of a jackpot according to the type of jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. At the end of a jackpot, this time-saving granting table 202e is referenced to set the value of the time-saving counter 203k. The value of the time-saving counter 203k is decremented by one each time a special pattern is drawn and the variation is stopped. While the value of this time-saving counter 203k is 1 or more, the time-saving state is established, forming an advantageous state in which the game ball is easily allowed to enter the second ball entrance 6400 by hitting from the right, while when the value becomes 0, the state transitions to the unfavorable normal state.

Figure 186 (a) is a diagram showing the contents of this time-saving granting table 202e. As shown in Figure 186 (a), the number of times that time-saving is granted is set to "10 times" for the "jackpot A7" won in the normal state, and the number of times that time-saving is granted is also set to "10 times" for the "jackpot A7" won in the time-saving state. For this reason, when the "jackpot A7" is won, a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot ends, regardless of the game state.

As shown in FIG. 186(a), the number of times that time-saving is granted is set to "0 times" for the "jackpot B7" won in the normal state, while the number of times that time-saving is granted is set to "10 times" for the "jackpot B7" won in the time-saving state. Therefore, when a direct hit occurs in the normal state and a "jackpot B7" is determined, the game moves to the normal state, which is disadvantageous to the player, while when a direct hit occurs in the time-saving state and a "jackpot B7" is determined, the game moves to the time-saving state, which is advantageous to the player. Also, as shown in FIG. 186(a), the number of times that time-saving is granted is set to "10 times" for the "jackpot C7" won in the normal state and the time-saving state. Therefore, when a V win occurs in a small win and a "jackpot C7" is determined, the game moves to the advantageous time-saving state after the jackpot ends, regardless of the game state.

As shown in FIG. 186(a), the number of time-saving grants is set to "10 times" for the "jackpot D7" won in the normal state, while the number of time-saving grants is set to "0 times" for the "jackpot E7" won in the time-saving state. The same number of time-saving grants is also set for the "jackpot E7". Therefore, in the normal state, when a V-winning occurs in a small win and either the "jackpot D7" or the "jackpot E7" is determined, the end of the jackpot is set to a favorable time-saving state. On the other hand, when these types of jackpots are determined in the time state, the end of the jackpot is set to an unfavorable normal state. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 186(a), the number of time-saving grants is set to "0 times" for the "jackpot F7" regardless of the game state. Therefore, whether in the normal state or the time-saving state, if the "jackpot F7" is won, the unfavorable normal state is set, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In the seventh embodiment, the number of time-saving times (i.e., the value of the time-saving counter 203k) is decremented by one each time a lottery for a special pattern is executed, regardless of the type of special pattern, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to set different numbers of time-saving times for the first special pattern and the second special pattern. In this case, when transitioning to the time-saving state, the number of time-saving times for the first special pattern may be set to, for example, 5 times, and the number of time-saving times for the second special pattern may be set to 10 times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the lottery for the second special pattern up to 10 times during the time-saving state, regardless of the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern at the time of transition to the time-saving state. That is, when the "Big Win A7" is won while there is a reserved ball with the first special symbol, even if there is a reserved ball with the first special symbol at the time of transition to the time-saving state and a drawing is executed for the reserved first special symbol immediately after the end of the big win, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the number of drawings for the second special symbol that can be executed during the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to make the game more enjoyable by allowing the player to choose whether or not to generate a V win in a small win, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment will be described. The configuration of the fluctuation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment is the same as the configuration of the fluctuation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment (see FIG. 23(a)), and the only difference is that the contents of the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 are partially changed with respect to the fluctuation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment. The normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 in the seventh embodiment differs from the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 23(b)) only in that the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are commonized and unified with the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the first embodiment (180-second long fluctuation is not set in the lottery of the second special symbol), and therefore illustrations and detailed explanations are omitted. In addition, in the normal state in the seventh embodiment, the reason why a long fluctuation is not performed when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed is because, as described above, the player can select a game method in which the time-saving state is ended and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state. In other words, if a long fluctuation time is set when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed after the player avoids a V win in a small win won during the time-saving state and ends the time-saving state, the game may become drawn out and the player may lose interest, so this is intended to prevent this.

Next, the details of the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 186(b). FIG. 186(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 186(b), the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment specifies the pattern type, lottery result, and the value range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in association with the fluctuation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 186(b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., the entire range is associated with a short miss with a fluctuation time of 1 second, and when the lottery result is a "jackpot," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., the entire range is associated with a normal reach with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds. Therefore, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed during the time-saving state, the fluctuation ends in a very short time, so that when the time-saving state is entered with the reserved balls of the first special symbol remaining, the lottery for the first special symbol, which cannot win a small prize (i.e., it is not possible to play a game in which you can choose whether to win a V prize in a small prize or not in a small prize) can be completed in a short period of time.

In addition, when the pattern type is the second special pattern (special pattern 2) and the lottery result is a "miss" or a "small win", a "short miss" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is defined corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 149", a "long miss" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is defined corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "150 to 189", a "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "190 to 195", and a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "196 to 198". In other words, compared to when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the normal state (when the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined by referring to the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 23(b))), the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter when the lottery result is not a jackpot. This allows play during the time-saving state to be played (consumed) quickly, preventing play during the time-saving state from becoming redundant.

As shown in FIG. 186(b), when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is a "jackpot," a "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 49," a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 194," and a "special reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "195 to 198." In other words, even when a jackpot is achieved by drawing the second special symbol during the time-saving state, a shorter fluctuation time is set compared to when a special symbol is drawn in the normal state. This makes it possible to more reliably prevent play in the time-saving state from becoming redundant.

Next, referring to FIG. 183(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 183(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 183(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19(b)) in that a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, a special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203b2, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea, a normal symbol reserved ball counter 203eb, and a winning state storage area 203ec are added. It also differs in that the small win A counter 203m, the small win B counter 203n, the small win C counter 203p, and the normal short variation flag 203q in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment are deleted.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 (initial entry), the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the free areas of the four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) that make up the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, in order from the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to an older winning is stored, and the reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved area 1 of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a decision such as the lottery for a special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area. When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3). In this embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) in which winning data is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b2 is a counter that counts reserved balls based on game balls entering the second ball entrance 6400, and other configurations are the same as the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203b, so detailed explanations are omitted.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203b2 have been added to provide reserved memory for the second special symbol, which was not provided in the first embodiment.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea has four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2. The second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas. More specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) in order from the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, the order of winning is maintained and data corresponding to the winning is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a winning normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea is shifted (moved) to the execution area for performing the lottery for the normal symbol, and the lottery for the winning normal symbol and other determinations are made based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored (memorized) in that execution area.

When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other reserved areas to a reserved area with an area number one smaller, just like in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2. Also, data shifting is only performed for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to a maximum of four. The value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb (the number of reserved variable display times M for normal symbols) is initially set to zero, and is incremented by one up to the maximum value of four each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls for the variable display increases (see S1013 in FIG. 191). On the other hand, when a game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is the maximum value of four, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S1012: No in FIG. 191). In addition, the counter value of this regular pattern reserved ball count counter 203eb is decremented by one each time a new regular pattern (second pattern) variable display is executed (see S933 in FIG. 190).

The winning status storage area 203ec is a memory area for storing information indicating the game status at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the game status at the time of winning the jackpot is normal (i.e., the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 0), "00H" is stored in this winning status storage area 203ec as information indicating the normal status. On the other hand, if the game status at the time of winning the jackpot is time-saving (i.e., the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 1 or more), "01H" is stored in this winning status storage area 203ec as information indicating the time-saving status. The information stored in this winning status storage area 203ec is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referenced when setting the game status after the jackpot ends (i.e., the number of time-saving times) (see S1621 in FIG. 192).

Next, referring to FIG. 187, the transition method of each state in the seventh embodiment will be described. Here, two game states are provided in the seventh embodiment. That is, two types of game states are provided: a normal game state (normal state) in which the normal state of the normal pattern is set, and a time-saving game state (time-saving state) in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set. In addition, in the normal game state, the degree of advantage is configured to be significantly different between the normal game state in which there is a reserved ball of the second special pattern immediately after the time-saving state ends and the normal game state in which there is no reserved ball of the second special pattern. That is, if there is even one reserved ball of the second special pattern, it will almost (99% of the time) win a small win or a big win, forming an extremely advantageous state compared to the case in which there is no reserved ball of the second special pattern. In the following explanation, for the sake of simplicity, the normal game state in which there are no reserved balls with the second special pattern will be referred to as the "normal mode," the normal game state in which there are reserved balls with the second special pattern will be referred to as the "stock release mode" in the sense that the game is played using reserved balls with the second special pattern that were saved (stocked) during the time-saving state, and the time-saving game state will be referred to as the "select mode" in the sense that the game is played by selecting between a game feature in which a V win is generated during the time-saving state to trigger a big win, and a game feature in which a V win is avoided during a small win and the game transitions to the "stock release mode."

First, referring to the upper part of FIG. 187, a method of transition from the normal mode (normal game state in which there are no reserved balls of the second special pattern) to another state (mode) will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 187, there is a possibility of transition from the normal mode to another mode only when the special pattern lottery results in a jackpot (a direct hit). More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 187, when the jackpot is a "jackpot A7" which has a 50% chance of winning when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the advantageous select mode (time-saving game state). On the other hand, when the jackpot is a "jackpot B7" which has a 50% chance of winning when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is set again to the normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player (looping the normal mode). Therefore, in the normal mode, the player can play in the hope of winning the "jackpot A7" in the lottery of the first special pattern.

Also, as shown in the middle of FIG. 187, in the select mode (time-saving game state), if a small win is won and a V win occurs, resulting in a big win, or if the number of time-saving times has elapsed (ended), there is a possibility of transitioning to another mode. More specifically, as shown in the middle of FIG. 187, if a small win is won in the special pattern lottery, a V win occurs, resulting in a two-type win (V win), and the big win type is one of the big wins D7 to F7, the mode will transition to either the normal mode or the stock release mode after the big win ends. That is, if the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is 0 at the end of the big win D7 to F7, the mode will transition to the normal mode after the big win ends, while if the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is 1 or more at the end of the big win D7 to F7, the mode will transition to the stock release mode after the big win ends. Similarly, when the time-saving count has elapsed (ended), if the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is zero when the time-saving count has elapsed, the mode will transition to normal mode, whereas if the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is one or more when the time-saving count has elapsed, the mode will transition to stock release mode. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the player can be made to play while being careful not to let the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern reach zero. In other words, the player can be made to actively hit to the right so that more game balls enter the second ball entrance 6400, which can increase the player's motivation to participate in the game.

As shown in the middle of Figure 187, if a direct hit occurs, or if a double win results in a jackpot C7 with a 1% allocation, the game state after the jackpot ends will be set back to select mode.

Also, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 187, in the stock release mode, if a jackpot (straight hit or V hit) is won, there is a possibility of transitioning to another mode. More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 187, if a straight hit occurs and a jackpot A7 is determined, the mode transitions to the advantageous select mode after the jackpot ends. Also, if a straight hit occurs and a jackpot B7 is determined, and there are no reserved balls of the second special pattern at the end of the jackpot, the mode transitions to the normal mode after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, if a V win occurs during the execution of a small win game, resulting in a two-type win (V win), and any of the jackpots C7 to E7 is determined, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the select mode. Also, if a jackpot F7 is determined as the type of hit of the two-type win (V win), and there are no reserved balls of the second special pattern at the end of the jackpot F7, the mode transitions to the disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot is B7 or F7 and there is one or more reserved balls with the second special pattern at the end of the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends will return to stock release mode.

In this way, in the seventh embodiment, the game is configured to transition to one of three modes with different degrees of advantage for the player depending on the type of jackpot and the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern at the end of the jackpot (or when the number of time-saving rounds has elapsed). This allows for a variety of mode transitions, further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, referring to the flowcharts of FIG. 188 to FIG. 192, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, a reserved memory function for the second special symbol is added to the first embodiment, so the contents of the start winning process (see FIG. 43) have also been changed, but since the same modification as the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) in the second embodiment (the embodiment having the reserved memory function for the second special symbol like the seventh embodiment) has already been applied, a detailed description of the start winning process in the seventh embodiment will be omitted here. First, referring to FIG. 188, the special symbol variation process 7 (S121 in FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This special pattern change process 7 (S121) is a process executed in place of the special pattern change process in the first embodiment (see Figure 38, S104), and, like the special pattern change process in the first embodiment (see Figure 38), is a process for setting the change display in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b.

In the special symbol variation process 7 (S121) in this seventh embodiment, the processes S201, S202, S206 to S218, and S220 are the same as the processes S201, S202, S206 to S218, and S220 in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38, S104) in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the special pattern change process 7 (S121) in this seventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S202 that the display state of the first pattern display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of reserved times N1 for the changing display of special pattern 1) and the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 (the number of reserved times N2 for the changing display of special pattern 2) are obtained (S231).

Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b2 is greater than 0 (S232), and if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b2 is 0 (S232: No), the process proceeds to S206. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S232 that the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b2 is greater than 0 (S232: Yes), the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b2 is decremented by 1 (S233), and a reserved ball number command is set that indicates the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b2 changed by the calculation (S234).

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S234, the data stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S235). In the process of S235, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data has been shifted, the process proceeds to S210.

In the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S213 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S213: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203k is greater than 0 (S236), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203k is greater than 0 (S236: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203k is decremented by 1 (S237), and the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S236 that the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 0 (S236: No), the process skips S237 and proceeds to S220.

In the process of S220, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win or not (S220). If it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S220: Yes), instead of the small win start setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 40), small win start setting process 7 is executed (S238) and processing proceeds to S218. Details of this small win start setting process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 189. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S220 that the current lottery result is not a small win (S220: No), processing of S238 is skipped and processing proceeds to S218.

Next, referring to FIG. 189, the small win start setting process 7 (S238 in FIG. 189) executed in this seventh embodiment will be described. This small win start setting process 7 (S238 in FIG. 189) is a process executed in place of the small win start setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 40, S221), and is a process for setting the start of a small win game, similar to the small win start setting process in the first embodiment.

In the small win start setting process 7 (S238) in this seventh embodiment, the processes of S401 and S404 are the same as the processes of S401 and S404 in the small win start setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 40, S221). In addition, in the small win start setting process 7 (S238) in this seventh embodiment, when the process of S401 is completed, data indicating the jackpot type identified by referring to the V win table 202be2 (see FIG. 185(c)) of the first win type selection table 202b is stored in the V-pass jackpot type storage area 203h (S411), the start of the small win is set (S412), and the process proceeds to S404.

Next, referring to FIG. 190, the normal symbol change process 7 (S122 in FIG. 190) executed in this seventh embodiment will be described. This normal symbol change process 7 (S122 in FIG. 190) is a process executed in place of the normal symbol change process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 45, S106), and like the normal symbol change process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 45), it is a process for controlling the change display and change time of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, the opening operation and opening time of the electric role 6400a associated with the second ball entrance 6400, etc.

In the normal symbol change processing 7 (S122) in this seventh embodiment, the same processing as the S901, S902, S906-S910, and S912-920 processes of the normal symbol change processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 45, S106) is executed in each of the S901, S902, S906-S910, and S912-920 processes of the normal symbol change processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 45, S106) is executed. Also, in the normal symbol change processing 7 (S122) in this seventh embodiment, if the display state of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing in the processing of S902 (S902: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb (the number of reserved times M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is obtained (S931). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203eb is greater than 0 (S932), and if the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203eb is 0 (S932: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203eb is not 0 (S932: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203eb is decremented by 1 (S933).

When the process of S933 is completed, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea is then shifted (S934). In the process of S934, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea is obtained (S935).

Next, it is determined whether or not the game is in the time-saving state for normal symbols (S936). In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, if the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 1 or more, it is determined that the game is in the time-saving state for normal symbols, whereas if the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 0, it is determined that the game is in the normal state for normal symbols.

If it is determined in the process of S936 that the time-saving state for normal symbols is in effect (S936: Yes), the result of the lottery as to whether or not the normal symbol is a win is obtained based on the value of the second win random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S936 and the normal symbol win random number table for high probability (S937), and the process proceeds to S906. In the process of S937, the value of the second win random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol win random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal symbol is a win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is a miss (see FIG. 184 (c)).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S936 that the time-saving state for the normal symbol is not in effect (S936: No), then the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol is a win is obtained based on the value of the second win random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S935 and the normal symbol win random number table for low probability (S938), and the process proceeds to S906. Specifically, in the process of S938, the value of the second win random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol win random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "0", it is determined that the normal symbol is a win, and if it is in the range of "1 to 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is a miss (see FIG. 184 (c)).

Next, referring to FIG. 191, the through gate passing process 7 (S123 in FIG. 191) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This through gate passing process 7 (S123 in FIG. 191) is a process executed in place of the through gate passing process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 46, S107), and is a process for determining whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 67, and, if the game ball has passed through, obtaining the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 and storing it in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea.

In the through gate passing process 7 (S123) in this seventh embodiment, the process of S1001 is the same as each process of S1001 in the through gate passing process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 46, S107). In addition, in the through gate passing process 7 (S123) in this seventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1001 that the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S1001: Yes), the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203eb (the number of reserved variable display times M in the normal pattern) is obtained (S1011). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203eb is smaller than 4 (S1012), and if the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203eb is 4 (i.e., the upper limit value) (S1012: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203eb is smaller than 4 (S1012: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203eb is incremented by 1 (S1013), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203ea (S1014), and then this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 192, the jackpot control process 7 (S1521 in FIG. 192) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 7 (S1521 in FIG. 192) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 52, S1504), and, like the jackpot control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 52), is a process for making various settings during the execution of a jackpot game.

In the jackpot control process 7 (S1521) in this seventh embodiment, the same processes as those in S1601 to S1612 and S1615 to S1618 in the jackpot control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 52, S1504) are executed in each of the processes S1601 to S1612 and S1615 to S1618. In addition, in the jackpot control process 7 (S1521) in this seventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1612 that it is the end timing of the ending performance (ending period) (S1612: Yes), the number of time-saving times corresponding to the type of jackpot being executed and the data in the winning state storage area 203ec is read from the time-saving grant table 202e (see FIG. 186(a)) (S1621), the number of time-saving times read is set as the counter value of the time-saving counter 203k (S1622), and the process proceeds to S1615.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, referring to the flowcharts of Fig. 193 to Fig. 195, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 1113 in this seventh embodiment will be described. First, referring to Fig. 193, the winning information related process 7 executed in this seventh embodiment (S2221 in Fig. 193) will be described. This winning information related process 7 (S2221 in Fig. 193) is a process executed in place of the winning information related process in the first embodiment (see Fig. 57, S2210), and is a process for performing control according to the winning information command received from the main control device 110, similar to the winning information related process in the first embodiment (see Fig. 57).

In the winning information related process 7 (S2221) in this seventh embodiment, the processes of S2301, S2302, S2311, and S2312 are the same as the processes of S2301, S2302, S2311, and S2312 in the winning information related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 57, S2210).

In addition, in the winning information related process 7 (S2221) in the seventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the game state read out is the time-saving state (S2302: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the received winning information command is a command indicating winning information of the second special symbol (S2321). If it is determined in the process of S2321 that the command indicates winning information of the second special symbol (S2321: Yes), the key state according to the lottery result notified by the winning information command is identified (S2322), the display of the key image of the identified state is set (S2324), and the process proceeds to 2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2321 that the winning information command received this time is not a command indicating winning information of the second special symbol (S2321: No), the processes of S2322 and S2324 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2311.

Next, referring to FIG. 194, the hit-related process 7 (S2222 in FIG. 194) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This hit-related process 7 (S2222 in FIG. 194) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 58, S2212), and like the hit-related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 58), is a process for executing control according to the type of command received when a hit-related command is received from the main control device 110.

In the seventh embodiment, in the processes of S2401 to S2409 and S2411 to S2418 of the win-related process 7 (S2222), the same processes as those of S2401 to S2409 and S2411 to S2418 of the win-related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 58, S2212) are executed. In addition, in the win-related process 7 (S2222) of the seventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S2409 that a small win start command has been received (S2409: Yes), the small win start command process is executed (S2421), and then this process is terminated. Details of this small win start command process (S2421) will be explained with reference to FIG. 195.

Figure 195 is a flow chart showing the above-mentioned small win start command processing (S2421). In this small win start command processing (S2421), first, the information stored in the game status storage area 223f is read (S3901), and then it is determined whether the read information indicates the time-saving state (S3902). In the processing of S3902, if it is determined that the read information indicates the time-saving state (S3902: Yes), the start of the small win presentation for the select mode (see Figure 182 (a)) is set (S3903), and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the process of S3902 determines that the read information does not indicate the time-saving state (determines that the information indicates the normal state) (S3902: No), the start of the small win effect for the stock release mode (see FIG. 182(b)) is set (S3904), and then this process is terminated.

By executing this small win start command process (see Figure 195), the small win presentation can be made different depending on whether the small win was won in the normal state or in the time-saving state, realizing a gameplay feature that allows the player to choose whether or not to generate a V win based on the presentation mode.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment is configured so that a time-saving game state advantageous to the player is more likely to be set as the game state after the jackpot ends if a jackpot occurs in an unfavorable normal state rather than in an advantageous time-saving state. In other words, it is configured so that there is a high probability of winning a small jackpot in the drawing of the second special symbol that is likely to be executed during the time-saving state, and the rate at which the time-saving state is granted when a V win occurs in a small jackpot to start a jackpot is higher for a small jackpot in the normal state than for a small jackpot in the time-saving state. In other words, the player can choose between a first game method in which, knowing the risk of a lower chance of entering the time-saving state, as soon as a small win is won in the time-saving state, a V win is generated by hitting the left button to execute a big win, and a second game method in which, knowing the risk of it taking time and balls to end the time-saving state, the player ends the time-saving state while keeping many reserved balls of the second special pattern, and a V win is generated with a small win after the time-saving state ends.

In general gaming machines, the degree of advantage when a jackpot occurs in an advantageous state (e.g., time-saving state) is usually greater than or equal to the degree of advantage when a jackpot occurs in an unfavorable state (e.g., normal state). Therefore, when a player transitions to an advantageous state, he or she will often play in the strong hope of hitting a jackpot while in that advantageous state. For this reason, when an advantageous state ends and a transition occurs to an unfavorable state, there is a risk that the player will be disappointed and lose motivation to play.

In contrast to this, in the seventh embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol that is executed after the advantageous time-saving state ends is configured to have a higher expectation of transitioning to the time-saving state, so that the player can be made to think that they want to end the time-saving state and then win a jackpot with the reserved ball of the second special symbol. In other words, when a small jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, in addition to the option of hitting left to make a V-win and winning a jackpot, the player can be given the option of intentionally transitioning to the normal state by avoiding a V-win in the small jackpot during the time-saving state. Therefore, since an extremely unique and innovative playing method of intentionally avoiding a jackpot can be given as one of the options, the player's interest in the game can be further increased.

In the seventh embodiment, the small win probability is set to 98/100 in the lottery of the second special symbol, but the small win probability may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be set to 1/4. In this case, even if you try to win a V prize with a small win after switching to the normal state, the possibility of not winning a small win due to the reservation of the second special symbol increases, so more players can choose the game method of generating a V prize and executing a big win as soon as a small win occurs during the time-saving state. Instead of lowering the small win probability, the time-saving award rate in the case of a two-type win in the normal state may be increased (for example, 80%) to achieve a balance. Also, instead of lowering the small win probability (to 1/4), the rate at which a V prize occurs when a left hit is made during a small win may be lowered (for example, a V prize occurs only about once in four small wins). This allows more players to choose the game method of ending the time-saving state.

In the seventh embodiment, when a V win occurs during the time-saving state and a V win is won, the game state after the big win is set to the unfavorable normal state with a probability of 99%, regardless of the number of time-saving times. In other words, from when the time-saving state is set until the number of time-saving times has elapsed (the specific condition is met), the degree of advantage when a V win is won is lower than after the number of time-saving times has elapsed (after the specific condition is met), but this is not limited to this. For example, even in the time-saving state, it may be configured so that a situation may occur in which the probability of the time-saving state being granted is high when a V win is won (for example, 30%, the same as when a V win is won in the normal state). More specifically, for example, when a small win is won in the latter half of the time-saving state (for example, the last three special pattern lotteries), and a V win occurs in the small win, resulting in a V win, the time-saving state may be granted at a relatively high rate, similar to the normal state. Conversely, if a small win occurs in the first half of the time-saving state (for example, the first two special symbol draws), and a V win occurs in the small win, resulting in a V win, the time-saving state may be granted at a relatively high rate, just like in the normal state.

In the seventh embodiment, the small prize can only be won by drawing the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small prize may also be won by drawing the first special symbol with a relatively low probability (for example, 1/200). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to expect a small prize to be won even when the first special symbol is drawn, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the seventh embodiment, when the time-saving state is entered, the time-saving state ends when a total of 10 special symbol drawings have been performed, regardless of the type of special symbol that was selected, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a different number of time-saving times may be set for each type of special symbol (e.g., 5 times for the first special symbol, 10 times for the second special symbol). In other words, regardless of the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol at the time of entering the time-saving state, the number of times the second special symbol is drawn until the time-saving state ends may be the same every time. By configuring in this way, the number of times to select whether or not to generate a V prize in the time-saving state can be the same every time.

In the seventh embodiment, the presentation mode is different during the time-saving state and in the normal state after the time-saving state ends (a state in which there is a reserved ball with the second special pattern), and in the normal state after the time-saving state ends, a presentation mode is set that encourages (suggests) a left hit (i.e., a V win) if a small win is won in the normal state after the time-saving state ends, but this is not limited to this. For example, even if the time-saving state has not ended, as soon as the number of reserved balls with the second special pattern becomes maximum, a presentation that encourages a left hit (a V win) may be executed. If the number of reserved balls is maximum, even if the time-saving state is not granted after the big win ends (i.e., even if the game state after the big win ends is set to the normal state), the expectation of a small win by the reserved ball with the second special pattern in the normal state after the big win ends is high (i.e., the expectation of starting a two-type big win in the normal state where the time-saving state is granted at a high rate) is high, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the seventh embodiment, when a small win is won during the time-saving state, the sub-display area Ds is configured to suggest to the player both the game method (hit left) for generating a V win (using a key) and the game method (hit right) for avoiding a V win (not using a key) mainly by text (see FIG. 182(a)), but this is not limited to this. The image displayed in the main display area Dm may also be configured to suggest to the player each game method (game method for generating and avoiding a V win). More specifically, for example, the display areas HR1 to HR4 and the arrow image YG may be moved to the left in the main display area Dm, and four display areas (display areas HRR1 to HRR4) of a horizontally elongated rectangular shape similar to the display areas HR1 to HR4 and an image (arrow image YG2) imitating an arrow similar to the arrow image YG may be provided. In addition, in the left display areas HR1 to HR4, an image of a key for opening the treasure box 802 may be displayed, as in the seventh embodiment, and in the right display areas HRR1 to HRR4, an image of a bomb for blowing up the treasure box 802 may be displayed. The arrow image YG may be configured as a left-facing arrow pointing toward the display area HR4, and the arrow image YG12 may be configured as a right-facing arrow pointing toward the image of a bomb displayed in the lowermost display area HRR4 of the right display areas HRR1 to HRR4. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand that if he hits right in accordance with the instruction of the arrow image YG2 that imitates a right-facing arrow, he can end the small win by blowing up the treasure box 802 with a bomb (avoid winning a V prize). On the other hand, if he hits left in accordance with the instruction of the arrow image YG that imitates a left-facing arrow, he can easily understand that he can open the treasure box 802 (generate a V prize) using the key displayed in the display area HR4. That is, the arrow image YG and the arrow image YG2 can have multiple different roles, such as indicating the items (keys and bombs) to be used in the small win effect currently being performed, and indicating the player's playing method for using the items (the direction in which the game ball is fired). This allows for a display mode that is easy for the player to understand, while also making efficient use of the display elements, resulting in a more suitable presentation mode.

In the seventh embodiment, only two types of game states, a normal state and a time-saving state, are provided, and the probability of a favorable time-saving state being awarded is higher when a V hit is won in the normal state than when a V hit is won in the time-saving state, but this is not limited to the above. For example, in addition to these two types of game states, a so-called probability change state and a potential probability state may be provided, and the degree of advantage when a jackpot is awarded in the potential probability state may be higher than in the probability change state, or the degree of advantage when a jackpot is awarded in the time-saving state may be higher than in the probability change state. By configuring in this way, a wider variety of state transitions can be realized, while allowing the player to expect a jackpot in a relatively unfavorable state, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 196 to 214. In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment described above, when a player hits the right hand in a time-saving state advantageous to the player, the lottery for the second special symbol is almost exclusively executed.

In contrast, in the eighth embodiment, in the advantageous time-saving state, both the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol can be executed, and further, the time-saving state is more likely to end when the drawing of the second special symbol is executed than when the drawing of the first special symbol is executed. More specifically, the time-saving end condition based on the number of times the second special symbol is drawn (the number of times the second special symbol is drawn) is configured to occur less frequently than the time-saving end condition based on the number of times the first special symbol is drawn (the number of times the first special symbol is drawn). On the other hand, since the drawing of the second special symbol is configured to have a higher probability of a small win than the drawing of the first special symbol, the expectation of a big win (the total expectation of a direct win and a V win) for one drawing is configured to be higher for the drawing of the second special symbol. As a result, when the selection of the second special symbol is given priority, the probability of winning a jackpot increases, but the time-saving state is likely to end early, resulting in a gameplay that is similar to that of a game in which the player is given priority over the selection of the first special symbol, but the probability of winning a jackpot decreases, but the time-saving state can be enjoyed for a longer period of time. This allows each player to select a gameplay that suits their preferences.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the drawing of the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the drawing of the second special symbol, so that if right-handed hits are continued in the time-saving state, the conditions for ending the time-saving state are unlikely to be met (the number of time-saving cycles is large), and after consecutive drawings of the first special symbol, which has a low probability of winning, are executed, the drawing of the second special symbol, which has a high probability of winning, is executed. In other words, it is possible to realize an extremely innovative gameplay in which the probability of winning is higher in the latter half of the advantageous time-saving state (and when the reserved second special symbol is consumed after the end). This can increase the player's interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment in that the game board 13 has a partially changed board configuration, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration, the RAM 223 of the sound and light control device 113 has a partially changed configuration, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound and light control device 113 has a partially changed configuration. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound and light control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the seventh embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 196, the configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 196, the eighth embodiment is different in that the V winning device 6500 is provided (moved) to the right side of the game board 13 (a position where the game ball launched by hitting to the right can enter). The structure and opening pattern of the V winning device 6500 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment described above. In other words, in the eighth embodiment, just by launching a game ball to the V winning device 6500 during the execution of a small win game, as in the seventh embodiment, a V winning occurs and a V winning is won. In other words, the specification is such that winning a small win is almost equal to winning a big win. Another difference is that the second ball entrance 6400 has been deleted, and instead, the allocation winning device 700, the right first ball entrance 64a2, and the right second ball entrance 64b, which were also provided on the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 169), are provided on the right side of the game board 13. The allocation winning device 700, the right first ball entrance 64a2, and the right second ball entrance 64b have been described in the sixth embodiment with reference to FIG. 170, etc., so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Although the details will be described later, in this eighth embodiment, at least a winning type (normal winning A8) in which the electric role 701 is opened during a period when it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the first operating port 704 as a winning normal symbol (period when the switching valve 702 is switched to the first switching state) and a winning type (normal winning B8) in which the electric role 702 is opened during a period when it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second operating height 704 (period when the switching valve 702 is switched to the second switching state) are provided. And, when a winning normal symbol occurs in the time-saving state, 80% of the winnings become normal winning A8, and 20% become normal winning B8. In other words, in the time-saving state, the right first ball entry port 64a2 is opened more frequently (opportunities) than the right second ball entry port 64b. By configuring in this way, when a player continues to hit the right side continuously in the time-saving state, the lottery for the first special symbol can be executed with higher priority. In other words, by simply continuing to hit the right side, it is possible to first concentrate on drawing the first special symbol, which has a low expectation, and then draw the second special symbol, which has a high expectation. Therefore, after the time-saving state is entered, the player can play for a relatively long period (until 96 special symbol drawings have been performed) in a state where the expectation of a jackpot is low (only a direct hit can win a jackpot), and then play for a relatively short period in a state where the expectation of a jackpot is high (both a direct hit and a V hit can occur). Therefore, even if the player does not win in the 96 drawings of the first special symbol, the player can play while feeling secure that the drawing of the second special symbol, which has a higher expectation, is waiting for later, which realizes an innovative gameplay.

Next, referring to FIG. 197 and FIG. 198, the characteristic effects during the time-saving state in the eighth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the probability of a small win is made different between the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol, thereby varying the occurrence rate of a big win by a V winning (probability of winning a V), and the drawing of the second special symbol is substantially more likely to result in a big win than the drawing of the first special symbol. Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the number of time-saving times for the second special symbol is made smaller than the number of time-saving times for the first special symbol, and if only the drawing of the second special symbol, which has a high expectation, is performed, the advantageous time-saving state is likely to end relatively early, and if only the drawing of the first special symbol is performed, the time-saving state can be enjoyed for a relatively long time. In the eighth embodiment, this specification (drawing the first special symbol has a low probability of winning and makes it difficult for the time-saving state to end, while drawing the second special symbol has a high probability of winning and makes it easier for the time-saving state to end) is suggested to the player through the presentation.

Figure 197 (a) is a diagram showing the display mode during the time-saving state in this eighth embodiment. Here, even in the time-saving state in this eighth embodiment, mainly, the same variable pattern presentation as in the first and seventh embodiments described above is executed. That is, every time a lottery for a special symbol is executed, as part of the variable display presentation (variable pattern presentation) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, a presentation in which the boy character 801 searches for a treasure chest is executed. Then, if the lottery result is a small win (or a big win), a presentation in which the treasure chest is found is executed, and if a game ball enters the V winning device 6500 during the execution of a small win game and the start of a big win (two-type win) is confirmed after the end of the small win, a presentation in which the treasure chest 802 is successfully opened is executed, and a presentation in which the V display 803 appears from the treasure chest 802, indicating that a big win game is set (see Figure 13 (a)) is executed.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 197(a), the first display area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds displays a maximum of four reserved symbols of the first special symbol and four reserved symbols of the second special symbol. FIG. 197(a) shows a state in which three reserved balls of the first special symbol and zero reserved balls of the second special symbol are displayed. The reserved balls of the first special symbol are displayed in an approximately circular shape on the upper side of the first display area Ds1, and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are displayed in an approximately equilateral triangular shape on the lower side of the first display area Ds1. This difference in shape allows the player to easily distinguish between the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol. Also, as shown in FIG. 197(a), the running symbol Dsa is displayed in the center of the sub-display area Ds to indicate the type of special symbol in the running variable display. In the example of FIG. 197(a), a roughly circular pattern with the word "normal" inside it, which is a pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, is displayed (i.e., the drawing for the first special pattern is being executed). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 197(a), the words "hit right to consume reserved balls for "normal"" are displayed in the second display area Ds2 formed on the right side of the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the reserved balls for the first special pattern are easily consumed by hitting right in the time-saving state (the drawing for the first special pattern is executed with priority over the drawing for the second special pattern).

Also, as shown in FIG. 197(a), a display area HR10 having a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular shape is formed at the upper center of the main display area Dm. Inside this display area HR10, the remaining number of time-saving times for the first special pattern and the remaining number of time-saving times for the second special pattern are displayed. In the example of FIG. 197(a), a situation is illustrated in which the number of time-saving times for the first special pattern is 94, and the number of lottery times for the second special pattern is 4. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 197(a), the characters "94 times remaining" are displayed to the right of an image imitating a reserved pattern (a pattern having an approximately circular shape with the character "normal" displayed inside) corresponding to the first special pattern at the top of the display area HR10. Also, in the center of the display area HR10, the characters "4 times remaining" are displayed to the right of an image imitating a reserved pattern (a pattern having an approximately equilateral triangular shape with the character "heat" displayed inside) corresponding to the second special pattern. Furthermore, the words "When either number reaches 0, the RUSH ends!?" are displayed below the display area HR10. These display contents allow the player to easily understand the number of times the time-saving feature can be played for each special symbol (the conditions for ending the time-saving feature).

197(b) is a diagram showing the display mode when the start winning is detected for the right second ball entrance 64b for the first time in the time-saving state. As shown in FIG. 197(b), when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 64b and the reserved balls of the second special pattern increase, the reserved pattern of the second special pattern (a pattern in a substantially equilateral triangle shape with the character "Heat" written on it) is displayed in the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the character "Heat" is generally used as a type of character that suggests a high probability of winning a jackpot, so by comparing the character "Average" displayed on the reserved pattern of the first special pattern with the character "Heat" displayed on the reserved pattern of the second special pattern, the player can intuitively understand that the lottery of the second special pattern has a higher probability of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 197(b), when there is one or more reserved balls of the second special pattern, the text "Hit left to consume reserved balls of "Heat"!?" is additionally displayed in the second display area Ds2. This allows the player to choose whether to consume the reserved balls of the first special pattern or the reserved balls of the second special pattern by the firing direction. Therefore, since it is possible to play in a game method that suits the preferences of each player, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suits the preferences of a wide range of players. Specifically, for example, for a player who wants to execute a lottery for the second special pattern, which has a high expectation, rather than executing a lottery for the first special pattern, which has a low expectation, a game method (a game method in which the time-saving number of times for the second special pattern is elapsed first) in which the start winning is detected for the right second ball entrance 64b, and a lottery for the second special pattern is executed by hitting left (or stopping firing) every time the reserved pattern of the second special pattern increases is selected. Also, for players who want to save the drawing of the second special symbol with a higher expectation for later, a game method can be selected in which the drawing of the first special symbol is executed preferentially by continuously hitting the right hand during the time-saving state, while increasing the reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of time-saving times for the first special symbol is passed first, and then a drawing with a higher expectation is executed by the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol). In addition, for example, the game method can be selected in which the drawing of the first special symbol is executed preferentially by continuing hitting the right hand until just before the number of time-saving times for the first special symbol ends (for example, until the number of time-saving times for the first special symbol is one time remaining), and then the drawing of the second special symbol with the number of reserved balls likely to have accumulated up to the upper limit (i.e., four balls) is executed four times, and while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed for the fourth time, the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are increased as much as possible by hitting the right hand, and a drawing based on the reserved balls is executed after the time-saving ends. Furthermore, just before the time-saving number of the second special symbol is over (for example, until the time-saving number of the first special symbol is one), the lottery for the second special symbol is executed every time the start winning of the second special symbol occurs (i.e., left-handed shot or firing stop is performed), and the right-handed shot is continuously executed so that the lottery for the first special symbol is executed preferentially when the time-saving number of the second special symbol is one remaining, so that the time-saving number of the first special symbol is passed first. In this case, the lottery for the second special symbol with high expectation can be executed at least seven times by the three lottery for the second special symbol executed during the time-saving state and the reserved balls for the second special symbol accumulated from the end of the three lottery for the second special symbol to the end of the time-saving number of the first special symbol (high possibility of accumulating up to the upper limit of four), so that the possibility of winning a jackpot can be further increased. In this way, various gameplay characteristics can be realized with different jackpot expectations and durations depending on the player's playing style, further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the eighth embodiment, the display mode of the reserved pattern of the first special pattern and the display mode of the reserved pattern of the second special pattern are made different so that the player can intuitively understand that the lottery for the second special pattern has a higher expectation of a jackpot (is easier to win a small jackpot) than the lottery for the first special pattern. In addition, the display mode of the reserved pattern may be made different to the extent that the player can grasp the type of special pattern (whether it is a reserved pattern of the first special pattern or a reserved pattern of the second special pattern) according to the result of the pre-reading at the time of the start winning. More specifically, for example, the color of the reserved pattern may be made different according to the expectation of a jackpot. In other words, it may be possible to change the color of the reserved pattern to one of white, blue, green, and red in order of decreasing expectation of a jackpot according to the result of the pre-reading. This allows the player to select whether to execute a lottery based on the reserved ball of the first special pattern by hitting right or to execute a lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special pattern by hitting left (or stopping firing), taking into account not only the type of the special pattern but also the color of the reserved pattern, and thus the range of playability can be further expanded. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. In addition to this, when a jackpot is won (a direct hit occurs) in the lottery of the special pattern during the time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state (a jackpot without time-saving is determined) at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%), and a special pattern (for example, a reserved pattern imitating a bomb) that is more likely to win a jackpot without time-saving (easier to be selected in the case of a jackpot without time-saving and harder to be selected in the case of a miss or a jackpot with time-saving) may be provided as the reserved pattern. By configuring in this way, when the reserved pattern of the first special pattern is changed to a special pattern (a pattern imitating a bomb), the player can be made to think that he should have consumed the reserved ball of the second special pattern before the start winning corresponding to the reserved ball occurs and aimed for a big win. Therefore, especially for a player who has selected a game method in which he continues to hit the right side continuously during the time-saving state, in the next time-saving state, it is possible to make him try a game method in which the reserved ball of the second special pattern is consumed first. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's motivation to participate in the game. Also, when the reserved pattern is changed to a special pattern (a pattern imitating a bomb) and the lottery result based on the reserved ball is notified as a simple miss, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player can feel at ease even though no advantageous result is not announced. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, when the reserved pattern of the second special pattern is changed to a special pattern (a pattern resembling a bomb), a lottery for the first special pattern (a lottery that takes precedence over the second special pattern) is executed so that the reserved balls corresponding to the special pattern are not consumed, aiming to win a jackpot. This allows for a gameplay that differs in the way the game is played depending on the reserved pattern pattern, further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 198(a), the display mode after one of the time-saving end conditions is met (after the number of time-saving times for the first special pattern or the second special pattern has elapsed) will be described. FIG. 198(a) is a diagram showing the display mode at the end of the time-saving state. In the example of FIG. 198(a), the case where the time-saving state ends after the number of time-saving times for the second special pattern has elapsed is illustrated. Also, a state in which four reserved balls of the first special pattern and one reserved ball of the second special pattern are reserved at the time of the time-saving end is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 198(a), when the time-saving state ends, the text "1 time remaining" is displayed to the right of the image imitating the reserved pattern corresponding to the first special pattern in the display area HR10, and the text "0 times remaining" is displayed to the right of the image imitating the reserved pattern corresponding to the second special pattern. Furthermore, the text "RUSH ended..." is displayed below the display area HR10. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the time-saving state (RUSH) has ended because the number of time-saving times for the second special symbol has reached 0. In addition, the word "Right Hit" is erased in the small display area Ds2. This prevents the player from continuing to hit to the right even though the time-saving state has ended and hitting to the right is unlikely to result in a starting win, which could result in the player suffering a loss.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 198(a), when the time-saving state ends, the first display area Ds1 at the left end of the sub-display area Ds displays small numbers indicating the number of reserved balls ("4" indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern, and "1" indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern). That is, compared to during the time-saving state, the reserved patterns are displayed in a simple and inconspicuous manner. Then, in the second display area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds, the words "RUSH End..." are displayed in a manner that is more conspicuous (larger) than the number of reserved balls. This allows the player to have a stronger impression that the time-saving state (RUSH) has ended. The time-saving end screen indicating that the time-saving state (RUSH) has ended continues to be displayed until all the lotteries based on the reserved balls that were reserved at the time the time-saving state ended are completed. If a big win or small win is won with the reserved balls while this time-saving end screen is being displayed, a special performance (revival performance) is executed. This revival effect will be explained with reference to Figure 198 (b).

Next, referring to FIG. 198(b), the display mode when a lottery based on the reserved balls reserved at the time when the time-saving state ends results in a big win or a small win after the time-saving state ends will be described. As shown in FIG. 198(b), when a big win is won while the time-saving end screen is displayed, a relatively short (e.g., 0.2 second) performance (revival performance) is executed in which three symbols imitating the number "7" appear from the back side of the display area HR10, breaking through the display area HR10. In addition, the word "BONUS confirmed!!" is displayed in the second display area Ds2, indicating that a big win or a small win has been won. By executing this revival performance, it is possible to give a greater surprise and joy to a player who thought that the time-saving state had ended, and it is possible to further increase the interest of the player in the game. In addition, the symbols displayed in this revival performance and the word "BONUS confirmed!!" are configured to continue to be displayed until the start of a big win or a small win. For this reason, in the eighth embodiment, the time that the time-saving state ends is configured to change extremely quickly (0.1 seconds) from the time that all reserved balls are consumed, regardless of the number of draws. This prevents the screen at the end of the revival performance (the three "7" symbols and the words "BONUS confirmed!!") from continuing to be displayed for a long period of time, which would make the game redundant.

Next, referring to FIG. 199, the change over time of the performance mode when a big win or a small win exists among the reserved balls reserved at the end of the time-saving state will be described. First, referring to FIG. 199(a), the change over time of the performance mode when a reserved ball corresponding to a small win is reserved within 5 seconds after the last variable display in the time-saving state begins will be described. Here, this 5-second period is the period from when the character 801 finds the treasure chest 802 in the performance of searching for the treasure chest 802. If the result of the lottery for the special pattern is a miss, a performance in which the discovered treasure chest 802 is empty is executed, and if it is a hit (big win or small win), a performance in which the V display 803 appears from the discovered treasure chest 802 is executed. In other words, within 5 seconds (before the treasure chest 802 is opened), it is possible to rewrite the performance result according to the contents of the reserved balls without any sense of incongruity (even if the performance in which the treasure chest 802 is empty is set at the start of the fluctuation, it can be changed to a performance in which the V display 803 appears from the treasure chest 802). In other words, Figure 199(a) shows the change over time in the presentation mode when a reserved ball corresponding to a small win is detected and the presentation is rewritten within the period in which the presentation result can be rewritten (within 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) after the presentation corresponding to a miss has begun.

As shown in FIG. 199(a), when the final variable display in the time-saving state (in the example of FIG. 199(a), the missing variable display of the second special symbol) starts, an effect in which the boy character 801 searches for the treasure chest 802 is executed for five seconds. Since the time-saving state continues until this final variable ends, when the player hits the right, the electric device 701 is opened and the game ball enters the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 702, so that the game ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64a2 or the right second ball entrance 64b. The example of FIG. 199(a) illustrates a case in which the start winning is detected three times before the five seconds have passed, two of which are misses and one is a small win.

As shown in FIG. 199(a), if the last variable display in the time-saving state is a miss and a start winning corresponding to a small win is detected within 5 seconds after the start of the variation, a performance in which the character 801 searches for a treasure box 802 for 5 seconds is executed, and then, between 5 and 10 seconds, a performance in which a V display 803 appears from the treasure box 802 found by the character 801 is executed. The state in which this V display 803 is displayed continues until the variable display corresponding to the small win ends, and the small win variation (and the stop display period of the small win pattern) passes, and the opening performance of the small win begins. As described above, the variable display based on the reserved ball after the time-saving state ends is set to an ultra-short variation of 0.1 seconds (variation time 0.1 seconds, stop display time 0.1 seconds) regardless of the lottery result, so the period from the end of the last variable display in the time-saving state to the start of the small win can be made extremely short (0.6 seconds in the example of FIG. 199(a)). Therefore, even if the display period of the V display 803 is extended (continuing to be displayed after the final variation in the time-saving state has ended), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Also, FIG. 199(b) is a diagram showing the change over time in the presentation mode when a reserved ball that will result in a small win is detected after 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the final variation display in the time-saving state. In the example of FIG. 199(b), a reserved ball corresponding to a miss of the first special pattern is reserved within 5 seconds after the start of the variation, and then a reserved ball corresponding to a small win of the second special pattern is reserved after 5 seconds have elapsed. As shown in FIG. 199(b), if a small win occurs after 5 seconds have elapsed, during the 10-second variation time of the miss variation, a presentation in which the character 801 searches for the treasure box 802 is executed for 5 seconds, and then a presentation in which the discovered treasure box 802 is empty is executed for 4 seconds, and after 9 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variation, the display mode is switched to the time-saving end display (see FIG. 198(a)). The time-saving end display continues for 1 second until 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variation, which is the timing of the end of the variation, and a revival presentation (see FIG. 198(b)) is executed after the variation stops. When three symbols imitating the same number indicating a win (big win or small win) are displayed by this revival effect, the symbol display is maintained until the start of the small win. In this way, if a winning (big win or small win) reserved ball is detected after the effect to check the contents of the treasure chest 802 has started, the effect is not forcibly rewritten, and the revival effect is configured to notify the player of the win, making it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the content of the effect, while still allowing the player to feel great joy at having won. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 200(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 200(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 200(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment in that a normal winning type selection table 202af is added. In addition, it is also different in that the contents of the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, and the time-saving grant table 202e have been partially changed.

First, the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in this eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 200(b) and (c). Although not shown in the figures, the first winning random number table 202a in this eighth embodiment is defined as having two types of tables, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for use in drawing the first special symbol and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for use in drawing the second special symbol, similar to the first winning random number table 202a in the first and seventh embodiments (see Fig. 21(a)). First, the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in this eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 200(b).

Figure 200 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in this eighth embodiment. In this special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, a random number value (determination value) that is determined as a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol is specified, similar to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment described above (see Figure 184 (a)). More specifically, as shown in Figure 200 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in this eighth embodiment is specified in association with "0 to 3" as the range of the counter value (random number value) of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined as a jackpot. Therefore, in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is any value of "0 to 3", it is determined as a jackpot, while if it is not any value of "0 to 3" (any value of "4 to 999"), it is determined as a miss. Of the 1000 possible counter values (random numbers) of "0-999" for the first winning random number counter C1, the counter values (random numbers) that are determined to be big wins are four, "0-3", so the probability of a big win being determined in the drawing of the first special symbol is 1/250 (4/1000). Also, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in this eighth embodiment does not specify a random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a small win. Therefore, the probability of a small win being determined in the drawing of the first special symbol (winning a small win) is 0. Therefore, the drawing of the first special symbol is configured so that only a direct win can occur (a V win based on a small win cannot occur), so the expectation of a big win is lower than the drawing of the second special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 200(c), the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, similar to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 184(b)), random numbers (judgment values) that are judged as a big win and a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol are specified. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 200(c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the eighth embodiment is specified in correspondence with "0 to 3" as the range of counter values (random number values) that are judged as a big win, and is specified in correspondence with "4 to 230" as the range of counter values (random number values) that are judged as a small win. Of the 1000 counter values (random numbers) of "0 to 999" that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, the counter values (random numbers) that are determined to be big wins are "0 to 3" at four, and the counter values (random numbers) that are determined to be small wins are "4 to 230" at 226, so the probability of being determined to be a big win in the lottery for the second special pattern is 1/250 (4/1000), and the probability of being determined to be a small win is 1/4.4 (226/1000). In addition, in the eighth embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment, if a small win is won, about 10 game balls can be made to enter the V winning device 6500 simply by continuing to shoot the game ball aiming at the V winning device 6500, so winning a small win is almost synonymous with winning a big win. Therefore, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, there is a 1/250 probability of a direct hit, a 1/4.4 probability of a small hit, and a nearly certain V hit, so the expectation of a big hit is significantly higher than when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the player can have a stronger expectation of a big hit.

Next, referring to FIG. 201(a), the details of the first win type selection table 202b in the eighth embodiment will be described. This first win type selection table 202b is a data table that is referenced to specify (determine) the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won, similar to the first win type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 200(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this first win type selection table 202b.

As shown in FIG. 200(a), the first winning type selection table 202b in the eighth embodiment includes a first direct winning table 202bf1 for identifying (determining) the type of winning when the first special symbol is selected as a winning symbol (a direct winning of the first special symbol occurs), a second direct winning table 202bf2 for identifying (determining) the type of winning when the second special symbol is selected as a winning symbol (a direct winning of the second special symbol occurs), and a V winning table 202bf3 for identifying (determining) the type of winning when the winning symbol is selected based on the occurrence of a V winning during the execution of a small winning game (a V winning occurs). First, the details of the special 1 direct winning table 202bf1 will be described with reference to FIG. 200(b).

Figure 201 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the special 1 direct hit table 202bf1. As shown in Figure 201 (b), in this eighth embodiment, two types of jackpot types, "jackpot A8" and "jackpot B8", are provided as jackpot types that can be determined when the lottery for the first special symbol results in a jackpot (when a direct hit of the first special symbol occurs). "Jackpot A8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is four, and when the jackpot is won in a normal state, a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, "jackpot B8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is four, and when the jackpot is won in a normal state, a normal state is set after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal state, "jackpot A8" is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B8" because the game state after the jackpot ends is more advantageous. In the time-saving state, it is configured so that a favorable time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends regardless of which jackpot is won. This prevents a player from being disappointed by a transition to the unfavorable normal state even if the player wins a jackpot in a lottery for the first special symbol, which has a low probability of winning a jackpot during the time-saving state, and thus further increases the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 201(c), the details of the special 2 direct winning table 202bf2 will be described. FIG. 201(c) is a diagram showing the provisions of the special 2 direct winning table 202bf2. As shown in FIG. 201(c), in this eighth embodiment, only "jackpot C8" is provided as a jackpot type that can be determined when the lottery for the second special symbol becomes a jackpot (when a direct hit of the second special symbol occurs) ("jackpot C8" is associated with all values of the first winning type counter C2). "Jackpot C8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 15 rounds, and when it is won in the normal state, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends. Therefore, when the lottery for the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in the normal state, the possibility of transitioning to the advantageous time-saving state is 0, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular playing methods that aim to execute the lottery for the second special symbol by hitting the right during normal times. In addition, if the "Big Win C7" is won during the time-saving state, a favorable time-saving state is set after the big win ends. This prevents the player from being disappointed by a transition to the unfavorable normal state even if the player wins a direct hit, which has a low probability, during the time-saving state, and thus increases the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 201(d), the V hit table 202bf3 will be described in detail. As described above, the V hit table 202bf3 is a data table that specifies data for specifying (selecting) the type of jackpot to be executed when a V win occurs in a small win game (the game ball passes through the V win switch 6500e3). FIG. 201(d) is a diagram showing the contents of the V hit table 202bf3. As shown in FIG. 201(d), the V hit table 202bf3 specifies three types of jackpots: "jackpot D8", "jackpot E8", and "jackpot F8".

As shown in FIG. 201(d), the range of the first winning type counter C2 value "0-39" is associated with "jackpot D8". This "jackpot D8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This "jackpot D8" is the jackpot type that has the most rounds among all the jackpot types, and the game state after the jackpot is also advantageous to the player, so it is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) of "0-99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot D8" is 40, so the probability (proportion) that "jackpot D8" will be determined (selected) as the type of jackpot to be started when a V win occurs during the execution of a small winning game is 40/100 (40%).

As shown in FIG. 201(d), the first winning type counter C2 is set to correspond to the range of winnings "40 to 59" with "jackpot E8". This "jackpot E8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 8, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This "jackpot E8" is the second most advantageous jackpot type after "jackpot D8" because it has the second largest number of rounds after "jackpot D8" and the game state after the jackpot is advantageous. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot E8" is 20, so the probability (proportion) that "jackpot E8" will be determined (selected) as the type of jackpot to be started when a V win occurs during the execution of a small winning game is 20/100 (20%).

As shown in FIG. 201(d), the first winning type counter C2 is set to correspond to the range of "60 to 99" for the winning number, and "jackpot F8" is set to correspond to the winning number of the first winning type counter C2. This "jackpot F8" is a winning type in which the number of rounds is 4, and the game state after the winning is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, regardless of the game state at the time of winning. In other words, it is a winning type that is less favorable than "jackpot D8" and "jackpot E8" in terms of the number of rounds, but is equivalent in terms of the game state after the winning is finished. Since the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot F8" is 40 out of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the probability (proportion) that "jackpot F8" is determined (selected) as the type of winning that starts when a V win occurs during the execution of a small winning game is 40/100 (40%).

In this way, in the eighth embodiment, when a small win is won in the drawing of the second special symbol and a V win occurs, the time-saving state is always set after the big win ends, regardless of the game state at the time of the win. In addition, when the drawing of the second special symbol is executed, the small win (= V win) is won with an extremely high probability of 1/4.4 compared to a direct win. Therefore, in the time-saving state (and while the reserved balls for the second special symbol that were accumulated during the time-saving state after the transition to the normal state are consumed), the expectation that the time-saving state will be granted again every time the drawing of the second special symbol is executed can be increased, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 202(a), the time-saving granting table 202e in the eighth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 202(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving granting table 202e. As shown in FIG. 202(a), the number of times the first special symbol is given a time-saving grant (the value of the special 1 time-saving counter 203k1 for indicating the number of times the first special symbol is given a time-saving grant) is "96 times" and the number of times the second special symbol is given a time-saving grant (the value of the special 2 time-saving counter 203k2 for indicating the number of times the second special symbol is given a time-saving grant) is "4 times". In addition, the same number of times the time-saving grant is also associated with the "jackpot A8" that is won in the time-saving state. Therefore, when the "jackpot A8" is won, a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the game state.

As shown in FIG. 202(a), the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are given time-saving is set to "0 times" for the "jackpot B8" won in the normal state, while the number of times the first special symbol is given time-saving is set to "96 times" and the number of times the second special symbol is given time-saving is set to "4 times" for the "jackpot B8" won in the time-saving state. Therefore, when the first special symbol is given direct and the "jackpot B8" is determined in the normal state, the game transitions to the normal state which is disadvantageous to the player, whereas when the first special symbol is given direct and the "jackpot B8" is determined in the time-saving state, the game transitions to the time-saving state which is advantageous to the player. Similarly, for the "jackpot C8", the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are given time-saving is set to "0 times" for the "jackpot C8" won in the normal state, while the number of times the first special symbol is given time-saving is set to "96 times" and the number of times the second special symbol is given time-saving is set to "4 times" for the "jackpot C8" won in the time-saving state. Therefore, when the first special symbol is given direct and the "jackpot C8" is determined in the normal state, the game transitions to the normal state, which is disadvantageous to the player, whereas when the first special symbol is given direct and the "jackpot C8" is determined in the time-saving state, the game transitions to the time-saving state, which is advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 202(a), for "jackpot D8" to "jackpot F8", regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the first special symbol is associated with "96 times" as the number of times the time-saving feature is granted, and the second special symbol is associated with "4 times" as the number of times the time-saving feature is granted. For this reason, if a small jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol during the time-saving state or during the reserved consumption after the time-saving state ends, and a V jackpot occurs, the time-saving state will always be granted after the V jackpot ends. Therefore, when a lottery for the second special symbol, which has a high probability of a small jackpot (1/4.4), is held, not only can the player's expectation of a V jackpot be increased, but the player's expectation of entering the time-saving state can also be increased. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 202(b), the details of the normal winning type selection table 202fa will be described. This normal winning type selection table 202fa is a data table that is referenced to specify (determine) the winning type when a normal pattern is won. FIG. 202(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal winning type selection table 202fa. As shown in FIG. 202(b), two types of normal winning types are specified in the normal winning type selection table 202fa in this eighth embodiment. Specifically, two types of winning types, "normal winning A8" and "normal winning B8", are specified. "Normal winning A8" is a normal winning type in which, when a winning is made in the normal state of a normal pattern, an opening pattern is set in which the electric role 701 is opened only once for 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of a normal winning, while when a winning is made in the time-saving state of a normal pattern, an opening pattern A (see FIG. 171) is set. As described above, the switching valve 702 is fixed to the first switching state in which the ball flows down to the first flow path 703 for 1.4 seconds after the start of the normal pattern, so that when the normal pattern is hit and the "normal pattern hit A" is won in the normal state, it is difficult to make the game ball enter the distribution device 700 during the 0.2 second opening period, and even if the game ball enters the distribution device 700, the game ball enters the first operating port 704 and the right first ball entrance port 64a2 is opened. Therefore, even if an irregular game method is performed in which a game ball is launched by hitting the right side aiming at the distribution device 700 during normal times, the game ball is difficult to enter the distribution device 700, and even if the ball enters, only the lottery for the first special pattern can be executed, so that the merit of the irregular game method can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting the right side during the normal state. On the other hand, as described above in the sixth embodiment, when the opening pattern A is set, game balls are more likely to enter the distribution device 700, and the game balls that do enter the distribution device 700 tend to enter the first operating port 704.

In addition, when "normal winning B8" is won in the normal state of the normal pattern, an opening pattern is set in which the electric role 701 is opened only once for 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the normal winning, while when it is won in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, opening pattern B (see FIG. 171) is set. Therefore, when "normal winning B8" is won in the normal state, an opening pattern is set in which the ball is difficult to enter the distribution device 700, as with "normal winning A8", and even if the ball enters, the game ball will only enter the first operating port 704. In contrast, when "normal winning B8" is won in the time-saving state, the game ball is easy to enter the distribution device 700, and the game ball that enters will almost always enter the second operating port 707, so the right second ball entrance port 64b, which is an opportunity to draw the advantageous (i.e., high jackpot expectation) second special pattern, is opened. Therefore, it can be said that "Regular Map B8" is a more advantageous regular map type than "Regular Map A8."

As shown in FIG. 202(b), when the value of the second winning type counter C6 for determining the normal winning type is in the range of "0 to 79", "normal winning type A8" is associated with it as the normal winning type. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the second winning type counter C6 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "normal winning type A8" is 80, which is "0 to 79". Therefore, when a normal pattern is won, the probability that "normal winning type A8" will be determined is 4/5 (80/100).

As shown in FIG. 202(b), when the value of the second winning type counter C6 is in the range of "80 to 99", "normal winning type B8" is associated with it as the normal winning type. Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the second winning type counter C6, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "normal winning type B8" is 20, from "80 to 99", so the probability that "normal winning type B8" will be determined when a normal pattern is won is 1/5 (20/100).

In this way, in the eighth embodiment, when a normal symbol lottery is executed in the time-saving state and a win occurs, "normal symbol win A8" in which the right first ball entrance 64a2 is likely to be opened 80% of the time, and "normal symbol win B8" in which the right second ball entrance 64b is likely to be opened 20% of the time, is determined (selected). By configuring in this way, the lottery for the first special symbol, which has a large number of time-saving times and is preferentially executed, can be executed with higher priority, so that the lottery for the second special symbol is executed immediately after the start of the time-saving state, and it is possible to prevent the time-saving state from ending in a relatively short period of time, even though the player wishes to execute the lottery for the first special symbol first and then execute the lottery for the second special symbol later. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the convenience of the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 203, the transition method of each state in the eighth embodiment will be described. Here, in the eighth embodiment, two game states are provided, as in the seventh embodiment. That is, two types of game states are provided: a normal game state (normal state) in which the normal state of the normal pattern is set, and a time-saving game state (time-saving state) in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set. In addition, in the normal game state, the degree of advantage is greatly different between the normal game state in which there is a reserved ball of the second special pattern immediately after the time-saving state ends and the normal game state in which there is no reserved ball of the second special pattern. That is, if there is even one reserved ball of the second special pattern, there is a probability of 1/4.4 to win a small win and a V win, and the time-saving state is always set again after the V win ends, so a very advantageous state is formed compared to the case in which there is no reserved ball of the second special pattern. In the following explanation, for simplicity, the normal game state in which there are no reserved balls with the second special pattern will be referred to as "normal mode," and the time-saving game state in which a lottery for the second special pattern may be executed and the normal game state in which there are reserved balls with the second special pattern will be referred to as "chance mode A" and "chance mode B," respectively, to indicate that there is a high probability of winning the jackpot.

First, referring to the upper part of FIG. 203, a method of transition from the normal mode (normal game state in which there are no reserved balls of the second special symbol) to another state (mode) will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 203, there is a possibility of transition from the normal mode to another mode only when the lottery for the first special symbol results in a jackpot (a direct hit). More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 203, when the lottery for the first special symbol results in a jackpot A8, which has a 50% chance of winning, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the advantageous chance mode A (time-saving game state). On the other hand, when the lottery for the first special symbol results in a jackpot B8, which has a 50% chance of winning, the mode after the jackpot ends is set again to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player (the normal mode is looped). Therefore, in the normal mode, the player can play in the hope of winning the lottery for the first special symbol in the jackpot A8.

Next, referring to the central portion of FIG. 203, a method of transition from Chance Mode A (time-saving game state) to another state (mode) will be described. As shown in the central portion of FIG. 203, transition from Chance Mode A to another mode is possible only when the number of time-saving cycles has elapsed. More specifically, if there is a reserved ball with the second special pattern when the number of time-saving cycles has elapsed (after transition to the time-saving game state, 96 drawings of the first special pattern have been completed, or 4 drawings of the second special pattern have been completed), the mode transitions to Chance Mode B. On the other hand, if there is no reserved ball with the second special pattern when the number of time-saving cycles has elapsed, the mode transitions to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, in Chance Mode A, when there are no reserved balls of the second special pattern at the time of the time-saving number of times, for example, when four reserved balls of the second special pattern are accumulated, a left hit (or firing is stopped) is performed, and during the fourth second special pattern change display (i.e., the last change display in the time-saving state), an attempt is made to accumulate reserved balls of the second special pattern by hitting with the right, but only "normal pattern win A8" is won, and the reserved balls of the second special pattern do not increase. Another case is, for example, when "normal pattern win B8" is won consecutively immediately after switching to Chance Mode A, and the lottery for the first special pattern is not executed, and the lottery for the second special pattern is executed four times in a row.

On the other hand, as shown in the center of FIG. 203, when a V-win occurs based on a direct win or a small win in chance mode A, the mode after the big win is always set to chance mode A, which is advantageous to the player, regardless of the type of big win. This makes it possible for the player to be delighted when a direct win or small win is won in the special pattern lottery in chance mode A.

Next, referring to the lower part of FIG. 203, a method of transitioning from chance mode B (normal game state in which reserved balls of the second special pattern are present) to another mode will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 203, the mode transitions from chance mode B to another state (mode) when a jackpot is won, as well as when all reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 203, if a direct hit occurs and the jackpot type of the direct hit is "jackpot A8", which is determined at a 50% rate of direct hits of the first special pattern, the mode transitions to chance mode A, which is advantageous to the player, after the jackpot ends. Also, if the second special pattern is drawn as a small hit and a V hit is won, the mode transitions to chance mode A, which is advantageous to the player, after the jackpot ends.

On the other hand, if the player wins either "Jackpot B8", which is determined with a 50% probability when the first special symbol hits, or "Jackpot C8", which is determined with a 100% probability when the second special symbol hits, and there are no reserved balls for the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot, the state (mode) after the jackpot ends will be set to normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. Also, if all reserved balls for the second special symbol are used up (all lottery results for the second special symbol after the transition to chance mode B are losses), the game will transition to normal mode. On the other hand, if there are no reserved balls for the second special symbol at the end of "Jackpot B8" or "Jackpot C8" (1 or more), the state (mode) after the jackpot ends will again be chance mode B.

In this way, in the eighth embodiment, the game is configured to switch between three different states in response to a jackpot or the like, which helps prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Next, referring to FIG. 204, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 204 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 204, the RAM 223 in this eighth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 26(b)) in that a final fluctuation flag 223fa, a final performance setting flag 223fb, and a winning performance flag 223fc have been added.

The final change flag 223fa is a flag that indicates whether or not the final change display in the time-saving state is being executed. When this final change flag 223fa is on, it indicates that the final change display in the time-saving state is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that the final change display in the time-saving state is not being executed. This final change flag 223fa is set on when the final change in the time-saving state starts, and is set off when the number of time-saving times becomes 0 (i.e., when the final change display in the time-saving state ends) (see S2622 in FIG. 213).

The final performance setting flag 223fb is a flag that indicates whether or not the type of performance after the treasure chest 802 is found (the performance mode after 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the performance) has already been set in the final display of the time-saving state. If this final performance setting flag 223fb is on, it means that the type of performance has already been decided, and if it is off, it means that the type of performance has not been decided. If a winning reserved ball is detected during the execution of the final performance (the start of a big win or small win is detected), it is determined whether or not to announce a win by a revival performance (see FIG. 198(b)) depending on the state of this final performance setting flag 223fb and the state of the winning performance flag 223fc described later.

The winning effect flag 223fc is a flag for indicating whether or not a winning effect (i.e., an effect in which a V display 803 appears from a treasure chest 802) or a revival effect (see FIG. 198(b)) has been set as the effect of the last variable effect in the time-saving state. If this winning effect flag 223fc is on, it means that a winning effect or a revival effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that a losing effect is not being executed, or the last variable display in the time-saving state is not being executed. This winning effect flag 223fc is set on when a winning effect is set (see S3516 in FIG. 209) or when the start of a revival effect is set (see S2326 in FIG. 211), and is set off when the effect in the time-saving state (and during reserved consumption) has ended.

<Regarding control process of main control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in this eighth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Fig. 205 to Fig. 207. First, the special symbol variation process 8 (S131 in Fig. 205) in this eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 205. This special symbol variation process 8 (S131) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 7 (see Fig. 188, S121) in the seventh embodiment, and is a process for setting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37a, 37b, similar to the special symbol variation process 7 (see Fig. 188) in the seventh embodiment.

In the separate symbol variation process 8 (S131) in this eighth embodiment, the processes of S201, S202, S206 to S218, S220, S231 to S235, and S238 are the same as the processes of S201, S202, S206 to S218, S220, S231 to S235, and S238 in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188, S121) in the seventh embodiment.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 8 (S131) in this eighth embodiment, the order of the process of S206 and the process of S232 is swapped. That is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter b (N1) is determined first by the process of S206, and the process of S232 is executed only if the value is 0 (S206: No). In other words, if there is 1 or more reserved balls for the first special symbol, the specification is adopted in which the drawing for the second special symbol is not started (the drawing for the first special symbol is executed with priority over the drawing for the second special symbol).

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 205) in the eighth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S213 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S213: No), the time-saving count update process 8 is executed to update the number of time-saving times (S241), and the process proceeds to S220. Details of this time-saving count update process 8 (S241) will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing this time-saving count update process 8 (S241).

This time-saving count update process 8 (see FIG. 206) is a process for updating the number of time-saving times for normal symbols, similar to the time-saving count update process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 42, S219). In the eighth embodiment, the time-saving counters 203k include a special 1 time-saving counter 203k1 for indicating the number of time-saving times for the first special symbol, and a special 2 time-saving counter 203k2 for indicating the number of time-saving times for the second special symbol. In the time-saving count update process 8 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 206), the value of the corresponding time-saving counter is updated according to the type of special symbol.

In the eighth embodiment, in the processes of S601, S604, and S607 of the time-saving count update process 8 (S241), the same processes as those of S601, S604, and S607 of the time-saving count update process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 42, S219) are executed. In addition, when the time-saving count update process 8 (S241) in the eighth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current timing is the timing to stop the fluctuation of the first special pattern (S611). In the process of S611, if it is determined that the current timing is the timing to stop the fluctuation of the first special pattern (S611: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the value of the special 1 time-saving counter 203k1 is greater than 0 (S612). In the process of S612, if it is determined that the value of the special 1 time-saving counter 203k1 is 0 (S612: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S612, if it is determined that the value of the special 1 time-saving counter 203k1 is not 0 (S612: Yes), the value of the special 1 time-saving counter 203k1 is decremented by 1 (S613), a remaining time-saving count command indicating the value of the special 1 time-saving counter 203k1 after the decrement is set (S614), and the process proceeds to S604.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S611 that the current timing is not the timing for the first special symbol to stop fluctuating (S611: No), this means that the current fluctuating stop is the timing for the second special symbol to stop fluctuating, so next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special 2 time-saving counter 203k2 is greater than 0 (S615). If it is determined in the process of S615 that the value of the special 2 time-saving counter 203k2 is 0 (S615: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S615 that the value of the special 2 time-saving counter 203k2 is not 0 (S615: Yes), the value of the special 2 time-saving counter 203k is decremented by 1 (S616), a remaining time-saving number command indicating the updated value of the special 2 time-saving counter 203k2 is set (S617), and the process proceeds to S604.

In addition, in the time-saving count update process 8 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 206), if it is determined in the process of S604 that the value of the time-saving counter 203k has become 0 (i.e., the value of the special 1 time-saving counter 203k1 or the value of the special 2 time-saving counter 203k2 has become 0) (S604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S618), the values of the special 1 time-saving counter 203k1 and the special 2 time-saving counter 203k2 are set to 0 (S619), and the process proceeds to S607.

By executing this time-saving count update process 8 (see FIG. 206), the number of time-saving counts for the first special pattern and the number of time-saving counts for the second special pattern can be accurately updated according to the type of special pattern that has been stopped from changing.

Next, referring to FIG. 207, we will explain the normal symbol fluctuation process 8 (S132) executed in this eighth embodiment. This normal symbol fluctuation process 8 (S132) is a process executed in place of the normal symbol fluctuation process 7 (see FIG. 190, S122) in the seventh embodiment, and like the normal symbol fluctuation process 7 (see FIG. 190) in the seventh embodiment, it is a process for controlling the fluctuation display and fluctuation time of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening operation and opening time of the electric role 701 in the distribution device 700, etc.

In the normal symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 207) in the eighth embodiment, the same processes as those of S901, S902, S906-S910, S912-915, S920, and S931-S938 in the normal symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 190, S122) in the seventh embodiment are executed in each of the processes S901, S902, S906-S910, S912-915, S920, and S931-S938. In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 207) in the eighth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S915 that the current lottery result of the normal symbol is a win (S915: Yes), then the normal symbol win type selection table 202fa (see FIG. 202(b)) is referenced to identify the opening pattern according to the current game state (S941), and the process proceeds to S920.

By executing this normal symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 207), when a normal symbol wins, there is an 80% chance that a normal symbol A8 will be selected, and a 20% chance that a normal symbol B8 will be selected. This means that when a right hit is made in the time-saving state, the right first ball entrance 64a2 is more likely to open than the right second ball entrance 64b. This allows the drawing of the first special symbol, which has a low actual chance of winning, to be performed with higher priority, so that the drawing of the second special symbol, which has a higher chance of winning, can be more easily performed in the latter half of the time-saving state. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Fig. 208 to Fig. 214. First, main process 8 (Fig. 208) in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 208. This main process 8 is a process executed in place of the main process (see Fig. 55) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Main processing 8 in this eighth embodiment (see FIG. 208) differs from the main processing in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 55) only in that performance update processing 8 (S2121) is executed instead of performance update processing (S2112), that command determination processing 8 (S2122) is executed instead of command determination processing (S2113), and that variable display setting processing 8 (S2123) is executed instead of variable display setting processing (S2114). First, the details of the above-mentioned performance update processing 8 (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. 209.

Figure 209 is a flowchart showing the performance update process 8 (S2121). This performance update process 8 (S2121) is a process executed in the main process 8 (see Figure 208) instead of the performance update process (see S2112) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process for updating the performance mode according to the progress of the variable pattern performance (variable display performance), etc.

In this performance update process 8 (S2121), first, it is determined whether the final change flag 223fa is on (S3511), and if it is determined that the final change flag 223fa is off (S3511: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the final change flag 223fa is on (S3511: Yes), it means that the last change display in the time-saving state is being executed, so it is next determined whether the final performance setting flag 223fb is on (whether the type of performance after discovering the treasure chest 802 has been determined in the last change display in the time-saving state) (S3512). In the process of S3512, if it is determined that the final performance setting flag 223fb is off (the last performance in the time-saving state has not been determined) (S3512: No), it is next determined whether the current timing is 5 seconds after the start of the current change (S3513). In the process of S3513, if it is determined that 5 seconds have passed since the start of the current fluctuation (S3513: Yes), it is then determined whether or not there is a big win or a small win in the reserve (S3514). If it is determined that there is a big win or a small win in the reserve (S3514: Yes), the start of the effect in which V appears from the treasure chest is set (S3515), the win effect flag 223fc is set to ON (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3519.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3514 that there is no big win or small win in the reserve (S3514: No), the process sets the start of an effect in which the treasure chest is empty (S3517), sets the win effect flag 223fc to off (S3518), and proceeds to the process of S3519. In the process of S3519, the final effect setting flag 223fb is set to on (S3519), and this process ends.

In contrast to these, if the process of S3512 determines that the final effect setting flag 223fb is on (S3512: Yes), and if the process of S3513 determines that the current timing is not 5 seconds after the start of the current fluctuation (S3513: No), there is no need to determine the effect mode for the final fluctuation display in the time-saving state, and so this process is terminated.

By executing this presentation update process 8 (see Figure 209), it is possible to set the presentation mode to be executed during the change time of the last change display in the time-saving state (and the change display based on the reserved balls), taking into account the results of the preview of the reserved balls accumulated from the start of the last change display in the time-saving state until 5 seconds have elapsed.

Next, referring to FIG. 210, command determination process 8 (S2122) executed in this eighth embodiment will be described. This command determination process 8 (S2122) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 56) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and, like the command determination process (see FIG. 56) in the seventh embodiment, is a process for performing control in response to various commands received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process 8 (S2122) in this eighth embodiment, the command determination process (see FIG. 56) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) is different only in that the winning information related process 8 (S2231) is executed instead of the winning information related process (S2210), the stop command process (S2232) is executed instead of the process of S2214 for setting the stop display of the third symbol, and the time-saving update process 8 (S2233) is executed instead of the time-saving update process (S2216). First, the above-mentioned winning information related process 8 (S2231) will be described with reference to FIG. 211. This winning information related process 8 (S2231), like the winning information related process (see FIG. 57, S2210) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), is a process for executing control according to the pre-reading result notified by the winning information command received from the main control device 110.

In the winning information related process 8 (S2231) in this eighth embodiment, the processes of S2311 and S2312 are the same as the processes of S2311 and S2312 in the winning information related process (see FIG. 57, S2210) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). In the winning information related process 8 (S2231) in this eighth embodiment, first, it is determined whether the final performance setting flag 223fb is on (S2321), and if it is determined that the final performance setting flag 223fb is off (S2321: No), the process proceeds to S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2321 that the final effect setting flag 223fb is on (S2321: Yes), it is then determined whether the winning effect flag 203fc is on (i.e., whether the effect mode indicating a winning or small winning is set as the effect mode of the final variable display in the time-saving state) (S2322). If it is determined in the process of S2322 that the winning effect flag 203fc is on (S2322: Yes), the process proceeds to S2312.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2322 that the winning effect flag 203fc is off (S2322: No), then it is determined whether the received winning information is winning information that will be consumed within the high-speed consumption period (i.e., the period in which a variable time of 0.1 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result after the time-saving state ends) (S2323). If it is determined in the process of S2323 that the received winning information is not winning information that will be consumed within the high-speed consumption period (S2323: No), it proceeds to the process of S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received winning information is winning information that will be consumed within the high-speed consumption period (S2323: Yes), then it is determined whether the received winning information is winning information corresponding to a big win or a small win (S23234), and if it is determined that the received winning information is not winning information for a big win or a small win (S2324: No), it proceeds to the process of S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received winning information corresponds to a big win or a small win (S2324: Yes), the execution of the revival performance (see FIG. 198(b)) is set (S2325), the winning performance flag 223fc is set to ON (S2326), and the process proceeds to S2311. Note that in the process of S2325, if the final fluctuation in the time-saving state is being executed, the revival performance is set to start based on the end of the final fluctuation, whereas if the final fluctuation in the time-saving state has ended, the revival performance is set to start immediately.

By executing this winning information related process 8 (see FIG. 211), if winning information corresponding to a big win or small win is detected after setting the final performance of a miss, the player can be notified of the big win or small win without feeling out of place through a revival performance, so the performance mode can be set more appropriately.

Next, the above-mentioned stop command process (S2232) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 212. Fig. 212 is a flow chart showing this stop command process (S2232). This stop command process (S2232) is one process in the command judgment process 8,
This is processing for performing control in response to a stop command received from main control device 110.

In this stop command process (see FIG. 212), first, it is determined whether the final performance setting flag 223fb is on (S9001), and if it is determined that the final performance setting flag 223fb is off (S9001: No), the process proceeds to S9007. On the other hand, if it is determined that the final performance setting flag 223fb is on in the process of S9001 (S9001: Yes), it is next determined whether the winning performance flag 223fc is on (S9002). If it is determined that the winning performance flag 223fc is on in the process of S9002 (S9002: Yes), it is next determined whether the stop command received this time is a stop command corresponding to a winning or small winning pattern (S9004), and if it is determined that it is not a stop command corresponding to a winning or small winning pattern (it is a stop command corresponding to a miss) (S9004: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that a stop command corresponding to a winning or small winning symbol has been received (S9004: Yes), the process proceeds to S9005.

In the processing of S9005, the end of the final effect is set (S9005), the final effect setting flag 223fb and the winning effect flag 223fc are set to OFF (S9006), and the processing proceeds to S9007.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9002 that the winning effect flag 223fc is off (S9002: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (S9003). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (S9003: Yes), this process ends as is. If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 (S9003: No), the processes of S9005 and S9006 are executed, and the process moves to S9007. In the process of S9007, the stop display of the third pattern corresponding to the received stop command is set (S9007), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 213, the time-saving update process (S2233) in the eighth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing this time-saving update process 8 (S2233). As described above, this time-saving update process 8 (S2233) is a process executed in command determination process 8 (see FIG. 210, S2122) instead of the time-saving update process (see FIG. 60) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process for updating the number of time-saving times grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 in synchronization with the actual number of time-saving times, similar to the time-saving update process (see FIG. 60) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In this time-saving update process 8 (see FIG. 213), first, it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating that the number of time-saving times has reached 0 (S2621). In the process of S2621, if it is determined that the received command is a command indicating that the number of time-saving times has reached 0 (S2621: Yes), this means that it is the end timing of the final fluctuation display in the time-saving state, so the final fluctuation flag 223fa is set to OFF (S2622) and the process proceeds to S2623. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating that the number of time-saving times has reached 0 (S2621: No), the process skips S2622 and proceeds to S2623.

In the process of S2623, the data in the time-saving information update area 223g and the display setting of the number of time-saving times are updated according to the notified time-saving related information (S2623), and this process ends. By executing this time-saving update process 8 (see FIG. 213), the actual number of time-saving times can be made to match the number of time-saving times grasped by the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, referring to FIG. 214, the details of the performance setting process 8 (S2821) in this eighth embodiment will be described. Here, this performance setting process 8 is a process that is executed in the variable display setting process 8 (S2123) in this eighth embodiment instead of the performance setting process (see FIG. 63) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). Note that the only difference between the variable display setting process 8 (S2123) in this eighth embodiment and the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) in the seventh embodiment is that this performance setting process 8 (S2821) is executed, and therefore the illustration of the variable display setting process 8 (S2123) is omitted.

Figure 214 is a flowchart showing this performance setting process 8 (S2821). This performance setting process 8 (S2821) is a process for determining (setting) the detailed variable display mode according to the variable pattern (variation time) notified by the variable pattern command, similar to the performance setting process (see Figure 63) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In this effect setting process 8 (S2821), first, it is determined whether or not the final effect setting flag 223fb is on (S2911). If it is determined in the process of S2911 that the final effect setting flag 223fb is off (S2911: No), the effect mode of the variable pattern effect according to the lottery result is set (S2912), and then this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2911 that the final effect setting flag 223fb is on (S2911: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the winning effect flag 223fc is on (S2913). If it is determined in the process of S2913 that the winning effect flag 223fc is on (S2913: Yes), the process proceeds to S2917.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2913 that the winning effect flag 223fc is off (S2913: No), it is then determined whether or not the data in the winning information storage area 223a contains a winning or small winning (S2914), and if it is determined that the data in the winning information storage area 223a does not contain a winning or small winning (S2914: No), the process proceeds to S2917. In the process of S2917, the display continuation of the display mode at the time of the start of the variation is set (S2917), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2914 that the data in the winning information storage area 223a contains a winning or small winning (S2914: Yes), the start of the revival performance (see FIG. 198(b)) is set (S2915), the winning performance flag 223fc is set to ON (S2916), and this processing ends.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment is configured so that in a time-saving state advantageous to the player, both the selection conditions for the first special symbol (start winning) and the selection conditions for the second special symbol (start winning) can be satisfied, and the selection of the second special symbol is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the selection of the first special symbol (effectively increasing the possibility of winning a jackpot). The selection of the first special symbol is made easier by selecting the first game method (a game method in which the player continues to hit the ball to the right in succession), while the selection of the second game method different from the first game method (a game method in which the player hits the ball to the left or stops firing every time a game ball enters the right second ball entrance 64b) is made easier to select the timing for the selection of the second special symbol, which has a high expectation of winning a jackpot, at the player's discretion. This allows the game to be tailored to the tastes of each player, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment is configured to provide multiple conditions for ending the time-saving state (a state advantageous to the player), and is configured so that the time-saving state is more likely to end when a lottery for the second special symbol is executed than when a lottery for the first special symbol is executed. More specifically, the number of lotteries (time-saving times) at which the time-saving state is ended is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the number of time-saving times for the second special symbol (4 times) is less than the number of time-saving times for the first special symbol (96 times). By configuring in this way, if the game method of preferentially executing the drawing of the advantageous second special symbol (i.e., high jackpot expectation) is continued, there is a high possibility that the time-saving state will end in a short period of time compared to when the drawing of the first special symbol is preferentially executed, so the game method of executing the drawing of the second special symbol after executing the drawing of the first special symbol, which has a low jackpot expectation, to a certain extent (for example, 95 times) within the time-saving number of the first special symbol, can be made one of the options of the player. On the other hand, for players who want to know the result of the time-saving state (whether it will be a jackpot or the time-saving state will end) in a relatively short period of time, it is possible to select the game method of preferentially executing the drawing of the second special symbol, knowing that the time-saving number of the first special symbol will be lost. In this way, it is possible to realize a game with a high degree of freedom in which the timing of executing the drawing of the second special symbol can be selected according to each player's taste, and the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol is controlled to be executed with priority over the lottery for the second special symbol (when there are reserved balls for the first special symbol and reserved balls for the second special symbol, the reserved balls for the first special symbol are preferentially moved to the execution area and used for the lottery). By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the lottery for the first special symbol for the number of times the time is reduced for the first special symbol while accumulating reserved balls for the second special symbol, simply by practicing a relatively simple playing method of continuously hitting the right during the time-saving state. Then, when the number of times the time is reduced for the first special symbol becomes 0, the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol can be accumulated to the upper limit of 4, and the lottery for the second special symbol based on the upper limit of reserved balls for the second special symbol (i.e., a lottery with a high probability of winning) can be executed. In other words, from the start of the time-saving state until the first condition is met (until the number of time-saving times for the first special pattern is exhausted), the likelihood of winning a jackpot is low, but from the time the first condition is met until the second condition is met (until all reserved balls for the second special pattern are exhausted), gameplay characteristics can be realized in which the likelihood of winning a jackpot is high.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a specific jackpot (e.g., a special jackpot) is won, after the jackpot ends, a first gaming state (e.g., a special jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player is first set with a predetermined number of lottery draws as an upper limit, and if the jackpot is not won within the predetermined number of lottery draws, a second gaming state (e.g., a time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set. However, in such conventional gaming machines, the first gaming state was usually more advantageous than the second gaming state, and there was a problem in that the end of the first gaming state could reduce the player's motivation to play.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment, the drawing of the first special symbol with a low expectation of a jackpot (i.e., low degree of advantage for the player) is more likely to be executed from when the time-saving state advantageous to the player is set until the first condition is established, and the drawing of the second special symbol with a high expectation of a jackpot (i.e., high degree of advantage for the player) is more likely to be executed from when the first condition is established until the second condition is established. In other words, when the game moves to a favorable time-saving state, the game moves to a state with a high degree of advantage after passing through a state with a low degree of advantage. By configuring in this way, even if the player does not win a jackpot before the first condition is established, the player can feel a sense of security that a state with a higher expectation of a jackpot is waiting for him/her, so that the player's motivation to play can be prevented from decreasing at the time the first condition is established. This makes it possible to further increase the player's interest in playing.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, after transitioning to a time-saving state advantageous to the player, the drawing of the second special pattern is executed preferentially until just before the time-saving number of times for the second special pattern is completed (until the second special pattern has been drawn three times), and then the time-saving number of times for the first special pattern is completed first by continuously hitting the right side, and then a gaming method is executed in which the reserved balls for the second special pattern that have accumulated until the time-saving number of times for the first special pattern has elapsed are consumed, thereby making it easier to configure the game to have a large number of drawings (to seven) for the second special pattern that are executed during the time-saving state and until the time-saving state ends and all the reserved balls that have accumulated during the time-saving state are consumed. In other words, from the time when the time-saving state is entered until the specific condition is met (the number of time-saving turns remaining for the second special symbol is 1), the player is most likely to win the lottery for the second special symbol by hitting to the left (or stopping firing), and after the specific condition is met, the player is most likely to win by continuing to hit to the right, which is an extremely unique and innovative specification that can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the eighth embodiment, the number of time-saving times for the first special symbol is greater than the number of time-saving times for the second special symbol, but this is not limited to this. For example, the number of time-saving times for the first special symbol and the number of time-saving times for the second special symbol may be the same (for example, four times for both). By configuring in this way, the period during which the lottery for the first special symbol, which has a low expectation, is performed can be shortened, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming redundant during the time-saving state. In addition, for example, the number of time-saving times for the first special symbol may be set to be less than the number of time-saving times for the second special symbol (for example, three times). In this case, since the possibility that the number of time-saving times for the first special symbol will elapse before the game ball is sufficiently inserted (up to the reserved upper limit number) into the right second ball entrance 64b is relatively high, it is possible to realize a game that can bring joy to the player just by inserting the game ball into the right second ball entrance 64b. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the eighth embodiment, when a normal symbol wins, there is a 20% chance of winning the normal symbol win B8 (the ball can enter the right second ball entrance 64b), but this is not limited to the above. For example, the probability of winning the normal symbol win B may be lowered (for example, to 1/50). By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the reserved balls of the second special symbol to be less likely to accumulate in the time-saving state, so that it is possible to realize a gameplay that can please the player when reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Ninth embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 215 to Fig. 219. In the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment described above, when a small win occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol and a V win occurs, regardless of whether the small win that triggered the V win was won during an advantageous time-saving state or during an unfavorable normal state, the game state after the V win is set to an advantageous time-saving state.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment is configured so that the time-saving state is set more frequently when a V hit occurs during the normal state than when a V hit occurs during the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game method in which the player continues to hit the right to draw the first special symbol, which has a low probability of winning, while increasing the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol, and aiming for a V hit in a lottery based on the reserved balls for the second special symbol after the time-saving state ends. In other words, when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to more reliably achieve the innovative gameplay of transitioning from a state with a low probability of winning to a state with a high probability of winning.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment described above, when a normal symbol win occurs during the time-saving state, the rate of the normal symbol winning type (normal symbol winning A8) of the opening pattern in which the right first ball entrance 64a2 is more likely to open (the ball is more likely to enter the first operating port 704) is determined at a higher rate than the normal symbol winning type (normal symbol winning B8) of the opening pattern in which the right second ball entrance 64b is more likely to open (the ball is more likely to enter the second operating port 707). This allows the lottery condition for the first special symbol (starting winning) to be met more frequently when right-hand hits are continued during the time-saving state.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, during the period from when the time-saving state is entered until the first period (e.g., 180 seconds) has elapsed, game balls can only enter the first operating port 704 even if a normal symbol is hit, and during the period from when the first period has elapsed until the second period (e.g., 360 seconds) has elapsed, game balls can enter both the first operating port 704 and the second operating port 707. By configuring in this way, during the period from when the time-saving state is entered until the first period has elapsed, only the lottery for the first special symbol is executed and only the reserved balls for the first special symbol are increased, so that it is possible to more reliably prevent game balls from continuously entering the second operating port 707 immediately after the time-saving state begins, causing the time-saving count for the second special symbol to elapse in a relatively short time, and causing the time-saving state to end early.

The pachinko machine 10 in this ninth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those in the eighth embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 215, the switching pattern of the switching valve 702 of the distribution device 700 (see FIG. 170) in the ninth embodiment will be described. Here, the switching valve 702 in the above-mentioned eighth embodiment was configured to switch between a first switching state in which the first flow path 703 is passable and a second switching state in which the second flow path 706 is passable in a specific switching pattern when a normal pattern hit is started (see FIG. 171). In contrast, the switching valve 702 in the ninth embodiment is configured to start a switching operation in a predetermined specific switching pattern based on the end of a jackpot (or the initialization of the pachinko machine 10), regardless of the normal pattern hit period. FIG. 215 is a diagram showing the switching pattern of this switching valve 702.

As shown in FIG. 215, the switching valve 702 in the ninth embodiment is set to a switching mode (first switching mode) in which the first switching state is maintained for 180 seconds when the big win ends. When the normal pattern is hit while this first switching mode is set and the electric device 701 is opened and a game ball enters the distribution device 700, the game ball is guided (flows down) to the first operating port 704 and the right first ball entrance 64a2 is opened. Therefore, if the player continues to hit the ball from the right while the time-saving state and the first switching mode are set, only the game balls enter the right first ball entrance 64a2, which results in a biased selection of the first special pattern, and only reserved balls of the first special pattern can be saved.

As shown in FIG. 215, when 180 seconds set to the first switching mode have elapsed, a switching mode (second switching mode) in which the second switching state for 1 second and the first switching state for 3 seconds are periodically repeated is set for 180 seconds (i.e., from 180 seconds after the switching pattern is started until 360 seconds have elapsed). In other words, while the second switching mode is set, the proportion of the period during which the switching valve 702 is set to the first switching state is 3/4, and the proportion of the period during which it is set to the second switching state is 1/4. If right-handed shots are continued while this second switching mode is set, of the game balls that have entered the distribution device 700 due to a normal pattern hit, approximately 1/4 of the game balls enter the second operating port 707, and 3/4 of the game balls enter the first operating port 704. Therefore, if right hitting is continued while the second switching mode is set, game balls enter the right first ball entrance 64a2 at a higher rate than the right second ball entrance 64b. Therefore, while this second switching mode is set, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed preferentially, while the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be increased. Note that, during the 180 seconds during which the second switching mode is set, the state switches to the second switching state at a rate of 1 second every 4 seconds (the second switching state is set 45 times), so by continuing to hit right, it is possible to make almost 4 or more game balls enter the right second ball entrance 64b. In other words, by simply continuing to hit right during the second switching state, the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be easily accumulated to the upper limit number (4 balls).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 215, after 360 seconds have elapsed since the start of the switching pattern, a switching mode (third switching mode) is set in which the switching valve 702 is maintained in the first switching state until 3600 seconds have elapsed. While this third switching mode is set, game balls enter only the right first ball entrance 64a2, as while the first switching mode is set, so that the selection of special symbols can be biased toward the selection of the first special symbol. These first, second, and third switching modes are the minimum unit of the switching pattern of the switching valve 702, and thereafter, each time the minimum unit of the switching pattern ends, the switching pattern is repeatedly executed from the beginning.

In addition, since the average fluctuation time for a miss in the time-saving state is about 4 seconds, it takes about 384 seconds (4 seconds x 96 times) for the number of time-saving times for the first special symbol to elapse. In other words, since the number of time-saving times for the first special symbol elapses while the third switching mode is set, the possibility of the reserved balls for the second special symbol increasing can be made zero while the time-saving state ends and the reserved balls for the second special symbol are being consumed. Therefore, in each time-saving state, the number of times the second special symbol, which has a high probability of winning, is drawn can be unified, and the probability of winning in one time-saving state can be made uniform.

Here, if, as in the eighth embodiment, a configuration were used in which the operating port into which the game ball that has entered the distribution device 700 is easily guided is different depending on the type of normal winning symbol, in particular, if the "normal winning symbol B8" is won just before the time-saving state ends and the electric device 701 is opened, and this opening continues until at least one lottery using reserved balls of the second special symbol is started, there is a possibility that a game ball will enter the distribution device 700 while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol will increase even after the time-saving state has ended. In other words, there is a risk that the possibility of winning a jackpot in one time-saving state will fluctuate significantly depending on the timing of the normal winning symbol and the type of normal winning symbol.

In contrast to this, in the ninth embodiment, the third switching mode is configured to be easily set around the end of the time-saving state (i.e., around 384 seconds after the end of the jackpot), so even if a normal pattern win occurs just before the end of the time-saving state and the opening period of the electric device 701 based on that win continues until at least one reserved ball of the second special pattern is consumed, it is possible to suppress an increase in reserved balls of the second special pattern after the end of the time-saving state. In other words, even if a normal pattern win occurs at the right time and a game ball can be inserted into the distribution device 700 at the right time, it is possible to configure it so that only the reserved balls of the first special pattern, which has a low expectation, can be increased. This makes it possible to equalize the expectation of a jackpot in the first time-saving state.

<Electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 216, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. Here, the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 200(a)) in that the contents of the time-saving granting table 202e have been changed. Also, the ninth embodiment differs in that the jackpot types defined in the first jackpot type selection table 202b are defined as jackpots A9 to F9 instead of the jackpots A8 to F8 in the eighth embodiment. Note that the jackpots A9 to F9 have exactly the same round numbers and associated random numbers (the range of the counter value of the first jackpot type counter C2) as the jackpots A8 to F8, respectively, and therefore detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted here.

With reference to FIG. 216, the time-saving granting table 202e in the ninth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 216 is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving granting table 202e in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 216, for the "jackpot A9" won in the normal state, the number of time-saving grants of the first special pattern (the value of the special 1 time-saving counter 203k1 for indicating the number of time-savings of the first special pattern) is "96 times", and the number of time-saving grants of the second special pattern (the value of the special 2 time-saving counter 203k2 for indicating the number of time-savings of the second special pattern) is "4 times". In addition, the same number of time-saving grants is also associated with the "jackpot A9" won in the time-saving state. Therefore, when the "jackpot A9" is won, a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the game state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 216, for a "jackpot B9" won in the normal state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both associated with a time-saving number of "0 times," while for a "jackpot B9" won in the time-saving state, the first special symbol is associated with a time-saving number of "96 times," and the second special symbol is associated with a time-saving number of "4 times." For this reason, when a direct hit with the first special symbol occurs in the normal state and a "jackpot B9" is determined, a transition to the normal state is made, which is disadvantageous to the player, whereas when a direct hit with the first special symbol occurs in the time-saving state and a "jackpot B9" is determined, a transition to the time-saving state is made, which is advantageous to the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 216, for the "jackpot C9", regardless of whether the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state or the time-saving state, the number of times the first special symbol will grant the time-saving function is "96 times" and the number of times the second special symbol will grant the time-saving function is "4 times". Therefore, when a direct hit with the second special symbol occurs and the "jackpot C9" is determined, the game will transition to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, regardless of the game state.

As shown in FIG. 202(a), for the "jackpot D9" to "jackpot F9" that are won in the normal state, the number of times the first special symbol will have time-saving effects is set to "96 times" and the number of times the second special symbol will have time-saving effects is set to "4 times," while for the "jackpot D9" to "jackpot F9" that are won in the time-saving state, the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol will have time-saving effects is set to "0 times." For this reason, when the second special symbol is drawn in the time-saving state and a small jackpot is won, if a V prize is generated and a V prize is won, an unfavorable normal state is always set, whereas when the second special symbol is drawn in the normal state and a small jackpot is won, a V prize is generated and a V prize is won, and a favorable time-saving state is always set. Therefore, during the time-saving state, the player can continuously hit the ball to the right to prevent the lottery for the second special symbol from being executed, while accumulating the reserved balls for the second special symbol up to the upper limit, and then execute the lottery based on the reserved balls for the second special symbol after the time-saving state ends, thereby achieving an innovative gameplay that gives the player an advantage. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 217, a method of transitioning between each state in the ninth embodiment will be described. Here, in the ninth embodiment, three modes (normal mode, chance mode A, and chance mode B) are provided, as in the eighth embodiment. First, referring to the upper part of FIG. 217, a method of transitioning from the normal mode (normal game state in which there are no reserved balls of the second special pattern) to other states (modes) will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 217, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal mode to other modes only when the first special pattern is selected as a jackpot (direct hit). More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 217, when the first special pattern is selected as a jackpot and the jackpot A9 is selected with a 50% probability, the mode after the jackpot is set to the advantageous chance mode A (time-saving game state). On the other hand, when the first special pattern is selected as a jackpot and the jackpot B9 is selected with a 50% probability, the mode after the jackpot is set to the disadvantageous normal mode (looping the normal mode). Therefore, in normal mode, players can play in the hope of winning the "jackpot A9" in the lottery for the first special symbol.

Next, referring to the central portion of FIG. 217, a method of transitioning from Chance Mode A (time-saving game state) to another state (mode) will be described. As shown in the central portion of FIG. 217, there is a possibility of transitioning from Chance Mode A to another mode when a jackpot is won, as well as when the time-saving number of times has elapsed. More specifically, if a small jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol in Chance Mode A and a V win occurs as a result of a V prize, the game will transition to the disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot ends. Also, if there is a reserved ball with the second special symbol when the time-saving number of times has elapsed in Chance Mode A (after the transition to the time-saving game state, 96 drawings of the first special symbol have been completed, or 4 drawings of the second special symbol have been completed), the game will transition to Chance Mode B.

On the other hand, as shown in the center of FIG. 203, when a direct hit occurs in chance mode A, regardless of the type of jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is always set to chance mode A, which is advantageous to the player (looping chance mode A). As a result, in chance mode A, there is no possibility of winning a small hit (i.e., a V hit occurs), and by executing a lottery for the first special symbol, which has the possibility of winning a direct hit, it is possible to realize a gameplay that makes the player expect a direct hit to occur. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay that makes the player want to preferentially execute the lottery for the first special symbol, which has a low probability of winning a jackpot, over the lottery for the second special symbol, which has a high probability of winning a jackpot, and therefore it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to the lower part of FIG. 217, a method of transitioning from chance mode B (normal game state in which reserved balls of the second special pattern exist) to another mode will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 217, the mode transitions from chance mode B to another state (mode) when a jackpot is won, and also when all reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217, when a direct hit occurs and the jackpot type of the direct hit is "jackpot A9" determined at a 50% rate of direct hits of the first special pattern, and when it is "jackpot C9" determined at a 100% rate of direct hits of the second special pattern, the mode transitions to chance mode A, which is advantageous to the player, after the jackpot ends. In addition, when a small win is won in the lottery for the second special pattern and a V win is won, the mode transitions to chance mode A, which is advantageous to the player, after the jackpot ends.

On the other hand, if the player wins the "jackpot B8" which is determined with a 50% probability when the first special symbol hits the ball, and there are no reserved balls for the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot, the state (mode) after the jackpot ends is set to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. Also, if all reserved balls for the second special symbol are consumed (all the lottery results for the second special symbol after the transition to chance mode B are misses), the game will transition to the normal mode. On the other hand, if there are no reserved balls for the second special symbol at the end of "jackpot B8" or "jackpot C8" (one or more), the state (mode) after the jackpot ends will be chance mode B again. For this reason, in chance mode B, the player can play in the hope of winning a small prize in the lottery for the second special symbol (i.e., winning a V prize) rather than a direct prize. Therefore, until Chance Mode A ends, the player continues to hit the right button to pass the time-saving number of times for the first special symbol so that the drawing of the second special symbol is not performed, and after the transition to Chance Mode B, the player can hope for a small win in the drawing of the second special symbol, which realizes a unique and innovative gameplay and further increases the player's interest in the game.

<Regarding control process of main control device in ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in this ninth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Fig. 218 and Fig. 219. First, the start-up process 9 in this ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 218. This start-up process 9 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (see Fig. 50) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process executed to perform initial settings of the pachinko machine 10 when the power is turned on, similar to the start-up process (see Fig. 50) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In the start-up process 9 (see FIG. 218) in this ninth embodiment, the same processes as those in S1401 to S1417 in the start-up process (see FIG. 50) in the first embodiment are executed in steps S1401 to S1417. In the start-up process 9 (see FIG. 218) in this ninth embodiment, when the process in S1417 is completed, the start of the switching pattern (see FIG. 215) of the switching valve 702 is set (S1421), and the process proceeds to S1410.

Next, referring to FIG. 219, the details of the jackpot control process 9 (S1521) in this ninth embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 9 (S1521) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52, S1504) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and, like the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), is a process for making various settings during the execution of a jackpot game.

In the jackpot control process 9 (S1521) in this ninth embodiment, the processes S1601 to S1612 and S1615 to S1618 are the same as the processes S1601 to S1612 and S1615 to S1618 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52, S1504) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In addition, in the jackpot control process 9 (S1521) in this ninth embodiment, when the process of S1617 ends, the start of the switching pattern of the switching valve 702 (see FIG. 215) is set (S1623), and the process proceeds to S1618.

By executing these startup process 9 (see FIG. 218) and jackpot control process 9 (see FIG. 219), the switching pattern of the switching valve 702 can be initialized when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized and when the jackpot ends, so that in the time-saving state, the opportunity for the reserved balls of the second special pattern to increase can be limited to the period from 180 seconds to 360 seconds after the jackpot ends. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the distribution device 700 immediately after the time-saving state ends, the right second ball entrance 64b can be prevented from being opened (a normal pattern hit starts just before the time-saving state ends, and the game ball that entered the distribution device 700 is guided to the second operating port 707 after the lottery based on the reserved balls of the second special pattern starts immediately after the time-saving state ends), so that the number of lotteries for the second special pattern in the normal state after the time-saving state ends can be fixed to a maximum of four times. Therefore, the probability of winning in the time-saving state 1 can be made uniform.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment is configured so that in the time-saving state advantageous to the player, both the lottery conditions for the first special symbol (start winning) and the lottery conditions for the second special symbol (start winning) can be satisfied, and the lottery for the second special symbol is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol (effectively, the possibility of winning a jackpot is higher). In addition, when the lottery for the second special symbol is a hit in the time-saving state, the possibility of transitioning to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player is high (if a direct hit occurs, the time-saving state is transitioned to, but if a V hit occurs based on a small hit, which has a high probability, the state is transitioned to the normal state), whereas when the lottery for the second special symbol is a hit in the normal state, the possibility of transitioning to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is high. That is, after the transition to the time-saving state, until the specific condition is established (the time-saving state ends), the player is more likely to benefit from a jackpot based on the drawing of the first special symbol than from a jackpot based on the drawing of the second special symbol, while after the specific condition is established (after the time-saving state ends), the player is more likely to benefit from a jackpot based on the drawing of the second special symbol than from a jackpot based on the drawing of the first special symbol. By configuring in this way, a novel gameplay in which the type of special symbol that the player wants to draw can be different before and after the specific condition is established can be realized, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. That is, until the specific condition is met, a game method can be executed in which the lottery for the first special symbol is executed without interruption while the reserved balls for the second special symbol increase (i.e., a game method in which the player continues to shoot to the right continuously), and after the specific condition is met, a game method can be executed in which the lottery based on the reserved balls for the second special symbol is more likely to be executed (i.e., a game method in which the player stops firing until the reserved balls for the second special symbol run out). This makes it possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment is configured to limit the period during which the number of reserved balls with the second special symbol may increase in the time-saving state to a specific period (from 180 seconds to 360 seconds after the end of the jackpot). In other words, it is possible to create a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the right second ball entrance 64b before and after the end of the time-saving state, regardless of whether or not a hit with a normal symbol occurs. By configuring it in this way, the number of times the second special symbol is drawn in the normal state after the time-saving state ends can be fixed to a maximum of four times. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in the time-saving state 1 can be made uniform.

In the ninth embodiment, the game is configured so that it is more advantageous to win a V jackpot in the normal state than to win a V jackpot during the time-saving state, by drawing a lottery for the first special symbol during the time-saving count, and then using up the reserved balls for the second special symbol in the normal state after the time-saving count has elapsed, but this is not limited to the above. Conversely, the game may be configured so that it is more advantageous to win a V jackpot during the time-saving count, and to win a small jackpot with the reserved balls for the second special symbol after the time-saving state ends, and then win a V jackpot. By configuring it in this way, if a lottery for the second special symbol is drawn during the time-saving count, the player can be encouraged to try to win a V jackpot, improving the freedom of play.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is switched in a fixed switching pattern when the jackpot ends, and the period during which reserved balls of the second special pattern can be stored is limited to 180 seconds to 360 seconds after the jackpot ends, but this is not limited to the above. The period during which reserved balls of the second special pattern can be stored may be set arbitrarily. In addition, the switching pattern of the switching valve 702 does not need to be fixed, and for example, a different switching pattern may be set depending on the type of jackpot. In other words, a time-saving jackpot in which a switching pattern that makes it possible to store reserved balls of the second special pattern during the time-saving state and a time-saving jackpot in which a switching pattern that makes it impossible (difficult) to store reserved balls of the second special pattern may be set.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is configured to switch in a fixed switching pattern when the big win ends, but this is not limited to this. For example, the control of the eighth embodiment described above may be adopted. That is, a control may be adopted in which a switching operation is performed in a fixed switching pattern when the start of a normal symbol win is triggered, and the opening pattern of the electric role device 701 is made different depending on the type of normal symbol win. Conversely, the switching control of the switching valve 702 in the ninth embodiment may be adopted in the eighth embodiment described above.

In the ninth embodiment, the end of the jackpot is triggered by a fixed switching pattern, and the switching valve 702 is likely to be set to the first switching state before and after the time-saving period ends, so that the game ball that entered the distribution device 700 immediately after the time-saving period ends enters the second operating port 707, the right second ball entrance port 64b is opened, and the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is prevented from increasing after the transition to the normal state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the final display time of the time-saving state may be set to a period (e.g., 5 seconds) longer than the winning period (2.5 seconds) of the normal pattern that is set when a normal pattern is hit during the time-saving state, and the time-saving state may be ended at the end of the variable time (the final display time of the time-saving state is controlled so that the time-saving state has already ended). By configuring it in this way, even if a winning regular pattern starts immediately before the final display, the winning regular pattern can be ended during the final display period, so that it is possible to reliably prevent game balls from entering the right second ball entrance 64b after one or more lotteries for the second special pattern have started in the normal state (i.e., after the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern has decreased).

In the ninth embodiment, the switching mode (first to third switching modes) is changed according to the elapsed time after the end of the jackpot (and after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10), but this is not limited to this. For example, the switching mode may be changed according to the number of time-saving times. More specifically, for example, the first switching mode (a switching mode in which it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 64b) may be set while the number of time-saving times is 80 or more, the second switching mode (a switching mode in which it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 64b) may be set when the number of time-saving times is less than 80 and within the range of 20 or more, and when the number of time-saving times is less than 20, the third switching mode (a switching mode in which it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 64b) may be set. By configuring it in this way, even if only short variable times (for example, 3 seconds) are selected during the time-saving state and the time-saving state ends in about 300 seconds, it is possible to more reliably prevent game balls from entering the right second ball entrance 64b immediately after the time-saving state ends and when one or more reserved balls of the second special pattern have been consumed.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is configured to perform a switching operation in a predetermined specific switching pattern (see FIG. 215) that is started when the jackpot ends (and the pachinko machine 10 is initialized), but this is not limited to the above. For example, the switching operation of a specific switching pattern may be started when the jackpot starts. By configuring in this way, the timing at which the second switching mode is set can be varied depending on the time required for the jackpot game, so that it is possible to generate an event in which the second switching mode is set in a relatively short time after the jackpot ends, or the second switching mode continues even just before the time-saving state ends. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the player can be changed depending on the progress of the game during the jackpot, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is configured to switch in a predetermined specific switching pattern (see FIG. 215) that is started by the end of the jackpot (and the initialization of the pachinko machine 10) regardless of the type of jackpot, but this is not limited to this. For example, the switching pattern set after the end of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of jackpot. More specifically, for example, when a direct hit is won, the state of the switching valve 702 may be switched in the switching pattern shown in FIG. 215, while when a V hit is won, a switching pattern (second switching pattern) in which the switching valve 702 is not set to the second switching state (or the period in which it is set is short) may be set. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage when a direct hit is won during the time-saving state can be increased, so that the player can play with a stronger expectation of winning a direct hit. Also, for example, when a direct hit of the first special symbol is won, the switching valve 702 may be configured to switch in the switching pattern shown in FIG. 215, while when a direct hit or V hit of the second special symbol is won, the second switching pattern may be set.

Tenth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 220 to 248. The pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment described above is configured to provide two types of game states, a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player and a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, and further, is configured to greatly vary the degree of advantage of the normal state depending on the presence or absence of reserved balls of the second special pattern.

In contrast, in the tenth embodiment, in addition to the normal state that is disadvantageous to the player and the time-saving state that is relatively advantageous to the player, a potential state that is disadvantageous to the player and a probability state that is most advantageous to the player are provided as game states. That is, in addition to the normal state and the time-saving state, a potential state in which the probability of winning is higher than in the normal state, but the electric role 64ra is less likely to be opened and the lottery for the special symbol is less likely to be executed, and a favorable probability state in which the probability of winning is high and the electric role 64ra is more likely to be opened are provided. Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, instead of a configuration in which a high probability state (potential state or probability state) of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set at a high rate (90%) when a jackpot is won, a configuration is provided in which an upper limit (for example, 11 times) is set for the number of consecutive times of the high probability state of the special symbol. This makes it difficult to predict the game state after the end of the jackpot, thereby achieving deep gameplay.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the normal pattern is in the time-saving state and the right hit is performed, both the selection conditions for the first special pattern and the selection conditions for the second special pattern are configured to be satisfied, and the display of the first special pattern based on the selection of the first special pattern and the display of the second special pattern based on the selection of the second special pattern are configured to be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous change method is adopted). As a result, even if the display of one special pattern is being executed, the display of the other special pattern can be executed without waiting for the end of the display of the other special pattern, so that the selection of the special pattern can be executed more efficiently. In addition, when the first special pattern and the second special pattern are simultaneously changing, if one of them stops changing with a stop pattern of a big win, the display of the other is stopped with a stop pattern of a loss regardless of the remaining change time or the result of the lottery. This prevents a problem where the other variable display shows a confirmed jackpot while a jackpot game is in progress, causing two jackpots to start at the same time.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, even if a jackpot is won in the normal state in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, and in the potential state, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability state or a time-saving state, these advantageous states are configured to end when a certain number of times (e.g., 8 times) of special symbol lotteries are executed after the jackpot is ended, while if a jackpot is won in the probability state or time-saving state in which a time-saving state of normal symbols is set, a probability state that continues until the next jackpot is ended, or a time-saving state that continues until 100 special symbol lotteries are ended after the jackpot is ended is set. That is, in the normal state and potential state, first, a jackpot is won in which a time-saving state of normal symbols is given a certain number of times (8 times), and then, by winning a jackpot in a lottery within the 8 times, it is possible to transition to a probability state that continues until the next jackpot is ended, or a time-saving state that continues until 100 special symbol lotteries are ended after the jackpot is ended. If the player moves to a high probability state that continues until the next jackpot, the next jackpot can be won without fail with the time-saving state of normal symbols set, so even after the next jackpot ends, the high probability state continues until the next jackpot, or the time-saving state continues until 100 special symbol drawings are completed after the jackpot. This creates the most advantageous state for the player. Also, even in a time-saving state that continues until 100 special symbol drawings are completed, if the player can win a jackpot within 100 drawings, the high probability state continues until the next jackpot, or the time-saving state continues until 100 special symbol drawings are completed after the jackpot, creating a state with a relatively high probability of becoming an advantageous state.

In the tenth embodiment, the game transitions to a probability variable state that continues until the next jackpot, and the probability variable state and jackpots are repeated by winning the probability variable jackpot, which has a 90% probability of being won, and when the upper limit number of times (probability variable limit number of times) of the probability variable state of the special symbol is reached, regardless of whether the probability variable jackpot is won or the normal jackpot is won, a time-saving state with 100 times of time-saving (i.e., a state relatively less favorable than the probability variable state) is set, but when a jackpot is won within the time-saving number of times (so-called pullback occurs), the rate of favorable jackpot types (jackpots with many rounds) is likely to be higher than when a jackpot is won during the probability variable state. More specifically, the game is configured so that the rate of jackpot types with a lower degree of advantage (selection rate of a small number of rounds) is higher for jackpots with the second special symbol than for jackpots with the first special symbol, and the frequency of selection of the second special symbol is significantly lower in the time-saving state set by reaching the probability variable limit number of times. That is, the time for the variable display based on the drawing of the second special symbol is configured to be significantly longer than the time for the variable display based on the drawing of the first special symbol (for example, it is set to a uniform time of 600 seconds regardless of the drawing result), and it is possible to draw the first special symbol multiple times while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed once. In other words, it is configured to increase the rate of winning the jackpot in the drawing of the first special symbol. This allows the player to play with a stronger expectation of winning the jackpot when the probability limit number of times is reached, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment in that the game board 13 has a partially changed board configuration, the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 have a partially changed configuration, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration. The other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the seventh embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 220, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 220, the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment differs from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 178) in that the V winning device 6500 has been removed, the right first ball entry port 64r has been provided as the starting winning port that triggers the drawing of the first special pattern at the position where the second ball entry port 6400 was provided, and the second ball entry port 6450 has been provided on the right side of the board as the starting winning port that triggers the drawing of the second special pattern. The reason why the V winning device 6500 has been removed is because the tenth embodiment adopts a specification in which only one of the misses or the big win is won in the drawing of the special pattern, and there is no small win.

Next, referring to FIG. 221, a characteristic presentation executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, if a jackpot is won while the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is always given after the jackpot ends. In other words, basically, when a high probability jackpot is won, a high probability state that continues until the next jackpot is set, and when a normal jackpot is won or the high probability limit number of times is reached, a time-saving state that continues until 100 special symbol lotteries are performed is set. In the tenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won while the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, the game state set after the jackpot ends is not clearly notified as to whether it is a time-saving state or a high probability state, but is suggested by the presentation mode. An example of this suggestion by the presentation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 221(a) and (b).

Figure 221 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating that the probability of a special state being set is relatively high. As shown in Figure 221 (a), when a display mode indicating that the probability of a special state being set is high is set, an effect is displayed in the main display area Dm in which a character 801 searches for a treasure chest 802 in a forest with many trees. In addition, the words "Forest Area" are displayed in the second display area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds. The display mode corresponding to this forest area is configured to be selected more frequently when the special state is set than when the time-saving state is set.

In contrast, FIG. 221(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating that the probability of a special state is relatively low (high probability of a time-saving state). As shown in FIG. 221(b), when a display mode indicating a low probability of a special state is set, an effect is displayed in the main display area Dm in which a character 801 searches for a treasure chest 802 in a desolate wilderness. In addition, the words "Wilderness Area" are displayed in the second display area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds. The display mode corresponding to this wilderness area is configured to be selected more frequently when the time-saving state is set than when the special state is set.

In addition to the presentation modes of the forest area and wilderness area described above, the tenth embodiment also provides a presentation mode of the sky area (a presentation in which the character 801 searches for a treasure chest 802 in a sea of clouds) that is confirmed to be in a special state when executed. Furthermore, the tenth embodiment is configured to execute a lottery to determine whether or not the display mode can be changed each time a new variable pattern presentation (variable display) is started. This allows the player to play in the hope that even if a wilderness area presentation mode with low expectations is set, each time the variable display is executed, the presentation mode will be changed to one with higher expectations for the special state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 222(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 222(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222(a), the ROM 202 in the tenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 183(a)) in that a fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga is added. In addition, it is also different in that the configurations of the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, and the time-saving grant table 202e are partially changed.

First, referring to FIG. 223(a), the details of the first winning random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 223(a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 223(a), the first winning random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment prescribes a random number value (counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a jackpot in a high probability state (high probability state) of the special pattern, and a random number value (counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a jackpot in a low probability state of the special pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223(a), 25 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 24" are stipulated as the random numbers (counter values) that are judged as a jackpot in a high probability state of a special symbol (latent state, high probability state). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first jackpot random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are judged as a jackpot in a high probability state of a special symbol is 25 from "0 to 24", so the probability of being judged as a jackpot when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a high probability state or latent state is 1/40 (25/1000).

As shown in FIG. 223(a), seven random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 6" are stipulated as random numbers (counter values) that are judged as a jackpot in a low probability state of a special symbol (normal state, time-saving state). Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are judged as a jackpot in a low probability state of a special symbol is seven, from "0 to 6". Therefore, the probability of a jackpot being judged when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the normal state or time-saving state is approximately 1/143 (7/1000).

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is greatly different between the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the special symbol. This can add variety to the game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 223(b), the details of the first winning type selection table 202b in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 223(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first winning type selection table 202b in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 223(b), the first winning random number table 202b in the tenth embodiment at least specifies a special 1 winning table 202bf1 for determining (selecting) the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and a special 2 winning table 202bf2 for determining (selecting) the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. First, referring to FIG. 224(a), the details of the special 1 winning table 202bg1 will be described.

Figure 224 (a) is a diagram showing the contents of the special 1 winning table 202bg1 in this tenth embodiment. As shown in Figure 224 (a), the special 1 winning table 202bg1 in this tenth embodiment has eight types of jackpot types, "jackpot A10" to "jackpot H10", stipulated as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. "jackpot A10" to "jackpot C10" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is nine and the state of the special symbol after the jackpot is set to a high probability state of the special symbol. "jackpot D10" to "jackpot F10" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special symbol after the jackpot is set to a high probability state of the special symbol. "jackpot G10" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is nine and the state of the special symbol after the jackpot is set to a low probability state of the special symbol. Furthermore, "jackpot H10" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 3 and the state of the special pattern after the jackpot is ended is set to a low probability state of the special pattern. In addition, whether or not the time-saving state of the normal pattern is granted is configured to differ depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 224(a), when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 5", "jackpot A10" (9-round guaranteed jackpot) is associated with the jackpot type. Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0 to 99" for the first winning type counter C2, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot A10" is 6, which is "0 to 5". Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot A10" will be determined (selected) is 6% (6/100).

As shown in FIG. 224(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "6 to 46" and is associated with "jackpot B10" (9-round guaranteed jackpot). Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot B10" is 41 (6 to 46), so the probability that "jackpot B10" will be determined (selected) when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol is 41% (41/100).

As shown in FIG. 224(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "47 to 66" and is associated with "jackpot C10" (9-round guaranteed jackpot). Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot C10" is 20 (47 to 66), so the probability that "jackpot C10" will be determined (selected) when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol is 20% (20/100).

As shown in FIG. 224(a), the value "67" of the first winning type counter C2 is associated with a "jackpot D10" (three-round guaranteed jackpot) as the jackpot type. Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, there is only one random number value (counter value) associated with the "jackpot D10", so the probability that the "jackpot D10" will be determined (selected) when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol is 1% (1/100).

As shown in FIG. 224(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "68, 69" and is associated with "jackpot E10" (three-round guaranteed jackpot). Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, two random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot E10", so the probability that "jackpot E10" will be determined (selected) when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol is 2% (2/100).

As shown in FIG. 224(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "70 to 89" and is associated with "jackpot F10" (three-round guaranteed jackpot). Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot F10" is 20 (70 to 89), so the probability that "jackpot F10" will be determined (selected) when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol is 20% (20/100).

As shown in FIG. 224(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 92" is associated with a "jackpot G10" (9-round normal jackpot) as the jackpot type. Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, there are three random number values (counter values) associated with the "jackpot G10", so the probability that the "jackpot G10" will be determined (selected) when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol is 3% (3/100).

As shown in FIG. 224(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "93 to 99" is associated with the jackpot type "jackpot H10" (3-round normal jackpot). Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot H10" is 7, so the probability that "jackpot H10" will be determined (selected) when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol is 7% (7/100).

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, there is a 90% chance of winning a special jackpot (if it is any of "jackpot A10" through "jackpot F10"), and a 10% chance of winning a regular jackpot (if it is any of "jackpot G10" and "jackpot H10"). In addition, there is a 70% chance of a 9-round jackpot, and a 30% chance of a 3-round jackpot.

Next, the details of the special 2 winning table 202g2 will be described with reference to FIG. 224(b). As described above, the special 2 winning table 202g2 is a data table for determining the winning type when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 224(b), in this tenth embodiment, four jackpot types, "jackpot I10" to "jackpot L10", are provided as the winning types of the second special symbol. "jackpot A10" to "jackpot C10" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is nine rounds and the state of the special symbol after the jackpot is set to a high probability state of the special symbol. "jackpot D10" to "jackpot F10" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is three rounds and the state of the special symbol after the jackpot is set to a high probability state of the special symbol. "jackpot I10" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is nine rounds and the state of the special symbol after the jackpot is set to a high probability state of the special symbol. Furthermore, "jackpot J10" is a jackpot type with three rounds, where the state of the special pattern after the jackpot ends is set to a high probability state of the special pattern. Furthermore, "jackpot K10" is a jackpot type with nine rounds, where the state of the special pattern after the jackpot ends is set to a low probability state of the special pattern. Furthermore, "jackpot L10" is a jackpot type with three rounds, where the state of the special pattern after the jackpot ends is set to a low probability state of the special pattern.

As shown in FIG. 224(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 26", and the jackpot type is set to "jackpot I10" (9-round guaranteed jackpot). Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot I10" is 27, which is "0 to 26". Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot I10" will be determined (selected) is 27% (27/100).

As shown in FIG. 224(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to correspond to the range of "27-89" as the jackpot type "jackpot J10" (three-round guaranteed jackpot). Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0-99" for the first winning type counter C2, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot J10" is 53, which is "27-89." Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot J10" will be determined (selected) is 53% (53/100).

As shown in FIG. 224(a), when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "90-92", "jackpot K10" (9-round normal jackpot) is associated with the jackpot type. Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0-99" for the first winning type counter C2, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot K10" is three, from "90-92". Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot K10" will be determined (selected) is 3% (3/100).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 224(a), when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "93 to 99", "jackpot L10" (3-round normal jackpot) is associated with the jackpot type. Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot L10" is 7, which is "93 to 99". Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot L10" will be determined (selected) is 7% (7/100).

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol, there is a 90% chance (if either "jackpot I10" or "jackpot J10" is obtained) of winning a special jackpot, and a 10% chance (if either "jackpot K10" or "jackpot L10" is obtained) of winning a regular jackpot, just like when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol. Also, there is a 30% chance of a jackpot with nine rounds, and a 70% chance of a jackpot with three rounds. In other words, in terms of the number of rounds, winning a jackpot in the drawing of the first special symbol is more advantageous than winning a jackpot in the drawing of the second special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 225(a), the details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d in the tenth embodiment will be described. This fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table in which data for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol is specified according to the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, similar to the fluctuation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 225(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern table 202d in the tenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 225(a), the fluctuation pattern table 202d in the tenth embodiment is composed of at least a normal table 202dg1 for determining (selecting) a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in a game state (normal state, potential state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, a time-saving table 202dg2 for determining (selecting) a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in a game state (time-saving state, probability state) in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, and a limit-reaching table 202dg3 for determining (selecting) a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in a state in which the probability limit number of times has been reached. First, the details of the normal table 202dg1 will be described with reference to FIG. 225(b).

Figure 225 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal table 202dg1. As shown in Figure 225 (b), the normal table 202dg1 in this tenth embodiment specifies the pattern type, the lottery result, and the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 225(b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is a "miss," a "short miss" with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 139," a "long miss" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "140 to 149," a "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "150 to 179," and a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "180 to 198."

Also, as shown in FIG. 225(b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is a "jackpot," a "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 29," a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "30 to 189," and a "special reach" with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is defined in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "190 to 198."

In contrast, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., the entire range is associated with an ultra-long miss with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds, and when the lottery result is a "jackpot," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., the entire range is associated with an ultra-long win with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds. Therefore, even if a game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 6450 by hitting the right in the normal state or the potential state, the lottery for the special symbol can only be executed every 600 seconds, which can significantly worsen the game efficiency when an irregular game method of hitting the right in the game state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set is performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular game methods of hitting the right in the normal state or the potential state.

Next, referring to FIG. 226(a), the time-saving table 202dg2, which is one of the data tables that make up the fluctuation pattern table 202d, will be described in detail. As described above, this time-saving table 202dg2 is a data table that is referenced to determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a gaming state in which a time-saving state for normal symbols is set. FIG. 226(a) is a diagram showing the stipulations of this time-saving table 202dg2.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), the time-saving table 202dg2 specifies the result of the lottery for the special symbol and the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 in correspondence with each other. In other words, in the time-saving state or the probability variation state, the variation pattern is basically (except when the probability variation limit number is reached) determined according to the result of the lottery for the special symbol, regardless of the type of special symbol. This is because in the time-saving state of the normal symbol in the tenth embodiment, when the ball is hit from the right, the game ball frequently enters both the right first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 6450, so that the lottery for one special symbol is not executed biasedly.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a "miss", a "short miss" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is specified in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 149", a "long miss" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is specified in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "150 to 189", a "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "190 to 195", and a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is specified in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "196 to 198". In other words, it is configured so that a short fluctuation time is more easily determined than when a miss fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the normal table 202dg1 (see FIG. 225(b)). This allows for more efficient play in the special state and time-saving state, where the time-saving state for normal symbols is set.

Also, as shown in FIG. 226(a), when the lottery result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a "jackpot," a "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 49," a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 194," and a "special reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "195 to 198." In other words, even when the lottery result is a hit, a short fluctuation time is more likely to be determined compared to when the fluctuation pattern is determined using the normal table 202dg1 (see FIG. 225(b)).

Next, referring to FIG. 226(b), the details of the limit reaching table 202dg3, which is one of the data tables constituting the fluctuation pattern table 202d, will be described. As described above, this limit reaching table 202dg3 is a data table in which data is specified for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol during the time-saving state that is set after the number of times for the special bonus is reached. FIG. 226(b) is a diagram showing the contents specified in this time-saving table 202dg2.

As shown in FIG. 226(b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), each variation pattern is selected in the same manner as in the time-saving table 202dg2 (see FIG. 226(a)). On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is a "miss", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range is associated with an ultra-long miss with a variation time of 600 seconds, and when the lottery result is a "jackpot", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range is associated with an ultra-long win with a variation time of 600 seconds. Therefore, when a right hit is performed in the time-saving state after the probability limit number of times is reached, the lottery for the first special symbol can be intensively executed while the ultra-long variation of the second special symbol is being executed. As described above, the first special symbol jackpot is configured to be more likely to determine a more favorable jackpot type (a jackpot with a larger number of rounds) than the second special symbol jackpot, so there is a stronger expectation that the first special symbol will be drawn as a jackpot within the time-saving number of times.

Next, the time-saving granting table 202e in the tenth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 227. This time-saving granting table 202e is a data table that is referenced to set the number of time-saving times after the end of a jackpot according to the type of jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, just like the time-saving granting table 202e in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 227 shows the contents of the time-saving granting table 202e.

As shown in FIG. 227, for a jackpot A10 (9-round variable probability jackpot) or a jackpot D10 (3-round variable probability jackpot) won in a game state (normal state, potential state) in which the normal state of the normal pattern is set, if the variable probability jackpot is a hit before the variable probability limit is reached, a time-saving count that continues until the next jackpot is awarded, but if the variable probability limit count is reached by the jackpot, 8 time-saving counts are set. Therefore, if a jackpot A10 or a jackpot D10 is won before the variable probability limit count is reached, a variable probability state that continues until the next jackpot (the most advantageous game state) is set, but if the variable probability limit count is reached, only a low probability state of the special pattern and a time-saving state of 8 times are set, so the degree of advantage of the player varies greatly depending on whether the variable probability limit count has been reached or not. The number of time-saving periods that will continue until the next big win is set to a number that is sufficiently large relative to the probability of a big win (a number of time-saving periods that can be considered to guarantee a big win), such as 65,536 times.

As shown in FIG. 227, for the jackpot A10 (9-round special jackpot) and jackpot D10 (3-round special jackpot) won in the game state (time-saving state, special state) in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, if the special jackpot is a hit before the special limit is reached, the time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot is granted, while if the special jackpot reaches the special limit number of times, 100 time-saving times are set. Therefore, even if the special limit number of times has been reached, the lottery for the special pattern can be executed 100 times without reducing the number of balls held, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for winning the jackpot again. As mentioned above, in the tenth embodiment, the player is configured not to be clearly informed of whether the limit number of times has been reached (whether it is a special jackpot state or a time-saving state). Therefore, even if the special limit number of times has actually been reached and the time-saving state has been set, the player can be made to expect the special jackpot state, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 227, for jackpot B10 (9-round special jackpot), jackpot E10 (3-round special jackpot), and jackpot I10 (9-round special jackpot) won in a game state (normal state, potential state) in which the normal state of the normal symbols is set, 8 time-saving counts are awarded even if the win occurs before the special jackpot limit is reached or if the special jackpot limit count has been reached. In other words, if the limit is not reached, the special jackpot state will be in effect until the 8 special symbol draws are completed after the jackpot ends, and the potential state will be in effect from the 9th draw onwards. On the other hand, if the limit count has been reached, the time-saving state will be in effect until the 8 special symbol draws are completed after the jackpot ends, and the normal state will be in effect from the 9th draw onwards. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 227, the same number of time-saving times as the jackpot A10 and the jackpot D10 are associated with the jackpot B10 (9-round variable jackpot), the jackpot E10 (3-round variable jackpot), and the jackpot I10 (9-round variable jackpot) won in the game state (time-saving state, variable jackpot state) in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set. In other words, the number of time-saving times that will continue until the next jackpot is associated with the jackpot before the variable jackpot limit is reached, and the number of time-saving times of 100 is associated with the jackpot after the variable jackpot limit is reached. Therefore, if jackpots B10, E10, and I10 are won in the normal state or in the potential state before the limited number of chance hits has been reached, they will be at a disadvantage to jackpots A10 and D10 in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends, but if they are won in other circumstances (when they are won in the potential hit state, the time-saving state, or when the limited number of chance hits has been reached), the same game state as jackpots A10 and D10 will be set.

Also, as shown in FIG. 227, the number of time-saving times is set to 8 for the jackpot C10 (9-round special jackpot) and jackpot F10 (3-round special jackpot) won in the normal state. If a special jackpot is won in the normal state, the special jackpot limit number of times will always be reached, so the number of time-saving times when the special jackpot limit number is reached is not specified (there is no need to specify this because the special jackpot limit number cannot be reached). Also, for the jackpot C10 and F10 won in the potential state, the number of time-saving times is set to 0, even if the jackpot is won before the special jackpot limit is reached or the special jackpot limit number is reached. In other words, if the jackpot C10 and F10 are won in the potential state, the time-saving time of the normal pattern is not granted even once, which is extremely disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, the same number of time-saving times are assigned to the jackpots A10, B10, D10, E10, and I10 for the jackpot C10 (9-round special jackpot) and F10 (3-round special jackpot) won in a game state (time-saving state, special state) in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set. In other words, the number of time-saving times that will continue until the next jackpot is assigned to the jackpot before the special limit is reached, and 100 time-saving times are assigned to the jackpot after the special limit is reached.

Also, as shown in FIG. 227, the number of time-saving times is set to 8 for the jackpot G10 (9-round normal jackpot), jackpot H10 (3-round normal jackpot), jackpot K10 (9-round normal jackpot), and jackpot L10 (3-round normal jackpot) won in a game state (normal state, potential state) in which the normal state of the normal pattern is set. Note that, since the number of times for the special probability limit cannot be reached when a normal jackpot is won, the number of times for which the special probability limit is reached is not specified (it is not necessary to specify this). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, the number of times for which the special probability limit is reached is set to 100 for the jackpot G10, H10, K10, and L10 won in a game state (time-saving state, special probability state) in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set. In other words, if you win the jackpot G10, H10, K10, or L10, you are at a disadvantage compared to the jackpots A10 to F10 and H10 to J10 because you cannot set the number of times the time-saving bonus will continue until the next jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 227, for a jackpot J10 (3-round special jackpot) won in a game state (normal state, potential state) where the normal state of the normal pattern is set, 0 times is associated as the number of time-saving times, regardless of whether the special limit number of times has been reached. Therefore, since the jackpot J10 has a small number of rounds and does not grant a time-saving state, it is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player when it is won in a normal state or potential state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, for a jackpot J10 won in a game state (time-saving state, special state) where the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, if the special jackpot is a hit before the special limit is reached, a time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot is granted, but if the special jackpot reaches the special limit number of times due to the jackpot, 100 times of time-saving times are set.

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, the number of time-saving times granted after a jackpot is different depending on the type of jackpot, the game state at the time of the jackpot, and whether or not the special chance limit has been reached. This makes it possible to diversify the game state after a jackpot is ended, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 228, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ga will be described. This variation pattern scenario table 202ga is a data table that is referred to in order to select the correspondence (variation pattern scenario) between the number of times the special symbol is drawn after the end of the jackpot and the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to. As shown in FIG. 228, the variation pattern scenario table 202ga in this tenth embodiment is stipulated with a variation pattern scenario that is set after the end of the jackpot in association with the type of jackpot, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and whether or not the limit has been reached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 228, for the situation in which the jackpot type is jackpot A10, D10 and the number of times the probability limit has not been reached, a variation pattern scenario in which the time-saving table 202dg2 is referenced is stipulated in association with the situation. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot A10, D10, the time-saving table 202dg2 is referenced and the variation pattern (variation time) is determined each time a special symbol is drawn until the next jackpot occurs. This is because if you win either the A10 or D10 jackpot, a special state is set that will continue until the next jackpot occurs.

Also, as shown in FIG. 228, in the normal state or the potential state, if the jackpot B10, E10, or I10 is won before the probability limit is reached, the time-saving table 202dg2 is referenced until the 8th drawing is performed after the jackpot ends, and the normal table 202dg1 is referenced for the 9th drawing and after. This is because, in the state where the normal state of the normal pattern is set, if the jackpot B10, E10, or I10 is won within the probability limit, the probability state with the time-saving count of 8 is set. On the other hand, in the time-saving state or the probability state, if the jackpot B10, E10, or I10 is won before the probability limit is reached, the time-saving table 202gd2 is referenced and a variation pattern scenario is set in which the variation pattern is determined, regardless of the number of drawings after the jackpot ends. This is because if you hit the jackpot B10, E10, or I10 while the time-saving mode for normal symbols is set, a special state will be set that will continue until the next jackpot occurs.

Also, as shown in FIG. 228, in the normal state, if the player wins a jackpot C10, F10, or J10 before the probability limit number of times is reached, the time-saving table 202dg2 is referenced until the 8th drawing is performed after the jackpot ends, and the normal table 202dg1 is referenced for the 9th drawing and after. This is because, in the normal state, if the player wins a jackpot C10, F10, or J10 within the probability limit number of times, a probability state with 8 time-saving times is set. In the potential state, if the player wins a jackpot C10, F10, or J10 before the probability limit number of times is reached, a variation pattern scenario is set in which the normal table 202dg1 is referenced to determine the variation pattern, regardless of the number of drawings after the jackpot ends. This is because, in the potential state, if the player wins a jackpot C10, F10, or J10 within the probability limit number of times, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the potential state. On the other hand, in the time-saving state or the probability variable state, if the jackpot C10, F10, or J10 is won before the probability variable limit number is reached, regardless of the number of draws after the jackpot ends, a variation pattern scenario is set in which the variation pattern is determined by referring to the time-saving table 202gd2. This is because if the jackpot C10, F10, or J10 is won when the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, a probability variable state is set that continues until the next jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 228, when the jackpot G10, H10, K10, or L10 is won in the normal state or the potential state, the time-saving table 202dg2 is referenced until the 8th drawing is performed after the jackpot ends, and the normal table 202dg1 is referenced for the 9th drawing and after. This is because, when the jackpot G10, H10, K10, or L10 is won while the normal state of the normal pattern is set, the time-saving state with 8 time-savings is set. On the other hand, when the jackpot G10, H10, K10, or L10 is won before the probability limit number is reached in the time-saving state or the probability variable state, the time-saving table 202dg2 is referenced until the 100th drawing of the special pattern is performed after the jackpot ends, and the normal table 202dg1 is referenced for the 101st drawing and after. This is because if you win a jackpot of G10, H10, K10, or L10 while the time-saving mode for normal symbols is set, the time-saving mode will be set to 100 times.

On the other hand, if a player wins a jackpot C10, F10, or J10 in the potential state and reaches the probability limit number of times with that jackpot, a variation pattern scenario is set in which the normal table 202dg1 is referenced regardless of the number of draws after the jackpot ends. This is because if a player wins a jackpot C10, F10, or J10 while the potential state is set, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state. Also, if a player wins a jackpot C10, F10, or J10 in the probability state and reaches the probability limit number of times with that jackpot, a variation pattern scenario is set in which the limit reaching table 202dg3 is referenced until 100 draws are performed after the jackpot ends, and the normal table 202dg1 is referenced for the 101st and subsequent draws. This is because if a player wins a jackpot C10, F10, or J10 while the probability state is set, a time-saving state with 100 time-saving draws is set.

In contrast, if a player wins a special jackpot other than C10, F10, or J10 in the potential state and the special jackpot limit count is reached with the jackpot, the time-saving table 202dg2 is referenced until the 8th drawing is performed after the jackpot ends, and the normal table 202dg1 is referenced for the 9th drawing and onward, a variation pattern scenario is set in which the time-saving state is set to 8, if a player wins a special jackpot other than C10, F10, or J10 while the potential state is set. Also, if a player wins a special jackpot other than C10, F10, or J10 in the potential state and the special jackpot limit count is reached with the jackpot, the limit-reaching table 202dg3 is referenced until the 100th drawing is performed with the jackpot, and the normal table 202dg1 is referenced for the 101st drawing and onward, a variation pattern scenario is set in which the time-saving state is set to 8, if a player wins a special jackpot other than C10, F10, or J10 in the potential state and the special jackpot limit count is reached with the jackpot. This is because if you win a jackpot other than C10, F10, or J10 while the special jackpot state is set, the time-saving state will be set to 100 times.

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, when a special jackpot is won in a special jackpot state and the special jackpot limit number of times is reached in the special jackpot, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the table 202dg3 for when the limit is reached in the time-saving state that is set after the jackpot ends. That is, the table is configured to be referenced when a right hit is made, which tends to favor the selection of the first special symbol. In other words, when a jackpot is won within the time-saving number of times, the probability of winning a favorable jackpot type (a jackpot with a large number of rounds) is increased. By configuring in this way, even if the special jackpot limit number of times is reached and a special jackpot is won, a time-saving state that is disadvantageous (less advantageous) compared to the special jackpot state is set, the player is prevented from becoming disappointed, and can be strongly expected to win a jackpot within the time-saving number of times. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 229, the state transition method in the tenth embodiment will be described. Here, in the tenth embodiment, as described above, four game states are provided: a normal state and a potential state that are disadvantageous to the advantageous player, and a time-saving state and a probability state that are advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, two types of probability states are provided: a probability state in which the time-saving count is eight times, and a probability state that continues until the next big win is won. In addition, two types of time-saving states are provided: a time-saving state in which the time-saving count is eight times, and a time-saving state in which the time-saving count is 100 times. In the following explanation, for the sake of simplicity, the normal state and the potential state that are disadvantageous to the player will be referred to as normal mode A and normal mode B, respectively, the time-saving state with a small number of time-saving times (8 times) and the probability variable state will be referred to as chance mode A and chance mode B, respectively, the time-saving state with a large number of time-saving times (100 times) will be referred to as the pull-back mode, and the probability variable state that continues until the next jackpot (a state in which a jackpot is essentially guaranteed) will be referred to as the jackpot mode. First, the mode transition method in normal mode A will be explained with reference to the upper left side of FIG. 229.

As shown in the upper left of FIG. 229, in normal mode A, there is a possibility of transitioning to another mode only if a jackpot is won. That is, if either of jackpot A10 or D10, which is determined with a 7% probability when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to consecutive win mode, which is advantageous to the player. Also, if either of jackpot B10, C10, E10, or F10, which is determined with a 83% probability when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to chance mode B. Furthermore, if either of jackpot G10 or H10, which is determined with a 10% probability when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to chance mode A. In this way, if a jackpot is won in normal mode A, the time-saving state of the normal pattern is always given at least eight times, so it is expected that the player will be able to transition to consecutive win mode by winning a jackpot again within the time-saving number of times. Also, if you get a jackpot in normal mode A, you will mostly (83% of the time) get either jackpot B10, C10, E10, or F10, and move to chance mode B. In other words, you will almost always get 8 draws with a high probability of getting a special symbol, so you can have even more hope of moving on to consecutive wins mode.

Next, referring to the upper right side of FIG. 229, a method of mode transition in normal mode B will be described. As shown in the upper right side of FIG. 229, in normal mode, there is a possibility of transitioning to another mode only when a jackpot is won. Specifically, when either jackpot A10 or D10, which is determined at a rate of 7% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to consecutive mode, which is advantageous to the player. If the jackpot reaches the limited number of chance wins due to the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to chance mode A. If either jackpot B10 or E10, which is determined at a rate of 43% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to chance mode B. If the jackpot reaches the limited number of chance wins due to the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to chance mode A. Furthermore, if the player wins either the jackpot G10 or H10, which is determined at a rate of 10% when the first special symbol is selected, the mode after the jackpot is set to chance mode A. On the other hand, if the player wins either the jackpot C10 or F10, which is determined at a rate of 40% when the first special symbol is selected, the mode after the jackpot is set to normal mode B again. That is, an unfavorable state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is not granted is set. In addition, if the number of times of the probability change limit is reached by the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot is set to normal mode A. In other words, the time-saving state is not granted whether the number of times of the probability change limit is reached or not. In this way, if the player wins a jackpot in normal mode B, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is granted only at a rate of 60%, so that the normal mode B is more unfavorable than the normal mode A in terms of the game state after the jackpot is ended. However, in normal mode B, the probability of winning a jackpot is more than three times higher, so normal mode B has an advantage in terms of the probability of winning a jackpot.

Next, referring to the left center of FIG. 229, the mode transition method in Chance Mode A will be described. As shown in the left center of FIG. 229, in Chance Mode A, in addition to winning a jackpot, there is a possibility of transitioning to another state when the time-saving count has ended. Specifically, as shown in the left center of FIG. 229, when a player wins a guaranteed jackpot (jackpot A10-F10, I10, J10), which is determined with a 90% probability when a jackpot is won by drawing a special pattern, the mode after the jackpot is set to the consecutive win mode, which is the most advantageous mode for the player. On the other hand, when a player wins a normal jackpot (jackpot G10, H10, K10, L10), which is determined with a 10% probability when a jackpot is won by drawing a special pattern, the mode after the jackpot is set to the pull-back mode. In contrast, when the time-saving count has elapsed in Chance Mode A (when the special pattern is drawn 8 times in a row and the draw is a miss), the mode transitions to the normal mode A, which is disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, in Chance Mode A, players can play with high hopes of hitting the jackpot during the eight time-saving rounds.

Next, referring to the center right of FIG. 229, a mode transition method in Chance Mode B will be described. As shown in the center left of FIG. 229, in Chance Mode B, as in Chance Mode A, there is a possibility of transitioning to another state when a jackpot is won or when the time-saving count is over. Specifically, as shown in the center right of FIG. 229, when a special symbol lottery jackpot (jackpot A10-F10, I10, J10) that is determined with a 90% probability when a jackpot is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the consecutive win mode that is most advantageous to the player. Note that when the jackpot reaches the limit number of times of the special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, when a normal jackpot (jackpot G10, H10, K10, L10) that is determined with a 10% probability when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the pullback mode. In contrast, if the time-saving count elapses in Chance Mode B (the special symbol lottery results in eight consecutive misses), the game will transition to Normal Mode B, which is disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, in Chance Mode B, just like Chance Mode A, players can play with high hopes of hitting the jackpot during the eight time-saving counts.

Next, referring to the lower left of FIG. 229, a mode transition method in the pull-back mode will be described. As shown in the lower left of FIG. 229, in the pull-back mode, there is a possibility of transitioning to another state when a jackpot is won or when the time-saving count is over, as in the chance modes A and B. Specifically, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 229, when a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, and a guaranteed jackpot (jackpot A10-F10, I10, J10) is won, which is determined with a 90% probability, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the consecutive mode, which is the most advantageous mode for the player. On the other hand, when the time-saving count elapses in the pull-back mode (100 consecutive special symbol lottery misses), the mode transitions to the normal mode A, which is disadvantageous to the player. In contrast, when a normal jackpot (jackpot G10, H10, K10, L10) is won, which is determined with a 10% probability when a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the pull-back mode again (the pull-back mode loops).

Next, referring to the lower right side of FIG. 229, a mode transition method in consecutive win mode will be described. As shown in the lower right side of FIG. 229, in consecutive win mode, there is a possibility of transitioning to another state only when a jackpot is won. Specifically, as shown in the lower right side of FIG. 229, when a normal jackpot (jackpot G10, H10, K10, L10) that is determined with a 10% probability when a jackpot is won by a lottery of special symbols is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the pullback mode. In contrast, when a special jackpot (jackpot A10-F10, I10, J10) that is determined with a 90% probability when a jackpot is won by a lottery of special symbols is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set again to the consecutive win mode that is most advantageous to the player (looping the consecutive win mode). Note that when a special jackpot is won and the number of times of the special jackpot limit is reached, the pullback mode is set after the jackpot ends.

Thus, in this tenth embodiment, in order to transition to the consecutive win mode which is advantageous for the player, it is basically necessary to transition to chance mode A or B, which has a time-saving count of eight times, and then win a jackpot within the relatively small number of time-saving counts of eight times. However, once transition to consecutive win mode is made, an extremely advantageous state is created in which consecutive win mode and a jackpot are repeated with a high probability of 90%, so that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction when transitioning to consecutive win mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 222(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 222(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222(b), the RAM 222 in the tenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 183(b)) in that a probability variable flag 203ga, a limit counter 203gb, a fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203gc, a special chart 1 big win flag 203gd, a special chart 2 big win flag 203ge, a special chart 1 fluctuation time counter 203gf, a special chart 2 fluctuation time counter 203gg, a special chart 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh, and a limit arrival flag 203gi are added. Also, in the tenth embodiment, since there is no small win, the small win type storage area 203e, the small win start flag 203f, the small win mid-flag 203g, the V-pass big win type storage area 203h, the V flag 203i, and the V-pass flag 203j have been deleted.

The probability change flag 203ga is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state of the special pattern is set. If the probability change flag 203ga is on, it indicates that the special pattern is set to a high probability state, and if it is off, it indicates that the special pattern is set to a low probability state. In other words, if the probability change flag 203ga is set on, either the probability change state (special pattern: high probability state, normal pattern: high probability state) or the potential probability state (special pattern: high probability state, normal pattern: low probability state) is set as the game state. The probability change flag 203ga is initially set to off, and is set to off when the special pattern indicating a jackpot stops (see S1877 in FIG. 239 and S1977 in FIG. 244). On the other hand, if a probability change jackpot is won and the probability change limit number has not been reached, the probability change flag 203ga is set to on at the end of the probability change jackpot (see S1676 in FIG. 246). Then, when the symbol indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, it is set to OFF (see S806 in FIG. 38). In other words, in this tenth embodiment, once the probability variable flag 203ga is set to ON, the probability variable flag 203ga will not be set to OFF until the next jackpot is won, so that when a probability variable jackpot is won, the high probability state of the special symbol that is set after the jackpot ends is always configured to continue until the next jackpot is won unless the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are initialized (unless the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on).

In this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won, but this is not limited to this. For example, as a special symbol high probability ending condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol may be configured to end when the number of times the special symbol changes (number of special symbol changes) since the high probability state of the special symbol (special symbol high probability state) is set reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). In this case, instead of the high probability flag 203ga, a high probability counter may be provided to count the number of remaining lottery draws until the special symbol high probability state is transitioned to the special symbol low probability state.

Furthermore, it is possible to provide multiple special pattern high probability end conditions, for example, a special pattern 1 high probability end condition that can be established based only on the number of times the first special pattern changes in the special pattern high probability state, a special pattern 2 high probability end condition that can be established based only on the number of times the second special pattern changes, and a lottery end condition that can be established when the lottery result for the special pattern is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result that wins a small prize), and to configure the high probability state of the special pattern to end when any of the special pattern high probability end conditions is established.

The limit counter 203gb is a counter for counting the number of times the special bonus has been activated. If the value of the limit counter 203gb is less than 11 at the end of the special bonus jackpot, the state after the jackpot is set to a high probability state of special symbols, indicating that the special bonus limit has not been reached. On the other hand, if the value of the limit counter 203gb is 11 at the end of the special bonus jackpot, the state after the jackpot is set to a low probability state of special symbols, indicating that the special bonus limit has been reached. The initial value of the limit counter 203gb is set to 0, and each time a special bonus jackpot is won, the value is updated by adding 1 at the end of the special bonus jackpot (see S1674 in FIG. 246). In addition, the limit counter 203gb is reset to 0 when it is determined that the special bonus limit has been reached (the counter value has been updated to 11) at the end of the special bonus jackpot, and when a normal jackpot ends (see S1672 in FIG. 246).

The variation pattern scenario storage area 203gc is a memory area for storing data indicating a variation pattern scenario. When the special symbol starts to vary, a variation pattern table is read out to determine the variation pattern (variation time) according to the variation pattern scenario indicated by the data stored in this variation pattern scenario storage area 203gc and the number of variations after the end of the jackpot. This variation pattern scenario storage area 203gc stores data corresponding to the variation pattern scenario determined by referring to the variation pattern scenario table 202ga at the end of the jackpot (see S1683 in FIG. 246).

The special chart 1 big win flag 203gd is a flag that is set to ON when a big win occurs in the drawing of the first special pattern (a drawing based on the start winning into the first ball entrance 64 or the right first ball entrance 64r) (see S1816 in FIG. 235). This special chart 1 big win flag 203gd is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the big win (S1877 in FIG. 239). When this special chart 1 big win flag 203h is ON and the variable display of the second special pattern is being executed, if the variable display time of the first special pattern ends, a process is executed to forcibly stop the second special pattern with a missing pattern (see S1875 in FIG. 239). This prevents a malfunction in which a big win is started twice when a big win is won in both the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern.

The special 2 jackpot flag 203ge is a flag indicating that the second special symbol is in the jackpot fluctuation. This special 2 jackpot flag 203ge is set to ON when the lottery for the second special symbol (lottery based on the start winning into the second ball entrance 6450) results in a jackpot (see S1926 in FIG. 241). This special 2 jackpot flag 203ge is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see S1977 in FIG. 244). When this special 2 jackpot flag 203ge is ON and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, when the variable display time of the variable display of the second special symbol ends, a process is executed to forcibly stop the first special symbol with a missing symbol (see S1974 in FIG. 244). This prevents a malfunction in which a jackpot is started twice when a jackpot is won in both the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

The special symbol 1 variation time counter 203gf and the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203gg are counters for timing the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. When the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. Depending on the counter values of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203gf and the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203gg, it is determined whether the variation time of each special symbol has ended.

The special pattern 2 change stop flag 203gh is a flag indicating the period between when the change of the first special pattern is stopped (confirmed) at the jackpot stop pattern and when the jackpot is started. While this special pattern 2 change stop flag 203gh is set to on, the execution of the change display of the second special pattern is avoided (see S1902: Yes in FIG. 240). This special pattern 2 change stop flag 203gh is set to on when the second special pattern is forcibly stopped at a miss pattern (see S1873 in FIG. 239), and is set to off when the process for executing the change display of the second special pattern is avoided (see S1902 in FIG. 240).

The limit reached flag 203gi is a flag that indicates whether the special chance limit has been reached. If the limit reached flag 203gi is on, it means that the special chance limit has been reached (11 consecutive special chance jackpots have been won), and if it is off, it means that the special chance limit has not been reached. The limit reached flag 203gi is initially set to off, and is set to on when the counter value of the limit counter 203gb is updated to 11, which is the special chance limit, at the end of the jackpot (see S1677 in FIG. 246). The limit reached flag 203gi is also set to off at the start of the jackpot (when setting the stop display of the first symbol indicating a jackpot) (see S1877 in FIG. 239 and S1977 in FIG. 244).

Next, referring to FIG. 230(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 230(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 230(a), the ROM 222 in the tenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 26(a)) in that the final state display selection table 222c is deleted and a back mode selection table 222ga is added. The back mode selection table 222ga is a data table in which data is specified for selecting a back mode (performance mode) indicating the expectation level in which a probability change state (back mode) is set in the consecutive win mode and the pullback mode. Details of this back mode selection table 222ga will be described with reference to FIG. 231.

Figure 231 is a diagram showing the contents of the back mode lottery table 222ga. As shown in Figure 231, in this back mode lottery table 222ga, the value of the performance lottery counter that is determined to change the back mode is specified for each combination of the current game state and the type of back mode currently set. Specifically, when the game state is in a probability change state and the currently set back mode is the wilderness area (a back mode with a low probability change state expectation), the performance counter 223e is specified in correspondence with the forest mode in the range of "0 to 9". Therefore, when the game state is in a probability change state and the wilderness area is set, it is determined that the game will be shifted to the forest area with a high probability change expectation with a probability of 1/10 (10/100) each time a special pattern lottery is executed. Note that the value of the performance counter 223e is not associated with the back mode of the sky area, so there is no possibility of jumping from the wilderness area to the sky area.

In addition, when the game state is the probability change state and the currently set back mode is the forest area (a back mode with a relatively high probability of the probability change state), the wilderness mode is defined in correspondence with the range of "0 to 2" of the performance counter 223e, and the sky mode is defined in correspondence with "5". Therefore, when the game state is the probability change state and the forest area is set, it is determined that the game will be shifted to the wilderness area with a low probability of the probability change, and that the game will be shifted to the sky area with a probability of the probability change being confirmed, with a probability of 1/100. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 231, when the sky area is set in the probability change state, a lottery for shifting to another back mode is not performed. Therefore, the sky area, which is the most pleasing back mode, can be continued for a longer period of time, which can improve the interest of the player. In addition, when the probability change state or the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, the first back mode is always set to the wilderness area. In other words, to transition from the back mode to the sky area, it is first necessary to win the lottery for transitioning to the forest area with a probability of 1/10 in the wilderness area, and then, before falling into the wilderness area in the forest area, to win the lottery for transitioning to the sky area with a probability of 1/100. In other words, since it is relatively difficult to transition to the sky area even in a probability change state, transitioning to the sky area can give the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

Also, as shown in FIG. 231, in the time-saving state set based on winning a normal jackpot, if the wilderness area (a back mode with a low probability of a probability change state) is set as the back mode, if the value of the performance counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 4", the area is shifted to the forest area. That is, there is a probability of 1/20 (5/100) of shifting to the forest area with a high probability of a probability change. On the other hand, if the forest area is set, if the value of the performance counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 14", the area is shifted (falls) to the wilderness area. In other words, compared to when the probability change state is set, the probability of shifting from the wilderness area to the forest area is lower, and the probability of shifting (falling) from the forest area to the wilderness area is higher. In other words, since the ratio (stay ratio) of the wilderness area being set is higher, it is possible to realize a game that allows the player to guess the current game state from the back mode.

Also, as shown in FIG. 231, in the time-saving state set based on reaching the probability limit number of times, if the wilderness area (a back mode with a low probability of a ...

Next, referring to FIG. 230(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 230(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 230(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in this tenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 26(b)) in that the provisional hit determination flag 223h, provisional time-saving information update area 223i, time-saving lower limit flag 223j, forward end condition flag 223k, time-saving end pre-variation flag 223m, and state presentation counter 223n have been deleted.

<Regarding control process of main control device in tenth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Fig. 232 to Fig. 246. First, the timer interrupt process 10 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 232. This timer interrupt process 10 is a process executed in place of the timer interrupt process (see Fig. 37) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, similar to the timer interrupt process (see Fig. 37) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In the timer interrupt processing 10 in this tenth embodiment, the processes of S101, S102, S105 to S107, S110, and S111 are the same as the processes of S101, S102, S105 to S107, S110, and S111 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In addition, in the timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 232) in the tenth embodiment, after executing the process of S102, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S141), and then the special pattern change process 10 is executed (S142) instead of the special pattern change process 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment, and after executing the processes of S105 to S107, S110, and S111, this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 233, the details of the special symbol variation process 10 (S142) in the tenth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 10 (S142) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment, and is a process for making various settings related to the variable display of special symbols. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 10 (S142). When this special symbol variation process 10 (S142) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot is currently being won (S281), and if it is determined that a jackpot is being won (S281: Yes), there is no possibility of making settings related to the variable display, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S281, if it is determined that the jackpot is not currently being won (S281: No), it is then determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 change time counter 203gf is greater than 0 (i.e., whether the special symbol 1 is changing) (S282), and if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 change time counter 203gf is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S282: No), the first special symbol change start process (S283) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S287 in which change process for the special symbol 2 is executed. Details of this first special symbol change start process (S283) will be described later with reference to FIG. 234.

On the other hand, in the process of S282, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 1 change time counter 203gf is greater than 0 (the first special pattern is being displayed) (S282: Yes), the first special pattern change execution process (S284) is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 238, but this first special pattern change execution process (S284) executes the process during the special pattern 1 change. When the first special pattern change execution process (S284) is completed, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the change time (whether the special pattern 1 change time counter 203gf is 0) (S285), and if it is determined that it is the end timing of the change time (S285: Yes), the first special pattern change stop process (S286) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S287. Details of this first special pattern change stop process (S286) will be described later with reference to FIG. 239. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S285 that the variable time has not yet ended (S285: No), the process of S286 is skipped and the process proceeds to S287.

In each process of S287 to S291, the same process as each process of S282 to S286 executed for special symbol 1 is executed. When the process of S287 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 change time counter 203gg is greater than 0 (i.e., whether special symbol 2 is changing) (S287), and if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 change time counter 203gg is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S287: No), the second special symbol change start process (S288) is executed, and then this process is terminated. Details of this second special symbol change start process (S288) will be described later with reference to FIG. 240.

On the other hand, in the process of S287, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 change time counter 203gg is greater than 0 (S287: Yes), the second special symbol change in progress process (S289) is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 243, but this second special symbol change in progress process (S289) executes the process during the special symbol 2 change.

When the second special symbol change execution process (S289) is completed, it is next determined whether it is the end of the change time (whether the special symbol 2 change time counter 203gg is 0) (S290). If it is determined that it is the end of the change time (S290: Yes), the second special symbol change stop process (S291) is executed and this process ends. Details of this second special symbol change stop process (S291) will be described later with reference to FIG. 244. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S292 that it is not the end of the change time (S290: No), the process of S291 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 234, we will explain the first special symbol change start process (S283), which is one process of the special symbol change process (S142 in FIG. 233) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol change start process (S283).

In the first special symbol change start process (S283), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is obtained (S1801), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is greater than 0 (S1802). In the process of S1802, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is greater than 0 (S1802: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is decremented by 1 (S1803), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b after the decrement is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 (S1804).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b in the RAM 223. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b in the main control device 110.

When the processing of S1804 is completed, the data in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S1805). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on.

When the processing of S1805 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S1806). This first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 235, but it is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 that has been shifted to the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and based on the set game state.

When the processing of S1806 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is then executed (see FIG. 236). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 236, but this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807) is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the result of the win/loss determination of the first special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807) is completed, the game status update process is then executed (S1808). This game status update process (S1808), the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG. 237, is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the state of the probability variation flag 203ga and the value of the time-saving counter 203k, which indicate the state of the pachinko machine 10. When the process of S1808 is completed, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1802 that the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b is 0 (S1802: No), this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 235, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S283 in FIG. 234) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained (S1811). Next, it is determined whether the probability variable flag 203ga is set to ON (S1812). In other words, it is determined whether the special symbol is in a high probability state (probability variable state, potential probability state). If it is determined that the probability variable flag 203ga is ON (i.e., the special symbol is in a probability variable state) (S1812: Yes), it is determined whether the random number value for the jackpot specified in the first win random number table 202a for high probability (see FIG. 223(a)) matches the value of the first win random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the determination result (lottery result) is obtained (S1813). On the other hand, in the process of S1812, if it is determined that the probability of a jackpot 203ga is off (i.e., the special pattern is in a low probability state) (S1812: No), it is determined whether the random number value for a jackpot defined in the first jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 223(a)) matches the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is obtained (S1814).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S1813 or S1814 is a jackpot (S1815), and if the lottery result is a jackpot (S1815: Yes), the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to ON (S1816), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot (S1817). Then, based on the obtained value of the winning type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1818), and data corresponding to the current game status is stored in the winning status storage area 203ec (S1819), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is determined to be a loss in the process of S1815 (S1815: No), the losing pattern of the first special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (S1820), and then this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 236, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S283 in FIG. 234), will be described. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807 in FIG. 236), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806 in FIG. 235), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol was determined to be a jackpot, that is, whether a jackpot for the first special symbol has been set (S1821). Here, the determination of whether or not there is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203gd is on. This special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to on in the process of S1816 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235) described above.

In the process of S1821, if it is determined that a jackpot of the first special symbol has been set (the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to ON) (S1821: Yes), the jackpot type is determined from the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 224(a)) based on the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of S1811 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see FIG. 235) (S1822), and the process proceeds to S1823.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1821 that the lottery result for the first special symbol is a miss (i.e., the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203gd is off) (S1821: No), the process of S1822 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1823.

In the process of S1823, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S1823). Next, the variation pattern scenario (see FIG. 228) corresponding to the data stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area 203203gc is identified, and the variation pattern table associated with the current number of variations (number of draws) in the identified variation pattern scenario is read (S1824). When the process of S1824 is completed, next, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern table (S1825), and then the special symbol 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S1826).

After completing the processing of S1826, a special pattern 1 stop type command indicating the stop pattern is set (S1827), then the start of the fluctuation of the first special pattern is set on the first pattern display device 37 (S1828), a value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the processing of S1825 is set in the special pattern 1 fluctuation time counter 203gf (S1829), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 237, the game status update process (S1808), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 234) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing this game status update process (S1808). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, of the state of the probability change flag 203ga, which is a condition for setting the game status, and the value of the time-saving counter 203k, only the value of the time-saving counter 203k is updated at the start of the special symbol change. In order to do so, the game status update process (see FIG. 237), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 234), is configured to execute a process of updating the value of the time-saving counter 203k.

Then, as will be described in detail later, the probability change flag 203ga, which is set to ON, is configured to be set to OFF when the jackpot fluctuation ends and the special symbol indicating a jackpot is displayed stationary (when a jackpot game is executed).

In other words, of the two condition elements (the state of the probability bonus flag 203ga and the value of the time-saving counter 203k) referenced when setting the game state, one condition element can be updated when the special symbol starts to change, and the other condition element can be updated when the special symbol stops changing, making it easier to diversify the game state that is set by combining the two condition elements.

When the game status update process (see FIG. 237) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time-saving counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1831). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 0 (S1831: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1831: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203k is decremented by 1 (S1832), and a remaining time-saving number command indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203k is set (S1833). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time-saving counter 203k after the decrement has become 0 (S1834), and if it is determined that it has become 0 (S1834: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the probability of winning flag 203ga is set to ON (S1835). Here, if it is determined that the probability variable flag 203ga is set to ON (S1835: No), the game is in a probability variable state where no time-saving play is granted (i.e., a potential probability state), so a state command indicating the potential probability state is set (S1836), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1835 that the probability variable flag 203ga is not set to ON (S1835: No), the game is in a normal state, so a state command indicating the normal state is set (S1837), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1834 that the value of the time-saving counter 203k is not 0 (S1834: No), this process ends as it is.

In this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set to continue until the next jackpot of the special symbol is won (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot), but other than this, for example, a high probability counter may be provided instead of the high probability flag 203ga, and the value of the high probability counter may be subtracted each time a change in the special symbol is executed, and when the value of the high probability counter becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol may be transitioned to a low probability state.

When using such a configuration, the game status update process (S1808) shown with reference to FIG. 237 is set as the game status update process at the start of special pattern variation, and a game status update process at the end of special pattern variation is provided separately, which updates the value of the special pattern variation counter when the display of the special pattern variation ends. This makes it possible to execute the process of determining whether or not to end the high probability state of the special pattern and the process of determining whether or not to end the high probability state of the normal pattern at different times.

Next, referring to FIG. 238, the contents of the first special pattern change in progress process (S284) executed in the special pattern change process (see S142 in FIG. 233) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special pattern change in progress process (S284). When this first special pattern change in progress process (S284) is executed, first, the special pattern 1 change time counter 203gf is updated by subtracting 1 (S1851), then the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (S1852), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 239, the first special symbol change stop process (S286), which is one process of the special symbol change process (S142 in FIG. 233), will be described. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol change stop process (S286).

In the first special symbol variation stop process (S286), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 big win flag 203gd is set on (i.e., whether it is the timing to stop the first special symbol with a big win symbol) (S1871). In the process of S1871, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 big win flag 203gd is set on (S1871: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203gg is 1 or more (i.e., the second special symbol variation display may be in progress) (S1872). In the process of S1872, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203gg is 1 or more (the second special symbol is in the variation display) (S1872: Yes), the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203gh is set on (S1873), and a special symbol 2 variation stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203gh is set (S1874). Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a missing symbol (S1875).

When the process of S1875 is completed, the start of the jackpot corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1876), and the data of the winning status storage area 203ec is updated according to the current game status (S1878). Next, the special jackpot 1 flag 203gd, the special jackpot 2 flag 203ge, the probability bonus flag 203ga, the time-saving counter 203k, and the limit reached flag 203gi are all reset (S1878), the jackpot flag 203d is set to ON (S1879), and the process proceeds to S1880.

On the other hand, if the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to off for the first special symbol in the process of S1871 (S1871: Yes), or if the special symbol 2 variable time counter 203gg is determined to have a value of 0 in the process of S1872 (S1872: No), the process of S1873 to S1879 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1880.

In the process of S1880, a special pattern 1 confirmation command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special pattern is to be confirmed and stopped (S1880). After that, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the first special pattern displayed by the first pattern display device 37 (S1881), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S288), a process (S1873 to S1879) is executed to stop the variation display at the symbol that indicates the result of the first lottery game. Also, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (S1872: No), a process (S1875) is executed to forcibly stop the second special symbol being varied at a losing symbol.

In the first embodiment, when the first special symbol is stopped as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol being displayed as a missing symbol is forcibly stopped as a missing symbol, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the first special symbol is stopped as a jackpot symbol. After the first special symbol is hit, the display of the second special symbol may be resumed. This allows a more natural presentation compared to the case where the display is forcibly stopped as a missing symbol. In the present embodiment, the start of the jackpot is set in the process of S1876 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203ec in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235). However, the start of the jackpot may be set in the process of S1876 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203ec in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235) using the opening period of the jackpot game.

Next, referring to FIG. 240, the contents of the second special symbol change start process (S288) executed in the special symbol change process (FIG. 233) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start process (S288). In this second special symbol change start process (S288), processing is executed to start the change of special symbol 2. Note that detailed explanations of elements that simply change the target of the change from the first special symbol to the second special symbol in the processing related to the change of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIG. 234 to FIG. 239 will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S290), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203gh is set to ON (S1901). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203gh is set to ON (S1901: Yes), the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203gh is set to OFF (S1902), and this process is terminated. As described above, the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203gh is a flag that is set to ON when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends, and that causes the second special symbol to be displayed as a stop symbol corresponding to a miss. In other words, if the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203gh is ON, it means that a jackpot will start, so the start of variation of the second special symbol should not be set. For this reason, if the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203gh is ON in the process of S1901, the process is terminated without executing each process of S1903 to S1910 for setting the start of variation.

On the other hand, in the process of S1901, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 variable stop flag 203gh is set to off (i.e., not set to on) (S1901: No), the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b2 is obtained (S1903), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b2 is greater than 0 (S1904). In the process of S1904, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b2 is greater than 0 (S1904: Yes), the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b2 is decremented by 1 (S1905), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b2 after the subtraction is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 (S1906).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203b2 from the reserved ball count command and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b in the RAM 223. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203b2 according to the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203b2 of the main control device 110.

When the processing of S1906 is completed, the data in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted to the previous data (S1907). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on.

When the processing of S1907 is completed, the second special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S1908). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241, but this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908) is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 that has been shifted to the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, and based on the set game state.

When the processing of S1908 is completed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process is then executed (see FIG. 242). Details will be described later, but this second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S1909) is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2.

When the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909) is completed, the game status update process described above is then executed (S1910 (S1808)). When the process of S1910 is completed, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1904, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203b2 is 0 (S1904: No), this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 241, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S290 in FIG. 240) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908), the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see FIG. 235) is executed, so here we will mainly explain the differences with the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235).

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area is obtained (S1921). Then, the processes of S1922 to S1924 are executed to obtain the lottery result of whether or not there is a jackpot based on each obtained counter value and the state of the probability change flag 203ga. In each of these processes, the only difference is that the counter value used in the lottery (determination) is obtained from the second special symbol execution area, and otherwise the same control is executed as in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235).

When the processing of S1923 or S1924 is completed, it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a jackpot (S1925), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (S1925: Yes), the processing of S1926 to S1929 is executed to set the lottery result of the second special symbol to a jackpot, and this processing ends. In each of these processes of S1926 to S1929, the same processing as each of S1816 to S1819 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 235) is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1925 that the lottery result of the acquired second special pattern is not a jackpot (S1925: No), a losing pattern of the second special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (S1820), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 242, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (see S288 in FIG. 240) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909 in FIG. 242) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 236) and the process related to the variation of the first special symbol in that the variation target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and therefore a detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 243, the contents of the second special pattern change in progress process (S289), which is one process within the special pattern change process (see S142 in FIG. 233) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special pattern change in progress process (S289). In this second special pattern change in progress process (S289), a process of subtracting the change time is executed.

When the second special symbol change in progress process (S289) is executed, first, the special symbol 2 change time counter 203gg is updated by subtracting 1 (S1951), the display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1952), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 244, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing (S291) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing (S291). This second special symbol variation stop processing (S291) executes processing when the variation of special symbol 2 is stopped.

The second special symbol change stop process (S291) is different from the first special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 239) described above in that the only change target is the second special symbol instead of the first special symbol, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 245, the details of the jackpot control process 10 (S1531) in the tenth embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 10 (S1531) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 192) in the seventh embodiment. In the jackpot control process 10 (S1531) in the tenth embodiment, each of the processes S1601 to S1612 is the same as each of the processes S1601 to S1612 in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 192) in the seventh embodiment.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 10 (S1531) in the tenth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1612 that it is the end timing of the ending period (ending presentation) (S1612), a jackpot end process is executed to set the end of the current jackpot game (S1631), and then this process is terminated. Details of this jackpot end process (S1631) will be explained with reference to FIG. 246.

Figure 246 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot end process (S1631). As described above, this jackpot end process (S1631) is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends. In this jackpot end process (S1631), first, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot (S1671), and if it is determined that the current jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot (S1671: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the limit counter 203gb (S1674). Next, it is determined whether the value of the limit counter 203gb after the addition in the process of S1674 is 11 (S1675), and if it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203gb after the addition is 11 (S1675: Yes), the limit reach flag 203gi is set to ON (S1677), and the process proceeds to S1672.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1675 that the value of the limit counter 203gb after the increment is not 11 (is a value of 10 or less) (S1675: No), the special chance flag 203ga is set to ON (S1676), and the processing proceeds to S1678.

In contrast, if it is determined in step 1671 that the current jackpot is not a guaranteed jackpot (a normal jackpot) (S1671: No), steps S1674 to S1677 are skipped and the process moves to step S1672. In step S1672, the value of the limit counter 203gb is set to 0 (S1672), the guaranteed jackpot flag 203ga is set to off (S1673), and the process moves to step S1678.

In the process of S1678, the number of time-saving times corresponding to the type of jackpot being executed, the data in the winning status storage area 203ec, and the status of the limit reaching flag 203gi are read from the time-saving granting table 202e (see FIG. 225) (S1678), and the number of time-saving times read is set as the counter value of the time-saving counter 203k (S1679). Next, a time-saving setting information command corresponding to the setting content is set (S1680), and a status command corresponding to the game status after the jackpot is set (S1681).

Next, a fluctuation pattern scenario corresponding to the type of jackpot currently being executed, the data in the winning status storage area 203ec, and the status of the limit reached flag 203gi is identified (S1682), and data indicating the identified fluctuation pattern scenario is stored in the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203gc (S1683). Next, the end of the jackpot is set (S1684), and the jackpot in progress flag 203d is set to OFF (S1685), and this process is terminated.

By executing this jackpot end process, the game state can be set appropriately depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the type of jackpot, and whether or not the special chance limit has been reached.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Fig. 247 and Fig. 248. First, the variable display setting process 10 (S2141) in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 247. This variable display setting process 10 (S2141) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see Fig. 62, S2114) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment).

The variable display setting process 10 (S2141) in this tenth embodiment differs from the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62, S2114) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above in that instead of the performance setting process (S8004), a performance setting process 10 (S2831) is executed; otherwise, the same processing is executed, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 248, the performance setting process 10 (S2831) executed in this tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing this performance setting process 10 (S2831). This performance setting process 10 (S2831) is a process executed within the variable display setting process 10 (see FIG. 247, S2141) executed in this tenth embodiment.

In the effect setting process 10 (S2831), first, it is determined whether or not the currently executing variable display is a jackpot variable display pattern (S2921). In the process of S2921, if it is determined that the currently executing variable display is a jackpot variable display pattern (S2921: Yes), the variable display mode for the jackpot is selected as the variable display mode (S2922), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a jackpot fluctuation pattern (S2921: No), then it is determined whether the current game state is in a high probability state or a time-saving state (S2923). If it is determined in the processing of S2923 that the current game state is not in a high probability state or a time-saving state (S2923: No), the process proceeds to S2928. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2923 that the current game state is in a high probability state or a time-saving state (S2923: Yes), the back mode selection table 222ga (see FIG. 231) is read (S2924), and a back mode is selected according to the current game state and whether the limit has been reached (S2925), and then it is determined whether a change in the back mode has been selected (S2926). If the back mode is not to be changed (S2926: No), the process proceeds to S2928.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the rear view mode is to be changed (S2926: Yes), a display rear view image change command corresponding to the changed rear view mode is set (S2927), and the process proceeds to S2928.

In the process of S2928, the variable display mode for a miss is selected as the variable display mode (S2928), and then this process is terminated.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is configured to have six modes: normal modes A and B (normal state, potential state) that are disadvantageous to the player, chance modes A and B (time-saving state with 8 time-saving times, probability state) that are likely to transition to the advantageous consecutive win mode, consecutive win mode that is most advantageous to the player (probability state that continues until the next jackpot), and pull-back mode (time-saving state with 100 time-saving times) that is relatively advantageous to the player. If a jackpot is won in normal modes A and B, the game will almost always transition to either chance mode A or B (the game will be less likely to transition directly to consecutive win mode). In other words, unless a jackpot is won in either chance mode A or B (i.e., if a jackpot is not won in the lottery for special symbols within 8 times after transitioning to chance mode A or B), it is difficult to transition to the consecutive win mode that is advantageous to the player. As a result, by simply switching to the consecutive win mode, the player can feel a sense of accomplishment, and the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the consecutive win mode, the consecutive win mode is set again at a high rate (when a jackpot with a probability of winning is reached at a rate of 90%) after the jackpot ends, and when a normal jackpot is won at a low rate (a rate of 10%) or when the probability limit number of times is reached, the player does not fall directly into an unfavorable state but always transitions to the pull-back mode. When a jackpot is won in the pull-back mode, the player is configured to transition (return) only to the consecutive win mode or the pull-back mode, just like when a jackpot is won in the consecutive win mode. In other words, as long as a jackpot is won within the number of time-saving times in the pull-back mode, there is no possibility of transitioning to an unfavorable game state, and the degree of advantage when transitioning to the consecutive win mode can be increased. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved when transitioning to the consecutive win mode.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the game transitions to a consecutive mode (a state of probability that continues until the next jackpot), and the consecutive mode and jackpots are repeated by winning the jackpot with a probability of 90%. When the upper limit number of times of the special symbol's probability state (the number of times of probability limit) is reached, regardless of whether the special symbol's probability state is won or the normal jackpot, the pull-back mode is set, and when a jackpot is won within the number of time-saving times (100 times) (so-called pull-back occurs), the rate of a favorable jackpot type (a jackpot with a large number of rounds) is likely to be higher than when a jackpot is won during the probability state. More specifically, the rate of a jackpot type with a low degree of advantage (a selection rate of a small number of rounds) is higher for a jackpot with the second special symbol than for a jackpot with the first special symbol, and the frequency of selection of the second special symbol is significantly lower in the pull-back mode set by reaching the number of times of probability limit. That is, the time for the variable display based on the drawing of the second special symbol is configured to be significantly longer than the time for the variable display based on the drawing of the first special symbol (for example, it is set to a uniform time of 600 seconds regardless of the drawing result), and it is possible to draw the first special symbol multiple times while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed once. In other words, it is configured to increase the rate of winning the jackpot in the drawing of the first special symbol. This allows the player to play with a stronger expectation of winning the jackpot when the probability limit number of times is reached, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the tenth embodiment, only when the probability limit number of times is reached and the time-saving state (pull-back mode) is set, a state in which the relatively advantageous first special symbol is drawn during the pull-back mode is created, but this is not limited to the above. For example, even when the pull-back mode is set after the jackpot ends due to a normal jackpot being won in the consecutive win mode, the first special symbol may be drawn more easily (the limit-reaching table 202dg3 is referenced to determine the variation pattern). By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a stronger expectation that a pull-back will occur in each pull-back mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the tenth embodiment, when the consecutive win mode is entered, the consecutive win mode is always continued until the next big win occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specification may be adopted in which a lottery (fall lottery) is executed to determine whether or not to enter (fall) into a low probability state of the special pattern (pull-back mode or normal mode A) each time the lottery condition for the special pattern is established in the consecutive win mode. In this case, if it is determined that the special pattern will fall into the low probability state within 100 times after the big win ends, the pull-back mode is set to continue until a total of 100 lotteries are completed, while if it is determined that the player will fall after 100 times, normal mode A may be set. Furthermore, in this case, when the player falls into the pull-back mode by the fall lottery, the lottery may be configured to be executed with a bias toward the lottery of the advantageous first special pattern during the set pull-back mode. By configuring in this way, the player can play with a stronger expectation that the pull-back will occur after falling into the pull-back mode, and the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Modification of the Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 249 to Fig. 252. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned tenth embodiment, when the consecutive win mode and consecutive win mode are repeated to reach the probability variable limit number and the pull-back mode is set, the lottery for the advantageous first special symbol (i.e., the advantageous jackpot type is likely to be determined when the jackpot is won) is easily executed, so that the player is strongly conscious of wanting to win the jackpot during the pull-back mode.

In contrast to this, in this modified example, in the pull-back mode, which is set based on reaching the special chance limit, if a player is unable to win a jackpot within the time-saving number of times and transitions (falls) to normal mode A (normal state), a special state is created in which the probability of transitioning to consecutive wins mode is higher than normal if a jackpot is won in normal mode A. This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue playing even after transitioning from pull-back mode to normal mode A, thereby improving the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

First, referring to FIG. 249, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example will be described. FIG. 249 is a diagram showing the board configuration of the game board 13 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 249, the board configuration of the game board 13 in this modified example differs from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 220) in that a distribution winning device 750 is provided instead of the first ball entry port 64, that a right second ball entry port 6400r is provided as a starting winning port that triggers the lottery for the second special pattern instead of the right first ball entry port 64r, and that the second ball entry port 6450 has been deleted. The distribution winning device 750 is configured to distribute the game balls that flow into the distribution winning device 750 through the upper opening 750a to either the central first ball entry port 64c, which is a type of starting winning port that triggers the drawing of the first special symbol, or the central second ball entry port 6400c, which is a type of starting winning port that triggers the drawing of the second special symbol. That is, the game balls that flow into the distribution winning device 750 through the opening 750a are received by the distribution member 750b provided directly below the opening 750a and are made to flow down toward either the central first ball entry port 64c or the central second ball entry port 6400c. In addition, the distribution member 750b is configured to be variable between a state inclined to the right side as viewed from the front (see FIG. 249) and a state inclined to the left side as viewed from the front, and in a state inclined to the right side as viewed from the front, the game ball flowing in from the opening 750a is received by the left part of the distribution member 750b, and the weight of the received game ball causes the distribution member 750b to rotate counterclockwise and switch to a state inclined to the left side as viewed from the front, so that the game ball received by the distribution member 750b falls toward the central first ball inlet 6400c located on the lower left side as viewed from the front. On the other hand, in a state inclined to the left side as viewed from the front, the disadvantageous W3 opening member 750b receives the game ball flowing in from the opening 750a by the right part of the distribution member 750b, and the weight of the received game ball causes the distribution member 750b to rotate clockwise and switch to a state inclined to the right side as viewed from the front, so that the game ball received by the distribution member 750b falls toward the central second ball inlet 6400c located on the lower right side as viewed from the front. In other words, each time a game ball enters the opening 750a, the distribution member 750b receives the game ball and allows it to flow alternately down the central first ball entrance 64c and the central second ball entrance 6400c. This allows the lottery for special symbols to be executed more efficiently.

<Electrical configuration in the modified example of the tenth embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 250, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described. Here, in this modified example, only the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d, the time-saving grant table 202e, and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga are partially changed from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the tenth embodiment described above (see Fig. 222 (a)). Therefore, the illustration of the configuration of the ROM 202 is omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 250, the details of the normal table 202dg1 constituting the variation pattern table 202d in this modified example will be described. This normal table 202dg1, like the normal table 202dg1 in the above-mentioned 10th embodiment (see FIG. 225(b)), is a data table in which data is specified for determining (selecting) a variation pattern (variation time) according to the lottery result when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a gaming state (normal state, potential state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. FIG. 250(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this normal table 202dg1.

As shown in FIG. 250(a), the normal table 202dg1 in this modified example has the same allocation as the allocation of the first special symbol in the normal table 202dg1 in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 225(b)), regardless of the symbol type, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. In other words, in this modified example, in a game state (normal state, potential state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, when a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, a relatively short fluctuation time is likely to be selected (an ultra-long fluctuation of 600 seconds cannot be selected), as in the case when a lottery for the first special symbol is executed. As described above with reference to FIG. 249, in this modified example, the distribution device 750 (configured to allow game balls to enter alternately into the central first ball entry port 64c and the central second ball entry port 6400c) is provided at the position where the first ball entry port 64 (the starting entry port that triggers the drawing of the first special symbol) in the tenth embodiment was provided, and the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are easily performed in parallel (simultaneously) by performing a normal playing method (hitting from the left) in the normal state of the normal symbol. In other words, since the drawing of the second special symbol is performed without performing an irregular playing method (a playing method in which a right hit is performed in the normal state of the normal symbol), the variation time of the second special symbol is configured to be shorter than that of the tenth embodiment in order to improve the playing efficiency.

Next, referring to FIG. 250(b), the details of the limit reached table 202dg3 in this modified example will be described. This limit reached table 202dg3, like the limit reached table 202dg3 in the 10th embodiment (see FIG. 226(b)), is a data table that may be referenced to determine (select) the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol when the probability of the special symbol changing is set to a low probability state after the jackpot has ended despite the fact that the number of chance wins has been reached and a chance win has been won.

Figure 250 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the limit reaching table 202dg3. As shown in Figure 250 (b), the limit reaching table 202dg3 in this modified example (see Figure 250 (b)) is different from the limit reaching table 202dg3 in the above-mentioned tenth embodiment (see Figure 226 (b)) in that the correspondence between the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for each lottery result and the selected (determined) fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is the exact opposite for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the correspondence in the first special symbol in the limit reaching table 202dg3 in the above-mentioned tenth embodiment (see Figure 226 (b)) is the correspondence in the limit reaching table 202dg3 in this modified example (see Figure 250 (b)). Also, the correspondence relationship for the second special symbol in the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 226(b)) in the above-mentioned tenth embodiment is the correspondence relationship for the first special symbol in the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250(b)) in this modified example. Therefore, in this modified example, when the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250(b)), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is always set to an extremely long fluctuation time of 600 seconds regardless of the lottery result, while the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to a relatively short fluctuation time (3 to 30 seconds). As a result, during the period when the limit reaching table 202dg3 is referenced (when the probability limit number is reached and the number of times the special symbol is drawn after the jackpot is 101 or more), when a game ball is shot by hitting from the left side aiming at the distribution winning device 750, the drawing of the first special symbol is executed only every 600 seconds, while the drawing of the second special symbol can be performed relatively frequently. In other words, when a jackpot is won, it is possible to bias the drawing of the advantageous second special symbol that is likely to determine the advantageous jackpot type (the jackpot type that is given a probability state that continues until the next jackpot), so that it is possible to form a special normal state (special state) that is more advantageous than the normal state to which it is shifted under other conditions (when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized or when a normal jackpot is won). Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to continue playing during the special state, and therefore it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the time-saving granting table 202e in this modified example will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 251. This time-saving granting table 202e, like the time-saving granting table 202e in the tenth embodiment, is a data table that is referenced when setting the number of time-saving times (setting the counter value of the time-saving counter 203k) at the end of a jackpot, depending on the type of jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. FIG. 251 shows the contents of the time-saving granting table 202e in this modified example.

As shown in FIG. 251, the time-saving granting table 202e (see FIG. 251) in this modified example differs from the contents of the time-saving granting table 202e in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 227) in that the number of time-saving grants for some of the jackpots with the second special symbols (jackpot I10, J10) has been changed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 251, for the jackpot I10 (9-round special jackpot) won in the normal state, the number of time-savings (for example, 65,536 times) that will continue until the next jackpot is specified in correspondence with the jackpot that has not yet reached the special jackpot limit number, and the number of time-savings of 8 times is specified in correspondence with the jackpot after the special jackpot limit number is reached. In addition, for the jackpot I10 won in the potential state, whether it is a hit before the special jackpot limit is reached or the special jackpot limit number is reached, the number of time-savings is specified in correspondence with 8 times. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 251, for the jackpot I10 (9-round special jackpot) won in a game state where the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set (time-saving state, special state), the same number of time-saving times are assigned as for other special jackpots. In other words, for a jackpot before the special limit is reached, the number of time-saving times that will continue until the next jackpot is assigned, and for a jackpot after the special limit is reached, 100 time-saving times are assigned.

In addition, the number of time-saving times for the jackpot J10 is set to the same number as for the jackpot C10 and the jackpot F10. That is, the number of time-saving times is set to 8 for the jackpot J10 (3-round variable jackpot) won in the normal state. In addition, the number of time-saving times is set to 0 for the jackpot J10 won in the potential state, even if it is a hit before the probability limit is reached or the probability limit number is reached. In other words, if the jackpot J10 is won in the potential state, the time-saving state of the normal pattern is not granted even once, which is extremely disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 251, the number of time-saving times is set to the same number as for the other variable jackpots for the jackpot J10 (3-round variable jackpot) won in the game state (time-saving state, variable state) in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set. In other words, a hit before the probability limit is reached is associated with a number of time-saving times that will continue until the next big hit, and a hit after the probability limit is reached is associated with 100 time-saving times.

In this way, in this modified example, the degree of advantage in the case where a certain jackpot (jackpot I10, J10) is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state is higher than that of the tenth embodiment. That is, in the case where a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, the number of time-saving times that will continue until the next jackpot is set is 27% (if the jackpot I10 is won) (i.e., a direct transition to consecutive win mode), and in the case where a jackpot J10-L10 is won), 8 times of time-saving times are set (i.e., a transition to either chance mode A or B) is made 73% of the time. In other words, in the normal state, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the rate of transitioning to consecutive win mode after the jackpot ends is nearly four times higher than the rate of transitioning to consecutive win mode directly after the jackpot ends (the rate of winning either jackpot A10 or D10, which is 7%). For this reason, in the normal state, the player can play with strong hopes of winning the jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol. Also, when the game transitions to a special state in which the table 202dg3 for when the limit is reached (see FIG. 250) is referenced and a variation pattern is selected, the possibility of directly transitioning to consecutive win mode increases, so the player's motivation to play when the game transitions to the special state can be improved. This can further increase the player's interest in playing the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 252, the details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga in this modified example will be described. The fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga in this modified example, like the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 228), is a data table referenced to select the correspondence (fluctuation pattern scenario) between the number of times a special symbol is drawn after the end of a jackpot and the type of fluctuation pattern table to be referenced. FIG. 252 is a diagram showing the specified contents of this fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga.

As shown in FIG. 252, this modified example differs from the variation pattern scenario table 202ga (see FIG. 228) in the tenth embodiment only in that the variation pattern scenario set when the probability variable limit number of times is reached is partially changed. More specifically, when a probability variable jackpot is won in a probability variable state and the probability variable limit number of times is reached by the jackpot, the time-saving table 202dg2 is referenced after the jackpot ends until 100 lotteries are performed, and a variation pattern scenario is set in which the limit-reaching table 202dg3 is referenced for the 101st and subsequent lotteries. In other words, when the probability variable limit number of times is reached by repeating consecutive wins and jackpots, and the pull-back mode is set, and the jackpot cannot be won during the pull-back mode (time-saving state with 100 time-saving times), in the subsequent normal state, the limit-reaching table 202dg3 is referenced each time a special pattern lottery is performed. Therefore, since it is possible to place emphasis on the drawing of the second special symbol, which is relatively advantageous (if a jackpot is won, there is a high probability of directly transitioning to consecutive win mode), it is possible to make the player want to continue playing even after the pull-back mode has ended. This makes it possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the tenth embodiment, when the consecutive win mode and the jackpot are repeated until the probability limit is reached, the pullback mode is set, and the player is unable to win a jackpot during the pullback mode and the game transitions to normal mode A, which is disadvantageous to the player, a special state is set in which the probability of transitioning to consecutive win mode increases if the player wins a jackpot. In other words, the game is configured to create a state in which the drawing of the unfavorable first special symbol (the consecutive win mode is unlikely to be set even if the jackpot is won in the normal state) is almost never performed, and the drawing of the advantageous second special symbol (the probability of consecutive win mode being set if the jackpot is won in the normal state) can be biased toward the drawing of the advantageous second special symbol. This can improve the player's motivation to play when the game transitions to the special state.

It is generally known that gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with game states that are advantageous to the player, such as a probability bonus state or a time-saving state. Some of these conventional gaming machines, once they have transitioned to an advantageous game state, repeat the advantageous game state and a jackpot at a relatively high rate, aiming to increase the player's interest when they transition to an advantageous game state. However, these conventional gaming machines have a problem in that when an advantageous game state ends and an unfavorable game state (for example, a normal state) is set, it becomes difficult to encourage the player to continue playing in the unfavorable game state.

In contrast, in this modified example, if a special state (a state in which the table 202dg3 for when the limit is reached is referenced and the fluctuation pattern is determined) is set after the end of the pullback mode, the player is encouraged to continue playing in the unfavorable normal state, so that the player's motivation to play can be maintained even after the favorable playing state has ended. This makes it possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

In this modified example, the special state is set after the end of the pull-back mode only when the probability limit number of times is reached and the pull-back mode is set, but this is not limited to the above. For example, even if the pull-back mode is set after the end of a jackpot by winning a normal jackpot in consecutive win mode, the normal mode A (normal state) after the pull-back mode ends may be set to the special state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to ensure that the special state is set when the pull-back mode ends, so that it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) a decrease in the player's motivation to play when the pull-back mode ends.

In this modified example, in normal mode A after the end of the pull-back mode based on the reaching of the special chance limit, the table 202dg3 for when the limit is reached is referenced to determine the variation pattern until a jackpot is won, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, the table 202dg3 for when the limit is reached may be referenced to determine the variation pattern only after the end of the pull-back and until a specific number of drawings (100) are completed. By configuring in this way, if a player gets stuck after the pull-back mode ends, it is possible to prevent the player from losing track of when to stop playing, and to allow the player to decide whether or not to quit playing once the specific number of drawings are completed.

In this modified example, a configuration is provided in which an advantageous state is created in which emphasis is placed on the drawing of the advantageous second special symbol only when the pull-back mode ends and transitions to normal mode A, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, even if a certain number of consecutive drawings of special symbols (e.g., 200 or more times) in normal mode A or normal mode B result in misses, a configuration may be provided in which an advantageous state is created in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes extremely long (600 seconds). By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the configuration so that motivation to play is less likely to decrease even if a player becomes addicted.

Eleventh Embodiment
Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 253 to Fig. 272. In the seventh embodiment described above, in order to configure it so that a time-saving game state advantageous to the player is set as the game state after the jackpot is ended when a jackpot is won in an unfavorable normal state rather than in an advantageous time-saving state, the small prize is won with a high probability in the lottery of the second special symbol that is likely to be executed during the time-saving state, and the proportion of the time-saving state granted when a V prize is generated in the small prize and a jackpot is started is configured to be higher for the small prize in the normal state than for the small prize in the time-saving state.

In contrast, in the eleventh embodiment, a favorable period during which the reserved ball of the second special pattern (reserved ball of special pattern 2) can be acquired during the time-saving state advantageous to the player, and an unfavorable period during which it is more difficult to acquire the ball than the favorable period can be set, and the unfavorable period is set before the favorable period. The game executed after the end of the jackpot game is more likely to be favorable to the player if the jackpot game is executed during the favorable period of the time-saving state than if the jackpot game is executed during the unfavorable period of the time-saving state. In other words, it is more favorable to the player (it is easier to execute the lottery for the second special pattern using the reserved ball of special pattern 2 after the end of the jackpot game) to execute the jackpot game after the specific condition is established (after the favorable period is set) than to execute the jackpot game between the time-saving state advantageous to the player and the specific condition is established (until the favorable period is set).

In addition, by setting a time-saving state in which the end condition is less likely to be met when a jackpot game is played during a normal state and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game, rather than when a jackpot game is played during the time-saving state and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game, the game is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to play a jackpot game during the normal state using the reserved ball for special chart 2 that was secured during the time-saving state, than when a jackpot game is played during the time-saving state.

By configuring it in this way, the player can choose between a first game method (a game method in which a V win is made with a small win game executed during an unfavorable period) of executing a jackpot game as soon as possible (executing a jackpot game with no reserved balls for special symbol 2 or only a small number of reserved balls for special symbol 2), and a second game method in which the time-saving state is ended while keeping many reserved balls for the second special symbol, and a V win is made with a small win after the time-saving state ends, knowing the risk that it will take time and balls to end the time-saving state.

In the eighth embodiment described above, multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state are provided, and the time-saving end condition that is more likely to be met among the multiple time-saving end conditions (special chart 1 end condition, special chart 2 end condition) is varied depending on the play method (left-hand play, right-hand play) performed by the player. Then, it is determined whether the state is immediately before each time-saving end condition is met (a state in which the pre-time-saving end condition is met), and when it is determined that the pre-time-saving end condition is met for one time-saving end condition, a presentation (play method guidance presentation) is executed to allow the player to play in a play method in which the other time-saving end condition is more likely to be met than the one time-saving end condition in which the pre-time-saving end condition is met.

In other words, in the eighth embodiment described above, in order to allow the player to enjoy playing during the time-saving state to the maximum extent (to extend the playing period during the time-saving state), the system is configured to prevent the time-saving state from ending in a state in which only the element for establishing one of the multiple time-saving end conditions (for example, the number of times the second special symbol changes) is updated, while the element for establishing the other time-saving end conditions (for example, the number of times the first special symbol changes) is not updated at all.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment described above, a maximum of four drawing rights for the second special symbol can be reserved and stored, and by ending the time-saving state with the drawing rights for the second special symbol reserved and stored, a drawing for the second special symbol that is more advantageous to the player than the drawing for the first special symbol can be executed in the normal state that is set after the time-saving state ends. In other words, it is configured to execute an effect that maximizes the number of special symbol drawings executed during the time-saving state, while also ending the time-saving state with more drawing rights for the second special symbol reserved and stored.

In contrast to this, in the eleventh embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment described above, when the time-saving state is set, the drawing of the second special symbol, which makes it easier to obtain the lottery right than when a game state other than the time-saving state (for example, the normal state) is set, is configured to be executed in preference to the drawing of the first special symbol. And, when the number of times the special symbol is drawn during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (10 times), the time-saving state is configured to end. In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, a different variation pattern (variation time) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special pattern executed during the time-saving state based on the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern (the reserved memory number of the lottery right of the second special pattern that is reserved and stored at the time when the second special pattern lottery is executed) and the remaining number of times of drawing the special pattern (remaining time-saving times) until the time-saving state ends (until the number of times of drawing the special pattern during the time-saving state reaches 10), and the expected degree of acquisition of the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 2 at the time of the end of the time-saving state is configured to differ depending on the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special pattern selected during the time-saving state. In other words, it is configured so that it is easy to increase or decrease the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 2 at the time of the end of the time-saving state based on the timing of the increase or decrease of the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 2 during the time-saving state.

More specifically, the length of the special symbol change (special symbol 2 change) that is executed in the latter half of the time-saving state (for example, the 9th or 10th time-saving state) is configured to be selected according to the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2, from an extremely short change time (for example, 0.1 seconds) that makes it difficult to obtain the reserved balls for the special symbol 2 during the change, and a long change time (for example, 20 seconds) that makes it easy to obtain the reserved balls for the special symbol 2.

Furthermore, the system is configured so that the number of reserved balls on the special chart 2 at the end of the time-saving state is more likely to be greater if the player temporarily stops playing with the right hand than if the player continues playing with the right hand during the time-saving state. Specifically, if the number of reserved balls on the special chart 2 is set to the upper limit (four balls) during the special chart 2 change during a specific time-saving number of times (e.g., the eighth time-saving number), the change time of the special chart 2 change corresponding to the remaining number of times of time-saving is extremely short (e.g., 0.1 seconds).

By configuring it in this way, players who are playing during the time-saving state can play while thinking about whether or not to play right-handed games, rather than simply continuing to play right-handed games. In other words, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which it is more advantageous not to play.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, a guidance effect can be executed during the time-saving state, which can guide the player in a playing method that is advantageous to the player. This allows the player to play in accordance with the content of the guidance effect being executed, which requires the player's skill, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play. It also makes it possible to prevent a player playing during the time-saving state from being forced to play in an excessively disadvantageous manner.

The eleventh embodiment differs from the seventh and eighth embodiments described above in that part of the configuration of the game board 13, part of the performance content executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been changed. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same components are denoted with the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 253, the board configuration of the game board 13 in this eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 253 is a front view of the game board 13 in this eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 253, the game board 13 in this eleventh embodiment differs from the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 178) in that the position of the V winning device 6500 has been changed from the left side of the board to the right side of the board, the position of the through gate 67 has been changed to a position below the V winning device 6500, and the position of the first variable winning device 65 has been changed from a position below the center of the board to the left side of the board, but otherwise is the same. The same components are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In this eleventh embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in a position where a game ball that has flowed down the game area on the left side of the variable display unit 80 (left side area) is more likely to win than a game ball that has flowed down the game area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right side area), and the second ball entrance 6400 accompanied by the V winning device 6500, through gate 67, and electric device 6400a is arranged in a position where a game ball that has flowed down the right side area is more likely to win than a game ball that has flowed down the left side area.

In other words, in this eleventh embodiment, when the normal state is set or when a big win game is being played, left-handed play, which mainly causes the game ball to flow down to the left side area, is the game method that is advantageous to the player, and when the time-saving state is set or when a small win game is being played, right-handed play, which mainly causes the game ball to flow down to the right side area, is the game method that is advantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 253, the board configuration of the right area of the pachinko machine 10 of this eleventh embodiment will be described. In this pachinko machine 10 of this eleventh embodiment, the V winning device 6500 is disposed at an upper position of the right area, and by means of nails planted in the game board 13, almost all of the game balls launched by right-handed play are guided toward the left end of the V winning device 6500 so that they flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 6400f1 of the V winning device 6500 from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the left side to the right side as viewed in FIG. 253).

As explained in the seventh embodiment above, the opening and closing door 6500f1 of the V winning device 6500 is configured so that when closed, a flow path through which multiple game balls can pass is formed on its upper surface (see FIG. 179). Therefore, by playing right-hand while a small win game is being played, it is possible to reliably win a game ball into the V winning device 6500 during the small win game.

When the opening and closing door 6500f1 of the V winning device 6500 is closed (when a small win game is not being played), the game ball flowing down the right area passes over the top surface of the opening and closing door 6500f1 in the closed state, and, as in the seventh embodiment described above, is configured to be distributed to a flow path that passes through the through gate 67 and reaches the electric device 640a, and a flow path that flows down toward the outlet 66 without passing through the through gate 67.

In this eleventh embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment described above, when the time-saving state is set as the game state, the electric device 6400a attached to the second ball entrance 6400 becomes easier to open, so that a game is played in which a game ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 6400, which is the trigger for the selection of the second special symbol, by hitting the ball from the right.

As explained above, in this eleventh embodiment, the ball is configured to reach the V winning device 6500 first in right-hand play executed during the time-saving state. Therefore, when a small win game is executed during the time-saving state, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the through gate 67 or entering the second ball entrance 6400 during the small win game period. This makes it possible to manage the rate at which the number of reserved memories of the second special pattern increases during the time-saving state by varying the change time of the second special pattern change during the time-saving state.

In the eleventh embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 6400 are disposed below the V winning device 6500 to prevent the game ball from entering the second ball entrance 6400 during the small win game. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the game ball may be configured to be able to pass through the through gate 67 even during the small win game, and even if a winning lottery for a normal pattern is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the game ball may not reach the second ball entrance 6400 accompanied by the electric role 6400a that is opened. In this case, since it is possible to pass the game ball through the through gate 67 during the small win game period, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the reserved memory for the normal pattern is exhausted during the small win game and the game cannot be played smoothly during the time-saving state.

Also, only the through gate 67 may be arranged below the V winning device 6500, and the second ball entrance 6400 with the electric device 6400a may be arranged above the V winning device 6500. In this case, the second ball entrance 6400 can be arranged upstream of the right side area, so that the game ball can be smoothly inserted into the second ball entrance 6400 during the time-saving state, and the game can be played smoothly during the time-saving state.

Here, we will briefly explain the differences from the seventh embodiment in terms of the game content when the time-saving state is set. In this eleventh embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) set (selected) for the second special symbol drawing executed during the time-saving state is configured to differ based on the number of times the special symbol is drawn in the time-saving state (remaining number of time-savings) and the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol, and it is possible to set (select) a fluctuation pattern that makes it difficult to secure reserved memories of the second special symbol (fluctuation pattern with short fluctuation time) and a fluctuation pattern that makes it easy to secure reserved memories of the second special symbol (fluctuation pattern with long fluctuation time).

The system is configured so that, depending on the variation pattern (variation time) set (selected) for the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, it is possible to create a state in which many reserved memories of the second special symbols can be secured at the time the time-saving state ends, and a state in which it is difficult to secure them. Furthermore, it is configured so that it is easier to increase the number of reserved memories of the second special symbols at the time the time-saving state ends by interrupting right-hitting play at a specific timing rather than continuing right-hitting play during the time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, the player can freely select the play method during the time-saving state, and the degree of advantage of the game executed after the time-saving state ends (the number of times the reserved second special symbol lottery is executed) can be changed, so that the player can be motivated to play during the time-saving state.

In addition, in this eleventh embodiment, the predetermined period after the time-saving state is set (for example, the period until the sixth drawing of the special pattern (second special pattern) is performed during the time-saving state) is configured to be an unfavorable period in which it is more difficult to secure the reserved memory of the second special pattern than the period after the predetermined period has elapsed (the period during which the seventh to tenth drawing of the special pattern (second special pattern) is performed during the time-saving state). In other words, the period after the predetermined period has elapsed is configured to be an advantageous period in which it is easier to secure the reserved memory of the second special pattern than the predetermined period after the time-saving state is set.

By configuring it in this way, when a small jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol can be made to differ depending on the number of time-saving periods at the time of the win. Therefore, the player can choose whether or not to play a game to generate a V prize during the small jackpot game, depending on the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol that are reserved at the time of the small jackpot win.

In other words, if a small jackpot is won during the time-saving state, and the big jackpot game (V jackpot) is played based on the game ball scoring a V win during the small jackpot game, and the normal state is set after the end of that jackpot game, the player cannot acquire any new reserved memories of the second special pattern that are advantageous to the player, so the lottery for the second special pattern is only performed for the number of reserved memories of the second special pattern that were secured during the time-saving state. Therefore, securing more reserved memories of the second special pattern during the time-saving state and scoring a V win is an advantageous game for the player.

However, in this eleventh embodiment, the first half period after the time-saving state is set is an unfavorable period in which it is difficult to secure reserved memory of the second special pattern, and the second half period is an advantageous period in which reserved memory of the second special pattern is easier to secure (easier to secure than in the unfavorable period). Therefore, when a small jackpot is won immediately after the time-saving state is set, the player can choose between playing a game that aims for a jackpot (V jackpot) immediately regardless of the number of reserved memories of the second special pattern, or playing a game that does not allow the game ball to enter a V prize until the favorable period (second half period) begins in order to secure reserved memory of the second special pattern, at the risk of not being able to place the game ball in a V prize during the time-saving state. Therefore, the game results after that can be greatly different depending on the game method selected by the player.

Furthermore, in this eleventh embodiment, in the latter half period (advantageous period) of the above-mentioned time-saving state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation selected is configured to be different depending on the reserved memory number of the second special symbol. And, the expected degree of acquisition of the reserved memory number of the second special symbol at the time of the end of the time-saving state is configured to be different depending on the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation selected. More specifically, if the reserved memory number of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4) at the timing when the second special symbol variation is executed on the ninth spin after the time-saving state is set, the reserved memory number of the second special symbol at the time of the end of the time-saving state is reduced, and if the reserved memory number of the second special symbol is a specific number (3) at the timing when the second special symbol variation is executed on the ninth spin after the time-saving state is set, the reserved memory number of the second special symbol at the time of the end of the time-saving state is likely to be increased.

In other words, by temporarily interrupting right-hand play and adjusting the reserved memory number of the second special symbol to a specific number that is not the upper limit number, it is possible to easily increase the reserved memory number of the second special symbol at the end of the time-saving state, rather than continuing right-hand play during the time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, the degree of advantage when the time-saving state ends, that is, the degree of advantage of the game to be played after the time-saving state ends when the time-saving state ends without a jackpot game being played, can be made different depending on the playing method played by the player during the time-saving state, so that the player can be motivated to play during the time-saving state.

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, when the time-saving state is set again after the end of a jackpot game that is executed based on the game ball entering a V during the time-saving state, the time-saving end condition (special pattern 1 time-saving end condition) that is established when a lottery for the first special pattern is executed once is set as the end condition for terminating the time-saving state (re-time-saving state), as the end condition for terminating the time-saving state (re-time-saving state), which will be established when a lottery for the first special pattern is executed once, is set. As shown in FIG. 253, the game method executed during the jackpot game (left-handed play) is configured so that the game ball can enter the first ball entrance 64, which is the trigger for the lottery for the first special pattern.

By configuring it in this way, if the game ball enters the V when the reserved memory of the second special symbol has not been secured during the time-saving state, even if the time-saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot game, the lottery for the first special symbol will be executed before the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, and the time-saving end condition for special symbol 1 will be met, and the time-saving state will end instantly.

On the other hand, if the game ball enters the V while the reserved memory of the second special symbol is secured during the time-saving state, when the time-saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in priority over the lottery for the first special symbol, making it more difficult for the special symbol 1 time-saving end condition to be met than when the time-saving state (re-time-saving state) is set without the reserved memory of the first special symbol being secured.

In addition, if the time-saving state is ended without a V winning during the time-saving state, with the reserved memory number of the second special symbol secured to the upper limit, a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state (a lottery based on the reserved memory secured during the time-saving state), and the time-saving state is set after the end of a big prize game (V win) executed based on the game ball winning a V during the small prize game, that is, if the time-saving state is set after the end of a big prize game executed during the normal state, the above-mentioned special symbol 1 time-saving end condition is not set.

In other words, in this eleventh embodiment, if a V hit is executed within a specified period after the time-saving state is set, it is configured to be more disadvantageous to the player than if a V hit is executed after the specified period has elapsed, and furthermore, it is configured to be more advantageous to the player to end the time-saving state with the reserved memory number of the second special pattern secured to the upper limit than if a V hit is executed within a specified period after the time-saving state is set.

By configuring it in this way, the game outcome can be significantly different depending on the playing method selected by the player during the time-saving state, which can increase the interest of the game.

<About the content of the performance in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 254 to FIG. 258, characteristic performance contents among the performance contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of this eleventh embodiment will be described. Specifically, the performance contents of the time-saving performance executed when the time-saving state is set will be described. Note that, in this eleventh embodiment, the performance contents of the time-saving performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above are different in that a performance mode based on the number of time-saving times (remaining number of time-saving times), the reserved memory number of the second special symbol (reserved ball number of special symbol 2), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation to be executed is set, and the rest are the same. The same performance modes (display modes) are assigned the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the degree of advantage of a game to be played later varies greatly depending on the content of the game played during the time-saving state, so that the player can be provided with the fun of choosing what game to play during the time-saving state, and the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a guidance effect can be executed to guide the player on a game method to increase the degree of advantage of the game to be played later. This makes it easier for the player to understand a game that aims to play a game that is advantageous to the player, depending on the presentation mode of the guidance effect to be executed. In addition, the skill to actually play a game according to the understood game content is tested, so that the player can be motivated to play.

In this eleventh embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment described above, when the time-saving state is set, a time-saving effect is executed in which a character 801 modeled after a boy collects keys. A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this eleventh embodiment, during the first half of the time-saving state (the period during which the first to sixth special symbol changes (second special symbol changes) are executed after the time-saving state is set), an extremely short change pattern (change time of 0.1 seconds) with an extremely short change time is selected, and the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 is difficult to increase. Although not shown in the figure, during this first half, a display mode (display mode displayed when the time-saving state is set) for explaining the contents of the effect during the time-saving state is continuously displayed. Then, when the first half of the time-saving state has passed and the second half of the time-saving state has begun (the period during which the seventh and subsequent special symbol changes are executed), various display modes are displayed to guide the player on the game method to be executed during the time-saving state.

Here, the display modes (effect contents) that may be displayed during the latter half of the time-saving state will be explained in detail. Figure 254(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode that is displayed when a middle fluctuation (10-second fluctuation) is executed as the seventh special pattern fluctuation (second special pattern fluctuation) since the time-saving state was set. As shown in Figure 254(a), in this eleventh embodiment, a time-saving effect (guidance effect) is executed in which some of the display modes are changed from the time-saving effect executed in the seventh embodiment described above (see Figure 181).

The example shown in FIG. 254(a) shows a display mode that can be displayed when the seventh second special pattern change is changing for 10 seconds and one special pattern 2 reserved ball is secured, and the words "3 times remaining" are displayed inside the display area HR6, indicating that there are three remaining time reductions. Four display areas HR1 to HR4 are formed to the right of the boy character 801. In these four display areas, each time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 and the reserved balls increase, an image of a key in a mode corresponding to the reserved ball is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 181(a), a display area HR5 is formed in the sub-display area Ds, displaying the words "Hit right to collect keys!!" These display modes allow the player to easily understand that keys are collected in the display areas HR1 to HR4 by hitting right.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 254(a), a "lock" icon, which is a display mode displayed corresponding to the special symbol 2 reserved ball, is displayed inside the display area HR4 as a display mode indicating that one reserved memory of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved ball) has been secured. After that, when the special symbol 2 reserved balls are secured up to the upper limit (4 balls) during the 10-second middle fluctuation, the display mode shown in FIG. 254(b) is displayed. FIG. 254(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content that is displayed when the special symbol 2 reserved balls are GET (secured) up to the upper limit (4 balls) during the 7th time-saving middle fluctuation (10-second fluctuation).

As shown in FIG. 254(b), when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 reaches the upper limit during the execution of the second special symbol variation, even if further right-hand play is performed, new reserved balls for special symbol 2 cannot be secured, so a display area HR5 is formed in the sub-display area Ds, displaying the words "GET 4 KEYS!! Take a break for a while". Then, in the display areas HR1 to HR4, a "key" icon is displayed in each area to indicate that the current number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is at the upper limit (4). In addition, the display mode of the guide display area Dm2, which displayed "right hand" in FIG. 254(a), is changed to a display mode that is difficult for the player to see, displaying "right hand". These display modes allow the player to easily understand that the reserved balls for special symbol 2 have been secured up to the upper limit, and also to easily understand that there is no need to execute further right-hand play.

In the example shown in FIG. 254(b), the "Right Hit" display in the guide display area Dm2 is made difficult to see, thereby informing the player that there is no need to play right-hand play. However, without being limited to this, for example, the size of the guide display area Dm2 may be reduced, "Right Hit" may be displayed in a display area other than the guide display area Dm2, or "Right Hit" may be notified in a display mode (for example, a mark display) that is more difficult for the player to understand than the text display "Right Hit". In this way, during the time-saving state in which right-hand play is mainly performed, the display is switched between a right-hand hit guide display (see FIG. 254(a)) that is easy for the player to understand and a display mode that is more difficult for the player to understand than the right-hand hit guide display, so that the player can understand that the current state is the time-saving state and can understand that there is no need to play right-hand play. In addition, the display mode for informing right-hand play itself may not be displayed (hidden).

Next, referring to FIG. 255, the content of the presentation displayed while the second special symbol variation of the 8th time reduction is being executed will be explained. FIG. 255(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display mode when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is a specific number (3 balls) during the 8th time reduction middle variation (10-second variation), and FIG. 255(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display mode when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is less (1 ball) than the specific number (3 balls) during the 8th time reduction middle variation (10-second variation).

The details will be described later, but in this eleventh embodiment, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 at the time when the second special pattern change for the eighth time reduction is stopped and displayed is a specific number (3 balls), a long-term change is likely to be selected as the second special pattern change for the tenth time reduction. Therefore, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 reaches the upper limit during the middle change for the seventh time reduction, a break display (see FIG. 255(a)) that continues the break display shown in FIG. 254(b) is displayed. On the other hand, if the upper limit of reserved balls for special chart 2 cannot be acquired during the second special pattern change for the seventh time reduction, a display mode of the second chance to acquire reserved balls for special chart 2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 255(b).

In FIG. 254(a), as a display mode for preventing the acquisition of new reserved balls for special symbol 2 during the execution of the current second special symbol variation, a display area HR5 is formed in which "Please wait a moment" is displayed in the main display area Dm and the words "Play break in progress" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. The word "STOP" is then displayed in the guidance display area Dm2 to inform the player that play should be interrupted. These display modes allow the player to easily understand that the current state does not allow the acquisition of new reserved balls for special symbol 2.

In addition, by hiding the display area HR1, which may display a "lock" icon corresponding to the fourth reserved ball for Special Chart 2 among the display areas HR1 to HR4 for showing the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2, it is possible to make the player believe that the current number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 (3 balls) is the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 that can be acquired, and visually make the player believe that they do not need to play with the right hand.

Furthermore, in the main display area Dm, the display area HR6 for indicating that the remaining number of time-saving times is "2 times" is formed smaller than the display area HR6 shown in FIG. 254(b). This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the number of time-saving times has been updated when the display content of the third pattern display device 81 transitions from the display mode shown in FIG. 254(b) to the display mode shown in FIG. 255(a). In addition, unlike the display example shown in FIG. 255(a), the display area HR6 may be hidden, or "remaining? times" may be displayed in the display area HR6. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of time-saving times, making it easier for the player to focus only on the performance content being executed. In addition, in this case, the display mode indicating the number of reserved balls of the special chart 2 displayed in the display areas HR1 to HR4 may be changed, and the display mode of the number corresponding to the reserved balls of the special chart 2 may not be displayed. This makes it difficult for players to grasp the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls in Special Chart 2, making it easier for them to focus only on the content of the performance being performed.

Figure 255 (b) shows a display screen in a state where a guidance effect is being executed to guide the player to insert game balls into the second ball entrance 6400 until the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 reaches three, and a display area HR5 is formed in the secondary display area Ds, displaying "Hit to the right to collect three keys! Four is not allowed!," and among the display areas HR1 to HR4, the display area HR1 corresponding to the fourth reserved ball in the special chart 2 displays the word "DANGER," visually informing the player that the fourth reserved ball in the special chart 2 is not to be acquired.

Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, when the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 reaches the upper limit during the execution of the second special pattern change of the seventh time reduction, or when the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 reaches three during the execution of the second special pattern change of the eighth time reduction, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 at the end of the time reduction state is likely to be the highest. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 reaches the upper limit (four balls) during the execution of the second special pattern change of the eighth time reduction, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 at the end of the time reduction state is likely to be the lowest.

As shown in Fig. 255(a) and (b), when a middle variation (10-second variation) is executed as the second special pattern variation of the eighth time reduction, the presentation content is varied according to the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 2 at the start of the variation, so that the player can be guided to a game method that is advantageous to the player. Also, as shown in Fig. 254(b), when the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 2 reaches the upper limit during the execution of the second special pattern variation of the seventh time reduction, a guidance mode for interrupting the right-hand play is displayed to the player from the second special pattern variation of the seventh time reduction, so that the number of game balls present in the right area at the start timing of the second special pattern variation of the eighth time reduction can be reduced compared to the case where the guidance for interrupting the right-hand play is executed from the start timing of the second special pattern variation of the eighth time reduction. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 2 to reach the upper limit (4 balls) during the execution of the second special pattern variation of the eighth time reduction.

Next, referring to FIG. 256, this is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content displayed while a long change (20-second change) is being executed at the 10th time of time reduction (final change of the time reduction state). In this embodiment, when the second special pattern change is executed at the 10th time of time reduction when the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 2 is two (the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 2 is one at the time when the second special pattern change of the 10th time of time reduction is started), a long change with a change time of 20 seconds is selected as the change pattern of the second special pattern change. Then, during the long change, an effect is executed to acquire the reserved balls of the special pattern 2 up to the upper limit. Furthermore, as the display mode of the guidance display area Dm2, a highlight display mode (shown by a double frame in the figure) that emphasizes and guides right-hand play more than other timings during the time reduction state is displayed.

256, the word "Last" is displayed in the display area HR6 to indicate that this is the final change in the time-saving state, and the secondary display area Ds displays the display area HR5 with the message "Hit to the right to collect treasure." The reserved balls for special symbol 2 acquired during this change are determined to be used in the second special symbol lottery that is executed after the time-saving state ends, that is, during the normal state, so a "treasure" icon is displayed in a different display mode from the display mode ("key" icon) shown in FIG. 254(a) to indicate the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2. In this way, by varying the display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, the player can be made to understand that the degree of advantage of the reserved balls for special symbol 2 that are stored in the reserved memory is different.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state. Specifically, the time-saving end condition is set to be less likely to be satisfied when the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends in the case where the jackpot game (V win) is executed based on winning a small jackpot in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, compared to the case where the jackpot game (V win) is executed based on winning a small jackpot in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state. Therefore, the display mode (treasure) showing the special symbol 2 reserved ball used during the normal state is a more visually valuable display mode than the display mode (key) showing the special symbol 2 reserved ball used during the time-saving state. In this way, by correlating the actual degree of advantage with the value indicated by the display mode, a game that is visually easy to understand can be provided to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 257, the display contents displayed when the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 during the time-saving state becomes a number of reserved balls that is disadvantageous to the player will be explained. FIG. 257(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 becomes the upper limit (4 balls) during the 8th time-saving middle fluctuation (10-second fluctuation). As described above with reference to FIG. 255(b), during the 8th time-saving middle fluctuation (10-second fluctuation), a performance in which three keys are accumulated is executed. Here, if the player makes a mistake in the right-hand play operation and accumulates four keys (the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 becomes four), as shown in FIG. 257(a), an icon 890 imitating a bomb is displayed in the center of the main control device 110, and in the display area HR6 showing the remaining number of time-saving times, "remaining? times" is displayed as a display mode that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of time-saving times. In addition, in the secondary display area Ds, a display area HR5 is formed that displays "Entering the DANGER Zone!!," indicating that the player has entered the "DANGER Zone," a presentation mode in which it is difficult for the player to know when the time-saving state will end and how many balls are currently reserved for the special chart 2.

As shown in FIG. 257(a), when the DANGER zone is set, the remaining number of time reductions and the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 are no longer displayed on the display surface. Details will be described later, but if the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 reaches the upper limit during the 8th time reduction of the special chart 2, the ultra-short change pattern (change time 0.1 seconds) is selected as the change pattern for the second special pattern change for the 9th and 10th time reductions, and it is configured so that new reserved balls for special chart 2 cannot (are difficult to) be acquired during the 10th time reduction of the second special pattern change. In this way, once the DANGER zone is set, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 at the end of the time reduction state is reduced, resulting in a disadvantageous state. By displaying such a display mode, it is possible to easily inform the player that the playing method executed was an incorrect playing method, and to motivate the player to play in the correct playing method in the next game.

In addition, in this eleventh embodiment, in order to create an unfavorable state that is disadvantageous to the player in the latter half of the time-saving state, an ultra-short fluctuation pattern (0.1 seconds) can be selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. And, by executing an ultra-short fluctuation pattern (0.1 seconds) as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, it is configured to make it difficult to obtain the special symbol 2 reserved ball during the fluctuation period of the second special symbol. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain the special symbol 2 reserved ball during the fluctuation period, but there is a problem in that it becomes difficult to notify the player of the lottery result of the second special symbol using only the ultra-short fluctuation time.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when a DANGER zone is set in the latter half of the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 257(a), an icon 890 resembling a bomb is displayed, and a situation in which it is not known when it will explode is displayed in advance. For example, as shown in FIG. 257(b), when a small prize is won in the second special pattern variation in which a super-short variation pattern is set, the icon 890 resembling a bomb is exploded, and the letter "V" 891 indicating a small prize is displayed. By configuring in this way, the lottery result of the second special pattern can be displayed simply by displaying the display mode in which the bomb is exploded from the state in which the icon 890 resembling a bomb is already displayed. Therefore, even in the case of the second special pattern variation in which the variation time is set to be short, the lottery result can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although not shown in the figure, if the lottery result of the second special pattern variation in which the ultra-short variation pattern is set is a miss, the icon 890 imitating a bomb is configured to continue to be displayed even if the second special pattern is stopped and displayed. This prevents the display mode (bomb icon) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to show the player that the lottery result of the second special pattern is a miss, so that it is possible to suppress the execution of bothersome effects. In addition, when the final variation of the time-saving state is stopped and displayed with the DANGER zone set, a display mode in which a bomb explodes is displayed as shown in FIG. 257(b), and a display mode indicating the number of reserved balls for the special pattern 2 that has been secured is displayed. By configuring in this way, when the DANGER zone is set, a display mode in which a bomb explodes is displayed at the end (when a small win or a big win is won, or when the time-saving state ends). This keeps the player interested in what display mode will be displayed when the bomb explodes (the display mode indicating a win, or the display mode indicating the end of the time-saving mode), allowing the player to enjoy the presentation until the very end.

The DANGER zone is set when it becomes difficult to secure many reserved balls for special chart 2 at the end of the time-saving state, so during this DANGER zone, if a small jackpot is won, it is more likely to be advantageous for the player to make the game ball enter a V. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 257(b), when a small jackpot is won during the DANGER zone, "Right hit" is highlighted in the guidance display area Dm2, and a display area HR5 is formed in the secondary display area Ds displaying "Aim for small jackpot V" as a display mode to encourage the player to play a game (right hit game) aiming for a V win.

As described above, in this embodiment, the number of reserved balls in Special Chart 2 and the number of remaining time-saving times are not displayed during the DANGER zone, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to display the number of reserved balls in Special Chart 2 and the number of remaining time-saving times in a display mode that is more difficult for the player to distinguish than the display mode normally displayed during the time-saving state (for example, see FIG. 254(a)). Also, the player may perform a specified operation on the operating means (frame button 22) to display a display mode that can specifically notify the number of reserved balls in Special Chart 2 and the number of remaining time-saving times, even during the DANGER zone.

Finally, referring to FIG. 258, the display contents displayed when a small jackpot is won in the time-saving state with 0 reserved balls for special chart 2 will be described. FIG. 258 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed when a small jackpot is won in the time-saving state with 0 reserved balls for special chart 2. As described above, in the present eleventh embodiment, when a V hit (big jackpot game) is executed in the time-saving state with 0 reserved balls for special chart 2, even if the time-saving state is set again after the end of the big jackpot game, the time-saving state is immediately ended by the execution of the first special pattern change. Therefore, when a small jackpot is won in the time-saving state with 0 reserved balls for special chart 2, the player is allowed to select whether to play a game aiming for a V win or to play a game aiming for the next small jackpot win while acquiring reserved balls for special chart 2 during the remaining time-saving period without aiming for a V win in the current small jackpot game.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 258, when the player wins a small jackpot in the time-saving state with the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 being 0, a display area HR7 in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape with the word "Choose" is formed at the bottom of the main display area Dm, a display area in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape with the words "I want to save keys" and "STOP" is formed in the left half of the sub-display area Ds, and a display area in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape with the words "I want to win big" and "Right hit" is formed in the right half. The guide display area Dm2 is not displayed in the guide display mode to indicate that the period is for the player to select a game method. Furthermore, an arrow image YG that resembles a right-facing arrow (i.e., an arrow pointing in the direction of the display area HR4) is displayed on the left side of the display area HR4. This arrow image YG allows the player to understand that the time-saving state is currently in effect. These display contents allow the player to choose between stopping the game (STOP), which ends the small win game without generating a V win, or playing right to generate a V win and start a big win, resulting in a novel gameplay experience that can increase the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, "STOP" is used as a guide to a game method to stop right-handed play, indicating that the game ball is to be stopped, but other game methods may be guided. For example, "left-handed play" may be guided as a game method in which the game ball cannot enter the V during a small win game. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is determined at the start of the small win game, and if it is 0, the display mode shown in FIG. 258 is displayed and the player is allowed to select a game method. In addition to this, for example, it may be configured to determine whether the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 has increased during the small win game (whether a game ball has entered the second ball entrance 6400 during the small win game), and the display mode during the small win game may be changed based on the result of the determination.

In this case, for example, if the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 reaches the upper limit during a small win game, it is most advantageous for the player to start a big win game by generating a V win in that state, so a display mode that forces a right-hit game to be played (for example, a display mode in which the large letters "Right Hit" are displayed as the most emphasized guide display mode in the center of the main display area Dm) can be displayed, and the letters "Super Chance" indicating that the most advantageous game will be played if a V win is generated now can be displayed in the secondary display area Ds. Also, if the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 increases within a range less than the upper limit, it can be configured to predict whether or not a V win should be generated during this small win game based on the increase amount and the number of remaining time reductions, and the emphasis level of the display mode that guides a right-hit game can be variably displayed based on the prediction result (for example, a variably displayed display in which the size of the display area guiding "Right Hit" gradually increases relative to the display area guiding "STOP"). By configuring it in this way, the display mode that corresponds to the change in the game situation during the small win game is executed during the small win game, so that the player can focus on the game during the small win game.

In this case, multiple types of small win games to be played when a small win is won may be set, and the length of the period during which the opening and closing door 6500f1 is closed during the small win game may be set to different lengths depending on the type of small win game to be set. By configuring in this way, the expectation of the game ball entering the second ball entrance 6400 during the small win game can be varied depending on the type of small win game to be played. In other words, as shown in FIG. 253, if the closing period of the opening and closing door 6500f1 is set long during the small win game played in the time-saving state, the game ball that has flowed down the right area by right-handed play can easily reach the through gate 67 or the second ball entrance 6400, making it easier to acquire the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 during the small win game.

Furthermore, among the multiple small win types, a small win game corresponding to a specific small win type is configured to be executed in such a way that an opening period of a first period (1 second) is set immediately after the small win game is executed, and then, after a closing period of 10 seconds, an opening period of a second period (0.5 seconds) is set, and a winning number ending condition in which the small win game ends when two game balls enter the V winning device 6500 is set as the ending condition of the small win game. In this case, if a right-hand hit game is continuously executed during a small win game, two or more game balls enter the V winning device 6500 during the first period and the small win game ends, whereas by interrupting the right-hand hit game during the first period, a closing period of 10 seconds is set, and a special chart 2 reserved ball is acquired during the closing period, and then a game ball can be entered into the V winning device 6500 during the second period. In other words, even during the execution of a small win game, the degree of advantage in the subsequent game can be changed according to the game method selected by the player.

When the specific small win type described above is provided, in order to make it difficult for the player to know whether the small win game being played this time corresponds to the specific small win type, for example, a small win type may be provided in which an opening period of a first period (1 second) is set, followed by a closing period of 0.2 seconds before the small win game ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from easily figuring out whether the small win game being played this time is a small win game for which the right-hit game should be interrupted based on the opening operation content of the small win game (the opening operation content from the time the small win game is played until a specified period has passed).

In addition, in this case, it may be configured to execute suggestive effects that can suggest to the player the type of small win game that will be executed (small win type) and guidance effects that guide the player on how to play during a small win game (continue hitting to the right, interrupt hitting to the right) during the small win game.

<Electrical configuration in eleventh embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in this eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 259 to FIG. 261. First, the special symbol 2 random number table 202ha2 in this eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 259(a). FIG. 259(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ha2 in this eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 259(a), the special symbol 2 random number table 202ha2 in this eleventh embodiment is different from the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 184(b)) in the seventh embodiment in that the range of the first winning random number counter C1, which is defined as the small winning judgment value, is different, and the rest is the same. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 259(a), the range of "10 to 259" is defined as the judgment value for winning the small winning in the lottery of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, the range of values that the first winning random number counter C1 can take is "0 to 999", so in this 11th embodiment, when the second special pattern lottery is executed, there is a probability of about 1/4 of winning a small prize.

Figure 259 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving granting table 202hb. This time-saving granting table 202hb differs from the above-mentioned time-saving granting table 202e (see Figure 186 (a)) in that the number of time-saving grants (time-saving end condition) set when the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving state has been changed, and in that the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends when the jackpot D11 is won during the time-saving state and when the jackpot E11 is won, but is otherwise the same. The same elements are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted. Also, some of the names of the jackpot types have been changed for the sake of convenience, but detailed explanations are omitted as the contents are essentially the same.

As shown in FIG. 259(b), when "jackpot A11" and "jackpot B11" are won, the number of time-saving awards is set to be the same as when "jackpot A7" and "jackpot B7" in the seventh embodiment described above are won, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, for "jackpot C11", if the game state when the jackpot game is executed is the normal state, "10 times" is specified as the number of times the time-saving bonus will be awarded, and if the game state when the jackpot game is executed is the normal state, "10 times" or "1 change of special pattern 1 (first special pattern)" is specified as the number of times the time-saving bonus will be awarded. In other words, when "jackpot C11" is determined, a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot ends, regardless of the game state. And, when "jackpot C11" is won during the time-saving state, if the special pattern changes 10 times or the first special pattern changes once during the time-saving state, the time-saving end condition is established and the time-saving state ends.

By configuring it in this way, if a V win occurs during the time-saving state, "jackpot C11" is set, and the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is 0, there is a high probability of winning a reserved ball for the first special symbol (reserved ball for special symbol 1) during the jackpot game in which left-hand play is executed, so after the jackpot game ends, a lottery for the first special symbol is executed with lower priority than the lottery for the second special symbol. Therefore, the time-saving end condition specified as "one change in special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" is met, and the time-saving state ends immediately.

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment described above, it is configured to determine whether the time-saving end condition is met at the time when the special pattern change is displayed as stopped (confirmed), but since it is configured to select an ultra-short change pattern (change time 0.1 seconds) as the change pattern of the first special pattern change on the first spin during the time-saving state, if a V win occurs during the time-saving state and "jackpot C11" is set and the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 is 0, the game result will be essentially the same as when the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, if a V win occurs during the time-saving state, "Big Win C11" is set, and the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is four, after the time-saving state is set, the drawing for the second special pattern is executed in priority over the drawing for the first special pattern, and by acquiring a new reserved ball for Special Chart 2 while the drawing for the second special pattern is executed four times, it is possible to make it easier for the time-saving end condition of "10 times" to be met than "1 change in Special Chart 1 (first special pattern)".

In this way, by varying the time-saving end conditions that are likely to be met depending on the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (number of reserved balls for special symbol 2) at the time the time-saving state is set, even if the game state at the time of winning and the set jackpot type are the same, the game state set after the jackpot game ends can be made substantially different, providing the player with an element of surprise.

The same number of time-saving times (time-saving end conditions) as the above-mentioned "jackpot C11" is set for "jackpot D11" and "jackpot E11", so detailed explanations are omitted. In addition, for "jackpot F11", the presence or absence of time-saving times is varied depending on the game state when the jackpot game is executed. Specifically, when the game state when the jackpot game is executed is a normal state, the number of time-saving times is specified to be "10 times". On the other hand, when the game state when the jackpot game is executed is a time-saving state, the number of time-saving times is specified to be "0 times", that is, the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, and the normal state is set. In this way, the game state set after the jackpot game ends can be configured to be switchable between the presence or absence of a time state based on the result of the combination of the set jackpot type and the game state when the jackpot type was set, so that a variety of variations can be provided when setting the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, the same number of time-saving awards (time-saving end conditions) is set for all of "jackpot C11", "jackpot D11", and "jackpot E11". However, this is not limited to this. For example, for "jackpot D11", it may be set to "10 times" or "3 times of change of special pattern 1 (first special pattern)". In the case where a V win occurs during the time-saving state and "jackpot D11" is set and the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 is 0, the time-saving state may be configured to end more difficultly than when "jackpot C11" is set. By configuring in this way, when a small jackpot is won during the time-saving state with 0 reserved balls for special pattern 2, it is possible to provide cases where it is better to win a V win or not to win a V win depending on the type of jackpot that is set. Therefore, it is more important to have the player decide which game to select when a small jackpot is won during the time-saving state with 0 reserved balls for special pattern 2.

In this case, it is advisable to configure the system so that a presentation is executed that suggests the type of jackpot that will be set this time. This will draw the player's attention to the presentation that is executed, enhancing the presentation effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 260 and FIG. 261, the difference between the variation pattern table 202d in this eleventh embodiment and the variation pattern table in the seventh embodiment described above will be described. First, referring to FIG. 260, the contents defined in the normal variation pattern table 202dh1 referred to during the normal state will be described. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern table 202dh1. As shown in FIG. 260, the normal variation pattern table 202dh1 is different from the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 23(a)) in the seventh embodiment (first embodiment) described above in that the variation pattern selected as the variation pattern of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is different, and the rest is the same. Specifically, in the second special symbol change that is executed during the normal state, regardless of the lottery result, a "short change" with a change time of 10 seconds is associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 179," and a "middle change" with a change time of 30 seconds is associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 in the range of "180 to 198."

In other words, the main case in which the second special symbol variation is executed when the normal state is set is when the normal state is set with the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 secured. In this state, as in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a dedicated performance (pull-back performance) is executed, so the variation pattern (variation time) of the selected second special symbol is fixed as much as possible. This makes it possible to specify in advance the performance period of the pull-back performance using the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 secured (maximum of four) when the normal state is set, and to easily execute (set) the pull-back performance as a series of performances spanning the variation periods of multiple second special symbols.

Next, referring to FIG. 261, the contents defined in the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202dh2 that is referenced when the time-saving state is set will be explained. FIG. 261 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202dh2. This time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202dh2 differs from the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 186(b)) in the seventh embodiment described above in that the fluctuation pattern selected for the first special symbol fluctuation executed in the first time saving and the fluctuation pattern selected for the second special symbol fluctuation have been changed, but otherwise is the same. A detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 261, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of time-saving fluctuations is "1", that is, when the special symbol 1 fluctuation is executed as the first time of the time-saving special symbol fluctuation, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range is associated with an ultra-short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds, regardless of the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1 or the lottery result. Therefore, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed on the first rotation of the time-saving state, the fluctuation ends in a very short time. And, when "one fluctuation of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" is set as the time-saving state end condition (time-saving end condition) (see FIG. 259 (b)), the time-saving state ends when the special symbol 1 fluctuation of the ultra-short fluctuation ends. As a result, even if the condition for setting the time-saving state is established after the end of the jackpot game, it can be said that the normal state has essentially been set.

In addition, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of time-saving variations is "2 or more", the same variation pattern as that in the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 186(b)) of the seventh embodiment described above is selected, so a detailed explanation of this is omitted.

Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the number of time-saving fluctuations is "1 to 6", regardless of the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 or the lottery result, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range is associated with an ultra-short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds. As a result, during the period until the number of time-saving fluctuations reaches 6 (the first half of the time-saving state), the special symbol 2 lottery is executed in a state in which it is difficult to increase the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2. Therefore, when a small jackpot is won during the first half of the time-saving state, it becomes easier to play a small jackpot without securing the reserved balls in the special symbol 2, and the display screen shown in FIG. 258 is displayed, and the player is asked to choose whether to aim for a V win or to play the second half of the time-saving state without winning a V win in the small jackpot game (stopping the small jackpot game).

Next, if the number of time-saving fluctuations is "7, 8" and the lottery result is a miss, regardless of the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2, a "super-short fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is specified in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 49", and a "middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 198". In other words, if the seventh time-saving fluctuation is a special chart 2 fluctuation, there is about a 3/4 probability that a middle fluctuation will be selected, and about a 1/4 probability that a super-short fluctuation will be selected. Also, if the lottery result is a "big win or small win", regardless of the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2, a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range.

If a mid-range variation is selected, the presentation mode for obtaining the reserved balls for special chart 2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 254(a). On the other hand, if an ultra-short variation is selected, the eighth time-saving variation is executed without displaying the presentation mode shown in FIG. 254(a).

In addition, even if the eighth time-saving variation is a special chart 2 variation, the variation pattern is selected with the same probability as the seventh time-saving variation described above, and the probability that the lottery results for both the seventh and eighth time-saving variations are negative and an ultra-short variation is selected is about 3.5%. Therefore, when a time-saving state is set, there is a probability of about 3.5% that a disappointing time-saving state will be set in which there is no chance to acquire special chart 2 reserved balls in the seventh and eighth time-saving variations.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is increased to the upper limit during the seventh time of the time-saving special chart 2 change, if a medium change is selected as the special chart 2 change for the eighth time of the time-saving special chart 2 change, the presentation mode shown in FIG. 255(a) will be displayed and a game method for suppressing the acquisition of new reserved balls for Special Chart 2 will be presented. In other words, if the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is increased to the upper limit during the seventh time of the time-saving special chart 2 change, it will be more advantageous for the player if the eighth time of the time-saving special chart 2 change is an ultra-short change, since it is less likely that new reserved balls for Special Chart 2 will be acquired by mistake during the eighth time of the time-saving special chart 2 change.

In addition, if the maximum number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 cannot be obtained during the 7th Special Chart 2 change (middle change) of the time reduction, or if an ultra-short change pattern is selected as the Special Chart 2 change for the 7th time reduction, the performance mode shown in FIG. 255(b) will be displayed if the 8th Special Chart 2 change for the time reduction is a middle change.

Finally, if the number of time-saving fluctuations is "9, 10" and the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "0, 2, 3", regardless of the lottery result, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198", i.e., the entire range is associated with an ultra-short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds, and if the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "1", regardless of the lottery result, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198", i.e., the entire range is associated with a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds. In other words, only when the number of time-saving fluctuations is "10", i.e., the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the last fluctuation in the time-saving state is "1", the last fluctuation in the time-saving state becomes a long fluctuation (20-second fluctuation), making it easier to end the time-saving state with the reserved balls in the special chart 2 acquired to the maximum.

In addition, even if the number of time-saving variations is "9", that is, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 when selecting the variation pattern one before the last variation of the time-saving state (the variation before the last), is "1", it is configured to be a long variation (20-second variation). In this case, the player can choose between playing a game in which the maximum number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is acquired in the variation before the last, ensuring that the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is three at the end of the time-saving state, or playing a game in which only one reserved ball for special chart 2 is acquired in the variation before the last, aiming for another long variation to be executed in the last variation.

In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, if right-hand play is continued during the period when the time-saving state is set, the number of reserved balls of special chart 2 that can be secured at the time the time-saving state ends is likely to decrease. Therefore, there was a risk that play would be performed during the time-saving state without securing the reserved balls of special chart 2. Therefore, if the ninth time-saving special chart 2 variation is performed without securing the reserved balls of special chart 2, an ultra-short variation is selected, and then, the tenth time-saving special chart 2 variation is also likely to select an ultra-short variation. This makes it possible to prevent intentional play from being performed without securing the reserved balls of special chart 2.

As described above, in this embodiment, the 0.1 second change time is set (selected) for a predetermined period of time after the time-saving state is set (while the second special symbol change with the time-saving change count of "1 to 6" is executed), regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery and the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 that have been acquired. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the time-saving change count is "1", that is, only for the first special symbol change (second special symbol change) after the time-saving state is set, a micro-short change pattern (change time 3 seconds) with a longer change time than the ultra-short change pattern (change time 0.1 seconds) described above may be selected.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when a jackpot game is played during the time-saving state, and the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is secured, and the time-saving state (re-time-saving state) is set again after the end of the jackpot game, that is, when the number of times the time-saving is granted (time-saving end condition) is set to "10 times" or "1 special symbol 1 change," the second special symbol change (special symbol 2 change) for the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 that has been acquired, which is executed in priority over the first special symbol change (special symbol 1 change), ends instantly, and it is possible to prevent the time-saving state from ending due to the execution of the special symbol 1 change.

In this case, the time of the first special symbol change (second special symbol change) after the time-saving state is set, that is, the time of the change specified as the slight change pattern, is set to a time longer than the change pattern (change time) of the normal symbol change executed during the time-saving state (during the high probability state of the normal symbol), and it is configured to make it easier to execute a normal symbol winning game during the time-saving state while the second special symbol change is being executed. This makes it easier to acquire a new special symbol reservation during the period from when the time-saving state is set to when the time-saving state ends. Furthermore, by making the first special symbol change (second special symbol change) after the time-saving state is set a slight change (for example, a 3-second change), there is a risk of acquiring multiple special symbol 2 reservations during the first time of the special symbol change (during the special symbol 2 change) of the time-saving number of times. Even when configured in this way, when the number of time-saving times is between "2" and "6", the second special symbol change is executed in an ultra-short change pattern, so even if multiple reserved memories are acquired during the first time-saving special symbol 2 change, when the number of time-saving times reaches "7", the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 that have already been acquired can be reduced (to 0).

Next, referring to FIG. 262, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 262 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 262, the RAM 223 of this eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 26 (b)) in that a special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b2, a winning performance setting flag 223ha, a second winning performance setting flag 223hb, a third winning performance setting flag 223hc, a MAX winning flag 223hd, a danger flag 223he, and a game waiting flag 223hf are added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b2 has the same content as the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223aa in the second embodiment described above, and is a counter for updating the reserved ball count of the second special pattern according to the content of the command when a command related to the second special pattern is received from the reserved ball count command sent from the main control unit 110, so a detailed explanation of it will be omitted.

The winning performance setting flag 223ha is a flag for indicating that the performance shown in FIG. 254(a) (first reserved winning performance) is being executed, and is set to ON when the first reserved winning performance is being executed, and is set to OFF when the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 reaches the upper limit (4 balls) during the first reserved winning performance and the first reserved winning performance ends. Specifically, in the first performance setting process (see S2988 in FIG. 272) executed in the performance setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271), if it is determined that the seventh time of the time reduction is a middle fluctuation (S9102: Yes in FIG. 272), it is set to ON (see S9105 in FIG. 272), and the setting status is referenced in the special chart 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266) executed in the winning information related process 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265) (see S8001 in FIG. 266).

And, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is four after winning (see S8002 in FIG. 266), it is set to OFF. Furthermore, it is also set to ON during the period in which the effect shown in FIG. 256 (final reserved acquisition effect) is being executed (see S9208 in FIG. 273). Also, it is set to OFF when the final fluctuation of the time-saving state is stopped and displayed while the acquisition effect setting flag 223ha is set to ON (when a jackpot game is executed during the time-saving state) (see S8204 in FIG. 270). In other words, when this acquisition effect setting flag 223ha is set to ON, it indicates that the increase in the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 until the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 reaches the upper limit is a period in which it is advantageous for the player.

The second acquisition effect set flag 223hb is a flag for indicating that the effect shown in FIG. 255 (b) (second reserved acquisition effect) is being executed, and is set to on when the second reserved acquisition effect is being executed, and is set to off when the number of reserved balls in special chart 2 reaches the upper limit (four balls) during the second reserved acquisition effect and the second reserved acquisition effect ends. Specifically, in the first effect setting process (see S2988 in FIG. 272) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271), if it is determined that the special chart change during the 8th time of the time reduction is a middle change (S9107 in FIG. 272: Yes), and if it is determined that the MAX acquisition flag 223hd described later is not set to ON (S9108 in FIG. 272: Yes), that is, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 cannot be acquired up to the upper limit (4 balls) during the special chart change during the 7th time of the time reduction, it is set to ON (see S9113 in FIG. 272), and the setting status is referenced in the special chart 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266) executed in the winning information related process 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265) (see S8008 in FIG. 266).

Then, various presentation modes are set according to the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 after winning (see S8013 to S8016 in FIG. 266), and when it is finally determined that the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 after winning is four (S8009 in FIG. 266: Yes), it is set to off (see S8012 in FIG. 266). In other words, when this second winning presentation setting flag 223hb is set to on, it indicates that the increase in the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 until the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 reaches three is a period in which it is advantageous for the player, and that when the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 reaches four, it is a period in which it is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, when the final change in the time-saving state is stopped and displayed while the second winning presentation setting flag 223hb is set to on (when a jackpot game is executed during the time-saving state), it is also set to off (see S8204 in FIG. 270).

The third acquisition performance setting flag 223hc is a flag for indicating that the performance (third reserved acquisition performance) executed when the special chart fluctuation of the 9th time of time reduction is a long fluctuation is being executed, and is set to ON when the third reserved acquisition performance is being executed, and is set to OFF when the number of reserved balls of the special chart 2 increases by one during the third reserved acquisition performance. Specifically, in the second performance setting process (see S2989 in FIG. 273) executed in the performance setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271), if it is determined that the special chart fluctuation of the 9th time of time reduction is a long fluctuation (S9202: Yes in FIG. 273), it is set to ON (see S9204 in FIG. 273), and the setting status is referenced in the pre-end period process (see S8021 in FIG. 267) executed in the special chart 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266) of the winning information related process 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265) (see S8101 in FIG. 267). And, if the third acquisition effect setting flag 223hc is set to ON (S8101: Yes in FIG. 267), that is, if the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 increases by one during the third reserved acquisition effect, it is set to OFF (see S8104 in FIG. 267). Also, if the final change in the time-saving state is stopped and displayed while the third acquisition effect setting flag 223hc is set to ON (if a jackpot game is executed during the time-saving state), it is also set to OFF (see S8204 in FIG. 270).

The MAX acquisition flag 223hd is a flag for indicating that the effect shown in FIG. 254(b) (MAX acquisition effect) is being executed, and is set to ON when the number of reserved balls on special chart 2 reaches the upper limit during the first reserved acquisition effect shown in FIG. 254(a) and a display mode indicating waiting to play (see FIG. 254(b)) is displayed, and is referenced when setting the effect mode corresponding to the special chart change for the 8th time reduction, and is set to OFF after the effect mode corresponding to the special chart change for the 8th time reduction is set (see S9110 in FIG. 272).

By providing this MAX acquisition flag 223hd, if the number of reserved balls on special chart 2 reaches the upper limit during the seventh special chart change during the time-saving period and a notification is issued to interrupt right-hand play, the notification can be displayed continuously across the eighth special chart change during the time-saving period.

The danger flag 223he is a flag for indicating that the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 has increased excessively during the time-saving state, and that a large number of reserved balls for special chart 2 cannot be secured at the end of the time-saving state. It is set to on when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 has reached four while the second reserved acquisition performance (see FIG. 255(b)) is being executed (S8009 in FIG. 266: Yes), or when it is determined that a new reserved ball for special chart 2 has been acquired while the waiting-for-play performance (see FIG. 255(a)) is being executed (S8017 in FIG. 266: Yes).

While this danger flag 223he is set to on, a danger effect (see FIG. 257(a)) is executed, and the remaining time until the time-saving state ends and the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 are displayed in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to understand. As described above, in the period before the time-saving state ends (the ninth time-saving state, the tenth time-saving state), when there are a number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 other than the appropriate number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 (one ball), the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202dh2 is specified so that the fluctuation time of the special chart 2 fluctuation is easily set to an ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 seconds). Therefore, by executing the danger effect, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable even if multiple special chart 2 fluctuations corresponding to the period before the time-saving state ends are consumed in a short period of time.

In addition, when the danger flag 223he is set to ON, it is difficult to secure a large number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 when the time-saving state ends, so when a small jackpot is won, a guide effect (see FIG. 257(b)) is executed to guide the player to a game in which the player wins a V prize. By configuring it in this way, even if the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 is low, if it is difficult to secure a large number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 within the remaining short time period, a guide effect (see FIG. 257(b)) that guides the player to win a V prize can be executed, rather than a selection effect (see FIG. 258) that allows the player to select whether or not to win a V prize, and it is possible to prevent the player from choosing an extremely disadvantageous game.

The waiting-for-play flag 223hf is a flag for indicating that the effect shown in FIG. 255(a) (waiting-for-play effect) is being executed, and is set to on when the number of reserved balls in special chart 2 reaches the upper limit (4 balls) during the first reserved acquisition effect (see FIG. 254(a)) executed during the special chart change for the 7th time of time reduction, and the effect shown in FIG. 254(b) (MAX acquisition effect) is executed, and the special chart change for the 8th time of time reduction is executed with a middle change (10-second change) (see S9111 in FIG. 272). Then, it is referenced (see S8017 in FIG. 266) in the special chart 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266), and the display mode is set when the waiting-for-play flag 223hf is set to on (S8017 in FIG. 266: Yes), i.e., when the waiting-for-play performance is being executed and a special chart 2 winning occurs (see S8018 in FIG. 266), and then it is set to off (see S8020 in FIG. 266).

As explained above, in the eleventh embodiment, in order to set various presentation modes to be executed during the time-saving state, various flags are set based on the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the special symbol changes), the number of reserved balls for the special symbol (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2), and the selected change pattern during the time-saving state, and a display mode is set to inform the player whether the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is in a state where it is acceptable to increase it or not, based on the setting status of the various flags. Furthermore, when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is in a state where it is acceptable to increase it, a display mode is set to inform the player of the range (tolerance) of the increase in the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 that is advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to inform the player of the optimal playing method to be executed during the time-saving state in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, referring to FIG. 263, the transition of the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 during the time-saving state in this eleventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 263 is a diagram showing the relationship between the remaining number of time-saving times, the reserved number of special chart 2 (number of reserved balls for special chart 2), and the change time of special chart 2 during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 263, in this embodiment, the time-saving state is divided into three periods: a normal time-saving period when the remaining number of time-saving times is 10 to 5 (1st to 6th time-saving times), a preparation period for the end of time-saving time when the remaining number of time-saving times is 4 or 3 (7th or 8th time-saving time), and a period before the end of time-saving time when the remaining number of time-saving times is 2 or 1 (9th or 10th time-saving time). The time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202dh2 is specified so that a different fluctuation time can be selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 fluctuation time) for each period.

In addition, when selecting the special chart 2 variation time in each period, the number of reserved special chart 2 balls is referenced, and a different special chart 2 variation time is selected according to the number of reserved special chart 2 balls that have been secured. Then, according to the length of the special chart 2 variation time selected for each period in the time-saving state, it is possible to present a state in which it is easy to acquire new reserved special chart 2 balls during the special chart 2 variation, and a state in which it is difficult to acquire them.

In addition, when a state in which it is easy to obtain the Special Chart 2 reserved ball appears (for example, during the execution of a Special Chart 2 variation in which a long variation time has been selected), the system is configured to provide cases in which obtaining the Special Chart 2 reserved ball will ultimately be advantageous to the player and cases in which it will be disadvantageous. By configuring it in this way, a player playing during the time-saving state can play while predicting whether or not the state is such that it is easy to obtain the Special Chart 2 reserved ball, and whether or not it is a good state to obtain the Special Chart 2 reserved ball, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this eleventh embodiment, various guidance effects (see Figures 254 to 258) are executed to guide the player on how to play during the time-saving state so that the pull-back game (lottery for the second special pattern based on the reserved special pattern 2 balls) that is executed after the time-saving state ends and the normal state is set is advantageous to the player, that is, so that the number of reserved special pattern 2 balls is increased at the time when the time-saving state ends. This makes it possible to inform the player of the game during the time-saving state in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in FIG. 263, during the normal time-saving period, the special pattern 2 variation is executed in an ultra-short variation pattern with a variation time of 0.1 seconds. This 0.1 seconds is a time shorter than the variation time of the normal pattern variation executed during the time-saving state, and in this embodiment, when one game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 in one game per normal pattern, the game per normal pattern ends, so during this normal time-saving period, the second special pattern lottery is executed without securing the number of reserved balls for the special pattern 2. Note that, during one game per normal pattern, multiple game balls may enter the second ball entrance 6400 in a row, but even in this case, multiple second special variations are executed in a short time, so that the game during the normal time-saving period is not executed while maintaining the number of reserved balls for the special pattern 2.

When the normal time-saving period has elapsed and the time-saving end preparation period has begun, there is a probability of about 3/4 that a medium variation (10-second variation) will be selected, and a probability of about 1/4 that a super-short variation (0.1 seconds) will be selected. If a medium variation is selected for the special chart 2 variation with 4 remaining time-saving times (7th time-saving time), an effect (save effect) that allows reserved balls to be saved, as shown in FIG. 254(a), is executed. If the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is saved to the upper limit (4 balls) during the execution of this save effect (special chart 2 reserved MAX), then the next special chart 2 variation (special chart variation with 3 remaining time-saving times (8th time-saving time)) will execute a waiting effect that does not allow new reserved balls for special chart 2, as shown in FIG. 255(a).

According to the presentation mode (guidance contents) during this waiting presentation, when the eighth time-saving special chart fluctuation ends without any new reserved special chart 2 balls being acquired, the game moves to the period before the time-saving end, during which a 0.1-second fluctuation is executed during the ninth time-saving period, and a 20-second long fluctuation is executed during the tenth time-saving period. During this long fluctuation during the tenth time-saving period, a presentation (see FIG. 258) is executed that encourages the player to acquire the maximum number of reserved special chart 2 balls. Therefore, the flow shown in FIG. 263(a) makes it easy to secure a large number of reserved special chart 2 balls when the time-saving state ends.

On the other hand, if the waiting effect is being executed during the 8th time of the special chart 2 change, and the player accidentally acquires a new special chart 2 reserved ball, or if the player is unable to acquire the maximum number of special chart 2 reserved balls during the save effect executed during the 7th time of the special chart 2 change, or if the ultra-short change pattern is selected as the 7th time of the special chart 2 change, during the 8th time of the special chart 2 change, a save effect (second save effect) is executed to save the special chart 2 reserved balls until the number of special chart 2 reserved balls shown in FIG. 255 (b) reaches a specific number (3). Then, if the number of special chart 2 reserved balls is set to 3 during this second save effect (if the number of special chart 2 reserved balls at the time the 8th time of the special chart change is 3), the effect for the period before the time reduction ends is executed in the same flow as FIG. 263 (a) described above.

In addition, if the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is increased to four during this second save-up performance (if the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is four when the eighth time-saving feature stops), as shown in FIG. 263(b), a super-short 0.1-second change will be executed for all Special Chart 2 changes executed during the ninth and tenth time-saving features, i.e., the period before the time-saving feature ends, resulting in a game flow with a low expected number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 at the end of the time-saving feature (the expected number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 at the end of the time-saving feature is approximately two).

Furthermore, if the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 becomes two during this second save-up performance (if the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is two when the eighth time-saving special chart change is stopped), a long change is executed as the ninth time-saving special chart 2 change. If the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is acquired up to the upper limit during the long change for the ninth time-saving, as shown in FIG. 263(c), a super-short change of 0.1 seconds is executed as the tenth time-saving special chart 2 change, so the expected number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 at the end of the time-saving state is medium (the expected number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 at the end of the time-saving state is about three).

Here, if only one reserved ball for Special Chart 2 is acquired during the long fluctuation of the 9th time of the time-saving feature, a long fluctuation will also be executed during the following Special Chart 2 fluctuation of the 10th time of the time-saving feature, so as with Fig. 263(a), it becomes easier to secure a large number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 at the end of the time-saving feature (Fig. 263(d)).

In addition, in the time-saving state, if a game is played in which the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is not intentionally accumulated, specifically, if a game is played in which a small number of game balls (one ball) is released by timing the opening of the electric device 6400a (stop shot), as shown in FIG. 263(e), the special chart 2 fluctuation is executed in an ultra-short fluctuation of 0.1 seconds even during the preparation period for the end of the time-saving state and the period before the end of the time-saving state, resulting in a game flow in which the expected number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 at the end of the time-saving state is the lowest (the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 at the end of the time-saving state will be about 0).

As explained above, in the eleventh embodiment, an unfavorable period (a period during which it is difficult to obtain reserved balls for special chart 2) can be set in the first half of the time-saving state, and an advantageous period (a period during which it is easy to obtain reserved balls for special chart 2) can be set in the second half. Therefore, it is easier to set a game situation that is favorable to the player when a jackpot game is played based on a small win won in the second half than when a jackpot game is played based on a small win won in the first half.

In addition, even during advantageous periods, the system is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to interrupt right-hitting play for a specified period (performing right-hitting play with a specified firing interval in between) than to continue playing right-hitting play. This provides a novel gameplay experience for players playing in a time-saving state, by allowing them to interrupt right-hitting play.

Furthermore, by acquiring a specific number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 that correspond to the number of remaining time-saving times (time-saving times), a pull-back game that is advantageous to the player can be executed as a pull-back game that is executed at the end of the time-saving time (end of the jackpot game), so that the timing of acquiring the reserved balls for the special chart 2 can be made interesting to the player, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, even if a player is unable to acquire the specific number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 that corresponds to the number of remaining time-saving times (time-saving times), the game is configured to provide another opportunity to acquire the specific number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 that corresponds to the number of remaining time-saving times (time-saving times), allowing the player to continue playing with enthusiasm until the time-saving time ends.

<Regarding control process of main control device in eleventh embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process of the main control device 110 in this eleventh embodiment will be described. In the main control device 110 of this eleventh embodiment, the same control process as that of the seventh embodiment described above is executed, and the difference is that the configuration of the data table (see FIG. 259 to FIG. 261) referenced in various processes is changed, and the operation contents of the small win game executed when a small win is won (the opening operation pattern of the opening and closing door 6500f1) are changed, but the rest are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the operation content during small win game in this embodiment (opening operation pattern of the opening and closing door 6500f1) will be explained. The opening pattern of the opening and closing door 6500f1 in this eleventh embodiment is configured so that the closing period during small win game is shorter than the opening pattern of the opening and closing door 6500f1 in the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 180), and is configured so that the game ball is less likely to flow downstream of the V winning device 6500 during small win game. Specifically, the small win game is executed in an opening pattern in which an opening operation, which is a set of a 0.1 second closing period and a 0.6 second opening period, is repeated three times after the start of the small win game.

The 0.1 seconds set as the closure period is shorter than the period required for a game ball to pass through the ball flow path formed on the top surface of the opening and closing door 6500f1 when it is in the closed state, so even if the game ball reaches the opening and closing door 6500f1 during the closed period of a small winning game, the opening and closing door 6500f1 will be in an open state before the game ball passes through the top surface of the opening and closing door 6500f1, and the game ball can enter the V winning device 6500.

It is also possible to provide multiple types of opening patterns for the small win game, and to vary the opening patterns to be executed depending on the type of small win set for the small win that is won and the game state at the time of winning. In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the V winning device 6500 during a small win game, the winning game ball passes through the V winning switch 6500e3, and the big win is started after the small win game ends. In other words, the big win is started if even one game ball enters the V winning device 6500 during a small win game. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is also possible to provide multiple paths in the V winning device 6500 and a distribution member that distributes the game ball flowing down the V winning device 6500 to one of the multiple paths described above, and to configure it so that the game ball can pass the V winning switch 6500e3 only when it flows down a specific path.

In this case, an opening pattern may be set in which the door 6500f1 is opened multiple times as a small prize game, and the game ball may pass through the V winning switch 6500e3 only at a specific opening among the multiple openings. By configuring in this way, when a small prize game is executed, a game in which the game ball enters the V winning device 6500 and only the prize ball is won, and a game in which the game ball enters the V winning device 6500 and both the prize ball and the big prize are won can be executed simply by switching the timing at which the game ball enters the V winning device 6500.

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, the small win game is executed in an open pattern that suppresses the game balls from flowing downstream of the V winning device 6500 during the small win game so that the number of reserved balls of the special chart 2 cannot increase during the small win game. However, without being limited to this, for example, when a specific small win game is executed, the closing period during which the opening and closing door 6500f1 is in a closed state during the small win game may be longer than other small win games. This makes it easier to increase the number of reserved balls of the special chart 2 during the small win game when a specific small win game is executed. Therefore, even if a small win game is executed with the number of reserved balls of the special chart 2 being 0, a chance to increase the number of reserved balls of the special chart 2 can be left, so that the player can play with anticipation until the end.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 264 to 273. In the eleventh embodiment, the command determination process (see S2113 in Fig. 56) is replaced with a command determination process 11 (see S2195 in Fig. 264), the winning information related process (see S2210 in Fig. 57) is replaced with a winning information related process 11 (see S2295 in Fig. 265), the winning related process (see S2212 in Fig. 57) is replaced with a winning related process 11 (see S2296 in Fig. 264), the performance setting process (see S2804 in Fig. 63) is replaced with a performance setting process 11 (see S2891 in Fig. 271), and the stop command process 11 (see S2291 in Fig. 270) is added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination process 11 (S2195) will be described with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 11 (S2195). This command determination process 11 (S2195) is a process executed in place of the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (see S2113 in FIG. 56), and differs from the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (see S2113 in FIG. 56) in that if it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), the winning information related process 11 is executed (S2295), if it is determined that a winning related command has been received (S2211: Yes), the winning related process 11 is executed (S2296), and if it is determined that a stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), the stop command process is executed (S2297). In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, compared to the first embodiment described above, the lottery right for the second special symbol can be reserved and stored, so when it is determined that a reserved ball count command has been received (S2207), a process is executed to store the information contained in the received reserved ball count command in the reserved ball count counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b2) corresponding to the special symbol type indicated by the received reserved ball count command. Since the rest of the process is the same, detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 265, the winning information related process 11 (S2295 in FIG. 265) executed in this eleventh embodiment will be described. This winning information related process 11 (S2295 in FIG. 265) is a process executed in place of the winning information related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 57, S2210), and when a winning information command for the second special symbol is received during the time-saving state, control is executed to change the presentation mode of various presentations being executed (see FIG. 254 to FIG. 258).

When the winning information related process 11 (S2295) is executed, first, the processes of S2301 and S2302 are executed, which are the same as the winning information related process in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 57, S2210). Then, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the time-saving state is not in progress (S2302: No), the processes of S2312 and S2311, which are the same as the winning information related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 57, S2210), are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the time-saving state (time-saving in progress) is in progress (S2302: Yes), it is then determined whether the winning information command received this time contains winning information for the second special symbol (S2395), and if it is determined that winning information for the second special symbol is included (S2395: Yes), special symbol 2 winning processing is executed (S2396), S2311 processing is executed, and this processing is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S2395 that winning information for the second special symbol is not included (only winning information for the first special symbol is included) (S2395: No), S2396 processing is skipped, S2311 processing is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 266, the special symbol 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266) executed in the winning information related process 11 (S2295 in FIG. 265) will be explained. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266). This special symbol 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266) is a process executed when winning information of the second special symbol is received during the time-saving state, and a process is executed to change the presentation mode of various currently running presentations (see FIG. 254 to FIG. 258) based on the acquisition of a new special symbol 2 reserved ball.

When the special symbol 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning performance setting flag 223ha is set to ON (S8001). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S8001: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 (the number of reserved memories for the second special symbol) has become 4 (the upper limit) by receiving the reserved ball number command corresponding to the winning information command received this time (S8002). In the process of S8002, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is 4 (the upper limit) (S8002: Yes), the display mode indicating reserved MAX is set (S8003), the display mode indicating waiting for play is set (S8004), the MAX winning flag 223hd is set to ON, and the winning performance setting flag 223ha is set to OFF (S8006), and the process proceeds to the process of S8022 described later, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8002 that the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is not 4 (the upper limit) (S8002: No), a display mode is set to indicate an increase in the reserved number (S8007), and the process proceeds to S8022.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8001 that the winning effect set flag 223ha is not set to on (S8001: No), then it is determined whether the second winning effect set flag 223hb is set to on (S8008), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S8008: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 (the number of reserved memories for the second special pattern) has become 4 (the upper limit) due to the reception of the reserved ball number command corresponding to the winning information command received this time (S8009).

If it is determined that the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 (the number of reserved memories for the second special symbol) is 4 (the upper limit) (S8009: Yes), a display mode indicating an excessive increase in the number of reserved balls is set (S8010), the danger flag 223he is set to ON (S8011), the second acquisition performance setting flag 223hb is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to S8022. If it is determined in the process of S8009 that the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 (the number of reserved memories for the second special symbol) is not 4 (the upper limit), it is next determined whether the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 (the number of reserved memories for the second special symbol) is 3 (a specific number) (S8013), and if it is determined that it is 3 (a specific number) (S8013: Yes), a display mode indicating an appropriate number of reserved balls is set (S8014), a display mode indicating waiting for play is set (S8015), and the process proceeds to S8022.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S8013 that the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 (the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern) is not 3 (a specific number), a display mode indicating an increase in the reserved number is set (S8016), and the process proceeds to S8022. In the process of S8008, if it is determined that the second acquisition performance setting flag 223hb is not set to on (S8008: No), it is determined whether the waiting for play flag 223hf is set to on (S8017), and if it is set to on (S8017: Yes), a display mode indicating an excessive increase in the reserved number is set (S8018), the danger flag 223he is set to on (S8019), the waiting for play flag 223hf is set to off (S8020), and the process proceeds to S8022.

If it is determined in the processing of S8017 that the game waiting flag 223hf is not set to ON (S8017: No), then the pre-termination period setting process is executed (S8021), and then the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S8022), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 267, the contents of the pre-end period processing (see S8021 in FIG. 267) executed in the special chart 2 winning processing (see S2396 in FIG. 266) will be described. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-end period processing (see S8021 in FIG. 267). When this pre-end period processing (see S8021 in FIG. 267) is executed, first, it is determined whether the third acquisition performance setting flag 223hc is set to on (S8101), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S7101: Yes), the display mode indicating the number of corrections pending is set (S8102), the display mode indicating waiting for play is set (S8103), the third acquisition performance setting flag 223hc is set to off, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the third acquisition performance setting flag 223hc is not set to on in the processing of S8101 (S8101: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the jackpot end process 11 (S2498) will be explained with reference to FIG. 268. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 11 (S2498). This jackpot end process 11 (S2498) is a control process executed in the hit-related process 11 (S2296 in FIG. 264) of the command determination process 11 (see S2195 in FIG. 264), and executes a process for setting the presentation mode at the end timing of the jackpot game.

When the jackpot end process 11 (S2498) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area (223f) is read (S2501), and based on the read information, it is determined whether the game state that will be set after the jackpot end is a time-saving state (S2502). Then, if it is determined that the game state is not a time-saving state (S2502: No), this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S2502 that the time-saving state is set (S2502: Yes), then it is determined whether there is a special symbol 2 reserved (reserved memory of the second special symbol) based on the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b2, that is, whether a special symbol 2 reserved ball is secured (S2591), and if it is determined that a special symbol 2 reserved ball is secured (S2591; Yes), a display command is set to indicate that the time-saving state will be set after the end of the jackpot game (S2592), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2591, if it is determined that the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 has not been secured (S2591: Yes), the special symbol 1 information of the next change stored in the winning information storage area 223a (winning information stored in the reserved area 1 of the first special symbol) is read (S2593), and it is determined whether the read special symbol 1 information contains winning information (information indicating a jackpot win) (S2594). Then, if it is determined that the winning information is not included (S2954: No), a display command is set to extend the display period of the jackpot end screen by 0.1 seconds (S2595), and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of S2594, if it is determined that there is winning information, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot will be won by the first special symbol change executed immediately after (S2594: Yes), a display command is set to show the jackpot consecutive win image (S2596), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the small win start command process 11 (S2491) will be explained with reference to FIG. 269. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small win start command process 11 (S2491). This small win start command process 11 (S2491) is a control process executed in the win-related process 11 (S2296 in FIG. 264) of the command determination process 11 (see S2195 in FIG. 264), and a process is executed to set the presentation mode at the start timing of the small win game.

When the small win start command process 11 (S2491) is executed, first, the information stored in the game status storage area (223f) is read (S3901), and based on the read information, it is determined whether the current game status is in the time-saving status (S3902). Then, if it is determined that the game status is not in the time-saving status (S3902: No), the start of the small win presentation is set (S3977), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S3902 that the time-saving state is active (S3902: Yes), it is determined whether the danger flag 223he is set to ON (S3991), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3991: Yes), a display mode is set to allow the game ball to enter a V-shaped area during the current small win game (to aim for a small win V) (S3994), and the process of S3997 is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3991 that the danger flag 223he is not set to ON (S3991: No), then the number of reserved balls (special pattern 2 reserved balls) stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b2 is read (S3992), and it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for the special pattern 2 is 4 (upper limit) (S3993). If it is determined in the process of S3993 that the number of reserved balls for the special pattern 2 is 4 (upper limit), that is, if a jackpot game is generated in this small jackpot game, and it is determined that the second special pattern lottery can be executed four times (upper limit) after the end of the jackpot game (S3993: Yes), a display mode for aiming for a small jackpot V is set (S3994), the process of S3997 is executed, and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the process of S3993, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is not 4 (S3993: No), it is then determined whether the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is 0 (S3995), and if it is determined that it is 0 (S3995: Yes), a display mode (see FIG. 258) is set to allow the player to select a game to be played during the small win (S3996), the process of S3997 is executed, and this process is terminated. In the process of S3995, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is not 0, that is, the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is 1 to 3 (S3995: No), the process of S3997 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of stop command process 11 (S2291) will be explained with reference to FIG. 270. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop command process 11 (S2291). This stop command process 11 (S2291) is executed when a stop command is received from the main control device 110 to indicate that the special pattern variation has been stopped, and a process is executed to set various presentation modes that are set based on the timing at which the special pattern variation is stopped.

When the stop command process 11 (S2291) is executed, first, the information stored in the game status storage area (223f) is read (S8201), and based on the read information, it is determined whether the current game status is in the time-saving status (S8202). If it is determined that the game status is not in the time-saving status (S8202: No), the stop display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the received stop command is set (S8211), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the process of S8202 determines that the time-saving state is in effect (S8202: Yes), it is then determined whether the current stop of fluctuation is the final fluctuation of the time-saving state (S8203). The determination in S8203 is based on the update information (number of time-saving times, number of remaining time-saving times) stored in the time-saving information update area 223g to determine whether the current stop of fluctuation is the final fluctuation of the time-saving state.

If it is determined that this is the final time-saving fluctuation (S8203: Yes), this is the time to end the time-saving state, so all of the various flags (acquisition effect set flag 223ha, second acquisition effect set flag 223hb, third acquisition effect set flag 223hc, MAX acquisition flag 223hd, danger flag 223he, game waiting flag 223hf) that were set to execute various effects during the time-saving state are set to OFF (S8204), and the process proceeds to S8205. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8203 that this is not the final time-saving fluctuation (S8203), it is next determined whether this fluctuation is a big win or a small win fluctuation (S8206), and if it is determined that this fluctuation is not a big win or a small win fluctuation (a miss fluctuation) (S8206: No), the process of S8211 is executed, and this process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S8206 that the current fluctuation is a big win or a small win fluctuation (S8206: Yes), the processing proceeds to S8205.

In the process of S8205, the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls for special symbol 2) stored in the reserved ball counter 223b2 for special symbol 2 is read (S8205), and it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is 4 (upper limit) (S8207). If it is determined in the process of S8207 that the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is 4 (upper limit), that is, if it is determined that the second special symbol lottery can be executed four times (upper limit) after the time-saving state ends (S8207: Yes), a display mode is set to indicate that an advantageous game advantageous to the player will be executed as the game after the time-saving state ends (pull-back game) (S8208), the process of S8211 is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S8207, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is not 4 (S8207: No), it is then determined whether the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is 0 (S8209). If it is determined that the number is 0 (S8209: Yes), a display mode is set to indicate that an unfavorable game that is disadvantageous to the player will be played (a pull-back game will not be played) as the game after the time-saving state ends (a pull-back game), S8211 is executed, and this process ends. In the process of S8209, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is not 0, that is, the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is 1 to 3 (S8209: No), S8211 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the effect setting process 11 (S2891) will be described with reference to FIG. 271. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 11 (S2891). This effect setting process 11 (S2891) is executed in place of the effect setting process of the first embodiment described above (see S2804 in FIG. 63), and executes a process for setting different effect modes depending on the number of times the special chart changes (time-saving times) in the time-saving state.

When the performance setting process 11 (S2891) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state (S2981), and if it is determined that it is not in the time-saving state (S2981: No), the variable display mode for the normal state corresponding to the lottery result is selected as the variable display mode (S2982), and this process is terminated. In the process of S2981, if it is determined that the current game state is in the time-saving state (S2981: Yes), it is determined whether the special pattern change executed this time is the second special pattern change (special pattern 2 change) (S2983), and if it is determined that it is not the special pattern 2 change (it is the first special pattern change) (S2983: No), the variable display mode for the special pattern 1 time-saving state corresponding to the lottery result is selected as the variable display mode (S2984), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2983 that it is a special pattern 2 change (S2983: yes), then it is determined whether this special pattern change is the 1st to 6th time of time reduction (special pattern 2 change executed in the first half of the time-saving state) (S2985), and if it is determined that it is the 1st to 6th time of time reduction (S2985: yes), the change display mode for the special pattern 2 time-saving state corresponding to the lottery result is selected as the change display mode (S2986), and this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S2983 that this is not the 1st to 6th special chart 2 change of the time reduction (S2983: No), then it is determined whether this special chart 2 change is the 7th or 8th time reduction (a special chart 2 change executed during the preparation period for the end of the time reduction during the latter half of the time reduction state) (S2987), and if it is determined that this special chart 2 change is the 7th or 8th time reduction (a special chart 2 change executed during the preparation period for the end of the time reduction during the latter half of the time reduction state) (S2987: Yes), the first performance setting process is executed (S2988), the process of S2986 is executed, and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S2987 that the current Special Chart 2 change is not the 7th or 8th time of time reduction (a Special Chart 2 change executed during the preparation period for the end of the time reduction during the latter half of the time-saving state), that is, if it is determined that the current Special Chart 2 change is the 9th or 10th time of time reduction (a Special Chart 2 change executed during the period before the end of the time-saving state during the latter half of the time-saving state) (S2987: No), the second performance setting process is executed (S2989), the processing of S2986 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 272, the contents of the first effect setting process (S2988) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271) will be explained. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first effect setting process (S2988). This first effect setting process (S2988) executes processing to set the effect mode for the special chart 2 variation executed during the seventh or eighth time of time saving (the preparation period for the end of the time saving during the latter half of the time saving state).

When the first effect setting process (S2988) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current special chart 2 change is a special chart change of the 7th time-saving spin (S9101), and if it is determined that it is a special chart change of the 7th time-saving spin (S9101: Yes), it is determined whether the selected change pattern is a middle change (S9102). Then, if it is determined that it is not a middle change (it is a super short change pattern) (S9102: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a middle change in the process of S9102 (S9102: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of special chart 2 is 4 (upper limit number) (S9103), and if it is determined that it is not 4 (upper limit number) (S9103: No), a performance mode that encourages the acquisition of reserved special chart 2 is set (S9104), the acquisition effect setting flag 223ha is set to on (S9105), and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of S9103, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is not 4 (the upper limit) (S9103: No), the process of S9104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S9105.

In the process of S9101, if it is determined that the current special chart 2 change is not the special chart change of the 7th spin of the time reduction (S9101: No), then it is determined whether the current special chart 2 change is the special chart change of the 8th spin of the time reduction (S9106), and if it is determined that the current special chart 2 change is the special chart change of the 8th spin of the time reduction (S9106: Yes), it is determined whether the selected change pattern is a middle change (S9107). Then, if it is determined that it is not a middle change (it is an ultra-short change pattern) (S9107: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 9107 that the selected fluctuation pattern is a middle fluctuation (S9107: Yes), it is then determined whether the MAX acquisition flag 223hd is set to ON (S9108). If it is determined that the MAX acquisition flag 223hd is not set to ON (S9108: No), a presentation mode is set that prompts the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 to be set to 3 (S9112), the second acquisition presentation set flag 223hb is set to ON (S9113), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S9108 that the MAX acquisition flag 223hd is set to ON (S9108: Yes), the presentation mode to indicate a waiting state is set (S9109), the MAX acquisition flag 223hd is set to OFF (S9110), the waiting state flag 223hf is set to ON (S9111), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 273, the contents of the second effect setting process (S2989) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271) will be explained. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second effect setting process (S2989). This second effect setting process (S2989) executes processing to set the effect mode for the special chart 2 variation executed during the 9th or 10th time of the time-saving (the period before the end of the time-saving state during the latter half of the time-saving state).

When the second effect setting process (S2989) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current special chart 2 change is a special chart change of the 9th time-saving spin (S9201), and if it is determined that it is a special chart change of the 9th time-saving spin (S9201: Yes), it is determined whether the selected change pattern is a long change (S9202). Then, if it is determined that it is not a long change (it is an ultra-short change pattern) (S9202: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a long change in the process of S9202 (S9202: Yes), then a performance mode that encourages an increase of only one reserved special chart 2 is set (S9203), the second acquisition effect setting flag 223hc is set to ON (S9204), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9201, if it is determined that the current special chart 2 change is not the special chart change of the 9th spin of the time-saving feature (S9201: No), then it is determined whether the current special chart 2 change is the special chart change of the 10th spin of the time-saving feature (last change) (S9205), and if it is determined that the current special chart 2 change is the special chart change of the 10th spin of the time-saving feature (last change) (S9205: Yes), it is determined whether the selected change pattern is a long change (S9206). Then, if it is determined that it is not a long change (it is an ultra-short change pattern) (S9206: No), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of S9206 that the fluctuation is long (S9206: Yes), a presentation mode that encourages the acquisition of reserved special chart 2 is set (S9207), the acquisition presentation setting flag 223ha is set to on (S9208), and this processing ends.

As explained above, in this eleventh embodiment, as a period during which a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, at least an unfavorable period during which a specific condition (obtaining a reserved special chart 2) is unlikely to be met is set before an advantageous period during which a specific condition is likely to be met, so that it is more advantageous for the player if a jackpot game is played after an advantageous period is set than if the jackpot game is played before the advantageous period in the time-saving state is set.

In addition, it is configured so that a jackpot game can be executed by making the game ball enter the V during a small jackpot game, which is executed if a small jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, which is executed mainly (given priority) during the time-saving state. In other words, it is configured so that the player can select when to execute the jackpot game during the time-saving state, and whether or not to make the game ball enter the V during the small jackpot game.

By configuring it in this way, when a small win game is executed during an unfavorable period in the time-saving state, the player can be given the choice of playing a game in which the game ball enters the V-winning zone even in the case of a small win game executed during an unfavorable period in order to ensure that a big win game is executed during the time-saving state, or playing a game in which the game ball does not enter the V-winning zone in order to execute a big win game after the advantageous period is set, providing a new gameplay experience.

In this embodiment, when the time-saving state is set, a predetermined disadvantageous period and an advantageous period are always set, but this is not limited to the above. For example, depending on the type of jackpot type set for the jackpot game that triggers the setting of the time-saving state and the game state at the time of winning, it may be possible to set a time-saving state in which only an disadvantageous period is set or a time-saving state in which only an advantageous period is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving state is formed by one unfavorable period (the special chart change period from the 1st to 6th time-saving times) and one favorable period (the special chart change period from the 7th to 10th time-saving times), but this is not limited to this, and the unfavorable periods and favorable periods may be set alternately. Furthermore, in the case where the time-saving state is set without being triggered by a jackpot win, for example, the game state may be configured to be variable for both the probability state of the normal pattern and the probability state of the special pattern, and four game states may be set, including a normal state (low probability state of the special pattern, low probability state of the normal pattern), a time-saving state (low probability state of the special pattern, high probability state of the normal pattern), a probability-changing state (high probability state of the special pattern, high probability state of the normal pattern), and a potential state (high probability state of the special pattern, low probability state of the normal pattern), and the time-saving state may be configured to be variable between the case where the time-saving state is set based on the establishment of a fall condition that transitions (falls) the high probability state of the special pattern to a low probability state when the probability-changing state is set, and the case where the time-saving state is set triggered by a jackpot win.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, during the advantageous period of the time-saving state, a first state in which it is easier to obtain the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 and a second state in which it is harder to obtain the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 than in the first state can be set, and the first state in which it is easier to obtain the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 and the second state in which it is harder to obtain the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 than in the first state can be variably set based on the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 at the time when the special chart 2 change is executed during the advantageous period.

This allows the ease of acquiring reserved balls for Special 2 during the time-saving state (the number of reserved balls for Special 2 at the end of the time-saving state) to be varied based on the game results of when and how many reserved balls for Special 2 are acquired during the time-saving state (advantageous period), providing players with an innovative gameplay that includes a new element of the timing of acquiring reserved balls for Special 2.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the first and second states are configured to be set by a specific setting method that is determined in advance. However, without being limited to this, for example, the setting method (setting conditions) for the first and second states may be made different depending on the type of jackpot type set for the jackpot game that triggers the setting of the time-saving state and the game state at the time of winning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when and based on which game method to play, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first and second states are set based on the results of one special pattern drawing (second special pattern drawing) and the variation pattern of one selected special pattern variation (special pattern 2 variation), but this is not limited to this, and the first and second states may be set by, for example, determining the results of special pattern drawing performed (set) within a specified period (for example, within the period until five special pattern variations have been performed) and the variation pattern of the selected special pattern in a combined manner. Furthermore, an operating means that can be operated by the player may be provided, and the first and second states may be set based on the operation of the player on the operating means.

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, a guide effect that is helpful when the player selects a game method during the time-saving state can be executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of a time-saving game that is excessively disadvantageous to the player. In this embodiment, when the time for the player to select a game method arrives, a guide effect is executed using the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, but this is not limited to this, and a guide effect that only informs the player that it is the period for selecting a game method may be executed, or a multiple options may be displayed as options that the player can select, but it may be configured to notify the player in a way that makes it difficult for him to understand which game method is the game method that is advantageous to the player. In addition, a suggestion effect may be executed to suggest whether the game method selected this time is the correct game method when the player plays the game method selected by the player.

In addition, in this eleventh embodiment, the presentation mode of the various information effects described above with reference to Figures 254 to 258 is changed at the timing when the special pattern starts to change or when a winning command for the second special pattern is received, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the presentation mode of the information effect may be configured at the timing when the previous change stops. In other words, if the information effect displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is viewed and then a game is played in a game method corresponding to the presentation mode of the information effect, the presentation mode of the information effect may be changed at any timing as long as the game can be played in an appropriate game method.

Furthermore, it may be configured to display a plurality of appropriate game methods set for various game patterns (patterns combining the number of time-saving times and the number of reserved balls for special chart 2) that may occur during the time-saving state, and to select and execute the appropriate game method after the player has determined the current game pattern. In this case, it is preferable to display a first notification mode (for example, a mode in which the number of time-saving times and the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 are displayed numerically) that can easily notify the player of the currently executed game pattern, and a second notification mode (for example, a mode in which only one of the number of time-saving times and the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is displayed numerically, or a mode in which a mark corresponding to the number of time-saving times or the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is displayed) that is more difficult for the player to understand than the first notification mode, and to determine the notification mode to be displayed based on the established display condition (for example, a condition that is established according to the result of the player's operation of the frame button 22, or a condition that is established based on the result of the lottery for the special pattern). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a new enjoyment of having the player predict the current game pattern.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, during a period (advantageous period) in which the time-saving state is set and the special 2 reserved balls can be easily acquired, a first period in which it is likely to be advantageous for the player if the player acquires the upper limit of the special 2 reserved balls, a second period in which it is likely to be advantageous for the player if the player acquires a specific number (e.g., three) of special 2 reserved balls as the upper limit, and a third period in which it is likely to be advantageous for the player if the player acquires only one special 2 reserved ball are set. This allows the player to play to increase the number of special 2 reserved balls to any number, rather than increasing the number of special 2 reserved balls unnecessarily, even during a period in which an advantageous period is set, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, since there is only one data table to be referenced when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol during the time-saving state, the setting rules for the first period, second period, and third period described above are fixed, but this is not limited thereto. For example, it is also possible to provide multiple data tables to be referenced when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol during the time-saving state, and to provide multiple setting rules for the first period, second period, and third period described above.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned first period, second period, and third period are set for each execution period of the second special pattern change that is executed, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the above-mentioned first period, second period, and third period may be set across multiple special pattern changes, or the above-mentioned first period, second period, and third period may be set based on the elapsed time since the time-saving state was set.

In the above-mentioned eleventh embodiment, when the time-saving state is set, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to notify the remaining number of time-saving times, but it may be configured not to display the remaining number of time-saving times, or to display the remaining number of time-saving times abstractly. By configuring it in this way, even if an ultra-short fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern 2 fluctuation during the time-saving state, the display of the remaining number of time-saving times will not decrease rapidly, so it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation that gives a strange feeling to the player.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, when a special symbol change (special symbol 2 change) is executed, the presentation mode of the guidance presentation is set based on the selected change pattern, but this is not limited to this. For example, the selected change pattern and lottery result may be determined in advance based on the information (preview information) included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110, and the presentation mode may be set based on the result of the advance determination. As a result, for example, when a special symbol lottery in which an ultra-short change pattern is selected is won, the presentation mode for indicating the winning to the player can be set using the change period of the special symbol change (special symbol 2 change) executed before the special symbol change (special symbol 2 change) in addition to the ultra-short change (0.1 seconds) period, so that a presentation that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In the eleventh embodiment, various guide effects are always executed during the time-saving state to guide the player to the game method during the time-saving state to execute the advantageous pull-back game (the second special symbol lottery during the normal state) that is executed after the time-saving state ends. However, without being limited to this, for example, the above-mentioned various guide effects may be executed only when a specific execution condition is met during the time-saving state. In this case, for example, when a special symbol change is executed during the preparation period for the end of the time-saving state corresponding to the seventh or eighth time-saving state, an initial effect is executed in which it is difficult for the player to determine whether it is better to newly acquire the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2, and depending on the game method executed while the initial effect is being executed, the initial effect being executed may be changed to the above-mentioned guide effect. Specifically, it is preferable to configure the guide effect to be executed when the length of the period from the execution of the initial effect to the acquisition of the new number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is longer than a predetermined period.

By configuring it in this way, the ease of executing the guidance effect can be varied depending on the play method during the time-saving state (the interval between launching game balls when playing with the right hand), which further increases the enjoyment of allowing the player to select a play method during the time-saving state.

In addition, in this 11th embodiment, the play method during the time-saving state (whether or not right-hand play is performed) is configured to be set for each special pattern change (special pattern 2 change) executed during the time-saving state, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to be set for multiple special pattern changes (special pattern 2 changes), or the play method may be set so that for one special pattern change (special pattern 2 change), right-hand play is encouraged in the first half period and right-hand play is prohibited in the second half period.

<Regarding modified examples of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the performance executed during the time-saving state of the pachinko machine 10 of the 11th embodiment will be described based on the flow shown in the above-mentioned Figure 263. In the above-mentioned 11th embodiment, as a performance executed during the time-saving state, a save performance (for example, see Figure 254 (a)) is executed to newly acquire a specific number of special chart 2 reserved balls based on the time-saving fluctuation number and the number of special chart 2 reserved balls, and when a specific number of special chart 2 reserved balls are newly acquired during the save performance, a standby performance (for example, see Figure 254 (b)) is executed to prevent further acquisition of special chart 2 reserved balls for a predetermined period of time.

More specifically, the above-mentioned "save" effect is configured to be executed when the special pattern change (special pattern 2 change) is executed, the change time of the special pattern 2 change executed this time is a change pattern of a predetermined time or more (for example, 10 seconds), and it is advantageous for the player to have more special pattern 2 reserved balls than the currently acquired number of special pattern 2 reserved balls. When the "save" effect is executed, if a new special pattern 2 reserved ball is acquired, it is determined whether the number of special pattern 2 reserved balls acquired after acquisition is the number of special pattern 2 reserved balls that is advantageous to the player, and if it is determined that the number of special pattern 2 reserved balls is advantageous to the player, a waiting effect is executed to prevent the acquisition of new special pattern 2 reserved balls until the final change of the time-saving state is executed. Furthermore, when a new special pattern 2 reserved ball is acquired while the waiting effect is executed, it is determined that an excessive number of special pattern 2 reserved balls have been acquired, and a DANGER effect is executed to indicate that the current time-saving state is disadvantageous to the player.

The above-mentioned standby effect or DANGER effect is configured to continue to be executed until the time-saving state ends, and a pull-back effect is executed that corresponds to the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state based on the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 that have been acquired at the time the time-saving state ends.

In contrast to this, this modified version of the presentation is configured to read ahead (pre-determine) the winning information contained in the acquired Special Chart 2 reserved ball when the Special Chart 2 reserved ball is acquired, and to execute a presentation based on the pre-determined result. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a presentation that corresponds to the lottery result (pre-determined result) of the Special Chart 2 lottery that is executed during the standby presentation.

Next, the contents of the effect of this modified effect will be explained. First, the contents of the effect executed in accordance with the flow of FIG. 263(a) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 263(a), when a middle change (10-second change) is set (selected) as the special chart 2 change for the 7th time of time reduction (4 remaining time reductions), a guide effect (save effect) is executed to accumulate the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 up to the upper limit (4 balls), the same as in the 11th embodiment described above.

Then, the guidance effect (save effect) is executed until the seventh time of the time-saving special chart 2 variation is stopped or the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 reaches the upper limit. Here, if the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 reaches the upper limit, a waiting effect is executed for a predetermined period. In this modified effect, an effect is executed in which the player actively removes his/her hand from the operation handle 51 as a waiting effect. Specifically, as an effect (touch effect) in which the player simultaneously touches multiple decorative members provided on the pachinko machine 10, specifically multiple decorative members provided at positions spaced apart by a larger distance than the size of a human palm, a touch effect is executed in which the words "keep touching the decorative members" and an icon imitating the decorative members that the player is to touch are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

The decorative member described above is provided with a detection means (touch sensor) capable of detecting a player's touch, and is configured to execute an operation performance in which the performance mode is changed according to the detection result of the detection means during the period in which the above-mentioned touch performance is being executed. Specifically, as the performance mode of the operation performance, an initial display mode is displayed first, and then the performance mode of the operation performance is changed based on the length of the period in which the detection means detects the player's operation and the results of the look-ahead for the special chart 2 reserved balls that have already been acquired.

In this case, if it is determined that there is a specific pre-read result (jackpot) as a pre-read result, and if it is determined that the player has touched multiple decorative members for a predetermined period of time or more, the player is notified before the special chart 2 variation corresponding to that pre-read result is executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player actively touch the decorative members for a predetermined period of time or more in order to quickly grasp the result of the game to be executed later (the game result corresponding to the reserved special chart 2 stored in the reserved memory). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to operate the operating handle 51 while the waiting performance is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player acquires an excessive number of reserved special chart 2 balls during the waiting performance.

In addition, in this modified performance, if a reserved ball for the special chart 2 is acquired during the 7th time of the time-saving special chart 2 change, the change pattern (change time) of the next special chart 2 change (the 8th time of the time-saving special chart 2 change) is predicted (pre-determined) to be an ultra-short change pattern (change time 0.1 seconds) or a middle change (change time 10 seconds). For example, if the 8th time of the time-saving special chart 2 change is 0.1 seconds, a waiting performance is executed for a first period (e.g., 5 seconds) after the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 reaches the upper limit, and if the 8th time of the time-saving special chart 2 change is 10 seconds, a waiting performance is executed for a second period (e.g., 15 seconds) after the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 reaches the upper limit. The period set as the execution period of the waiting performance may be any length that overlaps with the final change period of the time-saving state when the upper limit number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 is reached in the shortest period during the 7th time of the time-saving special chart 2 change.

In this way, by predicting the pattern of the special pattern 2 change that will be executed later and setting the performance period of the standby performance that will be executed based on the result of the prediction, it is no longer necessary to set the standby performance every time a special pattern change (special pattern 2 change) that is executed within the target period of the standby performance is executed, thereby reducing the processing load related to the performance setting.

In addition, by executing the standby effect for a predetermined period, for example, if the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 reaches the upper limit early during the seventh time of the time-saving state, the timing of the end of the standby effect can be made earlier than if the upper limit could not be reached early. Therefore, the timing of the execution of the save effect (see FIG. 256) executed during the final change of the time-saving state can be made earlier, and the game of acquiring the maximum number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 during the final change of the time-saving state can be executed with plenty of time.

Furthermore, for example, if the maximum number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 are acquired during the seventh time of the time-saving state, and it is determined in advance as a result of the pre-reading that the winning information corresponding to the last acquired reserved ball for Special Chart 2 contains winning information (small win, big win), a special waiting effect different from the normal waiting effect is executed. Specifically, as a result of the above-mentioned touch effect and operation effect, an effect is executed that notifies the player in advance that the most advantageous game will be executed after the time-saving state ends.

In other words, when the maximum number of special chart 2 reserved balls is acquired during the seventh time of the time-saving special chart 2 change, the last acquired special chart 2 reserved ball becomes the special chart 2 reserved ball used in the second special pattern lottery that is executed next when the time-saving state ends, that is, the first special pattern lottery that is executed after the time-saving state transitions to the normal state. In other words, when the special waiting effect is executed, the player can know in advance that the most advantageous game for the player, that is, winning the second special pattern lottery during the normal state, will be executed. Therefore, the player will be eager to execute the touch effect while expecting the special waiting effect to be executed, so that the player can be eagerly engaged in the game, and by participating in the touch effect, it is easier to release the hand from the operation handle 51, so that the occurrence of a situation in which a new special chart 2 reserved ball is acquired during the period when the waiting effect is executed can be suppressed.

For example, if it is determined in advance that a small win will be won during the special chart 2 change during the standby effect, specifically, during the game flow shown in FIG. 263(a), a special selection effect is executed instead of the standby effect. In this special selection effect, an effect is executed in which the player, as shown in FIG. 258, can choose whether to play a game aiming for a V win during the small win game or to play a game not aiming for a V win during the small win game. The presentation mode of this special selection presentation is configured so that different presentation modes are set based on the results of pre-determination for the special chart 2 reserved balls other than the special chart 2 reserved ball corresponding to the 9th time-saving special chart 2 change. For example, if the number of special chart 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit during the 7th time-saving special chart 2 change, and the pre-determination result for the last acquired special chart 2 reserved ball is a win (small win), a special selection presentation mode is set indicating that it is advantageous not to aim for a V prize during the small win game based on the small win won in the 9th time-saving special chart 2 change, and if there is no pre-determination result indicating a win in the pre-determination results for other special chart 2 reserved balls, a special selection presentation mode is set to allow the player to arbitrarily select which game to play. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from selecting an excessively disadvantageous game, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from selecting an unfavorable game and losing their desire to play.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 11th embodiment, when an excessive number of reserved balls for special chart 2 are acquired, the remaining period (remaining short period of time) of the time-saving state is used to execute the DANGER effect, as shown in FIG. 257. Then, when the time-saving state ends, the DANGER effect is terminated, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 that have been secured is notified, and the pull-back effect is executed.

In contrast, in this modified effect, if an excessive number of special reserved balls of the special symbol 2 are acquired, a DANGER effect is executed using the period of change of the second special symbol (the second special symbol change using the special reserved balls of the special symbol 2 acquired during the time-saving state) that is executed after the normal state is set. In other words, the timing of the end of the DANGER effect is made different from that of the eleventh embodiment described above. As a result, when the DANGER effect ends, a game is executed in which the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. By configuring it in this way, when the DANGER effect is executed, it is difficult to be given an opportunity to acquire a large number of special reserved balls of the special symbol 2 during the time-saving state, and the pull-back effect is not executed, so that it is possible to inform the player that the game situation is unfavorable. In addition, since the DANGER effect can be executed using the change time of the second special symbol change that is executed after the normal state is set, if the period from when the DANGER effect is executed to when the time-saving state ends is extremely short, for example, in the game flow shown in FIG. 263(b), if the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is set to the upper limit just before the end of the eighth time-saving special symbol 2 change, the DANGER effect ends in an instant, preventing the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

In addition, the performance period of the above-mentioned DANGER effect does not need to use the remaining period from when the DANGER effect is executed until the time-saving state ends and the entire period of the execution period of the second special pattern change executed after the normal state is set. For example, if the number of times the second special pattern change executed after the normal state is set is two or more, the DANGER effect may be ended in correspondence with the stop display timing of the first second special pattern change executed after the normal state is set, a display mode indicating that a pull-back effect will be executed as a performance result of the DANGER effect may be displayed, and then the pull-back effect may be executed.

As in this modified example of the effect, a configuration in which a series of effects are executed using the remaining period during the time-saving state and the execution period of the second special symbol variation that is executed after the normal state is set may be used for the standby effect. In this case, the standby effect may be configured to vary its presentation mode (at least some of the presentation modes included in the standby effect) depending on the length of the period during which the standby effect is executed, so that the longer the execution period of the standby effect, the more advantageous the game result will be for the player.

<Modification of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the eleventh embodiment described above, specifically, an example in which the technical concept of the eleventh embodiment is applied to the technology described in the eleventh embodiment described above, will be described. In the eighth embodiment described above, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state are provided, and further, the time-saving end condition that is likely to be established among the plurality of time-saving end conditions (special chart 1 end condition, special chart 2 end condition) is configured to be different depending on the game method (left-hand play, right-hand play) executed by the player. Then, it is determined whether the state is immediately before each time-saving end condition is established (a state in which the pre-time-saving end condition is established), and when it is determined that the pre-time-saving end condition is established for one time-saving end condition, a performance (playing method guide performance) is executed to allow the player to play in a game method in which the other time-saving end condition is likely to be established compared to the one time-saving end condition in which the pre-time-saving end condition is established.

In other words, in the eighth embodiment described above, in order to allow the player to enjoy playing during the time-saving state to the maximum extent (to extend the playing period during the time-saving state), the system is configured to prevent the time-saving state from ending in a state in which only the element for establishing one of the multiple time-saving end conditions (for example, the number of times the second special symbol changes) is updated, while the element for establishing the other time-saving end conditions (for example, the number of times the first special symbol changes) is not updated at all.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment described above, a maximum of four drawing rights for the second special symbol can be reserved and stored, and by ending the time-saving state with the drawing rights for the second special symbol reserved and stored, a drawing for the second special symbol that is more advantageous to the player than the drawing for the first special symbol can be executed in the normal state that is set after the time-saving state ends. In other words, it is configured to execute an effect that maximizes the number of special symbol drawings executed during the time-saving state, while also ending the time-saving state with more drawing rights for the second special symbol reserved and stored.

In contrast, in the modified example of the eleventh embodiment, when the time-saving state is set, the time-saving end condition (special pattern 2 end condition) is set only for the second special pattern, which is easier to obtain the lottery right when the time-saving state is set than when a game state other than the time-saving state (for example, the normal state) is set, and when the number of times (variation number) of the second special pattern drawn during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), the special pattern 2 end condition is established and the time-saving state ends, and the second special pattern drawing is performed in preference to the first special pattern drawing, which is different from the eighth embodiment described above. Note that the specific control content for executing the second special pattern drawing in preference to the first special pattern drawing is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in this modified example, the variation time of the second special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state can be selected differently based on the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern (the number of reserved lottery rights for the second special pattern that are stored at the time the second special pattern lottery is executed) and the remaining number of times that the special pattern will be drawn (remaining number of time-saving times) until the special pattern 2 ending condition is met.

Specifically, from when the time-saving state is set until the remaining number of time-saving times reaches 5, a short-time fluctuation pattern (short fluctuation pattern A) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol based on the same fluctuation pattern table as the eighth embodiment described above. When the remaining number of time-saving times is 5 to 3 and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 2 or more, a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation time that can be selected as the short fluctuation pattern A described above (medium fluctuation pattern (e.g., 10 to 20 seconds)) is selected. When the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1, the short fluctuation pattern A described above is selected. When the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time than the short fluctuation pattern A described above (ultra-short fluctuation pattern (e.g., 0.1 seconds)) is selected.

When the remaining number of time-saving cycles is 2 or 1 (final change in the time-saving state) and the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is 0, 2, or 3, the above-mentioned ultra-short fluctuation pattern (0.1 seconds) is selected, and when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is 1, a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the above-mentioned medium fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation pattern (e.g., 30 seconds)) is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the number of reserved memories of the second special pattern at the end of the time-saving state depending on the game method executed during the time-saving state.

Here, we will explain the game content during the time-saving state in this modified example. In this modified example, as in the eighth embodiment described above, when the time-saving state is set, right-hand play is performed and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, so that the game method is configured to be the most advantageous method for the player.

The time for the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), the execution period of the normal symbol winning game, the time for the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and the arrangement interval of various devices arranged on the game board 13 are set so that the interval at which the right to draw the second special symbol is acquired is shorter than the interval at which the lottery for the second special symbol is executed while right-hand play is continuously executed during the time-saving state. As a result, when right-hand play is continuously executed during the time-saving state, the game is executed toward the final change of the time-saving state while the reserved memory number of the second special symbol is maintained at the upper limit (4).

Hereafter, when explaining the flow of play during the time-saving state, the period from when the time-saving state is set until the remaining number of time-saving times reaches 5 will be referred to as the normal time-saving period, the period when the remaining number of time-saving times is between 5 and 3 will be referred to as the preparation period for the end of the time-saving period, and the period when the remaining number of time-saving times is 2 or 1 (the final change in the time-saving state) will be referred to as the period before the end of the time-saving period.

As mentioned above, if the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is kept at the upper limit (4 balls) when playing during the time-saving state, the ultra-short variation pattern (0.1 seconds) will be selected in the period before the time-saving state ends. Therefore, the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is likely to be small at the time when the time-saving state ends (when the final special pattern variation during the time-saving state is stopped and displayed). Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is at the upper limit (4 balls), the second special pattern variation with the remaining number of time-saving times of "2" (99th spin in the time-saving state) is executed in the ultra-short variation pattern, and when the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern has decreased to 3 balls, the second special pattern variation with the remaining number of time-saving times of "1" (100th spin in the time-saving state) is executed in the ultra-short variation pattern. Therefore, the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern at the time when the time-saving state ends will be 2 balls.

In this way, when the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is the specified number (four balls), if the period before the time-saving feature ends is entered, an ultra-short fluctuation pattern is set for the two second special patterns that are executed during the period before the time-saving feature ends, making it difficult to acquire new reserved balls for the second special pattern.

On the other hand, if right-hand play during the time-saving state is temporarily interrupted and the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern when entering the period before the time-saving state ends is set to a number other than four, the change time for the second special pattern change during the period before the time-saving state ends is set so that the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern at the time the time-saving state ends is more likely to be greater than when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is four.

For example, if the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern when entering the period before the time-saving end is three, the second special pattern change with the remaining time-saving number of times being "2" (99th spin of the time-saving state) is executed in the ultra-short change pattern, and with the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern reduced to two, the second special pattern change with the remaining time-saving number of times being "1" (100th spin of the time-saving state) is executed in the long change pattern. Therefore, since the final change of the time-saving state can be executed for a long time, it is possible to easily acquire new reserved balls of the second special pattern during the final change. In addition, in this modified example, a change time of 30 seconds is selected as the long change pattern, and it is configured so that three or more reserved balls of the second special pattern can be newly acquired by performing right-hitting play for 30 seconds during the time-saving state, so that the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern at the time of the time-saving end can easily be set to the upper limit (four) by simply continuing right-hitting play during the final change of the time-saving state in which the long change pattern is selected.

Next, if the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern when entering the period before the time-saving period ends is two, and the second special pattern change with the remaining number of time-saving times being "2" (the 99th spin in the time-saving state) is executed in a long change pattern, the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern can be temporarily set to the upper limit (4) by continuing to play with the right hand during the second special pattern change. Then, with the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern set to the upper limit (4), the second special pattern change with the remaining number of time-saving times being "1" (the 100th spin in the time-saving state) is executed in an ultra-short change pattern. Therefore, the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern at the time the time-saving period ends can be set to three. In other words, it is easier to increase the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern at the time the time-saving period ends than when right hand play is continued during the time-saving state.

In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is 1 when entering the period before the time-saving period ends, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is 0, a new reserved ball of the second special pattern is acquired, and a second special pattern change with the remaining number of time-saving periods of "2" (the 99th spin of the time-saving period) is executed, the ultra-short change pattern is selected as the change pattern of the second special pattern change. Similarly, when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is 1 and a second special pattern change with the remaining number of time-saving periods of "1" (the 100th spin of the time-saving period) is executed, the ultra-short change pattern is selected as the change pattern of the second special pattern change. In other words, if the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is less than the specified number (2) when entering the period before the time-saving period ends, the time-saving period ends without giving the player an opportunity to acquire new reserved balls of the second special pattern.

As explained above, in this modified example, the expected number of reserved balls of the second special pattern at the end of the time-saving mode can be varied depending on the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern when entering the period before the time-saving mode ends in the time-saving mode, providing the player with the fun of choosing how to play during the time-saving mode.

In addition, this modified example is configured to make it easier to provide advantageous play to the player in the period after the time-saving state ends by temporarily interrupting right-hand play or by playing a game other than normal right-hand play (left-hand play) rather than continuing right-hand play during the time-saving state, so that players playing in the time-saving state can be offered the fun of changing their playing method.

Furthermore, in this modified example, if right-hand play during the time-saving state is interrupted more than necessary, the benefit provided to the player in the period after the time-saving state ends (execution of the second special pattern lottery during the normal state) is configured to be less than if right-hand play was continued during the time-saving state. This makes it possible for a player playing in the time-saving state to not only change their playing method, but also to play while considering the length of time for which the playing method will be changed. This makes it possible to create more interest in playing during the time-saving state.

In addition, in this modified example, a different variation pattern is selected from the normal time-saving period (the period until the remaining number of time-saving times reaches 5) during the time-saving state preparation period (the period when the remaining number of time-saving times is 5 to 3) that precedes the period before the time-saving state ends (the period when the remaining number of time-saving times is 2 or 1 (the final change of the time-saving state)), and the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern when entering the period before the time-saving state ends can be freely changed by the player by selecting the playing method according to the variation time of the second special pattern variation executed during this time-saving state preparation period.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is "three or four" during the time-saving end preparation period, a medium fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the short fluctuation pattern selected during the normal time-saving period is likely to be selected, and if right-hand play is continuously performed during the time-saving state, the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern when entering the period before the time-saving end is likely to reach the upper limit (four). Also, if the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is "one or two" during the time-saving end preparation period, a fluctuation pattern is selected within the range that can be selected during the normal time-saving period, and if the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern when entering the period before the time-saving end is "zero," an ultra-short fluctuation pattern shorter than the short fluctuation pattern is selected.

In other words, by selecting the above-mentioned medium fluctuation pattern, if right-hand play is continued, the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern stored when the time-saving period ends is likely to reach the upper limit (4 balls). This makes it possible to prevent the game from entering the time-saving period without newly acquiring reserved balls of the second special pattern, despite continued right-hand play. This makes it possible to easily grant benefits according to the content of the game method executed during the time-saving state.

In addition, in this modified example, if the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is 0 when the time-saving end preparation period is entered, the ultra-short change pattern (0.1 seconds) is selected as the change pattern of the second special pattern. Therefore, in order to prevent the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern from reaching the upper limit (4 balls) and entering the period before the time-saving end, if a game is played during the time-saving state while interrupting right-hand play more than necessary, that is, in order not to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern during the time-saving state, a game method (so-called stop-hit game) in which right-hand play is not performed while the second special pattern change is being executed and right-hand play is performed after the second special pattern change has stopped can be prevented.

Although detailed explanations will be omitted, in this modified example, the time-saving effects executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the time-saving state can be set to a first time-saving effect mode executed during the normal time-saving period, a second time-saving effect mode executed during the preparation period for the time-saving end, and a third time-saving effect mode executed during the period before the time-saving end. Here, we will explain the effect modes unique to this modified example.

As explained above, in this modified example, the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special pattern variation is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern and the number of remaining time-saving periods in the time-saving state, and this varies the expected number of reserved balls of the second special pattern acquired at the end of the time-saving period, thereby varying the degree of advantage of the game to be played after the time-saving state transitions to the normal state. In other words, the degree of advantage of the game to be played later can be changed depending on the playing method selected by the player during the time-saving state. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play during the time-saving state.

Also, as mentioned above, in this modified example, when a period during which the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern can be easily increased (a period during which the second special pattern variation in which a long variation pattern is set is being executed) is set, there will be cases where it is better to increase the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern and cases where it is better not to increase it, depending on the number of time-saving periods remaining in the time-saving state. Therefore, when a period during which the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern can be easily increased (easy period) arrives, the player can be provided with the fun of choosing whether or not to increase the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern.

In this modified example, the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is set only to be met when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a specific number (100 times). However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the time-saving end condition may be configured to differ depending on the jackpot type that is set in the jackpot win that triggered the setting of the time-saving state. For example, there may be a jackpot type in which the time-saving end condition is met when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 50 times, a jackpot type in which the time-saving end condition is met when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 75 times, or a jackpot type in which the time-saving end condition is met when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 1 time.

In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict how long the time-saving state will last, making it difficult for the player to determine whether or not to increase the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern during the easy period based on the number of remaining time-saving periods.

As described above, in this modified example, the only time-saving end condition is set based on the number of times the special pattern changes, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, a time-saving end condition (lottery result end condition) may be set that is established when the result of the special pattern lottery is a specific lottery result (for example, a specific win or a specific miss), and the time-saving state may be forced to end regardless of the number of remaining time-saving times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the time-saving state will end, and therefore it is possible to have the player play in the time-saving state while considering a playing method that will ensure a large number of reserved balls for the second special pattern at the time the time-saving state ends.

In addition, in this modified example, the expected value of the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern acquired at the end of the time-saving state is varied by varying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special pattern variation selected based on the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern and the number of remaining time-saving periods in the time-saving state, but without being limited to this, for example, the variation pattern of the second special pattern variation may be selected based on the number of remaining time-saving periods in the time-saving state and the result of the lottery for the second special pattern, or the variation pattern of the second special pattern variation may be selected based on the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern, the number of remaining time-saving periods in the time-saving state, and the result of the lottery for the second special pattern. In this way, by configuring the selection of the variation pattern of the second special pattern variation to refer to the lottery result of the second special pattern, for example, during the period before the time-saving state ends, which is the period immediately before the time-saving state ends, the ultra-short variation pattern is selected unless the result of the second special pattern lottery is a specific lottery result (e.g., a small win), and the long variation pattern, which has a longer variation time than the ultra-short variation pattern, may be selected only when the result is a specific lottery result (e.g., a small win).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage (number of reserved balls for the second special pattern) of the second advantageous period (the reserved consumption period for the second special pattern executed during the normal state) that comes after the first advantageous period (the period during which the time-saving state is set) that is advantageous to the player, based on the result of the lottery for the second special pattern in a specific period during the time-saving state (the period before the end of the time-saving state). This provides a novel gameplay in which the lottery for the second special pattern executed during the time-saving state can affect the degree of advantage during the first advantageous period and the degree of advantage during the second advantageous period.

In addition, in this modified example, the periods during the time-saving state are set as the normal time-saving period (time-saving 1-95 times), the preparation period for the end of the time-saving period (time-saving 96-98 times), and the period before the end of the time-saving period (time-saving 99,100 times), and the variation pattern to be selected is varied according to the number of special chart variations (the number of special chart variations during the time-saving state) so that a different variation pattern is selected according to each of the set periods. However, without being limited to this, for example, the length (range) of each of the above-mentioned periods may be varied according to the type of jackpot that is set when a jackpot that sets the time-saving state is won.

Furthermore, when the time-saving state is set, the entire period of the time-saving state is set as the normal time-saving period, and when the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state wins a specific lottery result (for example, a small win), a special variation pattern table from which a special variation pattern can be selected for a predetermined period (for example, during five rotations of the special symbol variation) is used as a variation pattern selected in response to the second special symbol lottery executed after the end of the small win game, and when a variation pattern is selected using the special variation pattern table, the above-mentioned ultra-short variation pattern or long variation pattern can be selected. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) of the second advantageous period (the reserved consumption period of the second special symbol executed during the normal state) that arrives after the first advantageous period (the period during which the time-saving state is set) that is advantageous to the player can be made different depending on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state and the timing of the specific lottery result. This provides a novel gameplay experience in which the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state can affect the degree of advantage during the first advantageous period and the degree of advantage during the second advantageous period.

<Production content in the modified example of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, among the multiple effects executed in the modified example of the eleventh embodiment, the contents of the characteristic effects will be described. As described above, in this modified example, when a time-saving state that is an advantageous game state for a player is set, the advantageous degree of the game executed in a predetermined period (second period) after the time-saving state (first period) ends is configured to be different depending on the game method executed during the time-saving state. Then, during the time-saving state (first period), an effect is executed to guide (suggest) a game method for executing the game during the second period more advantageously for the player. By configuring in this way, the game during the time-saving state can be easily guided to the player.

Specifically, when the time-saving state is set, it has a measuring means for measuring the number of remaining time-saving times until the time-saving end condition is met, a period discrimination means for discriminating whether the current time-saving situation is a normal time-saving period, a preparation period for the time-saving end, or a period before the time-saving end based on the measurement result of the measuring means, and a presentation mode setting means for setting a presentation mode corresponding to the discrimination result of the period discrimination means, and is configured so that the player can grasp the situation during the time-saving state by displaying the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, a prediction means is provided that predicts in advance the variation patterns that may be selected before the time-saving end condition is met, based on the measurement results of the measurement means and the contents stored in the storage means that stores the reserved memory count of the second special pattern.

Then, when the prediction means predicts that only the ultra-short fluctuation pattern will be selected until the time-saving end condition is satisfied, for example, when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is four at the time when the final fluctuation of the time-saving end preparation period (the second special pattern fluctuation executed when the remaining number of time-saving times is three) is executed, regardless of whether or not a new reserved ball of the second special pattern is acquired during the final fluctuation, it is confirmed that the remaining time-saving fluctuation (the two second special pattern fluctuations executed during the time-saving state) will be executed in the ultra-short fluctuation pattern, so a composite performance mode based on the lottery results (pre-reading results) of the three second special pattern fluctuations including the current final fluctuation is set. Then, the composite performance used in the composite performance mode is executed during the period until the time-saving end condition is satisfied, that is, the period from the start of the final fluctuation of the time-saving end preparation period to the stop display of the final fluctuation of the period before the time-saving end (the final fluctuation of the time-saving state).

By executing the composite presentation in this manner, if an ultra-short fluctuation pattern can be set to make it difficult to acquire new reserved balls for the second special pattern, the lottery results for the second special pattern fluctuation for which the ultra-short fluctuation pattern has been selected can be notified to the player using the fluctuation periods of multiple second special pattern fluctuations, providing the player with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

In addition, when the change pattern discrimination means for discriminating the change pattern of the second special pattern change currently being executed determines that the change pattern of the second special pattern change currently being executed is a long change pattern, the device has a situation discrimination means for discriminating whether it is advantageous for the player to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern based on the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern stored in the storage means and the measurement result (remaining number of time reductions) of the measurement means, and is configured to set a presentation mode based on the judgment result of the situation discrimination means and execute a guidance presentation to inform the player of the current situation.

In this guidance presentation, the presentation is performed in a display mode that includes at least a first guidance mode for informing the player that a second special symbol variation with a long variation time is being performed (the easy period is in progress), and a second guidance mode for informing the player of either a continuation play in which right-hand play is continued, or a switching play in which right-hand play is interrupted (left-hand play is performed).

Instead of this guidance effect, a special guidance effect capable of displaying the above-mentioned first guidance mode and a special guidance mode that allows the player to play either a continued game or a switched game may be executed, and after the easy period has elapsed, a result mode showing the game result may be displayed based on the game content of the player during the easy period and the content of the above-mentioned second guidance mode. In this case, a performance is executed that makes it difficult for the player to know whether or not to increase the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern while informing the player that the easy period is a period during which it is easy to increase the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern. This provides a gameplay that allows the player to select a game method while understanding the content of the performance.

In addition, as a technical configuration different from the eleventh embodiment and the modified example of the eleventh embodiment described above, for example, a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern in an overlapping manner, and configured to forcibly stop and display the ongoing second special pattern variation as a miss when a small prize is won in the drawing of the first special pattern and the special pattern indicating the small prize win is stopped and displayed, and configured so that when a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set, the time-saving state ends when the number of variations of the second special pattern reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute a guidance effect that prevents the execution of a game to win a reserved ball of the second special pattern (time-saving game) until the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern reaches 0 (until the first special pattern variation is no longer executed) when the time-saving state is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to suppress the number of second special pattern variations that are forcibly stopped and displayed as misses based on the lottery results of the first special pattern, and therefore it is possible to suppress the number of times the second special pattern varies being updated unnecessarily during the time-saving state. In other words, when a favorable state (time-saving state) that is favorable to the player is set, it is possible to provide the player with a more favorable game by interrupting the game to acquire the reserved ball of the second special pattern.

In the eleventh embodiment and the modified example of the eleventh embodiment described above, an example was described in which a time-saving state was used as an advantageous state that gives an advantage to the player, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, a high probability state may be used as an advantageous state. In addition, in a gaming machine with gameplay in which a bonus can be acquired through multiple stages, a state in which a specific stage has been reached among the multiple stages, that is, a state in which a bonus is easier to acquire than in the initial state, may be used as an advantageous state.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, multiple time-saving end conditions are set, and the time-saving state can be transitioned to the normal state at different times depending on when the multiple time-saving end conditions are met when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a specific number of times, i.e., when the change count end condition is met, and when the time-saving end condition is met when a small prize is won by the special symbol lottery, i.e., when the win count end condition is met.

Using this configuration, for example, a gaming machine can be provided that is controlled so that when the variable count end condition is met, the gaming state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state based on the start of the special pattern variation, and when the winning count end condition is met, the gaming state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small win game.

As a result, even if the time-saving state ends based on the variation of the same special symbol depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be made different within the combined range of the time for which the special symbol varies and the time for which the small win game is executed. Therefore, the player can also be interested in the type of time-saving end condition that is established. Furthermore, depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, even during the small win game that gives the player a small bonus, it is possible to make the small win game a more advantageous game state for the player by operating the electric device 640a to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entrance.

In addition, it is a good idea to provide multiple types of small wins with different periods during which the small win game is played, and to vary the bonus given to the player depending on the type of small win for which the winning count ending condition is met, even if the winning count ending condition is met. This makes it possible to get the player interested not only in the type of time-saving ending condition that has been met, but also in the more detailed content of the time-saving ending condition.

In this case, even if the winning count end condition is met, it is preferable to configure the time-saving state to end when the small win game starts and when the small win game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand when the time-saving state ends. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, a configuration is used in which the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is met based on the number of times the special pattern changes and the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is met based on winning a small win are separately executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which the time-saving information updated according to the lottery (change) of the special pattern is centrally managed and the timing to end the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving end condition that has been met.

In the above embodiments, the case where the reserved ball number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (i.e., when it increases or decreases, respectively) has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. This can reduce the number of times the main control device 110 sends reserved number commands to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives reserved number commands, respectively, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning entry into the first ball entrance 64 and the passing through the through gate 67 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed in the variable display based on the winning entry into the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting element.

As shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is one type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be a display in which the pattern moves vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third pattern display for showing the player the lottery results for each pattern is performed by one display means (third pattern display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, different display means may be provided for displaying the main pattern that is highlighted to the player among the third patterns, and for displaying the secondary patterns. Furthermore, the display means may be configured as a configuration other than a liquid crystal display.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-hand hit game is executed to target the right-hand area of the game board 13 in a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and a left-hand hit game is executed to target the left-hand area of the game board 13 in a normal game state. However, it is sufficient to change the area of the game board 13 targeted depending on the game state, and a left-hand hit game may be executed during a time-saving state and a right-hand hit game may be executed during a normal state. In addition, a game may be configured to be executable in different game states while targeting the same area.

In the above-mentioned embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 are used as the operation means that can be operated by the player by pressing them, but other configurations may be used, such as lever-shaped operation means that can be determined to have been operated by the player tilting them left and right or forward and backward, touch sensor-type operation means that can be determined to have been operated by the player touching or approaching them, and wireless operation means that can be determined to have been operated by transmitting a predetermined radio wave. In addition, the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c may be configured to be partially or entirely executed by the voice lamp control device 113, rather than the main control device 110.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the process for setting the display mode in the performance executed using the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is executed by a main control device 110 different from the voice lamp control device 113, but without being limited to this, the process for executing the game (lottery) and the process for displaying the result of the game (lottery) as a performance may be executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute multiple different processes with one control device.

In the sixth, eighth and ninth embodiments described above, the first operating port 704 for opening the right first ball inlet 64a2 and the second operating port 707 for opening the right second ball inlet 64b are provided inside the sorting device 700, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the right first ball inlet 64a2 and the right second ball inlet 64b may be provided directly inside the sorting device 700. In other words, the right first ball inlet 64a2 may be provided instead of the first operating port 704, and the right second ball inlet 64b may be provided instead of the second operating port 707. By configuring in this way, the first operating port 704, the second operating port 707, the first operating role 645a and the second operating role 645b can be eliminated, simplifying the board configuration. Therefore, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and the cost rate can be reduced.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as the multiple special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more special symbol types may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Also, in each of the above embodiments, a game feature in which multiple special symbols are drawn (varied) according to predetermined rules and a game feature in which the symbols are drawn (varied) independently of one another are described, but the game features described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) related to the jackpot lottery is provided in multiple stages, and the settings can be changed by the gaming parlor. A representative example of a pachinko machine with multiple settings is one in which the combination of jackpot probabilities (the combination of the jackpot probability in a low probability state and the jackpot probability in a high probability state) can be set to one of multiple stages (for example, six stages), but this is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot can be changed according to the settings. That is, the ratio at which a type of jackpot advantageous to the player is determined, or the ratio at which a type of jackpot disadvantageous to the player is determined, may be changed according to the settings. More specifically, for example, the ratio of jackpots with a large number of rounds (e.g., 16 rounds) to be determined may be varied according to the setting, or the ratio of jackpots with a small number of rounds (e.g., 2 rounds) to be determined may be varied according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. Also, for example, the ratio of jackpots with a large number of time-saving times (e.g., 100 times) to be determined after the jackpot is finished may be varied according to the setting, or the ratio of jackpots with a small number of time-saving times (e.g., 0 times) to be determined may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the ratio of jackpots that transition (or are easy to transition) to a favorable game state (e.g., a probability change state) after the jackpot is finished may be varied according to the setting, or the ratio of jackpots that transition (or are easy to transition) to an unfavorable game state (e.g., a normal state) may be varied according to the setting. Also, a configuration may be provided in which the ratio of jackpots determined only in a specific setting is significantly higher (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting can be set in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set to setting 6. In setting 6, a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot occurs, while in other settings, a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined at a rate of only 0.01%. By configuring in this way, the most advantageous setting 6 is highly likely to be set when the jackpot ends with 6 rounds, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Alternatively or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the probability of the jackpot type being a jackpot type in which 66 time-saving times are granted after the jackpot ends may be higher than in other settings. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Alternatively or additionally, for example, a jackpot type may be provided in which the jackpot opening (or the role inside the jackpot opening) operates in a different operation pattern from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game, and the jackpot type may be more likely to be determined in a specific setting (the rate at which it is determined is higher). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is varied according to the settings, the jackpot probability may be increased in a low probability state in which the more advantageous the setting is for the player, while in a probability state in which the more disadvantageous the setting is for the player, the higher the jackpot probability may be. This configuration is particularly effective in a type of gaming machine in which the more times the special pattern is drawn in a probability state, the more likely it is that the number of balls held will increase (the number of prize balls paid out is more likely to be greater than the number of game balls fired). More specifically, for example, the probability state continues until the next jackpot is won, and by applying this to a type of gaming machine in which the probability state has a high probability of producing a small jackpot, the advantage of a high setting can be further enhanced. In other words, if the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is low, the number of lottery draws until the next jackpot is likely to be large, and there will be more opportunities to win small prizes and win prize balls. Therefore, when a high probability state is reached, it becomes easier to win more prize balls before the next jackpot occurs, which is advantageous for the player.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

The above-mentioned embodiments may be configured in whole or in part.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Feature Group A> (Time-saving ends when a small win occurs)
a determination means for performing a predetermined determination when a determination condition is established, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a first determination result is statically displayed on the display means, a small bonus game execution means for executing a small bonus game different from the bonus game when the identification information indicating a second determination result different from the first determination result is statically displayed on the display means, and a game state setting means for setting a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and an end condition setting means for setting an end condition of the second game state set by the game state setting means, wherein the end condition setting means is configured to be capable of setting at least a first end condition which is established based on the dynamic display being executed a predetermined number of times by the dynamic display execution means, a second end condition which can be established based on the determination result of the determination means being the first determination result, and a third end condition which can be established based on the determination result of the determination means being the second determination result.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a game ball in a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time, which makes it easier to execute a lottery after the bonus game is executed (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). However, in the above gaming machines, the time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period (predetermined number of times) that is determined in advance according to the type of bonus game executed, so that the period during which the time-saving game is executed is easily understood by the player, and it is difficult to have the player focus on whether the time-saving game will continue while playing the game, and there is a problem that the game tends to become monotonous. The object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game among the above gaming machines.

With gaming machine A1, multiple termination conditions for terminating the second gaming state that is advantageous to the player can be set, making it difficult for the player to predict the period during which the second gaming state will continue, and this has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

A gaming machine A2, characterized in that in the gaming machine A1, the third end condition is established when the number of times that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the second discrimination result reaches a predetermined number during the period during which the second gaming state is continuously set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 provides the following effects. That is, the second gaming state can be ended depending on the number of times that small bonus games are executed during the second gaming state, so that the player can pay attention to the determination result of the determination means during the second gaming state.

In addition, it is possible to prevent excessive small bonus play from being performed during the second game state.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that in gaming machine A2, the discrimination means also discriminates a third discrimination result different from the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result, and the small bonus game execution means executes the small bonus game even when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the third discrimination result.

Gaming machine A3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine A2. That is, since it is possible to execute a small bonus game in which the third end condition cannot be satisfied, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early on by making it difficult to predict the period during which the second gaming state will continue simply by knowing the number of small bonus games executed during the second gaming state.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the discrimination means discriminates, as the second discrimination result, at least between a specific second discrimination result that causes the small bonus game execution means to execute a first small bonus game and a special second discrimination result different from the specific second discrimination result that causes the small bonus game execution means to execute a second small bonus game different from the first small bonus game, and the third end condition is established when the number of times that the specific second discrimination result is determined to be the first predetermined number of times, or when the number of times that the special second discrimination result is determined to be the second predetermined number of times different from the first predetermined number of times. Gaming machine A4.

Gaming machine A4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines A2 and A3. That is, since the end condition can be set to a different number of times depending on the type of small bonus game, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the period during which the second gaming state will continue by simply knowing the number of small bonus games executed during the second gaming state. This has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

Gaming machine A5 is characterized in that it has a variable ball entry means that can change from a first state, in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter, to a second state, in which it is easy for the game ball to enter, when the small bonus game is executed, and a specific area through which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game even when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the ease with which the game ball can pass through the specific area is made different when the first small bonus game is executed by the small bonus game execution means and when the second small bonus game is executed.

Gaming machine A5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine A4. That is, the possibility of the second game state ending and the possibility of a bonus game being executed can be made different depending on the type of small bonus game executed by gaming machine A, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the content of the small bonus game being executed. This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

<Feature B group> (Different time-saving end conditions for special 1 and special 2 games)
a first ball entry means through which a game ball can enter; a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means through which a game ball can enter; a discrimination means for executing a predetermined first discrimination when a game ball enters the first ball entry means and a predetermined first discrimination condition is established, and for executing a predetermined second discrimination when a game ball enters the second ball entry means and a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition is established; a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means; a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating the first discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means. a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game, a game state setting means for setting a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means has ended, and an end condition setting means for setting a plurality of end conditions for the second game state set by the game state setting means, wherein the end condition setting means sets at least a first end condition which is more likely to be established when the second judgment is executed than when the first judgment is executed, and a second end condition which is more likely to be established when the first judgment is executed than when the second judgment is executed, as the plurality of end conditions.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a game ball in a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time after the execution of the bonus game, making it easier to execute a lottery (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). Furthermore, the above gaming machine executes a lottery for a special symbol as a game lottery, and by providing two types of special symbols, it is possible to execute a lottery for various games. However, the above gaming machine ends the time-saving state when the number of times the special symbol is drawn during the time-saving game reaches a predetermined number, so the time-saving state ends under the same conditions regardless of the type of special symbol drawn during the time-saving state. Therefore, there was a problem that the game in the time-saving state was easily monotonous. In addition, although the content of the lottery executed during the time-saving state is made different depending on the type of special symbol drawn, the game result of whether or not the time-saving state will end is the same regardless of the type of special symbol drawn, so there is no correlation between the duration of the time-saving state and the type of special symbol drawn during the time-saving state, which makes the game prone to becoming monotonous. The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that further improves the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine B1 makes it possible to set different termination conditions for terminating the second gaming state when the first determination is made and when the second determination is made. This allows the player to pay close attention to which determination is made during the second gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine B2, which has a small bonus game execution means for executing a small bonus game different from the bonus game when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result in a gaming machine B1, and the end condition setting means sets a determination result end condition that can be established when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result, and a dynamic display end condition that can be established based on the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the determination means is characterized in that the second determination is easier to distinguish from the second determination result when the second determination is executed than when the first determination is executed.

Gaming machine B2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine B1. That is, since one of the termination conditions for terminating the second gaming state is more likely to be met when the second determination is made than when the first determination is made, the player will be concerned about which determination was made during the second gaming state and what the result of that determination was. This has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that in gaming machine B2, the end condition setting means sets the discrimination result end condition as the first end condition and sets the dynamic display end condition as the second end condition.

Gaming machine B3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine B2. That is, the discrimination result end condition is more likely to be met when the first discrimination is performed than when the second discrimination is performed. In other words, even though the second discrimination is more likely to result in the second discrimination result, the discrimination result end condition is less likely to be met. Therefore, the player will pay close attention to whether the second discrimination result was the first discrimination or the second discrimination, which has the effect of providing an enjoyable game.

Gaming machine B4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B2 or B3, it has a second discrimination result type determination means for determining one second discrimination result type from a plurality of second discrimination result types as the type of the second discrimination result when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the second discrimination result, and the termination condition setting means sets a different termination condition for each second discrimination result type determined by the second discrimination result type determination means as the discrimination result termination condition.

Gaming machine B4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines B2 and B3. That is, since different end conditions can be set based on the type of second discrimination result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know when the end condition will be met. This has the effect of increasing the fun of predicting future games, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine B5 is characterized in that in gaming machine B4, the second discrimination result type determination means is capable of determining different second discrimination result types when the discrimination result of the first discrimination is the second discrimination result and when the discrimination result of the second discrimination is the second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B4, gaming machine B5 can determine different second determination result types for the first and second determinations, which has the effect of easily differentiating the ease with which the determination result termination condition is met between the first and second determinations.

Gaming machine B6 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines B2 to B5, the end condition setting means sets, as the dynamic display end condition, a first dynamic display end condition that can be established when the dynamic display based on the first discrimination is executed, and a second dynamic display end condition that can be established when the dynamic display based on the second discrimination is executed.

Gaming machine B6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines B2 to B5. That is, it is possible to vary the end conditions for ending the second gaming state. This has the effect of making the player pay attention to which decision is made during the second gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine B6, the dynamic display end condition is established when the number of times the dynamic display has been executed reaches a predetermined number, and the end condition setting means sets the number of times the dynamic display that establishes the first dynamic display end condition and the number of times the dynamic display that establishes the second dynamic display end condition to be different from each other. In the gaming machine B7,

Gaming machine B7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine B6. That is, the number of dynamic displays that satisfies the first dynamic display end condition and the number of dynamic displays that satisfies the second dynamic display end condition can be made different, so that when the second gaming state is set, the ease of ending the second gaming state can be made different between a game in which the first judgment is executed and a game in which the second judgment is executed, and therefore a variety of games can be provided.

In the gaming machine B7, the end condition setting means sets an upper limit dynamic display end condition that is established when the total dynamic display count, which is the sum of the first dynamic display count executed based on the first discrimination and the second dynamic display count executed based on the second discrimination, reaches the upper limit count. In the gaming machine B8,

Gaming machine B8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine B7. That is, even if the total dynamic display count, which is the sum of the first dynamic display count and the second dynamic display count, reaches the upper limit, the second gaming state is terminated, so that the first and second judgments are prevented from being excessively performed during the second gaming state. This has the effect of providing the player with a proper game.

A gaming machine B9 is characterized in that it has an advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state for a specific period in which the judgment result of the judgment means is likely to become the first judgment result when a predetermined transition condition is established in the gaming machine B8, and the predetermined transition condition can be established when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means.

Gaming machine B9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine B8. That is, an advantageous state can be set in accordance with the timing at which the second gaming state is set, which has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine B10 is characterized in that it has a special state setting means for setting a special state advantageous to the player when the first gaming state is set during the specific period in which the advantageous state is set in the gaming machine B9.

Gaming machine B10 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine B9. That is, if the second gaming state ends during the period in which the advantageous state is set, a special state is set. This makes it possible to set different gaming states depending on the timing at which the second gaming state ends. In addition, since the special state is set by ending the second gaming state within a specified period of time, called a specific period, it is possible to allow the player to play a novel game in which the player actively ends the advantageous second gaming state, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

The specific period may be set to the period from when the second game state is set until a specific end condition is met, or may be set to the period from when a specific condition is met while the second game state is set until a specific end condition is met.

<Feature C Group> (Short remaining time production)
a game state setting means for setting a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is ended; an end condition setting means for setting a plurality of end conditions for the second game state set by the game state setting means; an end condition determining means for determining which of the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means is the one which is most likely to be established; a suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect to suggest a period during which the second game state will be set; and a suggestive effect mode setting means for setting the mode of the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect execution means, wherein the suggestive effect mode setting means sets the mode of the suggestive effect based on the end condition determined by the end condition determining means.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a game ball in a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time, which makes it easier to execute a lottery after the bonus game is executed (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). However, the above-mentioned gaming machine executes the time-saving game for a predetermined period (predetermined number of times) that is determined in advance according to the type of bonus game executed, so that the period during which the time-saving game is executed is easily understood by the player, and it is difficult to make the player pay attention to whether the time-saving game will continue while playing the game, and there is a problem that the game tends to become monotonous. Therefore, the applicant has developed a gaming machine that makes it difficult for the player to understand the period during which the time-saving game is set to continue by setting multiple conditions for ending the time-saving game. In this gaming machine, because there are multiple ending conditions for ending the time-saving game, it is difficult to inform the player of the remaining period for which the time-saving game is to be played, and there is a problem in that the game is presented in a way that is difficult for the player to understand. The objective of this invention is to provide the above gaming machine with an easy-to-understand gaming machine for the player.

According to gaming machine C1, even if multiple termination conditions are set for ending the second gaming state, the suggestive performance can be set based on the termination condition that is most likely to be met, which has the effect of making it easier for the player to understand the period during which the second gaming state will continue.

Gaming machine C2 is characterized in that in gaming machine C1, the end condition determination means determines the end condition that is likely to be met based on the execution content of the determination means during the second gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 has the following effect. That is, since the termination condition that is likely to be met is determined based on the actual execution content of the determination means, the determination accuracy can be improved.

Gaming machine C3 has an update means for updating predetermined gaming information based on the execution contents of the determination means executed during the period in which the second gaming state is continuously set in the gaming machine C2, and the end condition setting means sets, as the multiple end conditions, at least a first end condition that can be established when the first gaming information is updated by the update means, and a second end condition that can be established when the second gaming information different from the first gaming information is updated by the update means.

Gaming machine C3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine C2. That is, because an end condition is set for multiple pieces of game information that can be established by executing the discrimination means, it is possible to make it difficult to know whether the second game state will end based on the execution content of the discrimination means. This has the effect of drawing the player's attention to the suggestive presentation, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine C3, the first end condition is established when the number of updates of the first gaming information becomes a first number, and the second end condition is established when the number of updates of the second gaming information becomes a second number, and the gaming machine C4 has a remaining update number discrimination means that discriminates the first remaining update number until the first end condition is established and the second remaining update number until the second end condition is established based on the gaming information updated by the update means, and the end condition discrimination means discriminates the end condition that is likely to be established according to the discrimination result of the remaining update number discrimination means.

Gaming machine C4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine C3. That is, since the end condition that is likely to be met is determined based on the number of remaining plays until each end condition is met, the effect is that the precision of the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation can be improved.

A gaming machine C5, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine C4, there is a pre-end condition judgment that judges whether the first remaining update number or the second remaining update number judged by the remaining update number judgment means satisfies a predetermined pre-end condition, and the suggestion performance mode setting means sets the performance mode of the suggestion performance based on the judgment result of the pre-end condition judgment means.

Gaming machine C5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine C4. That is, the pre-end condition determination means can set the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation depending on whether the pre-end condition is met, so that the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation can enable the player to predict the number of remaining plays until the end condition is met.

In gaming machine C5, the suggested presentation mode setting means sets a specific suggested presentation mode when the pre-end condition determination means determines that multiple pre-end conditions are met. Gaming machine C6.

Gaming machine C6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine C5. That is, when a pre-termination condition is met, a specific suggestive presentation mode can be set, making it possible for the player to predict the remaining time of the time-saving state. This has the effect of providing the player with the fun of making predictions.

A gaming machine C7 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, it has a first period setting means for setting a first period after the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and the suggestion presentation mode setting means sets a special suggestion presentation mode when the end condition is met while the first period is set by the first period setting means.

Gaming machine C7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines C1 to C6. That is, if the end condition is met within a predetermined period of time after the second gaming state advantageous to the player is set, a special suggestion presentation mode is set, so that a presentation mode can be set according to the timing at which the end condition is met. This has the effect of making the player aware of the timing at which the end condition is met, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine C8 is characterized in that in gaming machine C7, the first period setting means sets the first period from when the second gaming state is set until the number of times the determination is performed by the determination means reaches a predetermined number.

Gaming machine C8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine C7. That is, since the first period is set until the number of determinations performed by the determination means reaches a predetermined number, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the first period is set. Therefore, the player can enjoy whether or not the end condition is met while the first period is set, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine C9 is characterized in that in gaming machine C7 or C8, the first period setting means sets the first period until a predetermined time has elapsed since the second gaming state was set.

Gaming machine C9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines C7 and C8. That is, the first period is set when the time elapsed since the second gaming state was set is within a predetermined time, so that the player can eagerly play in order to achieve the end condition within the first period.

<Feature D group> (Normal time saving with 1 type and 2 types)
a first discrimination means for discriminating when a first discrimination condition is established; a display means for displaying identification information indicative of a discrimination result by the first discrimination means; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the identification information indicative of the first discrimination result is displayed on the display means; a specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state in which a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition is likely to be established after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is ended; a second discrimination means for discriminating when the second discrimination condition is established; and a second discrimination means for determining whether the second discrimination condition is established or not as a result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means. A gaming machine D1 has a variable ball entry means that can change the state from a first state in which it is difficult for a gaming ball to enter the ball to a second state in which it is easy for the gaming ball to enter the ball when identification information indicative of the second discrimination result is displayed on the display means, and a specific area through which a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, wherein the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game even when the gaming ball passes through the specific area, and the specific game state setting means is capable of setting at least a first specific game state in which the second discrimination condition is more likely to be met, and a second specific game state in which the second discrimination condition is more difficult to meet than the first specific game state.

Here, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and if the lottery result is a win, or if the lottery result is not a win, and the game ball passes through a specific area during a predetermined game that can be executed, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). Furthermore, there is a gaming machine that allows the setting of a gaming state in which the above-mentioned bonus game is likely to be executed as the gaming state of the gaming machine. The above-mentioned gaming machine sets two gaming states, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and another gaming state, and since it is not possible to set multiple gaming states that are advantageous to the player in stages, there is a problem that the game tends to become monotonous. The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that prevents the game from becoming monotonous and can increase the interest of the game.

With gaming machine D1, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the ease with which the second discrimination condition is met during a specific gaming state varies, which has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine D1, a display means is provided that can display a first identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the first determination means and a second identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the second determination means, a first dynamic display means that causes the display means to dynamically display the first identification information for a predetermined first period, a second dynamic display means that causes the display means to dynamically display the second identification information for a predetermined second period, a first dynamic display period setting means that sets a first dynamic display period of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display means, and a second dynamic display period setting means that sets a second dynamic display period of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display means, and while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, the second dynamic display period setting means is provided. The second identification information is dynamically displayed by the target display means, the specific game state is set in response to the first identification information being stopped and displayed in a first display mode for indicating the first discrimination result on the display means, the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state in response to the second identification information being stopped and displayed in a second display mode for indicating the second discrimination result, and the specific game state setting means sets the first specific game state and the second specific game state by making the first dynamic display period set by the first dynamic display period setting means or the second dynamic display period set by the second dynamic display period setting means different.

Gaming machine D2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine D1. That is, by differentiating the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period during the specific gaming state, it is possible to set the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, which has the effect of easily setting gaming states in which the ease with which the second discrimination condition is established during the specific gaming state differs.

Gaming machine D3, characterized in that in gaming machine D2, the second dynamic display period setting means makes it easier to set a second dynamic display period that is shorter when the first specific gaming state is set than when the second specific gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D2, gaming machine D3 has the following effect. That is, by shortening the dynamic display period, it is possible to make it easier for the second discrimination means to make a discrimination, which has the effect of making it easier to set the gaming state.

Gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D2 or D3, the second discrimination means is configured to be able to discriminate the first discrimination result as well, and the second dynamic display period setting means sets a second dynamic display period that is shorter when the discrimination result of the second discrimination means during the second specific gaming state is the first discrimination result than when the discrimination result is other than the first discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D2 and D3, gaming machine D4 has the following effect. That is, when the result of the determination by the second determination means is the first determination result, a dynamic display period shorter than other determination results is set, which has the effect of making it easier to execute bonus games.

Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines D2 to D4, the first dynamic display period setting means makes it easier to set a first dynamic display period that is shorter when the second specific gaming state is set than when the first specific gaming state is set.

Gaming machine D5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines D2 to D4. That is, it has the effect of making it easier to set the gaming state because it is easier to set a shorter first dynamic display period when the second specific gaming state is set than when the first specific gaming state is set.

Gaming machine D6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D5, the first dynamic display period setting means sets a first dynamic display period that is shorter when the determination result of the first determination means during the first specific state is the first determination result than when the determination result is other than the first determination result.

Gaming machine D6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine D5. That is, when the first determination result is obtained during the first specific state, a first dynamic display period is set that is shorter than when a determination result other than the first determination result is obtained. This makes it possible to immediately inform the player that the determination result is favorable to the player. This has the effect of preventing the player from feeling uneasy.

Any of the gaming machines D2 to D6 has a first acquisition means for acquiring first winning ball information when a predetermined first acquisition condition is met, a first storage means for storing a plurality of the first winning ball information acquired by the first acquisition means up to a first predetermined number until the first discrimination condition is met, a second acquisition means for acquiring second winning ball information when a predetermined second acquisition condition is met, and a second storage means for storing a plurality of the second winning ball information acquired by the second acquisition means up to a second predetermined number until the second discrimination condition is met, and is characterized in that, when the discrimination result of the first second discrimination means executed in the state in which the first specific game state is set is the second discrimination result, a dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period is set to show the discrimination result of the first first discrimination means executed in the state in which the first specific game state is set.

Gaming machine D7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of gaming machines D2 to D6. That is, when the determination result of the second determination means executed first in the state where the first specific game state is set is the second determination result, a dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period for showing the determination result of the first determination means executed first in the state where the first specific game state is set is set. As a result, even if the first specific game state is set in a state where both the first storage means and the second storage means store ball entry information, the second determination result of the second determination means that is advantageous to the player can be immediately notified to the player. This has the effect of suppressing the player from feeling uneasy.

<Feature E Group> (Electric support control when winning a small jackpot during time-saving)
a game state setting means for setting a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is ended; and an end condition setting means for setting a plurality of end conditions for the second game state set by the game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means changes the timing for setting the first game state depending on which of the plurality of end conditions has been established.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time after the bonus game is executed, making the lottery more likely to be executed after the bonus game is executed (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). However, the above gaming machines have a problem in that the timing for ending the time-saving game is the same for all games, so the player can immediately tell whether the time-saving game has ended or not, making the game monotonous and reducing the interest in the game. The objective is to provide a game that increases the interest in the game in the above gaming machine.

According to gaming machine E1, the timing for setting the first gaming state can be varied based on the type of end condition that has been met, so that when the end condition is met, the player can be made interested in that type as well. This has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

The gaming machine E2 has a small bonus game execution means for executing a small bonus game different from the bonus game when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, and the end condition setting means sets at least a first end condition that can be established when the dynamic display is executed and a second end condition that can be established when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the second discrimination result, and the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the corresponding dynamic display ending and the identification information being stopped and displayed when it is determined that the first end condition is established, and sets the first gaming state based on the corresponding small bonus game being executed when it is determined that the second end condition is established.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E1, gaming machine E2 provides the following effect. That is, the first gaming state is set according to the content of the end condition that has been established, so that a natural gaming experience can be provided.

A gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the gaming machine E2 has a termination condition determination means for determining whether the first termination condition or the second termination condition has been established, and the termination condition determination means determines whether the first termination condition is established in preference to the second termination condition.

Gaming machine E3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine E2. That is, when multiple end conditions are met in a single determination performed by the determination means, the first end condition is determined as a priority. This has the effect of making it difficult for a situation to occur in which the first gaming state is set based on the second end condition being met, providing the player with a sense of exclusivity.

When using the configuration of gaming machine E3, it is preferable to configure it so that when the first gaming state is set based on the second end condition being satisfied, it is more advantageous for the player than when the first gaming state is set based on the first end condition being satisfied. This has the effect of drawing the player's attention not only to whether an end condition has been satisfied, but also to the end condition that is satisfied, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine E3, the end condition determination means determines whether the first end condition is satisfied when the determination means executes a determination of 1, and determines whether the second end condition is satisfied when it is determined that the first end condition is not satisfied. Gaming machine E4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E3, gaming machine E4 has the following effect. That is, because the timing for determining whether each end condition is met is different, it is possible to determine whether the first end condition is met with higher priority than whether the second end condition is met.

Gaming machine E5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines E2 to E4, it has a game type determination means for determining the type of the small bonus game to be executed when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result, and the game type determination means determines one type from among multiple types with different periods during which the small bonus game is executed.

The gaming machine E5 can execute small bonus games with different execution periods. Therefore, the timing at which the second gaming state ends can be made to differ significantly across the gaming period during the small bonus game. This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine E6 has a variable ball entry means that can change between a first state in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than the first state, and a variable control means that variably controls the state of the variable ball entry means, and the small bonus game execution means executes variable control by the variable control means so that the variable ball entry means enters the first state as the small bonus game.

Gaming machine E6 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine E5. That is, the degree of advantage given to the player can be made to differ greatly between when the first end condition is met and the first gaming state is set and when the second end condition is met and the first gaming state is set. This allows the player to focus on both the type of end condition that is met and the type of small bonus game that is being executed. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the type of small bonus game in gaming machine E6 varies the length of time during which the variable ball entry means is in the second state during the small bonus game.

Gaming machine E7 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine E6. That is, the amount of the bonus given to the player as a small bonus game varies depending on the type of small bonus game that is set, so that the player can pay attention to the type of small bonus game being executed, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine E8 is characterized in that the type of the small bonus game in gaming machine E7 includes a plurality of types in which the length of the period during which the variable ball entry means is in the first state during the small bonus game is the same.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E7, gaming machine E8 has the effect of being able to vary the length of the period during which the second gaming state is set by varying the execution period of the small bonus games for multiple small bonus games in which the same bonus amount can be granted to the player as the small bonus games.

<Feature Group F> (Player selects multiple time-saving games)
The present invention relates to a game device comprising: a first ball entry means through which a game ball can enter; a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means through which a game ball can enter; a discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on acquiring first acquisition information that can be acquired when a game ball enters the first ball entry means and executing a second discrimination based on acquiring second acquisition information that can be acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry means; a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means; a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and a dynamic display execution means for displaying the identification information for indicating the first discrimination result on the display means. a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when a stop display is displayed; a game state setting means for setting a first game state and an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is completed; and a selection means for enabling the player to select, when the advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means, a first advantageous game for executing the first judgment and a second advantageous game that is different from the first game and for executing the second judgment.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a game ball that enters a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game that makes the lottery more likely to be executed for a predetermined period after the execution of the bonus game is executed (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). Such a gaming machine is configured to have the player execute a game in which the game ball is fired toward a game area different from the normal game when executing the above-mentioned time-saving game. The above-mentioned gaming machine can provide a sense of exclusivity by executing a different game method from the normal game during the time-saving game, which is a game state advantageous to the player, but since it only has the player execute a predetermined game method, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the interest in the game decreases. The object of the present invention is to provide a game that improves the interest in the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to gaming machine E1, the timing for setting the first gaming state can be varied based on the type of end condition that has been met, so that when the end condition is met, the player can be made interested in that type as well. This has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

The gaming machine F1 allows the player to select a game method in a favorable gaming state that gives the player an advantage, making it possible to provide the player with a wide variety of games. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine F2 is characterized in that in gaming machine F1, the bonus game executed by the first advantageous game is more advantageous to the player than the bonus game executed by the second advantageous game.

Gaming machine F3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine F1 or F2, the second advantageous game is one in which the advantageous game state is more likely to continue than the first advantageous game.

A gaming machine F4 is any one of gaming machines F1 to F3, which has a game area through which game balls can flow, and a launching means capable of varying the launch strength and capable of making game balls reach the game area, and which has a first game area through which game balls can flow, and a second game area different from the first game area through which game balls launched at a predetermined launch strength different from the first launch strength can flow, the first ball entry means is provided in the first game area, and the second ball entry means is provided in the second game area, and the selection means is for varying the launch strength of the launching means.

Gaming machine F5 is characterized in that it has a variable ball entry means that allows the gaming ball launched by the launching means to enter the game when the bonus game is executed in the gaming machine F4, and the variable ball entry means is configured to allow both gaming balls flowing down the first game area and gaming balls flowing down the second game area to enter the game.

Gaming machine F6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine F4 or F5, it has a third ball entry means that is easier to enter than the first ball entry means when the advantageous state is set, the first judgment is also executed when a gaming ball enters the third ball entry means and the first judgment condition is established, and the first advantageous game is a game in which a gaming ball is allowed to enter the third ball entry means.

Gaming machine F7 is characterized in that in gaming machine F6, the first ball entry means is provided in a third gaming area that is different from the first gaming area and the second gaming area.

Gaming machine F8 is characterized in that it is any of gaming machines F5 to F7, and has a first detection means for detecting gaming balls flowing down the first gaming area, a second detection means for detecting gaming balls flowing down the second gaming area, an active game determination means for determining the type of advantageous game currently selected based on the detection results of the first detection means and the detection results of the second detection means, and a notification means for notifying the player of information indicating the determination result of the active game determination means.

Gaming machine F9 is characterized in that in gaming machine F8, the notification means issues a notification while the bonus game is being played.

<Feature Group G> (Different time-saving fall conditions depending on the Yoshikaze type)
a variable ball entry means capable of changing between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the open state; a variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the establishment of an opening condition; a first flow path for the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means and a second flow path different from the first flow path; a distribution means for distributing the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to one of the first flow path and the second flow path; a distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state in which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is easily distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second flow path; a first ball entry means for allowing the game ball to enter based on the game ball having entered the first flow path; and a second ball entry means for allowing the game ball to enter based on the game ball having entered the second flow path. a first judgment means for executing a first judgment based on a gaming ball entering the first ball entry means; a second judgment means for executing a second judgment based on a gaming ball entering the second ball entry means; and a game state setting means for setting a first game state in which it is easier to change the variable ball entry means to the open state by the variable control means, and a second game state in which it is more difficult to change the variable ball entry means to the open state than the first game state, wherein the game state setting means sets the game state based on the first judgment made by the first judgment means or the second judgment made by the second judgment means, and when the first game state is set, it is easier to set the second game state by making the first judgment than by making the second judgment.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed that set a certain probability of a special game state in which the lottery result is advantageous after the bonus game is executed (for example, JP 2003-265765 A). However, the above gaming machines only set the special game state with a certain probability, and there was a problem that the game was prone to becoming monotonous. The objective of this invention is to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the above gaming machine.

According to gaming machine G1, it is possible to make it more difficult for the second gaming state to be set by executing the first judgment than by executing the second judgment, so that when the first gaming state is set, the player can play the game while expecting that the first judgment will be executed, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that it has a bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game when the first discrimination means produces a specific first discrimination result, and a bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game when the second discrimination means produces a specific second discrimination result, and has a ratio changing means for changing the set ratio set by the distribution state setting means for the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to the game state when the specific first discrimination result or the specific second discrimination result is produced.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G1, gaming machine G2 has the effect of diversifying the game depending on not only the discrimination result but also the game state, since the ratio of being set to either the first allocation state or the second allocation state is variable depending on the game state when a specific first discrimination result or a specific second discrimination result is obtained.

A gaming machine G3 is characterized in that a plurality of gaming states are set as the gaming state in the gaming machine G2, and the gaming machine G3 has a selection setting means for selecting and setting one gaming state from the plurality of gaming states based on the specific first discrimination result or the specific second discrimination result being obtained.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G2, gaming machine G3 has the effect of increasing interest by creating interest not only in the discrimination result but also in the set gaming state, since a selection setting means selects and sets one gaming state based on the result of a specific first discrimination or a specific second discrimination.

A gaming machine G4 is characterized in that it is any one of gaming machines G1 to G3, and has a second variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a gaming ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than in the first state, a specific area into which a gaming ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a bonus granting means that grants a bonus that is advantageous to the player when the gaming ball enters the specific area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the gaming machine G4 has the effect of diversifying the game by allowing players to play a game in which they hope the ball will land in a specific area.

A gaming machine G5, characterized in that in the gaming machine G4, the bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means sets the probability of determining the specific first discrimination result or the probability of determining the specific second discrimination result high until a predetermined condition is met.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G4, gaming machine G5 can vary the probability of determining a specific first discrimination result or a specific second discrimination result, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine G6 is characterized in that, in either gaming machine G1 or G3, when the specific first discrimination result or the specific second discrimination result is obtained, a special state setting means is provided for setting the probability of the specific first discrimination result or the specific second discrimination result to be higher than normal until a termination condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of a specific condition.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, gaming machine G6 has the effect of making the player worry about whether the end condition will be met, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

<Feature H Group> (game characteristics in which it is more advantageous to win after a specific condition is met than to win before a specific condition is met after a transition to an advantageous state)
A gaming machine H1 comprising a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, a discrimination means for making a discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, further comprising a first state setting means for setting a first state advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that, during the period from when the first state is set to when discrimination using all of the discrimination information acquired during the first state is completed, the degree of advantage for the player differs between when the bonus game is executed before a predetermined specific condition is established and when the bonus game is executed after the specific condition is established.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game if the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot is a winning game. Some such gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by allowing the player to set multiple states with different degrees of advantage and allowing the player to play a game aiming for a winning game in various states (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the player's degree of advantage remains constant while the same state is set, so the game while the same game state is set may become monotonous, making it difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In response to this, with gaming machine H1, when a bonus game is executed, the game can be played while paying attention to whether or not it is executed before a specific condition is met, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that it is provided with a second state setting means for setting a second state that is less favorable than the first state if the bonus game is not executed between the time the first state is set and the time the discrimination means completes a first predetermined number of times of discrimination, and the specific condition is established when the bonus game is not executed between the time the first state is set and the time the discrimination means completes a second number of times that is less than the first number of times.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H1, gaming machine H2 has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game because the degree of advantage of the bonus game varies depending on the number of determinations made in the first state.

A gaming machine H2 is provided with a storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, with a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit, at least until the discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, the second state is configured to make it more difficult for the discrimination information acquisition means to acquire the discrimination information than the first state, and the specific condition is established when the bonus game is not executed after the first state is set until the first number of discriminations by the discrimination means are completed. A gaming machine H3 is characterized in that:

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H2, gaming machine H3 has the effect that the degree of advantage when bonus play is executed varies based on the judgment executed until the end of the first state and the judgment based on the judgment information stored in the storage means at the time the second state is set, so that the game can be played by paying attention to the number of judgment information stored in the storage means at the time the second state is set.

A gaming machine H3, comprising a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a variable means for changing between a first position at which the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first position, and a predetermined acquisition condition is established based on the gaming ball entering at least one of the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the second state is configured such that it is more difficult for the variable means to change from the second position to the first position than in the first state. A gaming machine H4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H3, gaming machine H4 has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game because it makes it easier for the gaming ball to enter different entry means depending on whether the game is in the first state or the second state.

Any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the gaming machine H5 is provided with a third ball entry means through which the gaming ball can enter, a second variable means that can be changed between a third position where the gaming ball can enter the third ball entry means and a fourth position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the third position, a variable game execution means that executes a variable game in which the second variable means is changed from the fourth position to the third position for a predetermined period of time based on the judgment result of the judgment means becoming the specific judgment result, and a specific area that is provided in a position where the gaming ball that has entered the third ball entry means can enter, and the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game based on the gaming ball entering the specific area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, gaming machine H5 allows players to focus on whether or not the gaming ball will land in a specific area during variable play, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine H6 is characterized in that it is provided with a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball in one of a plurality of directions including at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction in response to a player's operation, the predetermined acquisition condition is configured to be more likely to be met when the gaming ball is launched in the second direction than when the gaming ball is launched in the first direction, at least in the first state, and the third ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the first direction is more likely to enter the ball than a gaming ball launched in the second direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H5, gaming machine H6 can prevent the gaming ball that was shot in the first direction from entering the specific area of the third ball entry means when a variable game is executed while the gaming ball is shot in the first direction in the first state, so that in the first state, the player can choose whether to change the shooting direction to the second direction to make the gaming ball enter the specific area, or to continue shooting the gaming ball in the first direction to end the variable game without the gaming ball entering the specific area. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines H1 to H6, the first state setting means sets the first state at a first rate as the state after the bonus game ends if the bonus game is executed before the specific condition is satisfied during the period from when the first state is set until the determination using all of the determination information acquired during the first state is completed, and sets the first state at a second rate higher than the first rate as the state after the bonus game ends if the bonus game is executed after the specific condition is satisfied. Gaming machine H7.

According to gaming machine H7, in any of gaming machines H1 to H6, the probability of the advantageous first state being set is higher if the bonus game is executed after the specific condition is met, so that the player can play the game with a stronger expectation that the bonus game will be executed after the specific condition is met. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine H8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine H7, the first state setting means sets the first state at a third rate higher than the first rate as the state after the bonus game ends when the bonus game is executed based on the specific determination result being obtained in the two states.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine H7, gaming machine H8 has the effect of preventing the second state from becoming excessively disadvantageous, since the rate at which the advantageous first state is set is higher in the unfavorable second state than in the first state before the specific condition is met.

<Feature I Group> (The player is allowed to select the timing for executing the highly anticipated special 2 lottery during the time-saving period)
A gaming machine I1 comprising a discrimination means for making a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, the gaming machine I1 further comprising: a first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, and a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state less advantageous to the player than the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the first gaming state, the first gaming state being configured such that, by playing a first gaming method, the bonus game is more difficult to execute and the specific condition is more difficult to establish, and, by playing a second gaming method different from the first gaming method, the bonus game is more easily executed and the specific condition is more easily established than when playing the first gaming method.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game if the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot is a winning game. Some such gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by allowing the player to set multiple states with different degrees of advantage and allowing the player to play a game aiming for a winning game in various states (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, if the player does not play using the same game method while the same game state is set, it may be disadvantageous to the player, so while the same game state is set, the game method corresponding to that game state must be continued to be executed. This may result in the game becoming monotonous, making it difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In response to this, gaming machine I1 can vary the gameplay depending on whether the game is played using the first game method or the second game method, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine I1, the discrimination means is composed of at least a first discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, the first discrimination means is configured so that when a discrimination is executed, it becomes more difficult to execute the bonus game and the specific condition becomes more difficult to be established than the discrimination of the second discrimination means, the first gaming method is configured so that the discrimination of the first discrimination means is more easily executed than the discrimination of the second discrimination means, and the second gaming method is configured so that the discrimination of the second discrimination means is more easily executed than the discrimination of the first discrimination means. Gaming machine I2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I1, gaming machine I2 can vary the playability in the first gaming state depending on the type of discrimination means by which the discrimination is performed, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the specific condition is established in accordance with the first determination means having executed a predetermined first number of determinations without the bonus game being executed after the first gaming state is set and the specific condition is established in accordance with the second determination means having executed a second number of determinations, which is less than the first number of determinations, without the bonus game being executed after the second gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I2, gaming machine I3 has the effect of allowing a player to play a game while paying attention to the number of determinations made by the first determination means and the number of determinations made by the second determination means.

A gaming machine I4, which is equipped with a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball in a gaming machine I2 or I3, a first ball-entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball launched by the launching means in a specific direction predetermined for the gaming machine can enter the game machine, a second ball-entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the specific direction can enter the game machine and different from the first ball-entry means, a first discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on a gaming ball entering the first ball-entry means, and a second discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring the discrimination information based on a gaming ball entering the second ball-entry means, wherein the first discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and the second discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines I2 and I3, gaming machine I4 has the effect of improving convenience for the player by enabling both the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means to be executed by launching the gaming ball in a specific direction in the first gaming state.

A gaming machine I5, which is characterized in that it comprises a first storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, with a predetermined first number of pieces of information as an upper limit, until it is used for discrimination by the first discrimination means, and a second storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, with a predetermined second number of pieces of information as an upper limit, until it is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, in which the second discrimination means is configured to suppress execution of discrimination when one or more pieces of discrimination information are stored in the first storage means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I4, gaming machine I5 can be configured to prioritize the determination of the first determination means in the first gaming state, in which the specific condition is unlikely to be met even if a determination is made, so that the first gaming state can be made to continue for a long time. This allows the player to enjoy the first gaming state for a longer period of time, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine I6 is characterized in that the second gaming method in gaming machine I5 is a gaming method in which, when one or more pieces of discrimination information are stored in the second storage means, a game is played such that the launch of a gaming ball is suppressed until the discrimination information stored in the second storage means is used for discrimination.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I5, gaming machine I6 can make it more difficult for the first discrimination means to make a decision by implementing the second gaming method, making it easier to play bonus games. This has the effect of making the player feel a higher sense of expectation for each decision.

In any one of gaming machines I4 to I6, a first variable means is provided which can be changed between a first position where a gaming ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means than the first position, a second variable means is provided which can be changed between a third position where a gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than the third position, a passing means provided at a position where a gaming ball shot in the specific direction can pass through, a third ball entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball that has passed through the passing means can enter, a fourth ball entry means different from the third ball entry means and provided at a position where a gaming ball that has passed through the passing means can enter, and a gaming ball that has passed through the passing means is passed through the third ball entry means and the fourth ball entry means. a ball means; a third variable means that can change the position between a fifth position where the game ball launched in the specific direction can pass through the passing means and a sixth position where it is more difficult for the game ball to pass through the passing means than the fifth position; and a variable control means that controls the variable means to change from the sixth position to the fifth position for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition, the first variable means being configured to change from the second position to the first position based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means, and the second variable means being configured to change from the fourth position to the third position based on the game ball entering the fourth ball entry means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I4 to I6, gaming machine I7 allows players to play while paying attention to the type of ball entry means into which the gaming balls that have passed through the passing means are sorted by the sorting means, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine I8 is characterized in that in gaming machine I7, the variable condition is configured to be more easily established in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I7, gaming machine I8 has the effect of allowing the game ball to pass through the passing means more easily in the first game state, making it possible to play more efficiently.

Gaming machine I9 is characterized in that in gaming machine I7 or I8, the first gaming state is configured so that gaming balls that have passed through the passing means are more likely to be distributed to the third ball entry means than to the fourth ball entry means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines I7 and I8, gaming machine I9 has the effect of making it easier for the first discrimination means to discriminate, since it is more likely that the first ball entry means will be able to enter the game ball when the gaming ball passes through the passing means than the second ball entry means.

Gaming machine I10 is characterized in that it is provided with a second bonus game execution means for executing the bonus game based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition that can be established based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a second determination result different from the specific determination result, in any one of gaming machines I2 to I9, and the second determination means is configured to have a higher probability of the determination result becoming the second determination result than the first determination means.

In addition to the effect of any of gaming machines I2 to I9, gaming machine I10 allows the player to play in the hope of not only a specific judgment result but also the second judgment result when the second judgment means is executed, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine I10 includes a variable ball entry means that is configured to be variable between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first state, and has a specific area in which the game ball can enter; and a variable game execution means that executes a variable game in which the variable ball entry means changes from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time based on the determination result of the determination means becoming the second determination result, and the execution condition is established based on the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means entering the specific area. Gaming machine I11.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I10, gaming machine I11 allows players to focus on whether or not the gaming ball will enter a specific area when a variable game is executed, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature J Group> (Gameplay characteristics in which the probability of winning is higher after an advantageous state ends than during the advantageous state)
A gaming machine J1 having a first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination, which is more advantageous to a player than the first discrimination, based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, further comprising a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the first discrimination condition is likely to be established and a second game state which is more disadvantageous to a player than the first game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, wherein the gaming machine is configured to form a first state in which the second discrimination condition is more likely to be established than the first game state if a predetermined specific condition is established when the setting condition is established in the first game state and the second game state is set.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game if the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot is a winning game. Some such gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by allowing the player to set multiple states with different degrees of advantage and allowing the player to play a game aiming for a winning game in various states (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).

However, with such conventional gaming machines, there was a risk that a player's motivation to play would decrease if the game state shifted from an advantageous state to an unfavorable state.

In contrast, with gaming machine J1, even if an unfavorable second gaming state is set, the favorable second discrimination condition is more likely to be met while the first state is formed, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game when the first state is formed.

Gaming machine J2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine J1, when the set condition is met in the first gaming state and the second gaming state is set, the gaming machine is configured to create a second state in which the second discrimination condition is less likely to be met than in the first state unless a predetermined specific condition is met.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine J1, gaming machine J2 can increase the player's interest in the game by allowing the player to play while paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is met at the time the second game state is set.

Gaming machine J3 is characterized in that it is provided with a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on whether the determination result of the first determination means or the determination result of the second determination means becomes a predetermined specific determination result in gaming machine J1 or J2, the first determination means being configured to obtain the specific determination result with a predetermined first probability, and the second determination means being configured to obtain the specific determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines J1 and J2, gaming machine J3 has a high probability of producing a specific judgment result even after the advantageous first gaming state ends until a specific condition is met, so that the player can play the game while feeling hopeful about a bonus game, at least until the specific condition is met. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine J4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine J3, the gaming machine is configured to create a second state in which the second discrimination condition is less likely to be met than in the first state, without changing the gaming state, based on the fact that a predetermined first condition is met in the first state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine J3, gaming machine J4 can create multiple states with different degrees of advantage as the second gaming state, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In any one of gaming machines J1 to J4, a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring first discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the first discrimination means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first ball entry means, a second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring second discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry means, a first storage means for storing the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for discrimination by the first discrimination means, and a second discrimination information acquisition means for storing the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, and a second storage means capable of storing the information until it is used to determine whether the ball is in the first or second ball entry means, the first determination means performs the first determination using the first determination information stored in the first storage means, the second determination means performs the second determination using the second determination information stored in the second storage means, the first determination is configured to be performed in priority to the second determination, the first game state is configured so that a game ball can enter both the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the second game state is configured so that it is more difficult for a game ball to enter at least the second ball entry means than in the first game state.

In addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the gaming machine J5 has the effect that the determination of the first determination means is executed with priority, so that at the end of the first gaming state, more second determination information can be stored in the second storage means.

Gaming machine J5 is provided with a variable means that can change between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means than the first position, and the first gaming state is configured so that the variable means is more easily changed from the second position to the first position than in the second gaming state, and the first state is configured in a state in which the second gaming state is set and at least one of the second discrimination information is stored in the second storage means. Gaming machine J6.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine J5, gaming machine J6 has the effect of being able to store more second determination information in the second storage means while the determination of the second determination means is being performed with priority, so that when the second gaming state is set, the first state can be more reliably formed.

Gaming machine J6 is provided with a third ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, the first discrimination information acquisition means acquires the first discrimination information based on the gaming ball entering at least one of the first ball entry means and the third ball entry means, and the second gaming state is configured so that a gaming ball is more likely to enter the third ball entry means than the first ball entry means, and a gaming ball is more likely to enter the third ball entry means than the second ball entry means. Gaming machine J7.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine J6, gaming machine J7 can vary the ball entry method that is easier to enter depending on the game state, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Any of gaming machines J1 to J7, comprising a fourth ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second variable means capable of changing between a third position at which a gaming ball can enter the fourth ball entry means and a fourth position at which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the third position, a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the second variable means is changed from the fourth position to the third position for a predetermined period of time based on the judgment result of the judgment means becoming the specific judgment result, and a specific area provided at a position where a gaming ball that has entered the fourth ball entry means can enter, and the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game based on the entry of a gaming ball into the specific area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines J1 to J7, gaming machine J8 allows players to play with the strong expectation that the gaming ball will land in a specific area when a variable game is executed, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature K Group> (Suppresses the increase in reserves immediately after the end of an advantageous state)
In a gaming machine having an entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a variable means for varying between a first position at which the gaming ball can enter the entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first position, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the entry of the gaming ball into the entry means, a discrimination means for executing a discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means, A gaming machine K1 comprising: a first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state based on the establishment of a set condition; a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state in which the variable means is more difficult to change from the second position to the first position than in the first gaming state based on the establishment of a second set condition in the first gaming state; and a control means capable of controlling so that it is more difficult for a gaming ball to enter the ball entry means at least when the variable means is in a state in which it is changed to the first position both before and after the establishment of the second set condition.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute bonus games when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a predetermined outcome. Some such gaming machines allow the setting of multiple game states with different degrees of advantage for the player, making it easier to execute the lottery when a game state that is advantageous to the player is set (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).

However, depending on the timing of switching from a favorable game state to an unfavorable game state, a situation may arise in which it is possible to execute a lottery in the same way as in the favorable game state, even though an unfavorable game state has been set, and this creates the problem that it is not possible to equalize the expectation of a bonus game in an unfavorable game state.

In response to this, gaming machine K1 can prevent the gaming ball from entering the ball entry means immediately after the second setting condition is met, which has the effect of equalizing the expectation of the bonus game in the first gaming state 1.

A gaming machine K2 is characterized in that it is provided with a second ball entry means through which the gaming ball can enter, and the control means controls the gaming machine K2 so that the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means more easily than the ball entry means at least when the variable means is in a state in which it is variable to the first position both before and after the second setting condition is met.

In addition to the effects of game machine K1, game machine K2 has the effect of more reliably preventing the game ball from entering the ball entry means immediately after the second setting condition is met.

In the gaming machine K2, the discrimination information acquisition means acquires the discrimination information based on a gaming ball entering at least one of the ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the discrimination means is configured so that the probability of the specific discrimination result being obtained is higher when discrimination is performed using the discrimination information acquired based on a gaming ball entering the ball entry means than when discrimination is performed using the discrimination information acquired based on a gaming ball entering the second ball entry means. A gaming machine K3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine K2, gaming machine K3 has the effect of preventing advantageous judgments that are likely to result in specific judgment results from being made too frequently even after the second gaming state has been set.

A gaming machine K4 is characterized in that it is provided with a specific flow path that allows game balls to flow in when the variable means is located at the first position and is located at a position where it is difficult for game balls to flow in when the variable means is located at the second position, and a distribution means that distributes game balls that have flowed down the specific flow path to either the ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the control means controls the distribution means so that game balls are more likely to be distributed to the second ball entry means by the distribution means at least for a predetermined period of time after the second setting condition is established.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines K2 and K3, gaming machine K4 has the effect of reliably preventing gaming balls from being distributed to the ball entry means after the second gaming state is set.

In the gaming machine K4, the control means controls the distribution means so that a first distribution state in which game balls that reach the distribution means are distributed to the ball entry means and a second distribution state in which game balls are distributed to the second ball entry means are switched in a predetermined specific switching pattern, and the specific switching pattern is configured so that the proportion of the period set to the second distribution state is likely to be higher than the proportion of the period set to the first distribution state in the specified period, and the gaming machine K5 is configured so that the proportion of the period set to the first distribution state is higher than the specified period in at least a portion of the period from when the first gaming state is set to when the second setting condition is met.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine K4, gaming machine K5 has the effect of allowing the player to play while paying attention to the state of the distribution means, since in the first gaming state, the ease of scoring into the scoring means can be varied depending on the distribution state of the distribution means.

Gaming machine K6 is characterized in that in gaming machine K5, the control means controls the allocation means with the specific switching pattern based on the first gaming state being set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine K5, gaming machine K6 has the effect of reducing the processing load by simply executing control to set a specific switching pattern each time the first state is set.

<Feature L Group> (Winning during the time-saving pullback is more advantageous than winning during the special state)
A gaming machine L1 equipped with a discrimination means which makes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a bonus game execution means which executes a bonus game which is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result, further comprising a game state setting means which sets one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state, a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, wherein the gaming machine is configured so that the degree of advantage of a predetermined element related to the degree of advantage is more likely to be higher in the second game state while the predetermined first condition is established than in the third game state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game if the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot is a winning game. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by allowing the player to set multiple states with different degrees of advantage and allowing the player to play a game aiming for a winning game in various states (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, there is a risk that a player's motivation to play may decrease when a game state transitions from an advantageous to an unfavorable game state. In addition, some conventional gaming machines do not transition directly from an advantageous first game state (e.g., a special probability state) to the most unfavorable second game state (e.g., a normal state), but transition to a third game state (e.g., a time-saving state) that is intermediate between the first and second game states, and transition back to the first game state only if a win does not occur in the third game state.

However, even in gaming machines with such specifications, the degree of advantage decreases when the game state transitions to the second game state, making it difficult to fundamentally prevent a decrease in motivation to play. As a result, there was a risk that it would be difficult to increase the player's interest in playing the game.

In contrast, with gaming machine L1, while the first condition is met, the second gaming state, which has a lower degree of advantage, has a higher degree of advantage for the specified element, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine L2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that it is more likely to be advantageous to obtain the specific determination result while the first condition is satisfied in the second gaming state than to obtain the specific determination result in the third gaming state.

Gaming machine L3, in which the game state setting means in gaming machine L1 or L2 sets the second game state based on the establishment of a specific condition that has been determined in advance in the third game state, and the gaming machine is configured such that the degree of advantage of the predetermined element is more likely to be higher when the specific determination result is reached in the second game state that has been set based on the establishment of the specific condition than when the specific determination result is reached in the third game state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines L1 and L2, gaming machine L3 allows the player to play in the third gaming state while hoping that a specific condition will not be met, and when a specific condition is met and the second gaming state is set, the degree of advantage of a specific element increases, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine L3, the gaming state setting means is configured to be able to set the second gaming state when the specific condition is met in the third gaming state and when a predetermined second condition is met in the first gaming state, and the gaming machine is configured such that the degree of advantage of the predetermined element is more likely to be higher in the second gaming state set based on the specific condition being met than in the second gaming state set based on the second condition being met. Gaming machine L4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine L3, gaming machine L4 has the effect of realizing a novel gameplay in which the degree of advantage can be varied even in the same second gaming state.

Gaming machine L5 is characterized in that in gaming machine L3 or L4, the specific condition is at least composed of a first specific condition and a second specific condition different from the first specific condition, and the gaming machine is configured such that the degree of advantage of the predetermined element is more likely to be higher in the second gaming state set based on the establishment of the first specific condition than in the third gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines L3 and L4, gaming machine L5 has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game, since it can be expected that the first specific condition will be met in the third game state more strongly than that the second specific condition will be met.

Gaming machine L5 is equipped with a type determination means for determining one type of bonus game from among a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game as the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, and the gaming state setting means determines that the second specific condition is met when the specific determination result is reached in the third gaming state and the first bonus game is determined by the type determination means, and sets the gaming state after the end of the first bonus game to the second gaming state.

According to gaming machine L5, when the first bonus game is determined in the third gaming state, not only is an unfavorable second gaming state set, but the degree of advantage of a predetermined element is also reduced, so that when a specific determination result is reached in the third gaming state, the player can play in the hope that the first bonus game will not be determined.

In the gaming machine L6, the gaming state setting means is configured to be able to set the gaming state after the end of the second bonus game to the third gaming state when the specific determination result is reached in the third gaming state and the type determination means has determined the second bonus game, and the gaming machine is equipped with a control means that controls the gaming state setting means to set the second gaming state if a predetermined specific setting condition is established when the specific determination result is reached in the third gaming state and the type determination means has determined the second bonus game, and the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state by determining that the control means has controlled the second gaming state to be set as the establishment of the first specific condition.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine L6, gaming machine L7 has the effect that when the second bonus game is determined in the third gaming state, either the advantageous third gaming state is set, or the degree of advantage of a predetermined element is increased even if the second gaming state is set, so that when a specific determination result is reached in the third gaming state, the player can play with a stronger expectation that the second bonus game will be determined.

Gaming machine L8 is characterized in that in gaming machine L7, the specific setting condition is established based on the second bonus game being determined a predetermined number of times in succession.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine L7, gaming machine L8 has the effect of allowing a player to play in the hope of deciding on the second bonus game a specific number of times.

Gaming machine L9 is characterized in that, in gaming machine L5 or L6, it is provided with a second discrimination means for making a second discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition in the third gaming state, and the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state when the discrimination result of the second discrimination means becomes a predetermined first discrimination result, which is the establishment of the second specific condition.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines L5 and L6, gaming machine L9 has the effect of mitigating the disappointment felt by the player when the first judgment result is obtained in the third gaming state and the second gaming state, which has a lower degree of advantage, is set.

In the gaming machine L9, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state based on the fact that the second discrimination means has determined the first discrimination result before the first predetermined number of discriminations have been completed since the third gaming state was set, and sets the first gaming state based on the fact that the second discrimination means has determined the first discrimination result after the first predetermined number of discriminations have been completed since the third gaming state was set. Gaming machine L10.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine L9, gaming machine L10 has the effect of mitigating the player's disappointment when the first judgment result is reached after a small number of judgments in the third gaming state.

<Feature M Group> (Chance zone after the pullback time reduction ends)
a first bonus game and a second bonus game more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game, as a type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means; a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the second bonus game is determined at a first rate by the type determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state; and a state control means for controlling the game state to be a special state in which the second bonus game is more likely to be determined at a rate higher than the first rate, until a predetermined specific condition is established, based on the establishment of the setting condition in the second game state and the setting of another game state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game if the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot is a winning game. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by allowing the player to set multiple states with different degrees of advantage and allowing the player to play a game aiming for a winning game in various states (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).

However, with such conventional gaming machines, when a game state shifts from advantageous to unfavorable, the player is satisfied because he or she was able to play in the advantageous game state, and this makes it difficult for the player to want to continue playing.

In addition, some of these conventional gaming machines do not transition directly from an advantageous first gaming state (e.g., a special probability state) to the least advantageous second gaming state (e.g., a normal state), but transition to a third gaming state (e.g., a time-saving state) that is intermediate between the first and second gaming states, and transition back to the first gaming state only if no winning occurs in the third gaming state.

However, even with gaming machines with such specifications, there is a problem in that the player may become satisfied with the game when the second gaming state ends, making it difficult to maintain the player's motivation after the game state transitions from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. This causes a problem in that it becomes difficult to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine after the game state transitions to the first gaming state.

In contrast, with gaming machine M1, a special state is set when the game state transitions from the advantageous second game state to another game state, which makes the player want to continue playing while in the special state. This has the effect of improving the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In gaming machine M1, the state control means controls the special state based on the first gaming state being set by the establishment of the setting condition in the second state, until the specific condition is established. Gaming machine M2.

According to gaming machine M2, when the game moves from the advantageous second gaming state to the less advantageous first gaming state, a special state is entered, which prevents the player from quitting the game when the second gaming state ends. This has the effect of improving the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In gaming machine M1 or M2, the discrimination means is composed of at least a first discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, the type determination means is configured to make it easier to determine the second bonus game when the discrimination result of the second discrimination means is the specific discrimination result than when the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is the specific discrimination result, and the state control means controls the special state so that the discrimination of the first discrimination means is more difficult to execute than the discrimination of the second discrimination means. Gaming machine M3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines M1 and M2, gaming machine M3 has the effect that during a special state, the second discrimination means is more likely to make a discrimination, so that a player can play the game with a stronger expectation of a specific discrimination result during the special state.

In the gaming machine M3, a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball, a first ball entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in a first direction by the launching means can enter, a second ball entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the first direction can enter and different from the first ball entry means, a third ball entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the first direction has difficulty entering and where a gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter, a variable means capable of changing between a first position where a gaming ball can enter the third ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for a gaming ball to enter than the first position, and a discrimination means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first ball entry means. a first discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information to be used for discriminating between the first and second ball entry means and the third ball entry means, and a second discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring the discrimination information based on a game ball entering at least one of the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means, the first discrimination means performs discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, the second discrimination means performs discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, and the change means is configured to make it easier to change from the second position to the first position in the second game state than in the first game state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine M3, gaming machine M4 has the effect of being able to execute a judgment by the second judgment means even in the second gaming state in which no special state is set, so that a game can be played with a strong expectation that a specific judgment result will be obtained by the judgment of the second judgment means.

A gaming machine M5, which is equipped with dynamic display means at least consisting of a display means capable of displaying identification information, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information to show the discrimination result of the first discrimination means, and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information to show the discrimination result of the second discrimination means, and a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period for the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, and the state control means controls the dynamic display period for the dynamic display of the identification information by the first dynamic display means to be longer than the dynamic display period for the dynamic display of the identification information by the second dynamic display means, as the special state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines M3 and M4, gaming machine M5 has the advantage that, in a special state, when the first discrimination means makes a judgment, a long dynamic display period is more likely to be set, and it is possible to make the second discrimination means make a judgment multiple times during the long dynamic display period. This has the effect of increasing the possibility that a specific discrimination result will be obtained by the discrimination of the second discrimination means.

Gaming machine M6 is characterized in that in gaming machine M5, the dynamic display means is configured to be capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the identification information by the first dynamic display means and dynamically displaying the identification information by the second dynamic display means.

The gaming machine M6 has the effect of enabling the determination by the first determination means and the determination by the second determination means to be performed more efficiently.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the gaming state setting means sets one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, and the second gaming state is configured to be set by the gaming state setting means based on the establishment of a specific setting condition in the third gaming state. Gaming machine M7.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, gaming machine M7 has the effect of creating a special state to mitigate the player's disappointment when the advantageous third gaming state ends and the second gaming state is set, and then the second gaming state ends and the game transitions to the unfavorable first gaming state.

In any one of gaming machines M1 to M7, the gaming state setting means sets another gaming state when the determination means has completed a predetermined specific number of determinations without the bonus game being executed since the second gaming state was set, as the establishment of the setting condition, gaming machine M8.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, gaming machine M8 has the effect of mitigating the disappointment felt by the player when a bonus game is not executed in the advantageous second gaming state and the game state transitions to another gaming state.

<Feature N group> (a game characteristic in which, during an advantageous state, it is easier to gain an advantage by firing game balls at a second firing interval that is longer than the first firing interval, rather than firing game balls at a first firing interval)
A gaming machine N1 is provided with an operating means operable by a player and a launching means capable of launching game balls in accordance with the operation content of the operating means, and further comprises a game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state that is disadvantageous to the player and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that, in the second game state, while at least a predetermined specific condition is established, it is more likely to be advantageous to operate the operating means with a second operation content that makes it easier for game balls to be launched at a launch interval longer than the first launch interval, than to operate the operating means with a first operation content that makes it easier for game balls to be launched by the launching means at a first launch interval.

The gaming machine N1 offers a novel gaming experience in which a longer firing interval gives an advantage, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine N1 comprising: a ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter; a discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined discrimination information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means; a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result; and a gaming machine N2 characterized in that, while the specific condition is established, the discrimination means is more likely to make a discrimination count by operating the operation means with the second operation content than by operating the operation means with the first operation content until discrimination using all of the discrimination information acquired in the second game state is completed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine N1, gaming machine N2 can achieve a novel gameplay in which the longer the firing interval, the more times the discrimination means makes a discrimination, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine N2, comprising a second ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring the discrimination information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry means, and a storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, with a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit, until it is used for the discrimination of the discrimination means, the discrimination means being composed of at least a first discrimination means that executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and a second discrimination means that executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, the discrimination of the first discrimination means being configured to more easily produce a favorable discrimination result than the discrimination of the second discrimination means, and the gaming machine being configured such that, while the specific condition is established, the first discrimination means is more likely to make a discrimination count by the first discrimination means until the discrimination using all of the discrimination information acquired in the second game state is completed when the operation means is operated with the second operation content than when the operation means is operated with the first operation content.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine N2, gaming machine N3 can achieve a novel gameplay in which the number of judgments made by the first judgment means, which has a high degree of advantage, can be varied according to the operation content while a specific condition is established, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine N4 is characterized in that in gaming machine N3, the determination of the second determination means is configured to be executed in priority over the determination of the first determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine N3, gaming machine N4 has the effect of giving priority to the judgment of the second judgment means, which has a lower degree of advantage, and thus making the player more likely to desire to make more judgments of the second judgment means.

In gaming machine N3 or N4, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the fact that the first discrimination means has completed a predetermined first number of discriminations in the second gaming state without the bonus game being played, and gaming machine N5 is characterized in that the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the fact that the second discrimination means has completed a second number of discriminations, which is greater than the first number of discriminations, in the second gaming state without the bonus game being played.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines N3 and N4, gaming machine N5 has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game, since the conditions for setting the first game state can be made different between the number of determinations made by the first determination means and the number of determinations made by the second determination means.

Gaming machine N6 is any one of gaming machines N2 to N5, and is equipped with a display means capable of displaying identification information and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information to show the result of the determination by the determination means, and is characterized in that the second operation content is configured as an operation content that makes it easier for the gaming ball to be launched so that it enters the ball entry means when the dynamic display of the identification information is not being executed.

In addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines N2 to N5, gaming machine N6 can be configured such that, by performing the second operation content, a period during which dynamic display is not being executed is likely to occur, making it easier for the period during which the advantageous second gaming state is set to be longer. This has the effect of allowing the player to enjoy the second gaming state for a longer period of time.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N6, the launching means is configured to be able to launch gaming balls at a launch interval equal to or greater than a predetermined specific launch interval in accordance with the operation content of the operating means, and gaming machine N7 is characterized in that the operation of the first operation content is configured as an operation content that makes it easier for the launching means to launch gaming balls at the specific launch interval.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines N1 to N6, the operation of the first operation content of the gaming machine N7 is composed of a relatively simple operation of firing game balls at the shortest firing intervals, and can be easily performed regardless of the skill of the player. This has the effect of improving convenience for the player.

<Feature O group> (game characteristics in which it is more advantageous to win after a specific condition is met than to win before a specific condition is met after a transition to an advantageous state)
A gaming machine O1 comprising a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, a discrimination means for executing a discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, the gaming machine further comprising a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, the gaming machine being configured such that, during the period from when the first game state is set to when discrimination using all of the discrimination information acquired during the first game state is completed, the degree of advantage for the player differs between when the specific discrimination result is obtained before a predetermined specific condition is established and when the specific discrimination result is obtained after the specific condition is established.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game if the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot is a winning game. Some such gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by allowing the player to set multiple states with different degrees of advantage and allowing the player to play a game aiming for a winning game in various states (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the player's degree of advantage remains constant while the same state is set, so the game while the same game state is set may become monotonous, making it difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In contrast, with gaming machine O1, when a specific judgment result is reached, the game can be played while focusing on whether or not a specific condition has yet to be met, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine O2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine O1, during the period from when the first gaming state is set until the determination using all of the determination information acquired during the first gaming state is completed, it is more likely to be advantageous for the player if the specific determination result is obtained after a predetermined specific condition is met than if the specific determination result is obtained before the specific condition is met.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine O1, gaming machine O2 has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game, since when the game state is transitioned to the first game state, the player can play the game in the hope of a specific judgment result being obtained after a specific condition is met.

A gaming machine O3, in which the gaming state setting means in the gaming machine O1 or O2 sets a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state, based on the fact that a second determination result different from the specific determination result is obtained in succession over a predetermined specific number of determinations by the determination means after the first gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines O1 and O2, gaming machine O3 can increase the player's interest in the game by making the player expect a specific judgment result to be reached before a specific number of judgments are completed in the first game state.

A gaming machine O3, characterized in that the specific condition is established based on the second determination result being obtained consecutively over a second number of determinations by the determination means that is less than or equal to the specific number of determinations after the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine O4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine O3, gaming machine O4 has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game because the degree of advantage of the bonus game varies depending on the number of judgments made in the first game state.

A gaming machine O4 is provided with a storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, with a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit, at least until the discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, the second gaming state is configured to make it more difficult for the discrimination information acquisition means to acquire the discrimination information than the first gaming state, and the specific condition is established when, after the first gaming state is set, the second discrimination result is obtained continuously over the specific number of discriminations by the discrimination means. A gaming machine O5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine O4, gaming machine O5 has the effect that the degree of advantage when bonus play is executed varies depending on the judgment executed until the end of the first gaming state and the judgment based on the judgment information stored in the storage means at the time the second gaming state is set, so that the game can be played by paying attention to the number of judgment information stored in the storage means at the time the second gaming state is set.

<Feature P group> (allowing the player to select the timing for executing the highly anticipated special 2 lottery during the time-saving period)
A gaming machine P1 comprising a first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, and a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state having a different degree of advantage from the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the first gaming state, wherein the first gaming state is configured such that the specific condition is less likely to be established by playing a first gaming method, and the specific condition is more likely to be established by playing a second gaming method different from the first gaming method than by playing the first gaming method.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game if the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot is a winning game. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by allowing the player to set multiple states with different degrees of advantage and allowing the player to play a game aiming for a winning game in various states (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, if the player does not play using the same game method while the same game state is set, it may be disadvantageous to the player, so while the same game state is set, the game method corresponding to that game state must be continued to be executed. This may result in the game becoming monotonous, making it difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In contrast, gaming machine P1 can provide different gameplay depending on whether the game is played using the first game method or the second game method, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine P2 comprising a discrimination means for discriminating based on the establishment of a discrimination condition in a gaming machine P1, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and characterized in that the first gaming state is configured such that playing with the first gaming method makes it difficult to execute the bonus game and makes it difficult to establish the specific condition, and playing with the second gaming method makes it easier to execute the bonus game and makes it easier to establish the specific condition than playing with the first gaming method.

The gaming machine P2 can provide greater variation in gameplay depending on whether the game is played using the first game method or the second game method, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine P2, the discrimination means is composed of at least a first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, the first discrimination means is configured so that when the discrimination is executed, it becomes more difficult to execute the bonus game and the specific condition becomes more difficult to be established than the discrimination of the second discrimination means, the first gaming method is configured as a gaming method in which the discrimination of the first discrimination means is more easily executed than the discrimination of the second discrimination means, and the second gaming method is configured as a gaming method in which the discrimination of the second discrimination means is more easily executed than the discrimination of the first discrimination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine P2, gaming machine P3 has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game, since the playability in the first gaming state can be varied depending on the type of discrimination means by which the discrimination is performed.

A gaming machine P3, characterized in that the specific condition is established based on the first determination means having executed a predetermined first number of determinations without the bonus game being executed after the first gaming state is set, and the specific condition is established based on the second determination means having executed a second number of determinations, less than the first number of determinations, without the bonus game being executed after the second gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine P3, gaming machine P4 has the effect of allowing a player to play a game while paying attention to the number of determinations made by the first determination means and the number of determinations made by the second determination means.

A gaming machine P5, which is equipped with a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball in a gaming machine P3 or P4, a first ball entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball launched by the launching means in a specific direction predetermined can enter the machine, a second ball entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the specific direction can enter the machine and different from the first ball entry means, a first discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on a gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, and a second discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring the discrimination information based on a gaming ball entering the second ball entry means, wherein the first discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and the second discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines P3 and P4, gaming machine P5 has the effect of improving convenience for the player by enabling both the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means to be executed by launching the gaming ball in a specific direction in the first gaming state.

Among the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the necessary condition being that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the gaming medium include coins, medals, etc.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, which is operated to launch a ball into a predetermined gaming area, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, as a necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) according to the number of winning balls is given.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine having a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information as a necessary condition, using balls as a gaming medium, and a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state is generated."
＜Other＞
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a winning game. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by allowing the player to set multiple states with different degrees of advantage and play a game aiming for a winning game in various states (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).
However, there is a demand for further improvement.
This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's interest in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises a discrimination means which executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a bonus game execution means which executes a bonus game which is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result, and a game state setting means which sets one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state, a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the gaming machine is configured so that the degree of advantage of a predetermined element related to the degree of advantage is more likely to be higher in the second game state while the predetermined first condition is established than in the third game state.
A gaming machine of technical idea 2 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1, wherein the gaming machine is configured so that it is more likely to be advantageous if the specific judgment result is obtained while the first condition is satisfied in the second gaming state than if the specific judgment result is obtained in the third gaming state.
A gaming machine of technical idea 3 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, in which the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the third gaming state, and the gaming machine is configured so that the degree of advantage of the specified element is more likely to be higher when the specific discrimination result is obtained in the second gaming state set based on the establishment of the specific condition than when the specific discrimination result is obtained in the third gaming state.
A gaming machine of technical idea 4 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 3, wherein the gaming state setting means is configured to be able to set the second gaming state when the specific condition is fulfilled in the third gaming state and when a predetermined second condition is fulfilled in the first gaming state, and the gaming machine is configured such that the degree of advantage of the specified element is more likely to be higher in the second gaming state set based on the specific condition being fulfilled than in the second gaming state set based on the second condition being fulfilled.
A gaming machine of technical idea 5 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 3 or 4, in which the specific condition is at least composed of a first specific condition and a second specific condition different from the first specific condition, and the gaming machine is configured so that the degree of advantage of the specified element is more likely to be higher in the second gaming state set based on the establishment of the first specific condition than in the third gaming state.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the gaming machine is provided with a discrimination means which executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a bonus game execution means which executes a bonus game which is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result, and a game state setting means which sets one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state, a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the gaming machine is configured so that the degree of advantage of a predetermined element related to the degree of advantage is more likely to be higher in the second game state while the predetermined first condition is established than in the third game state.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the gaming machine is configured so that it is more likely to be advantageous if the specific judgment result is obtained while the first condition is satisfied in the second gaming state, than if the specific judgment result is obtained in the third gaming state.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines described in Technical Idea 1 or 2, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the third gaming state, and the gaming machine is configured so that the degree of advantage of the specified element is more likely to be higher when the specific discrimination result is obtained in the second gaming state set based on the establishment of the specific condition than when the specific discrimination result is obtained in the third gaming state.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3, the gaming state setting means is configured to be able to set the second gaming state when the specific condition is fulfilled in the third gaming state and when a predetermined second condition is fulfilled in the first gaming state, and the gaming machine is configured so that the degree of advantage of the specified element is more likely to be higher in the second gaming state set based on the specific condition being fulfilled than in the second gaming state set based on the second condition being fulfilled.
This has the effect of realizing novel gameplay in which the degree of advantage can be varied even in the same second game state.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3 or 4, the specific condition is at least composed of a first specific condition and a second specific condition different from the first specific condition, and the gaming machine is configured so that the degree of advantage of the specified element is more likely to be higher in the second gaming state set based on the establishment of the first specific condition than in the third gaming state.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
S215 Part of the advantageous game execution means in the seventh embodiment
S237: Predetermined state setting means in the seventh embodiment
S1622 Specific state setting means in the seventh embodiment
S1673, S1676, S1679 Game status setting means
S1717 Part of the advantageous game execution means in the seventh embodiment
S1815: Part of the determination means S1876: Part of the bonus game execution means S1925: Part of the determination means S1975: Part of the bonus game execution means

Claims (1)

An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A determination means for performing a determination using the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means ;
A game machine including: an advantageous game execution means capable of executing an advantageous game advantageous to a player based on the judgment result of the judgment means becoming a specific judgment result;
A determination means for determining one of a plurality of advantageous games including at least a specific advantageous game as the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game execution means;
A specific state setting means for setting a specific state advantageous to a player as a state after a game state relating to at least the specific advantageous game is ended ;
a predetermined state setting means for setting a predetermined state having a lower degree of advantage than the specific state based on a judgment result different from the specific judgment result being consecutively obtained over a predetermined number of judgments of the judgment means after the specific state is set;
a first effect execution means capable of executing an effect including at least a predetermined effect mode as a predetermined effect for indicating a judgment result of the judgment means, based on the fact that the number of judgments of the judgment means after the specific state that can continue until the judgment of the specific number is set is a number that is greater than a predetermined number less than the specific number and the judgment of the judgment means is executed within a range of the number of times that is equal to or less than the specific number;
and a second performance execution means for executing a performance that does not include the predetermined performance mode as the predetermined performance, based on the fact that the number of judgments of the judgment means after a specific state that can continue until the judgment of the specific number of times is set is within a range of the predetermined number of times or less.
The number of judgments of the judgment means after the specific state that can continue until the judgment of the specific number is executed is set, the expected value at which the advantageous game is executed and the specific state is set is different depending on whether the number of judgments of the judgment means is within a range of the number of judgments equal to or less than the predetermined number or within a range of the number of judgments that is greater than the predetermined number and equal to or less than the specific number,
The gaming machine includes:
having an operable operating means,
a configuration in which, when a first event occurs during a predetermined period that can be set before the advantageous game is executed, and a second event that is different from the first event occurs after the first event occurs, if a specific condition that can be established by performing a specific operation on the operating means is established, the advantageous game corresponding to the predetermined period will not be executed;
The predetermined performance including at least a specific performance mode that allows a player to grasp the expectation that the advantageous game will be executed and the specific state will be set based on the judgment of the judgment means being executed in the specific state,
the number of judgments of the judgment means after a specific state that can continue until the specific number of judgments is executed is set is within a range of a number equal to or less than the predetermined number, and a number greater than the predetermined number and equal to or less than the specific number, and a specific display corresponding to the number of judgments of the judgment means after the specific state is set is displayed;
The predetermined presentation mode is a presentation mode different from the specific display .

Images